Proline Radios

7l_ed_Yi 9ecckd_YWj_edi
9ebb_di
Pro Line II
Comm/Nav/Pulse System
installation manual Part A
ADF-462/ANT-462
ADF-60
ALT-50/55
BIA-32
CAD-31
CAD-62
CAD-870
CAD-870G
CTL-X2/X2A/23
DDA-42
DME-42/442/IND-42( )
GPS-4000
Collins General Aviation Division

April 11, 1997
TO: HOLDERS OF PRO LINE II COMM/NAV/PULSE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL

(523-0072719)
SEVENTH EDITION HIGHLIGHTS
This new edition of the Pro Line II Comm/Nav/Pulse System Installation Manual completely replaces the previous
issue. Revised areas are identified with black bars in the margin.
This new edition corrects various minor errors and adds coverage of the following:
RTU-42X0, CPN 822-0668-XXX, 822-0836-XXX, 822-0730-XXX, 822-0923-XXX

AIU-4000, CPN 822-0271-001
GPS-4000, CPN 822-0931-001, -002
CAD-31, CPN 622-8332-002
CAD-62, CPN 622-6590-002
BDI-36, CPN 622-3702-020, -021
BIA-32, CPN 622-8613-002
Changes made by this revision also include:
1. Changes to various illustrations and text to reflect current preferred coax cable type for new
installations.
2. Consolidation of diagnostic code listings from individual installation sections to the maintenance
section.
3. Incorporation of temporary revisions since the last edition.
4. Implementation of recommended solutions, where applicable, to problems addressed by Avionics
Service Center Activity Reports (ASCARs).
Retain this letter of transmittal for future reference.
PUBLICATIONS DEPARTMENT
1/2
æ 523 - 0772719 - 00711A
7th Edition, 11 April 1997
9ebb_di
Pro Line II
installation manual Part A
Part A of this installation manual includes: Part B of this installation manual includes:
General Information 523-0772720 Installation (Continued) 523-0772439
Installation 523-0772439
Equipment covered Part B Installation:
Equipment covered Part A Installation: MND-640 Multisensor Navigation Display
General System and Mount Information System
ADF-462 ADF Receiver and RAC-870 Radio Altimeter Converter
ANT-462( ) ADF Antenna RMI/BDI-36 Radio Magnetic Indicator
ADF-60 Automatic Direction Finding System RTU-870A/870T Radio Tuning Unit
ALT-50/55 Radio Altimeter Systems RTU-42X0 Radio Tuning Unit and
BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter AIU-4000 Audio Interface Unit
CAD-31 Control Adapter TDR-90 Transponder
CAD-62 Control Adapter TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder System
CAD-870 Transponder Control Adapter VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) VHF Comm Transceiver
CAD-870G Transponder Control Adapter VIR-32/33/432/433 Navigation Receiver
CTL-X2/X2A/23 Controls Systems
DDA-42 Distance Data Adapter
DME-42/442 DME Transceiver and Operation 523-0772721
IND-42( ) DME Indicator Maintenance 523-0772450
GPS-4000 Global Positioning Sensor Appendix 523-0773276

Rockwell Collins, Inc.
Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52498
Printed in the United States of America
© 1997 Rockwell Collins, Inc.
PRO L I NE I I I M APR 1 1 / 9 7
WARNING
INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS
This document may contain information subject to the International Traffic in Arms
Regulation (ITAR) or the Export Administration Regulation (EAR) of 1979 which may
not be exported, released, or disclosed to foreign nationals inside or outside of the
United States without first obtaining an export license. A violation of the ITAR or EAR
may be subject to a penalty of up to 10 years imprisonment and a fine of up to
$1,000,000 under 22 U.S.C.2778 of the Arms Export Control Act of 1976 or section
2410 of the Export Administration Act of 1979. Include this notice with any repro-
duced portion of this document.
CAUTION
The material in this publication is subject to change. Before attempting any

maintenance operation on the equipment covered in this publication, verify that
you have complete and up-to-date publications by referring to the applicable
Publications and Service Bulletin Indexes.
SOFTWARE COPYRIGHT NOTICE
All software resident in this equipment is protected by copyright.
We welcome your comments concerning this publication. Although every effort

has been made to keep it free of errors, some may occur. When reporting a
specific problem, please describe it briefly and include the publication part num-
ber, the paragraph or figure number, and the page number.
Send your comments to: Publications Department MS 106-124
or by Internet E-Mail to:
GENAVPUB@COLLINS.ROCKWELL.COM
GENERAL ADVISORIES FOR ALL UNITS
Warning
Service personnel are to obey standard safety precautions, such as wearing safety glasses, to prevent
personal injury while installing or doing maintenance on this unit.
Warning
Use care when using sealants, solvents, and other chemical compounds. Do not expose to excessive heat or
open flame. Use only with adequate ventilation. Avoid prolonged breathing of vapors and avoid prolonged
contact with skin. Observe all cautions and warnings given by the manufacturer.
Warning
Remove all power to the unit before disassembling it. Disassembling the unit with power connected is
dangerous to life and may cause voltage transients that can damage the unit.
Warning
This unit may have components that contain materials (such as beryllium oxide, acids, lithium, radioactive
material, mercury, etc) that can be hazardous to your health. If the component enclosure is broken, handle
the component in accordance with OSHA requirements 29cfr 1910.1000 or superseding documents to prevent
personal contact with or inhalation of hazardous materials. Since it is virtually impossible to determine
which components do or do not contain such hazardous materials, do not open or disassemble components for
any reason.
Warning
This unit exhibits a high degree of functional reliability. Nevertheless, users must know that it is not
practical to monitor for all conceivable system failures and, however unlikely, it is possible that erroneous
operation could occur without a fault indication. The pilot has the responsibility to find such an occurrence
by means of cross-checks with redundant or correlated data available in the cockpit.
Caution
Turn off power before disconnecting any unit from wiring. Disconnecting the unit without turning power off
may cause voltage transients that can damage the unit.
Caution
This unit contains electrostatic discharge sensitive (ESDS) components and ESDS assemblies that can be
damaged by static voltages. Although most ESDS components contain internal protection circuits, good
procedures dictate careful handling of all ESDS components and ESDS assemblies.
Obey the precautions given below when moving, touching, or repairing all ESDS components and units
containing ESDS components.
a. Deenergize or remove all power, signal sources, and loads used with the unit.
b. Place the unit on a work surface that can conduct electricity (is grounded).
i
GENERAL ADVISORIES FOR ALL UNITS (CONT)
c. Ground the repair operator through a conductive wrist strap or other device using a 470-kΩ or 1-MΩ
series resistor to prevent operator injury.
d. Ground any tools (and soldering equipment) that will contact the unit. Contact with the operator's hand
is a sufficient ground for hand tools that are electrically isolated.
e. All ESDS replacement components are shipped in conductive foam or tubes and must be stored in their
shipping containers until installed.
f. ESDS devices and assemblies, that are removed from a unit, must immediately be put on the conductive
work surface or in conductive containers.
g. Place repaired or disconnected circuit cards in aluminum foil or in plastic bags that have a layer of, or
are made with, conductive material.
h. Do not touch ESDS devices/assemblies or remove them from their containers until they are needed.
Failure to handle ESDS devices as described above can permanently damage them. This damage can cause
immediate or premature device failure.
ii
PRO LINE II installation manual (Part B) 523-0772719
RECORD OF ADDENDUMS FOR PART B
INSERTION
SECTION ED/REV DATE ADDENDUM DATE
DATE/BY
Installation 7/0 11 Apr 97 None

MND-640 Multisensor 3/0 11 Apr 97 None
Navigation Display System
RAC-870 Radio Altimeter 6/0 11 Apr 97 None
Converter
RMI-36 Radio Magnetic 7/0 11 Apr 97 None
Indicator & BDI-36 Bearing
Distance Indicator
RTU-870A/870T Radio Tuning 2/1 15 Sep 95 None
Unit
RTU-42X0 Radio Tuning Unit 3/0 11 Apr 97 17 21 Dec 98
and AIU-4000 Audio Interface 22 (superseded) 3 Feb 99
Unit 26 (superseded) 28 Apr 99
32 1 Sep 99
33 22 Oct 99
36 27 Jan 00
TDR-90 Transponder 10/0 11 Apr 97 None
TDR-94/94D Mode S 8/0 11 Apr 97 1 6 Jun 97
Transponder 7 20 Oct 97
27 16 Jul 99
40 23 Mar 00
42 15 Aug 00
VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) VHF 7/0 11 Apr 97 10 29 Oct 97
Comm Transceiver 13 11 Feb 98
15 12 Feb 98
21 18 Jan 99
23 (superseded) 9 Feb 99
28 (superseded) 16 Jul 99
31 24 Aug 99
37 3 Feb 00
39 23 Feb 00
VIR-32/33/432/433 Navigation 7/0 11 Apr 97 38 4 Feb 00
Receiver
Operation 7/0 11 Apr 97 24 (superseded) 9 Feb 99
29 16 Jul 99
Maintenance 7/0 11 Apr 97 None
Appendix 4/1 15 Sep 95 None
NOTE: Addendum sheets should not be removed from a manual unless otherwise specified.
Addendum information will be incorporated in the next edition of the manual.
Addendum 42
15 Aug 2000 iii
523-0772719-0j711A (Follows Advisories page)
þ 523-0772720-009118
RWAvionics & Communications

Collins
Pro Line II
General Information
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page
1.1 INTRODUCTION.....................................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 Pro Line II Equipment ...................................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1.2 Pro Line II/4XX Equipment ...........................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1.2.1 ARINC 429 Burst Tuning............................................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 PURPOSE OF EQUIPMENT ..................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2.1 ADF-462 Automatic Direction Finding System ............................................................................................................1-2
1.2.2 ADF-60( ) Automatic Direction Finding System ...........................................................................................................1-2
1.2.3 ALT-50/55 Radio Altimeter System...............................................................................................................................1-2
1.2.4 BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter.................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2.5 CAD-31/62 Control Adapters .........................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2.6 CAD-870/870G Transponder Control Adapters ............................................................................................................1-3
1.2.7 CTL-X2/X2A/23 Controls................................................................................................................................................1-3
1.2.8 DDA-42 Distance Data Adapter.....................................................................................................................................1-3
1.2.9 DME-42/442 DME Receiver-Transmitter and IND-42A/42C DME Indicator .............................................................1-3
1.2.10 GPS-4000 Global Positioning Sensor...........................................................................................................................1-3
1.2.11 MND-640 Multisensor Navigation Display System....................................................................................................1-3
1.2.12 RAC-870 Radio Altimeter Converter ...........................................................................................................................1-3
1.2.13 RMI-36/BDI-36 Radio Magnetic Indicator ..................................................................................................................1-4
1.2.14 RTU-870A/870T Radio Tuning Unit ............................................................................................................................1-4
1.2.15 RTU-42X0 Radio Tuning Unit and AIU-4000 Audio Interface Unit..........................................................................1-4
1.2.16 TDR-90 Transponder ....................................................................................................................................................1-4
1.2.17 TDR-94( ) Transponder.................................................................................................................................................1-4
1.2.18 VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) VHF Comm Transceiver...........................................................................................................1-4
1.2.19 VIR-32/33/432/433 Navigation Receiver......................................................................................................................1-5
NOTICE: This section replaces eighth edition dated 15 September 1995.

List of Effective Pages *The asterisk indicates pages changed, added, or deleted by the current change.
Page No Issue
* Title ...........................................11 Apr 97

* List of Effective Pages ..............11 Apr 97
* 1-1 thru 1-97 .............................11 Apr 97
* 1-98 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 1-99 thru 1-106 Deleted ............11 Apr 97
RETAIN THIS RECORD IN THE FRONT OF THE MANUAL. ON RECEIPT OF

Record of Revisions REVISIONS, INSERT REVISED PAGES IN THE MANUAL, AND ENTER DATE
INSERTED AND INITIALS.
REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER

NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED
1st Ed 16 Nov 83 None
2nd Ed 2 May 84 None
3rd Ed 5 Mar 86 None
4th Ed 21 Jul 89 None
5th Ed 2 Dec 91 None
6th Ed 29 Sep 92 None
7th Ed 12 May 94 None
9th Ed 11 Apr 97 None

section I
general information
1.1 INTRODUCTION 1.1.2 Pro Line II/4XX Equipment
This installation manual provides all the specifica- The Pro Line II/4XX digital radios are CSDB and
tions, installation instructions, operating proce- ARINC 429 (continuous and burst) format units.
dures, and information necessary for on-aircraft The -4XX radios can be controlled by CSDB or
maintenance on the Collins Pro Line II Comm/ ARINC 429 controls. The outputs are CSDB and
Nav/Pulse and Collins Pro Line II-4XX Comm/Nav/ ARINC 429 formats and can (with the use of
Pulse Avionics equipment. This manual has been adapter units) be used in some analog applications.
divided into two parts. Part A contains specifica-
tions on all the units covered in both parts and in- 1.1.2.1 ARINC 429 Burst Tuning
stallation sections on the ADF-462, ADF-60, ALT-
ARINC 429 burst tuning is used when it is desired
50/55, BIA-32, CAD-31/62, CAD-870/870G, CTL-
to tune the radio from multiple sources without
22/23/32/62/92, DDA-42, DME-42/442, IND-
having to select the desired source with a manual
42A/42C, and GPS-4000. Part B contains the in-
switch as required with continuous ARINC 429
stallation sections on the MND-640, RAC-870,
tuning. This configuration was designed so that
RMI/BDI-36, RTU-870A/870T, RTU-42X0, AIU-
multiple radio tuning systems and a manual control
4000, TDR-90, TDR-94/94D, VHF-21( )/22( )/
head could have access to the radio. Burst tuning is
422( ), and VIR-32/33/432/433, also the operation,
a series of control words sent to the radio for ap-
maintenance, and appendix sections.
proximately 1.5 seconds and is used so that all in-
put ports can be used (one port at a time) without
Refer to Table 1-1 for a list of all Comm/Nav/Pulse
having to manually select them. The last valid fre-
equipment covered in this manual. Table 1-2
quency word received by the radio is the one used
through Table 1-44 give the equipment specifica-
for tuning.
tions for the various equipment included in this
group. The equipment specifications for GPS-4000
and RTU-42XO/AIU-4000 are listed in the respec-
tive installation sections of this manual. The table
of contents of each section provides a quick refer-
ence to a specific equipment type. Table 1-45 gives
a listing of other items that are needed to have a
complete operational system. Table 1-46 is a list of
related publications. These contain shop repair in-
formation. Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 are a view of
the Pro Line II and Pro Line II/4XX equipment cov-
ered in this installation manual.
1.1.1 Pro Line II Equipment
The Pro Line II digital radios are analog and CSDB

format units. They can be controlled by 2-out-of-5 Figure 1-1. Pro Line II, Comm/Nav/Pulse Equipment,
Overall View
or CSDB controls.
Revised 11 April 1997 1-1

general information 523-0772720
Figure 1-2. Pro Line II/4XX Series, Comm/Nav/Pulse Equipment, Overall View
Note 1.2.3 ALT-50/55 Radio Altimeter System
If a radio does not tune to the frequency The ALT-50/55 Radio Altimeter System provides
commanded by the source, an automatic re- the pilot with an altitude indication during the ap-
burst shall not be made. This is to prevent proach phase of the flight. The ALT-55 is compati-
two tuning sources from fighting for the ble with ground proximity warning systems.
same radio. Any contention must be re-
solved by the operator. 1.2.4 BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter
While in the burst thing mode, if port B receives The BIA-32 converts serial digital bearing data into
ARINC 429 continuous data, information supplied analog signals for an ac bearing indicator (RMI-30,
to ports A and C is ignored. RMI-36, BDI-36 or equivalent). The following list
provides a brief description of the different BIA-32
1.2 PURPOSE OF EQUIPMENT
conversions:
1.2.1 ADF-462 Automatic Direction Finding
a. ADF serial digital data (ARINC 429 or CSDB)
System
into 3-wire synchro signals for an ac bearing
indicator.
The ADF-462 adf receiver provides relative bearing b. VOR serial digital data (ARINC 429 or CSDB)
between the aircraft and the selected ground sta- into VOR sin θ cos θ signals for an ac bearing
tion. The ADF-462 also provides an output to the indicator.
aircraft audio system for verifying the station iden- c. VOR serial digital data (ARINC 429 or CSDB)
tifier and for AM broadcast reception. The ADF-462 and compass information (CSDB, ARINC 429,
uses an ANT-462A ADF antenna (single system) or or 3-wire synchro) into 3-wire synchro signals
an ANT-462B ADF antenna (dual system). for an ac bearing indicator.
1.2.2 ADF-60( ) Automatic Direction Finding 1.2.5 CAD-31/62 Control Adapters
System
The CAD-31 Control Adapter converts CSDB serial
The ADF-60( ) automatic direction finding system data into 2-out-of-5 parallel data. The use of the
provides relative bearing between the aircraft and CAD-31 is to adapt a CTL-22 VHF control or CTL-
the selected ground station. The ADF-60( ) also pro- 32 VIR control for use with a unit requiring only 2-
vides an output to the aircraft audio system for veri- out-of-5 parallel data. Example: a CTL-22 VHF con-
fying the station identifier and for AM reception. The trol used with VHF-20 Comm.
ADF-60( ) uses an ANT-62( ) ADF antenna.

ADDENDUM 8
TO
COLLINS COMM/NAV/PULSE SYSTEM PRO LINE II

INSTALLATION MANUAL
PART NUMBER 523-0772719-00711A, 7TH EDITION, DATED 10 APRIL 1997
Insert this addendum sheet facing page 1-3 of the

general information section (523-0772720-009118) in Part A of this manual.
This addendum sheet revises paragraph 1.2.7 to include description for CTL-22C equipment type. Replace
paragraph 1.2.7 with text below.
1.2.7 CTL-X2/X2A/22C/23 Controls
The CTL-X2/X2A/22C/23 controls are electronic digital controls that provide tuning and control of the Collins Pro
Line II radios using CSDB digital data.
Addendum 8
23 Oct 1997 Sheet 1 of 9
523-0772719-08711A (Facing Page 1-3)
ADDENDUM 19
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds CTL-22C and CTL-23C information to paragraph 1.2.7.
1.2.7 CTL-X2/X2A/22C/23/23C
The CTL-22C and CTL-23C controls offer a strap-selectable option for providing COMM tuning in
8.33-kHz increments from 118.000 to 136.992 MHz.
Addendum 19
11 Jan 1999 Sheet 1 of 9
523-0772719-0K711A (Facing Page 1-3)
The CAD-62 Control Adapter converts CSDB serial rate and time-to-station (TTS), and provides a de-
data received from a CTL-62 ADF control or a CTL- coded station identifier. The DME-42 may be in-
92 Transponder control to the 2-out-of-5 parallel stalled as a direct replacement for the DME-40.
data format required by the Pro Line I ADF-60( )
ADF or TDR-90 transponder respectively. The DME-42 is a 3-channel (max) unit designed for
new installations or for retrofit. For 3-channel op-
The -002 statuses of the CAD-31/62 provide a strap eration, the DME-42 requires tuning information
selectable option to choose an RTU-42X0 Radio- from two CTL-32 controls. The IND-42A indicator
Tuning Unit as the control source instead of a CTL- is used in single DME/dual-control installations to
X2 for CSDB serial data. display the distance and other data from either of
the three channels. The IND-42C is used in multi-
1.2.6 CAD-870/870G Transponder Control DME installations where the multichannel capa-
Adapters bility of a single transceiver is not needed or in sin-
gle DME/dual-indicator/dual-control installations
The CAD-870( ) Transponder Control Adapter con- where each indicator can display the on-side tuned
verts ATC code and altitude data from an ARINC DME channel.
429 serial control into the parallel octal data format
required by the TDR-90 transponder. The DME-442 distance measuring equipment pro-
vides distance/TTS outputs the same as the DME-
The CAD-870G Transponder Control Adapter con- 42 with the exception as follows: The DME-442 in-
verts ATC code from one of three ARINC 429 serial terfaces with ARINC 429 and CSDB installations.
sources and altitude data from one of two ARINC The DME-42 interfaces with analog and CSDB in-
429 serial sources into the parallel octal data for- stallations.
mat required by the TDR-90 transponder.
1.2.10 GPS-4000 Global Positioning Sensor
1.2.7 CTL-X2/X2A/23 Controls
The GPS-4000 provides precise position, velocity,
The CTL-X2/X2A/23 controls are electronic digital and time measurements for en route, terminal and
controls that provide tuning and control of the Col- non-precision approaches conforming with ARINC
lins Pro Line II radios using CSDB digital data. 743A. The position, velocity, and time determina-
tions are computed by the GPS-4000 based on sat-
1.2.8 DDA-42 Distance Data Adapter ellite signals provided by the Global Positioning
System (GPS) satellite constellation. The GPS-4000
The DDA-42 Distance Data Adapter is used to con- (-002 status) may be used as a primary means of
vert the CSDB distance data from one of the chan- navigation for oceanic/remote operations.
nels on the DME-42 into the following three dis-
tance data formats: 1.2.11 MND-640 Multisensor Navigation
Display System
a. ARINC 568 32-bit, 6-wire distance data
b. 40-mV-per-nautical mile distance data The MND-640 Multisensor Navigation Display Sys-
c. Pulse-pair distance data tem is an all-digital, 4-inch ARINC 429 compatible
system to replace present mechanical RMI’s. The
(The channel is selected by straps on the DDA-42.) MND-640 uses a 3 x 3 inch high resolution, high
contrast, monochromatic cathode ray tube to dis-
1.2.9 DME-42/442 DME Receiver-Transmitter play compass and bearing pointers in familiar HSI
and IND-42A/42C DME Indicator and RMI formats.
The DME-42 transceiver is a remote-mounted, 1.2.12 RAC-870 Radio Altimeter Converter

lightweight unit specifically designed for general
aviation aircraft. It measures the slant range (line- The RAC-870 Radio Altimeter Converter converts
of-sight) distance from the aircraft to a ground sta- analog altitude data from the ALT-55B Radio Al-
tion and displays that distance in nautical miles on timeter into an ARINC 429 serial format.
the companion IND-42A/42C indicator or HSI. In
addition, the system computes the relative closure

1.2.13 RMI-36/BDI-36 Radio Magnetic controller’s plan position indicator (PPI). The TDR-
Indicator 90 is interrogated by radar pulses from the ground
station and automatically replies with a series of
The RMI-36 Radio Magnetic Indicator and BDI-36 pulses. Reply pulses are coded to supply identifica-
Bearing Distance Indicator provide aircraft heading tion and, when equipped with an altitude digitizer,
information on a calibrated servo-driven compass automatic altitude reporting.
card read against a fixed lubber line. Bearing to ei-
ther ADF or VOR stations is provided by two point- 1.2.17 TDR-94( ) Transponder
ers, each of which is read against the compass card.
In addition, the BDI-36 has dual distance displays The TDR-94/94D is an integral part of the Air Traf-
to indicate distance to two independent stations. fic Control Radar Beacon System. In mode A, the
TDR-94/94D provides identification of the trans-
1.2.14 RTU-870A/870T Radio Tuning Unit ponder-equipped aircraft on the ground controller’s
plan position indicator (PPI). If the aircraft is
The RTU-870A/870T Radio Tuning Unit is a panel- equipped with a compatible altitude encoder, it can
mounted controller that provides centralized con- operate in mode C and provide altitude data along
trol and display of frequency/code and operating with the mode A information. The TDR-94/94D is
modes used by the Collins Pro Line II/4XX series designed to also operate in mode S. In mode S, each
VHF comm, VHF nav, ADF, and ATC transponder aircraft is assigned a unique identification code
radios. The RTU-870A is designed to be installed in which allows automatic and unique interrogation
pairs, with each RTU of the pair being capable of and display of a specific aircraft. The aircraft iden-
controlling two complete sets of COMM, NAV, ADF, tification is assigned at installation and is based on
and ATC radios if the other should fail. The RTU- the aircraft identification number. In addition, the
870T has additional rear connector straps for se- TDR-94/94D can receive and send mode-S message
lecting TACAN, UHF, TCAS on board, and TCAS formats that are required for ATC automation. The
threat traffic. added data link capability allows the transponder
to perform additional air traffic control and aircraft
1.2.15 RTU-42X0 Radio Tuning Unit and AIU- separation assurance (ASA) functions.
4000 Audio Interface Unit
1.2.18 VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) VHF Comm
The RTU-42X0 provides centralized control and Transceiver
display of aircraft communication and navigation
radio subsystems via ARINC 429 or CSDB serial The VHF-21( )/22( ) transceivers are remote-
bus. Standard features include tuning capability for mounted, multichannel vhf voice transceivers pro-
dual COM, NAV, DME, XPDR, and ADF radios; viding AM voice communications in the frequency
single TCAS tuning; FMS interface via ARINC 429 range from 118.000 through 135.975, 136.975 or
and CSDB serial bus; and an ON/OFF control for 151.975 MHz (see Table 1-1) in 25-kHz increments.
switching RTU power. The major difference between the VHF-21( ) and
VHF-22( ) is the type of electrical connector. The
The AIU-4000 Audio Interface Unit works with the VHF-21( ) is intended for direct replacement of a
RTU-4020 Radio Tuning Unit to control the volume VHF-20( ) while the VHF-22( ) is intended for new
of up to 12 radios. The gain of each channel is con- installations. The A and B suffix on the equipment
trolled by ARINC 429 data sent from the RTU to type number identifies the frequency range of each
the AIU. The AIU-4000 has two ARINC 429 inputs transceiver as indicated in Table 1-1. The last three
and can receive the control data in either normal or digits of the equipment part number define the
burst tuning formats. All audio channel amplifiers bandwidth of the receiver circuits. The -0X1 part
are completely bypassed when primary power is numbers have a narrow bandwidth and are in-
removed. tended for operation in areas using 25-kHz channel
spacing with or without offset carriers. The -0X2
1.2.16 TDR-90 Transponder part numbers have a wider bandwidth and will op-
erate satisfactorily in areas where the received car-
The TDR-90 functions within the Air Traffic Con- rier frequency varies as much as 13 kHz from
trol Radar Beacon System. It provides identification nominal.
of a transponder-equipped aircraft on the ground

ADDENDUM 19
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds RTU-870C information to paragraph 1.2.14.
1.2.14 RTU-870A/RTU-870C/870T
The RTU-870C is similar to the RTU-870T except provides COMM tuning in 8.33-kHz increments
from 118.000 to 136.992 MHz.
Addendum 19
523-0772719-0K711A (Facing Page 1-4)
ADDENDUM 8
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet revises paragraph 1.2.18 to add descriptions for VHF-21/22/422 (C/D) equipment types.
Replace paragraph 1.2.18 with text below.
1.2.18 VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) VHF Comm Transceiver
The VHF-21( )/22( ) transceivers are remote-mounted, multichannel vhf voice transceivers providing AM voice
communications. The VHF-21/22(A/B) transceivers operate in the frequency range from 118.000 through 135.975,
136.975, or 151.975 MHz in 25-kHz increments. The VHF-21/22 (C/D) transceivers operate in the frequency
range from 118.000 through 136.975 MHz in either 8.33- or 25-kHz increments and from 137.000 through 151.975
MHz in 25-kHz increments (refer to Table 1-1). CSDB tuning is required to utilize the 8.33-kHz channels. The
major difference between the VHF-21( ) and VHF-22( ) is the type of electrical connector. The VHF-21( ) is
intended for direct replacement of a VHF-20( ) while the VHF-22( ) is intended for new installations.
The VHF-422( ) transceiver is a remote-mounted, multichannel vhf voice transceiver providing AM voice
communications. The VHF-422(A/B) transceivers operate in the frequency range from 118.000 through 136.975 or
151.975 MHz in 25-kHz increments. The VHF-422(C/D) transceivers operate in the frequency range from 118.000
through 136.975 MHz in either 8.33- or 25-kHz increments and from 137.000 through 151.975 MHz in 25-kHz
increments (refer to Table 1-1). The VHF-422( ) can be controlled from a CSDB or ARINC 429 control head.
The A, B, C, or D suffix on the equipment type number identifies the frequency range of each transceiver as
indicated in Table 1-1. The last three digits of the equipment part number define the bandwidth of the receiver
circuits. The -XX1 part numbers have a narrow bandwidth the -XX2 part numbers have a wider bandwidth.
VHF-422( ) part numbers ending in -00X are keyed specifically for the Beech Starship. VHF-422( ) part numbers
ending in -10X are keyed for other aircraft.
Addendum 8
523-0772719-08711A (Facing Page 1-4)
The VHF-422( ) transceiver is a remote-mounted, replacement for the Collins VIR-30A Navigation
multichannel vhf voice transceiver providing AM Receiver.
voice communications. The frequency range for the
VHF-422A is from 118.000 through 136.975 MHz in Microprocessor technology allows a variety of inter-
25-kHz increments. The frequency range for the face and installation options as well as full-time
VHF-422B is 118.000 to 151.975 MHz in 25-kHz in- monitoring and self-diagnostic capabilities.
crements. The VHF-422( ) can be controlled from a
CSDB or ARINC 429 control head. The VIR-432/433 Navigation Receiver is a VOR/
LOC, glideslope (GS), and marker beacon (MB) re-
1.2.19 VIR-32/33/432/433 Navigation Receiver ceiver featuring digital instrumentation. Nav in-
formation is supplied from two CSDB and two
The VIR-32/33 Navigation Receiver is a VOR/LOC, ARINC 429 ports. Marker beacon audio, marker
glideslope (GS), and marker beacon (MB) receiver beacon lamp, and VOR/LOC audio outputs are also
featuring digital instrumentation. The unit pro- provided.
vides serial-digital I/O interface and features a digi-
tal signal processing technique for improved per- The VIR-32/33 and VIR-432/433 have mount pro-
formance. The unit also accepts conventional 2-out- grammable options for rotor modulation filtering,
of-5 tuning and provides conventional sine/cosine up/left or down/right self-test response, and con-
outputs. The VIR-32 may be installed as a direct tinuous/burst tune select.

Table 1-1. Equipment Covered.
EQUIPMENT PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
ADF EQUIPMENT
ADF-462 622-7382-101 ADF Receiver. Control is by either CSDB or 429-based serial digital bus. Bearing outputs are
622-7382-001 provided in CSDB, 429, and dc sine/cosine. Frequency coverage is 190 to 1799.5 kHz and
622-7382-111 2179 to 2185 kHz. The -111 status tunes an additional frequency range of 2088 to 2094 kHz.
ADF-60A 622-2362-001 ADF Receiver. Control is by either parallel tuning or CSDB when used with a CAD-62 and
CTL-62. Bearing outputs are 3-wire synchro and dc sine/cosine. Frequency coverage is 190 to
1749.5 kHz.
ADF-60B 622-2873-001 ADF Receiver. Control is by either parallel tuning or CSDB when used with a CAD-62 and
CTL-62. Bearing outputs only dc sine/cosine. Frequency coverage is 190 to 1749.5 kHz.
ANT-462A 622-7383-001 Single ADF antenna used with ADF-462 system
ANT-462B 622-7384-001 Dual ADF antenna used with ADF-462 system
ANT-60A 622-2363-001 Single ADF antenna used with ADF-60( )
ANT 60A 622-2363-002 Same as -001 with antenna connector in different location
ANT 60A 622-2363-011 Same as -001 but antenna is black
ANT-60B 622-3710-001 Dual ADF antenna used with ADF-60( )
CAD 62 622-6590-001 Control Adapter, converts CSDB data from a CTL-62 into analog data usable by an
ADF-60( ).
CAD-62 622-6590-002 Same as -001 except provides strap selectable option to choose an RTU-42X0 as the control
source for CSDB serial data.
RADIO ALTIMETER EQUIPMENT
ALT-50A 622-3201-001 Radio altimeter (receiver-transmitter), –20 to +2000-ft altitude range, with four altitude trim
outputs that may be shop adjusted.
ALT-50A 622-3201-002 Radio altimeter (receiver-transmitter), –20 to +2000-ft altitude range, with four fixed altitude
trip outputs (not adjustable).
ALT-55B 622-2855-001 Radio altimeter (receiver-transmitter), –20 to +2500-ft altitude range, with four altitude trip
outputs that may be shop adjusted.
ALT-55B 622-2855-002 Radio altimeter (receiver-transmitter), –20 to +2500-ft altitude range, with four fixed altitude
trip outputs (not adjustable).
RAC-870 622-7209-001 Radio altimeter converter, converts analog altitude data from an ALT-55B Radio Altimeter
into ARINC 429 format. (No longer in production)
RAC-870 622-7209-002 Radio altimeter converter, converts analog altitude data from an ALT-55B Radio Altimeter
into ARINC 429 format.
339H-4 622-1204-0XX Radio altimeter indicator (refer to Table 1-2 for a description of each status).
339H-4A 622-1205-00X Radio altimeter indicator (refer to Table 1-2 or a description of each status).
ALI-55 622-2937-00X Radio altimeter indicator (refer to Table 1-3 for a description of each status).
ALI-55A 622-2938-00X Radio altimeter indicator (refer to Table 1-3 for a description of each status).
ALI-55B 622-5367-00X Radio altimeter indicator (refer to Table 1-3 for a description of each status).
DRI-55 622-4160-0XX Digital radio altitude indicator (refer to Table 1-4 for a description of each status).
437X-1 522-4140-00X Radio altimeter antenna (refer to Table 1-5 for a description of each status).
437X-1A 522-4255-00X Radio altimeter antenna (refer to Table 1-5 for a description of each status).
437X-1B 522-0954-00X Radio altimeter antenna (refer to Table 1-5for a description of each status).
ANT-50A 622-3698-001 Radio altimeter antenna (refer to Table 1-5 for a description).

ADDENDUM 8
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds CTL-22C description information to the CONTROLS section of Table 1-1.
P/O Table 1-1. Equipment Covered.

CONTROLS
CTL-22C 822-1120-XXX CSDB Comm Control (refer to Table 1-6 for a description of each status). Provides
tuning for units with either 8.33- or 25- kHz channel spacing between 118.000 and
136.975 MHz and 25-kHz channel spacing between 137.000 and 151.975 MHz.
Addendum 8
523-0772719-08711A (Facing Page 1-7)
ADDENDUM 19
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds CTL-23C and RTU-870C descriptions to the CONTROLS section of Table 1-1.
CONTROLS
CTL-23C 822-1121-00X Similar to the CTL-23 except provides a strap-selectable option to

provide COMM tuning in 8.33-kHz increments.
RTU-870C 822-1123-1XX Similar to the RTU-870T except provides COMM tuning in 8.33-kHz
increments.
Addendum 19
523-0772719-0K711A (Facing Page 1-7)
RADIO ALTIMETER EQUIPMENT (Cont)
ANT-51A 622-4550-001 Radio altimeter antenna (refer to Table 1-5 for a description).
ANT-52 622-6793-001 Radio altimeter antenna (refer to Table 1-5 for a description).
BEARING ADAPTER
BIA-32 622-8613-001 The BIA-32 converts serial digital bearing data into analog signals for an ac bearing indica-
tor.
BIA-32 622-8613-002 Same as -001 except allows BIA-32 to park RMI bearing pointer.
CONTROLS
CTL-22 622-6520-XXX CSDB Comm Control (refer to Table 1-6 for a description of each status).
CTL-22A 622-8737-XXX
CTL-23 622-9851-00X Control for CSDB Comm/Nav radios (refer to Table 1-7 for a description of each status).
CTL-32 622-6521-XXX CSDB NAV/DME Control (refer to Table 1-8 for a description of each status).
CTL-32A 622-8738-XXX
CTL-62 622-6522-XXX CSDB ADF Control (refer to Table 1-9 for a description of each status).
CTL-62A 622-8739-XXX
CTL-92 622-6523-XXX CSDB Transponder Control (refer to Table 1-10 for a description of each status).
CTL-92A 622-8740-XXX
RTU-870A 622-9346-0XX Radio Tuning Unit, gives centralized control and display of the frequency/ATC code and
modes of the -4XX series of Collins General Aviation Pro Line II radios (refer to Table 1-11
for a description of each status).
RTU-870T 622-9856-0XX Radio Tuning Unit, same as RTU-870A except it has additional rear connector straps for
TCAS, TACAN, UHF, and TCAS threat traffic.
RTU-42X0 822-0668-XXX Radio Tuning Unit. Provides integrated control of aircraft communications and navigation
822-0836-XXX radio subsystems. Refer to the RTU-42X0 installation section of this manual for description
of each status.
AIU-4000 822-0271-001 Audio Interface Unit. Works with RTU-40X0/42X0 to provide volume control of up to 12 radio
audio outputs.
CONTROL ADAPTER
CAD-31 622-8332-001 Control adapter, converts CSDB serial (CTL-22 or CTL-32) data into 2-out-of-5 parallel data,
usable by the VHF-20, VIR-30/31, DME-40, or combination of one DME-40 and one VIR-
30/31.
CAD-62 622-6590-001 Control adapter, converts CSDB serial (CTL-62 or CTL-92) data into analog data, usable by
the ADF-60 or TDR-90.

DME
DME-442 622-7309-101 Distance Measuring Equipment. Frequency control and data outputs use either ARINC 429
622-7309-001 or CSDB serial formats.
DME-42 622-6263-001 Distance Measuring Equipment. Frequency control and data outputs use analog or CSDB
622-6263-003 formats.
IND-42A 622-6524-00X DME indicator, multichannel unit. (Refer to Table 1-31 for description and refer to installa-
tion section for options/part numbers.)
IND-42C 622-7318-00X DME indicator, single-channel unit. (Refer to Table 1-31 for description.)
ANT-42 622-6591-001 L-band antenna for use with transponder or DME
237Z-1 522-2632-001 Alternate L-band antenna for use with transponder or DME
RMI
SDU-640A 622-8336-001 Sensor display unit; available with +28 V dc lighting. Replaces the conventional electrome-
chanical RMI and displays cross-side heading data and backup navigation information. SDU-
640A SB 2 converts brown bezel -001 to -010 status.
SDU-640A 622-8336-010 Same as CPN 622-8336-001, except the bezel is brown.
SDU-640A 622-8336-011 Same as CPN 622-8336-001, except the bezel is black.
SDU-640A 622-8336-012 Same as CPN 622-8336-001, except the bezel is gray.
SDU-640B 622-9735-001 Sensor display unit; available with +28 V dc lighting. Replaces the conventional electrome-
chanical RMI and displays cross-side heading data and backup navigation information. The
SDU-640B is similar to the SDU-640A except it has additional NAV display formats.
SDU-640B 622-9735-002 Same as CPN 622-9735-001, except the bezel is gray.
SDD-640 622-7207-001, Sensor display driver, receives inputs from the compass system and navigation radios. Pro-
-002 vides the necessary digital output signals to drive the sensor display units. SDD-640 SB 2
adds MLS capability and converts -001 to -002 status. The SDD-640 has 12 low-speed and 2
high-speed ARINC 429 bus inputs and 2 low-speed ARINC 429 bus outputs to the SDU-640A.
SDD-640A 622-9347-001 Sensor display driver; receives inputs from the compass system and navigation radios. Pro-
vides the necessary digital output signals to drive the sensor display units. The SDD-640A
has 16 low-speed and 4 high-speed ARINC 429 bus inputs. The SDD-640A outputs 2 low-
speed ARINC 429 buses to the SDU-640B and 2 low-speed ARINC 429 outputs to the RTU.
RMI-36 622-2506-XXX The RMI-36 Radio Magnetic Indicator provides aircraft heading information displayed on the
compass card. ADF or VOR bearing information is provided by two pointers (refer to Table 1-
12 for a description of each status).
BDI-36 622-3702-0XX Same as the RMI-36 with the addition of a dual distance display to indicate distance to two
independent stations (refer to Table 1-13 for a description of each status).
TRANSPONDER
TDR-90 622-1270-001 Receives and decodes Mode A and C interrogations from ground radar beacons and transmits
coded reply.
TDR 94 622-9352-002 Same as -003 except without service bulletins 6 and 10 for certain mandated upgrades.
TDR-94 622-9352-003 Receives and decodes Mode A, C, and S interrogations from ground radar beacons and
transmits coded reply; has SPI input (remote ident) and AUTO ALT SELECT strap.
TDR 94D 622-9210-002 Same as -003 except without service bulletins 6 and 10 for certain mandated upgrades.
TDR-94D 622-9210-003 Same as TDR-94 except with dual antenna capability.

ADDENDUM 2
TO
COLLINS PRO LINE II COMM/NAV/PULSE SYSTEM

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet revises IND-42( ) description information in the DME section of Table 1-1 on page 1-8 per
the table below.
DME
IND-42A 622-6524-00X DME indicator, multichannel unit. (Refer to Table 1-13A for description and options/part
numbers.)
IND-42C 622-7318-00X DME indicator, single-channel unit. (Refer to Table 1-13A for description and options/part
numbers.)
IND-42M 622-9976-00X DME indicator, multichannel unit. Displays distance in kilometers and ground speed in
kilometers per hour. (Refer to Table 1-13A for description and options/part numbers.)
Addendum 2
523-0772719-02711A (Facing Page 1-8)
TRANSPONDER (Cont)
ANT-42 622-6591-001 L-band antenna for transponder or DME

237Z-1 522-2632-001 Alternate L-band antenna for use with transponder or DME
CAD-62 622-6590-001 Control adapter, converts CSDB serial data from a CTL-92 into 2-out-of-5 parallel data us-
able by a TDR-90.
CAD 62 622-6590-002 Same as -001 except provides strap selectable option to choose an RTU-42X0 as the control
CAD-870 622-7346-001 Transponder control adapter, converts ATC code and altitude data from an ARINC 429 serial
control into the parallel octal data format required by the TDR-90 transponder.
CAD-870 622-7346-002 Same as -001 with software changes for FMS tuning (for non-Starship installations)
VHF COMM TRANSCEIVER
VHF-21A 622-6389-001 VHF Comm Transceiver, frequency range from 118.000 to 135.975 MHz. Has narrow receiver
bandwidth (selectivity). The VHF-21( ) is interchangeable with a VHF-20( ). The VHF-21( ) or
VHF-22( ) can be controlled by 2-out-of-5 or CSDB data.
VHF-21A 622-6389-002 The -002 is the same as the -001 except the receiver has a wide bandwidth (selectivity).
VHF-21A 622-6389-011 The -011 is the same as the -001 except the frequency range extends to 136.975 MHz.
VHF-21B 622-6390-001 VHF Comm Transceiver, frequency range from 118.000 to 151.975 MHz. Has narrow receiver
bandwidth (selectivity). The VHF-21( ) is interchangeable with a VHF-20( ).
VHF-21B 622-6390-002 The -002 is the same as the -001 except the receiver has a wide bandwidth (selectivity).
VHF-21C 822-1111-001 VHF Comm Transceiver, frequency range from 118.000 to 136.975 MHz in 8.33-kHz incre-
ments (25-kHz increments with 2-out-of-5 tuning). Has narrow receiver bandwidth
(selectivity). Interchangeable with existing VHF-20( ) installations.
VHF-21C 822-1111-002 The -002 is the same as the -001 except the receiver has a wide bandwidth (selectivity).
VHF-21D 822-1112-001 VHF Comm Transceiver, frequency range from 118.000 to 136.975 MHz in 8.33-kHz incre-
ments (25-kHz increments with 2-out-of-5 tuning) and 137.000 to 151.975 MHz in 25-kHz in-
crements. Has narrow receiver bandwidth (selectivity). Interchangeable with existing VHF-
20( ) installations.
VHF-21D 822-1112-002 The -002 is the same as the -001 except the receiver has a wide bandwidth (selectivity).
bandwidth (selectivity).
VHF-22A 622-6152-011 The -011 is the same as the -001 except the frequency range extends to 136.975 MHz.
VHF-22B 622-6153-002 The -002 is the same as the -001 except the receiver has a wide bandwidth (selectivity).
VHF-22C 822-1113-001 VHF Comm Transceiver, frequency range from 118.000 to 136.975 MHz in 8.33-kHz incre-
ments (25-kHz increments with 2-out-of-5 tuning). Has narrow receiver bandwidth
(selectivity).

VHF COMM TRANSCEIVER (Cont)
VHF-22C 822-1113-002 The -002 is the same as the -001 except the receiver has a wide bandwidth (selectivity).
VHF-22D 822-1114-001 VHF Comm Transceiver, frequency range from 118.000 to 136.975 MHz in 8.33-kHz incre-
ments (25-kHz increments with 2-out-of-5 tuning) and 137.000 to 151.975 MHz in 25-kHz in-
crements. Has narrow receiver bandwidth (selectivity).
VHF-22D 822-1114-002 The -002 is the same as the -001 except the receiver has a wide bandwidth (selectivity).
622-7292-001 bandwidth (selectivity). The VHF-422( ) can be controlled by CSDB or ARINC 429 data.
VHF-422A 622-7292-102 The -X02 is the same as the -X01 except the receiver has a wide bandwidth (selectivity).
622-7292-002
622-7293-001 bandwidth (selectivity).
VHF-422B 622-7293-102 The -X02 is the same as the -X01 except the receiver has a wide bandwidth (selectivity).
622-7293-002
37R-2 522-1135-012 VHF Comm antenna, pressurized BNC connector
37R-2A 522-2646-014 VHF Comm antenna, pressurized N connector
NAVIGATION RECEIVER
VIR-32 622-6137-001 Navigation Receiver (VOR/LOC/GS/MB). Input/output data in analog and CSDB format.
VIR-32 622-6137-201 Navigation Receiver, same as VIR-32 (-001 status) except it has additional immunity to inter-
ference generated from high power FM radio broadcasts.
VIR-33 822-0400-001 Navigation Receiver, same as VIR-32 (-201 status) except software is verified to DO-178A,
Level 1.
VIR-432 622-7194-101 Navigation Receiver (VOR/LOC/GS/MB). Input/output data in CSDB and ARINC 429 format.
622-7194-001
VIR-432 622-7194-011 Navigation Receiver, same as VIR-432 (-001 status) except it has additional immunity to in-
terference generated from high power FM radio broadcasts.
VIR-432 622-7194-201 Navigation Receiver, same as VIR-432 (-101 status) except it has additional immunity to in-
terference generated from high power FM radio broadcasts.
VIR-433 822-0393-001 Navigation Receiver, same as VIR-432 (-201 status) except software is verified to DO-178A,
Level 1.
837B-1 758-5703-001 VOR/LOC antenna with BNC connector
37X-2 522-0854-003 Gray marker beacon antenna
37X-2 522-0854-069 White marker beacon antenna

ADDENDUM 19
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds the following note to the VHF COMM TRANSCEIVER section of Table 1-1.
Note
VHF-422( ) part numbers ending in -00X are keyed specifically for the Beech Starship. Part numbers
ending in -10X are keyed for other aircraft.
Addendum 19
523-0772719-0K711A (Facing Page 1-10)
ADDENDUM 8
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds VHF-422 (C/D) description information to the VHF COMM TRANSCEIVER section of
Table 1-1.

VHF COMM TRANSCEIVER
VHF-422C 822-1115-001 VHF Comm Transceiver, frequency range from 118.000 to 136.975 MHz in 8.33-kHz
increments. Has narrow receiver bandwidth (selectivity).
VHF-422D 822-1116-001 VHF Comm Transceiver, frequency range from 118.000 to 136.975 MHz in 8.33-kHz
increments and 137.000 to 151.975 MHz in 25-kHz increments. Has narrow receiver
Addendum 8
523-0772719-08711A (Facing Page 1-10)
Table 1-2. 399H-4/4A Radio Altimeter Indicator Description.
PART NUMBER ALTITUDE SCALE AIRCRAFT LIGHTING PANEL DESCRIPTION

TYPE
339H-4
622-1204-001 0 to +2000 ft Fixed-wing 28 V blue-white Flat gray bezel

622-1204-002 0 to +2000 ft Fixed-wing 5 V blue-white Flat gray bezel
622-1204-003 0 to +2000 ft Fixed-wing 28 V blue-white Black bezel (with raised bright metal ring)
622-1204-004 0 to +2000 ft Fixed-wing 5 V blue-white Black bezel (with raised bright metal ring)
622-1204-005 0 to +2000 ft Fixed-wing 28 V blue-white Gray bezel (with raised bright metal ring)
622-1204-006 0 to +2000 ft Fixed-wing 5 V blue-white Gray bezel (with raised bright metal ring)
622-1204-007 0 to +2000 ft Fixed-wing 5 V blue-white Gray bezel (with raised painted metal ring)
622-1204-010 0 to +2000 ft Fixed-wing 5 V blue-white Black bezel (with raised bright metal ring and
sloping portion of bezel painted gray)
339H-4A
622-1205-001 0 to +2000 ft Rotary-wing 28 V blue-white Flat gray bezel

622-1205-002 0 to +2000 ft Rotary-wing 5 V blue-white Flat gray bezel
622-1205-003 0 to +2000 ft Rotary-wing 28 V blue-white Black bezel (with raised bright metal ring)
622-1205-004 0 to +2000 ft Rotary-wing 5 V blue-white Black bezel (with raised bright metal ring)
622-1205-005 0 to +2000 ft Rotary-wing 28 V blue-white Gray bezel (with raised bright metal ring)
622-1205-006 0 to +2000 ft Rotary-wing 5 V blue-white Gray bezel (with raised bright metal ring)
Table 1-3. ALI-55/55A/55B Radio Altimeter Indicator Description.
PART NUMBER ALTITUDE SCALE AIRCRAFT LIGHTING PANEL DESCRIPTION

TYPE
ALI-55
622-2937-001 0 to +2500 ft Fixed-wing 28 V blue-white Black bezel

622-2937-002 0 to +2500 ft Fixed-wing 5 V blue-white Black bezel
622-2937-003 0 to +2500 ft Fixed-wing 28 V blue-white Gray bezel
622-2937-004 0 to +2500 ft Fixed-wing 5 V blue-white Gray bezel
622-2937-005 0 to +2500 ft Fixed-wing 5 V white Black bezel
622-2937-008 0 to +2500 ft Fixed-wing 5 V white Gray bezel
622-2937-009 0 to +2500 ft Fixed-wing 5 V blue-white Black-gray bezel
ALI-55A
622-2938-001 0 to +2500 ft Rotary-wing 28 V blue-white Black bezel

622-2938-002 0 to +2500 ft Rotary-wing 5 V blue-white Black bezel
622-2938-003 0 to +2500 ft Rotary-wing 28 V blue-white Gray bezel
622-2938-004 0 to +2500 ft Rotary-wing 5 V blue-white Gray bezel
ALI-55B
622-5367-001 0 to +750 metres Fixed-wing 28 V blue-white Black bezel

Table 1-4. DRI-55 Digital Altitude Indicator Description.
PART NUMBER CASE COLOR LIGHTING DECISION HEIGHT LINEAR LIGHTING

ANNUNCIATOR CURVE
622-4160-001 Gray 5 V white No Yes

622-4160-002 Gray 28 V white No Yes
622-4160-003 Black 5 V white No Yes
622-4160-004 Black 28 V white No Yes
622-4160-005 Gray 5 V white Yes Yes
622-4160-006 Gray 28 V white Yes Yes
622-4160-007 Black 5 V white Yes Yes
622-4160-008 Black 28 V white Yes Yes
622-4160-011 Gray 5 V white No No
622-4160-012 Gray 28 V white No No
622-4160-013 Black 5 V white No No
622-4160-014 Black 28 V white No No
622-4160-015 Gray 5 V white Yes No
622-4160-016 Gray 28 V white Yes No
622-4160-017 Black 5 V white Yes No
622-4160-018 Black 28 V white Yes No
Table 1-5. Radio Altimeter Antenna Description.
HALF-POWER
BEAMWIDTH GAIN
PART NUMBER (DEGREES) (MIN) VSWR MOUNTING SURFACE
E-PLANE H-PLANE
437X-1
522-4140-001 50 ±5 40 +10, –5 11.5 dB 1.5:1 max Flat

522-4140-002 60 ±5 45 ±5 11 dB 1.4:1 max Flat
522-4140-003 45 ±5 40 ±5 12 dB 1.5:1 max Flat
522-4140-004 60 ±5 45 ±5 11 dB 1.4:1 max Flat
522-4140-006 (UB Corp) 60 ±5 40 +10, –5 11.5 dB 1.5:1 max Flat
522-4140-007 (Dorne-Margolin) 60 ±5 40 +10, –5 11 dB 1.5:1 max Flat
437X-1A
522-4255-001 50 ±5 40 +10, –5 11.5 dB 1.5:1 max Curved

522-4255-002 60 ±5 45 ±5 11 dB 1.4:1 max Curved
522-4255-003 45 ±5 40 ±5 12 dB 1.5:1 max Curved
522-4255-004 45 ±5 40 +10, –5 11 dB 1.5:1 max Curved (mounting holes offset 22.5 deg)
522-4255-006 (UB Corp) 50 ±5 40 +10, –5 11.5 dB 1.5:1 max Curved
522-4255-007 (Dorne-Margolin) 50 ±5 40 +10, –5 11 dB 1.5:1 max Curved

ADDENDUM 8
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds reference to CTL-22C on Table 1-6. Replace Table 1-6 with table below.
Table 1-6. CTL-22/22A/22C CSDB Comm Control Descriptions.
PART NUMBER
LIGHTING PANEL FUNCTION SELECTOR SWITCH VOLUME
622-6520- (CTL-22)
VOLTAGE COLOR POSITIONS CONTROL
622-8737- (CTL-22A)
822-1120- (CTL-22C)
-001 5V Gray OFF-ON-SQ OFF

-002 28 V Gray OFF-ON-SQ OFF
-003 5V Black OFF-ON-SQ OFF
-004 28 V Black OFF-ON-SQ OFF
-005 5V Gray OFF-ON-SQ OFF Yes
-006 28 V Gray OFF-ON-SQ OFF Yes
-007 5V Black OFF-ON-SQ OFF Yes
-008 28 V Black OFF-ON-SQ OFF Yes
-009 5V Gray NORM-SQ OFF
-010 28 V Gray NORM-SQ OFF
-011 5V Black NORM-SQ OFF
-012 28 V Black NORM-SQ OFF
-013 5V Gray NORM-SQ OFF Yes
-014 28 V Gray NORM-SQ OFF Yes
-015 5V Black NORM-SQ OFF Yes
-016 28 V Black NORM-SQ OFF Yes
-801 Customer supplied OFF-ON-SQ OFF
-802 Customer supplied OFF-ON-SQ OFF Yes
Addendum 8
523-0772719-08711A (Facing Page 1-13)
Table 1-5. Radio Altimeter Antenna Description.
HALF-POWER
BEAMWIDTH GAIN
PART NUMBER (DEGREES) (MIN) VSWR MOUNTING SURFACE
E-PLANE H-PLANE
437X-1B
622-0954-001 50 ±5 55 ±5 9 dB 1.4:1 max Curved, 81.28-cm (32-in) radius.

622-0954-002 50 ±5 55 ±5 9 dB 1.4:1 max Curved, 81.28-cm (32-in) radius. Outer
mounting holes (on flat side) are in line.
ANT-50A
622-3698-001 35 min 35 min 13 dB 1.3:1 max Flat
ANT-51A
622-4550-001 55 max 50 max 1.5 dB 1.5:1 max Flat
ANT-52
622-6793-001 60 +5, –10 50 +5, –10 10 dB 1.5:1 max Flat or curved
Table 1-6. CTL-22/22A CSDB Comm Control Descriptions.
PART NUMBER
LIGHTING PANEL FUNCTION SELECTOR VOLUME
622-6520- (CTL-22)
VOLTAGE COLOR SWITCH POSITIONS CONTROL
622-8737- (CTL-22A)
-001 5V Gray OFF-ON-SQ OFF

-002 28 V Gray OFF-ON-SQ OFF
-003 5V Black OFF-ON-SQ OFF
-004 28 V Black OFF-ON-SQ OFF
-005 5V Gray OFF-ON-SQ OFF Yes
-006 28 V Gray OFF-ON-SQ OFF Yes
-007 5V Black OFF-ON-SQ OFF Yes
-008 28 V Black OFF-ON-SQ OFF Yes
-009 5V Gray NORM-SQ OFF
-010 28 V Gray NORM-SQ OFF
-011 5V Black NORM-SQ OFF
-012 28 V Black NORM-SQ OFF
-013 5V Gray NORM-SQ OFF Yes
-014 28 V Gray NORM-SQ OFF Yes
-015 5V Black NORM-SQ OFF Yes
-016 28 V Black NORM-SQ OFF Yes
-801 Customer supplied OFF-ON-SQ OFF
-802 Customer supplied OFF-ON-SQ OFF Yes

Table 1-7. CTL-23 Control Descriptions.
PART NUMBER LIGHTING VOLTAGE PANEL COLOR HOLD SWITCH
622-9851-001 5V Gray No
622-9851-002 28 V Gray No
622-9851-003 5V Black No
622-9851-004 28 V Black No
622-9851-005 5V Gray Yes
622-9851-006 28 V Gray Yes
622-9851-007 5V Black Yes
622-9851-008 28 V Black Yes
Table 1-8. CTL-32/32A CSDB Nav/DME Control Descriptions.
PART NUMBER
LIGHTING PANEL FUNCTION SELECTOR VOLUME
622-6521- (CTL-32)
VOLTAGE COLOR SWITCH POSITIONS CONTROL
622-8738- (CTL-32A)
-001 5V Gray OFF-ON

-002 28 V Gray OFF-ON
-003 5V Black OFF-ON
-004 28 V Black OFF-ON
-005 5V Gray OFF-ON Yes
-006 28 V Gray OFF-ON Yes
-007 5V Black OFF-ON Yes
-008 28 V Black OFF-ON Yes
-009 5V Gray OFF-ON-HLD
-010 28 V Gray OFF-ON-HLD
-011 5V Black OFF-ON-HLD
-012 28 V Black OFF-ON-HLD
-013 5V Gray OFF-ON-HLD Yes
-014 28 V Gray OFF-ON-HLD Yes
-015 5V Black OFF-ON-HLD Yes
-016 28 V Black OFF-ON-HLD Yes
-025 5V Gray NORM-HLD
-026 28 V Gray NORM-HLD
-027 5V Black NORM-HLD
-028 28 V Black NORM-HLD
-029 5V Gray NORM-HLD Yes
-030 28 V Gray NORM-HLD Yes
-031 5V Black NORM-HLD Yes
-032 28 V Black NORM-HLD Yes
-801 Customer supplied OFF-ON
-802 Customer supplied OFF-ON Yes
-803 Customer supplied OFF-ON-HLD
-804 Customer supplied OFF-ON-HLD Yes

ADDENDUM 19
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds CTL-23C control descriptions. Add the following table immediately following Table 1-7.
Table 1-7A. CTL-23C* Control Descriptions.
PART NUMBER LIGHTING VOLTAGE PANEL COLOR HOLD SWITCH
822-1121-001 5V Gray No
822-1121-002 28 V Gray No
822-1121-003 5V Black No
822-1121-004 28 V Black No
822-1121-005 5V Gray Yes
822-1121-006 28 V Gray Yes
822-1121-007 5V Black Yes
822-1121-008 28 V Black Yes
* The CTL-23C is similar to the CTL-23 except provides a strap-selectable option to provide COMM tuning in 8.33-kHz increments
from 118.000 to 136.992 MHz.
Addendum 19
523-0772719-0K711A (Facing Page 1-14)
Table 1-9. CTL-62/62A CSDB ADF Control Descriptions.
PART NUMBER
LIGHTING PANEL FUNCTION SELECTOR VOLUME DUAL ADF
622-6522- (CTL-62)
VOLTAGE COLOR SWITCH POSITIONS CONTROL CAPABILITY
622-8739- (CTL-62A)
-001 5V Gray OFF-ANT-ADF-TONE

-002 28 V Gray OFF-ANT-ADF-TONE
-003 5V Black OFF-ANT-ADF-TONE
-004 28 V Black OFF-ANT-ADF-TONE
-005 5V Gray OFF-ANT-ADF-TONE Yes
-006 28 V Gray OFF-ANT-ADF-TONE Yes
-007 5V Black OFF-ANT-ADF-TONE Yes
-008 28 V Black OFF-ANT-ADF-TONE Yes
-009 5V Gray OFF-ANT-ADF-TONE Yes
-010 28 V Gray OFF-ANT-ADF-TONE Yes
-011 5V Black OFF-ANT-ADF-TONE Yes
-012 28 V Black OFF-ANT-ADF-TONE Yes
-013 5V Gray OFF-ANT-ADF-TONE Yes Yes
-014 28 V Gray OFF-ANT-ADF-TONE Yes Yes
-015 5V Black OFF-ANT-ADF-TONE Yes Yes
-016 28 V Black OFF-ANT-ADF-TONE Yes Yes
-017 5V Gray ANT-ADF-TONE
-018 28 V Gray ANT-ADF-TONE
-019 5V Black ANT-ADF-TONE
-020 28 V Black ANT-ADF-TONE
-021 5V Gray ANT-ADF-TONE Yes
-022 28 V Gray ANT-ADF-TONE Yes
-023 5V Black ANT-ADF-TONE Yes
-024 28 V Black ANT-ADF-TONE Yes
-025 5V Gray ANT-ADF-TONE Yes
-026 28 V Gray ANT-ADF-TONE Yes
-027 5V Black ANT-ADF-TONE Yes
-028 28 V Black ANT-ADF-TONE Yes
-029 5V Gray ANT-ADF-TONE Yes Yes
-030 28 V Gray ANT-ADF-TONE Yes Yes
-031 5V Black ANT-ADF-TONE Yes Yes
-032 28 V Black ANT-ADF-TONE Yes Yes
-801 Customer supplied OFF-ANT-ADF-TONE
-802 Customer supplied OFF-ANT-ADF-TONE Yes
-803 Customer supplied OFF-ANT-ADF-TONE Yes
-804 Customer supplied OFF-ANT-ADF-TONE Yes Yes

Table 1-10. CTL-92/92A CSDB Transponder Control Descriptions.
PART NUMBER FUNCTION RELAY

LIGHTING PANEL DUAL XPDR MODE S XPDR
622-6523- (CTL-92) SELECTOR SWITCH CONTROL
VOLTAGE COLOR CAPABILITY COMPATIBLE
622-8740- (CTL-92A) POSITIONS CAPABILITY
-001 5V Gray OFF-STBY-ON-ALT

-002 28V Gray OFF-STBY-ON-ALT
-003 5V Black OFF-STBY-ON-ALT
-004 28V Black OFF-STBY-ON-ALT
-005 5V Gray OFF-STBY-ON-ALT Yes
-006 28V Gray OFF-STBY-ON-ALT Yes
-007 5V Black OFF-STBY-ON-ALT Yes
-008 28V Black OFF-STBY-ON-ALT Yes
-009 5V Gray STBY-ON-ALT
-010 28V Gray STBY-ON-ALT
-011 5V Black STBY-ON-ALT
-012 28V Black STBY-ON-ALT
-013 5V Gray STBY-ON-ALT Yes
-014 28V Gray STBY-ON-ALT Yes
-015 5V Black STBY-ON-ALT Yes
-016 28V Black STBY-ON-ALT Yes
2-201 5V Gray OFF-STBY-ON-ALT Yes
2-202 28V Gray OFF-STBY-ON-ALT Yes
2-203 5V Black OFF-STBY-ON-ALT Yes
2-204 28V Black OFF-STBY-ON-ALT Yes
2-205 5V Gray OFF-STBY-ON-ALT Yes Yes Yes
2-206 28V Gray OFF-STBY-ON-ALT Yes Yes Yes
2-207 5V Black OFF-STBY-ON-ALT Yes Yes Yes
2-208 28V Black OFF-STBY-ON-ALT Yes Yes Yes
2-209 5V Gray STBY-ON-ALT Yes
2-210 28V Gray STBY-ON-ALT Yes
2-211 5V Black STBY-ON-ALT Yes
2-212 28V Black STBY-ON-ALT Yes
2-213 5V Gray STBY-ON-ALT Yes Yes Yes
2-214 28V Gray STBY-ON-ALT Yes Yes Yes
2-215 5V Black STBY-ON-ALT Yes Yes Yes
2-216 28V Black STBY-ON-ALT Yes Yes Yes
1,2-305 5V Gray OFF-STBY-ON-ALT Yes Yes Yes
1,2-306 28V Gray OFF-STBY-ON-ALT Yes Yes Yes
1,2-307 5V Black OFF-STBY-ON-ALT Yes Yes Yes
1,2-308 28V Black OFF-STBY-ON-ALT Yes Yes Yes
1,2-313 5V Gray STBY-ON-ALT Yes Yes Yes
1,2-314 28V Gray STBY-ON-ALT Yes Yes Yes
1,2-315 5V Black STBY-ON-ALT Yes Yes Yes
1,2-316 28V Black STBY-ON-ALT Yes Yes Yes
-801 Customer Supplied OFF-STBY-ON-ALT Yes
-802 Customer Supplied OFF-STBY-ON-ALT Yes
1Control panels with -3XX status have MODE S and MODE A/C displayed instead of 1 and 2, respectively, to identify the selected
active transponder. Reference Service Bulletin 29. CTL-3XX status controls are only on CTL-92’s.
2Control panels with -2XX and -3XX are only on CTL-92’s CPN 622-6523-.

ADDENDUM 19
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds descriptions for RTU-870C to Table 1-11.
P/O Table 1-11. RTU-870A/870C/870T Radio Tuning Unit Control Descriptions.
MODEL NO DESCRIPTION COLLINS

PART NUMBER
RTU-870C Similar to RTU-870T, CPN 622-9856-141, except has SB 17 installed which provides 822-1123-101
COMM tuning in 8.33-kHz increments from 118.000 to 136.992 MHz.
Addendum 19
523-0772719-0K711A (Facing Page 1-17)
ADDENDUM 34
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL (PART A)
Insert this addendum sheet facing page 1-17

of the General Information Section (523-0772720-009118)
This addendum adds Table 1-11A which provides detailed descriptive information of various statuses RTU-870T/C
Radio Tuning Unit Controls.
Table 1-11A. RTU-870T/C Radio Tuning Unit Control Descriptions.
SB 15 8.33-
Improve Blue/ SB 14
Extended kHz
RTU-870T Black Gray SB 9 TCAN White Compatible Compatible
Frequency Comm
Mode Lighting TVI-920( ) MLS
136.XXX Tuning
-001 X
-002 X
-005 X X
-006 X X
-101 X X
-102 X X
-111 X
-112 X
-121 X X X
-122 X X X
-131 X X
-132 X X
-141 X X X X X
-142 X X X X X
-151 X X X X
-152 X X X X
RTU-870C
-101 X X X X X X
-102 X X X X X X
-111 X X X X X
-112 X X X X X
Addendum 34
30 Nov 1999 Sheet 1 of 1
523-0772719-0a711A (Facing Page 1-17)
Table 1-11. RTU-870A/870T Radio Tuning Unit Control Descriptions.
MODEL NO DESCRIPTION COLLINS

PART NUMBER
RTU-870A Gives centralized control and display of the frequency/ATC code and modes of the Collins 622-9346-001
-4XX series of General Aviation radios; has brown bezel.
RTU-870A Same as CPN 622-9346-001, except the bezel is black.7 622-9346-002
RTU-870A Same as CPN 622-9346-001, except the bezel is gray. 622-9346-003
RTU-870A Same as CPN 622-9346-001, except includes a NAV test inhibit strap input (SB 6). 622-9346-011
RTU-870A Same as CPN 622-9346-011, except includes SB 7. 622-9346-021
RTU-870A Same as CPN 622-9346-002/012/022 with SB 16 installed; extends upper operating Comm 622-9346-032
frequency an additional 1 MHz to 136.975 MHz.
RTU-870A Same as CPN 622-9346-003/013/023 with SB 16 installed; extends upper operating Comm 622-9346-033
frequency an additional 1 MHz to 136.975 MHz.
RTU-870T Primary controller for the uhf/vhf COM, vhf NAV/DME, ADF, ATC/TCAS, and TACAN 622-9856-001
radios; unit has a gray chassis.
RTU-870T Same as CPN 622-9856-001, except has a black chassis. 622-9856-002
RTU-870T Same as CPN 622-9856-002, except has SB 9 installed. 622-9856-005
RTU-870T Same as CPN 622-9856-001, except has improved inverse TACAN mode operation. 622-9856-006
RTU-870T Same as CPN 622-9856-002, except has SB 10 installed (standard Pro Line 4 lighting). 622-9856-101
RTU-870T Same as CPN 622-9856-001, except has SB 10 installed (standard Pro Line 4 lighting). 622-9856-102
RTU-870T Same as CPN 622-9856-002. 622-9856-111
RTU-870T Same as CPN 622-9856-001. 622-9856-112
RTU-870T Same as CPN 622-9856-101/-121, except has SB 15 installed. 622-9856-141

Table 1-12. RMI-36 Radio Magnetic Indicator Descriptions.
PART BEZEL POINTER POINTER LIGHTING BOOTSTRAP

NUMBER COLOR NO 1 NO 2 TRANSMITTER
622-2506-001 Black Yellow - ADF Green - ADF 28 V, blue-white No

622-2506-003 Black Yellow - ADF Green - ADF 28 V, blue-white Yes

622-2506-005 Gray Yellow - ADF Green - ADF 28 V, blue-white No
622-2506-007 Gray Yellow - ADF Green - ADF 28 V, blue-white Yes
622-2506-009 Black Yellow - ADF Green - ADF 5 V, unfiltered white Yes
*622-2506-010 Gray Yellow - ADF Green - ADF 5 V, unfiltered white Yes
622-2506-011 Gray Yellow - ADF Green - ADF 5 V, unfiltered white No
622-2506-012 Black White - ADF White - TCN 5 V, blue-white Yes
622-2506-013 Gray White - ADF White - ADF 5 V, blue-white No
622-2506-101 Black Yellow - TCN Green - ADF 28 V, blue-white No
622-2506-103 Black Yellow - TCN Green - ADF 28 V, blue-white Yes
622-2506-105 Gray Yellow - TCN Green - ADF 28 V, blue-white No
622-2506-106 Gray Yellow - TCN Green - ADF 5 V, blue-white No
622-2506-107 Gray Yellow - TCN Green - ADF 28 V, blue-white Yes
622-2506-108 Gray Yellow - TCN Green - ADF 5 V, blue-white Yes
622-2506-109 Black Yellow - TCN Green - ADF 5 V, unfiltered white Yes
*622-2506-110 Gray Yellow - TCN Green - ADF 5 V, unfiltered white Yes
622-2506-111 Gray Yellow - TCN Green - ADF 5 V, unfiltered white No
*622-2506-010 and -110 use a screw lock connector retainer; all others use a slide lock.
Table 1-13. BDI-36 Bearing Distance Indicator Descriptions.



ADDENDUM 2
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds descriptions for the IND-42( ) DME indicators to page 1-19.
Table 1-13A. IND-42( ) Indicator Descriptions.
DISTINGUISHING FEATURES
NOMENCLATURE COLLINS PART NO LEGEND ON
LIGHTING VOLTAGE PANEL COLOR
LH PUSHBUTTON
IND-42A 622-6524-001 5-V ac/dc Gray CH (multichannel)
622-6524-002 28-V dc Gray CH (multichannel)
622-6524-003 5-V ac/dc Black CH (multichannel)
622-6524-004 28-V dc Black CH (multichannel)
INC-42C 622-7318-001 5-V ac/dc Gray (None)
622-7318-002 28-V dc Gray (None)
622-7318-003 5-V ac/dc Black (None)
622-7318-004 28-V dc Black (None)
IND-42M 622-9976-001 5-V ac/dc Gray CH (multichannel)
622-9976-002 28-V dc Gray CH (multichannel)
622-9976-003 5-V ac/dc Black CH (multichannel)
622-9976-004 28-V dc Black CH (multichannel)
Addendum 2
523-0772719-02711A (Facing Page 1-19)
Table 1-13. BDI-36 Bearing Distance Indicator Descriptions.


*622-3702-009 Gray Yellow - ADF Green - ADF 5 V, blue-white Yes
622-3702-010 Black Yellow - ADF Green - ADF 5 V, unfiltered white No
622-3702-011 Black Yellow - ADF Green - ADF 5 V, unfiltered white Yes

622-3702-012 Gray Yellow - ADF Green - ADF 5 V, unfiltered white No
622-3702-013 Gray Yellow - ADF Green - ADF 5 V, unfiltered white Yes
*622-3702-014 Gray Yellow - ADF Green - ADF 5 V, unfiltered white Yes
622-3702-020 Black Yellow - TCN Green - ADF 5V, blue-white Yes
*622-3702-021 Black Yellow - TCN Green - ADF 5V, blue-white Yes
*622-3702-009, 622-3702-014, and 622-3702-021 use a screw lock connector retainer; all others use a slide lock.
Table 1-14. ADF-462/ANT-462( ) ADF, Equipment Specifications.
CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION
Certification
FAA TSO- C41d (class A)
EUROCAE ED-51
Environmental ADF-462 category /A2E1/BB/JY/E2/XXXXXZ/BZ/AZAAA
ANT-462 category /A2E1/BC/JY/E2/SXXXXX/BZ/AXXXX
RTCA document DO-160B (Refer to table 8-1 for environmental categories.)
EUROCAE ED-14B
Physical
Size
ADF-462 3/8 ATR, short, dwarf
Height 85.4 mm (3.32 in)
Width 96.6 mm (3.80 in)
Length 354.5 mm (13.96 in)
ANT-462A
Height 41.79 mm (1.645 in) at center
Width 218.90 mm (8.62 in)
Length 431.80 mm (17.00 in)
ANT-462B
Height 28.00 mm (1.10 in) at center
Width 269.79 mm (8.62 in)

Length 604.70 mm (23.81 in)

Weight (approx)
ADF-462 1.77 kg (3.9 lb)
ANT-462A 1.54 kg (3.4 lb)
ANT-462B 2.63 kg (5.8 lb)

Mounting
ADF-462 UMT-12 (preferred) or 390R-19 (optional); short, dwarf (Refer to mounts section in
the Pro Line II installation section for additional information.)
ANT-462B/462B Direct mounting to aircraft fuselage
Mating connector
ADF-462 Thinline II, 52/2 connector (CPN 653-1286-001) (Refer to installation section for ad-
ditional information.)
ANT-462A CPN 357-7998-010 (PT08P-12-10S or equivalent)
ANT-462B CPN 371-6470-000 (PT08P-14-19S or equivalent)
Maintenance requirements On condition
Electrical
Power/straps
Input power (P1-48) 27.5 V dc at 0.6 A nom (16.5 Ω) nom, ANT-462A/462B powered by ADF-462
Power gnd (P1-29)
Overall limits 30.3 to 22.0 V dc (18.0 V dc emergency)
Keep-alive power (P1-3) 16.0 to 32.0 V dc at 200 mA nominal for frequency memory in ARINC 429 burst
tuned installations of other installations where frequency memory is desired.
Frequency control ARINC 429 (continuous or burst) or CSDB serial data (Selections are made by strap-
ping P1-50; open on P1-50 = ARINC 429 frequency control; gnd on P1-50 = CSDB
frequency control.)
Frequency range 190.0 to 1799.5 kHz (normal); and 2179 to 2185 kHz (extended range); the ADF-462,
-111 status, also tunes 2088 to 2094 kHz
Tuning increments 50 Hz
Capture range ±250 Hz typical
Intermediate frequencies
First if 15 MHz
Second if 3.6 MHz
Bandwidth 6 dB — 2.8 kHz (nom) 80 dB — not more than 14 kHz
Sensitivity Modulated 30% at 400 Hz per RTCA DO-179, dated 13 May 1982
ANT 70 µV/m max at 6 dB (s+n)/n
ADF 150 µV/m max at 6 dB (s+n)/n
BFO/CW (TONE) 190 µV/m max at 12 dB (s+n)/n
ADF accuracy ±3°, excluding quadrantal error
Spurious response At least 80 dB below desired response
Automatic gain control Audio output does not vary more than 3 dB with signal strength from 70 to 500 000
µV/m.

Audio gain 50 mW (nominal) into 600-ohm load with a 1000-µV/m input signal, 30% modulation
at 400 Hz
Audio frequency response 350 to 1100 Hz ±6 dB
Audio frequency distortion Not more than 7% when output set for 50 mW into 600-ohm load with 1000-µV/m
signal modulated 30% with 400 Hz applied.
CW identifier 1000-Hz tone
Output loading
Audio output loading 600 Ω, floating
Audio high (P1-51)
Audio low (P1-52)
Dc sine/cosine 8 V dc max output, 2 kΩ min
Dc sine (P1-24)
Dc cosine (P1-28)
ARINC 429 Two serial output ports capable of driving five loads each
Bus A wire A (P1-18)
Bus A wire B (P1-21)
Bus B wire A (P1-26)
Bus B wire B (P1-27)
CSDB Two serial output ports capable of driving five loads each
Bus 1a wire A (P1-49)
Bus 1a wire B (P1-46)
Bus 1b wire A (P1-38)
Bus 1b wire B (P1-37)
ADF lock (P1-25) 4.7-kΩ pullup resistor to primary input power when bearing is valid. Capable of
sinking 0.1A to ground; then bearing output is invalid. (28 V dc = valid)
Fault monitor (P1-44) 16 V dc min, 0.2 A max output during normal operation; open circuit if an internal
fault is detected.
Certification
FAA TSO- C41c
Environmental
RTCA documents DO-142, Minimum Performance Standards — Airbourne Radio Receiving and Direc-
tion Finding Equipment Operation Within the Frequency Range of 200-850 kHz,
dated January 8, 1970
DO-138, Environmental Test Procedures — Airbourne Electronic Equipment, dated
June 27, 1968
ADF-60( ) Categories /AD/A/JN\G/AAAXXXXXX, class A selectivity
ANT-60( ) Categories /AJ/B/JN/AAAXWXXXX
Physical
Size
ADF-60 3/8 ATR, short, dwarf
Height 85.4mm (3.32 in)

Width 96.6mm (3.80 in)

Length 354.5mm (13.96 in)
ANT-60A
Height 43mm (1.7 in) at center
Width 216mm (8.5 in)
Length 419mm (16.5 in)
ANT-60B
Height 27mm (1.1 in) at center
Width 269mm (10.6 in)
Length 603mm (23.8 in)
Weight (approx)
ADF-60A 1.91 kg (4.2 lb)
ADF-60B 1.77 kg (3.9 lb)
ANT-60A 1.41 kg (3.1 lb)
ANT-60B 2.50 kg (5.5 lb)
Environmental
Temperature range
Operating
ADF-60( ) –54 to +55 °C (–65 to +131 °F) continuous operation to +71 °C (+160 °F) short-time
operation (30 min max)
ANT-60( ) –65 to +71 °C (–85 to +160 °F)
Storage
ADF-60( ) –65 to +71 °C (–85 to +160 °F)
Humidity
ADF-60( ) 95% relative humidity, +50 °C (122 °F) for 48 hr
ANT-60( ) 95% relative humidity, +71 °C (160 °F) for 240 hr
Altitude 0 to 18.3 km (60 000 ft)
Shock
Shockmounted 15 g operational, 30 g impact (shock duration — 10 ms)
Rigid-mounted 6 g operational, 15 g impact (shock duration — 10 ms)
Vibration
Shockmounted 0.008 in da, 5 to 10 Hz; 0.42 g, 10 to 15 Hz; 0.036 in da, 15 to 65 Hz (90 minutes each
plane per RTCA DO-138, CAT G); 8.0 g, 65 to 2000 Hz
Rigid-mounted 0.02 in da, 3 g max, 5 to 2000 Hz, per RTCA DO-138, CAT J; 0.1 in da, 1.5 g max, 5
to 55 Hz; 1.0 g max, 55 to 2000 Hz, per RTCA DO-138, CAT N
Mounting
ADF-60 UMT-12 (preferred) or 390R-19 (optional); short, dwarf (Refer to mounts section in
the installation section for additional information.)
ANT-60B/60B Direct mounting to aircraft fuselage

Mating connector
ADF-60 Thinline II, 52/2 connector (CPN 653-1286-001) (Refer to installation section for ad-
ANT-60A CPN 357-7998-010 (PT08P-12-10S or equivalent)
ANT-60B CPN 371-6470-000 (PT08P-14-19S or equivalent)
Maintenance requirement On condition

Electrical
Power/straps
Input power (P1-48) 27.5 V dc at 0.6 A nom (16.5 Ω) nom, ANT-60A/60B powered by ADF-60
Power gnd (P1-29)
Overall limits 30.3 to 22.0 V dc (18.0 V dc emergency)
Frequency control BCD tuning or CSDB with use of a CAD-62 adapter unit
Frequency range 190.0 to 1749.5 kHz
Tuning increments 0.5 kHz
Capture range ±250 Hz typical
Intermediate frequencies
First if 15 MHz
Second if 3.6 MHz
Bandwidth 6 dB — 2.8 kHz (nom)
80 dB — not more than 14 kHz
Sensitivity Per RTCA DO-142, dated 8 January 1970
ANT 70 µV/m max at 6 dB (s+n)/n
ADF 100 µV/m max at 6 dB (s+n)/n
ADF accuracy ±3° over the operating temperature range, with input signals of 70 µV/m to 0.5 µV/m
driving two ARINC standard ADF indicators (such as ID 250) or equivalent
ADF bearing speed Not more than 7 s for 175° antenna rotation with 70 µV/m input
ADF lock (P1-25) 4.7-kΩ pullup resistor to primary input power when bearing is valid. Capable of
sinking 0.1A to ground when bearing output is invalid. (28 V dc at P1-25 = valid)
Audio gain 100 mW (nom) into 600-W load with a 1000-µV/m input signal, 30% modulation at
Audio high (P1-51) 400 Hz
Audio low (P1-52)
CW identifier 1000-Hz tone
Dc sine/cosine 8 V dc max output, 5 kΩ min
*Dc sine (P1-24)
**Dc sine (P1-32)
Dc cosine (P1-28)
Dc sine/cosine com (P1-33)

Synchro bearing output (ADF-60A only) Capable of driving up to five loads (needles) (See note below.)
26 V ac input H (P1-44)
26 V ac input L (P1-45)
Synchro data Z (P1-33)
***Synchro data Y (P1-36)
***Synchro data X (P1-40)
Note
Additional loads may be driven with the following increase in bearing error: three
loads, 0.3°; four loads, 0.7°; five loads, 1.2°.
The user should also note that additional loads may result in excessive loading of
the 400-Hz supply and/or the need for larger size interconnecting wire between the
ADF-60( ) and the RMI. It may also be necessary to increase the capacity of the 26-
V ac supply and circuit breaker.
*For top-mounted ADF antenna, connect to sine output P1-24.

**For bottom-mounted ADF antenna, connect to sine output P1-32.
***Synchro data “X” and “Y” are shown for bottom-mounted ANT-60( ).
For top-mounted ANT-60( ), connect “X” to J1-36 and “Y” to J1-40.
Table 1-16. ALT-50A/55B Radio Altimeter Receiver-Transmitter, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
FAA TSO- C87
RTCA documents DO-138, DO-123
ARINC 408
FCC rules Part 87
Environmental categories DO-138 /AG/A/JN/AAAEXXXXX
Physical
Size 3/8-ATR, short, dwarf
Width 94.79 mm (3.73 in)
Length 351.69 mm (13.97 in)
Weight 2.63 kg (5.8 lb) max; 2.54 kg (5.6 lb) nominal
Mounting UMT-12 (preferred) or 390R-19 (optional); 3/8-ATR, short, dwarf mount
Connectors
Electrical Collins Thinline II mating connectors (CPN 634-1112-001). (Refer to ALT-50A/55B
installation section for details on connectors.)
RF TNC, qty 2, (CPN 857-1511-010)
Environmental
Temperature range
Operational –54 to +71 °C (–65 to +160 °F), cat AG
Storage –62 to +71 °C (–80 to +160 °F)

Altitude
Test 16764 m (55 000 ft) max
Operating 16764 m (55 000 ft)
Cooling Convection
Relative humidity 95% at 50 ±3 °C (122 ±5.4 °F) for 6 hours in 48 hour exposure
Shock
Operational 6g
Crash safety 15 g
Vibration Conforms to DO-138, cat JN 5 to 17 Hz: 0.1 in da; 17 to 39 Hz: 1.5 g da; 39 to 55 Hz:
0.02 in da, 55 to 2000 Hz: 3 g da; cat J: 0.02 in da, 5 to 2000 Hz, 3 g max; cat N 0.1 in
da, 5 to 55 Hz, 1.5 g max; 55 to 2000 Hz, 1 g max
Electrical
Input power (P1-1, ALT-50A; P1-9, 30 W, nom, while driving one indicator
ALT-55B)
Power gnd (P1-3)
Overall limits +22.0 to +34 V dc
RF output power 350 mW nominal-ALT-55B
210 mW nominal-ALT-50A
Modulation (strap P1-38 to P1-35 = 100 Selectable, 100 or 105 Hz

Hz; strap P1-40 to P1-35 = 105 Hz) Linear FM deviation, p-p;
100 Hz –98.4 MHz
105 Hz –93.7 MHz
Altitude output (P1-57, +dc analog alt; Dc analog
P1-59, –dc analog alt)
Analog 0 to +18 V, piece-wise linear
Scale 20 mV/ft; –20 to +500 ft
ALT-50A 10.4 V dc +3 mV/ft; +500 to +2000 ft
ALT-55B 10.4 V dc +3 mV/ft; +500 to +2500 ft
Accuracy, display ±5 ft or ±5%, whichever is greater; 0 to 500 ft
ALT-50A ±7%: 500 to 2000 ft
ALT-55B ±7%: 500 to 2500 ft
Accuracy, analog output ±2 ft or ±2%, whichever is greater; 0 to 500 ft
ALT-50A ±2%: 500 to 2000 ft
ALT-55B ±3%: 500 to 2500 ft
Off-scale voltage +18 ±0.5 V dc
Output loading 1 millimho max or 1 kΩ
Time constant 0.09 ±0.01 s
Reference voltages +22 V dc ±0.5% regulated
–15 V dc +0.5% regulated
+27.5 V dc ±10%

FCS warn output (P1-8) No warn = +20 to +33 V dc at 100 mA max
Warn = less than 20 mA

Trip outputs Tripped = less than +1.5 V dc at 100 mA max
Untripped = less than 20 mA at 30 V dc max

Factory set points Trip No (set points in ft)
1 2 3 4
ALT-55B:
622-2855-001 (adjustable) 200 500 1000 1500
622-2855-002 (nonadjustable) 200 250 1000 1200
ALT-50A:
622-3201-001, -002 (adjustable) 200 500 1000 1500
Table 1-17. 339H-4/4A/ALI-55A/B Radio Altimeter Indicator, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
FAA TSO- C87
FCC rules Part 87
ARINC 408
Environmental DO-138, cat DAPAAAXXXXXX
Physical
Size
Height 85.73 cm (3.375 in)
Width 85.73 cm (3.375 in)
Length 142.87 cm (5.625 in)
Weight 0.59 kg (1.3 lb) nominal
Mounting Front or rear panel mounted
Front Requires front mounting mooring plate (CPN 553-6588-004) and front mounting
clamp (CPN 139-3156-000)
Rear Requires rear mounting mooring plate (CPN 553-6588-004)
Unit connector Cannon PTO6A-14-19S(SR) (CPN 371-8087-000) for 339H-4/4A
Bendix 21-209214-200 (CPN 371-9036-010) for ALI-55A
Cannon PTO2A-14-19P (CPN 371-2051-000) for ALI-55/55B
(Refer to ALT-50A/55B installation section for details.)
Mating connector Cannon PT06A-14-19S(SR) (CPN 371-8087-000) for 339H-4/4A or ALI-55( ).
(Refer to ALT-55A/55B installation section for details.)
Environmental

Table 1-17. 339H-4/4A/ALI-55A/B Radio Altimeter Indicator, Equipment Specifications.
Temperature range
Operational –15 to +55 °C (+5 to +131 °F)
Storage –65 to +71 °C (–85 to +160 °F)
Altitude 15 240 m (50 000 ft) max
Cooling Convection
Relative humidity
High 95% min at +71 °C (+160 °F)
Low 85% min at +38 °C (+100 °F)
Vibration Conforms to DO-138, cat P
Frequency 5 to 17 Hz: 2.54 mm (0.1 in) max, da
17 to 55 Hz: ±1.5 g max acceleration
55 to 2000 Hz: ±0.25 g max acceleration
Magnetic 5° max deflection of 3.81 cm (1.5 in) bar magnet at a distance of 30.48 cm (12 in)
Electrical
Positive reference requirement +21.89 to +22.11 V dc at 55 mA max
Negative reference requirement –14.925 to –15.075 V dc at 25 mA max
Power requirement
Input power (P1-T) +24.5 to +30 V dc at 250 mA max (supplied by ALT-50A/55B)
Power gnd (P1-N)
DH annunciator (P1-U internal DH lamp) 25.2 to 30.8 V ac or V dc at 50 mA continuous (Refer to ALT-50A/55B installation
section for details.)
Lighting voltage
+28 V dc units (P1-L) 0.120 A max
+5 V dc ac/dc units (P1-C) 0.460 A max
Indicator lighting low (P1-M) Connect to dim power low
Altitude signal input 339H-4/4A units are compatible with ALT-50A. ALI-55( ) units are compatible with
+dc analog alt (P1-A) ALT-55B.
–dc analog alt (P1-B)
External decision height (P1-R and P1-V) Isolated relay contacts, closed at DH and below (P1-R is connected to P1-V at DH
and below). (Refer to ALT-50A/55B installation section for details.)
Inst flag 0.02 A load capability for flight director system and/or other external system
+ (P1-D)
– (P1-E)

Table 1-18. DRI-55 Digital Radio Altitude Indicator, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
FAA TSO- C87
RTCA document DO-160
ARINC 408
Environmental DO-160, cat /A2C1/B/PKS/EXXXXXZBAZZ
Physical
Size
Height 20.95 cm (0.825 in)
Width 85.73 cm (3.375 in)
Length 153.41 cm (6.04 in)
Mounting Front or rear panel mounted
Integral turnlock Front mounted in panels 1.27 mm (0.05 in) to 3.18 mm (0.125 in) thick
Front Requires front adapter plate (CPN 629-8671-001 = gray or CPN 629-8671-002 =
black)
Rear Requires rear mounting mooring plate (CPN 629-8672-001)
Unit connector Cannon DBU-25PAD (CPN 371-0385-030)
Mating connectors Crimp connector: Cannon DBMA25S-A183-FO (CPN 371-0213-030)
Crimp contacts: Cannon 031-1007-067 (CPN 371-0213-110)
Solder connector: Cannon DBM-25S (CPN 371-0221-000)
Environmental
Temperature range
Operational –20 to +70 °C (–4 to +158 °F)
Storage –55 to +85 °C (–67 to +185 °F)
Altitude 12192 m (40 000 ft) max
Cooling Convection
Relative humidity 95% min at +50 °C (+122 °F)
Vibration Conforms to DO-160, cat PKS
Shock
Operational 6g
Crash safety 15 g
Electrical
Positive reference requirement (P1-20) +21.89 to +22.11 V dc at 55 mA max
Negative reference requirement –14.925 to –15.075 V dc at 25 mA max
Power requirement
Input power (P1-25) +24.5 to +30 V dc at 250 mA max (supplied by ALT-50A/55B)
Power ground (P1-14)

Table 1-18. DRI-55 Digital Radio Altitude Indicator, Equipment Specifications.
DH annunciator (P1-15 internal DH lamp 25.2 to 30.8 V ac or V dc at 50 mA continuous (Refer to ALT-50A/55B installation
dimmer power) section for details.)
Lighting voltage
+28 V dc units (P1-4) 0.120 A max
+5 V ac/dc units (P1-5) 0.460 A max
Indicator lighting low (P1-6) Connect to dimmer power low
ALT-50A/55B and ARINC PGM strap Open = greater than 100 kΩ; ground = less than 1.0 V dc
(P1-10 and P1-9) For input from ALT-50A straps, P1-10 and P1-9 are both open.
For input from ALT-55B strap, P1-10 is ground and P1-9 is open.
For input from ARINC ALT strap, P1-10 is open and P1-9 is ground.
DH PGM (only on DRI-55 with SB 6 in- Open = greater than 100 kΩ; ground = less than 1.0 V dc. Ground P1-12 for alt read-
stalled) (P1-12) out at 00 ft. Open for DRI-55 display disable at 00 ft. (Refer to ALT-50A/55B installa-
tion section for details.)
Altitude signal input

+dc analog alt (P1-23) Compatible with ALT-50A/55B
–dc analog alt (P1-22) Accuracy ±2 feet or ±2%, whichever is greater
Note
Only 10-ft increments are displayed (50-ft increments when above 1000 ft) to pres-
ent a quick, easy-to-read altitude indication to the pilot.
External decision height (P1-2 and P1-3) Isolated relay contacts, closed at DH and below (P1-2 is connected to P1-3 at DH and
below). (Refer to ALT-50A/55B installation section for details.)
Table 1-19. 437X-1/1A/1B Radio Altimeter Antenna, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
FAA TSO- C87
FCC rules Part 87
EUROCAE MPS1/WG6/74
EUROCAE ED-30
ARINC 552
Environmental TSO-C87, categories
437X-1/1A AAAAAE
437X-1B AAAAAX
Physical
Size
Flange diameter 17.78 cm (7 in)
Body diameter 13.21 cm (5.2 in)

Height 6.99 cm (2.75 in)

Weight 0.45 kg (1.0 lb) nom
Environmental
Temperature range
Operating –54 to +55 °C (–65 to +131 °F)
Storage –62 to +85 °C (–80 to +185 °F)
Humidity 0 to 100% with condensation at +50 °C (+122 °F)
Altitude 0 to 18288 m (0 to 60 000 ft)
Vibration
5 to 10 Hz
437X-1/1A 0.1016 cm (0.040 in) da
437X-1B 0.2032 cm (0.080 in) da
10 to 55 Hz
437X-1/1A 0.07620 cm (0.030 in) da
437X-1B 0.1520 cm (0.060 in) da
55 to 500 Hz 10 g
500 to 1000 Hz 6g
Shock 15 g for 10 ms
Pressure differential 0.907 kg/cm2 (12.9 lbf/in2)
Electrical *GAIN *HALF-POWER BEAM WIDTH *VSWR

(min) (DEGREES) (max)
E PLANE H PLANE
437X-1 (-001) 11.5 dB 50 ±5 40 +10, –5 1.5:1

437X-1A (-001) 11.5 dB 50 ±5 40 +10, –5 1.5:1
437X-1B (all) 9 dB 50 ±5 55 ±5 1.4:1
*Refer to Table 1-5 for a complete listing.
Isolation
437X-1 (-001, -006, -007) 40.64 cm (16 in) spacing, 80 dB min
437X-1A (-001, -004, -006, -007)
437X-1 (-002, -003, -004) 50.8 cm (20 in) spacing, 80 dB min and
437X-1A (-002, -003) 91.44 cm (36 in) spacing, 90 dB min
437X-1B 50.8 cm (20 in) spacing, 80 dB min and
76.2 cm (30 in) spacing, 85 dB min
Squint angle 6° max
Input impedance 50 Ω nom
Mounting
437X-1 Flat surfaces, in line or side by side
437X-1A Curved surfaces, in line only; 181.610 cm (71.5 in) nom radius
437X-1B Curved surfaces, in line only; 81.28 cm (32 in) nom radius

Minimum spacing 50.8 cm (20 in)

Mating connector TNC CPN 857-1511-010
Orientation Must be perpendicular to a line between antennas for minimum cross-coupling
Gaskets 437X-1 (except -002)/1A: CPN 018-1394-020
437X-1B: CPN 018-1394-030
437X-1 (-002): CPN 018-1394-040
Table 1-20. ANT-50A/51A Radio Altimeter Antenna, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
FAA TSO- C87
Environmental categories AAAAAX
Physical
ANT-50A
Size
Flange (rectangular) 15.87 x 14.17 cm (6.2 x 5.6 in)
Body 14.66 x 12.96 cm (5.77 x 5.1 in)
ANT-51A
Size
Flange (round) 17.78 cm (7.0 in) dia
Environmental
Temperature range
Operating –54 to +71 °C (–65 to +160 °F)
Storage –62 to +71 °C (–80 to +160 °F)
Altitude
ANT-50A 0 to 13716 m (0 to 45 000 ft)
ANT-51A 0 to 18288 m (0 to 60 000 ft)
Vibration
5 to 10 Hz 0.1016 cm (0.040 in) da
10 to 55 Hz 0.07620 cm (0.030 in) da
55 to 500 Hz 10 g

Table 1-20. ANT-50A/51A Radio Altimeter Antenna, Equipment Specifications.
500 to 1000 Hz 6 g for 10 ms
Electrical GAIN HALF-POWER BEAM WIDTH VSWR

(min) (DEGREES) (max)
E PLANE H PLANE
ANT-50A 13 dB 35 35 1.4:1
ANT-51A 11.5 dB 50 40 1.5:1
Isolation
ANT-50A
91.44 cm (36 in) spacing 90 dB min
ANT-51A
Squint angle 6° max
Mounting Flat surfaces, in line or side by side
Orientation Must be perpendicular to a line between antennas for minimum cross-coupling
Gaskets
ANT-50A CPN 018-1394-060
ANT-51A CPN 018-1394-020
Table 1-21. ANT-52 Radio Altimeter Antenna, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
FAA TSO- C87
RTCA document DO-160B
FCC rules Part 87
Environmental categories D2AXJXWXDFXXXXXXXX
Physical
Size
Flange (rectangular) 9.27 x 8.89 cm (3.65 x 3.5 in)
Body 2.54 x 2.54 cm (1.0 x 1.0 in)
Weight 0.098 kg (3.5 oz) nom
Environmental
Temperature range

Table 1-21. ANT-52 Radio Altimeter Antenna, Equipment Specifications.
Operating (continuous) –54 to +55 °C (–65 to +131 °F)

Operating (short term) Up to +71 °C (+160 °F)
Storage –62 to +71 °C (–80 to +160 °F)
Vibration
10 to 80 Hz 0.07620 cm (0.030 in) da
80 to 500 Hz 10 g peak
Electrical GAIN HALF-POWER BEAM WIDTH

(min) (DEGREES)
E PLANE H PLANE
10 dB 60 (+5°, –10°) 50 (+5°, –10°)
Vswr: 4200 to 4400 MHz 2.0:1

4210 to 4390 MHz 1.9:1
4240 to 4360 MHz 1.5:1
Isolation
Mounting Flat or curved surfaces, in line or side by side, mounting screws supplied
Gasket (optional) CPN 018-1394-100
Table 1-22. BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
TSO
FAA TSO-C40b, C41d
EUROCAE ED-22A, -51
Environmental
FAA DO-160B: cat /A1E1/B/A/JY/E2/XXXXXZEAEAAA (Refer to table 8-2 in the appendix
section for environmental categories.)
EUROCAE ED-14B
Physical

Size
Width 41.7 mm (1.64 in)
Length 317.9 mm (12.52 in)
Weight 0.68 kg (1.5 lb)
Mounting UMT-10; 3/16 ATR, short, dwarf (Refer to BIA-32 installation section for additional
information.)
Mating connector Thinline II, 60 pin connector kit (CPN 634-4192-007)
Electrical
Power/straps (Refer to BIA-32 installation section for strapping options.)
Input power (P1-57, 58) 26 V rms, 400 Hz; 15 W dissipation
Power gnd (P1-55, 56)
Chassis gnd (P1-59, 60)
Strap A select (P1-5) Connected to strap A return (P1-32) when strapped; open when not strapped.
Strap A return (P1-32)
Strap B select (P1-4) Connected to strap B return (P1-36) when strapped; open when not strapped.
Strap B return (P1-36)
Strap C select (P1-3) Connected to strap C return (P1-40) when strapped; open when not strapped.
Strap C return (P1-40)
Strap D select (P1-1) Connected to strap D return (P1-44) when strapped; open when not strapped.
Strap D return (P1-44)
Strap E (-002 only) (P1-6) Activates needle parking when P1-6 is grounded.
Bearing SDI select (P1-9) Connected to bearing SDI return (P1-52) when strapped; open when not strapped.
Bearing SDI return (P1-48
Heading SDI select (P1-8) Connected to heading strap return (P1-52) when strapped; open when not strapped.
Heading SDI return (P1-52)
Inputs
Analog heading Accepts a 3-wire synchro heading input meeting the standards of ARINC Report 407,
Synchro X (P1-54) “Synchro System Standards”. The signal is referenced to BIA-32 26-V ac input
Synchro Y (P1-49) power. Synchro Z input is grounded.
Synchro Z (P1-51)
ARINC 429 heading Accepts the following ARINC 429 heading data in accordance with ARINC specifica-
Input A (P1-28) tion 429-10, published March 16, 1987:
Input B (P1-27)
True heading Label 314
Magnetic heading Label 320
Altitude/Pitch Label 324
Altitude/Roll Label 325
CSDB heading Depending on strapping, accepts the following CSDB heading data from either an
Input A (P1-25) AHC-85 Attitude Heading Computer or DGS-65 Directional Gyro in accordance with
Input B (P1-26) publication titled “Commercial Standard Digital Bus” (CPN 523-0772774), dated
March 11,1985:
Attitude/heading Label 43
Heading Label 46

ARINC 429 bearing Accepts the following ARINC 429 bearing data in accordance with ARINC specifica-
Input A (P1-21) tion 429-10, published March 16, 1987:
Input B) (P1-13)
ADF bearing Label 162
VOR bearing Label 222
CSDB bearing Depending on strapping, accepts the following CSDB bearing data from either an
Input A (P1-29) ADF-462 ADF Receiver or a VIR-432 Navigation Receiver in accordance with publi-
Input B (P1-30) cation titled “Commercial Standard Digital Bus” (CPN 523-0772774), dated March
11,1985:
VOR bearing Label 21
ADF bearing Label 2B
28-V heading flag (P1-2) The BIA-32 will accept a high level flag from the 3-wire synchro heading data source.
Heading data will be considered valid if the flag is greater than 18 V dc. An open cir-
cuit flag indicates invalid heading data. The BIA-32 will drive an indicator needle to
90° horizontal park condition if this flag indicates invalid.
Outputs
Load capacity Able to drive two RMI-30, two RMI-36, or two BDI-36 needles.
Sin θ (P1-38, 42) Sin θ is supplied through pins P1-38 and P1-42 only when unit is strapped for this
output. With different strapping, pins P1-38 and P1-42 supply a synchro X signal.
Sin θ output is a 400-Hz square wave with a maximum voltage of 16 V p-p. The volt-
age represents the sin θ of the relative bearing and is either in phase or 180° out of
phase with the 26-V ac input power.
Synchro X (P1-38, 42) Synchro X is supplied through pins P1-38 and P1-42 only when unit is strapped for
this output. With different strapping, pins P1-38 and P1-42 supply a sin θ signal. The
synchro X signal is an 11.8 V rms, 400-Hz sin θ wave. The voltage and phase differ-
ence between the synchro X and 26-V ac input power signals contains the bearing in-
formation.
Cos θ (P1-37, 41) Cos θ is supplied through pins P1-37 and P1-41 only when unit is strapped for this
output. With different strapping, pins P1-37 and P1-41 supply a synchro Y signal.
Cos θ output is a 400-Hz square wave with a maximum voltage of 16 V p-p. The volt-
age represents the cos θ of the relative bearing and is either in phase or 180° out of
phase with the 26-V ac input power.
Synchro Y (P1-37, 41) Synchro Y is supplied through pins P1-37 and P1-41 only when unit is strapped for
this output. With different strapping, pins P1-37 and P1-41 supply a cos θ signal.
The synchro Y signal is an 11.8 V rms, 400-Hz sin θ wave. The voltage and phase dif-
ference between the synchro Y and 26-V ac input power signals contains the bearing
information.
Synchro Z/sin θ-cos θ gnd (P1-39, 43) Ground for both 3-wire synchro and sin θ/cos θ signals.
Super flag (P1-45) The super flag is active when the BIA-32 is generating sin θ/cos θ output or when it
is generating heading or attitude data. Invalid or missing data or a microprocessor
reset will result in an output voltage no greater than 2 V dc across a 1000 ohm ex-
ternal load. Otherwise, the flag output voltage is 27.5 V dc ±10%, 200 mA maximum.
The output is protected against lightning and shorts to ground.
Accuracy Better than ± 2°.
Needle parking The BIA-32 will park the indicator needle at 90° (horizontal) under certain condi-
tions. These conditions vary for the -001 and -002 status of the unit.
ADF mode, -001 and -002 units Needle will park when serial input bearing is invalid or missing.

VOR OBI mode, -001 and -002 units The output bearing will follow input bearing whenever serial input bearing is pres-
ent.
When strap E is grounded (-002 unit only), the BIA-32 will produce a 90° output if
the input CSDB VOR data is invalid, or if the sign status matrix of the input ARINC
429 VOR data indicates fail warning or no computed data.
For either unit status, the BIA-32 will produce a 90° output if the input bearing is
missing. The output will also be flagged, using a discrete output, when input is inva-
lid or missing.
VOR OBI mode, -002 unit only The BIA-32 will produce a 90° output if the input CSDB VOR data in invalid, or if
the sign status matrix of the input ARINC 429 VOR data indicates fail warning or no
computed data.
The BIA-32 will produce a 90° output if the input bearing is missing. The output will
also be flagged, using a discrete output, when input in invalid or missing.
VOR RMI mode, -001 and -002 units The BIA-32 will produce relative bearing (VOR serial bearing minus heading) when-
ever heading and serial bearing are present.
The BIA-32 will produce a 90° relative bearing output when serial input bearing or
heading information is missing, or when the synchro heading is flagged, or when less
than 50% of the nominal synchro XY level is present.
VOR RMI mode, -002 unit only The BIA-32 will produce a 90° output if the input CSDB VOR or heading data is
flagged invalid, or if the sign status matrix of the input ARINC 429 VOR or heading
data indicates fail warning or no computed data.
The BIA-32 will produce a 90° relative bearing output when serial input bearing or
heading information is missing, or when the synchro heading is flagged, or when less
than 50% of the nominal synchro XY level is present.
ATTITUDE/HEADING modes, -002 unit The BIA-32 will track the input data regardless of validity. If the input data disap-
only pears, the BIA-32 output will remain at the last valid position. If no input is ever re-
ceived, the BIA-32 will produce a 180° output. The output will be flagged using a dis-
crete output when input is invalid or missing.
Table 1-23. CAD-31/62 Control Adapter, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
TSO CAD-31
Localizer C36d
VOR C40b
Glideslope C34d
Marker beacon C35d

VHF communications C37c, C38c
DME C66b
TSO CAD-62 C41c, C74c
RTCA Documents, CAD-31
Localizer DO-131A
VOR DO-153A

Glideslope DO-132A
Marker beacon DO-143
VHF communications DO-156, DO-157
DME DO-151A
RTCA Documents, CAD-62 DO-160A
EUROCAE CAD-31
Localizer ED-46
VOR ED-22A
Glideslope ED-47
Marker beacon 1/WG 7/70
VHF communications ED-23, ED-24
DME MPS/WG 8/1/71
EUROCAE CAD-62 ED-14A
Environmental DO-160A, categories /A2E1/B/JY/EXXXXXZ/BZ/AZA
EUROCAE ED-14A
Physical
Size
Height 84.58 mm (3.33 in) max
Width 26.4 mm (1.04 in) max
Length 134.11 mm (5.280 in) max
Weight, unit 0.23 kg (0.5 lb) approx
Mounting Mount, CPN 653-9015-001, required for remote mounting either horizontally or ver-
tically. Two units can be mounted end-to-end in approximately the same length as a
standard ARINC short case.
Mating connector 50-pin subminiature rectangular, Cannon DDMA-50S-FO-(CPN 371-0213-050) or
equivalent
Environmental
Temperature
Storage –55 to +85 °C (–67 to +185 °F)
Cooling Convection
Relative humidity 95% at +65 °C (+149 °F) for 10 days
Shock
Operational 6g
Crash safety 15 g (10 ms duration)
Vibration Certified for use in piston or turbine, fixed or rotary wing aircraft.

Constant total excursion of 0.02 in da, 44 to 54 Hz; constant peak acceleration of 3 g,

54 to 2000 Hz (cat J).
Constant total excursion of 0.2 in da, 5 to 14 Hz; constant peak acceleration of 2 g, 14
to 44 Hz (cat Y).
Overall: 5 — 14 Hz 0.2 in da
14 — 44 Hz 2.0 g peak
44 — 54 Hz 0.02 in da
54 — 2000 Hz 3.0 g peak
Electrical
Power requirement +27 V dc, 0.2 A max
Input power no 1 (J1-17)
Input power no 2 (J1-50)
Power ground (J1-38, J1-48)
Discrete inputs CAD-31 Note
Open = greater than 100 kΩ or +4.0 to +30.0 V dc referenced to ground. Ground =

0.0 ± 1.0 V dc.
Mode select (J1-15) (-001)
Mode select (J1-32) (-002 only) J1-15 Mode
Open NAV/DME
Gnd VHF COMM
(-002)
J1-15 J1-32 Mode
Open Open NAV/DME
Gnd Open VHF COMM
Open Gnd DME
Gnd Gnd Not used
Source ident (J1-31) (-001)
Source ident (J1-42) (-002 only) J1-31 Description
Open #1
Gnd #2
(-002)
J1-31 J1-42 Description
Open Open #1
Gnd Open #2
Gnd Gnd #3 or DME remote only
Open Gnd DME preset or remote
Push to talk (J1-40) (-002 only) Ground or open. Ground = talk.
Discrete inputs CAD-62 Note
Open = greater than 100 kΩ or +4.0 to +30.0 V dc referenced to ground. Ground =

0.0 ± 1.0 V dc.
Reply lamp low when used with TDR Ground or open. Ground = transponder reply
(J1-15)
Lock monitor when used with ADF Open or ground. +28 V dc = ADF valid
(J1-15)
Unit select (J1-31) Open on J1-31 selects system 1; ground on J1-31 selects system 2
Mode select (J1-32) (-002 only) J1-32 J1-42 Mode
Mode select (J1-42) (-002 only) Gnd Gnd Invalid
Gnd Open TDR mode
Open Gnd ADF mode
Open Open Determined by serial input

Discrete outputs CAD-31/62 pins 1 thru 12, 16, 18 thru 26, 34 thru 37, and 39. Discrete outputs
(J1-1 thru 12, J1-16, J1-18 thru J1-26, (except J1-16) are open collector outputs. Outputs are 0.0 to 1.6 V dc sinking 100 mA
J1-34 thru 37, and J1-39) max (logic 0) or open circuit of greater than 100 kΩ (logic 1). J1-16 provides a +5 V dc
output greater than 10 mA to drive the TDR-90 IDENT input or is an open circuit of
greater than 100 kΩ. The CAD-31 and CAD-62 installation section describes each
pin function in detail.
CSDB inputs CAD-31/62 2-wire CSDB data bus provides a balanced differential signal using
1A (J1-30), 1B (J1-14) nominally 0 to 5 V switching levels from the connected CTL-X2/X2A.
CSDB outputs CAD-31/62 2-wire CSDB data bus provides a balanced differential signal using
1A (J1-29), 1B (J1-13) nominally 0 to 5 V switching levels to the connected CTL-X2/X2A.
+5 V dc monitor (used only in testing Provides a test point of the internal +5-V dc power supply; used only in test and re-
unit) (J1-43) pair of CAD-31/62.
Table 1-24. CAD-870 Transponder Control Adapter, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
FAA TSO- C74c
RTCA documents DO-106A, DO-178A
EUROCAE ED-14A
Environmental
RTCA DO-160A, categories /A2E1/B/JY/EXXXXXZ/BZ/AZA
Physical
Size
Height 84.58 mm (3.330 in)
Width 24.6 mm (1.04 in)
Length 242.8 mm (9.56 in)
Weight 0.45 kg (1.0 lb) approx
Mounting Remote mounted using control adapter mount, CPN 653-9015-002
Connectors
P1, unit Cannon DDU-50PAD-A176 (CPN 371-0385-050)
J1, mating Cannon DDMA-50SF00000 (CPN 371-0999-050) (Refer to CAD-870 installation sec-
tion for details on mating connector.)
Environmental
Temperature range
Storage –55 to +85 °C (–67 to +185 °F)
Cooling Convection
Shocks

Operational 6g
Vibration Certified for use in piston or turbine, fixed or rotary wing aircraft 0.2 in da, 5 to 14
Hz; 2 g, 14 to 44 Hz; 0.02 in da, 44 to 55 Hz; 3 g, 55 to 2000 Hz
Electrical
Power requirements
Main (P1-17) 3.85 W nom (0.14 A at +27.5 V dc)
I/O interface
ARINC 429 digital bus Serial data bus conforming to ARINC 429-7 Mark 33 Digital Information Transfer
System. Data transfer rate is 12500 bits/s. Data update rate is 5/s.
Continuous tune ARINC ATC and altitude data word continuously received at least every second.
Discrete inputs A logic 0 (input active) input is defined as 0.0 ±1.0-V level, 1-mA min current sink. A
logic 1 (open circuit) input is defined as a 100-kΩ to signal ground input impedance.
Discrete outputs (except IDENT) A logic 0 (output active) level is 0.0 ±0.5-V, sinking a 4-mA min load. A logic 1 (open
circuit) output is a 100-kΩ to signal ground impedance.
IDENT A +5-V dc, 10-mA min current source output is the logic 1 (output active) state. A
100-kΩ to signal ground impedance is the logic 0 (inactive) state.
Input functions
Serial input A-A/A-B (P1-22, 42) ARINC 429 serial data bus, supplies ATC or altitude data words to the CAD-870
Serial input B-A/B-B (P1-39, 26) ARINC 429 serial data bus, supplies ATC or altitude data words to the CAD-870
Transponder reply (P1-40) A ground supplied to this pin identifies a TDR-90 reply to an interrogation.
Installation (P1-7) A ground supplied to this pin identifies a single CAD-870 installation. An open on
this pin identifies a dual CAD-870 installation.
SDI (P1-23) Grounding this pin lets the CAD-870 receive and process data on the ARINC 429
buses that supply a source/destination identifier of 2. Opening the input to this pin
lets the CAD-870 receive and process data on the ARINC 429 buses that supply a
source/destination identifier of 1.
Serial input select (P1-43) Grounding this pin lets the CAD-870 receive data only at serial input A-A/A-B.
Leaving the pin open lets the CAD-870 receive data only at port B-A/B-B.
Digital outputs
Serial output 1A/1B (P1-2, 3) ARINC 429 low-speed serial data bus; contains ATC tuning data words, altitude data
words, and maintenance data words.
Discrete outputs
Mode A code A1 (P1-44)
Mode A code B1 (P1-35)
Mode A code B4 (P1-10) A ground at these pins shows an active (set) output.
Mode A code C1 (P1-36)
Mode A code D1 (P1-21)

Mode C code A1 (P1-47)

Mode C code B1 (P1-28) A ground at these pins shows an active (set) output.
Mode C code B2 (P1-8)
Mode C code C1 (P1-41)
Mode C code D2 (P1-13) (is not used)
Mode C code D4 (P1-46)
Test (P1-29) A ground on this pin activates the TDR-90 test mode of operation.
On/standby (P1-49) A ground on this pin lets the TDR-90 reply to interrogations (TDR-90 is on). An open
on this pin activates the TDR-90 standby mode of operation.
Alt rep on/off (P1-16) A ground on this pin lets the TDR-90 transmit altitude data.
Ident (P1-25) +5 V dc on this pin lets the TDR-90 transmit an identification code.
Table 1-25. CAD-870G Transponder Control Adapter, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
FAA TSO- C74c
RTCA documents DO-160A, DO-178A
EUROCAE ED-14A
Environmental
RTCA DO-160A, categories /A2E1/B/JY/EXXXXXZ/BZ/AZA
Physical
Size
Width 41.28 mm (1.625 in)
Length 351.5 mm (13.84 in)
Mounting Remote mounted in UMT-10 mount; 3/16 ATR
Connectors
Unit connector P1 Collins 1/2-height Thinline II connector (CPN 634-1111-001)
Unit connector P2 Cannon DDU-50PAD-A176 (CPN 371-0385-050)
Mating connector J1 Collins 1/2-height Thinline II connector (CPN 634-1112-001).
Mating connector J2 Cannon DDMA-50SF00000 (CPN 371-0999-050)
(Refer to CAD-870G installation section for details on mating connector.)
Environmental

Temperature
Storage –55 to +85 °C (–67 to +185 °F)
Cooling Convection
Shock
Operational 6g
Crash Safety 15 g (10 ms duration)
Vibration Certified for use in piston or turbine, fixed or rotary wing aircraft
0.2 in da, 5 to 14 Hz; 2 g, 14 to 44 Hz

0.02 in da, 44 to 55 Hz; 3 g, 55 to 2000 Hz
Electrical
Power requirements
Main (P1-60) 4.95 W nom (0.18 A at +27. V dc)
Standby (P1-58) 2.75 mW nom (100 9A at +27. V dc)
I/O interface
System Data transfer rate is 12 500 bits/s. Data update rate is 5/s.
Continuous tune ARINC word continuously received at least every 200 ms.
Burst tune ARINC burst defined as at least 30 words spaced over an interval of 1.5 s.
Discrete inputs A logic 0 (input active) input is defined as a 0.0 ±1.0-V level, 1-mA minimum current
sink.
A logic 1 (open circuit) input is defined as a 100-kΩ to signal ground input imped-
ance.
Discrete outputs (except IDENT and A logic 0 (output active) level is 0.0 ±0.5-V, sinking a 4-mA minimum load.
FAULT MONITOR)
A logic 1 (open circuit) output level is a 100-kΩ to signal ground impedance.
IDENT A +5-V dc, 10-mA min current source output is the logic 1 (output active) state.
A 100-kΩ to signal ground impedance is the logic 0 (inactive) state.
FAULT MONITOR A +28-V dc, 300-mA min current source output is the logic 1 (output active) state.
A 100-kΩ to signal ground impedance is the logic 0 (inactive) state.
Input functions
ATC serial input A-A/A-B ARINC 429 serial data bus, contains ATC tuning data words.
(P1-5, 6)
ATC serial input B-A/B-B ARINC 429 serial data bus, contains ATC tuning data words.
(P1-1, 2)
ATC serial input C-A/C-B ARINC 429 serial data bus, contains ATC tuning data words.
(P1-9, 10)
Altitude serial input A-A/A-B ARINC 429 serial data bus, contains altitude data words.
(P1-21, 22)

Altitude serial input B-A/B-B ARINC 429 serial data bus, contains altitude data words.
(P1-17, 18)
On/standby xfeed in (P1-3) A ground applied to this pin indicates cross-side CAD-870G and TDR-90 operation. If
burst mode is active, a ground input makes the on/standby output (P1-22) open,
placing the TDR-90 in standby.
Transponder reply (P2-15) A ground applied to this pin indicates TDR-90 reply to an interrogation.
SID (P1-12) Grounding this pin enables the CAD-870G to accept and process data from the
ARINC 429 bus inputs that contain a source/destination identifier of 2.
Opening the input to this pin enables the CAD-870G to accept and process data from
the ARINC 429 bus inputs that contain a source/destination identifier of 1.
Self-test (P1-24) Holding this pin at ground potential enables the CAD-870G and TDR-90 test modes.
Burst tune enable (P1-8) With this pin grounded, the CAD-870G accepts burst tuning data at ports A and C,
and continuous or burst data at port B. When continuous data is at port B, all data
at ports A and C are ignored. Opening the input enables continuous tuning only at
ports A and B.
ATC port select (P1-4) Grounding this pin enables the CAD-870G to receive ATC tuning data only at port A.
Leaving this pin open enables the CAD-870G to receive ATC tuning data only at port
B.
Note
The ATC port select input is inhibited when the BURST tune enable input is con-
nected to ground.
*Alt port select (P1-7) Grounding this pin forces the CAD-870G to accept continuous ARINC 429 altitude
data words only from altitude port A (cross-side).
Opening the input defers port selection on continuous ARINC 429 altitude data to bit
14 of the ARINC 429 ATC code input (031) word.
This pin has no effect if burst mode is selected.
*Alt port SDI echo select (P1-11) Grounding this pin (alt SDI echo on) makes the CAD-870G echo the SDI in the
transmitted ARINC 203 altitude word, ignoring the UNIT IDENT SEL (SDI discrete
P1-12) strapping.
Grounding P1-11 (alt SDI echo off) makes the CAD-870G echo the “all call” SDI (SDI
= 0) whenever the SDI of the received ARINC 203 altitude word does not match the
UNIT IDENT SEL discrete.
In either case, if the SDI in the received ARINC 203 altitude word matches the
UNIT IDENT SEL discrete, the CAD-870G will echo the matching SDI.
Suppression in/out (P1-14) This is the TDR-90 suppression blanking pulse feedthrough input.
Digital outputs
Serial output A-A, A-B (P1-25, 26) ARINC 429 low-speed serial data bus; contains ATC tuning data words, altitude data
Serial output B-A, B-B (P1-29, 30) ARINC 429 low-speed serial data bus; contains ATC tuning data words, altitude data

Discrete outputs
Mode A code B4 (P2-23) A ground at these pins indicates an active (set) output.
Mode C code B4 (P2-27) A ground at these pins indicates an active (set) output.
Mode C code D4 (P2-28)
Test (P2-2) A ground on this pin enables the TDR-90 test mode.
On/standby (P1-22) A ground on this pin enables TDR-90 operation. An open on this pin places the TDR-
90 in the standby mode.
Alt rep on/off (P1-37) A ground on this pin enables the TDR-90 to transmit altitude data.
Ident (P2-16, P1-16) +5 V dc at these pins enables the TDR-90 identification function.
On/standby xfeed out (P1-15) A ground on this pin disables cross-side TDR-90 operation. An open output places
the cross-side TDR-90 in standby mode. An open output indicates a CAD-870G
failure.
Fault monitor (P1-28) +28 V dc on this pin indicates normal CAD-870G operation. An open output indicates
a CAD-870G failure.
Suppression in/out (P2-30) TDR-90 suppression blanking pulse feedthrough output.
*These functions are available only in CAD-870G CPN 622-7695-001 with SB 1 installed and in all CPN 622-7695-002 units.
Table 1-26. CTL-22/22A/32/32A/62/62A/92/92A Controls, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
FAA TSO- C37c, C34d, C36d, C38c, C40b, C66b, C41c, C74c
RTCA document DO-160A
EUROCAE MPS/WG 8/1/71
EUROCAE ED-14A
DEUTSCHE BUNDESPOST FTZ A446R2010
Environmental DO-160A, categories /A2C1/B/PKS/EXXXXXZ/BZ/AZZ; EUROCAE ED-14A

ADDENDUM 8
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds CTL-22C equipment specifications to Table 1-26. Added text appears in bold type.
P/O Table 1-26. CTL-22/22A/22C/32/32A/62/62A/92/92A Controls, Equipment Specifications.
SOLDER CRIMP
MATING CONNECTORS CANNON TYPE (COLLINS PART NO) (COLLINS PART NO)
CTL-22/22A/22C MS3116E20-41SW 371-6108-000 359-0305-570
CTL-32/32A MS3116E20-41S 371-6107-000 359-0305-560
CTL-62/62A MS3116E20-41SX 371-6109-000 359-0305-580
CTL-92/92A MS3116E20-41SY 371-6110-000 359-0305-590
Addendum 8
523-0772719-08711A (Facing Page 1-45)
Physical
Size
Height 66.68 ±0.51 mm (2.625 ±0.20 in) max
Width 60.32 ±0.51 mm (2.375 ±0.20 in) max
Length 190.92 mm (7.519 in) max (without mating connector)
Behind panel 149.2 mm (5.875 in) max, 176.8 mm (6.96 in) max to end of mating connector shell
Weight 0.54 kg (1.2 lb) max
Mounting Panel mounted, front or rear
SOLDER CRIMP
MATING CONNECTORS CANNON TYPE (COLLINS PART NO) (COLLINS PART NO)
CTL-22/22A MS3116E20-41SW 371-6108-000 359-0305-570
CTL-32/32A MS3116E20-41S 371-6107-000 359-0305-560
CTL-62/62A MS3116E20-41SX 371-6109-000 359-0305-580
CTL-92/92A MS3116E20-41SY 371-6110-000 359-0305-590
Environmental
Temperature range
Storage –55 to +85 °C (–67 to +185 °F)
Cooling Convection
Shocks
Operational 6g
0.2 in da, 5 to 14 Hz; 2 g, 14 to 44 Hz
0.02 in da, 44 to 54 Hz; 3 g, 54 to 2000 Hz
Electrical
Power requirements
Input power (Refer to Table 2-2, Table +27 V dc (16 to 32) at 0.25 A
2-3, Table 2-4, and Table 2-5 in CTL-X2
installation section for pin input/output
information.)
Lighting
Power 5 V ac/dc, 350 mA or 28 V dc, 100 mA
Color Blue-white
Panel
Color Gray or black

Display
Type Gas discharge
Brightness control Automatic or by external potentiometer
Input/output
Electrical EIA RS-422A
Format Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB)
Frequency NORMAL STRAP OPTION (P1-m grounded)
COMM 118.000 to 135.975 MHz 118.000 to 151.975 MHz
NAV 108.000 to 117.95 MHz Adds 133.00 to 135.95 MHz
DME 200 paired channels Adds 52 unpaired channels
ADF 190 to 1799.5 kHz 2179 to 2185 kHz
XPDR 0000 to 7777 code —
Frequency storage capacity
COMM Six frequencies besides active and preset
NAV Four frequencies besides active and preset
ADF Four frequencies besides active and preset
XPDR One preset code besides the active code
Channel spacing
COMM 25 kHz (Display automatically suppressed when only 50-kHz channels are needed.)
NAV 50 kHz
ADF 500 Hz
Table 1-27 . CTL-23 Control, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
FAA TSO- C34e, C35d, C36e, C37c, C38c, C40c, C66b
RTCA documents DO-160B, DO-178A
EUROCAE ED-47A, 1/WG 7/70, ED-46A, ED-23A, ED-22B, MPS/WG 8/1/71
Environmental DO-160B categories /A2C1/B/PKS/EXXXXXZ/BZ/AZZ (refer to table 8-3 in the ap-
pendix section in part B for environmental qualifications form and categories);
EUROCAE ED-14B
Software DO-178A, EUROCAE ED-12A
Physical
Size
Height 66.68 ±0.51 mm (2.625 ±0.20 in)
Width 60.32 ±0.51 mm (2.375 ±0.20 in)
Length 190.92 mm (7.519 in) max (without mating connector)

ADDENDUM 11
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet supersedes sheet 7 of addendum 8.
Channel spacing
COMM 25 kHz (Display automatically suppressed when only 50-kHz channels are needed.) The
CTL-22C provides 8.33-kHz tuning between 118.000 and 136.992 MHz when P1-p is
open.
NAV 50 kHz
ADF 500 Hz
Addendum 11
10 Feb 1998 Sheet 1 of 1
523-0772719-0B711A (Facing Page 1-46)
ADDENDUM 8
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

Channel spacing
COMM 25 kHz (Display automatically suppressed when only 50-kHz channels are needed.) The
CTL-22C provides both 8.33- and 25- kHz tuning between 118.000 and 136.975 MHz
when P1-p is grounded.
NAV 50 kHz
ADF 500 Hz
Addendum 8
523-0772719-08711A (Facing Page 1-46)
ADDENDUM 19
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds CTL-23C discrete/strap input to Table 1-27.
P/O Table 1-27. CTL-23/23C Control, Equipment Specifications.
Discrete/strap inputs
25-/8.33-kHz Knob Sel (P1-p) (CTL-23C Gnd (0 to +2 V dc) = 25-kHz operation selected
only)
Addendum 19
523-0772719-0K711A (Facing Page 1-47)
Behind panel 149.32 mm (5.879 in) max; 176.8 mm (6.96 in) max to end of mating connector shell

Mating Connector COLLINS
CANNON TYPE PART NUMBER
SOLDER MS3116E20-41S 371-6107-000
CRIMP MS3126E20-41S 359-0305-560
Cooling Convection
Electrical
Power requirements (P1-G, t) +27 V dc (16 to 32) at 7.0 watts max
Lighting
Power (P1-A, 5 V lighting; P1-r 28 V 5 V ac/dc, 350 mA or 28 V dc, 100 mA
lighting)
Color Blue-white
Display type Gas discharge
Brightness control Eternal low impedance 0-5 V dc source. Characteristics of the dimming bus voltage
are:
0 to 0.7 V dc Maximum display intensity
0.7 to 1.5 V dc Minimum display intensity
1.5 to 4.0 V dc Approximately linear change from min to max intensity
> 4.0 V dc Maximum display intensity
Input/output
Electrical EIA RS-422A
Format Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB)
Discrete/strap inputs
Comm 3 select (P1-K) Gnd (0 to +2.0 V dc) = Comm 3 selected, open (> 100 kΩ) = Comm 1 or 2 selected.
Radio 1/2 select (P1-b) Gnd (0 to +2.0 V dc) = side 2 selected, open (> 100 kΩ) = side 1 selected
Com extended freq strap (P1-m) Gnd (0 to +2.0 V dc) = upper Comm freq limit 136.975 or 151.975 MHz dependent on
upper tuning limit of Comm, open (> 100 kΩ) = upper Comm frequency limit is
135.975 MHz
Unpaired DME channel select (P1-F) Gnd (0 to +2.0 V dc) = unpaired DME channel enabled (133.00 - 135.95 MHz), open
(> 100 kΩ) = 108.00 to 117.95 MHz (normal selectable range)
Marker sensitivity (P1-d) Gnd (0 to +2.0 V dc) = high sensitivity selected, open (> 100 kΩ) = low sensitivity se-
lected
DME hold (P1-J) Gnd (0 to +2.0 V dc) = DME hold, open (> 100 kΩ) = DME normal (not hold)
Nav test inhibit (P1-c) Gnd (0 to +2.0 V dc) = nav test inhibited, open (> 100 kΩ) = nav test enabled
CSDB serial inputs
Port 1 (P1-U, V) 2-wire lo-speed CSDB data input port will accept only VHF com frequency data (label
11) with ident code matching that of the CTL-23.
Port 2 (P1-Z, a) 2-wire lo-speed CSDB data input port will accept only NAV data (label 21) with ident
code matching that of the CTL-23.

Discrete outputs
CSDB select out #1 (P1-B) Less than 0.5 V dc, (100 mA max) = CSDB mode, open (> 100 kΩ) = ARINC 429 mode
CSDB select out #2 (P1-C) Less than 0.5 V dc, (100 mA max) = CSDB mode, open (> 100 kΩ) = ARINC 429 mode
DME hold (P1-H) Less than 0.5 V dc, (100 mA max) = not hold (normal), open (> 100 kΩ, open collec-
tor) = DME hold
Switched +28 V dc (P1-k) Open = standby; + 28 v dc = on
Relay control (P1-j) Less than 0.5 V dc, (200 mA max) = ON or SQ OFF mode; open (>100 kΩ) = OFF or
STBY mode
CSDB serial output
Port 1 (P1-R, S) 2-wire lo-speed CSDB data output port used for controlling the associated COMM,
NAV and DME. Port is active only in the “ON” and “SQ OFF” switch positions of the
CTL-23.
Port 2 (P1-M, N) Same as port 1. The CTL-23 has a single CSDB serial data output stream, supplied
through two independent port drivers (Ports 1 and 2).
Table 1-28. DDA-42 Distance Data Adapter, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
FAA TSO- C66
RTCA document DO-160A (environmental)
RTCA document DO-178 (software)
EUROCAE ED-14A
Environmental DO-160A, categories /A2E1/B/JY/EXXXXXZ/BZ/AZZ
Physical
Size
Height 127 mm (5.00 in)
Width 83.82 mm (3.33 in)
Depth 25.4 mm (1.00 in)
Weight, unit 0.23 kg (0.5 lb)
Mounting Bulkhead mounted by a special mount (CPN 653-9015-001)

Connector
P1, unit MD50M500V40-59 (CPN 371-0605-050)
J1, mating DDMA50S-A183-F0 (CPN 371-0213-050) which can be obtained as part of the con-
nector kit (CPN 653-9014-002). Refer to the DDA-42 installation section for more in-
formation.
Environmental
Temperature range

Table 1-28. DDA-42 Distance Data Adapter, Equipment Specifications.
Storage –55 to +85 °C (–67 to +185 °F)

Altitude 21 300 m (70 000 ft)
Cooling Convection
Shocks
Operational 6g
0.2 in da, 5 to 14 Hz; 2 g, 14 to 44 Hz; 0.02 in da, 44 to 55 Hz; 3 g, 55 to 2000 Hz

Electrical
Power requirements (P1-50) 7.5 Ω nominal (0.27 A at +27.5 V dc)
Inputs
Digital (P1-10, 9) Commercial Standard Digital Bus (RS-422) from DME-42
Channel select straps (P1-2, 3, 20, 21) These straps determine which DME-42( ) channel is sensed by the DDA-42 to pro-
duce the three different distance data outputs.
Outputs
Pulse pair (P1-35, 19) 12.359 ms per nmi (+50 ms for relay station delay time) (±0.3 ms accuracy over full
input range)
Analog (P1-12, 11) +40 mV/nmi, 256 nmi max for valid data; 0.0 ±0.012 V dc for invalid data (Accuracy
is ±0.3 nmi ±1% range.)
6-wire ARINC 568, 32-bit serial distance word; 256 nmi max for valid data (Accuracy is
Data (P1-5, 23) ±0.01 nmi.)
Clock (P1-4, 36)
Sync (P1-6, 7)
Flag (P1-34) DME data valid = greater than +18.0 V dc
DME data invalid = less than +4.0 V dc
Grounds
(P1-26, 27, 28, 29, 38, 48)
Shields
(P1-18, 22, 24, 37)
Keying plugs
(P1-39, 46)
Table 1-29. DME-42 Receiver/Transmitter, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
FAA TSO- C66b
RTCA documents DO-151A, DO-160A, DO-178
EUROCAE MPS-WG 8/1/71, ED-14A

ARINC characteristics 410 (tuning), 568-5 (serial output)

Environmental DO-160A, categories /A2E1/B/JY/EXXXXXZ/BZ/AZZ; ED-14A
Physical
Size ½ ATR short, dwarf
Length 353.3 mm (14.0 in) max overall
Mounting Remote mounted in UMT-13 (preferred) or 390R-20 mount (alternate)
Unit connector CPN 634-2698-001 (shell only)
Mating connector Thinline II connector CPN 634-1112-001
TNC (rf connector) (Refer to DME installation section for rf connectors and installa-
tion kit information.)
Environmental
Temperature range
Storage –55 to +85 °C (–67 to +185 °F)
Cooling Convection
Relative humidity Category B
Shocks
Operational 6 g (11 ms duration)
Vibration Categories P, K, and S
Electrical
Power requirements
Input power (P1-60) +27 V dc 18 W
Power gnd (P1-59)
Channels 252 — VORTAC, DME, or TACAN
Frequency control (tuning)
CSDB (P1-54, 55) Pro Line II RS-422A serial digital bus
or
2-out-of-5 (P1-11, 12, 19, 27, 28, 32, 35, ARINC 410
42, 43, 44, 51, 52)
Serial/2-out-of-5 strap (P1-48, 50) Open = greater than 100 kΩ; ground = less than 1.0 V dc (Refer to DME installation
section strap options, Table 2-4, for additional information.)
Data output
Analog (P1-36, 40) +40 mV/nmi, 256 nmi max

CSDB digital data CSDB serial data bus (dual output); contains distance, ground speed, time-to-station,
No 1 (P1-1, 2) decoded station ident, and diagnostics
No 2 (P1-47, 46)
6-wire serial data ARINC 568, 32-bit serial distance word
Data (P1-31, 30)
Sync (P1-39, 38);
Clock (P1-23, 24)
Accuracy
Distance
CSDB serial data ±0.1 nmi ±0.1% range, each of three channels, 300 nmi max
6-wire serial data ±0.1 nmi ±0.1% range, channel 1 or 2 only, 256 nmi max
Analog ±0.3 nmi ±1% range, channel 1 or 2 only, 256 nmi max
Ground speed ±1% or ±1 knot, whichever is greater, 999 knots max
Time-to-station ±1 min up to a max of 120 min
Distance loading Max of five standard analog loads at 20 kΩ each or a max effective load of 4 kΩ
Sensitivity –85 dBm with station reply eff = 70% min
Selectivity 6 dB max sensitivity variation for input signal within ±150 kHz of assigned fre-
quency
Frequency stability Less than ±100 kHz deviation from tuned frequency
Audio ident output 16 V p-p (adjustable) min output capability; 600 Ω nom, 1367 Hz nom (Audio output
Chan 1 (P1-15, 16) on channels 1 and 2 only.)
Chan 2 (P1-5, 4)
DME flag (P1-10) Greater than +25 V dc = valid; less than 1.0 V dc = invalid
RF output characteristics
Power output 300 W min
Pulse-pair uniformity Not more than 1 dB difference
Pulse-pair spacing X channels 12 ±0.5 µs; Y channels 36 ±0.5 µs
Interrogation rate Search = 27 pp/s, nom each channel; track = 7 pp/s, nom each channel
Frequency 960 to 1215 MHz, 90% power within ±250 kHz of transmitter frequency
Suppression pulse input/output Input +7 to +70 volts; output pulse +19 to +35 volts; load, 300 to 2000 Ω with not
(P1-14, 13) more than 1850 pF shunt capacitance
Receiver characteristics
Reply p-p spacing tolerance Will break lock after 5 s if: X-channel spacing is less than 6 or more than 17 µs and
Y-channel spacing is less than 25 or more than 35 µs
Maximum input signal Operational –10 dBm; survival +20 dBm (with suppression signal provided)
Memory tracking 12 ±2 s
Lock-on time 1 s max for signals at least –60 dBm and 3 s max for signals not less than –85 dBm
Tracking velocity 1000 knots max
Duplicate channel rejection with:
At least 8 dB diff Tracks stronger signal
Less than 8 dB diff Audio ident garbled

Cw interference rejection Maintains lock in presence of cw signal of –40 dBm over desired signal and at least 3
MHz difference in frequency
Adjacent channel rejection Signal strength 42 dB above tracking signal but not exceeding –10 dBm at desired
signal strengths from –10 dBm to lock-on
Self-test initiation Self-test button on CTL-32 supplies self-test bit on CSDB bus to DME.
Self-test button on 313N-4D or similar control supplies a ground to DME-42 P1-26.
(Self-test from the serial bus tests channels 1, 2, and 3; self-test by a ground on P1-
26 only tests channel 1.)
Self-test outputs
Cycle length Approximately 10 s in duration
CSDB digital outputs Distance, 100 nmi, if valid; GS, 100 knots, if valid; TTS, 60 min, if valid; diagnostic,
AOK, if valid, or fault code, if invalid
Analog outputs Distance 0.0 nmi; flag, valid; ident (audio channel 1) AOK, if valid
Certification
FAA TSO- C66b
EUROCAE MPS-WG 8/1/71, ED-14A, ED-12
DEUTSCHE BUNDESPOST FTZ LBA400209X

ARINC characteristics 410 (tuning)
Environmental DO-151A, DO-160A, categories /A2E1/B/JY/EXXXXXZ/BZ/AZZ; ED-14A
Software DO-178 “Essential” category
Physical
Size ½ ATR short, dwarf
Length 355.6 mm (14.0 in) max overall
Mounting Remote mounted in UMT-13 (preferred) or 390R-20 mount (alternate)
Unit connector CPN 634-2698-001 (shell only)
Mating connector Thinline II connector CPN 634-1112-001
TNC (rf connector) (Refer to DME installation section for rf connectors and installa-
tion kit information.)
Environmental
Temperature range

Storage –55 to +85 °C (–67 to +185 °F)

Cooling Convection
Shocks
Operational 6g
0.02 in da, 5 to 14 Hz; 2 g, 14 to 44 Hz; 0.02 in da, 44 to 55 Hz; 3 g, 55 to 2000 Hz

Electrical
Power requirements
Input power (P1-60) +27 V dc 18 Ω
Power gnd (P1-59)
Channels 252 — VORTAC, DME, or TACAN
Frequency control (tuning) CSDB or ARINC 429 (Refer to DME installation section,
Figure 2-4, for CSDB and ARINC 429 tuning options.)
Data output
CSDB digital data CSDB serial data bus (dual output); contains distance, ground speed, time-to-station,
No 1 (P1-1, 2) decoded station ident, and diagnostics
No 2 (P1-47, 46)
ARINC 429 digital data ARINC 429 serial data bus (dual output); contains distance, ground speed, time-to-
1A (P1-31, 30) station, decoded station ident, and diagnostics
1B (P1-39, 38)
Accuracy
Distance
CSDB and ARINC 429 serial data ±0.1 nmi ±0.1% range, each of three channels, 300 nmi max
Ground speed ±1% or ±1 knot, whichever is greater, 999 knots max
Time-to-station ±1 min up to a max of 120 min
Distance loading Max of five standard analog loads at 20 kΩ each or a max effective load of 4 kΩ
Sensitivity –85 dBm with station reply eff = 70% min
Selectivity 6 dB max sensitivity variation for input signal within ±150 kHz of assigned fre-
quency
Frequency stability Less than ±100 kHz deviation from tuned frequency
Audio ident output 16 V p-p (adjustable) min output capability; 600 Ω nom, 1367 Hz nom (Audio output
Chan 1 (P1-15, 16) on channels 1 and 2 only.)
Chan 2 (P1-5, 4)
Fault monitor (DME flag) (P1-10) Greater than +25 V dc = valid; less than 1.0 V dc = invalid
RF output characteristics
Power output 300 W min
Pulse-pair uniformity Not more than 1 dB difference
Pulse-pair spacing X channels 12 ±0.5 ms; Y channels 36 ±0.5 ms

Interrogation rate Search = 27 pp/s, nom each channel; track = 7 pp/s, nom each channel
Frequency L-band, 960 to 1215 MHz, 90% power within ±250 kHz of transmitter frequency
Suppression pulse input/output Input pulse +7 to +70 volts, output pulse +19 to +35 volts; load, 300 to 2000 Ω with
(P1-14, 13) not more than 1850 pF shunt capacitance
Receiver characteristics
Reply p-p spacing tolerance Will break lock after 5 s if: X-channel spacing is less than 5 or more than 17 µs and
Y-channel spacing is less than 25 or more than 35 µs
Maximum input signal Operational –10 dBm; survival +20 dBm (with suppression signal provided)
Memory tracking 12 ±2 s
Lock-on time 1 s max for signals at least –60 dBm and 3 s max for signals not less than –85 dBm
Tracking velocity 1000 knots max
Duplicate channel rejection with:
At least 8 dB diff Tracks stronger signals
Less than 8 dB diff Audio ident garbled
Cw interference rejection Maintains lock-in presence of cw signal of –40 dBm over desired signal and at least 3
MHz difference in frequency
Adjacent channel rejection Signal strength 42 dB above tracking signal but not exceeding –10 dBm at desired
signal strengths from –10 dBm to lock-on
Self-test initiation Self-test button on CTL-32 supplies self-test bit on CSDB data bus to the DME. Self-
test button on ARINC 429 control supplies a self-test bit on the ARINC 429 data bus
to the DME. Self-test from optional remote self-test switch to the DME-442 P1-26
(Self-test from the serial bus tests channels 1, 2, and 3; self-test by a ground on P1-
26 only tests channel 1.)
Self-test outputs
Cycle length Approximately 10 s in duration
CSDB and ARINC 429 digital outputs Distance, 100 nmi, if valid; GS, 100 knots, if valid; TTS, 60 min, if valid; diagnostic,
AOK if valid or fault code if invalid; and ident (audio channel 1), AOK if valid
Table 1-31. IND-42( ) DME Indicator, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
FAA TSO- C66b
EUROCAE MPS-WG 8/1/71, ED-14A
Environmental DO-160A, categories /A2C1/B/PKS/EXXXXXZ/BZ/AZA; ED-14A
Physical
Size 3-ATI case


Unit connector Positronic Industries, Inc.; MD25MFBOV, CPN 371-0605-030
Mating connector Crimp: shell, Cannon DBMA25S-A183-FO (CPN 371-0213-030); hood/latch,
Positronic Industries, Inc. MD25-000-J-VL (CPN 371-0399-260); contacts (qty 25),
Cannon 031-1007-067 (CPN 371-0213-110)
Solder: shell, Cannon DBM-25S (CPN 371-0221-000); hood/latch, Positronic Indus-
tries, Inc. MD25-000-J-VL (CPN 371-0399-260)
Environmental
Temperature range
Storage –55 to +85 °C (–67 to +185 °F)
Cooling Convection
Shocks
Operational 6g
Hz; 2 g, 14 to 44 Hz; 0.02 in da, 44 to 54 Hz; 3 g, 54 to 2000 Hz
Electrical
Power requirement (P1-13, 25) +27.5 V dc (+16 to +32 V dc), 4.0 W
Lighting power 28 V dc lighting 100 mA; 5 V ac/dc lighting 350 mA
28 V dc (P1-14)
5 V ac/dc (P1-1)
Lighting common (P1-15)
Input signal (P1-4, 5) CSDB serial digital data from DME
Display Gas discharge
Brightness control (P1-10) Automatic or external. External brightness controlled by connecting together similar
pins (P1-10) on other Pro Line II IND’s or CTL’s or by connecting P1-10 to an exter-
nal potentiometer.
Display range
Distance 0.0 to 999 nmi (Pro Line II data limited to 512 nmi)
Ground speed 0 to 999 knots
Time-to-station 0 to 199 min
Annunciators
IND-42A
*1 2 3 Sequentially controlled by the channel (CH) button to indicate which DME channel
is providing the information being displayed in the numeric and alphanumeric dis-
plays.

IND-42C
12 Controlled by internal strapping to indicate which DME channel is providing the in-
formation being displayed (IND-42C cannot display channel 3).
NM Automatically illuminates after power on when valid DME data is available. Indi-
cates that the numbers displayed in the numeric display are slant range DME dis-
tance in nautical miles.
HLD Indicates that DME hold has been selected on the CTL-32 NAV Control, by an exter-
nal switch, or by interruption of the frequency common line if parallel tuning is used.
KT Indicates that the value displayed in the alphanumeric display is the computed rate
of change of DME distance.
MIN Indicates that the value displayed in the alphanumeric display is the computed time-
to-station in minutes.
ID Automatically illuminates after power on. The DME ident is transmitted once every
30 s and it is possible that 2 min could elapse before the station ident is displayed in
the alphanumeric display. The station identifier is usually three letters but can be
two, three, or four letters, depending on the type of facility being received.
*Channel 3 can be strap enabled (open = inhibited).
Table 1-32. ANT-42 L-Band Antenna, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
FAA TSO- C66b, C74c
RTCA document DO-160A
Environmental DO-160A, categories /E1B/JLY/XRHXXXXXXXX
Physical
Size
Flange (oval) 11.53 x 4.45 cm (4.54 x 1.75 in)
Weight 0.14 kg (0.3 lb) max; 0.1 kg (0.22 lb) nominal
Environmental
Temperature range
Storage –65 to +85 °C (–85 to +185 °F)
Relative humidity 95% at +65 °C (+149 °F), cycled exposure for 10 days
Vibration
Category J, L 5 to 55 Hz: 0.02 in, da
55 to 2000 Hz: 3 g
Category Y 5 to 14 Hz; 0.2 in, da
14 to 200 Hz: 2 g

Table 1-32. ANT-42 L-Band Antenna, Equipment Specifications.
Frequency range 960 to 1220 MHz

Vswr 1025 to 1150 MHz: 1.3:1
960 to 1220 MHz: 1.5:1
Input impedance 50 Ω, nom
Radiation pattern Equivalent to λ/4, monopole
Polarization Vertical
Maximum power input 2500 W peak; 20 W average
Mounting Flat surfaces

Gasket CPN 018-1394-110
Screws (three reqd) No 8, 100° flathead, stainless steel
Connectors, mating TNC, straight to RG-393 coax (CPN 857-1511-010)
Table 1-33. 237Z-1 L-Band Antenna, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
FAA TSO- C66
RTCA document DO-99
Environmental DO-99, cat A
Physical
Size
Flange (oval) 11.4 x 4.45 cm (4.50 x 1.75 in)
Weight 91 g (0.2 lb) nom
Environmental
Temperature range
Storage –62 to +71 °C (–79 to +167 °F)
Relative humidity 0 to 100% condensation
Altitude 0 to 15 200 m (0 to 50 000 ft)
Vibration 1.52 mm (0.06 in) magnitude, 10 to 500 Hz
Shock 15 g for 10 ms
Frequency range 960 to 1215 MHz
Vswr 1025 to 1150 MHz: less than 1.2:1
960 to 1025 MHz: less than 1.75:1 over operating temperature range
Radiation pattern Equivalent to λ/4, monopole

Table 1-33. 237Z-1 L-Band Antenna, Equipment Specifications.
Polarization Vertical
Maximum power input 2500 W peak; 5 W average
Mounting Flat surfaces
Gasket (supplied on antenna) CPN 548-3252-002
Screws (six reqd) No 6, roundhead, stainless steel
Connectors Type HN
RG-393/U or RG-8/U CPN: 357-9039-000 (straight) or 357-9559-000 (90°)

RG-142B/U Amphenol 82-534 (straight), automatic connector 101-H1100A (straight), or CPN
357-9870-000 (90°)
Table 1-34. MND-640 Multisensor Navigation Display, Equipment Specifications.
CHARACTERISTICS SPECIFICATIONS
SDD-640/640A/Sensor Display Driver
Certification
FAA
SDD-640 TSO-C6c, -C34e, -C36e, -C40b, -C41d, -C66b, -C104, -C113
SDD-640A TSO-C6d, -C34e, -35d, -C36e, -C37c, -C40c, -C41d, -C66b, -C74c, -C94a, -C104, -C113,
-C115
Environment
RTCA document DO-160B categories /F2B/B/JY/E1/XXXXXZ/BZ/AZAZAX
(Refer to table 8-4 in the appendix section of part B for additional information)
Physical
Size
Width 61 mm (2.42 in)
Length 317 mm (12.47 in)
Mounting UMT-11 Mount (CPN 622-5211-003), ¼-ATR, short, dwarf (Refer to the MND-640 in-
stallation section for additional information.)
Mating connectors Collins Thinline II, 60 pins (CPN 634-1112-001) (Refer to the MND-640 installation
section for additional information.)
Electrical
Power input (P1-57, P2-4) +28 V dc, 11 W nominal on SDD-640, 9 W nominal on SDD-640A; P1-57 is power
source to side one; P2-4 is power source to side two.
Power ground (P1-59, P2-2) Power return; P1-59 is power return for side one; P2-2 is power return for side two.
Chassis ground (P1-60, P2-1) P1-60 is chassis ground for side one; P2-1 is chassis ground for side two.

Strap options for the SDD-640 only
Strap 1 (No. 1 P1-37; No. 2 P2-24) Spares

Strap 3 (MLS 1 select) (P1-39) Strapped to common = No. 1 MLS 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 1 MLS port
not used
Strap 3 (MLS 2 select) (P2-22) Strapped to common = No. 2 MLS 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 2 MLS port
not used
Strap 4 (VOR 1 select) (P1-40) Strapped to common = No. 1 VOR 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 1 VOR port not
used
Strap 4 (VOR 2 select) (P2-21) Strapped to common = No. 2 VOR 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 2 VOR port not
used
Strap 5 (VLF 1 select) (P1-41) Strapped to common = No. 1 VLF 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 1 VLF port not
used
Strap 5 (VLF 2 select) (P2-20) Strapped to common = No. 2 VLF 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 2 VLF port not
used
Strap 6 (IAPS FMS 1 select) (P1-42) Strapped to common = No. 1 IAPS FMS 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 1 IAPS
FMS port not used
Strap 6 (IAPS FMS 2 select) (P2-19) Strapped to common = No. 2 IAPS FMS 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 2 IAPS
FMS port not used
Strap 7 (DME 1 select) (P1-43) Strapped to common = No. 1 DME 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 1 DME port
not used
Strap 7 (DME 2 select) (P2-18) Strapped to common = No. 2 DME 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 2 DME port
not used
Strap 8 (ADF 1 select) (P1-44) Strapped to common = No. 1 ADF 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 1 ADF port not
used
Strap 8 (ADF 2 select) (P2-17) Strapped to common = No. 2 ADF 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 2 ADF port not
used
Strap common Side No. 1 strap commons are as follows: P1-3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23, 27, 31, 35, and 47.
Side No. 2 strap commons are as follows: P2-14, 26, 30, 34, 38, 42, 46, 50, 54, and 58.
To provide reliable lightning protection, each strap is to be assigned a unique return
pin. Always strap to the return pin, never strap directly to ground.
Strap options for the SDD-640A only
Strap 1 (Burst Tune 1 select) (P1-37) Strapped to common = No. 1 burst tune port selected; Strap open = No. 1 burst tune
port not used
Strap 1 (Burst Tune 2 select (P2-24) Strapped to common = No. 2 burst tune port selected; Strap open = No. 2 burst tune
port not used
Strap 2 (TACAN 1 select) (P1-38) Strapped to common = No. 1 TACAN 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 1 TACAN
429 port not used
Strap 2 (TACAN 2 select) (P2-23) Strapped to common = No. 2 TACAN 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 2 TACAN
429 port not used
Strap 3 (MLS 1 select) (P1-39) Strapped to common = No. 1 MLS 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 1 MLS 429
port not used
Strap 3 (MLS 2 select) (P2-22) Strapped to common = No. 2 MLS 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 2 MLS 429
port not used
Strap 4 (VOR/ILS 1 select) (P1-40) Strapped to common = No. 1 VOR/ILS 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 1 VOR/ILS
429 port not used

Strap options for the SDD-640A only (Cont)
Strap 4 (VOR/ILS 2 select) (P2-21) Strapped to common = No. 2 VOR/ILS 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 2 VOR/ILS
429 port not used
Strap 5 (VLF/ATC 1 select) (P1-41) Strapped to common = No. 1 VLF/ATC 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 1
VLF/ATC 429 port not used. Strap 10 selects VLF or ATC. Strap 10 strapped to
common = ATC selected; Strap 10 open = VLF selected.
Strap 5 (VLF/ATC 2 select) (P2-20) Strapped to common = No. 2 VLF/ATC 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 2
VLF/ATC 429 port not used: Strap 10 selects VLF or ATC. Strap 10 strapped to
common = ATC selected; Strap 10 open = VLF selected.
Strap 6 (IAPS FMS/VHF 1 select) (P1-42) Strapped to common = No. 1 IAPS FMS/VHF 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 1
IAPS FMS/VHF 429 port not used: Strap 10 selects IAPS FMS or VHF. Strap 10
strapped to common = VHF selected. Strap 10 open = IAPS FMS selected.
Strap 6 (IAPS FMS/VHF 2 select) (P2-19) Strapped to common = No. 2 IAPS FMS/VHF 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 2
IAPS FMS/VHF 429 port not used: Strap 10 selects IAPS FMS or VHF. Strap 10
strapped to common = VHF selected. Strap 10 open = IAPS FMS selected.
Strap 7 (DME 1 select) (P1-43) Strapped to common = No. 1 DME 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 1 DME 429
port not used
Strap 7 (DME 2 select) (P2-18) Strapped to common = No. 2 DME 429 port selected; Strap open = No. 2 DME 429
port not used
Strap 8 (ADF 1 select) (P1-44) Strapped to common = No. 1 ADF 429 port selected; strap open = No. 1 ADF port not
used
Strap 8 (ADF 2 select) (P2-17) Strapped to common = No. 2 ADF 429 port selected; strap open = No. 2 ADF port not
used
Strap 9 (No. 1 MAG/TRUE select) Strapped to common = True heading reference for No. 1 NAV display; Strap open =
Magnetic heading reference for No. 1 NAV display.
Strap 9 (No. 2 MAG/TRUE select) Strapped to common = True heading reference for No. 2 NAV display; Strap open =
Magnetic heading reference for No. 2 NAV display.
Strap 10 Side 1 (P1-32) Refer to Table 1-35 for configurations on strapping straps 10, 11, and 12.
Strap 11 Side 1 (P1-28)
Strap 10 Side 2 (P2-29) Refer to Table 1-35 for configurations on strapping straps 10, 11, and 12.
Strap 13 (P1-20), Strap 14 (P1-16), XTRK Straps 13 (P1-20) and 14 (P1-16) set the side 1 crosstrack deviation scale. The fol-
Dev Scale (side 1) lowing show the scaling for the different configurations when connecting strapping
13 or 14 to strap common.
STRAP 13 STRAP 14 EN ROUTE APPROACH
ground open 7.5 nmi/two dots 1.25 nmi/two dots
open ground 7.5 nmi/two dots 2 nmi/two dots
open open 10 nmi/two dots 2 nmi/two dots
Strap 13 (P2-41), Strap 14 (P2-45), XTRK No. 2 scale crosstrack deviation is the same as side 1.
Dev Scale (side 2)
Strap 16 (No. 1 P1-8; No. 2 P2-53)
Strap common Side No. 1 strap commons are as follows: P1-3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23, 27, 31, and 47.
Side No. 2 strap commons are as follows: P2-14, 30, 34, 38, 42, 46, 50, 54, and 58. To
provide reliable lightning protection, each strap is to be assigned a unique return
pin. Always strap to the return pin, never strap directly to ground.

SDD-640/640A Digital Inputs
Side 1 Heading 429 HS Bus A, B (P1-1, 2) Side 1 ARINC 429 high speed 2-wire heading input (source, AHRS/MCS);
Data transfer rate: 100 kBd/s; Input load 12 kΩ.
On SDD-640A units, words: AHRS DISCRETE (label 270); TRUE HEADING (label
314); MAGNETIC HEADING (label 320); ALONG HDG ACCELERATION (label
376); on bus.
On SDD-640A units, if label 376 is present, then label 270 is used as AHRS discrete
data. If label 376 is missing, the label 270 is not used.
On SDD-640 units, Word: MAGNETIC HEADING (label 320) on bus.
Side 2 Heading 429 HS Bus A, B (P2-60, 59) Characteristics same as Side 1.
Side 1 ADF 429 LS Bus A, B (P1-5, 6) Side 1 ARINC 429 low speed 2-wire ADF input (source, ADF-462); Data transfer
rate: 12.5 kBd/s; Input load 12 kΩ.
SDD-640A words: ADF FREQUENCY (label 032); ADF BEARING (label 162).
SDD-640 word: ADF BEARING (label 162).
Side 2 ADF 429 LS Bus A, B (P2-56, 55) Characteristics same as Side 1.
Side 1 DME 429 LS Bus A, B (P1-9, 10) Side 1 ARINC 429 low speed 2-wire DME input (source, DME-442); Data transfer
rate 12.5 kBd/s; Input load, 12 kΩ.
ARINC words: DME FREQUENCY (BCD) (label 035); DME DISTANCE (label 202);
DME IDENT (label 300).
If there are two DME’s connected to the SDD, DME 1 channel 1 data is used for left
side data and DME 2 channel 1 data is used for right side data.
If there is one DME connected to the SDD, DME channel 1 is used for left side data
and DME channel 2 is used for right side data.
Two DME’s are required if an MLS is connected to the SDD. DME channel 2 data is
used for DME distance in MLS format on the SDU-640( ).
Side 2 DME 429 LS Bus A, B (P2-52, 51) Characteristics same as Side 1
Side 1 IAPS FMS/VHF 429 Bus A, B (P1-13, Side 1 ARINC 429 low speed 2-wire IAPS FMS input or VHF COMM input, (source
14) VHF-422); Data transfer rate, 12.5 kBd/s; Input load, 12 kΩ.
If the SDD is strapped for configuration 7 or 8, (refer to Table 1-35), the following la-
bels are used from this port.
SDD-640A words: FMS WAYPOINT BEARING (mag ref) (label 115); MAGNETIC
VARIATION (label 147).
SDD-640 word: FMS WAYPOINT BEARING (mag ref) (label 115).
If the SDD is strapped for configuration 1, 2, 3, or 4, (refer to Table 1-35), the fol-
lowing label is used form this port.
SDD-640A word: VHF COMM FREQUENCY (label 030).
Side 2 IAPS FMS/VHF 429 Bus A, B (P2-48, Characteristics same as Side 1
47)
Side 1 VHF/ATC 429 Bus A, B (P1-17, 18) Side 1 ARINC 429 low speed 2-wire VLF input, (source CMA-764) or ATC input,
(source CAD-870); Data transfer rate, 12.5 kBd/s; Input load, 12 kΩ.
If the SDD is strapped for configuration 6, 7, 8, (refer to Table 1-35), the following
labels are used from this port.
SDD-640 and SDD-640A words: VLF SYSTEM STATUS (DISC) (label 270) VLF
PRESENT POSITION (LAT) (label 310); VLF PRESENT POSITION (LONG) (label
311); VLF GROUNDSPEED (label 312); VLF TRACK ANGLE (mag ref) (label 317).

SDD-640/640A Digital Inputs
If the SDD is strapped for configuration 7, (refer to Table 1-35), and strapped for low-
speed LRN data input, the following labels are used in addition to the above data.
SDD-640A words: VLF DESIRED TRACK ANGLE (mag ref) (label 114); VHF WAY-
POINT BEARING (mag ref) (label 115); VLF CROSSTRACK DISTANCE (label 116);
VLF MAGNETIC VARIATION (label 147; VLF DISTANCE TO WAYPOINT (label
251); VLF MODE WORD (label 276).
If the SDD is strapped for configuration 1, 2, 3, or 4, (refer to Table 1-35), the fol-
lowing labels are used from this port.
SDD-640A words: MODE S ATC BEACON CODE (label 016); ATC BEACON CODE
(label 031); ATC ALTITUDE (29.92) (label 203).
Side 2 VLF/ATC 429 Bus A, B (P2-44, 43) Characteristics same as Side 1.
Side 1 VOR/ILS 429 Bus A, B (P1-21, 22) Side 1 ARINC 429 low-speed 2-wire VOR/ILS input, (source VIR-432); Data transfer
rate, 12.5 kBd/s; Input load 12 kΩ.
SDD-640 and SDD 640A words: VOR/ILS FREQUENCY (BCD) (label 034); LOCAL-
IZER DEVIATION (label 173); GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (label 174); VOR BEAR-
ING (label 222).
Side 2 VOR/ILS 429 Bus A, B (P2-40, 39) Characteristics same as Side 1.
Side 1 MLS 429 Bus A, B (P1-25, 26) Side 1 ARINC 429 low-speed 2-wire MLS input; Data transfer rate, 12.5 kBd/s; Input
load, 12 kΩ.
SDD-640A words: MLS FREQUENCY (BCD) (label 036).
SDD-640 and SDD-640A words: MLS MAZ (label 153); MLS MAX SELECTABLE
GLIDEPATH (label 154); MLS MGP (label 155); MLS BASIC DATA WORD 2 (label
157); MLS LATERAL DEVIATION (label 173); MLS VERTICAL DEVIATION (label
174).
Side 2 MLS 429 Bus A, B (P2-36, 35) Characteristics same as Side 1.
Side 1 TCN Bus A, B (P1-29, 30) (SDD-640A Side 1 ARINC 429 low-speed 2-wire TACAN input (source TCN-500); Data transfer
only) rate, 12.5 kBd/s; Input load 12 kΩ.
SDD-640A words: TACAN DISTANCE (BCD) (label 201); TACAN BEARING (label
222).
Side 2 TCN Bus A, B (P2-32, 31) (SDD-640A Characteristics same as Side 1.
only)
Side 1 Burst Tune 429 Bus A, B (P1-33, 34) Side 1 ARINC 429 low-speed 2-wire Burst Tune input (source GAMA FMS); Data
(SDD-640A only) transfer rate, 12.5 kBd/s; Input load 12 kΩ.
If strap 1 (burst tune bus) is grounded, the following labels are used from this bus.
SDD-640A words: VHF COMM TUNE (label 030); ATC BEACON CODE (label 031);
ADF FREQ (label 032); VOR FREQ (label 034); DME FREQ (label 035).
Side 2 Burst Tune 429 Bus A, B (P2-28, 27) Characteristics same as Side 1.
(SDD-640A only)
Side 1 FMS (LRN) 429 HS Bus A, B (P1-55, Side 1 ARINC 429 high-speed 2-wire FMS input (source GAMA FMS); Data transfer
56) (SDD-640A only) rate, 100 kBd/s; Input load 12 kΩ.
If the SDD-640A is strapped for configuration 1, 2, or 3, (refer to Table 1-35), the
following labels are used from this bus.
Words: DESIRED TRACK ANGLE (true ref) (label 114); WAYPOINT BEARING
(true ref) (label 115); CROSSTRACK DISTANCE (label 116); MAGNETIC VARIA-
TION (label 147); DISTANCE TO WAYPOINT (label 251); SYSTEM STATUS (label
275); PRESENT POSITION (LAT) (label 310); PRESENT POSITION (LONG) (label
312); GROUNDSPEED (label 312); TRACK ANGLE (true ref) (label 313).

If the SDD-640A is strapped for configuration 6, (refer to Table 1-35), the following
labels are used from this bus.
Words: DESIRED TRACK ANGLE (mag ref) (label 114); WAYPOINT BEARING
(mag ref) (label 115); CROSSTRACK DISTANCE (label 116); MAGNETIC VARIA-
TION (label 147); PFD MODE WORD (label 163); DISTANCE TO WAYPOINT (label
251); FMC MODE WORD (label 275).
If strap 1 (burst tune bus) is open, the following labels are also used from this bus.
Words: VHF COMM FREQUENCY (label 030); ATC BEACON CODE (label 031);
ADF FREQUENCY (label 032); VOR FREQUENCY (label 034); DME FREQUENCY
(label 035).
Side 2 FMS (LRN) 429 HS Bus A, B (P2-6, Characteristics same as Side 1.
5) (SDD-640A only)
SDD-640/640A Logic Inputs
Side 1 Test (P1-49) Discrete 1-wire input from external switch (optional); Test = 0 to +3.5 V dc, sinking 4
mA; Normal = open (> +9 V dc).
Side 2 Test (P2-12) Discrete 1-wire input from external switch (optional); Test = 0 to +3.5 V dc, sinking 4
mA; Normal = open (> +9 V dc).
Side 1 SDU Fail Input (P1-51) Discrete 1-wire input from Sensor Display Unit (SDU-640A/B); SDU valid = 0 to +3.5
V dc, sinking 4 mA; SDU fail = open (> +9 V dc).
Side 2 SDU Fail Input (P2-10) Discrete 1-wire input from Sensor Display Unit (SDU-640A/B); SDU valid = 0 to +3.5
V dc, sinking 4 mA; SDU fail = open (> +9 V dc).
SDD-640/640A Digital Outputs
Side 1 SDD to SDU 429 Bus A, B (P1-45, ARINC 429 2-wire low-speed SDD to SDU output; Data transfer rate, 12.5 kBd/s;
46) Output impedance, 75 ±5 Ω.
Output words (BRN Data): VOR/ILS FREQUENCY (label: L 200; R 204); VOR
BEARING (label: L 100; R 104); LOCALIZER DEVIATION (label: L 300; R 304);
GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (label: L 040; R 044); DME FREQUENCY (label: L 240;
R 244); DME IDENT (CHAR 1-2) (label: L 340; R 344); DME IDENT (CHAR 3-4)
(label: L 020; R 024); ADF BEARING (label: L 220; R 224); WAYPOINT BEARING
(note 2) (label: L 120; R 124); CONFIGURATION A (note 3) (label: L 360; R 364);
MAGNETIC HEADING (label: L 010; R 010); VLF/FMS SYSTEM STATUS (note 4)
(label: L 210; R 214); DIAGNOSTIC WORD (note 3) (label: L 350; R 350); MLS LAT-
ERAL DEVIATION (label: L 310; R 314); MLS VERTICAL DEVIATION (label: L
050; R 054); TACAN BEARING (note 1) (label: L 230; R 234); FMS CROSSTRACK
DISTANCE (note 1) (label: L 330; R 334); FMS DESIRED TRACK (note 1, 2) (label: L
070; R 074); CONFIGURATION B (note 1, 3) (label: L 361; R 365).
Output words (BCD Data): DME DISTANCE (label: L 140; R 144); FMS DISTANCE
TO GO (note 1) (label: L 110; R 114); MLS MAZ (label: L 250; R 254); MLS MGP
(label: L 150; R 154); DME DISTANCE (CH 2) (label: L 030; R 034); VLF/FMS PRE-
SENT POSITION (LAT) (label: L 320; R 324); VLF/FMS PRESENT POSITION
(LONG) (label: L 060; R 064); VLF/FMS GROUNDSPEED (label: L 260; R 264);
VLF/FMS TRACK ANGLE (MAG) (label: L 160; R 164); TACAN DISTANCE (note 1)
(label: L 130; R 134).
Notes:
1. SDD-640A only
2. This data is converted to mag ref is the input is true ref.
3. This data is internally generated in the SDD.
4. This data is a combination of VLF status, VLF mode, FMS mode, and LRN status
words.

SDD-640/640A Digital Outputs (Cont)
Side 2 SDD to SDU 429 Bus A, B (P2-16, Characteristics same as Side 1.

15)
Side 1 SDD to RTU 429 Bus A, B (P1-53, ARINC 429 2-wire low-speed SDD to RTU, (source RTU-870A), output; Data transfer
54) (SDD-640A only) rate, 12.5 kBd/s; Output impedance, 75 ±5 Ω.
ARINC words: ATC CODE (MODE S) (label 016); VHF FREQUENCY (label 030);
ATC CODE (label 031); ADF FREQUENCY (label 032); VOR FREQUENCY (label
034); DME FREQUENCY (label 035); MLS CHANNEL (label 036); MLS MAZ (label
153); MLS MAX SELECTABLE GLIDEPATH (label 154); MLS MGP (label 155);
MLS DATA WORD 2 (label 157); ALTITUDE (label 203); AUTOTUNE MODE (label
270); COM TUNE (label 301); VOR TUNE (label 302); DME TUNE (label 303); ADF
TUNE (label 304); ATC TUNE (label 305); DIAGNOSTIC WORD (label 350); CON-
FIGURATION WORD A (label 360).
Side 2 SDD to RTU 429 Bus A, B (P2-8, 7) Characteristics same as Side 1.
SDD-640/640A Logic Outputs
Side 1 Channel Fail (P1-50) Discrete 1-wire output to warning system; Channel valid = 0 to +3.5 V dc, sinking 4
mA; Channel fail = open (> +9 V dc).
Side 2 Channel Fail (P2-11) Discrete 1-wire output to warning system; Channel valid = 0 to +3.5 V dc, sinking 4
mA; Channel fail = open (> +9 V dc).
SDU-640A/B Sensor Display Unit
Certification
FAA
SDU-640A TSO-C6c, -C34e, -C36e, -C40b, -C41d, -C66b, -C104, -C113
SDU-640B TSO-C6d, -C34e, -35d, -C36e, -C40c, -C41d, -C66b, -C94a, -C104, -C113, -C115
Environment
RTCA document DO-160B Categories /A2D1B/B/PKS/E1/XXXXXA/BZ/AZAZAX
(Refer to table 8-4 in the appendix section of Part B for additional information.)
Physical
Size
Width 107 mm (4.20 in)
Length 244 mm (9.59 in)
Mounting Front mounted on the flight instrument panel (Refer to the MND-640 installation
section for additional information.)
Mating connectors 15-pin D-subminiature, DAMA15S-A183-FO (CPN 371-0213-020) (Refer to the MND-
640 installation section for additional information.)
Electrical
Power input (P1-11) +28 V dc, 19 Ω nominal power source from aircraft power.
CRT dim control H, L (P1-6, 7) 0 to +28 V dc (source +28-dim bus)

SDU-640A/B Sensor Display Unit (Cont)
Power ground (P1-13) Power return

Chassis ground (P1-9)
SDU-640A/B Logic Output
SDU Fail (P1-8) Discrete 1-wire SDU output to SDD-640/640A; SDU valid = 0 to +3.5 V dc, sinking 4
mA; SDU fail = open (> +9 V dc).
SDU-640A/B Digital Inputs
SDD 429 Bus A, B (P1-3, 4) ARINC 429 2-wire low-speed SDD to SDU output; Data transfer rate, 12.5 kBd/s;
Output impedance, 75 ±5W.
Output words (BRN Data): VOR/ILS FREQUENCY (label: L 200; R 204); VOR
BEARING (label: L 100; R 104); LOCALIZER DEVIATION (label: L 300; R 304);
GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (label: L 040; R 044); DME FREQUENCY (label: L 240;
R 244); DME IDENT (CHAR 1-2) (label: L 340; R 344); DME IDENT (CHAR 3-4)
(label: L 020; R 024); ADF BEARING (label: L 220; R 224); WAYPOINT BEARING
(label: L 120; R 124); CONFIGURATION A (label: L 360; R 364); MAGNETIC
HEADING (label: L 010; R 010); VLF/FMS SYSTEM STATUS (label: L 210; R 214);
DIAGNOSTIC WORD (label: L 350; R 350); MLS LATERAL DEVIATION (label: L
310; R 314); MLS VERTICAL DEVIATION (label: L 050; R 054); *TACAN BEARING
(label: L 230; R 234); *FMS CROSSTRACK DISTANCE (label: L 330; R 334); *FMS
DESIRED TRACK (label: L 070; R 074); *CONFIGURATION B (label: L 361; R 365).
Output words (BCD Data): DME DISTANCE (label: L 140; R 144); *FMS DISTANCE
TO GO (label: L 110; R 114); MLS MAZ (label: L 250; R 254); MLS MGP (label: L
150; R 154); DME DISTANCE (CH 2) (label: L 030; R 034); VLF/FMS PRESENT
POSITION (LAT) (label: L 320; R 324); VLF/FMS PRESENT POSITION (LONG)
(label: L 060; R 064); VLF/FMS GROUNDSPEED (label: L 260; R 264); VLF/FMS
TRACK ANGLE (MAG) (label: L 160; R 164); *TACAN DISTANCE (label: L 130; R
134).
*SDD-640A only

Table 1-35. Configurations for Straps 10, 11, and 12.
Note 1 (SDD-640A):
BURST
FMS TUNE RTU
IAPS FMS/ VLF/ATC (LRN) (NOTE OUTPUT
CONFIG STRAPS VHF PORT PORT (LS) 2) (LS) ANNUNCIATION REMARKS
10 11 12 IAPS VHF VLF ATC HIS DATA

FMS (LS) (LS) (LS) PAGE PAGE
(LS)
1 0 0 0 X X X X X FMS FMS
2 0 0 1 X X X X X LRN LRN
3 0 1 0 X X X X X LNV LNV
4 0 1 1 X X X X X NO PG NO PG
5 1 0 0 NO PG NO PG Spare
6 1 0 1 X X FMS VLF
(note
3)
7 1 1 0 X VLF VLF FMS
bearing
from VLF
input port
8 1 1 1 X X NO PG VLF
Note 2: For configurations 1 through 4, radio burst tune data is received from the low-speed burst tune port for strap 1 connected to
strap common = “0” or radio burst tune data is received from the high-speed FMS (LRN) input port for strap 1 open = “1.”
For configurations 5 through 8, strap 1 is a “don’t care.”
Note 3: The FMS (LRN) high-speed input is programmed to receive non-GAMA 429 data that is unique to Collins IOC formats.
Note 4: Configuration 1 — The SDD receives FMS data on the FMS (LRN) high-speed input and receives radio tune data for ATC
and VHF COMM on the low-speed inputs. The SDD outputs radio tune data on the RTU bus. Radio tune burst data will
come from the high-speed FMS (LRN) input if strap 1 is open or from the low-speed burst tune input if strap 1 is grounded.
In this configuration, the SDU will annunciate FMS on the long-range NAV HSI and data pages.
Configuration 2 — Same as configuration 1 except the SDU annunciates LRN on the long-range NAV HSI and data pages.
Configuration 3 — Same as configuration 1 except the SDU annunciates LNV on the long-range NAV HSI and data pages.
Configuration 4 — Same as configuration 1 except the SDU does not display any long-range NAV HSI or data pages.
Configuration 5 — Spare
Configuration 6 — The SDD receives FMS data on the FMS (LRN) high-speed input. This data is from an IOC and contains
unique Collins FMS data words. The SDD receives VLF data from the VLF low-speed input. There is no radio tune data on
the RTU bus. In this configuration, the SDU annunciates FMS on the long-range NAV HSI page and VLF on the long-range
NAV data page.
Configuration 7 — The SDD does not read the FMS (LRN) high-speed input. The SDD receives FMS bearing and VLF/LRN
data from the VLF low-speed input. There is no radio tune data on the RTU bus. In this configuration, the SDU annunciates
VLF on the long-range NAV HSI page and long-range NAV data page.
Configuration 8 — The SDD does not read the FMS (LRN) high-speed input. The SDD receives FMS bearing from the IAPS
FMS low-speed input and VLF data from the VLF low-speed input. There is no radio tune data on the RTU bus. In this con-
figuration, the SDU annunciates VLF on the long-range NAV data page and there is no long-range NAV HSI page.

Table 1-36. RAC-870 Radio Altimeter Converter, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
FAA TSO- C87
RTCA documents DO-160A, DO-178
Environmental DO-160A, categories /A2E1/B/JY/EXXXXXZ/BZ/AZA; ED-14A
Physical
Size
Mounting Remote mounted using a special mount (CPN 653-9015-001)
Unit connector Positronics MD50M500V40-59 (CPN 371-0605-050)
Mating connector 50-pin subminiature rectangular, RD-50F00000 (CPN 371-0999-050) or equivalent
Environmental
Temperature range
Storage –55 to +85 °C (–67 to +185 °F)
Cooling Convection
Shocks
Operational 6g
Hz; 2 g peak, 14 to 44 Hz; 0.02 in da, 44 to 54 Hz; 3 g peak, 54 to 2000 Hz
Electrical
Power requirements
+27.5 V dc (P1-17) +27.5 V dc at 0.1 A (2.75 W) max
–15 V dc ref (P1-31) –15 V dc at 0.02 A (0.3 W) max (supplied by ALT-55B)
Analog inputs
Dc analog altitude 0 to +16.7 V dc, –6.1 to +793 m (–20 to +2600 ft)
+ (P1-34) Scale = 20 mV/ft from –6.1 to +152.6 m (–20 to 500 ft) and +10.4 V dc plus 3 mV/ft
– (P1-1) from +152.6 to +793 m (500 to 2600 ft)
Discrete inputs
Self-test in (P1-40) Ground (0.0 ±1.0 V dc) = test; open (greater than 100 kΩ) = normal operation
SDI (P1-7) Ground (0.0 ±1.0 V dc) = side no 2; open (greater than 100 kΩ) = side no 1
Calibration (This input is used only Ground (0.0 ±1.0 V dc) = calibration
during unit bench test.) (P1-43)

Table 1-36. RAC-870 Radio Altimeter Converter, Equipment Specifications.
FCS warn (P1-23) +28 V dc, 1 mA min current source = no warn; open = FCS warn
Self-test out (P1-29) Ground (0.0 ±1.0 V dc) = test, sinking a 4-mA min load; open (greater than 100 kΩ) =
normal operation
Digital outputs
Serial output 1-A, 1-B (P1-2, 3) ARINC 429 low-speed serial data bus; contains radio altimeter height data words
(label 164) and maintenance data words (label 350)
Table 1-37. RMI-36/BDI-36, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
FAA TSO- C6c
Environmental RTCA document DO-138 categories GAPAAAXXXXXX
Physical
Size RMI-36 BDI-36
Case ATI-3 per ARINC 408A ATI-3/4 per ARINC 408A
Height 85.5 mm (3.365 in) 105.8 mm (4.165 in)
Width 85.5 mm (3.365 in) 85.5 mm (3.365 in)
Length (from rear edge of mounting 186.0 mm (7.33 in) 186.0 mm (7.33 in)
flange to rear of case)
Weight (approx) 1.27 kg (2.8 lb) 1.6 kg (3.6 lb)
Mounting Front or rear panel mount
Mating connectors P1 = DDM-50S (CPN 371-0181-000) for solder connector;
DDMA50S-A183-FO (CPN 371-0213-110) for crimp connector.
Crimp contacts are CPN 371-0213-110.
P2 = (BDI-36 only) DBM-25S (CPN 371-0221-030) for solder connector;
DBMA25S-A183-FO (CPN 371-0213-030) for crimp
connector.
Crimp contacts are CPN 371-0213-110.
Colors
Pointer no 1 Day-Glo lightning yellow
Pointer no 2 Collins special green
HDG flag Day-Glo rocket red
Lubber line Day-Glo arc yellow
Numerals White
Background Black
Bezel, recessed area Lusterless black
Case, bezel Refer to Table 1-12 for RMI-36 and Table 1-13 for BDI-36.

Environmental
Temperature range
Operation –15 to +55 °C (+5 to +131 °F)

Exposure –54 to +71 °C (–66 to +160 °F)
Altitude RMI-36 BDI-36
Operation 12 192 m (40 000 ft) 4572 m (15 000 ft)
Test (decompression) 16 764 m (55 000 ft) 6096 m (20 000 ft)
Operation 4572 m (15 000 ft)
Test 6096 m (20 000 ft)
Cooling Convection
Relative humidity 95% to +50°C (+122 °F)
Shocks
Operation 6g
Impact 15 g (10 ms duration)
Vibration 0.1 in da, 5 to 55 Hz, 1.5 g max; 550 to 2000 Hz, 0.25 g max
Electrical
Power requirements RMI-36 BDI-36
+28 V dc (P1-4; BDI only P2-1); +27.5 V dc at 600 mA max +27.5 V dc at 820 mA max
Power gnd (P1-10; BDI only P2-3); 26 V ac, 400 Hz, 10 mA max 26 V ac, 400 Hz, 10 mA max
Chassis gnd (P1-31)
Lighting: 28 V dc/ac (P1-9); 28 V dc/ac, 96 mA or 5 V dc/ac, 540 mA
5 V dc/ac (P1-3); light com (P1-7)
Bearing pointers inputs
ADF 1 or TCN 1 (BDI, -015 status) or Signal: 2-wire sine and 2-wire cosine dc, 8.0 ±0.5 V dc max; or 3-wire synchro, 11.8 v
VOR 1 (BDI, -016 status) (P1-48, 45, 46) rms, 400 Hz, line to line. Displays relative bearing on single bar pointer when ADF 1
ADF 2 (P1-49, 15, 50) or TCN 1 or VOR 1 is selected and on dual barred pointer when ADF 2 is selected.
Input impedance greater than 5 kΩ. Positioning accuracy: less than ±2.0 degrees.
Sensitivity: less than ±0.5 degree. Dead zone: less than 1.0 degree. Response: greater
than 90 degrees per second undamped.
Reference power 26 V rms 400 Hz, 3 mA max (3-wire synchro type signal only)
ADF 1 (P1-44, 47)
ADF 2 (P1-32, 33)
Pointer reference DC signal: 0-degree index with cosine maximum positive and sine null. Positive ro-
tation reference: cosine decreasing and sine increasing positive for in-
creasing degrees.
3-wire type: Pointer ARINC referenced at 180 degrees with a positive rotation refer-
ence.
ADF Lock (except BDI, -015/-016 +28 V dc (greater than 18 V dc) = valid ADF lock (needle not parked); less than 3.5 V
status) dc = unlocked condition (needle parked). Absence of a valid lock parks the ADF
ADF 1 (P1-24) pointer horizontally. Systems using an ADF without a lock output must provide a
ADF 2 (P1-19) voltage, +28 V dc, at this pin to activate the display. Impedance = 57 kΩ @ 28 V dc.
VOR 1 or TCN 1 (BDI, -016 status) Signal: 2-wire sin-cos square wave, 7.9 V ac rms ±10%, 400 Hz; or 3-wire synchro,
(P1-38, 41, 37) 11.8 V ac rms, 400 Hz line to line. Input impedance greater than 5 kΩ. Positioning
VOR 2 (P1-1, 2, 21) accuracy: less than ±2.0 degrees (with synchro input), less than ±2.1 degrees (with
square wave input). Sensitivity: less than ±0.5 degree. Dead zone: less than 1.0 de-
gree. Response: greater than 90 degrees per second undamped.

Reference power 26 V rms 400 Hz (sinusoidal or square wave), 3 mA max.

VOR 1 or TCN 1 (BDI, -016 status)
(P1-35, 36)
VOR 2 (P1-18, 20)
Pointer reference Ac signal: 0-degree index with cosine max in phase and sine null. Positive rotation
reference; cosine decreasing and sine increasing in phase for increasing
degrees.
3-wire type: Pointer ARINC referenced at 180 degrees with a positive rotation refer-
ence.
VOR monitor +28 V dc VOR monitor (greater than 18 V dc) = represents a good monitor; less than
VOR 1 (P1-25) 3.5 V dc = a failed monitor. Absence of the monitor voltage (less than 3.5 V dc) parks
VOR 2 (P1-40) the appropriate barred pointer (VOR 1 single barred, VOR 2 dual barred). Input im-
pedance is greater than 10 kΩ.
VOR delayed ILS Less than 3.5 V dc = ILS mode; greater than 18 V dc = VOR mode. ILS mode parks
VOR 1 (P1-43) in the appropriate barred pointer in the horizontal position (if ADF/VOR select has
VOR 2 (P1-12) VOR selected).
Heading display input (P1-13, 30, 14) 3-wire synchro, 11.8 V ac rms 400 Hz line to line. Input accepts the data from a
standard compass system. Card referencing: ARINC index referenced at 0° with a
positive rotation reference. Positioning accuracy: less than ±1.0 degree. Sensitivity:
less than ±0.2 degree. Dead zone: less than 0.3 degree. Response: greater than 20 de-
grees per second with min overshoot.
Reference power (P1-16, 17) 26 V ac rms ±10%, 400 Hz, 3 mA max
Compass monitor (P1-11) Greater than 18 V dc = a valid monitor; less than 3.5 V dc = a invalid monitor. Ab-
sence of a voltage causes the “HDG” flag to appear “IN VIEW”.
DME distance display (BDI-36 only) Data signal: 32-bit serial word per ARINC 568. Sync pulse: per ARINC 419.
DME 1:Data (P2-8, 9) Clock: 11K Hz per ARINC 419. Input impedance: greater than 40 kΩ.
Sync (P2-10, 11) Accuracy: 100-399 mi. scale = 0-1 mi. low; 0-99.9 mi. scale = 0-0.1 mi. low.
Clock: (P2-12, 13)
DME 2:Data (P2-18, 19)
Sync (P2-16, 17)
Clock (P2-14, 15)
DME flag Greater than +18 V dc = DME data is valid; less than +3.5 V dc = DME data is inva-
DME 1 (P2-6); DME 2 (P2-21) lid. Valid voltage is necessary to activate the distance display. Input impedance is
greater than 40 kΩ.
DME test A ground applied arms the indicator for DME test cycle.
DME 1 (P2-4); DME 2 (P2-23)
DME hold The DME hold annunciator is illuminated with an open on hold pin. Ground will ex-
DME 1 (P2-5); DME 2 (P2-22) tinguish annunciator. Display illumination intensity is controlled by the same volt-
age that regulates the DME display intensity.
Straps
ADF 3-wire/sin-cos select Connected to Logic low (P1-27) = sine/cosine dc selected from ADF; Logic high (no
ADF 1 (P1-39); ADF 2 (P1-34) connection) = 3-wire data from ADF selected.
VOR 3-wire/sin-cos select Connected to Logic low (P1-27) = sine/cosine dc selected from VOR; Logic high (no
VOR 1 (P1-42); VOR 2 (P1-29) connection) = 3-wire data from VOR selected.
Outputs
Compass transmitter (P1-22, 6, 23) Synchro transmitter output provides an additional source of compass data. Excita-
Compass transmitter power (P1-8, 5) tion voltage 26 V rms 400 Hz. Output voltage 11.8 V rms line to line. Synchro im-
pedances: Zro = 32 + J 150; Zso = 7.3 + J 26.2; Zrss = 5.5 + J 17.
ADF 2F (BDI, -015/-016 statuses) (P1-19) Provides a hard ground when ADF mode is selected.

Table 1-38. RTU-870A/870T Radio Tuning Unit, Equipment Specifications.
Related documents ARINC Specification 429-7 Mark 33 Digital Information Transfer System
Certification
FAA TSO- C34d (ILS glideslope receiver)
C36d (ILS localizer receiver)
C37c (VHF transmitter)
C38c (VHF receiver)
C40b (VOR receiver)
C41c (ADF receiver)
C66b ( DME transceiver)
C74c (Transponder)
C104 (MLS receiver)
C112 (ATCRBS/Mode S airbourne equipment)
C119 (TCAS II equipment)
RTCA documents
RTU-870A DO-160A categories /A2C1/B/PKS/EXXXXXZ/BZ/AZZ
DO-178
RTU-870T DO-160C, refer to table 8-6 in the appendix section for additional information
DO-166
DO-178A, level 2
DO-197
EUROCAE ED-14A (RTU-870A only)
Physical
Size 116-mm (4.58-in) max high, 86-mm (3.38-in) max wide, 163-mm (6.43-in) max length
behind the front panel, 205.2-mm (8.08-in) max length overall.
Mounting Front panel mounted with integral turnlock fasteners.
COLLINS
MILITARY SPEC NO PART NUMBER
Unit connector MS27508E20F-2P 359-0667-280
Mating connector MS27473T20F-2S 359-0601-010
Connector contacts MS27491-22 (qty 65) 359-0608-020
(included with connector)
Strain relief MS27506F20-2 359-0637-070
(included with connector)
Environmental (RTU-870A)
Temperature
Storage –55 to +85 °C (–67 to +185 °F)
Altitude Category C1 - and controlled temperature operate up to 10 700 m (35 000 ft) maxi-
mum
Cooling Convection
Shock
Operational 6g


Vibration Certified for use in piston or turbine, fixed or rotary wing aircraft. 0.2 in da, 5 to 17
Hz; 3 g peak, 17 to 37 Hz; 0.02 in da, 37 to 55 Hz; 0.75 g peak, 55 to 70 Hz; 0.5 g
peak, 70 to 2000 Hz.
Tuning ranges and mode functions
ATC (transponder)
ATC codes 0000 to 7777
Code increment 1-digit increment
Operating modes Standby, ATC ident, altitude reporting, on/off, and test
ATC code storage capacity ATC1 or ATC2 (1 ATC code)
ADF
Frequency range Normal: 190.0 to 1799.0 kHz
Extended: 2179.0 to 2185.0 kHz
2091.0 to 2094.0 kHz (RTU-870T)
Channel spacing 500 Hz
Operating modes BFO on/off, ADF/ANT, and test
Frequency storage capacity ADF1 and ADF2
DME
Tuning frequencies 108.00 to 117.95 MHz and 133.00 to 135.95 MHz
Channels 50 kHz
Operating modes DME hold and test
MLS
Channels 500 to 699
Channel increments 1 increment between channels
Selected azimuth 0 to 359 degrees
Azimuth increments 1 degree
Selected elevation Minimum and maximum set by received ARINC 154 and 157 words
Elevation increments 0.1 degree
Frequency storage capacity MLS1 and MLS2
VHF COMM
Frequency range Normal: 118.000 to 135.975 MHz
(118.000 to 136.975 MHz for RTU-870A -032 and -033 statuses)
Extended: 118.000 to 151.975 MHz
Channel spacing 25 kHz
Modes Squelch on/off and test
Frequency storage capacity COM1, COM2 and preset
NAV (VOR/ILS)

ADDENDUM 19
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds equipment specifications for RTU-870C to Table 1-38.
P/O Table 1-38. RTU-870A/870C/870T Radio Tuning Unit, Equipment Specifications.
VHF COMM
(118.000 to 136.975 MHz for RTU-870A -032 and -033 statuses)
(118.000 to 136.992 MHz for RTU-870C)
Channel spacing 25 kHz (RTU-870A/870T)
8.33 kHz (RTU-870C)
Addendum 19
523-0772719-0K711A (Facing Page 1-72)
Modes ILS and test

Frequency storage capacity NAV1 and NAV2
MODE S Transponder/TCAS
(RTU-870T only)
Frequency range 1030 MHz
Transmit frequency 1090 MHz
ATC codes 0000 to 7777 (octal)
Code increments 1-digit increments
Modes Standby, traffic advisory, traffic advisory/resolution advisory, and test
TACAN (RTU-870T only)
Channel numbers 1 through 126 (X and Y)
Frequency range Transmit: 1025 to 1150 MHz Receive: 962 to 1213 MHz
Channel increments 1-digit increments
Modes Receive, transmit and receive, air-to-air receive, air-to-air transmit and receive, and
inversion
UHF COMM (RTU-870T only)
Channel numbers 1 through 20
Frequency range 225.000 to 399.975 MHz
Channel minimum spacing 25 kHz
Modes Squelch on, squelch off, guard, and tone
Power requirements
Input power +13 to +32 V dc at 10 Ω or less
(Pwr no 1, P1-1)
(Pwr no 2, P1-7)
(Pwr gnd, P1-3)
Display dimming From an external 0 to +28 V dc dimming bus and the front panel control
Pushbutton (legend) lighting 115 V ac, 400 Hz
I/O interface definition
System. Data transfer rate is 12 500 bits/second.
Burst tune labels ARINC burst defined as at least 20 words spaced over an interval of 2 seconds.
ARINC 429 inputs Five input ports are available for the following functions:
INPUT
A B PORT FUNCTION
P1-28 -29 A General purpose bus no 1 (GPB#1)
P1-31 -32 B General purpose bus no 2 (GPB#2)
P1-34 -35 C Cross-side general purpose bus no 2 (XGPB #2)
P1-37 -38 D Engine no 1 bus
P1-41 -42 E Engine no 2 bus

General purpose buses ARINC word OCTAL LABEL FUNCTION RATE/S

inputs
*016 ATC Mode S echo 5
030 VHF COMM frequency echo 10
034 VHF NAV frequency echo 5
032 ADF frequency echo 5
031 ATC code echo 5
035 DME frequency echo 30
036 MLS channel echo 5
*051 UHF frequency and control 5
*053 TACAN frequency code 5
154 MLS maximum sel GP angle 5
157 MLS basic data word 2 5
*166 DPU Mode Wd 1 5
203 Altitude data word 5
254 FCC mode word 3 (NAV test inhibit) 10
270 FMC mode (autotune status) 5
301 VHF COMM frequency (command tune) burst
302 VHF NAV frequency (command tune) burst
303 DME frequency (command tune) burst
304 ADF frequency (command tune) burst
305 ATC frequency (command tune) burst
*320 Heading word burst
340 Engine torque percent 10
344 Prop rpm 10
345 Inner turbine temp (°C) 10
346 Turbine rpm percent 10
*376 UHF frequency burst
*377 TACAN channel burst
*Words recognized only by the RTU-870T.
ARINC 429 outputs Three output ports are available with identical data at each port. Each port can
source 10 loads that conform to ARINC-429 Mark 33 standards using ±5.0 V dc.
OUTPUT
A B
P1-44 -45
P1-47 -48
P1-50 -51
Available transmitted ARINC words OCTAL LABEL FUNCTION RATE/S
*016 TCAS word 2 5
030 VHF COMM frequency 10
034 VHF NAV frequency 5
035 DME frequency (X3) 15
032 ADF frequency 5
031 ATC code 5
036 MLS channel 5
*051 UHF frequency and control 10
*147 TCN control 5
153 MLS selected azimuth 5
155 MLS selected glideslope 5
175 MLS back azimuth 5
*177 TACAN control (reserved) 5
203 Altitude data word 5
*320 Heading word 10
350 Diagnostics 5
350 Test mode-mode data 5
351 Test mode-diagnostics 5
*352 Test mode-word 3 5
*Words recognized only by the RTU-870T.

ADDENDUM 19
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds ARINC input and output words to the equipment specifications in Table 1-38.
P/O Table 1-38. RTU-870A/870C/870T Radio Tuning Unit, Equipment Specifications.
General purpose buses ARINC word OCTAL LABEL FUNCTION RATE/S

inputs
†047 VHF COMM frequency echo 10
*153 MLS selected azimuth 5
*155 MLS selected glide path 5
*175 MLS selected back azimuth 5
†300 VHF COMM frequency burst
Available transmitted ARINC words *013 TCAS word 1 5

*015 TCAS alt. select 5
†047 VHF COMM frequency 10
† Words recognized only by the RTU-870C.

* Words recognized only by the RTU-870C/870T.
Addendum 19
523-0772719-0K711A (Facing Page 1-74)
Discrete inputs (except remote tune en- A logic 0 (input active) input is defined as a 0.0 ±3.5-V dc level, 1-mA maximum cur-
able) rent sink. A logic 1 (open circuit or >+10-V dc) input is defined as a 100-kΩ to signal
ground input impedance.
Remote tune discrete input A logic 1 (input active) input is +18- to +28-V dc, 5-mA current sink. A logic 0 input
is an open circuit with a 100-kΩ to ground impedance.
Strap inputs Strapped inputs are connected to ground, 0.0 ±0.3 V dc or are left open. Refer to
Table 2-1 in the RTU-870A/870T installation section, in part B of this manual, for
strapping option information.
Discrete input functions Note
Discrete input function names (in parentheses shown with the rear connector pin
numbers) are the signal names shown on RTU rear interconnect card A6.
RTU on/off Gnd: RTU is disabled.
(RTU ON OFF P1-9) Open: RTU is enabled.
Remote ident Gnd: Transponder ident function is enabled.
(RMT IDENT P1-11) Open: Transponder ident function is disabled.
Remote tune enable Open: RTU ignores remote radio tuning command words.
(RMT TUN ENBL P1-12) +28 V dc: RTU receives and uses remote radio tuning command words.
ATC no 1 select Gnd: The no 1 transponder is the active transponder.
(SEL TDR1 P1-13) Open: The no 2 transponder is the active transponder.
MLS no 1 select Gnd: The no 1 microwave landing system is installed.
(MLS1 P1-16) Open: The no 1 microwave landing system is not installed.
Note
Only one control for the UHF transceiver can be selected at one time.
If P1-17 and P1-18 are grounded, then the RTU-870T defaults to
UHF1 as the selected transceiver.
UHF no 1 select Gnd: Selects the UHF transceiver as the left-side COMM. UHF is shown on
(RTU-870T only) the display in place of COM1. VHF1 is shown if SIDE 2 is grounded.
(UHF1 P1-17) Open: Selects the vhf COMM1 transceiver as the left-side COMM. COM1 is
shown on the display in place of UHF.
UHF no 2 select Gnd: Selects the UHF transceiver as the right-side COMM. UHF is shown on
(RTU-870T only) the display in place of COM2. VHF1 is shown if SIDE 2 is grounded.
(UHF2 P1-18) Open: Selects the vhf COMM1 transceiver as the right-side COMM. COM2 is
shown on the display in place of UHF.
Note
Only one control for the TACAN transceiver can be selected at one
time. If P1-19 and P1-20 are grounded, then the RTU-870T defaults to
TACAN1 as the selected transceiver.
TACAN no 1 select Gnd: Selects the TACAN transceiver for the left-side DME transceiver. TCN
(RTU-870T only) is shown on the last line of the display if SIDE 2 is open.
(TCN1 P1-19) Open: TACAN is not selected to replace the left-side DME transceiver.
TACAN no 2 select Gnd: Selects the TACAN transceiver for the right-side DME transceiver.
(RTU-870T only) TCN is shown on the last line of the display if SIDE 2 is grounded.
(TCN2 P1-20) Open: TACAN is not selected to replace the right-side DME transceiver.
TCAS on board (RTU-870T only) Gnd: A ground on this pin indicates that a TCAS system is on the aircraft
(P1-21) and connected on the ATC system.
Open: An open on this pin indicates that a TCAS system is not on the aircraft.

ADF TC-X (RTU-870T only) Gnd: Uses the 2091-2094 kHz AD extended tuning frequency range.
(P1-23) Open: Uses ADF normal tuning frequency range.
INV TCN INH (RTU-870T only) Gnd: Disables the inverse TCN function.
(P1-24) Open: Enables the inverse TCN function.
Display engine data select Gnd: Display engine data inputs (no radio tune outputs)
(REV (ENG DATA) P1-39) Open: Normal display of radio frequencies
COMM extended frequency select Gnd: Use COMM extended tuning frequency range.
(COM EXT FREQ P1-54) Open: Use COMM normal tuning frequency range.
NAV extended frequency select Gnd: Use NAV extended tuning frequency range.
(NAV EXT FREQ P1-55) Open: Use NAV normal tuning frequency range.
ADF extended frequency select Gnd: Use ADF extended tuning frequency range.
(ADF EXT FREQ P1-56) Open: Use ADF normal tuning frequency range.
No ADF 2 select Gnd: One ADF unit is installed in the aircraft.
(NO ADF2 P1-57) Open: Two ADF units are installed in the aircraft.
NAV test inhibit Gnd: Disable VOR1/DME1, VOR2/DME2, MLS1/DME1, and MLS2/DME2
(NAV TST INH P1-58, except it is SPARE test mode operation.
DISCRETE on RTU-870A, status -001, - Open: VOR1/DME1, VOR2/DME2, MLS1/DME1, and MLS2/DME2 test mode
002, -003, P1-58) operation is not disabled.
No DME 2 select Gnd: One DME unit is installed in the aircraft.
(NO DME2 P1-59) Open: Two DME units are installed in the aircraft.
RTU test enable Gnd: RTU test mode
(RTU TEST P1-60) Open: Normal RTU operation
Marker hi sens Gnd: Selects HI sensitivity operation of the VIR marker beacon receivers.
(MKR SENS HI P1-61) Open: Selects LO sensitivity operation of the VIR marker beacon receivers.
MLS no 2 select Gnd: The no 2 microwave landing system is installed.
(MLS2 P1-62) Open: The no 2 microwave landing system is not installed.
Cross-side RTU disable Gnd: The cross-side RTU is disabled; the on-side RTU takes over the control
(XRTU DSBL P1-63) of the cross-side radio tuning in addition to on-side tuning.
Open: The cross-side RTU in enabled.
Strapped input
Side 2 select Gnd: The RTU is installed as the side 2 (copilot) control
(SIDE 2 P1-64) Open: The RTU is installed as the side 1 (pilot) control.
Table 1-39. TDR-90 Transponder, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
FAA TSO- C74b or C74c
FCC rules Part 87
RTCA document DO-138
Environmental DO-138, categories /AD/A/JN/G/AAAEXXXXX
Physical
Size
Height 88.90 mm (3.500 in)

Width 61.47 mm (2.420 in)

Length 351.64 mm (13.844 in)
Mounting Remote mounted in UMT-11 (preferred) or 390R-18 mount (alternate). (Refer to the
TDR-90 installation section for details.)
Unit connector P1 — CPN 621-1545-001 (Thinline)
J1 — CPN 357-9516-000 (TNC)
Mating connector 60-pin Thinline (CPN 634-1112-001)
RF TNC CPN 857-1511-010
Maintenance requirements On condition. At 2-year intervals the transponder is required to be tested per FAR
91.172.
Environmental
Temperature range
Storage –55 to +85 °C (–67 to +185 °F)
Altitude Test 16800 m (55 000 ft); operational 13 700 m (45 000 ft); overpressure –4600 m
(–15 000 ft)
Cooling Convection
Shocks
Operational 6g
Turbo engine fixed wing, fuselage 0.508 mm (0.020 in) total excursion; 3 g max, 5 to 2000 Hz
mount
Turbo and piston engine rotary wing, 2.54 mm (0.10 in) total excursion; 1.5 g max, 5 to 55 Hz; 1.0 g constant, 55 to 2000
fuselage mount Hz
Severe vibration environment on mount 2.032 mm (0.08 in) total excursion; 0.42 g constant, 10 to 15 Hz; 0.36 g constant, to-
without shock isolators tal excursion 15 to 66 Hz; 8.0 g constant, 66 to 2000 Hz
Electrical
Power requirement +27.5 V dc ±20% at 1.9 A (40 W) max at 1% duty cycle; standby: 25 W
+27.5 V dc (P1-59)
Power gnd (P1-55, 60)
Transmitter
Frequency 1090 MHz
Frequency control Self-excited cavity oscillator
Frequency stability ±3 MHz (includes effect of 1.5:1 vswr)
Peak pulse power 250 W min to 500 W nom
Duty cycle 1% max
Receiver
Center frequency 1030 ±0.2 MHz
Bandwidth 6 MHz at 3 dB down, 50 MHz at 60 dB down

Frequency control Crystal controlled

Sensitivity (min triggering level) –74 dBm (nom)
General
Identification codes 4096
Altitude encoding range –1000 to 62700 ft
Interrogation modes A (ident) and C (altitude)

Side-lobe suppression 3-pulse system
Video processor
Decoder apertures Deviation from nominal spacing
Sls 90% replies ±0.7 µs
Sls 5% replies ±0.15 µs
Modes A, C 90% replies ±0.2 µs
Modes A, C 10% replies ±1.0 µs
Sls characteristics
90% replies NMT 9 dB down from P1 level
10% replies NLT 0 dB down from P1 level
Sls duration 35 ±10 µs (25 to 45 ms)
Discrimination and desensitization
Pulse-width discrimination
Narrow-pulse rejection 0.3 µs
Wide-pulse rejection 1.5 µs
Echo recovery Normally linear; NMT 3 dB greater than minimum trigger level (mtl) within 15 µs
after desensitizing pulse 50 dB greater than mtl is received
Dead time Not more than 125 µs
Reply rate control Adjustable from 500 to 2000 replies per s; factory set at 1200 replies per s
Special features
Self-test input (P1-13) Self-test active when a ground is applied (0.0 ±0.1 V dc)
Reply lamp output (P1-3, 17) P1-3 output = +5 V dc; P1-17 output = ground for reply (reply (ground) for 1 to 3 s
each time the transponder replies to an interrogation)
Suppression pulse (P1-21, 22) Output pulse +12 V dc nominal (+10 V dc min, +15 V dc max) Input pulse +5 to +28
V dc
Low sensitivity mode input (P1-51) Ground (0.0 ±1.0 V dc) = low sensitivity; open (greater than 100 kΩ) = high sensitiv-
ity
Ident input (P1-5) Ground (0.0 ±1.0 V dc) = ident; open (greater than 100 kΩ) = normal
Mode A and Mode C input code Ground (0.0 ±1.0 V dc) = active input

Table 1-40. TDR-94/94D Transponder, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
FAA TSO- C112, class 2A
Software DO-178A, level 2
EUROCAE ED-12A
Deutsche Bundespost FTZ A44652010
ICAO Annex 10
Environmental
RTCA document DO-160B (Refer to table 8-5 in the appendix section for additional information.)
EUROCAE ED-12A
Size
Width 124.5 mm (4.90 in)
Length 317.5 mm (12.50 in)
Weight
TDR-94/94D 3.6 kg (8.5 lb)
MMT-150
Single, with cover 0.54 kg (1.2 lb)
Single, w/o cover 0.45 kg (1.0 lb)
Dual, with cover 1.78 kg (2.6 lb)
Dual, w/o cover 1.23 kg (2.3 lb)
Mounting MMT-150 Mounting Tray, 1/2 ATR, short, dwarf (Refer to installation section for ad-
Mating Connector Thinline II, qty 2, 60 pins each
Kits: CPN: 628-8661-001/002 or 628-8660-001/002
(Refer to installation section for additional information.)
Maintenance requirements On condition of failure or as required by Federal Regulations (see below).
Regulatory requirement for flight line test FAR 91.413 ATC TRANSPONDER TESTS AND INSPECTIONS.
“(a) No person may use an ATC transponder that is specified in Part 125, §91.24 (a),
§121.345, §127.123 (b), or §135.143 (c) of this chapter unless, within the preceding 24
calendar months, that ATC transponder has been tested and inspected and found to
comply with Appendix F of Part 43 of this chapter; and following any installation or
maintenance on an ATC transponder where data correspondence error could be in-
troduced, the integrated system has been tested, inspected, and found to comply with
paragraph Appendix E of Part 43 of this chapter.”
Power requirements 27.5 ±2.5 V dc at 80 watts nominal, 100 watts maximum
Transmitter
Frequency 1090 MHz, ±0.1 MHz
Power output 250 watts min, 625 watts peak pulse power
Load impedance 50 Ω nominal
VSWR 1.5:1 service max, 3:1 survival

Receiver
Frequency 1030 MHz nominal
IF 60 MHz
Sensitivity –77 dBm ±3 dBm
Reply modes ATCRBS mode A
ATCRBS mode C
ATCRBS mode A/Mode S All Call
ATCRBS mode C/Mode S All Call
ATCRBS mode A only All Call
ATCRBS mode C only All Call
Mode S, short (56-bit)
Mode S, long (112-bit)
Reply rate
ATCRBS 500 15-pulse replies/sec
1200 15-pulse replies in 100 ms
Mode S 34 short and 16 long replies in 1 sec
12 short and 6 long replies in 100 ms
4 short and 4 long replies in 25 ms
2 short and 2 long in 1.6 ms
ATCRBS side lobe suppression
Max of 10% replies and sls initiated P1 pulse is MTL +3 dB to –21 dBm and P2 equal to or greater than P1
Max of 10% replies and sls may be initi- P1 pulse is MTL to MTL +3 dB and P2 equal to or greater than P1
ated
Minimum of 90% replies and no sls P1 pulse is MTL +3 dB to –21 dBm, and P1 pulse is min 9 dB greater than P2.
No P2 pulse occurs at 2.0 ±0.7 ms after leading edge of P1, or P2 pulse duration is
less than 0.3 ms
Mode S side lobe suppression Max of 10%
Electrical
Primary power (P1-58) 27.5, ±2.5, V dc (+), 28 watts nominal, 100 watts peak
Primary power (P1-60) 27.5 V dc (–)
Data bus
CSDB
Structure 8-bits/byte, 6-bytes/block
Rate 12.5 Baud, 10-blocks/sec nominal, 18 max
Data labels (All labels are in hexadecimal form)
A5: sync; input
A0: altitude data; input
1E: ATC code/altitude; input/output
1F: ATC data; output
F3: diagnostic data; output
ARINC 429
Structure 8-bits/byte, 4-bytes/word
Rate 5-words/sec min

Data labels (All labels are in octal form)

*013: TDR and TCAS control; input/output
*015: Altitude select limits; input/output
*016: Mode s control; input/output
*031: ATC Transponder Control; input/output
*200: Gillham alt encoder data; input/output
*203: TDR alt data to TCAS; input/output
204: TDR corrected barometric altitude to TCAS; output
272: TCAS coordination data, part 1; output
273: TCAS data for downlink message formats 16, 20, 21; input
274: TCAS coordination data, part 2; output
274: TCAS data for downlink message formats 0 and 16; input
275: TCAS control, part 1; output
275: TCAS acknowledge; input
276: TCAS control, part 2; output
277: TCAS acknowledge; input
277: Diagnostic data request; input
350: Maintenance data; output
371: Equipment ident; output
*These labels are normally echoed, and/or passed through to the TCAS, as received
except for the SSM which may be different depending on the state of the transpon-
der.
Tuning inputs Monitored only if Burst Mode (P2-59) is not selected; i.e., P2-59 is open
P2-31 CSDB, A
P2-32 CSDB, B
P2-17 ARINC 429, A (tune input port A)
P2-18 ARINC 429, B (tune input port A)
P2-13 ARINC 429, A (tune input port B)
P2-14 ARINC 429, B (tune input port B)
P2-21 ARINC 429, A (tune input port C)
P2-22 ARINC 429, B (tune input port C)
Altitude inputs
P2-33 CSDB, A (altitude input port A)
P2-34 CSDB, B (altitude input port A)
P2-35 CSDB, A (altitude input port B)
P2-36 CSDB, B (altitude input port B)
P2-25 ARINC 429/575, A (altitude input port A)
P2-26 ARINC 429/575, B (altitude input port A)
P2-29 ARINC 429/575, A (altitude input port B)
P2-30 ARINC 429/575, B (altitude input port B)
Data outputs
P2-23 CSDB, A (Bus 1)
P2-24 CSDB, B (Bus 1)
P2-27 CSDB, A (Bus 2)
P2-28 CSDB, B (Bus 2)
P2-15 ARINC 429, A (Port A)
P2-16 ARINC 429, B (Port B)
P2-19 ARINC 429, A (Port B)
P2-20 ARINC 429, B (Port B)

Peripheral data
P2-1 ARINC 429, A (Comm A/B input)
P2-2 ARINC 429, B (Comm A/B input)
P2-3 ARINC 429, A (Comm A/B output)
P2-4 ARINC 429, B (Comm A/B output)
P2-5 ARINC 429, A (Comm C/D input)
P2-6 ARINC 429, B (Comm C/D input)
P2-7 ARINC 429, A (Comm C/D output)
P2-8 ARINC 429, B (Comm C/D output)
P2-9 (TDR-94D) ARINC 429, A (TCAS coord data input)
P2-10 (TDR-94D) ARINC 429, B (TCAS coord data input)
P2-11 (TDR-94D) ARINC 429, A (TCAS coord data output)
P2-12 (TDR-94D) ARINC 429, B (TCAS coord data output)
Discrete inputs
P1-1 B4, ARINC 572 altitude input
P1-4 A4, ARINC 572 altitude input
P1-7 D4, ARINC 572 altitude input
P1-8 D2, ARINC 572 altitude input
P1-9 C4, ARINC 572 altitude input
P1-12 Common, ARINC 572 altitude input
Mode S, address discretes
P1-32 Common
P1-33 B1
P1-34 B2
P1-35 B3
P1-36 B4
P1-37 B5
P1-38 B6
P1-39 B7
P1-40 B8
P1-41 B9
P1-42 B10
P1-43 B11
P1-44 B12
P1-45 B13
P1-46 B14
P1-47 B15
P1-48 B16
P1-49 B17
P1-50 B18
P1-51 B19
P1-52 B20
P1-53 B21
P1-54 B22
P1-55 B23
P1-56 B24

Single discrete straps

P2-51 Dual antenna select (gnd = single)
P2-56 CSDB/ARINC 429 control select (gnd = CSDB)
P2-60 ADLP installed (gnd = ADLP included in installation)
P1-13 (TDR-94D; not implemented in TCAS installed (gnd = TCAS included in installation)
TDR-94)
Note
There is no provision for TCAS control in CSDB. Therefore, the TDR-94D will not
report TCAS capability in its replies to interrogations when CSDB is enabled (P2-
56 grounded) even if TCAS is selected (P1-13 grounded) and dual antenna enabled
(P2-51 open).
Maintenance specific
P2-38 Self-test inhibit (gnd = inhibited) (for maintenance purposes only)
P2-54 Self-test discrete (gnd = self-test on) (for maintenance purposes only)
Discrete I/O
P2-55 Standby select (gnd = in standby)
P1-28 Auto altitude select enable (gnd = enabled)
P1-14 Control/altitude select (see Combination Discrete below) (gnd = port A altitude data
supplied on control port, port B same as open), (open = ports A and B altitude se-
lectable via altitude type select discretes, P2-41/42)
P2-53 Air/ground discrete (gnd = WOW)
P2-48 Altitude port select (gnd = port B)
P2-59 Burst tune enable (gnd = burst)
Note: In Burst Tune mode, the control port strapping (P2-57/58) is ignored. Burst
tune data is accepted on ports A, B, and C as 30 ARINC-429 words spaced over an
interval of 1.5 seconds with 500 msec dwell time on each port and the dwell time
suspended when data is present. Continuous data is always accepted if available.
P1-15 Cross-side input (connected to opposite TDR P1-30, gnd input = command to
P1-30 standby)
Cross-side output (connected to opposite TDR P1-15, gnd output = active mode)
(These connections are used in dual burst-tune installations to ensure that only one
transponder is active at a time.)
P1-29 Suppression input/output (connected to other L-band equipment)
P1-31 Fault monitor output (28 V dc = valid, 200 mA max)
P1-16 SPI (remote ident) input ( gnd = ident)

Combination discrete straps

P2-41, P2-42, and P1-14 The processor monitors these discrete inputs during the altitude input processing cy-
cle, at lease once each second. The processor then selects the desired altitude for re-
porting according to the following:
P1-14 P2-41 P2-42 ALTITUDE TYPE SELECTED
Open *Gnd *Gnd ARINC 429 format data in on ARINC-429 altitude
Port A and Port B
Open Open *Gnd CSDB altitude in on CSDB altitude Port A and
Port B
Open *Gnd Open ARINC 575 format data in on ARINC-429 altitude
Port A and Port B
Open Open Open ARINC 572 Gillham in on the single parallel port
*Gnd *Gnd *Gnd Use Port A altitude from the selected control bus
(can be either ARINC 429 or CSDB control). Use
Port B altitude from ARINC 429 Port B.
*Gnd Open *Gnd Use Port A altitude from the selected control bus
Port B altitude from CSDB Port B.
*Gnd *Gnd Open Use Port A altitude from the selected control bus
Port B altitude from ARINC 575 Port B.
*Gnd Open Open Use Port A altitude from the selected control bus
Port B altitude from single ARINC 572 Gillham
parallel input port.
*Connect Gnd to J2-52.
P2-43, P2-44, P2-45 Max airspeed programming (gnd to P2-49)
P2-43 P2-44 P2-45 DEFINITION
Open Open Open None selected
Gnd Open Open 0 to 75 knots
Open Gnd Open 75 to 150 knots
Gnd Gnd Open 150 to 300 knots
Open Open Gnd 300 to 600 knots
Gnd Open Gnd 600 to 1200 knots
Open Gnd Gnd More than 1200 knots
Gnd Gnd Gnd (Not defined)
P2-46, P2-47 SDI input (gnd to P2-50)
P2-46 P2-47 DEFINITION
Open Open (not used)
Open Gnd Side 1
Gnd Open Side 2
Gnd Gnd (not used)
P2-57, P2-58 Control port select (gnd to P2-52)
P2-57 P2-58 DEFINITION
Gnd Open Port A selected (P2-17, 18)
Open Open Port B selected (P2-13, 14)
Open Gnd Port C selected (P2-21, 22)
Gnd Gnd (not defined)

ADDENDUM 41
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

of the General Information Section (523-0772720-009118) in part A of this manual.
This addendum supersedes Addendum 16.
This addendum rescinds the information contained in Addendum 16. The VHF-21D/22D units are now approved
by the FCC.
Addendum 41
21 Jul 2000 Sheet 1 of 2
523-0772719-0h711A (Facing Page 1-85)
Table 1-41. VHF-21( )/22( ) VHF Comm, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
FAA TSO- C37c, C38c.
EUROCAE ED-23, ED-24
FCC Part 15, Part 87 (Modulation designator 6A3, 13A9)
Environmental RTCA document DO-160A, categories /A2E1/B/JY/EXXXXXZ/BZ/AZA, EUROCAE
ED-14A
Physical
Size 3/8 ATR, short, dwarf
Height 85.3mm (3.36 in) max
VHF-21( )/22( ) installation section for details.)
Unit connector VHF-21( ) — Cannon P/N DPA-29W1-34P (CPN 370-2224-020), Coax insert: Cannon
P/N 249-5052-000 (CPN 370-2461-010).
VHF-22( ) — CPN 634-2699-003 (Thinline II connector), Coax insert: CPN 372-2519-
210
Mating connector VHF-21( ) — Cannon P/N DPA-29W1-33S-1 (CPN 370-2225-010), Coax insert: Can-
non P/N DPA-50048-2 (CPN 370-2182-000).
VHF-22( ) — CPN 653-1286-001 Thinline II, 52/2 pin connector, Coax insert: CPN
372-2519-040 for RG-58, CPN 372-2519-100 for RG-400
Environmental
Temperature range
Storage –55 to +85 °C (–67 to +185 °F)
Altitude 21 300 m (70 000 ft) maximum
Cooling Convection
Shock
Operational 6g
Vibration Certified for use in piston or turbine, fixed or rotary wing aircraft. Tested at 0.2 in
da, 5.0 to 14 Hz; 2 g, 14 to 44 Hz; 0.02 in da, 44 to 54 Hz; 3 g, 54 to 2000 Hz
Electrical
Power requirements (VHF-21( ) P1-1; Receive — 0.5 A (14 W) at 27.5 V dc
VHF-22( ) P1-49, 50) Transmit — 6.0 A (165 W) at 27.5 V dc
Power-on relay (VHF-22( ) P1-37, 38) 1.3W (46 mA at 27.5 V dc). +28 V dc applied to pin P1-37 and ground on P-37, ener-
gizes an internal relay which applies power to the unit from the +28 V dc input, P1-
49, 50.

Frequency range
VHF-21A/22A 118.000 to 135.975 MHz (extendable to 136.975 MHz)
VHF-21B/22B 118.000 to 151.975 MHz
Frequency stability ±0.0015%
Frequency control CSDB or ARINC 2-out-of-5
CSDB inputs (VHF-21( ) P1-23, 25; Two-wire CSDB data bus provides a balanced differential signal using nominally 0 to
VHF-22( )P1-40, 39) 5 V switching levels from the connected CTL-22/22A.
CSDB outputs (VHF-21( ) P1-16, 11; Two-wire CSDB data bus provides a balanced differential signal using nominally 0 to
VHF-22( ) P1-44, 43) 5 V switching levels to the connected CTL-22/22A.
2-out-of-5 Grounds (0.0 ±1.0 V dc) 2 inputs out of 5 for each, open (greater than 100 kΩ) the
remaining 3 lines. Refer to ARINC 410 2-out-of-5.
Serial/parallel select (VHF-21( ) P1-9, Strapped = serial (CSDB) selected (VHF-21( ) connect P1-9, 10, and 24 to P1-3; VHF-
10, 24; VHF-22( ) P1-32) 22( ) connect P1-32 to P1-31); open = parallel (2-out-of-5) selected.
Unit ident (VHF-21( ) P1-20, 19; Defines the unit as Comm 1, Comm 2, or Comm 3 as follows:
VHF-22( ) P1-28, 27) Open = greater than 100 kΩ; Ground = 0.0 ±1.0 V dc.
COMM 1 COMM 2 COMM 3
Unit Ident A Open Ground Open
Unit Ident B Open Open Ground
Channels
VHF-21A/22A 720, 25-kHz increments (extendable to 760)
VHF-21B/22B 1360, 25-kHz increments
Transmitter
Output power 16 W minimum into a 52-ohm resistive load; Emergency low voltage with 18-V dc in-
put power operation, output power 6 W minimum.
Modulation 85% modulation capability with less than 15% distortion; 95% limiting
Mic audio input impedance (VHF-21( ) 150 Ω unbalanced with excitation current for a 50- to 600-ohm transistorized dy-
P1-7; VHF-22( ) P1-13) namic microphone (preferred) or carbon microphone (nonpreferred).
Duty cycle 1 minute transmit, 4 minutes receive
Sidetone (VHF-21( ) P1-27, 6; VHF-22( ) 100 mW into a 600 Ω load
P1-26, 25)
Receiver
Sensitivity 3 µV for 6-dB (s+n)/n
Selectivity
-0X1 part number Typical 6 dB at ±8 kHz, 60 dB at ±17 kHz
Spurious response 10 mV spurious signal produces no more output than a desired signal producing 6 dB
(s+n)/n.
Squelch Automatic (phase noise reduction) with carrier override
AGC characteristics 3 dB maximum variation from 5 mV to 1 V.
Emergency low-voltage power operation Receiver meets all specifications at 18-V input power.
Audio (VHF-21( ) P1-26, 6; VHF-22( ) 100 mw into a 600- Ω load; Frequency range, within 6 dB from 350 to 2500 Hz.
P1-18, 17) Down 18 dB minimum at 4000-Hz.

ADDENDUM 8
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds VHF-21/22(C/D) equipment specifications to Table 1-41. Added text appears in bold
type.
P/O Table 1-41. VHF-21( )/22( ) VHF Comm, Equipment Specifications.

Frequency range
VHF-21C/22C 118.000 to 136.975 MHz
VHF-21D/22D 118.000 to 151.975 MHz
Channels
VHF-21C/22C 8.33- or 25-kHz increments from 118.000 to 136.975 MHz

CSDB tuning is required to utilize the 8.33-kHz channels
VHF-21D/22D 8.33- or 25-kHz increments from 118.000 to 136.975 MHz
25-kHz increments from 137.000 to 151.975 MHz
CSDB tuning is required to utilize the 8.33-kHz channels
Transmitter
Duty cycle
VHF-21/22(A/B) 1 minute transmit, 4 minutes receive
VHF 21/22(C/D) 30 second transmit, 4.5 minutes receive

Receiver
Selectivity
VHF-21/22(A/B)
VHF-21/22(C/D) For channels between 118.000 and 136.975 MHz, selected as 1XX.000 MHz, 1XX.020
MHz, 1XX.050 MHz, and 1XX.070 MHz and all channels between 137.000 MHz and
151.975 MHz for “D” units:
6 dB: ±8 kHz minimum
60 dB: ±20 kHz maximum
For all other channels:
6 dB: ±2.78 kHz minimum

60 dB: ±7.37 kHz maximum
Spurious response
VHF-21/22(A/B) 10 mV spurious signal produces no more output than a desired signal producing 6 dB (s+n)/n.
VHF-21/22(C/D) Attenuated at least 80 dB relative to the desired response at or beyond the second
adjacent channel. Responses at either adjacent channel are attenuated at least 60
dB relative to the desired response.
Addendum 8
523-0772719-08711A (Facing Page 1-86)
ADDENDUM 41
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

of the General Information Section (523-0772720-009118) in part A of this manual.
This addendum supersedes Addendum 16.
This addendum rescinds the information contained in Addendum 16. The VHF-422D units are now approved by
the FCC.
Addendum 41
523-0772719-0h711A (Facing Page 1-87)
Combined audio (VHF-21( ) P1-5, 6; Audio output is switched to sidetone when in transmit (switched with relay con-
VHF-22( ) P1-30, 29) tacts), Receive audio normally (not in transmit).
SELCAL output (VHF-21( ) P1-28; 0.5 V rms across a 600 Ω load
VHF-22( ) P1-34, 33)
Receiver compression disable (VHF-21( ) Ground (0.0 ±1.0 V dc) on VHF-22( ) P1-9 = receiver audio compressor disabled. Open
internal strap; VHF-22( ) P1-9) = receiver audio compressor enabled. The VHF-21( ) has the receiver audio compres-
sor disabled refer to the VHF-21( )/22( ) repair manual for additional information.
Squelch disable (VHF-21( ) P1-4; Ground (0.0 ±1.0 V dc) = Squelch Disabled; Open (greater than 100 kΩ) = Squelch
VHF-22( ) P1-36) Normal
Simulcomm (VHF-22( ) P1-21) Ground from opposite side Comm keyline reduces the receiver gain to reduce Comm-
to-Comm interference.
Special-use pins for bench testing:
Noise squelch test (P1-6)
Carrier squelch test (P1-5)
AGC test (P1-10)
Table 1-42. VHF-422( ) VHF Comm, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
FAA TSO- C37c, C38c
EUROCAE ED-23, ED-24
FCC Parts 15 and 87 (modulation designators 6A3, 13A9)
Environmental
RTCA document DO-160A, categories /A2E1/B/JY/EXXXXXZ/BZ/AZA (Refer to table 4-3 for additional
information.)
EUROCAE ED-14A
Physical
Mounting Remote mounted in UMT-12 (preferred) or 390R-19 (alternate) mount. (Refer to
VHF-422( ) installation section for details.)
Mating connector Collins 1/2-height Thinline II, 52-pin (CPN 634-4192-002; includes connector shell
(CPN 634-1022-001), 34 contacts (CPN 372-2514-110), and coax insert (CPN 372-
2519-040 for RG-58, CPN 372-2519-100 for RG-400))
Electrical
Transmitter specifications
Output power 16 W min into a 52-Ω resistive load

Modulation 85% modulation capability with less than 15% distortion; 95% limiting
Duty cycle 1 minute transmit, 4 minutes receive
Emergency low-voltage operation 6 W min with 18-V dc input power
Frequency range
VHF-422A 118.000 to 136.975 MHz
VHF-422B 118.000 to 151.975 MHz
Channels
VHF-422A 760, 25-kHz increments
VHF-422B 1360, 25-kHz increments
Frequency stability ±0.0015%
Frequency control Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB) or ARINC 429 serial digital bus. (See in-
puts specification below for additional information.)
Receiver specifications
Sensitivity 3 µV for 6 dB (s+n)/n
Selectivity
-X01 units Typical 6 dB at ±8 kHz, 60 dB at ±20 kHz
-X01 units Typical 6 dB at ±15 kHz, 60 dB at ±40 kHz
Spurious response 10 mV spurious signal produces no more output than a desired signal producing 6 dB
(s+n)/n
Squelch Automatic (phase-noise reduction) with carrier override
AGC characteristics 6 dB maximum variation from 5 µV to 1 V
Emergency low-voltage operation Meets all specifications at 18-V dc input power
Power/Straps
Input power (P101-49, 50)
Receive 16.5 W (0.6 A at 27.5 V dc)
Transmit 137.5 W (5.0 A at 27.5 V dc)
Power gnd (P101-41, 42)
Signal gnd (P101-2, 31)
Power on relay + (P101-37) 1.3 W (46 mA at 27.5 V dc). +28 V dc applied to this pin energizes an internal relay
which applies power (P101-49, 50) to the unit.
Power on relay – (P101-38) Ground for power on relay + (P101-37) signal
Burst/Continuous tune select (P101-7) Ground = Burst Tune; Open = Continuous Tune. Controls type of ARINC 429 data
used. With continuous tuning, an ARINC frequency control word is continuously re-
ceived every 200 ms. With burst tuning, at least 30 frequency control words are re-
ceived every 1.5 sec.
Port A/B select (P101-14) Ground = Port A; Open = Port B. Controls ARINC 429 ports.
ARINC 429/CSDB select (P101-32) Ground = CSDB; Open = ARINC 429
Receiver compressor disable (P101-9) Ground = Receiver Compressor Disabled; Open = Receiver Compressor Enabled
Squelch disable (P101-36) Ground = Squelch Disabled; Open = Squelch Normal

ADDENDUM 8
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds VHF-422(C/D) equipment specifications to Table 1-42. Added text appears in bold
type.
P/O Table 1-42. VHF-422( ) VHF Comm, Equipment Specifications.

Duty cycle
VHF-422(A/B) 1 minute transmit, 4 minutes receive
VHF 422(C/D) 30 second transmit, 4.5 minutes receive
Frequency range
VHF-422A/C 118.000 to 136.975 MHz
VHF-422B/D 118.000 to 151.975 MHz
Channels
VHF-422C 8.33- or 25-kHz increments
VHF-422D 8.33- or 25-kHz increments from 118.000 to 136.975 MHz
25-kHz increments from 137.000 to 151.975 MHz
Receiver specifications
Selectivity
VHF-422(A/B)
-X01 part number Typical 6 dB at ±8 kHz, 60 dB at ±20 kHz
-X02 part number Typical 6 dB at ±15 kHz, 60 dB at ±40 kHz
VHF-422(C/D) For channels between 118.000 and 136.975 MHz, selected as 1XX.000 MHz, 1XX.020
MHz, 1XX.050 MHz, and 1XX.070 MHz, and all channels between 137.000 MHz and
151.975 MHz for “D” units:
6 dB: ±8 kHz minimum
60 dB: ±20 kHz maximum
For all other channels:
6 dB: ±2.78 kHz minimum

60 dB: ±7.37 kHz maximum
Spurious response
VHF-422(A/B) 10 mV spurious signal produces no more output than a desired signal producing 6 dB
(s+n)/n.
VHF-422(C/D) Attenuated at least 80 dB relative to the desired response at or beyond the second
adjacent channel. Responses at either adjacent channel are attenuated at least 60
dB relative to the desired response.
Addendum 8
523-0772719-08711A (Facing Page 1-88)
Unit ID A (P101-28) Defines the unit as Comm 1, Comm 2, or Comm 3 as follows:

Unit ID B (P101-27)
Unit ID A (P101-28) Open Ground Open
Unit ID B (P101-27) Open Open Ground
Inputs
Self-test enable (P101-19) Ground (for at least 500 ms) = Self-Test Enabled; Open = Normal Operation
Keyline (P101-35) Ground = Transmit; Open = Receive
Mic audio 150 Ω unbalanced with excitation current for a 50- to 600-W transistorized dynamic
H (P101-13) microphone (preferred) or carbon microphone (nonpreferred).
L (P101-1)
Frequency control
CSDB data in CSDB signals are differential signals with each line varying from +5 V dc to ground
A (P101-40) (the “B” signal is the inverse of the “A” signal). Data transfer rate is 12549 b/s. Refer
B (P101-39) to maintenance section for a detailed description of data words.
ARINC 429 input ARINC 429 signals are differential signals with each line varying from +5 V dc to –5
Port A-A (P101-47) V dc (the “B” signal is the inverse of the “A” signal). Data transfer rate is 12500 b/s.
Port A-B (P101-48) Refer to maintenance section for a detailed description of data words.
Port B-A (P101-45)
Port B-B (P101-46)
Port C-A (P101-3)
Port C-B (P101-4)
Outputs
Fault monitor out (P101-20) 27.5 V dc (18 V min, 200 mA max) = Normal Operation; Open = Diagnostic Faults
Present
Note
During normal operation, in the ARINC 429 mode, the transceiver routinely moni-
tors critical circuits for proper operation. When no faults have been detected, the
Fault Monitor Out is at 27.5 V dc. If a fault is detected, Fault Monitor Out goes to
an open condition. If any diagnostic conditions are encountered during self-test,
then Fault Monitor Out will go to an open state for the duration of the test.
Audio outputs
Note
The transceiver contains a single audio amplifier. Both sidetone and received audio
are available at the combined audio output. An internal relay separates these sig-
nals into received audio and sidetone outputs for installations that require separate
outputs.
Receiver audio out 100 mW into a 600-Ω load with a 3-µV RF input. Receiver audio provides the re-
H (P101-18) ceived audio signal.
L (P101-17)
Sidetone audio out 100 mW into a 600-Ω load with a 3-µV RF input. Sidetone audio provides the trans-
H (P101-26) mitted audio signal.
L (P101-25)
Combined audio out 100 mW into a 600-Ω load with a 3-µV RF input. Combined audio provides both
H (P101-30) transmitted and received audio signals.
L (P101-29)
SELCAL™ audio out 0.5 V rms across into a 600-Ω load with a 3-µV RF input. SELCAL™ audio provides
H (P101-34) non-compressed received audio signals.
L (P101-33)

Data outputs
CSDB data out Capable of driving up to five loads. CSDB signals are differential signals with each
A (P101-44) line varying from +5 V dc to ground (the “B” signal is the inverse of the “A” signal).
B (P101-43) Data transfer rate is 12549 b/s. Refer to maintenance section for a detailed descrip-
tion of data words.
ARINC 429 output Each port capable of driving up to five loads. ARINC 429 signals are differential sig-
Port A-A (P101-51) nals with each line varying from +5 V dc to –5 V dc (the “B” signal is the inverse of
Port A-B (P101-52) the “A” signal). Data transfer rate is 12500 b/s. Refer to maintenance section for a
Port B-A (P101-11) detailed description of data words.
Port B-B (P101-12)
Simulcomm (P101-21) Ground from opposite side Comm keyline reduces the receiver gain to reduce Comm-
to-Comm interference.
Special-use pins for bench testing:
Noise squelch test (P101-6)
Carrier squelch test (P101-5)
AGC test (P101-10
Table 1-43. VIR-32/33 NAV Receiver, Equipment Specifications.
Certification TSO- EUROCAE RTCA DOCUMENTS

VOR C40b ED-22A DO-153A
LOC C36d ED-46 DO-131A
GS C34d ED-47 DO-132A
MB C35d 1/WG7/70 DO-143
Software — — DO-178 (VIR-32), DO-178A Level 1 (VIR-33)
Environmental DO-160A, categories /A2E1/B/JY/EXXXXXZ/BZ/AZA; EUROCAE ED-14A
Physical
Mounting Remote mounted in UMT-12 (preferred) or 390R-19 mount (alternate). Refer to the
VIR-32/33 installation section for details.
Unit connector (P1, P2) Thinline II 52/2 connector: CPN 634-2699-014, qty 2 (VIR-32)
CPN 634-2699-001, qty 2 (VIR-33)
Mating connector (J1, J2) Refer to the VIR-32/33 installation section.
Environmental
Temperature range
Storage –55 to +85 °C (–67 to +185 °F)


Cooling Convection
Shocks
Operational 6g
da, 5 to 14 Hz; 2 g, 14 to 44 Hz; 0.02 in da, 44 to 54 Hz; 3 g, 54 to 2000 Hz
Electrical
Power requirements
+27.5 V dc 1 A (28 W) nom; 1.5 A (41 W) during self-test, includes 0.8 A for superflags and
Normal (P1-41) marker beacon lamps. Connect primary power to P1-18 for rotor mod damping or
Rotor mod (P1-18) connect primary power to P1-41 for nonrotor mod.
26 V ac, 400 Hz (P1-42, 46) 2.5 mA phase reference (pf approx 1)
Channels 160 VOR, 40 LOC, 40 GS
Frequency control CSDB serial data or ARINC 2-out-of-5; selected by external strap at rear connector.
CSDB Inputs (P1-3, 4) 2-wire CSDB data bus provides a balanced differential signal using nominally 0- to 5-
V switching levels from the connected CTL-32/32A/23.
CSDB Outputs Two CSDB outputs are provided. Each is a 2-wire CSDB data bus that provides a
(1a, P1-48, 47) balanced differential signal using nominally 0- to 5-V switching levels to the con-
(1b, P1-39, 37) nected CTL-32/32A/23. Each output contains (identical) VOR, LOC, GS, MB, flag, di-
agnostic, and frequency information.
2-out-of-5 Grounds (0.0 ±1.0 V dc) two inputs out of five for each, open (greater than 100 kΩ)
the remaining three lines. Refer to ARINC 410 2-out-of-5.
Serial/parallel select (P1-6) Open (greater than 100 kΩ) = ARINC 429 tune selected; Ground (0.0 ±1.0 V dc) =
CSDB tune selected.
Source/unit ident (P1-14) Open (greater than 100 kΩ) on unit ident = NAV 1. Ground (0.0 ±1.0 V dc) = NAV 2
VOR/LOC performance
Frequency range VOR - 108.00 to 117.95 MHz. LOC - 108.10 to 111.95 MHz
Sensitivity 2.8 µV for VOR/LOC valid data bit
Selectivity 6 dB ± 15 kHz min; 60 dB ±41 kHz max
Spurious responses At least 70 dB below desired response
Audio output (P2-21, 22) (P2-39 CT) 100 mW nom into 600-W load with 30% modulation, at 1000 Hz.
Delayed ILS output (P2-40) ILS mode sinks up to 250 mA (ground); open (high resistance to gnd) in VOR mode.
Analog output (P2-36, 34, 30, 31, 50) OBI sine/cosine; capable of driving three RMI pointers
OBS resolver (P2-42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, Provides HSI course resolver signals. VIR-32/33 outputs ac signals on OBS E and F.
48) HSI return ac signals on OBS A and B. OBS G, C, and D connected to VIR-32/33 in-
ternal common
VOR/LOC deviation (P2-10, 13) Output capable of driving one to five loads, 1000 Ω each, without external strapping.
Deviation sensitivity in VOR, 150 µV for 10°; in LOC, 90 µV for 0.093 DDM. VOR de-
viation accuracy ±0.75°; LOC deviation centering accuracy ±4.0 µV dc. Polarity: VOR,
positive deviation for airplane left of course; LOC, positive deviation for 90 Hz > 150
Hz (airplane left of LOC course)

VOR TO/FROM (P2-37, 38) Output capable of driving one to three loads, 200 Ω each. Drive level TO: +80 to +165
µV. Drive level FROM: –80 to –165 µV.
VOR/LOC flag (low level) (P2-14, 17) Output capable of driving one to five loads, 1000 Ω each. Output +1.0 to +1.9 V dc,
current limit 10 mA
VOR/LOC superflag (P2-18, 29) Nominal output +26 V dc, min output 12.0 V dc at 250 mA with input power at +16 V
dc.
VOR/LOC RNAV det (P2-24, 26) Output is a buffered VOR/LOC detector output adjusted nominally for 0.5 V rms
with standard VOR signal input.
D/R U/L strap (P1-52) Ground (0.0 ±1.0 V dc) = up/left indication during self-test; open (greater than 100
kΩ) = down/right indication during self-test.
GS performance
Sensitivity 5 µV for flag out-of-view
Selectivity 6 dB at ±25.5 kHz min; 60 dB at ±160 kHz max
Spurious response –60 dB
Analog outputs
Deviation output (P1-1, 5) Capable of driving one to five 1000-Ω loads. 78 µV for 0.091 DDM, maximum output
is ±0.35 V dc. Minimum of 1000-Ω load must be connected to devn output to prevent
false diagnostic messages. Polarity: positive devn for 90 Hz > 150 Hz (airplane above
GS course)
GS flag (low level) (P1-9, 13) +1.0 to +1.9 V dc for flag out-of-view, current limited to 10 mA; capable of driving
one to five 1000-W loads
GS superflag (high level) (P1-17, 38) Nominal output is +26 V dc, current limited to 250 mA for a valid input signal
(output is greater than +12 V dc with a supply voltage of +16 V dc).
GS bias disable (P1-20) Ground (0.0 ±1.0 V dc) = GS flag and pointer in view when in VOR mode; open
(greater than 100 kΩ) = GS flag and pointer out of view when in VOR mode
MB performance
Frequency 75.00 MHz
Sensitivity High sens: 200 µV ±6 dB; Low sens: 1500 µV ±6 dB
Selectivity 6 dB at ±16 kHz min; 60 dB at ±170 kHz max
Audio output (P1-7, 8) (P1-11 CT) 50 µV (typical) into 600-Ω load at 2000 µV (high sensitivity)
Lamp output (P1-12, 15, 16, 19) Capable of driving dual 3-lamp load, 6.3-V lamps at 200 mA or less per bulb on each
bulb (400 Hz-blue lamp, 1300 Hz-amber lamp, 3000 Hz-white lamp)
Hi/lo strap (P1-43, 44) Used when parallel control is selected, P1-43 connected to 44 = High Sens.

Certification TSO- EUROCAE RTCA DOCUMENTS

VOR C40b ED-22A DO-153A
LOC C36d ED-46 DO-131A
GS C34d ED-47 DO-132A
MB C35d 1/WG7/70 DO-143
Software — — DO-178 (VIR-432), DO-178A Level 1 (VIR-433)
Environmental DO-160A, categories/A2E1/B/JY/EXXXXXZ/BZ/AZA
EUROCAE ED-14A
Physical
VIR-432/433 installation section in the Pro Line II installation manual (523-0772719)
for details.)
Unit connector (P1, P2) Thinline II 52/2 connector (CPN 634-2699-018, qty 2, VIR-432 -001; CPN 634-2699-
014 qty 2, VIR-432 -101; CPN 634-2699-002, qty 2, VIR-433)
Mating connector (J1, J2) Thinline II 52/2 connector (CPN 653-1286-001, qty 2); coax insert (CPN 372-2519-
040, qty 3 for RG-58, CPN 372-2519-100, qty 3 for RG-400)
Environmental
Temperature range
Storage –55 to +85 °C (–67 to +185 °F)
Cooling Convection
Shocks
Operational 6g
da, 5 to 14 Hz; 2 g, 14 to 44 Hz; 0.02 in da, 44 to 54 Hz; 3 g, 54 to 2000 Hz
Electrical
Power requirements +27.5 V dc at 0.6 A, 17 W
Normal (P1-41)
Rotor mod (P1-18)
Ground (P1-40, 38)
Digital I/O
Frequency control CSDB serial data or ARINC 429 serial data, each port capable of driving 5 loads

CSDB Inputs (P1-3, 4) Two-wire CSDB data bus provides a balanced differential signal using nominally 0 to
5 V switching levels from the connected CTL-32/32A provide control data to the VIR-
432/433.
CSDB Outputs Two CSDB outputs are provided. Each output is capable of driving 5 loads. Each
(1a, P1-48, 47) output contains (identical) VOR, LOC, GS, MB, flag, diagnostic, and frequency in-
(1b, P1-39, 37) formation.
ARINC 429 (continuous or burst tune) Serial data bus providing tuning and discrete data from a control unit.
Input port Port A receives continuous or burst ARINC 429 tune data. Port A is normally con-
(Port A, P1-34, 45) nected for continuous tune data from the X-side Nav control.
(Port B, P1-29, 33) Port B receives continuous or burst ARINC 429 tune data. Port B is normally con-
(Port C, P2-15, 16) nected for continuous tune data from the on-side Nav control.
Port C receives burst ARINC 429 tuning data only, normally connected to an FMS.
Port C is disabled in burst tune is disabled (P1-7 open).
Output port Port A and port B provide ARINC 429 output data. Each output is capable of driving
(Port A, P1-35, 36) five loads. Each output contains (identical) VOR, LOC, GS, MB, flag, diagnostic, and
(Port B, P1-22, 23) frequency information.
ARINC 429/CSDB select (P1-6) Open (greater than 100 kΩ) = ARINC 429 tune selected; Ground (0.0 ±1.0 V dc) =
CSDB tune selected.
Port B/A select (P1-31) Open (greater than 100 kΩ) = ARINC 429 input port B enabled when in continuous
tune; Ground (0.0 ±1.0 V dc) = ARINC 429 input port A enabled when in continuous
tune.
Burst tune enable (P2-8) Open (greater than 100 kΩ) = continuous tune; Ground (0.0 ±1.0 V dc) = Burst tune
(When in burst tune if continuous tune data is applied to port B, data at ports A and
C is ignored)
Unit ident (P1-14) Open (greater than 100 kΩ) on unit ident = Nav 1. Ground (0.0 ±1.0 V dc) = Nav 2
Standby/active (P1-10) Open = normal operation; Ground (less than 3 volts) = standby (inactive).
Self-test discrete input (P2-5) (self-test is Open = normal operation; Ground (less than 3 volts) = self-test
normally operated from a bit on the serial
tune bus)
Fault monitor output (P2-44) +27.5 V DC at up to 200 mA = no fault detected (normal operation); ground (less
than 3 volts) = fault detected.
ARINC tune/test inhibit (P2-4) Open = normal operation; Ground (less than 3 volts) = inhibits ARINC tune and self-
test (input from FCS system)
VOR/LOC performance (VOR/LOC output digital only, CSDB and/or ARINC 429. Analog output for a RMI
requires adapter unit BIA-32 or equivalent.)
Frequency range VOR - 108.00 to 117.95 MHz. LOC - 108.10 to 111.95 MHz
Channels VOR - 160 channels; LOC - 40 channels
Accuracy VOR mode: VOR bearing - ±0.75 degrees, 2 sigma; Phase - 0° with a 0° TO input;
Time constants - Normal = 1.4 seconds (±20%), Rotor Mod = 6.7 seconds (±20%).
LOC mode: Centering accuracy - ±0.003 DDM , 2 sigma; Time constant - 0.6 seconds
(±20%);
Polarity - Positive (CSDB and ARINC), DDM for 90 Hz > 150 Hz (aircraft left of LOC
course).
Sensitivity (aural) 3 µV for 10 dB (s+n)/n
Sensitivity (VOR/LOC) 2.8 µV for VOR/LOC valid data bit
Selectivity 6 dB ±30 kHz minimum; 60 dB ±82 kHz maximum
Spurious responses At least 70 dB below desired response

Audio output (P2-21, 22) 100 mW nominal into 600-W load with 30% modulation, at 1000 Hz.
(P2-39 CT)
Delayed ILS output (P2-40) ILS mode sinks up to 250 mA (ground); open (high resistance to gnd) in VOR mode.
VOR/LOC rnav det (P2-24, 26) Output is a buffered VOR/LOC detector output adjusted nominally for 0.5 V rms
with standard VOR signal input.
D/R U/L strap (P1-52) Ground (0.0 ±1.0 V dc) = up/left indication during self-test; open (greater than 100
kΩ) = down/right indication during self-test.
GS performance (GS output digital only, CSDB and/or ARINC 429)
Centering accuracy ±0.006 DDM, 2 sigma; Time constant - 0.6 seconds (±20%).
Deviation accuracy CSDB - Negative DDM for 90 Hz > 150 Hz (aircraft above GS course).
ARINC - Positive DDM for 90 Hz > 150 Hz (aircraft above GS course).
Sensitivity (P1-43, 44) 7 µV for GS valid data bit
Selectivity 6 dB at ±25.5 kHz minimum; 60 dB at ±160 kHz maximum.
MB performance
Frequency 75.00 MHz
Sensitivity High sens - 200 µV ±6 dB; Low sens - 1500 µV ±6 dB
Selectivity 6 dB at ±16 kHz minimum; 60 dB at ±170 kHz maximum.
Audio output (P1-7, 8) 50 mV (typical) into 600-W load at 2000 µV (high sensitivity)
(P1-11 CT)
Lamp output (P1-12, 15, 16) Capable of driving dual 6.3-volt lamps at 200 mA on each bulb (400 Hz-blue lamp,
1300 Hz-amber lamp, 3000 Hz-white lamp).
Table 1-45. Equipment Required But Not Supplied.
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND TYPICAL TYPE
ADF system
ADF-462 (622-7382-101) Control — CTL-62 (CPN 622-6522-00X) or ARINC 429 control
Antenna — ANT-462A (CPN 622-7383-001) or dual use ANT-462B (CPN 622-7384-001)
Radio magnetic indicator — RMI-36 (CPN 622-2506-00X)
Mount — UMT-12 (CPN 622-5212-001) preferred or 390R-19 (CPN 622-1195-301)
Installation kit — CPN 634-4192-016 (with contacts)
ADF-60A (622-2362-001) Control — CTL-62 (CPN 622-6522-00X) with CAD-62 (CPN 622-6590-001)
ADF-60B (622-2873-001) Antenna — ANT-60A (CPN 622-2363-001) or dual use ANT-60B (CPN 622-3710-001)
Radio magnetic indicator — RMI-36 (CPN 622-2506-00X) or RMI-30
Radio altimeter system

ALT-50A (622-3201-001) Antenna (qty 2) — ANT-52 (CPN 622-6793-001)
ALT-55B (622-2855-001) Radio altimeter indicator — DRI-55 (CPN 622-4160-01X)

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND TYPICAL TYPE
DME system
DME-42 (622-6263-003) Control — CTL-32 (CPN 622-6521-0XX)
Antenna — ANT-42 (CPN 622-6591-001)
DME indicator — IND-42A (CPN 622-6524-004) or IND-42C (CPN 622-7318-00X)
DME-442 (622-7309-101) Control — CTL-32 (CPN 622-6521-0XX) or ARINC 429 control
Antenna — ANT-42 (CPN 622-6591-001)
DME indicator — IND-42A (CPN 622-6524-004) or IND-42C (CPN 622-7318-00X)
Transponder system
TDR-90 (622-1270-001) Control — CTL-92 (CPN 622-6523-XXX) with CAD-62 (CPN 622-6590-001)
Antenna — ANT-42 (CPN 622-6591-001)
TDR-94 (622-9352-003) Control — CTL-92 (CPN 622-6523-XXX)
Antenna — ANT-42 (CPN 622-6591-001)
Mount — MMT-150 (CPN 622-9672-003)
TDR-94D (622-9210-003) Control — CTL-92 (CPN 622-6523-XXX)
Antenna (qty 2) — ANT-42 (CPN 622-6591-001)
Mount — MMT-150 (CPN 622-9672-003)
VHF comm system

VHF-22A (622-6152-001) Control — CTL-22 (CPN 622-6520-00X)
VHF-22B (622-6153-001) Antenna — VHF communications antenna
Installation kit — CPN 634-4192-001
Navigation system
VIR-32 (622-6137-001) Control — CTL-32 (CPN 622-6521-0XX)
VIR-432 (622-7194-101)
Antennas — VHF navigation antenna, Collins 137X-1
— Marker beacon antenna, 37X-2
— Glideslope antenna, 37P-4/5

ADDENDUM 2
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet revises related publications information. Replace Table 1-46 on page 1-97 with table below.
Table 1-46. Related Publications.
PUBLICATION PART NUMBER
ADF-462 ADF Receiver and ANT-462( ) ADF Antenna Repair Manual 523-0773905
ADF-60( ) Automatic Direction Finder System Instruction Book (Repair Manual) 523-0766184
ALT-50 Radio Altimeter System Instruction Book (Repair Manual) 523-0766818
BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter Repair Manual 523-0775205
CAD-31/62 Control Adapters Repair Manual 523-0773216
CAD-870 Transponder Control Adapter Repair Manual 523-0774242
CAD-870G Transponder Control Adapter Repair Manual 523-0774234
CLT-X2/X2A Controls Instruction Book (Repair Manual) 523-0772494
CTL-23 Control Component Maintenance Manual (Repair Manual) 523-0776775
DME-42 Distance Measuring Equipment Instruction Book (Repair Manual) 523-0772458
DME-442 Distance Measuring Equipment Repair Manual 523-0774368
EFIS-85( )/86( ) Electronic Flight Instrument System Installation Manual (Refer to General Aviation Publications
Index, CPN 523-0766828, for the specific EFIS-85( )/86( ) installation manual required.)
EHSI-74 Electronic HSI System Instruction Book (Installation Manual) 523-0772693
FCS-85 Flight Control System Instruction Book (Installation Manual) 523-0772076
FMS-90 Flight Management System Instruction Book (Installation and Repair Manual) 523-0771082
General Aviation Antennas Instruction Book 523-0769091
Installation Practices Manual 523-0775254
MND-640( ) Multisensor Navigation Display System Installation Manual 523-0775935
RAC-870 Radio Altimeter Converter Repair Manual 523-0774271
RMI-30 Radio Magnetic Indicator Instruction Book (Installation and Repair Manual) 523-0769676
RMI-36 Radio Magnetic Indicator Instruction Book (Repair Manual) 523-0766802
RTU-870A/870T Radio Tuning Unit Component Maintenance Manual (Repair Manual) 523-0774068
TDR-90 Transponder Installation and Repair Manual (Repair Manual) 523-0765128
TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder System Instruction Book 523-0775652
UMT-( ) Mount and Thinline II Connectors Installation Manual 523-0772277
Universal Mounts Assembly Instructions 523-0766506
VHF-21( )/22( ) VHF Comm Transceiver Instruction Book (Repair Manual) 523-0771854
VHF-422( ) VHF Comm Transceiver Instruction Book (Repair Manual) 523-0773785
VIR-32/33 Navigation Receiver Instruction Book (Repair Manual) 523-0772819
972Q-4 VOR/ILS/MB Ramp Test Set and Battery Charger Instruction Book 523-0766426
Addendum 2
523-0772719-02711A (Facing Page 1-97)
PUBLICATION PART NUMBER
ADF-462 ADF Receiver and ANT-462( ) ADF Antenna Repair Manual 523-0773905
ADF-60( ) Automatic Direction Finder System Instruction Book (Repair Manual) 523-0766184
BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter Repair Manual 523-0775205
CAD-31/62 Control Adapters Repair Manual 523-0773216
CAD-870 Transponder Control Adapter Repair Manual 523-0774242
CAD-870G Transponder Control Adapter Repair Manual 523-0774234
CLT-X2/X2A Controls Instruction Book (Repair Manual) 523-0772494
CTL-23 Control Component Maintenance Manual (Repair Manual) 523-0776775
DME-42 Distance Measuring Equipment Instruction Book (Repair Manual) 523-0772458
DME-442 Distance Measuring Equipment Repair Manual 523-0774368
EFIS-85( )/86( ) Electronic Flight Instrument System Installation Manual (Refer to General Aviation
Publications Index, CPN 523-0766828, for the specific EFIS-85( )/86( ) installation manual required.)
EHSI-74 Electronic HSI System Instruction Book (Installation Manual) 523-0772693
FCS-85 Flight Control System Instruction Book (Installation Manual) 523-0772076
FMS-90 Flight Management System Instruction Book (Installation and Repair Manual) 523-0771082
General Aviation Antennas Instruction Book 523-0769091
Installation Practices Manual 523-0775254
MND-640( ) Multisensor Navigation Display System Installation Manual 523-0775935
RAC-870 Radio Altimeter Converter Repair Manual 523-0774271
RMI-30 Radio Magnetic Indicator Instruction Book (Installation and Repair Manual) 523-0769676
RMI-36 Radio Magnetic Indicator Instruction Book (Repair Manual) 523-0766802
RTU-870A/870T Radio Tuning Unit Component Maintenance Manual (Repair Manual) 523-0774068
TDR-90 Transponder Installation and Repair Manual (Repair Manual) 523-0765128
TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder System Instruction Book 523-0775652
TDR-94/94D ATC/Mode S Transponder Component Maintenance Manual (Repair Manual) 523-0775997
UMT-( ) Mount and Thinline II Connectors Installation Manual 523-0772277
Universal Mounts Assembly Instructions 523-0766506
VHF-21( )/22( ) VHF Comm Transceiver Instruction Book (Repair Manual) 523-0771854
VHF-422( ) VHF Comm Transceiver Instruction Book (Repair Manual) 523-0773785
972Q-4 VOR/ILS/MB Ramp Test Set and Battery Charger Instruction Book 523-0766426
Revised 11 April 1997 1-97/(1-98 blank)

ADDENDUM 35
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL
Insert this addendum sheet in Part A of this manual facing the section title page of the
Pro Line II Comm/Nav/Pulse System Installation Section (523-0772439-007118).
This addendum is issued to inform you that the RTU-42X0 Radio Tuning Unit and AIU-4000 Audio Interface Unit
installation section (523-0778075) is out-of-date and will be deleted from the Pro Line II installation manual during
the next revision cycle. Information in this section is included in a new RTU-42X0 Radio Tuning Unit installation
manual (523-0780424).
Addendum 35
523-0772719-0b711A (Facing Pro Line II Installation Title Page)
523-0772439-007118

Pro Line II
Installation
This installation manual includes the following individual system or unit installation elements:
Part A
General System and Mount Information 523-0775917
ADF-462 ADF Receiver and ANT-462( ) ADF Antenna 523-0773908
ADF-60 Automatic Direction Finding System 523-0766186
ALT-50/55 Radio Altimeter System 523-0775918
BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter 523-0775207
CAD-31 Control Adapter 523-0774357
CAD-870 Transponder Control Adapter 523-0774290
CAD-870G Transponder Control Adapter 523-0774236
CTL-X2/X2A/23 Controls 523-0772496
DDA-42 Distance Data Adapter 523-0773962
DME-42/442 Distance Measuring Equipment and IND-42( ) DME Indicator 523-0773741
GPS-4000 Global Positioning Sensor 523-0778241
Part B
MND-640 Multisensor Navigation Display System 523-0775937
RAC-870 Radio Altimeter Converter 523-0774273
RMI-36/BDI-36 Radio Magnetic Indicator 523-0766804
RTU-870A/870T Radio Tuning Unit 523-0776529
RTU-42X0 Radio Tuning Unit and AIU-4000 Audio Interface Unit 523-0778075
TDR-90 Transponder 523-0765130
TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder System 523-0775654
VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) VHF Comm Transceiver 523-0771856
VIR-32/33/432/433 Navigation Receiver 523-0772451
NOTICE: This section replaces sixth edition dated 12 May 1994 and revision.
þ 523-0775917-004118

Collins
Pro Line II
General System and
Mount Information
Installation
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page
2.1 INTRODUCTION.....................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.2 GENERAL SYSTEM INFORMATION ...................................................................................................................2-1
2.3 UMT-10/11/12/13 AND 390R-18/19/20 MOUNT INSTALLATION ........................................................................2-1
2.3.1 UMT-10/11/12/13 Mount ................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.3.1.1 Installation...................................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.3.1.2 Removal........................................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.3.2 390R-18/19/20 Mount .....................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.3.2.1 Installation...................................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.3.2.2 Removal........................................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.4 PLANNING...............................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.4.1 General............................................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.4.2 Cooling Considerations...................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.5 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS ...................................................................................................................................2-2
2.6 CONNECTOR CONTACT ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION......................................................................... 2-18
2.6.1 Thinline/Thinline II Mating Connector Contacts and Coaxial Connectors ...............................................................2-18
2.6.1.1 Thinline Mating Connector Contacts .......................................................................................................................2-18
2.6.1.2 Thinline II Mating Connector Contacts ...................................................................................................................2-18
2.6.1.3 Coaxial Connectors ....................................................................................................................................................2-20
2.6.1.4 Thinline II Mating Connector Polarization..............................................................................................................2-21
2.6.2 D-Subminiature Mating Connector Contacts..............................................................................................................2-28
2.6.3 MS Type (CTL) Mating Connector Contacts ...............................................................................................................2-28
NOTICE: This section replaces third edition dated 12 May 1994 and revision.
Page No Issue
* Title ...........................................11 Apr 97

* 2-1 thru 2-3 ...............................11 Apr 97
* 2-4 Blank...................................11 Apr 97
* 2-5 thru 2-7 ...............................11 Apr 97
* 2-8 Blank...................................11 Apr 97
* 2-9 thru 2-13 .............................11 Apr 97
* 2-14 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-15 thru 2-21 ...........................11 Apr 97
* 2-22 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-23 thru 2-30 ...........................11 Apr 97
* 2-31 Added ................................11 Apr 97
* 2-32 Blank Added......................11 Apr 97
* 2-33 thru 2-34 Added ................11 Apr 97


1st Ed 21 Jul 89 None
2nd Ed 2 Dec 91 None
1 29 Sep 92 None
3rd Ed 12 May 94 None
1 15 Sep 95 None

section II
installation
2.1 INTRODUCTION 2.3 UMT-10/11/12/13 AND 390R-18/19/20

MOUNT INSTALLATION
This section provides general information on the Pro
2.3.1 UMT-10/11/12/13 Mount
Line II Comm/Nav/Pulse System. Included is UMT-
10/11/12/13 and 390R-18/19/20 mount information.
The UMT-( ) mount is preferred over the 390R-( )
Also included are coax connector assembly instruc-
mount. Use a 390R-( ) mount when a UMT-( ) mount
tions for the Thinline rf connector, the Thinline II rf
cannot be used. Refer to Figure 2-4 for the outline
connector, a TNC connector to an RG-393 coax, a
and mounting dimensions for the UMT-10/11/12/13
TNC or BNC connector to an RG-142/U coax, and a
mount. Figure 2-5 provides the outline and mount-
coax insert to an RG-400/U coax.
ing dimensions for a piggyback mounting without a
back cover. Figure 2-6 provides outline and mount-
2.2 GENERAL SYSTEM INFORMATION ing dimensions for a piggyback mounting with a back
cover. Refer to the UMT-( ) Mount and Thinline II
Figure 2-1 is a Comm/Nav/Pulse System overview Connectors Instruction Book (CPN 523-0772277) if
for Pro Line II equipment. This diagram provides a additional information is required.
typical overview of the controls, remote-mounted
units, and antennas. 2.3.1.1 Installation
Figure 2-2 shows the power and ground cable con- Refer to the installation section of the equipment to
nections to the Pro Line II Comm/Nav/Pulse Sys- be installed for a description of the location re-
tem. After installation of the cables in the aircraft quirements. Perform the following after a location
and before installation of the equipment, a check has been found and the wire harness installed.
should be made to ensure that the aircraft power
and ground is applied only to the pins specified. a. Position assembled receiver mating connector
(on aircraft wiring harness) in correct location
at rear of mount. Insert cable with grommet
Figure 2-3 is the lighting and dimming bus inter-
into slotted access hole in rear of mount.
connect diagram. Option 1 provides individual dim-
b. Secure mating connector to mount as instructed
ming from the optical sensor in each control. Option
in the UMT-( ) Mount and Thinline II Connec-
2 connects all of the controls together so that the dis-
tors Instruction Book.
play brightness is uniform. Option 3 provides exter-
c. Mark, punch, and drill required mounting
nal display brightness control. This option also pro-
holes.
vides uniform display brightness. Use the option best
suited for your installation. Keep in mind the loca-
tion of the controls on the instrument panel when Caution
selecting the appropriate option. For additional gen-
eral information on wiring, bonding, and other in- Ensure that adjacent equipment and cables
stallation applications, refer to the Collins Installa- will not be damaged when locating mount-
tion Practices Manual (CPN 523-0775254). ing holes.
d. Install mount in aircraft and secure with re-
quired hardware.

general system and mount information
2.3.1.2 Removal 2.4 PLANNING
a. Remove hardware securing mount to aircraft. 2.4.1 General

b. Remove mating connector from mount as in-
structed in the UMT-( ) Mount and Thinline II
Proper and careful planning prior to installation is
Connectors Instruction Book.
essential for reliable performance and easy mainte-
c. Remove mount.
nance. The following list is a sample of the points to
be considered in planning an installation:
2.3.2 390R-18/19/20 Mount
a. Single or dual installation.
Refer to Figure 2-7 for the outline and mounting
b. Installation location — adequate airflow for
dimensions for the 390R-18/19/20 mount. Sheet 2 of
cooling, good bonding to aircraft ground, ease of
Figure 2-7 shows the hole layout for mounting the
cable routing, room for single or dual mounting
390R-18/19/20 mount. Refer to the 390R-18/19/20
(piggyback or side-by-side).
Universal Mount Kits section of the Collins Univer-
c. Installation configuration (ADF or VOR).
sal Mounts Assembly Instructions (CPN 523-
d. Compatibility with other equipment — loading
0766506) if additional information is required.
considerations.
2.3.2.1 Installation
2.4.2 Cooling Considerations
Refer to the installation section of the equipment to
be installed for a description of the location re- The following paragraph contains general cooling
quirements. Perform the following after a location considerations. For specific cooling requirements,
has been found and the wire harness installed. refer to the installation section of the unit or units
to be installed.
a. Position assembled receiver mating connector
(on aircraft wiring harness) in correct location Units tightly packed in the radio rack heat each
at rear of mount. Insert cable with grommet other through radiation, convection, and sometimes
into slotted access hole in rear of mount. by direct conduction. If space permits, separate the
b. Secure mating connector to mount with four 4- units from each other to significantly improve reli-
40 x 1/4 panhead screws (CPN 343-0133-000) ability.
and four #4 lockwashers (CPN 310-0279-000).
c. Mark, punch, and drill required mounting
Even a single unit operates at a much higher tem-
holes.
perature in still air than in moving air. Fans or
some other means of moving the air around elec-
Caution tronic equipment are usually a worthwhile invest-
ment. If a form of ram air cooling is installed, make
Ensure that adjacent equipment and cables certain that rainwater cannot enter and be sprayed
will not be damaged when locating mount- on the equipment.
ing holes.
d. Install mount in aircraft and secure with re- 2.5 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS
quired hardware.
2.3.2.2 Removal Note
a. Remove hardware securing mount to aircraft. The preferred method for grounding
b. Remove four 4-40 x 1/4 panhead screws and shielded wiring in new installations for
four #4 lockwashers securing Thinline connec- HIRF and lightning protection is a connec-
tor to mount. Remove wiring harness and con- tion to a chassis or common ground, taking
nector from mount. the shortest route possible. Avoid using a
c. Remove mount. return pin on a unit as a shield ground.

Note During preparation of the interconnect cables, ob-

serve the following precautions:
On new aircraft installations, it is recom-
mended that RG-400 coax cable be used in- a. Read all notes on drawings and interconnect
stead of RG-58; RG-393 coax cable be used diagrams prior to fabricating interconnect wir-
instead of RG-214; also, L2201TX triax ca- ing cables.
ble be used instead of TRF-58. RG-58, RG- b. Bond and shield all parts of the aircraft electri-
214, and TRF-58 are not recommended be- cal system, such as generator and ignition sys-
cause their jackets are made of PVC and do tems.
not meet FAR 23.1365 and FAR 25.831. Re- c. Keep the interconnect cables away from circuits
fer to Collins ALL AVIONICS SIL 2-92 for carrying heavy current, pulse transmitting
additional information. equipment, and other sources of interference.
d. Make all external connections of the equipment
Interconnect cables should be prepared in accor- through the designated connectors listed on the
dance with the interconnect diagrams. Since these outline and mounting diagrams.
interconnects are typical, variations or modifica- e. For balanced connections, use twisted-pair
tions to meet customer requirements are inevitable. shielded wiring for minimum pickup of electro-
Refer to the paragraph on PLANNING in the ap- static and magnetic fields. Avoid long runs of
propriate installation section for information on wire and keep input and output circuits sepa-
some of the options that can affect the intercon- rated as much as possible.
necting cabling. f. All interconnect wires and cables should be
marked in accordance with the Aircraft Elec-
The mounts, mating connectors, and contacts re- tronics Association Wire Marking Standard
quired to install a unit are listed in tables in the (refer to Figure 2-17).
appropriate installation section. g. Avoid excessive cable lengths, but allow suffi-
cient slack for movement due to vibration.
h. After installation of the cables in the aircraft,
Warning and before installation of the equipment, check
to ensure that aircraft power is applied only to
Ensure that the aircraft battery master the pins specified on the interconnect diagrams
switch is turned off before installing any of and that all other wires and shields are prop-
the interconnect cabling. erly terminated.

Figure 2-1. Comm/Nav/Pulse System, Installation Overview

Figure 2-2. Comm/Nav/Pulse System, Installation Power and Ground Cable Diagram

Figure 2-3. Pro Line II Equipment Lighting and Dimming Bus

Installation, Interconnect and Optional Control Diagram

Figure 2-4 (Sheet 1 of 3). UMT-10/11/12/13 Mount, Outline and

Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-4 (Sheet 2). UMT-10/11/12/13 Mount, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

ADDENDUM 42
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL PART B

TDR-94/94D Installation Section (523-0775654-008118) in Part B of this manual.
This addendum replaces Addendum 27 sheet 2 of 3, dated July 16, 1999.
A new installation kit and mount have been developed for the BA609 aircraft. The following changes will be
incorporated in Table 2-4 at the next revision of the manual.
P/O Table 2-4. TDR-94/94D Transponder and MMT-150 Mounting Tray, Installation Kits
INSTALLATION KIT CPN
UNIT OR ITEM DESCRIPTION 628-8661 628-8660
001 002 001 002 003 (for BA609)
TDR-94 Mating conn kit with contacts X
Mating conn kit without contacts X
TDR-94D Mating conn kit with contacts X X
Mating conn kit Description CPN

contents (*) (**)
Conn Plate 628-8657-002 1 1
Conn Plate 628-8657-001 1 1 1
Conn, 60-pin male 634-1112-001 2 2 2 2 2
Keyway 634-1116-001 4 4 4 4 4
Retainer, Keyway 634-1117-001 5 5 5 5 5
Insert, fastener 334-2117-010 4 4 4 4 4
Contact 372-2514-110 25 25 25
Contact 372-2514-180 75 75 75
Coax conn, TNC 90° (****)(RG-214) 357-7351-010 2 1 1
Spring, ground(***) 634-1120-001 2 2 2 2 2
Screw, cap, socket head 324-2604-000 4 4 4 4 4
Screw, machine, 6-32 x 5/16 343-0168-000 4 4 4 4 4
Bracket, right 653-4042-003 1
Bracket, left 653-4042-004 1
MMT-150 Modular Mounting Tray 622-9672-003

One MMT-150 required for each TDR-94/94D.
Modular Mounting Tray (for BA609) 622-9672-004
The remainder of Table 2-4 is unchanged. Asterisks (*, **, ***, ****) refer to bottom of Table 2-4 on page 2-11.
Addendum 42
15 Aug 2000 Sheet 1 of 1
523-0772719-0j711A (Facing Page 2-11)
Figure 2-4 (Sheet 3). UMT-10/11/12/13 Mount, Outline and

Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-5 (Sheet 1 of 2). UMT-10/11/12/13 Mount, Piggyback Mounting Without Cover, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-5 (Sheet 2). UMT-10/11/12/13 Mount, Piggyback

Mounting Without Cover, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-6. UMT-10/11/12/13 Mount, Piggyback Mounting With

Cover, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-7 (Sheet 1 of 2). 390R-18/19/20 Mount, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-7 (Sheet 2). 390R-18/19/20 Mount, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

2.6 CONNECTOR CONTACT ASSEMBLY Collins UMT-( ) Mount and Thinline II Connectors
AND INSTALLATION manual (CPN 523-0772277). Figure 2-8 is a view of
the female fork contact and locking tang setting.
The following paragraphs describe the crimping Figure 2-9 is a view of how to crimp a female fork
and installation of contacts used in the Thinline, contact.
Thinline II, 50-pin D-subminiature, and MS type
(CTL) mating connectors.
Note
2.6.1 Thinline/Thinline II Mating Connector
Contacts and Coaxial Connectors Each connecting wire must be crimped in
the contact so the crimped portion of the
2.6.1.1 Thinline Mating Connector Contacts
contact can enter the connector shell. The
The connecting wire must be crimped in the contact crimped portion must enter the shell to
so that the crimped portion of the contact can enter provide positive locking of contact in the
the connector shell. The crimped portion must enter shell.
the shell to provide positive locking of contact in
a. Contact Crimping Instructions
shell. Figure 2-8 is a view of the female fork contact
and locking tang setting. Figure 2-9 is a view of 1. Strip approximately 3.2 mm (0.125 in) of in-
how to crimp a female fork contact. sulation from each interconnect wire.
a. Contact Crimping Instructions 2. Place the contact into crimp tool (refer to
Table 2-1 for part number) and gently close
1. Strip proper amount of insulation from wire handles until the contact is held in place
so conductor can be inserted as far as possi- without deforming either the wire or insu-
ble into slot of contact pin. No bare wire lation barrels.
should extend from rear of pin and insula- 3. Hold wire straight and insert stripped por-
tion should be crimped in pin insulation tion as far as possible into wire barrel of con-
barrel. tact pin. Bare wire should extend beyond the
2. Crimp each interconnect wire in contact front of the wire barrel, but no more than 0.8
with crimping tool (CPN 623-8579-001 or mm (1/32 in). Insulation should be aligned
359-0697-010). If #26 wire is used, strip with the insulation barrel.
enough insulation so bare wire can be dou- 4. Hold the wire in place and complete the
bled when crimped into contact. crimp by closing the crimping tool handles
until the ratchet releases.
b. Contact Insertion Instructions 5. Remove the crimped contact from the
crimping tool.
1. Push the contact into the appropriate con-
nector shell hole until contact clicks into po- Note
sition. Pull lightly on the wire to assure the
pin is properly locked. (Refer to 390R- Be sure that the wire insulation has not
18/19/20 Universal Mount Kit Instructions been crimped into the wire barrel. The end
(CPN 523-0764521) for more detailed pro- portions of the insulation barrel should
cedures of connector kit assembly.) meet after crimping to form a complete
loop. The wire barrel section of the contact
c. Contact Removal Instructions
should be completely closed after crimping.
1. Use extraction tool (CPN 372-8091-010) for
removal of the contacts. Insert extraction b. Contact Insertion Instructions
tool into mating side of connector housing.
Push plunger into connector and pull wire 1. Use insertion tool (refer to Table 2-1 for
and contact out opposite side. part number) and insert each wired contact
into the proper connector hole from the rear
2.6.1.2 Thinline II Mating Connector Contacts and push until locked. Pull gently on each
wire to ensure that the pin is properly
For more detailed instructions on contact crimping, locked into the connector.
contact insertion, and contact extraction, refer to

Figure 2-8. Female Fork Contact, Locking Tang Setting
Figure 2-9. Female Fork Contact Diagram

Table 2-1. Thinline/Thinline II Mating Connector Contacts, Tool Requirements.
MATING CONNECTOR CONTACTS ASSOCIATED SPECIAL TOOLS
COLLINS
DESCRIPTION CRIMPING INSERTION EXTRACTION
PART NUMBER
Snap-in tuning fork 372-2514-110 653-8579-001 or 359-0697-050 359-0697-020

(wire with insulation up 359-0697-010 *(Daniels DAK-188) *(Daniels DAK-188)
to 0.050 in dia) *(Daniels GMT-221)
Snap-in tuning fork 372-2514-180 359-0697-010 359-0697-050 359-0697-020
(wire with insulation *(Daniels GMT-221) *(Daniels DAK-188) *(Daniels DAK-188)
0.050 to 0.080 in dia)
Coaxial insert 372-2519-040, -100 357-8622-010 with 370-8040-030
357-8622-160
*Special tools are available in connector kit, CPN 359-0697-080 (Daniels DMC-593), or can be ordered from: Daniels Manufacturing
Corp., 6103 Anno Ave., Orlando, FL 32809. Phone: (407)855-6161; Telex: 564321
c. Contact Extraction Instructions nectors for coax cable. The diagrams provide infor-
mation on connecting single shielded coax or dual
shielded (triaxial) cable to a Thinline coax contact.
1. From the mating side of the connector, in-
Triaxial coax is primarily used in the installation of
sert the extraction tool (refer to Table 2-1
ADF antennas. Figure 2-12 has the assembly in-
for part number) as far as possible into the
structions for preparing an RG-142/U coax cable for
cavity containing the contact to be removed.
a TNC or BNC coax connector. Figure 2-13 shows
2. Push the ejector plunger of the extraction
the assembly instructions for preparing an RG-393
tool forward, holding the handle in position
coax cable for a TNC coax connector. Figure 2-14
to keep the tool from backing out of the
shows the assembly instructions for preparing an
connector.
RG-400/U and RG-58/U coax cable for a coax insert.
3. Holding the tool in position, grasp the wire
and gently pull the contact free from the
connector. 2.6.1.3.2 Coaxial Contact Ground Spring
2.6.1.3 Coaxial Connectors Note
The following paragraphs describe the assembly in- On some ADF antenna installations, exces-
structions for various coax connectors used in the sive electrical noise can be reduced with the
installation of Pro Line II units. Unless otherwise installation of coaxial grounding spring as-
specified, RG-400 50-ohm coax is recommended for sembly. The use of the grounding spring as-
COMM and NAV applications. For pulse equip- sembly will aid in meeting HIRF and light-
ment, RG-393 coax is recommended. Unless other- ning requirements.
wise specified, RG-142/U coax can be used on pulse
equipment of short distances. Refer to the appro- When it is required that coaxial contacts be
priate unit installation section for the recom- grounded in the mating male connector side, the
mended coax to be used. method usually used is to extend the cable shield to
a grounding point on the mount or aircraft. This is
usually done with a pigtail ground wire, or the
2.6.1.3.1 Coaxial Contact Assembly shield braid itself, soldered to a lug attached by fas-
Instructions (Including Thinline II teners to the mount or aircraft. This method fea-
Coax Contact) tures the lowest resistance ground path (if the wire
lengths are kept to a minimum), but is difficult to
Figure 2-10 and Figure 2-11 are the assembly in- accomplish within an aircraft and makes contact
structions for the Thinline and Thinline II rf con- removal/replacement difficult.

ADDENDUM 3
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

general system and mount information section (523-0775917-004118) in Part A of this manual.
This addendum corrects the part number of the coaxial insert crimping tool in Table 2-1 on page 2-20. Corrected
part number appears in bold type.
P/O Table 2-1. Thinline/Thinline II Mating Connector Contacts, Tool Requirements.
DESCRIPTION COLLINS PART NUMBER CRIMPING INSERTION EXTRACTIONS
Coaxial insert 372-2519-040, -100 359-8103-010 with 370-8040-030

357-8622-160
Addendum 3
523-0772719-03711A (Facing Page 2-20)
Coaxial ground spring (CPN 634-0102-001) is 2.6.1.4 Thinline II Mating Connector

available to provide grounding from the contact Polarization
shield to the mount. As shown in Figure 2-15 the
spring is positioned on the bottom dowel of the con- Before mounting the connector, place the captive
nector and the connector mounting plate. Once the keyway ring on the screw, small outside diameter
spring is in place, the outer sleeve of the coaxial toward the screw head (see Figure 2-18). Slide the
contact is in contact with the grounding spring, keyway over the screw head and onto the captive
providing the path to ground. keyway ring. The keyway and captive ring will
snap together and not separate. Insert screw onto
Contact resistance from coaxial contact to mount connector. Ensure that orientation of keyway
ground is initially in the range of 20 to 40 mil- matches mating connector, then tighten keyway
liohms. After long exposure, the contact resistance and connector to mount using a hex wrench in-
range will increase to 30 to 80 milliohms. If lower serted through keyway. Torque to 6-8 in•lb.
resistance paths are required, the direct wire
method will have to be used.

Figure 2-10. Installation of Thinline RF Connector

Figure 2-11. Installation of Thinline II RF Connector

Figure 2-12. Instructions for Preparation of RG-142/U Cable

Figure 2-13 (Sheet 1 of 2). Instructions for Assembling TNC Mating Connector to RG-393 Cable

Figure 2-13 (Sheet 2). Instructions for Assembling TNC Mating Connector to RG-393 Cable

2.6.2 D-Subminiature Mating Connector 2.6.3 MS Type (CTL) Mating Connector

Contacts Contacts
The following steps describe the procedure to
The following steps provide instructions on
properly crimp the D-subminiature contacts.
crimping contacts for an MS3126E20-41XX con-
Table 2-2 is a list of the tool requirements for the
nector. The crimp contacts are supplied with the
snap-in contact (CPN 371-0213-110). Refer to
connector. If additional contacts are needed, use
Figure 2-16 for instructions on the use of crimping
CPN 359-0032-020 socket contacts. Table 2-3 is a
and insertion/extraction tools on D-subminiature
listing of the tool requirements used in crimping
connectors and contacts.
the contacts for MS3126E20-41XX mating connec-
tors.
Note
The connecting wire must be crimped in the Note

contact so the crimped portion of the con-
tact can enter the connector shell. The The connecting wire must be crimped in
crimped portion must enter the shell to the contact so the crimped portion of the
provide positive locking of contact in the contact can enter the connector shell. The
shell. crimped portion must enter the shell to
provide positive locking of contact in the
a. Strip proper amount of insulation from wire so
shell.
conductor can be inserted as far as possible
into slot of contact pin. No bare wire should
extend from rear of pin and insulation should
conductor can be inserted as far as possible
be crimped in pin insulation barrel.
into slot of contact pin. No bare wire should
b. Crimp each interconnect wire in contact with
extend from rear of pin and insulation should
crimping tool. Use crimping tool (CPN 359-
be crimped in pin insulation barrel.
8102-010 (M22520/2-01 or equivalent)) and
b. Crimp each interconnect wire in contact with
positioner (CPN 359-8102-080 (M22520/2-08
or equivalent)) to crimp contacts (CPN 371-
8102-010 or equivalent) to crimp contacts
0213-110). When #26 AWG wire is used, strip
(CPN 359-0032-020). When #26 AWG wire is
enough insulation so that bare wire can be
used, strip enough insulation so that bare wire
doubled when crimped into contact.
can be doubled when crimped into contact.
c. Push contact into appropriate connector shell
c. Push contact into appropriate connector shell
hole until contact clicks into position. Extrac-
hole until contact clicks into position. For pin
tion/insertion tool CPN 371-8445-010 (Cannon
locations, refer to the appropriate installation
CIET-20HD) or equivalent may be used. For
control drawing or pin function table. Pull
pin locations, refer to the appropriate installa-
gently on wire to ensure that pin is properly
tion control drawing or pin function table. Pull
locked.
gently on wire to ensure that pin is properly
locked.
Table 2-2. D-Subminiature Snap-In Contact (CPN 371-0213-110), Tool Requirements.
*COLLINS MILITARY ITT CANNON

TOOL TYPE
PART NUMBER STANDARD NUMBER PART NUMBER
Crimp 359-8102-010 with M22520/2-01 NA

359-8102-080 positioner M22520/2-08 NA
Insertion/extraction 371-8445-010 CIET-20HD
Alternate insertion/extraction 370-8053-020 M81969/1-02
*Equivalent tools may be substituted for those listed in this table.

Figure 2-14. Instructions for Preparation of RG-400/U and RG-58/U Cable

Figure 2-15. Coaxial Contact Grounding Spring Assembly, Exploded View
Table 2-3. CPN 359-0032-020 Contact, Tool Requirements.
MILITARY STANDARD
TOOL TYPE *COLLINS PART NUMBER **DANIELS PART NUMBER
NUMBER
Crimp 359-8102-010 with M22520/2-01 AFM-8

359-8102-020 positioner M22520/2-02 K1-S
Insertion 359-4078-010 M524256A20 DAK-20
Extraction 359-4078-020 MS24256R20 DRK-20

**Daniels Manufacturing Corp., 6103 Anno Ave., Orlando, FL 32809. Phone: (407)855-6161; Telex: 564321

Figure 2-16. Use of Crimping and Insertion/Extraction Tools, D-Subminiature Connector Contacts

Figure 2-17. AEA Wire Marking Standard

Figure 2-18. Polarizing Hardware Assembly, Exploded View

þ 523-0773908-007118

Collins
ADF-462 ADF Receiver
and
ANT-462( ) ADF Antenna
Installation
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page Paragraph Page
2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING 2.6.2.2 Installation..........................................................2-6

EQUIPMENT.......................................................2-1 2.6.2.3 Removal ...............................................................2-7
2.6.3 ADF-462 ADF Receiver Installation .....................2-8
2.2 PREINSTALLATION CHECK ............................2-1
2.6.4 ADF Control ...........................................................2-8
2.3 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS ................................2-1 2.6.5 Supplementary Interconnect Information ............2-8
2.6.5.1 Strapping Options...............................................2-8
2.4 PLANNING...........................................................2-1 2.6.5.2 CSDB Tuning ......................................................2-8
2.4.1 ADF-462 ADF Receiver ......................................... 2-1 2.6.5.3 ARINC 429 Tuning .............................................2-8
2.4.1.1 ADF-462 ADF Receiver Location ....................... 2-1 2.6.5.4 Keep-Alive Input .................................................2-9
2.4.1.2 ADF-462 ADF Receiver Mounting ..................... 2-1 2.6.5.5 Discretes ..............................................................2-9
2.4.2 ANT-462( ) ADF Antenna Location ...................... 2-2 2.6.5.6 ADF-462 Fault Monitor ......................................2-9
2.4.3 Cabling and Bonding ............................................. 2-2 2.6.6 RMI-36 Radio Magnetic Indicator/ BDI-36
2.4.4 Quadrantal Error Correction ................................ 2-2 Bearing Distance Indicator .....................................2-9
2.5 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS ...............................2-3 2.7 POSTINSTALLATION TEST
2.5.1 General................................................................... 2-3 PROCEDURES....................................................2-9
2.5.2 Connector Contact Assembly and Installation..... 2-4 2.7.1 Self-Test..................................................................2-9
2.5.2.1 Thinline II Mating Connector Contacts ............ 2-4 2.7.2 Functional Test ....................................................2-10
2.5.2.2 Thinline II Coaxial Contact ............................... 2-4 2.7.3 HF Disable Check (Customer Option) ................2-10
2.5.3 Connector Contact Removal.................................. 2-4 2.7.4 Quadrantal Error Calibration .............................2-10
2.6 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES.......................2-4 2.7.4.1 Airborne Calibration.........................................2-11
2.6.1 Universal Mounts .................................................. 2-4 2.7.4.2 Ground Calibration...........................................2-12
2.6.1.1 UMT-12 Universal Mount .................................. 2-4 2.8 DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY ...................................2-13
2.6.1.2 390R-19 Universal Mount .................................. 2-5
2.9 INSTALLATION TROUBLESHOOTING ........2-13
2.6.2 ANT-462( ) ADF Antenna Installation ................. 2-5
2.6.2.1 General................................................................ 2-5
Page No Issue
* Title ...........................................11 Apr 97

* 2-1 thru 2-25 .............................11 Apr 97
* 2-26 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-27 thru 2-39 ...........................11 Apr 97
* 2-40 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-41 thru 2-48 ...........................11 Apr 97


1st Ed 1 Oct 85 None
2nd Ed 5 Mar 86 None
3rd Ed 2 Feb 87 None
1 29 Sep 92 None
1 15 Sep 95 None

section II
installation
2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING b. Read all notes on drawings and interconnects
EQUIPMENT and the planning paragraph before installing
any units or cabling.
Unpack equipment carefully and make a careful vis-
ual inspection of the unit for possible shipping dam- 2.4 PLANNING
age. All claims for damage should be filed with the
transportation company involved. If claims for dam- Proper and careful planning of any installation is es-
age are to be filed, save the original shipping con- sential for reliable performance and easy mainte-
tainer and materials. If no damage can be detected, nance. Refer to the general system and mount in-
replace packing materials in the shipping container formation section for an overview of a typical system.
and save for future storage or reshipment.
The ADF-462 performs properly with convection
2.2 PREINSTALLATION CHECK cooling at ambient air temperatures up to +70 °C
(+158 °F). However, as with all electronic equip-
Check the ADF-462 ADF Receiver for physical ment, lower operating temperatures extend equip-
damage such as scratched or dented dust cover or ment life. On the average, reducing the operating
bent pins on the connector. temperature by 15 to 20 °C (25 to 35 °F) doubles the
mean time between failure.
Check the ANT-462( ) ADF Antenna for physical
damage to the cover, aluminum baseplate, and unit 2.4.1 ADF-462 ADF Receiver
connector.
2.4.1.1 ADF-462 ADF Receiver Location
Perform the final performance test (customer ac-
ceptance test) in the maintenance section of the The ADF-462 ADF Receiver is a totally self-
ADF-462 instruction book (repair manual) if verifi- contained unit that does not require accessibility or
cation of unit to equipment specifications is re- adjustment during its operation. It may be located
quired or connect unit in a system mockup to verify in any convenient location. However, due to the
proper operation. sensitivity of ADF circuits to electrical interference
from other airborne equipment and systems, it is
2.3 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS wise to avoid locating the receiver or antenna adja-
cent to equipment that generates large interfering
The following special instructions must be followed fields or adjacent to the input/output cabling of
to ensure proper installation of the ADF-462. Dam- such equipment.
age to the equipment can occur if these instructions
are not followed. 2.4.1.2 ADF-462 ADF Receiver Mounting
a. #24 AWG wire can be used for all signal and It is recommended that the ADF-462 be mounted in
control wires except receiver power. The mini- a UMT-12 mount. A 390R-19 mount may be used if
mum wire size for the receiver power lines is a UMT-12 mount cannot be used. If the ADF-462 is
#22 AWG for runs up to 8 m (25 ft). Receiver to be mounted in an aircraft with unusually high
power-line runs between 8 and 16 m (25 to 50 levels of vibration, shock isolators (CPN 200-0754-
ft) should use #20 AWG wire minimum. Power- 030) may also be required with the 390R-19. Vibra-
line runs over 16 m to 32 m (50 to 100 ft) should tion specifications are given in the general informa-
use #18 AWG wire minimum. tion section of this book. UMT-12 description, as-

installation ADF-462/ANT-462
sembly, and installation information is located in 2.4.3 Cabling and Bonding

the Collins UMT-( ) Mount and Thinline II Connec-
tors Instruction Book, CPN 523-0772277. 390R-19 The full performance potential of the ADF-462 sys-
description, assembly, and installation information tem may be obtained only if the installation is free
is located in the Collins Universal Mounts Assem- from interference generated by other electrical sys-
bly Instructions, CPN 523-0766506. Refer to the tems installed in the airframe. Known sources of
general system and mount information section for interference are the engine ignition and magneto
mount outline information. systems, inverters, some dimming control and fuel
flow indicator systems that employ variable duty
2.4.2 ANT-462( ) ADF Antenna Location cycle controls, strobe lights, fluorescent cabin
lights, windshield heaters, serial control systems,
The ANT-462( ) ADF Antenna is a totally self- and systems that generate high-energy pulses. The
contained unit that does not require accessibility or ADF system is more susceptible to these interfer-
adjustment during its operation. It may be located ence sources than other avionics systems and re-
on either the top or bottom of the aircraft. It should quires that adequate bonding and cabling precau-
be located as near the center line of the aircraft as tions be taken during installation. The ANT-462( )
possible to reduce unsymmetrical quadrantal error, must be adequately bonded to the airframe as pre-
and near the wing root to obtain the best station viously described. The ADF-462 ADF Receiver must
crossing indication. Consideration should be given also be adequately bonded to the airframe through
to keeping the antenna away from other antennas the mount. Potential interference sources must be
and structural members that may cause distortion bonded to the airframe to prevent them from be-
of the radio field pattern. Minimum perimeter coming actual interference sources. For information
spacing of 60 cm (2 ft) from transponder and DME on bonding, refer to the Installation Practices Man-
antennas and 13 cm (5 in) from another ANT-462( ) ual (CPN 523-0775254).
ADF Antenna is recommended.
The triaxial cables that interconnect the ANT-462( )
and ADF-462( ) carry extremely low amplitude sig-
If the ANT-462( ) ADF Antenna is located on the
nals and therefore may pick up interference if they
bottom of the aircraft, the possible exposure to
are routed through high-level electrical or magnetic
highly corrosive hydraulic fluid must be considered.
fields. These interconnecting cables should never be
The hydraulic fluid may attack the antenna
tied into cable runs which contain high-current or
mounting seals or gaskets, as well as the connector
pulse-carrying cables.
and cable seals. If possible, a location where hy-
draulic fluid collection or buildup will not occur is
2.4.4 Quadrantal Error Correction
preferred.
The radio-frequency field pattern in the vicinity of
Unlike some other ADF systems, the length of the the aircraft is distorted by the outline of the air-
interconnecting cables between the ANT-462( ) and craft. This distortion varies with the different type
the ADF-462 ADF Receiver is neither limited nor of aircraft and location of the antenna on the air-
critical. However, short cable runs are preferred to craft and results in radio bearing errors if it is not
reduce the exposure to ground currents and inter- corrected.
fering fields within the airframe.
The method of providing quadrantal error correc-
The metal base of the ANT-462( ) forms a small tion (QEC) chosen for use in the ADF-462 system is
ground plane for the receiving antenna elements. It to digitally add in a correction value. This value is
must be in electrical contact with the metal skin of set between –4° and +27° in 1° increments by
the airframe. If a gasket is installed, the ANT- grounding various combinations of five contacts
462( ) mounting bolts must provide electrical con- (J1-4, 8, 12, 16, and 20) on the ADF-462 receiver.
tact with the metal spacers that form the mounting These contacts are grounded by wiring in the re-
holes in the antenna through the mounting nuts to ceiver mating connector at the time the aircraft
the airframe. wiring is installed.

When the quadrantal error characteristic of the air- right wingtip when the station is in the right-
craft type is known prior to installation, the correct rear quadrant and will move it toward the left
pins can be grounded in the original wiring instal- wingtip when the station is in the left-rear or
lation and the correction checked during postin- left-front quadrant.
stallation tests. If the quadrantal error characteris- d. The magnitude of the quadrantal error correc-
tic is not known in advance, it will be necessary to tion shown in Figure 2-20 refers to the magni-
determine the proper correction by using the proce- tude of the correction achieved by the corre-
dures in paragraph 2.7.4. In that case, the amount sponding straps.
of effort required to determine the amount of cor-
rection can be reduced if the required correction is In summary, confusion regarding quadrantal error
estimated and the straps are installed prior to the correction can be reduced by remembering the fol-
initial calibration test. lowing:
The initial estimate of required correction may be a. Quadrantal error distortion shifts the indicated
made in either of two ways. When the quadrantal bearing toward the nose or the tail, whichever
error correction is known for an aircraft of similar is nearer.
size and configuration, that initial correction may b. Quadrantal error correction shifts the indicated
be used. If that information is not available, an ini- bearing toward the nearest wingtip.
tial correction of 5° for single engine and small c. The magnitude of the correction varies as the
twin-engine aircraft, 12° for medium twin-engine relative bearing changes, reaching a peak in the
aircraft, and 17° for large twin-engine aircraft is vicinity of 45°, 135°, 225°, and 315° relative
recommended. bearing.
The first calibration test, with an initial estimated 2.5 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS
correction installed, often results in the require-
ment to change or adjust the amount of correction. 2.5.1 General
The adjustment is made by changing the straps in The receiver interconnect cables should be prepared
the ADF-462 ADF Receiver mount. Confusion as to in accordance with the interconnect diagrams,
whether to increase or decrease the amount of cor- Figure 2-2 through Figure 2-10. These interconnects
rection may occur at this time. Confusion can be are typical; variations or modifications to meet cus-
eliminated if the following facts are kept in mind: tomer requirements are unavoidable. Refer to para-
a. Quadrantal error correction is of the opposite graph 2.6.5 for information on some of the options
sign from quadrantal error. Positive correction that can affect the interconnect cabling. Figure 2-8
is required to compensate for negative error. and Figure 2-9 provide interconnect information to a
b. The quadrantal error is normally zero at the tie point number. The tie point number can be used
cardinal points. Indicated radio bearing is nor- to tie together one interconnect to another intercon-
mally shifted toward the nose of the aircraft nect diagram with the same tie point number. Ex-
when the relative bearing to the station is in ample: the tie number 801 is dedicated to ADF
the right-front quadrant (0° to 90°) or the left- Number 1 dc sin information. The reference on the
front quadrant (270° to 360°). It is normally ADF diagram is to an RMI system such as the RMI-
shifted toward the tail when the relative bear- 36. On the appropriate RMI-36 installation diagram,
ing to the station is in the right-rear quadrant there is a tie point at 801 which is the ADF 1 sin in-
(90° to 180°) or the left-rear quadrant (180° to put. Figure 2-8 and Figure 2-9 are designed to mini-
270°). mize HIRF and lightning hazards.
c. The mathematical sign of the quadrantal error The mating connectors, contacts, and special con-
correction shown in Figure 2-20 refers to the di- nector tools for the ADF-462 are listed in Table 2-1
rection of the correction that is achieved by the through Table 2-3. Figure 2-11 shows the ADF-462
corresponding strap in the right-hand quad- mating connector pin assignments. Table 2-4 lists
rant. That is, a correction of 7° will move the complete function/titles or descriptions of each pin
indicated bearing toward the right wingtip on the ADF-462 ADF Receiver. shows ANT-462A
when the relative bearing to the station is from mating connector pin assignments. Figure 2-13
0° to 90°. Coincidentally, the same correction shows ANT-462B mating connector pin assign-
will also move the indicated bearing toward the ments.

Refer to the General System and Mount Informa- Note

tion section for general interconnect guidelines to
be followed. Make certain that the cable to the On new aircraft installations, it is recom-
ANT-462( ) is long enough to allow removal of the mended that L2201TX triax cable be used
ANT-462( ). instead of TRF-58. TRF-58 is not recom-
mended because its jacket is made of PVC
2.5.2 Connector Contact Assembly and
and does not meet FAR 23.1365 and FAR
Installation
25.831. Refer to Collins ALL AVIONICS
2.5.2.1 Thinline II Mating Connector Contacts SIL 2-92 for additional information.
If required, triaxial bulkhead adapters such as Am-

Note phenol type 53225 (CPN 357-7562-010) and triaxial
straight plugs such as Amphenol type 53150 (CPN
The connecting wire must be crimped in the 357-7285-010) are available. Triaxial cable for the
contact so the crimped portion of the contact ADF system may be purchased from:
can enter the connector shell. The crimped
portion must enter the shell to provide posi- PIC Wire & Cable Supply
tive locking of contact in the shell. N63 W22619 Main St.
Sussex, WI 53089-0330
The complete procedures for crimping and install-
Phone: (800) 742-3191
ing contacts are contained in the installation sec-
Fax: (414) 246-0450
tion of the UMT-10/11/12/13 Mounts and Thinline
II Connectors Instruction Book. Also refer to Col-
2.5.3 Connector Contact Removal
lins Pro Line Equipment Service Information Letter
(SIL) 1-82 for detailed information on the Collins
a. To remove a contact, use the extraction tool
Thinline II connectors.
(CPN 359-0697-020) to unlock the contact and
pull it out of the connector from the rear.
b. To remove the coaxial contact, use extraction
conductor can be inserted into contact with no
tool (CPN 370-8040-030). Insert extraction tool
more than 0.8 mm (1/32 in) of wire extending
into mating side of connector housing. Push
beyond the front of the wire barrel. Insulation
plunger into connector and pull coaxial contact
must be captured by contact insulation barrel
out opposite side.
but must not extend into wire barrel.
b. Crimp each interconnect wire in a contact with
2.6 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
0697-010 or 623-8579-001 or equivalent) to
The following paragraphs provide instructions for
crimp pins (CPN 372-2514-110).
installing the ADF-462. Refer to applicable equip-
c. Use insertion tool (CPN 359-0697-050) to insert
ment installation manual for installation proce-
each wired contact into the proper connector hole
dures on other units.
from the rear and press until locked. Pull gently
on each wire to make certain that the pin is
properly locked into the connector. Refer to Warning
Figure 2-11 for ADF-462 pin locations and func-
tions. Make certain that the aircraft battery mas-
ter switch is turned off before installing any
2.5.2.2 Thinline II Coaxial Contact equipment, mounts, or interconnect cables.
A 50-ohm triaxial cable such as PIC Wire and Cable
2.6.1 Universal Mounts
Supply L2201TX is recommended for new aircraft
installations. (This is triaxial equivalent of TRF-58
2.6.1.1 UMT-12 Universal Mount
cable.)
Use the UMT-12 as instructed in the UMT-
10/11/12/13 Mounts and Thinline II Connectors In-
struction Book (CPN 523-0772277).

Note Note
Refer to paragraph 2.4.1 for recommended Refer to paragraph 2.4.1 for recommended
mount/receiver location. mount/receiver location.
2.6.1.1.1 Installation (Refer to general system 2.6.1.2.1 Installation (Refer to general system
and mounting installation section) and mounting installation section)
a. Position assembled receiver mating connector

Note (on aircraft wiring harness) in correct location
at rear of mount. Insert the cable with grommet
If installing installation kit 634-4192-009, into the slotted access hole in the rear of mount.
attach connector plate (with MOV) to b. Secure mating connector to mount with four 4-
mount with four screws supplied with the 40 x 1/4 panhead screws (CPN 343-0133-000)
mount. Connect +28-V dc input power to in- and four #4 lockwashers (CPN 310-0279-00).
sulated MOV power terminal and to J1-48. c. Ground outer shell triaxial lead under one of
the #6 screws on the rear of the 390R-19 mount.
a. Position assembled receiver mating connector d. Mark, punch, and drill the required mounting
(on aircraft wiring harness) in correct location holes.
at rear of mount. Insert the cable with grommet
into the slotted access hole in the rear of the Caution
mount.
b. Secure mating connector to mount as instructed Ensure that adjacent equipment and cables
in the UMT-10/11/12/13 Mounts and Thinline II will not be damaged when located mounting
Connectors Instruction Book. holes.
c. Ground outer shell triaxial lead under one of
e. Install mount in aircraft and secure with re-
the #6 screws on the rear of the UMT-12 mount.
quired hardware.
d. Mark, punch, and drill the required mounting
holes. 2.6.1.2.2 Removal
Caution a. Remove hardware securing mount to aircraft.
b. Remove ground lug connected to triaxial out
Ensure that adjacent equipment and cables shield.
will not be damaged when locating mount- c. Remove four 4-40 x 1/4 panhead screws and
ing holes. four #4 lockwashers securing Thinline connec-
tor to mount. Remove wiring harness and con-
e. Install mount in aircraft and secure with re-
nector from mount.
quired hardware.
d. Remove mount.
2.6.1.1.2 Removal
2.6.2 ANT-462( ) ADF Antenna Installation
a. Remove hardware securing mount to aircraft.
b. Remove ground lug connected to triaxial outer
shield. Note
c. Remove mating connector from mount as in-
Refer to paragraph 2.4.1 for recommended
structed in the UMT-10/11/12/13 Mounts and
mounting location.
Thinline II Connectors Instruction Book.
d. Remove mount.
2.6.2.1 General
2.6.1.2 390R-19 Universal Mount
Refer to Figure 2-16 and Figure 2-17 for outline and
Use the 390R-19 as instructed in the 390R-18/19/20 mounting dimensions. When installing the ANT-
Universal Mount Kits section of the Collins Univer- 462( ), give careful consideration to location, keep-
sal Mounts Assembly Instructions (CPN 523- ing antenna cable away from sources of interfer-
0766506). ence. Power cables, etc, can cause the antenna cable

to pick up electrical or magnetic noise and transfer 3. Press plastic boot to mating connector until
this interference to the receiver. Avoid installation boot locks.
around large openings in the fuselage, such as en- 4. Pot inside of plastic boot with Thiokol type
trance doors or baggage doors, as they will also in- MIL-S-8516B potting compound.
terfere with the rf field around the antenna. It is c. Engage mating connector. ANT-462( ) does not
also recommended that the ANT-462( ) be installed require a gasket, but must be sealed to aircraft
at least 60 cm (2 ft) from any transmitter (DME, with Coast Pro-Seal #890 or equivalent.
transponders, etc) antenna. d. Position ANT-462( ) over mounting holes. Se-
cure ANT-462A to aircraft using #10 caphead or
2.6.2.2 Installation panhead aircraft screws. Secure ANT-462B to
aircraft using #10 flathead aircraft screws.
The ANT-462( ) may be installed on the top or bot-
tom of the fuselage. Bottom mounting is preferred. Note
The ANT-462( ) should be mounted on the fore-to-
aft axis of the aircraft. However, if installation on After installation of a top-mounted an-
the axis interferes with airframe members, the tenna, it may be necessary to apply Silastic
ANT-462( ) may be offset to the left or right by a sealant (RTV-140 or equivalent) around the
small amount. This will induce a small, uncorrect- mounting screwheads to prevent water
able error in bearing indications. The size of the er- seepage.
ror will remain negligible as long as the displace-
ment from the fore-to-aft axis is very small 2.6.2.2.2 Installation on Curved Surface
compared to the width of the fuselage.
Refer to installation procedures given in paragraph
2.6.2.2.1 Installation on Flat Surface 2.6.2.2.1. If the antenna is to be mounted on a sur-
face, the curvature of which does not match the
a. Refer to Figure 2-16 or Figure 2-17 and mark, mounting surface of the antenna, large area shims
punch, and drill the holes to accommodate #10 should be used around the mounting holes. To pre-
aircraft screws and the hole for the ANT-462( ) vent the entrance and subsequent freezing of water
connector (if necessary), ensuring that inpene- between the antenna and the aircraft, a sealant
trable components of the aircraft structure do must be used. The sealant should be nonadhering
not interfere with the locations of holes or so that the ANT-462( ) may be removed at a later
mounting screws. Approximately 50 mm (2 in) date if necessary. Chromatic tape is recommended.
of clearance between the bulkhead and aircraft
skin is required for mating connector boot. The 2.6.2.2.3 Installation on Pressurized Fuselage
antenna mounting screws should make good
electrical connection to both the aircraft and Refer to installation procedures given in paragraph
the ANT-462( ). 2.6.2.2.1. If the antenna is to be mounted on a pres-
surized fuselage, a leveling and sealing compound
Note such as Coast Pro-Seal #890 Aerodynamic
Smoother should be used between the entire
A doubler plate is required for holes that mounting surface of the antenna and the fuselage.
pass through the aircraft skin only. This Use of this compound will compensate for interface
plate should be riveted to the aircraft skin irregularities and eliminate all voids between the
at its edges. Braces or doubler plates should ANT-462( ) and the fuselage. The fuselage should
be used where installation would otherwise be coated with a mold-releasing material such as
weaken the aircraft structure. RAM chemicals RAM 225 CPN 005-2191-010 before
installation. The mold-releasing will prevent the
b. Assemble the ANT-462( ) mating connector. leveling compound from adhering to the fuselage.
1. Thread antenna wiring through plastic This will also help if removal of the antenna be-
boot. comes necessary.
2. Refer to and Figure 2-13. Solder antenna
wiring to proper mating connector contacts.

2.6.2.3 Removal Note
a. Loosen chromatic tape, if applicable. Proseal #890 (gray color) or #895 (aluminum
b. Loosen and remove #10 aircraft screws securing color) may be purchased from:
ANT-462( ) to fuselage.
c. It may be necessary to cut away some of the Aero Hardware
sealant around the base of the antenna in order 1037 Boston Post Road
to make it easier to remove. Use caution not to Rye, New York 10580
cut away any of the white plastic outer shell of Phone: (914) 967-8550
the antenna. FAX: (914) 967-8553
d. Carefully remove the ANT-462( ) from the air-
craft fuselage. Removing the antenna may re- Coast Sealant Distributors
quire force applied to the bottom of the an- 3795 Northwest 38th St.
tenna, reference Figure 2-1. Make sure the Miami, Florida 33142
force is applied to the metal plate of the an- Phone: (305) 634-6000
tenna instead of the white plastic outer shell.
Excessive force to the outer shell will break the Wilco and Associates
seal between the outer shell and the antenna. 1442 South Main St.
Work on applying force to the bottom of the Gardena, California
sides of the antenna because that is the least Phone: (213) 538-4510
likely area to cause any damage to the antenna.
e. Remove sealant from ANT-462( ) and aircraft, if
applicable.
Figure 2-1. ANT-462( ) Removal Diagram

2.6.3 ADF-462 ADF Receiver Installation The unit is identified as ADF 1 (left side) if the
strap is not installed.
a. The UMT-12 mount is recommended for this in-
stallation. Refer to the general system and b. Extended Frequency Range
mounting installation section for outline and The CTL-62/ADF-462/ANT-462( ) combination
mounting dimensions for the UMT-12 and can tune the standard ADF frequency range
Figure 2-14 and Figure 2-15 for outline and (190 to 1799.5 kHz) and also tune 2179 to 2185
mounting dimensions for the ADF-462. kHz if CTL-62 P1-m is grounded. The CTL-
b. Refer to Table 2-1 through Table 2-3. One 62/ADF-462/ANT-60( ) combination cannot tune
mating connector kit is required for this instal- this additional range. CTL-62 pin P1-m should
lation. The snap-in contacts and triaxial inserts be left unconnected in these systems.
are not included in mating connector kits CPN
634-1022-001, 634-1899-001, and 634-1899-003. c. Top/Bottom Strap
The contacts and triaxial inserts must be or- For installations where the antenna is mounted
dered separately. on the top of the aircraft, connect ADF-462 P1-
c. Position ADF-462 interconnecting cable with 19 to ground. For bottom mounted installations
mating connector installed into rear of mount. ADF-462 P1-19 is open.
d. Insert cable with grommet into slotted access
hole in rear of mount. Install mating connectors 2.6.5.2 CSDB Tuning
in locations provided at rear of mount. Refer to
Figure 2-11 and Table 2-4 for mating connector A ground on ADF-462 J1-50 enables the ADF-462
pin assignment. to be CSDB tuned. Also a ground on J1-50 disables
e. Slide ADF-462 ADF Receiver into mount until the ARINC 429 tuning input port. Open on J1-50
mating connectors are fully engaged. enables the ARINC 429 input ports and disables
f. Position knurled knobs on front of mount to en- the CSDB input port. The ARINC output ports and
gage ADF-462 mounting projections and the CSDB output ports remain active.
tighten knurled knobs.
g. Press on front panel to ensure that the ADF-
2.6.5.3 ARINC 429 Tuning
462 is fully seated in the mount. Retighten
knurled knobs until ADF-462 is secured in
If the ADF-462 is to be tuned by a low-speed
mount.
ARINC 429 ADF control, leave J1-50 open (no ex-
h. Ensure that a good electrical bond exists be-
ternal connection). When J1-50 is open, the CSDB
tween the ADF-462 and its mount.
tune input port is disabled, but the CSDB output
2.6.4 ADF Control ports as well as the ARINC output ports remain ac-
tive. The first two ARINC input ports (port A and
Refer to the CTL-X2/X2A installation section (CPN port B) can accept continuous tune information. All
523-0772496) for ADF control installation informa- three ARINC input ports can accept burst tune in-
tion. The CTL-X2/X2A installation section is located formation. Pins J1-11 and J1-5 control which input
in this manual. ports are active and what type of tune information
can be received.
2.6.5 Supplementary Interconnect
Information
a. Burst Tune Enable (J1-11) — ARINC Control
2.6.5.1 Strapping Options Logic Strap
Ground: Enables all three ARINC input ports
Note
to accept burst tune data; ignores the
bus A/B select input.
All rear connector straps should be kept as
short as possible, preferably under 75 mm
Open: Tune port determined by the bus A/B
(3 in).
select input; ARINC port C is not en-
a. Source Ident abled.
This strap must be installed on the right side b. Bus A/B Select (J1-5) — ARINC Control Logic
unit. This strap identifies the unit as ADF 2. Strap/Switch Input

Ground: Enables only ARINC input port A to 2.6.5.6 ADF-462 Fault Monitor
receive continuous tune data. Burst
tune enable strap must be open. ADF-462 pin J1-44 provides 28 V dc at 200 mil-
liamperes when continuous internal diagnostics are
Open: Enables only ARINC input port B to satisfied that ADF operation is correct. This output
receive continuous tune data. Burst is open circuit if an error is detected. The monitor
tune enable strap must be open. output opens when diagnostic codes 11 through 20
or 22 through 29 occur.
2.6.5.4 Keep-Alive Input
2.6.6 RMI-36 Radio Magnetic Indicator/
BDI-36 Bearing Distance Indicator
Note
Refer to the RMI-36 Radio Magnetic Indicator/BDI-
This connection must be used in a burst- 36 Bearing Distance Indicator Repair Manual (CPN
tuned system to ensure the ADF-462 main- 523-0766802) for RMI-36/BDI-36 repair informa-
tains frequency information during a pri- tion. Outline and mounting dimensions are given in
mary power interruption. (Only on units the RMI-36/BDI-36 installation section in this
without SB 4.) manual. Refer to this section for installation and
removal information.
On ADF-462 Receivers with SB 4, J1-3 is reserved.
On ADF-462 Receivers without SB 4 a frequency 2.7 POSTINSTALLATION TEST
keep-alive input (J1-3) may be connected to a 16- to PROCEDURES
32-V aircraft battery. Burst tune controls only send
information if a change is made. If a power inter- These tests are to be performed with the ADF-462
ruption occurred to the ADF receiver, it would not system and associated equipment installed in the
receive tuning information until one of the controls aircraft.
was changed. In continuous tuning systems, the
control is constantly sending information to the re-
ceiver. These systems usually have nonvolatile Note
memory in the control and will not need the ADF
keep-alive battery installed. Avoid testing the ADF-462 system in the
hangar or close to any large metal objects
2.6.5.5 Discretes that could induce magnetic interference.
2.6.5.5.1 Self-Test 2.7.1 Self-Test
ADF-462 pin J1-6 will initiate a self-test when With the ADF control unit in ADF function and
grounded. This input is provided so that an ARINC tuned to an active frequency, activate the self-test
429 ADF control can toggle a discrete to put the switch. The RMI pointer will rotate 90° clockwise
ADF-462 into self-test mode. Normally, self-test is (top-mounted antenna) or 90° counterclockwise
selected using the digital CSDB or ARINC bus. (bottom-mounted antenna) from previous valid in-
dication and return to that indication when self-test
2.6.5.5.2 HF Comm Disable switch is released.
ADF-462 pin J1-1 is connected to the hf comm Note

push-to-talk (ptt) line and disables the ADF opera-
tion while the hf comm is keyed. Bearing displays If the signal received is weak or of poor
are frozen while the hf comm is keyed. After 22 sec- quality, the bearing pointer rotation will be
onds, the ADF parks the ADF pointer and outputs slow.
diagnostic code 33.
The CTL-62 will display four dashes (- - - -) in the
upper display and 00 in the lower display if the
ADF-462 system passes its internal diagnostics. If

the ADF-462 system finds a parameter falling out- noise overriding signals. If operation of the
side of its preestablished limits during self-test, the ADF-462 system is impaired by other aircraft
upper display will display “dIAG” and a diagnostic equipment, the spurious signals must be elimi-
code will be displayed in the lower window. If a pa- nated at the source.
rameter external to the ADF-462 is found falling
outside of its preestablished limits during self-test, 2.7.3 HF Disable Check (Customer Option)
the upper window will display “FLAG” and a diag-
nostic code will be displayed in the lower window
(an example of this indication is low signal level). Note
The CTL-62 will also alternate the display between
bright and dim while the self-test switch is pressed. This check is applicable only to ADF-462
A listing of diagnostic codes generated by the ADF- systems with the hf disable option incorpo-
462 is in the maintenance section of this manual. rated into the interconnecting wiring.
2.7.2 Functional Test a. Start the aircraft engines if not already run-
ning.
a. Apply primary power to ADF-462 system. b. Position the ADF system mode select switch to
b. Position mode select switch to ANT. Observe ADF and tune the receiver to a nearby station
that panel and dial lamps are lit or displays are that provides a good indication on the bearing
on and correct. indicator.
c. With aircraft audio system being driven by the c. Select the HF COMM system on the audio con-
ADF-462 ADF Receiver, check that signals can trol panel and select a clear frequency on the
be received on the following bands: HF COMM system.
d. Start turning the aircraft and note that the
190-279.5 kHz bearing indicator continues to point to the
280-399.5 kHz tuned station.
400-599.5 kHz e. Continue turning the aircraft and key the HF
600-899.5 kHz COMM system. Note that the bearing indicator
900-1399.5 kHz “freezes” as the compass card continues to ro-
1400-1799.0 kHz tate.
d. Position mode select switch to ADF. Observe f. Unkey the HF COMM and note that the bear-
that panel and dial lamps are lit or displays are ing indicator slews and again points to the
on and correct. tuned station.
e. Tune the receiver to several stations, observing g. This completes the hf disable check.
that the bearing indicator indicates a bearing
suitable for the station received. 2.7.4 Quadrantal Error Calibration
f. With the receiver tuned to a station frequency,
note the bearing indication as reference. Acti-
Note
vate the self-test circuit. Pointer should rotate
90° from reference and return to reference Tables included on the interconnect dia-
when self-test is released. grams and Figure 2-18 show total QEC vs
Note the ADF-462 pins to be grounded in an in-
stallation.
When the ADF-462 system receives an un-
usable signal, the RMI-36/BDI-36 indicator Two methods of quadrantal error calibration are
will “park” horizontally. described in the following paragraphs. One method
is performed with the ADF-462 system installed
g. Start the aircraft engines, if not already run- and the airplane on ground. This method turns the
ning, and other equipment likely to cause elec- airplane to a series of predetermined headings rela-
trical interference (rotating beacons, flashing tive to a suitable ground station and the indicated
wingtip lights, deicing pumps, etc). Repeat bearings to the station are recorded. The quadran-
steps a through f, checking that ADF-462 sys- tal error correction is computed from this informa-
tem operation is not impaired by static and tion. The location chosen for this method should be

clear of buildings, overhead or underground con- Note

ductors, and other possible reflecting objects. Cali-
bration should be done using a frequency between ADF measurements can be no more accu-
200 and 400 kHz for maximum accuracy. rate than the magnetic portion of the radio
magnetic indicator. A magnetic accuracy of
1° is required for high-quality measure-
Note ments.
Ground calibration should always be con- The relative bearings to the station for which
firmed by a flight check. measurements should be made are given in
Table 2-5, column 1. Construct a table as shown in
The other method consists of collecting the calibra- Table 2-5 using the bearings in column 1 but leav-
tion data during flight and then computing the ad- ing the other columns blank. The figures of column
justment that is needed. The following precautions 1 are relative bearings that are applicable to all
should be taken when performing the calibration cases. Use of these bearings is recommended since
procedures: they are convenient and adequate, but others may
be selected if desired.
a. Do not attempt calibration during the period
The other columns represent typical sample values
from 2 hours before sunset to 2 hours after sun-
for a particular situation and will be different in
rise. At this time skywaves from distant sta-
each aircraft. Column 2, AIRCRAFT MAGNETIC
tions may induce errors.
HEADING, should be calculated prior to the flight
b. During flight, take the readings only when the
and list magnetic heading that should be flown over
aircraft is in level flight. Make all turns as
the calibration point. The bearings in column 2 are
smoothly as possible to avoid disturbing the di-
obtained by subtracting RELATIVE BEARING TO
rectional gyro.
THE STATION (column 1) from the calibration
c. Perform the flight check on a calm day to
point to station bearing, which should be obtained
minimize drift and heading errors.
from a map. When RELATIVE BEARING TO THE
STATION is larger than AIRCRAFT MAGNETIC
2.7.4.1 Airborne Calibration HEADING, add 360° to AIRCRAFT MAGNETIC
HEADING before subtracting. Column 3, Table 2-4,
Airborne measurement of quadrantal error requires data is taken during the flight. Column 4 is calcu-
that the aircraft fly over a fixed point at least 16 lated after the flight.
km (10 miles) from a low-frequency radio station
while holding a fixed heading. The most convenient a. Estimate amount of quadrantal error correction
fixed point is a VOR station. This is because VOR (QEC) required for the installation under test.
stations are easily located from the air and their If previous QEC information is unknown, as-
angular position with respect to a low-frequency sume a required QEC (refer to paragraph
radio station is available from the radio navigation 2.4.4). Refer to Figure 2-18 and ground proper
charts. The selected radio station should be trans- mating connector contacts to obtain estimated
mitting on a frequency of 200 to 400 kHz, and the QEC.
surrounding terrain should be flat. Choose a com- b. Fly to the vicinity of the VOR station or fixed
bination of a VOR and radio station already known point selected. Position control mode select
to give accurate ADF measurements, if such are switch to ADF, and tune the ADF-462 to the
available. selected radio station.
c. Fly over VOR station (or fixed point) with first
aircraft magnetic heading listed in Table 2-5. At
Accurate measurements cannot be made unless the the moment aircraft is directly over VOR sta-
aircraft is in level flight attitude. If possible, the tion (or fixed point), record indicated magnetic
calibration should be performed on a calm day to bearing to the station (the bearing on the com-
minimize drift and crab-angle problems. pass card indicated by the ADF pointer).
d. Continue to fly straight for a short time; then
make a wide turn and fly over VOR station (or

fixed point) with another aircraft magnetic ring to Figure 2-20, note that the peak value of
heading. Again, record indicated magnetic QEC is 7°. This is the required NET QEC of the
bearing to station when directly over the refer- ADF-462 system as installed in the aircraft.
ence point.
e. Repeat step d for each remaining aircraft mag- Note
netic heading. The test pattern should be flown
with alternate left and right turns to prevent A positive QEC will move the indicated
excessive precession of the gyros. The flight bearing toward the wings. A negative cor-
pattern of an aircraft performing this is shown rection moves the indicated bearing to-
in Error! Reference source not found.. wards the fore-to-aft axis of the aircraft.
f. Subtract each INDICATED RADIO MAG-
NETIC BEARING from AIRCRAFT MAG- j. If the result of the test (from preceding step i) is
NETIC HEADING (from the VOR). Enter re- within 3° of the estimated QEC (from step a),
sults in NET QUADRANTAL ERROR COR- then the system is correctly adjusted. If the re-
RECTION column. Table 2-5 shows positive sults differ by more than 3°, remove the QEC
NET QEC needed in the first quadrant, but the grounds on the rear connector. Refer to Figure
correction may be negative. 2-18 and reconnect the grounds on the mating
g. Plot a graph of NET QEC against relative connector contacts to either increase or de-
bearing to station. Figure 2-20 shows a sample crease the original estimate by the amount of
graph using the data from Table 2-5. QEC indicated on the flight test. (Total QEC
h. Critically examine QEC curve to see if it is rea- equals initial QEC settings plus derived QEC.)
sonably regular and symmetrical. If it is not,
check antenna location for aerials, projections For sample error correction curve, Figure 2-20,
near the antenna, and large openings in the fu- an additional 7° of QEC are required. For an
selage (doors) which could cause irregularities initial setting of 10°, the total required is 17°.
in the rf field. If irregularities cannot be ac- Grounds should be connected to pins 4, 12, and
counted for, repeat calibration using a different 20 on the rear connector. (Pin 4 indicates 1° of
station and frequency. If second calibration QEC required; pin 12 indicates 4° of QEC re-
produces a differently shaped curve, the in- quired; pin 20 indicates 16° of QEC required.
stallation is questionable and the cause must be Grounding all three selects 1° + 16° +4° –4°
sought and eliminated. (built-in QEC offset) or 17°, from Error! Ref-
erence source not found..)
Note
If the curve begins to the left or right of the Note

vertical NET QEC axis, the ANT-462( )
ADF Antenna is not aligned with the air- Remember to remove ground connections
craft fore-to-aft axis. If the curve is centered from previously connected receiver mating
above or below the horizontal relative connector contacts prior to setting the total
bearing axis, the ANT-462( ) ADF Antenna required QEC. (Preset QEC plus measured
is not aligned with respect to the aircraft QEC.)
fuselage. Refer to Figure 2-21.
2.7.4.2 Ground Calibration
Any misalignment should be corrected or a
noncorrectable residual error will remain Calibration may be performed on the ground using
after calibration. a radio signal transmitted from a known geographic
location and turning the aircraft to different rela-
i. Examine the peak values of the QEC curve to tive bearings. The bearing to the selected radio sta-
determine the amount of quadrantal error cor- tion relative to the heading of the aircraft must be
rection needed. If the quadrantal error correc- accurately established. That angle may be deter-
tion curve is positive at relative bearing of 0° to mined using the aircraft compass system (if accu-
90°, a greater amount of correction is needed. If rately calibrated) or by using a transit or pelorus
the curve is negative at relative bearing of 0° to sited on a fixed object. The station selected should
90°, the system has too much correction. Refer- provide a strong, clear-channel signal and provide

ADDENDUM 4
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

ADF-462/ANT-462 installation section (523-0773908-007118) in Part A of this manual.
This addendum corrects invalid figure references in paragraphs 2.7.4.1.e. and 2.7.4.1.j. on page 2-12. Replace
with text below.
2.7.4.1.e. Repeat step d for each remaining aircraft magnetic heading. The test pattern should be flown with
alternate left and right turns to prevent excessive precession of the gyros. The flight pattern of an
aircraft performing this is shown in Figure 2-19.
2.7.4.1.j. If the result of the test (from preceding step i) is within 3° of the estimated QEC (from step a), then the
system is correctly adjusted. If the results differ by more than 3°, remove the QEC grounds on the rear
connector. Refer to Figure 2-18 and reconnect the grounds on the mating connector contacts to either
increase or decrease the original estimate by the amount of QEC indicated on the flight test. (Total
QEC equals initial QEC settings plus derived QEC.)
For sample error correction curve, Figure 2-20, an additional 7° of QEC are required. For an initial
setting of 10°, the total required is 17°. Grounds should be connected to pins 4, 12, and 20 on the rear
connector. (Pin 4 indicates 1° of QEC required; pin 12 indicates 4° of QEC required; pin 20 indicates
16° of QEC required. Grounding all three selects 1° + 16° +4° –4° (built-in QEC offset) or 17°, from
Figure 2-19.)
Note
Remember to remove ground connections from previously connected receiver mating connector
contacts prior to setting the total required QEC. (Preset QEC plus measured QEC.)
Addendum 4
523-0772719-04711A (Facing Page 2-12)
good nonfluctuating bearing indications. A flight 1. If the ADF-462 system detects a parameter
check of the ground calibration should be made falling outside of its preestablished limits
using the procedures in paragraph 2.7.4.1. Perform during self-test, the CTL-62 displays that
the ground calibration as follows: diagnostic code along with the word DIAG
or FLAG in the active display.
a. Locate the aircraft in an area that is clear of Note
buildings, overhead wires, or other possible re-
flecting objects. FLAG indicates that the ADF-462 ADF Re-
b. Channel the ADF-462 system to ADF mode and ceiver is operating properly but that an ex-
turn the compass system on. Tune in the se- ternal problem may exist, such as low re-
lected radio station (200 to 400 kHz) and point ceived signal levels. DIAG indicates that a
the aircraft directly toward the station. parameter in the ADF-462 ADF Receiver is
c. Read and record the AIRCRAFT MAGNETIC outside of its preestablished limits.
HEADING and INDICATED RADIO MAG-
NETIC BEARING in a table similar to 2. If all parameters are within their preestab-
Table 2-5. lished limits, the CTL-62 displays four
d. Turn the aircraft 30° to the left and record the dashes (- - - -) and code 00.
AIRCRAFT MAGNETIC HEADING and INDI- 3. Self-test is completed when the indicator
CATED RADIO MAGNETIC BEARING. has rotated 90° from its previous indication
e. Continue this procedure by turning the aircraft or a diagnostic code is displayed.
to the left and recording data from each relative
bearing listed in column 1 of Table 2-5. A list of diagnostic codes can be found in the main-
f. Determine NET QEC according to the instruc- tenance section of this manual. The TEST button
tions given in the paragraphs 2.7.4.1, steps f must be pushed before any diagnostic code can be
through j. displayed.
2.9 INSTALLATION TROUBLESHOOTING

2.8 DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY
This portion of this installation section includes
Caution procedures for evaluating and diagnosing problems
in an ADF-462 installation. These are general pro-
The diagnostic routines are intended as an cedures and are effective for most automatic direc-
extension of the self-test capability. The pi- tion finder installations. Refer to Figure 2-22 for
lot should first observe the indicators and input/output circuit diagram of the ADF-462. This
associated flags for the proper self-test re- diagram shows the general signal flow of the ADF-
sponses. If a problem exists, then the prob- 462 to aid in installation troubleshooting.
lem may be verified in more detail by the
diagnostics. a. Make certain the ADF antenna and receiver are
good units that meet the requirements of the
An extensive self-test diagnostic routine can be customer acceptance tests in the maintenance
started in the ADF-462 by pushing the TEST but- section of this instruction book.
ton on the CTL-62 ADF Control or by operating an b. Visually inspect the installation. The antenna
optional external ADF test switch. The self-test mounting hardware should mechanically and
routine takes several seconds to complete. electrically ground the antenna to the aircraft
skin.
The following describes a typical self-test routine: 1. Do not use plastic nut plates to secure the
mounting screws.
a. Push TEST button. 2. Check to make sure there is no paint insu-
b. The CTL-62 modulates the active and preset lating the antenna mounting screw heads
display intensity from minimum to maximum from the antenna metal insert.
brightness to annunciate that self-test is in 3. The grounding wire from the antenna to the
progress. aircraft ground should not exceed 25 cm (10
inches) and should not form a pickup loop

that is near any magnetic fields created by 7. Repeat this test, setting the control to ADF
motors or pumps. mode before turning off the control. Note
4. Triaxial cable should be used for the rf sig- both audio quality and bearing needle ac-
nal from the antenna to the receiver. Best tivity.
results are usually obtained when the triax 8. If noise sources identified in the above steps
outer shield is grounded to the aircraft at have been eliminated or reduced to accept-
the antenna and receiver ends. The inner able levels, the engines should be started
triax shield should be single point grounded and their effect on the received signal
in the receiver and connected to P1-B, H, J, noted. Recheck several stations in case in-
and K of the ANT-462A connector and like- terference affects only a portion of the ADF
wise for dual systems using the ANT-462B band. An example of this is antenna-to-
antenna. antenna interference caused by pulse
5. Make certain the antenna to receiver cable equipment. This interference will be found
is not bundled with power cables or with at a frequency determined by the reciprocal
pulse carrying cables like those associated of the pulse width period. Tests should be
with DME or transponder equipments. made in both ADF and ANT modes.
6. Make certain bulkhead feedthrough connec- d. Most noise sources appear not at discrete fre-
tors do not ground the inner shield of the quencies but as white noise, degrading sensi-
triax cable. It is usually better still if the tivity and resulting in weak ADF complaints.
outer shield is not grounded at the bulk- Some of the potential problem sources are:
head feedthrough connector. • Panel light dimmers
c. Listen to the ADF with all other possible noise • Windscreen heaters
sources turned off. Disconnect power carts and • Autopilot signals (square waves)
open all circuit breakers except for the ADF. • Ac inverters
Turn off any equipment that shares the ADF • Magnetic coupling from switch power sup-
power bus. plies in other equipments
1. Set the ADF control to ANT and tune to • Magnetic pickup from fuel booster pumps
several distant, weak stations spread across • Digital buses
the ADF frequency range. Record the fre- • Strobe lights
quencies with comments about signal-to- • Rotating beacon lights
noise ratio and general audio quality. • Fluorescent lamps
2. Select one of the weak stations as a test ref- e. Bearing error caused by a noise source is re-
erence station. duced by coherent detection. However, if the
3. Put the ADF-462 receiver into burst tune noise is very strong the ADF may tend to point
mode by grounding P1 pin 11. Set the de- to the noise source.
sired frequency on the control and turn off f. Flight testing may indicate additional noise
the serial control to remove digital bus problems.
noise from the environment. 1. Precipitation static (P static)
4. During the test, monitor the aircraft bat-
tery voltage. If the voltage drops below 22 An age old problem, P static is most fre-
volts, discontinue testing and recharge the quently caused by dry ice particles, dust
battery. particles, snow, etc impinging on the air-
5. Listen to the selected station and note the craft and building up a static charge. The
signal to noise or clarity of the station (the interference is proportional to the cube of
ADF should be the only electrical system the speed. General advice to pilots is to
active at this time). “slow down and go down.”
6. One at a time, close the circuit breakers and
note any effect on the audio quality of the Make sure the aircraft is adequately
ADF. If the signal-to-noise ratio is de- equipped with static dischargers (wicks).
graded, determine the source of the inter- The “T” discharge configuration at the end
ference. Open the problem causing circuit of the discharger seems to be most effective.
breaker and continue with the other circuits
until all have been tested, if possible.

2. Arcing i. Miscellaneous problems include propeller/rotor

modulation, mechanical vibration, station
Poor grounding or bonding between metal
problems, and intermodulation effects.
surfaces may result in “crackling” and a de-
1. Propeller and rotor modulation may de-
grading of sensitivity. Control surfaces
grade bearing performance. Helicopters
must have good conductivity to the aircraft
have the greater potential of causing a
ground plane. Hinges of the piano type are
problem. The rotor may interfere with the
effective, but if there is any doubt, add a
signal at a subharmonic of the loop switch-
bonding strap across the hinge. Good
ing frequency (around 90 Hz), thus desensi-
bonding is needed from wheel well doors
tizing the bearing channel.
and access panels to the aircraft ground.
2. Mechanical vibration at the loop switching
3. Streamers frequency may modulate the receiver injec-
tion and cause bearing wander or bearing
This is the movement of electric charge
desensitization.
across a plastic surface, such as the wind
3. Station problems are occasionally encoun-
screen or radome. Surface treatments are
tered. FM modulation will severely degrade
available which will bleed off charge.
or disable coherent detector type ADF re-
g. Most bearing errors in flight are compensated ceivers. Various groups are always propos-
for by correct quadrantal error adjustment. Oc- ing to modulate NDB stations with low fre-
casionally, an unusual effect is noticed that quency FSK or PSK modulation to provide
may shift the correct bearing. A change in the differential omega or differential GPS in-
flight configuration of the aircraft may shift a formation. In Canada, some beacons carry
bearing (such as wheels down vs wheels up). FSK weather information part of the time.
Any configuration change which may cause a Although traditional ADF receivers using
re-radiating surface to appear or which may diode detection are relatively unaffected by
cause a shift of currents in the aircraft skin FSK, PSK, or NFM modulation, the more
should be suspect. sophisticated ADF receivers using coherent
h. Early/late reversals can be attributed to the lo- detection may be severely disrupted.
cation of the antenna on the aircraft and how 4. Intermodulation effects may cause incorrect
close the antenna is to horizontal in normal bearings. This may occur in high signal
flight. Generally, moving a bottom mounted an- level environments. Two or more stations,
tenna towards the nose of the aircraft causes such as 1200 kHz and 1400 kHz can over-
earlier reversals; toward the tail will delay the load the antenna rf amplifiers and generate
reversal. Top mounted antennas tend to act the a difference frequency in the ADF band
opposite. Ideally, the ADF antenna should be (200 kHz in this example).
mounted at the electrical centroid of the air-
craft. This is usually found by trial and error.

Table 2-1. Equipment Mating Connectors.
COLLINS
AIRCRAFT TYPE DESCRIPTION QTY
PART NUMBER
ADF-462 CPN 622-7382-001
Composite fixed-wing UMT-12 Mount 622-5212-003 1

Installation kit (includes 52 contacts (372-2514-110) and lightning pro- 634-4192-009 1
tection kit) ***
ADF-462 CPN 622-7382-101, -111
PREFERRED
Fixed-wing UMT-12 Mount 622-5212-001 1

Connector kit (includes 43 contacts (CPN 372-2514-110)) **** 634-4192-016 1

Installation kit (includes 52 contacts (372-2514-110) and lightning pro- 634-4192-009 1
tection kit) ***

Connector kit **** 634-1022-001 1
Crimp contacts
up to 0.050 in insulation dia 372-2514-110 *43
or
0.050 to 0.080 insulation dia 372-2514-180 *43
Coax insert (for RG-58 cable) 372-2519-040 1
Ferrule 304-0608-000 2
Ferrule insulator 304-0880-000 2
Grounding spring, coax 634-0102-001 1
Helicopter UMT-12 Mount 622-5212-003 1

Connector kit **** 634-1899-003 1
Crimp contacts
or
Ferrule 304-0608-000 2
** ALTERNATE
Fixed-wing 390R-19 Mounting Tray 622-1195-301 1

Installation kit (includes 43 contacts (CPN 372-2514-110)) **** 634-4193-011 1

Connector kit **** 634-1899-001 1
Crimp contacts
or
Ferrule 304-0608-000 2

Table 2-1. Equipment Mating Connectors.
COLLINS
PART NUMBER
Helicopter 390R-19 Mounting Tray 622-1195-301 1

Connector kit **** 634-1899-003 1
Crimp contacts
or
Ferrule 304-0608-000 2
ANT-462A CPN 622-7383-001
All Mating connector, PT08P-12-10S 357-7998-010 1
ANT-462B CPN 622-7384-001
*Quantity required for typical installation.

**Recommended installation only where UMT-series mount cannot be used.
***Lightning protection kit required when installing unit in a composite aircraft.
****Refer to Table 2-2 for a complete listing of the components included in each kit.
Table 2-2. Installation and Connector Kit Components.
COMPONENT COLLINS
KIT PART NUMBER QTY
DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER
634-1022-001 Thinline II 52/2 connector 653-1286-001 1

Insert, fastener 334-2117-010 2
Captive ring, keyway 634-1117-001 3
Screw, 4-40 x 0.38 324-2604-000 2
Keyway 634-1116-001 2
634-1899-001 Connector plate assembly 634-1130-004 1

Thinline II 52/2 connector 653-1286-001 1
Screw, 4-40 x 0.50 324-2605-000 2
Keyway 634-1116-001 2
Flat washer, no 4 310-0779-030 2

Screw, 4-40 x 0.50 324-2605-000 2
Keyway 634-1116-001 2
634-4192-009 Connector plate kit (with lightning 628-8205-002 1

protection)
Screw, 4-40 x 0.38 324-2604-000 2
Keyway 634-1116-001 2
Contacts 372-2514-110 52

COMPONENT COLLINS
KIT PART NUMBER QTY
DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER
634-4192-009 (Cont) Coax insert (for RG-58 cable) 372-2519-040 1

Coax insert (for RG-400 cable) (in kits 372-2519-100 1
marked REV T or earlier)
Ferrule 304-0608-000 2
Spring, gnd-coax 634-0102-001 1
Spring, gnd 634-1120-001 2

Screw, 4-40 x 0.38 324-2604-000 2
Keyway 634-1116-001 2
Contact 372-2514-110 43
marked REV T or earlier)
Ferrule 304-0608-000 2
Spring, gnd-coax 634-0102-001 1

Screw, 4-40 x 0.50 324-2605-000 2
Keyway 634-1116-001 2
Contact 372-2514-110 43
marked REV K or earlier)
Ferrule 304-0608-000 2
Grounding spring 634-0102-001 1
Flat washer, no 4 310-0779-030 2
Table 2-3. Mating Connector Contacts and Special Tools.
COLLINS
PART NUMBER
Snap-in tuning fork (wire with 372-2514-110 623-8579-001 or 359-0697-050 359-0697-020

insulation up to 0.050-in dia) 359-0697-010 (Daniels DAK-188*) (Daniels DRK-230*)
(Daniels GMT-221*)
Snap-in tuning fork (wire with 372-2514-180 359-0697-010 359-0697-050 359-0697-020

insulation 0.050- to 0.080-in (Daniels GMT-221*) (Daniels DAK-188*) (Daniels DRK-230*)
dia)
Coax insert 372-2519-040, -100 359-8103-010 370-8040-030

(M22520/5-01)
with 359-8103-050
(M22520/5-19)
*Special tools are available in connector kit 359-0697-080 (Daniels DMC-593) or can be ordered from: Daniels Manufacturing Corp.,
6103 Anno Ave., Orlando, FL 32809. Phone: 407-855-6161; Telex: 564321

Table 2-4. ADF-462 ADF Receiver Connector P1 Pin Functions.
CONN P1 INTERCONNECT COMPLETE FUNCTION/ CONNECTS TO

PIN NO FUNCTION/TITLE TITLE OR DESCRIPTION UNIT/SYSTEM
1 Comm key line Disables ADF when hf transmitting HF key line

2 LRU number LRU number (Open = ADF-1, GND = ADF-2) Discrete strap
3 Keep-alive input 18- to 24-V dc battery for ADF-462 frequency retention Keep-alive battery
during power interruptions
4 QEC A Quadrantal error correction +1° (GND = +1°) Discrete strap
5 ARINC 429 bus A/B ARINC 429 bus A/B select (GND = bus A) Discrete strap
6 Self-test Self-test (GND = Self-test) ADF self-test switch
7 CSDB input 1aA CSDB bus input 1aA CTL-62 P1-S
8 QEC B Quadrantal error correction +2° (GND = +2°) Discrete strap
9 ANT B+ Power for ADF-462 antenna (+15 V dc) ANT-462A pin G
10 ARINC 429 input AB ARINC 429 bus A, wire B input No 1 ARINC 429 control
11 ARINC 429 cont/burst ARINC 429 continuous/burst tune Discrete strap
12 QEC C Quadrantal error correction +4° (GND = +4°) Discrete strap
13 Ground Aircraft ground Aircraft ground
14 ARINC 429 input AA ARINC 429 bus A, wire A input No 1 ARINC 429 control
15 CSDB input 1aB CSDB bus input 1aB CTS-62 P1-R
16 QEC D Quadrantal error correction +8° (GND = +8°) Discrete strap
17 LOOP B- Power for ANT-462( ) ADF Antenna (–12 V dc) ANT-462A pin C
18 ARINC 429 output AA ARINC 429 bus A, wire A output No 1 ARINC indicator
19 Top/bottom ADF antenna location (GND = top) Discrete strap
20 QEC E Quadrantal error correction +16° (GND = +16°) Discrete strap
21 ARINC 429 output AB ARINC 429 bus A, wire B output No 1 ARINC indicator
22 ARINC 429 input CA ARINC 429 bus C, wire A input No 3 ARINC 429 control
23 ARINC 429 input CB ARINC 429 bus C, wire B input No 3 ARINC 429 control
24 Dc sine ADF bearing, dc sine output (±8 V dc) BDI-36/RMI-36 P1-48
25 ADF lock ADF analog output flag (+28 V dc = VALID) BDI-36/RMI-36 P1-24
26 ARINC 429 BA output ARINC 429 bus B, wire A output No 2 ARINC indicator
27 ARINC 429 BB output ARINC 429 bus B, wire B output No 2 ARINC indicator
28 Dc cosine ADF bearing, dc cosine output (±8 V dc) BDI-36/RMI-36 P1-45
29 Power ground ADF receiver ground Aircraft ground
30 ARINC 429 BA input ARINC 429 bus B, wire A input No 2 ARINC control
31 ARINC 429 BB input ARINC 429 bus B, wire B input No 2 ARINC control
32 +5 VDC test Power supply +5 V output Testing only
33 +15 VDC test Power supply +15 V output Testing only
34 ·12 VDC test Power supply ·12 V output Testing only
35 Reserved Reserved for future use
36 Bearing com ADF bearing common BDI-36/RMI-36 P1-46
37 Sine mod ANT-462( ) sine mod ANT-462A pin D

Table 2-4. ADF-462 ADF Receiver Connector P1 Pin Functions.
CONN P1 INTERCONNECT COMPLETE FUNCTION/ CONNECTS TO

PIN NO FUNCTION/TITLE TITLE OR DESCRIPTION UNIT/SYSTEM
38 CSDB output 1bA CSDB bus 1b, wire A output Other CSDB users
39 CSDB output 1bB CSDB bus 1b, wire B output Other CSDB users
40 Ground ADF receiver ground Aircraft ground
41 Cosine mod ANT-462( ) cosine mod ANT-462A pin F
42 AGC test Automatic gain control voltage Testing only
43 Reserved Reserved for future use
44 Fault monitor output ADF receiver flags (+28 V dc = normal, Open = fault) ADF fault annunciator
45 Detector lock test Coherent detector lock output Testing only
46 CSDB output 1aB CSDB bus 1a, wire B output CTL-62 P1-U
47 Mute disable test Used for bench test only (GND = mute disabled) Testing only
48 Power input (27.5 V) Primary ADF receiver power Aircraft 28-V bus
49 CSDB output 1aA CSDB bus 1a, wire A output CTL-62 P1-V
50 ARINC 429/CSDB select Select ARINC 429 or CSDB data bus (GND = CSDB Discrete strap
selected)
51 Audio HI ADF receiver audio output high Aircraft audio system
52 Audio LO ADF receiver audio output low Aircraft audio system
A1 Antenna input ANT-462( ) rf input ANT-462A pin A
Table 2-5. Sample Quadrantal Error Table (Airborne Calibration).
(1) (2) (3) (4)

RELATIVE BEARING TO AIRCRAFT MAGNETIC INDICATED RADIO NET QUADRANTAL ERROR
THE STATION (SELECTED HEADING (MAGNETIC MAGNETIC BEARING CORRECTION *(MAGNETIC
BEFORE CALIBRATION) BEARING TO STATION (READ FROM COMPASS BEARING TO STATION
(degrees) FROM CALIBRATION CARD BENEATH ADF FROM CALIBRATION
POINT) MINUS (COLUMN 1) POINTER) (degrees) POINT) MINUS (COLUMN 3)
(degrees) (degrees)
0 *71 71 0
30 41 65 +6
45 26 64 +7
60 11 65 +6
90 341 71 0
120 311 77 –6
135 296 78 –7
150 281 77 –6
180 251 71 0
210 221 65 +6
225 206 64 +7
240 191 65 +6
270 161 71 0
300 131 77 –6
315 116 78 –7
330 101 77 –6
*Magnetic bearing to station from calibration point is 71°.

Figure 2-2. Single ADF-462 System With CTL-62,

Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-3. Dual ADF-462 System With Dual CTL-62, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-4 (Sheet 1 of 2). Dual ADF-462 System With Single

CTL-62, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-4 (Sheet 2). Dual ADF-462 System With Single CTL-62, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-5. Dual ADF-462 System Withcy CTL-62, Interconnect Overview and Cable Identification Diagram

Figure 2-6. Single ADF-462 System With ARINC-429 Control,


Figure 2-7. Dual ADF-462 System With ARINC-429 Control, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-8 (Sheet 1 of 4). Dual ADF-462 System With ARINC-429

Control and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-8 (Sheet 2). Dual ADF-462 System With ARINC-429 Control and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-8 (Sheet 3). Dual ADF-462 System With ARINC-429


Figure 2-8 (Sheet 4). Dual ADF-462 System With ARINC-429 Control and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-9 (Sheet 1 of 4). Dual ADF-462 System With CSDB Control
and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-9 (Sheet 2). Dual ADF-462 System With CSDB Control and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-9 (Sheet 3). Dual ADF-462 System With CSDB Control

Figure 2-9 (Sheet 4). Dual ADF-462 System With CSDB Control and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-10. Dual ADF-60/462 System With CTL-62 With Volume Control, Partial Interconnect Diagram
USED COLLINS
ON PART
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION CODE NUMBER LOC
*VR1 Diode, zener, 4.7V, 1N750A 353-2709-000

*CR1 Diode, 1N4002 353-6442-020
*CR2 Diode, 1N645 353-2607-020
CR3, CR4 Diode, 1N4002 353-6442-020
K1, K2 Relay, 28V 974-1076-050
*Q1 Transistor, npn, 2N2222A 352-0661-020
*R1 Res, cc, 4.7kΩ L, 10%, 1/4W 745-0773-000
*R2 Res, cc, 2.2kΩ L, 10%, 1/4W 745-0761-000
*Not required if CTL-62 has SB 19 installed
If CTL-62 has SB 19, connect P1-W to low side of K1 and K2 relays.

Figure 2-11. ADF-462 Rear Connector Pin Assignments

Figure 2-12. ANT-462A Connector Pin Assignments
Figure 2-13. ANT-462B Connector Pin Assignments

Figure 2-14. ADF-462 ADF Receiver (CPN 622-7382-001), Outline

and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-15. ADF-462 ADF Receiver (CPN 622-7382-101, -111), Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-16. ANT-462A ADF Antenna, Outline and Mounting

Dimensions

Figure 2-17. ANT-462B ADF Antenna, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-18. Quadrantal Error Adjustment

Figure 2-19. ADF-462 System, Calibration Pattern
Figure 2-20. Sample Quadrantal Error Correction Curve

Figure 2-21. Quadrantal Error Correction Curves for Antenna Alignment Errors

Figure 2-22. ADF-462 Input/Output Circuit Diagram

þ 523-0766186-00A118

Collins
ADF-60
Automatic Direction
Finding System
Installation
Table of Contents
2.1 PREINSTALLATION PLANNING.....................2-1 2.4.3 ADF-60( ) Receiver.................................................2-7

2.1.1 ADF-60( ) Receiver................................................. 2-1 2.4.3.1 Installation..........................................................2-7
2.1.1.1 Location of the ADF-60( ) Receiver .................... 2-1 2.4.3.2 Removal...............................................................2-7
2.1.1.2 ADF-60( ) Receiver Mounting ............................ 2-1 2.4.4 ANT-60( ) Antenna ................................................2-7
2.1.2 Location of the ANT-60( ) Antenna....................... 2-1 2.4.4.1 Installation..........................................................2-7
2.1.3 Cabling and Bonding ............................................. 2-2 2.4.4.2 Removal...............................................................2-9
2.1.4 Quadrantal Error Correction ................................ 2-2 2.4.5 Radio Magnetic Indicator ......................................2-9
2.1.5 ANT-60( ) Painting Guidelines ............................. 2-3 2.4.6 ADF Control Unit ..................................................2-9
2.4.6.1 Installation..........................................................2-9
2.4.6.2 Removal...............................................................2-9
2.3 CABLING..............................................................2-3 2.5 POSTINSTALLATION TESTS......................... 2-41
2.4 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 2.5.1 Functional Test ....................................................2-41
PROCEDURES....................................................2-3 2.5.1.1 HF Disable Check (Customer Option) .............2-41
2.4.1 Universal Mounts .................................................. 2-4 2.5.2 Quadrantal Error Calibration .............................2-41
2.4.2 Receiver Mating Connector ................................... 2-4 2.5.2.1 Airborne Calibration.........................................2-42
2.4.2.1 Installation/Removal .......................................... 2-7 2.5.2.2 Ground Calibration...........................................2-43
NOTICE: This section replaces ninth edition dated 2 December 1991 and all revisions.
Page No Issue
* Title ...........................................11 Apr 97

* 2-1 thru 2-15 .............................11 Apr 97
* 2-16 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-17 thru 2-21 ...........................11 Apr 97
* 2-22 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-23 thru 2-39 ...........................11 Apr 97
* 2-40 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-41 thru 2-47 ...........................11 Apr 97
* 2-48 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-49 thru 2-50 ...........................11 Apr 97


1st Ed 1 Dec 75 None 8th Ed 21 Jul 89 None
2nd Ed 15 May 77 None 9th Ed 2 Dec 91 None
1 30 Jun 78 None 1 29 Sep 92 None
3rd Ed 15 Apr 80 None 2 12 May 94 None
4th Ed 1 Mar 83 ADF-60B SB 5; 3 15 Sep 95 None

ADF-60A SB 6
5th Ed 5 Oct 84 ADF-60( ) 10th Ed 11 Apr 97 None

SB 9
1 19 Feb 85 None
6th Ed 5 Mar 86 None

section II
installation
2.1 PREINSTALLATION PLANNING 2.1.2 Location of the ANT-60( ) Antenna
The following paragraphs provide general informa-

The ANT-60( ) Antenna is a totally self-contained
tion to aid in planning an ADF-60 system installa-
unit that does not require access or adjustment
tion. Specific information for installing the various
during its operation. It may be located on either the
system components is given in other paragraphs of
top or bottom of the aircraft. It should be located as
this section.
near the center line of the aircraft as possible to re-
duce unsymmetrical quadrantal error, and near the
The location and installation of the ADF-60( ) Re-
wing-root to obtain the best station crossing indica-
ceiver and the ANT-60( ) Antenna will vary with
tion. Consideration should be given to keeping the
different types of aircraft. The following sugges-
antenna away from other antennas and structural
tions should be considered when planning the
members that may cause distortion of the radio
equipment location.
field pattern. Minimum perimeter-to-perimeter
spacings of 0.61 m (2 ft) from transponder and
2.1.1 ADF-60( ) Receiver
DME antennas and 127 mm (5 in) from another
ANT-60( ) Antenna is recommended.
2.1.1.1 Location of the ADF-60( ) Receiver
The ADF-60( ) Receiver is a totally self-contained If the ANT-60( ) Antenna is located on the bottom
unit that does not require access to or adjustment of the aircraft, the possible exposure to highly cor-
during its operation. It may be located in any con- rosive hydraulic fluid must be considered. The hy-
venient location. However, due to the sensitivity of draulic fluid may attack the antenna mounting
ADF circuits to electrical interference from other seals or gaskets as well as the connector and cable
airborne equipment and systems, it is wise to avoid seals. If possible, a location where hydraulic fluid
locating the receiver or antenna adjacent to equip- collection or buildup will not occur is preferred.
ment that generates large interfering fields or adja-
cent to the input/output cabling of such equipment.
Unlike previous ADF systems, the length of the in-
terconnecting cables between the ANT-60( ) and the
2.1.1.2 ADF-60( ) Receiver Mounting
ADF-60( ) Receiver is neither limited nor critical.
However, short cable runs are preferred to reduce
It is recommended that the ADF-60( ) be mounted
the exposure to ground currents and interfering
in a UMT-12 or a 390R-19 mount may be used if a
fields within the airframe.
UMT-12 mount can not be used. UMT-12 and 390R-
19 mating connector information is contained in
paragraph 2.4.2. If the ADF-60( ) is to be mounted The metal base of the ANT-60( ) forms a small
in an aircraft with unusually high levels of vibra- ground plane for the receiving antenna elements. It
tion, shock isolators (CPN 200-0754-030) may also must be in electrical contact with the metal skin of
be required. Vibration specifications are given in the airframe. If a gasket is installed, the ANT-60( )
the maintenance section, Table 5-2. If these specifi- mounting bolts must provide electrical contact with
cations are exceeded, shock isolators should be the metal spacers that form the mounting holes in
installed. Refer to the 390R-18/19/20 Universal the antenna through the mounting nuts to the air-
Mount Kit Assembly Instructions (with IPL). frame.

installation ADF-60
2.1.3 Cabling and Bonding When the quadrantal error characteristic of the
aircraft type is known prior to installation, the cor-
The full performance potential of the ADF-60 sys- rect pins can be jumpered in the original wiring in-
tem may be obtained only if the installation is free stallation and the correction checked during postin-
from interference generated by other electrical sys- stallation tests. If the quadrantal error char-
tems installed in the airframe. Known sources of acteristic is not known in advance, it will be neces-
interference are the engine ignition and magneto sary to determine the proper correction by using
systems, inverters, some dimming control and fuel the procedures in paragraph 2.5.2. In that case, the
flow indicator systems that employ variable duty amount of effort required to determine the amount
cycle controls, strobe lights, fluorescent cabin of correction can be reduced if the required correc-
lights, windshield heaters, serial control systems, tion is estimated and jumpers are installed prior to
and systems that generate high-energy pulses. The the initial calibration test.
ADF system is more susceptible to these interfer-
ence sources than other avionics systems and re- The initial estimate of required correction may be
quires that adequate bonding and cabling precau- made in either of two ways. When the quadrantal
tions be taken during installation. The ANT-60( ) error correction is known for an aircraft of similar
must be adequately bonded to the airframe as pre- size and configuration, that initial correction may
viously described. The ADF-60( ) Receiver must be used. If that information is not available, an ini-
also be adequately bonded to the airframe through tial correction of 5 degrees for single engine and
the mount. Potential interference sources must be small twin-engine aircraft, 12 degrees for medium
bonded to the airframe to prevent them from be- twin-engine aircraft, and 17 degrees for large twin-
coming actual interference sources. engine aircraft is recommended.
The coaxial or triaxial cables that interconnect the The first calibration test, with an initial estimated
ANT-60( ) and the ADF-60( ) carry extremely low correction jumpered, often results in the require-
amplitude signals and therefore may pick up inter- ment to change or adjust the amount of correction.
ference if they are routed through high-level elec- The adjustment is made by changing the jumpers
trical or magnetic fields. These interconnecting ca- in the ADF-60( ) Receiver mount. Confusion as to
bles should never be tied into cable runs which whether to increase or decrease the amount of cor-
contain high-current pulse-carrying cables. For in- rection may occur at this time. Confusion can be
formation on bonding refer to the Installation Prac- eliminated if the following facts are kept in mind:
tices Manual (CPN 523-0775254).
a. Quadrantal error correction is of the opposite
2.1.4 Quadrantal Error Correction sign from quadrantal error. Positive correction
is required to compensate for negative error.
The radio-frequency field pattern in the vicinity of b. The quadrantal error is normally zero at the
the aircraft is distorted by the outline of the air- cardinal points. Indicated radio bearing is nor-
craft. This distortion varies with the different types mally shifted toward the nose of the aircraft
of aircraft and location of the antenna on the air- when the relative bearing to the station is in
craft, and results in radio bearing errors if it is not the right-front quadrant (0 to 90 degrees) or the
corrected. left-front quadrant (270 to 360 degrees). It is
normally shifted toward the tail when the rela-
The method of providing quadrantal error correc- tive bearing to the station is in the right-rear
tion (QEC) chosen for use in the ADF-60 system is quadrant (90 to 180 degrees) or the left-rear
to control the relative amplitudes of the SIN MOD quadrant (180 to 270 degrees).
and COS MOD signals that are supplied to the c. The mathematical sign of the quadrantal error
ANT-60( ) by the ADF-60( ). This is achieved by correction shown in Figure 2-27 refers to the di-
connecting together the various combinations of rection of the correction that is achieved by the
ADF-60( ) rear connector J1 pins 4, 8, 12, 16, and corresponding jumper in the right-hand quad-
20. Each combination of jumpered connector pins rant. That is, a correction of 7 degrees will
produces a certain amount of correction (Figure 2- move the indicated bearing toward the right
28). These pins are jumpered at the time of aircraft wingtip when the relative bearing to the station
installation wiring through the receiver mating is from 0 to 90 degrees. Coincidentally, the
connector. same correction will also move the indicated

installation ADF-60
bearing toward the right wingtip when the sta- Check the ADF-60( ) Receiver for physical damage
tion is in the right-rear quadrant and will move such as a scratched or dented dust cover or bent
it toward the left wingtip when the station is in pins on the connector.
the left-rear or left-front quadrant.
d. The magnitude of the quadrantal error correc- Check the ANT-60( ) Antenna for physical damage
tion shown in Figure 2-28 refers to the magni- to the fiber-glass cover, aluminum baseplate, and
tude of the correction achieved by the corre- unit connector.
sponding jumpers.
Perform preinstallation tests or connect unit to a
In summary, confusion regarding quadrantal error system mockup to verify proper operation.
correction can be reduced by remembering the fol-
lowing: 2.3 CABLING
a. Quadrantal error distortion shifts the indicated Figure 2-2 through Figure 2-5 are recommended in-
bearing toward the nose or the tail, whichever terconnect wiring diagrams for the ADF-60 Auto-
is nearer. matic Direction Finding System with 614L-( ) ADF
b. Quadrantal error correction shifts the indicated Controls. If a CTL-60 ADF Control is being used,
bearing toward the nearest wingtip. refer to Figure 2-6 through Figure 2-9. If a CTL-62
c. The magnitude of the correction varies as the ADF Control with the CAD-62 Control Adapter is
relative bearing changes, reaching a peak in used, refer to Figure 2-10 through Figure 2-13.
the vicinity of 45, 135, 225, and 315 degrees
relative bearing. Figure 2-14 provides interconnect information to a
tie point number. The tie point number can be used
2.1.5 ANT-60( ) Painting Guidelines to tie together one interconnect to another inter-
connect diagram with the same number. Example:
While it is not generally considered good practice to the tie number 801 is dedicated to ADF Number 1
paint the ANT-60( ) antenna, many requests to do dc sin information. The reference on the ADF dia-
so have prompted the following guidelines. gram is to an RMI system such as the RMI-36. On
the appropriate RMI-36 installation diagram, there
Most painting requirements can be met using a is a tie point at 801 which is the ADF 1 sin input.
high quality, low loss, non-metallic polyurethane Figure 2-14 is designed to minimize HIRF and
enamel. It is essential that the paint be non- lightning hazards.
metallic so that the antenna’s effective height is not
reduced and its parasitic capacitance is not in- Refer to the General System and Mount Informa-
creased. A good polyurethane enamel is Collins tion section for general interconnect guidelines to
part number 005-8365-XXX. be followed. Make certain that the cable to the
ANT-60( ) is long enough to allow removal of the
The use of black paints presents additional prob- ANT-60( ). Also, ensure that ADF control power
lems. Most of the black paints use carbon black as a switch controls both dc and ac power if the installa-
prime constituent. Carbon black pigment is very tion is for an ADF-60A. For information on wiring,
glossy and its use in antenna paints can lead to re- bonding, and other general installation practices,
duced sensitivity. Therefore, if a black antenna refer to the Installation Practices Manual (CPN
color is desired, it is recommended that the carbon 523-0775254). Refer to Figure 2-29 for input/output
black pigment content be less than 10%. The fin- circuit diagram on the ADF-60( ). This diagram
ished product should have a resistance greater than provides additional information which may be use-
500 kilohms per square unit. ful in the installation or troubleshooting the in-
stallation of the ADF-60( ).
2.2 PREINSTALLATION CHECK
2.4 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
When unpacking the equipment, check carefully for PROCEDURES
shipping damage. If the equipment is damaged, file
a claim with the transportation company as soon as Installation and removal procedures are listed in
possible and save the original packing cases and the general information and mount information
materials to substantiate the claim. section of this manual.

installation ADF-60
2.4.1 Universal Mounts Note

a. 390R-19 Universal Mount
Use the 390R-19 as instructed in the 390R- mount/receiver location.
18/19/20 Universal Mount Kit Assembly In-
2.4.2 Receiver Mating Connector (Refer to
structions (with IPL). Outline and mounting
Table 2-1 through Table 2-3)
dimensions for the 390R-19 are given in the
General System and Mount Information section a. Receiver Thinline II Mating Connector (UMT-
of the Pro Line II installation manual. 12 Mount)
Mating connector kit CPN 634-4192-016 is re-
Note quired. This kit includes the lockwashers,
screws, contacts, coaxial contact, and connector
receptacle required to assemble the receiver
mount/receiver location.
mating connector.
b. UMT-12 Universal Mount
b. Receiver Thinline II Mating Connector (390R-
Use the UMT-12 as instructed in the UMT-( ) 19 Mount)
Mount and Thinline II Connectors Instruction
Mating connector kit CPN 634-4193-011 is re-
Book (523-0772277). Outline and mounting di-
quired. This kit includes the lockwashers,
mensions for the UMT-12 are given in the Gen-
screws, contacts, coaxial contact, and connector
eral System and Mount Information section of
receptacle required to assemble the receiver
the Pro Line II installation manual.
mating connector.
Table 2-1. ADF-60( ) Mating Connectors.
COLLINS PART
AIRCRAFT TYPE DESCRIPTION NUMBER QTY
ADF-60( )
PREFERRED
Fixed-wing UMT-12 mount 622-5212-001 1

Installation kit (includes 43 contacts 634-4192-016 1
(CPN 372-2514-110))*
Fixed-wing UMT-12 mount 622-5212-001 1

Connector kit* 634-1022-001 1
Crimp contacts
Up to 0.050-in insulation dia 372-2514-110 **43
or
0.050- to 0.080-in insulation dia 372-2514-180 **43
Ferrule 304-0608-000 2
Helicopter UMT-12 mount 622-5212-003 1

Crimp contacts
or
Ferrule 304-0608-000 2

installation ADF-60
Table 2-1. ADF-60( ) Mating Connectors.
AIRCRAFT TYPE DESCRIPTION COLLINS PART QTY

NUMBER
***ALTERNATE
Fixed-wing 390R-19 mounting tray 622-1195-301 1

Installation kit (includes 43 contacts 634-4193-011 1
(CPN 372-2514-110))*
Fixed-wing 390R-19 mounting tray 622-1195-301 1

Crimp contacts
or
Ferrule 304-0608-000 2
Helicopter 390R-19 mounting tray 622-1195-301 1

Crimp contacts
or
Ferrule 304-0608-000 2
ANT-60A
ANT-60B
*Refer to Table 2-2 for a complete listing of the components included in each kit.
**Quantity required for typical installation
***Recommended installation only where UMT-series mount cannot be used
KIT COMPONENT COLLINS

QTY
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER

Screw, 4-40 x 0.38 324-2604-000 2
Keyway 634-1116-001 2
Contact 372-2514-110 43
Coax insert (for RG-400 cable) (in kits marked REV T or earlier) 372-2519-100 1
Ferrule 304-0608-000 2

installation ADF-60

QTY

Screw, 4-40 x 0.38 324-2604-000 2
Keyway 634-1116-001 2
634-1899-003 Connector plate assy 634-3387-003 1

Screw, 4-40 x 0.50 324-2605-000 2
Keyway 634-1116-001 2
634-1899-001 Connector plate assy 634-1130-004 1

Screw, 4-40 x 0.50 324-2605-000 2
Keyway 634-1116-001 2
Flat washer, no 4 310-0779-030 2

Screw, 4-40 x 0.50 324-2605-000 2
Keyway 634-1116-001 2
Coax insert (for RG-400 cable) (in kits marked REV K or earlier) 372-2519-100 1
Ferrule 304-0608-000 2
Connector plate assy 634-1130-004 1
Contact 372-2514-110 43
COLLINS
PART NUMBER
Snap-in tuning fork (wire 372-2514-110 623-8579-001 or 359-0697-050 359-0697-020

with insulation up to 0.050-in 359-0697-010 (Daniels DAK-188*) (Daniels DRK-230*)
dia) (Daniels GMT-221*)
Snap-in tuning fork (wire 372-2514-180 359-0697-010 359-0697-050 359-0697-020

with insulation 0.050- to (Daniels GMT-221*) (Daniels DAK-188*) (Daniels DRK-230*)
0.080-in dia)
Coax insert 372-2519-040, -100 359-8103-010 370-8040-030

(M22520/5-01) with
359-8103-050
(M22520/5-19)
6103 Anno Avenue, Orlando, FL 32809. Phone: (407) 855-6161; Telex: 564321.

installation ADF-60
2.4.2.1 Installation/Removal Ensure pins are properly aligned and firmly

press receiver back until rear connector is
2.4.2.1.1 Mating Connector Contact
firmly engaged with mount connector.
Crimp, installation, and removal procedures for c. Tighten the two knurled knobs to the hook
contacts used in the Thinline and Thinline II con- projections on the front of the receiver.
nectors are described in the General System and d. Safety-wire the knurled knobs.
Mount Information section of this manual (Part A,
Pro Line II installation manual). Refer to Figure 2- 2.4.3.2 Removal
1 for ADF-60( ) mating connector pin assignments.
a. Remove safety wire from knurled knobs and
2.4.2.1.2 Mating Connector Coaxial Contact
loosen knurled knobs.
Crimp, installation, and removal procedures for co- b. Remove the receiver from mount.
axial contact used in the Thinline and Thinline II
connectors are described in the General System and 2.4.4 ANT-60( ) Antenna
Mount Information section of this manual (Part A,
Pro Line II installation manual).
Note
A 50-Ω triaxial cable such as PIC Wire and Cable
Supply L2201TX is recommended for new aircraft Refer to paragraph 2.1.2 for recommended
installation. (This is triaxial equivalent of RG-58 mounting location.
cable.)
Outline and mounting dimensions for the ANT-60A
Note are given in Figure 2-16 and for the ANT-60B in
Figure 2-17.
mended that L2201TX triax cable be used When installing the ANT-60( ), give careful consid-
instead of TRF-58. TRF-58 is not recom- eration to location, keeping antenna cable away
mended because its jacket is made of PVC from sources of interference. Power cables, etc, can
and does not meet FAR 23.1365 and FAR cause the antenna cable to pick up electrical or
25.831. Refer to Collins ALL AVIONICS magnetic noise and transfer this interference to the
SIL 2-92 for additional information. receiver. Avoid installation around large openings
in the fuselage, such as entrance doors or baggage
If required, triaxial bulkhead adapters such as Am-
doors, as they will also interfere with the rf field
phenol type 53225 (CPN 357-7562-010) and triaxial
around the antenna. It is also recommended that
straight plugs such as Amphenol type 53150 (CPN
the ANT-60( ) be installed at least 0.61 m (2 ft) from
357-7285-010) are available.
any transmitter (DME, transponders, etc) antenna.
Triaxial cable for the ADF system may be pur-
chased from: 2.4.4.1 Installation
PIC Wire & Cable Supply
The ANT-60( ) may be installed on the top or bot-
N63 W22619 Main St.
tom of the fuselage. Bottom mounting is preferred.
Sussex, WI 53089-0330
The ANT-60( ) should be mounted on the fore-to-aft
Phone: (800) 742-3191
axis of the aircraft. However, if installation on the
Fax: (414) 246-0450
axis interferes with airframe members, the ANT-
2.4.3 ADF-60( ) Receiver 60( ) may be offset to the left or right by a small
amount. This will induce a small, uncorrectable er-
Outline and mounting dimensions for the ADF-60( )
ror in bearing indications. The size of the error will
Receiver are given in Figure 2-15.
remain negligible as long as the displacement from
the fore-to-aft axis is very small compared to the
width of the fuselage.
a. Position the receiver in front of the UMT-12 or
390R-19 mount.
b. Carefully slide receiver back on mount until
rear connector engages with mating connector.

installation ADF-60
2.4.4.1.1 Installation on Flat Surface 2.4.4.1.2 Installation on Curved Surface
a. Refer to Figure 2-16 or Figure 2-17 and mark,

punch, and drill the holes to accommodate #10
2.4.4.1.1. If the antenna is to be mounted on a sur-
aircraft screws and the hole for the ANT-60( )
face the curvature of which does not match the
connector (if necessary), ensuring that impene-
mounting surface of the antenna, large area shims
trable components of the aircraft structure do
should be used around the mounting holes. To pre-
not interfere with the location of holes or
vent the entrance and subsequent freezing of water
mounting screws. Ensure approximately 50 mm
between the antenna and the aircraft, a sealant
(2 in) of clearance between the bulkhead and
must be used. The sealant should be nonadhering
aircraft skin for mating connector boot. The an-
so that the ANT-60( ) may be removed at a later
tenna mounting screws should make good elec-
date if necessary. Chromatic tape is recommended.
trical connections to both the aircraft and to the
ANT-60( ).
2.4.4.1.3 Installation on Pressurized Fuselage
Note
A doubler plate is required for holes that 2.4.4.1.1. If the antenna is to be mounted on a pres-
pass through the aircraft skin only. This surized fuselage, a leveling and sealing compound
plate should be riveted to the aircraft skin such as Coast Pro-Seal #890 Aerodynamic
at its edges. Braces or doubler plates should Smoother should be used between the entire
be used where installation would otherwise mounting surface of the antenna and the fuselage.
weaken the aircraft structure. Use of this compound in addition to installation of
the mounting gasket (if supplied) will compensate
b. Assemble ANT-60( ) mating connector. for interface irregularities and eliminate all voids
1. Thread antenna wiring through plastic between the ANT-60( ) and the fuselage. The fuse-
boot. lage may be coated with a mold-releasing material
2. Refer to Figure 2-16 or Figure 2-17. Solder before installation to prevent the leveling com-
antenna wiring to proper mating connector pound from adhering to the fuselage.
contacts.
3. Press plastic boot to mating connector until
boot locks with connector. Note
4. Pot inside of plastic boot with Thiokol type
MIL-S-8516B potting compound. Proseal #890 (gray color) or #895 (alu-
c. Form mounting gasket around ANT-60A base- minum color) may be purchased from:
plate and engage mating connector. (ANT-60B
does not require a gasket, but must be sealed to Aero Hardware
aircraft with Coast Pro-Seal #890 or equiva- 1037 Boston Post Road
lent.) Rye, New York 10580
d. Position ANT-60( ) over mounting holes. Secure Phone: (914) 967-8550
ANT-60A to aircraft using #10 caphead or pan- Fax: (914) 967-8553
head aircraft screws. Secure ANT-60B to air-
craft using #10 flathead aircraft screws. Coast Sealant Distributors
3795 Northwest 38th St.
Miami, Florida 33142
Note Phone: (305) 634-6000
After installation of a top-mounted an- Wilco and Associates
tenna, it may be necessary to apply Silastic 1442 South Main St.
sealant (RTV-140 or equivalent) around the Gardena, California 90248
mounting screwheads to prevent water Phone: (213) 538-4510
seepage.

installation ADF-60
2.4.4.2 Removal 614L-( ) ADF control unit to be installed in aircraft.

If CTL-60 ADF Control is being used, refer to the
a. Remove chromatic tape if applicable. CTL-X0 Controls Instruction Book (CPN 523-
b. Loosen and remove #10 aircraft screws securing 0769247) for installation and interconnect data.
ANT-60( ) to fuselage. Outline and mounting dimensions for CTL-60 are
c. Carefully pull antenna from aircraft and disen- shown in Figure 2-21, Figure 2-22, and Figure 2-23.
gage mating connector from ANT-60( ) unit Refer to the CTL-X2/X2A installation section for
connector. outline and mounting information on a CTL-62. Re-
d. Remove mounting gasket from ANT-60( ) and fer to the CAD-62 installation section for outline
sealant from aircraft, if applicable. and mounting information on the CAD-62.
2.4.5 Radio Magnetic Indicator 2.4.6.1 Installation
Collins RMI-30 is recommended for use with ADF- a. Mark, punch, and drill required mounting
60A Receiver, CPN 622-2362-001. Collins RMI-36 holes.
or Collins BDI-36 is recommended for use with b. Be careful to avoid damage to adjacent equip-
ADF-60B Receiver, CPN 622-2873-001. Refer to ap- ment and cables, and allow adequate space for
propriate outline and mounting dimensions. installation of connectors and cables.
c. Slide control unit into position and secure to
Refer to the RMI/BDI-36 installation section in part mount using four screws.
B of this manual for outline, mounting, and instal-
lation data on the RMI-36/BDI-36. For information 2.4.6.2 Removal
on the outline and mounting of the RMI-30, refer to
the repair manual (CPN 523-0769676). For infor- a. Loosen and remove four screws securing control
mation on the 332C-10, refer to instruction book unit to mount.
(CPN 523-0767591). b. Pull control unit from mount and disengage
mating connector from equipment rear connec-
2.4.6 ADF Control Unit tor.
Refer to appropriate outline and mounting dimen-

sions (Figure 2-18, Figure 2-19, or Figure 2-20) for

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-1. ADF-60( ) Mating Connector Pin Assignments

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-2. ADF-60A and ANT-60A Single Antenna (With AC

Synchro Indicator), Interconnect Wiring Diagram

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-3. ADF-60B and ANT-60A Single Antenna (With DC Synchro Indicator), Interconnect Wiring Diagram

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-4. ADF-60A and ANT-60B Dual Antenna (With AC

Synchro Indicator), Interconnect Wiring Diagram

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-5. ADF-60B and ANT-60B Dual Antenna (With DC Synchro Indicator), Interconnect Wiring Diagram

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-6. ADF-60 Automatic Direction Finding System and CTL-60 ADF Control (With NCS), Interconnect Diagram

ADDENDUM 18
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

ADF-60 installation section (523-0766186-00A118) in Part A of this manual.
Figure 2-7 shows 5 diodes installed backwards. The diodes in question are connected to CTL-60 J3 pins 21 and
23 and the No. 2 ADF-60 P1 pin 11. The corrected diodes are illustrated below.
Addendum 18
22 Dec 1998 Sheet 1 of 2
523-0772719-0J711A (Facing Page 2-17)
installation ADF-60
Figure 2-7. Dual ADF-60 Automatic Direction Finding System With

CTL-60 ADF Control, Interconnect Diagram

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-8. Dual ADF-60 Automatic Direction Finding System With CTL-60 ADF Control and Two NCS’s, Interconnect Diagram

ADDENDUM 18
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

ADF-60 installation section (523-0766186-00A118) in Part A of this manual.
Figure 2-8 shows 5 diodes installed backwards. The diodes in question are connected to CTL-60 J3 pins 21 and
23 and the No. 2 ADF-60 P1 pin 11. The corrected diodes are illustrated below.
Addendum 18
22 Dec 1998 Sheet 2 of 2
523-0772719-0J711A (Facing Page 2-18)
installation ADF-60
Figure 2-9. CTL-60 Functional Interconnect Diagram

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-10. Single ADF-60 System With CTL-62 and CAD-62, Interconnect Diagram

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-11. Dual ADF-60 System With CTL-62 and CAD-62, Interconnect Overview and Cable Identification Diagram

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-12. Dual ADF-60 System With CTL-62 and CAD-62,


installation ADF-60
Figure 2-13. Partial Dual ADF-60 System With CAD-62 and CTL-62 With Volume Control, Interconnect Diagram

ADDENDUM 5
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

ADF-60 installation section 523-0766186-00A118 in Part A of this manual.
This addendum adds required text to page 2-24. Insert the following text between the illustration and the caption
for Figure 2-13.
COLLINS
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER
*VR1 Diode, zener, 4.7V, 1N750A 353-2078-000

*CR1 Diode, 1N4002 353-6442-020
*CR2 Diode, 1N645 353-2607-000
CR3, CR4 Diode, 1N4002 353-6442-020
K1, K2 Relay, 28V 974-1076-050
*Q1 Transistor, 2N3700 352-0734-020
*R1 Res, cc, 4.7kΩ, 1/4W 745-0773-000
*R2 Res, cc, 2.2kΩ, 10%, 1/4W 745-0761-000
*Not required if CTL-62 has SB 19.

NOTE: If CTL-62 has SB 19, connect P1-W to low side of K1 and K2 relays.
Addendum 5
523-0772719-05711A (Facing Page 2-24)
installation ADF-60
Figure 2-14 (Sheet 1 of 6). ADF-60A/B System With CTL-62


installation ADF-60
Figure 2-14 (Sheet 2). ADF-60A/B System With CTL-62 Control and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-14 (Sheet 3). ADF-60A/B System With CTL-62


installation ADF-60

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-14 (Sheet 5). ADF-60A/B System With CTL-62


installation ADF-60

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-15. ADF-60( ) Receiver, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-16. ANT-60A Antenna, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-17. ANT-60B Antenna, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-18. 614L-11 ADF Control Unit for Single ADF Systems, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-19. 614L-12 ADF Control Unit for Single ADF Systems With Frequency Preselection, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-20. 614L-13 ADF Control Unit for Dual Systems, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-21. CTL-X0 Standard Mount Control, Outline and

Mounting Dimensions

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-22. CTL-X0 Rail (Dzus) Mounted Controls, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-23. CTL-X0 Custom Mount Control, Outline and

Mounting Dimensions

installation ADF-60
2.5 POSTINSTALLATION TESTS 2.5.1.1 HF Disable Check (Customer Option)
These tests are to be performed with the ADF-60

system and associated equipment installed in the Note
aircraft.
This check is applicable only to ADF-60A
with Service Bulletin 6 installed and ADF-
Note 60B with Service Bulletin 5 installed if the
hf disable option is incorporated into the in-
Avoid testing the ADF-60 system in the terconnecting wiring.
hangar or close to any large metal objects
that could induce magnetic interference. a. Start the aircraft engines if not already run-
ning.
2.5.1 Functional Test b. Position the ADF system mode select switch to
ADF and tune the receiver to a nearby station
a. Apply primary power to the ADF-60 system. that provides a good indication on the bearing
b. Position mode select switch to ANT. Observe indicator.
that panel and dial lamps are lit. c. Select the hf COMM system on the audio con-
c. With aircraft audio system being driven by the trol panel and select a clear frequency on the hf
ADF-60( ) Receiver, check that signals can be COMM system.
received on the following bands: d. Start turning the aircraft and note that the
bearing indicator continues to point to the
190 - 279.5 kHz 600 - 899.5 kHz
tuned station.
280 - 399.5 kHz 900 - 1399.5 kHz
e. Continue turning the aircraft and key the hf
400 - 599.5 kHz 1400 - 1749.5 kHz
COMM system. Note that the bearing indicator
d. Position mode select switch to ADF. Observe “freezes” as the compass card continues to ro-
that panel and dial lamps remain lit. tate.
e. Tune the receiver to several stations, observing f. Unkey the hf COMM and note that the bearing
that the bearing indicator indicates a bearing indicator slews and again points to the tuned
suitable for the station received. station.
f. With the receiver tuned to a station frequency,
note the bearing indication as reference. Acti- Note
vate the self-test circuit. Pointer should rotate
90 degrees from reference and return to refer- If the mic is keyed for 15 to 30 seconds, the
ence when self-test switch is released. ADF bearing pointer will park until the mic
is unkeyed, at which time normal ADF op-
Note eration is restored.
When the ADF-60 system receives an unus- g. This completes the hf disable check.
able signal, the RMI indicator will “park”
horizontally. 2.5.2 Quadrantal Error Calibration
g. Start the aircraft engines, if not already run- Two methods of quadrantal error calibration are
ning, and other equipment likely to cause elec- described in the following paragraphs. One method
trical interference (rotating beacons, flashing is performed with the ADF-60 system installed and
wingtip lights, deicing pumps). Repeat steps a the airplane on the ground. Basically this is accom-
through f, checking that ADF-60 system opera- plished by turning the airplane to a series of prede-
tion is not impaired by static and noise over- termined headings relative to a suitable ground
riding signals. If operation of the ADF-60 sys- station and recording the indicated bearings to the
tem is impaired by other aircraft equipment, station. From this information, the quadrantal er-
the source of these spurious signals must be ror correction can be computed. The location chosen
shielded and bonded. for this method should be clear of buildings, over-
head or underground conductors, and other possible
reflecting objects. For maximum accuracy, calibra-

installation ADF-60
tion should be done using a frequency between 200 Note

and 400 kHz.
ADF measurements can be no more accu-
rate than the magnetic portion of the radio
Note magnetic indicator. A magnetic accuracy of
1 degree is required for high-quality meas-
A ground calibration should always be con- urements.
firmed by a flight check.
The relative bearings to the station for which
measurements should be made are given in Figure
The other method consists of collecting the calibra- 2-24, column 1. Construct a table as shown in
tion data during flight and then computing the ad- Figure 2-24 using the bearings in column 1 but
justment that is needed. The following precautions leaving the other columns blank. The figures of col-
should be taken when performing the calibration umn 1 are relative bearings that are applicable to
procedures: all cases. Use of these bearings is recommended
since they are convenient and adequate, but others
may be selected if desired.
a. Do not attempt calibration during the period
from 2 hours before sunset to 2 hours after sun- The other columns represent typical sample values
rise. At this time skywaves from distant sta- for a particular situation and will be different in
tions may induce errors. each aircraft. Column 2, AIRCRAFT MAGNETIC
b. During flight, take the readings only when the HEADING, should be calculated prior to the flight
aircraft is in level flight. Make all turns as and list magnetic headings that should be flown
smooth as possible to avoid disturbing the di- over the calibration point. The bearings of column 2
rectional gyro. are obtained by subtracting RELATIVE BEARING
c. Perform the flight check on a calm day to TO THE STATION (column 1) from the calibration
minimize drift and heading errors. point to station bearing, which should be obtained
from a map. When RELATIVE BEARING TO THE
STATION is larger than AIRCRAFT MAGNETIC
2.5.2.1 Airborne Calibration
HEADING, add 360 degrees to AIRCRAFT MAG-
NETIC HEADING before subtracting. Column 3,
Airborne measurement of quadrantal error requires Figure 2-24, data is taken during the flight. Col-
that the aircraft fly over a fixed point at least 16.1 umn 4 is calculated after the flight.
km (10 miles) from a low-frequency radio station
while holding a fixed heading. The most convenient a. Estimate amount of quadrantal error correction
fixed point is an omnirange station. This is because (QEC) required for the installation under test.
omnirange stations are easily located from the air If previous QEC information is unknown, as-
and their angular position with respect to a low- sume a required QEC (refer to paragraph
frequency radio station is available from the radio 2.1.4). Refer to Figure 2-28 and strap proper re-
navigation charts. The selected radio station should ceiver mating connector contacts to obtain es-
be transmitting on a frequency of 200 to 400 kHz, timated QEC.
and the surrounding terrain should be flat. Choose b. Fly to the vicinity of the omnirange station or
a combination of an omnirange and radio station fixed point selected. Position control mode se-
already known to give accurate ADF measure- lect switch to ADF, and tune the ADF-60( ) to
ments, if such are available. the selected radio station.
c. Fly over omnirange station (or fixed point) with
first aircraft magnetic heading listed in Figure
Accurate measurements cannot be made unless the 2-24. At the moment aircraft is directly over
aircraft is in level flight attitude. If possible, the omnirange station (or fixed point), record indi-
calibration should be performed on a calm day to cated magnetic bearing to the station (the
minimize drift and crab-angle problems. bearing on the compass card indicated by the
ADF pointer).

installation ADF-60
d. Continue to fly straight for a short time; then needed. If the curve is negative at relative
make a broad turn and fly over omnirange sta- bearings of 0 to 90 degrees, the system has too
tion (or fixed point) with another aircraft mag- much correction.
netic heading. Again, record indicated magnetic
bearing to station when directly over the refer- Referring to Figure 2-26, the peak value of QEC
ence point. is 7 degrees. This is the required NET QEC of
e. Repeat step d for each remaining aircraft mag- the ADF-60 system as installed in the aircraft.
netic heading. The test pattern should be flown
with alternate left and right turns to prevent Note
excessive precession of the gyros. The flight
pattern of an aircraft performing this is shown A positive QEC will move the indicated
in Figure 2-25. bearing toward the wings. A negative cor-
f. Subtract each INDICATED RADIO MAG- rection moves the indicated bearing toward
NETIC BEARING from AIRCRAFT MAG- the fore-to-aft axis of the aircraft.
NETIC HEADING (from the omnistation). En-
ter results in NET QUADRANTAL ERROR j. If the result of the test (from preceding step i)
CORRECTION column. Figure 2-24 shows posi- within 3 degrees of the estimated QEC (from
tive NET QEC needed in first quadrant, but the step a), then the system is correctly adjusted. If
correction may be negative. the results differ by more than 3 degrees, re-
g. Plot a graph of NET QEC against relative move the strapping on the rear connector. Refer
bearing to station. Figure 2-26 shows a sample to Figure 2-28 and restrap the mating connec-
graph using the data from Figure 2-24. tor contacts to either increase or decrease the
h. Critically examine QEC curve to see if it is rea- original estimate by the amount of QEC indi-
sonably regular and symmetrical. If it is not, cated by the flight test. (Total QEC equals ini-
check antenna location for aerials, projections tial strapping plus derived QEC.)
near the antenna, and large openings in the fu-
selage (doors) which could cause irregularities For sample error correction curve, Figure 2-26,
in the rf field. If irregularities cannot be ac- an additional 7 degrees of QEC are required.
counted for, repeat calibration using a different For an initial strapping of 10 degrees, the total
station and frequency. If second calibration required QEC is 17 degrees. Jumper wire con-
produces a differently shaped curve, then the necting 4-8, 12-20 would be removed and 4-16
installation is questionable and the cause must should be strapped (from Figure 2-28).
be sought and eliminated.
Note Note
If the curve begins to the left or right of the Remember to remove jumpers from previ-
vertical NET QEC axis, the ANT-60( ) An- ously strapped receiver mating connector
tenna is not aligned with the aircraft fore- contacts prior to strapping to obtain total
to-aft axis. If the curve is centered above or required QEC (preset QEC plus measured
below the horizontal relative bearing axis, QEC). If total QEC does not correspond
the ANT-60( ) Antenna is not aligned with with any entry in Figure 2-28, strap to
respect to the aircraft fuselage. Refer to within 3 degrees.
Figure 2-27.
2.5.2.2 Ground Calibration
Any misalignment should be corrected or a
noncorrectable residual error will remain
Calibration may be performed on the ground using
after calibration.
a radio signal transmitted from a known geographic
location and turning the aircraft to different rela-
i. Examine the peak values of the QEC curve to
tive bearings. The bearing to the selected radio sta-
determine the amount of quadrantal error cor-
tion relative to the heading of the aircraft must be
rection needed. If the quadrantal error correc-
accurately established. That angle may be deter-
tion curve is positive at relative bearings of 0 to
mined using the aircraft compass system (if accu-
90 degrees, a greater amount of correction is

installation ADF-60
rately calibrated) or by using a transit or pelorus c. Read and record the AIRCRAFT MAGNETIC
sighted on a fixed object. The station selected HEADING and INDICATED RADIO MAG-
should provide a strong, clear-channel signal and NETIC BEARING in a table similar to Figure
provide good nonfluctuating bearing indications. A 2-24.
flight check of the ground calibration should be d. Turn the aircraft 30 degrees to the left and rec-
made using the procedures in paragraph 2.5.2.1. ord the AIRCRAFT MAGNETIC HEADING
Perform the ground calibration as follows: and INDICATED RADIO MAGNETIC BEAR-
ING.
a. Locate the aircraft in an area that is clear of e. Continue this procedure by turning the aircraft
buildings, overhead wires, or other possible re- to the left and recording data from each relative
flecting objects. bearing listed in column 1 of Figure 2-24.
b. Channel the ADF-60 system to ADF mode and f. Determine the NET QEC required and adjust
turn the compass system on. Tune in the se- the QEC according to the instructions given in
lected radio station (200 to 400 kHz) and point paragraph 2.5.2.1, steps f through j.
the aircraft directly toward the station.

installation ADF-60
(1) (2) (3) (4)

RELATIVE BEARING TO AIRCRAFT MAGNETIC INDICATED RADIO NET QUADRANTAL ERROR
THE STATION (SELECTED HEADING (MAGNETIC MAGNETIC BEARING CORRECTION *(MAGNETIC
BEFORE CALIBRATION) BEARING TO STATION (READ FROM COMPASS BEARING TO STATION
(degrees) FROM CALIBRATION CARD BENEATH ADF FROM CALIBRATION
POINT) MINUS (COLUMN 1) POINTER) (degrees) POINT) MINUS (COLUMN 3)
(degrees) (degrees)
0 *71 71 0
30 41 65 +6
45 26 64 +7
60 11 65 +6
90 341 71 0
120 311 77 –6
135 296 78 –7
150 281 77 –6
180 251 71 0
210 221 65 +6
225 206 64 +7
240 191 65 +6
270 161 71 0
300 131 77 –6
315 116 78 –7
330 101 77 –6
*Magnetic bearing to station from calibration point is 71 degrees.
Figure 2-24. Sample Quadrantal Error Table (Airborne Calibration)

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-25. ADF-60 System, Calibration Pattern
Figure 2-26. Sample Quadrantal Error Correction Curve

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-27. Quadrantal Error Correction Curves for Antenna Alignment Errors

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-28. Quadrantal Error Correction Curves for Antenna Alignment Errors. Quadrantal Error Adjustment

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-29 (Sheet 1 of 2). ADF-60( ) Input/Output Circuit Diagram

installation ADF-60
Figure 2-29 (Sheet 2). ADF-60( ) Input/Output Circuit Diagram

ADDENDUM 30
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

of the ADF-60 Installation Section (523-0766186-00A118) in Part A of this manual.
Figure 2-29 (Sheet 2) is incorrect. The correct figure is shown on the back of this addendum sheet.
Addendum 30
523-0772719-0W711A (Facing Page 2-50)
installation ADF-60
Figure 2-29 (Sheet 2). ADF-60( ) Input/Output Circuit Diagram

Addendum 30
523-0772719-0W711A (Backs Addendum Sheet 1)
þ 523-0775918-004118

Collins
ALT-50/55
Radio Altimeter System
Installation
Table of Contents
2.1 GENERAL.............................................................2-1 2.5.2.1 Location .............................................................2-21

2.5.2.2 Installation........................................................2-21
2.2 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING
2.5.2.3 Removal.............................................................2-21
EQUIPMENT.......................................................2-1
2.5.3 339H-4/4A Radio Altitude Indicator (Used With
2.3 PREINSTALLATION CHECK ............................2-1 ALT-50 System) .....................................................2-23
2.3.1 ALT-50A Radio Altimeter ..................................... 2-1 2.5.3.1 Location .............................................................2-23
2.3.2 ALT-55B Radio Altimeter ..................................... 2-1 2.5.3.2 Installation........................................................2-23
2.3.3 339H-4/4A Radio Altitude Indicator ..................... 2-1 2.5.3.3 Removal.............................................................2-23
2.3.4 ALI-55/55A/55B Radio Altitude Indicator ............ 2-1 2.5.4 ALI-55/55A/55B Radio Altitude Indicator (Used
2.3.5 DRI-55 Digital Radio Altitude Indicator .............. 2-1 With ALT-55 System) ............................................2-23
2.3.6 437X-1/1A/1B or ANT-50A/51A/52 Antenna ........ 2-1 2.5.4.1 Location .............................................................2-23
2.5.4.2 Installation........................................................2-23
2.4 CABLING..............................................................2-2 2.5.4.3 Removal.............................................................2-23
2.4.1 Aircraft Wiring....................................................... 2-2 2.5.5 DRI-55 Digital Radio Altitude Indicator (Used
2.4.2 Antenna Cables...................................................... 2-2 With Either ALT-50 or ALT-55 System) ..............2-23
2.4.2.1 Aircraft Installation Delay (AID) 2.5.6 437X-1/1A/1B or ANT-50A/51A/52 Antenna ......2-24
Requirement ............................................................ 2-2 2.5.6.1 Location .............................................................2-24
2.4.2.2 Antenna Cable Length ..................................... 2-21 2.5.6.2 Mounting ...........................................................2-24
2.5 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 2.5.6.3 Installation........................................................2-25
PROCEDURES..................................................2-21 2.5.6.4 Removal.............................................................2-25
2.5.1 UMT-12 (Preferred) or 390R-19 Mounting 2.6 POSTINSTALLATION TEST AND
Tray ........................................................................ 2-21 TROUBLESHOOTING ..................................... 2-25
2.5.1.1 Location............................................................. 2-21 2.6.1 Postinstallation Test............................................2-25
2.5.2 ALT-50A or ALT-55B Radio Altimeter ............... 2-21 2.6.2 Postinstallation Troubleshooting........................2-26
NOTICE: This section replaces third edition dated 12 May 1994 and revision.
Page No Issue
* Title ...........................................11 Apr 97

* 2-1 thru 2-7 ...............................11 Apr 97
* 2-8 Blank...................................11 Apr 97
* 2-9..............................................11 Apr 97
* 2-10 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-11 ...........................................11 Apr 97
* 2-12 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-13............................................11 Apr 97
* 2-14 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-15............................................11 Apr 97
* 2-16 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-17 thru 2-43 ...........................11 Apr 97
* 2-44 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-45 thru 2-46 ...........................11 Apr 97
* 2-47 thru 2-48 Added ................11 Apr 97


1st Ed 21 Jul 89 None
1 29 Sep 92 None
3rd Ed 12 May 94 None
1 15 Sep 95 None

section II
installation
2.1 GENERAL 2.3.2 ALT-55B Radio Altimeter
This section contains all of the information neces- a. Refer to the ALT-55B instruction book (repair
sary to install the ALT-50A (for 2000-foot opera- manual) (CPN 523-0766793) maintenance sec-
tion) or ALT-55B (for 2500-foot operation) Radio Al- tion for the final performance test procedures if
timeter, DRI-55 Digital Radio Altitude Indicator verification of unit operating to specifications is
(used with either the ALT-50A or ALT-55B), 339H- required or connect the unit in a system mock-
4/4A Radio Altitude Indicator (used with the ALT- up to verify proper operation.
50A), ALI-55/55A/55B Radio Altitude Indicator b. Adjust altitude trips to required altitudes as
(used with the ALT-55B), and the ANT-50A/51A/52 described in the maintenance section for the
or 437X-1/1A/1B Antenna. ALT-55B.
2.3.3 339H-4/4A Radio Altitude Indicator

EQUIPMENT
Refer to the 339H-4/4A Radio Altitude Indicator
maintenance section in the ALT-50 Radio Altimeter
Unpack the equipment carefully and make a care-
System Instruction Book (CPN 523-0766818) for
ful visual inspection of the unit for possible ship-
the final performance test (CAT) procedures if certi-
ping damage. All claims for damage should be filed
fication of the unit is required or connect the unit in
with the transportation company involved. If claims
a system mockup to verify proper operation.
for damage are to filed, save the original shipping
container and materials. If no damage can be de-
2.3.4 ALI-55/55A/55B Radio Altitude Indicator
tected, replace packing materials in the shipping
container and save for future use (such as storage
Refer to the ALI-55/55A/55B Radio Altitude Indica-
or reshipment).
tor maintenance section in the ALT-55 Radio Al-
timeter System Instruction Book (CPN 523-
An aircraft station radio license is required to oper-
0766793) for the final performance test (CAT) pro-
ate the ALT-50 or ALT-55 Radio Altimeter System.
cedures if certification of the unit is required or
Refer to the appendix section for information on a
connect the unit in a system mockup to verify
license.
proper operation.
2.3 PREINSTALLATION CHECK 2.3.5 DRI-55 Digital Radio Altitude Indicator
2.3.1 ALT-50A Radio Altimeter Refer to the DRI-55 Digital Radio Altitude Indica-
tor Instruction Book, CPN 523-0768424, for the fi-
a. Refer to the ALT-50A instruction book (repair nal performance test (CAT) procedures if certifica-
manual) (CPN 523-0766818) maintenance section of the unit is required or connect the unit in a
tion for the final performance test procedures if system mockup to verify proper operation.
verification of unit operating to specifications is
required or connect the unit in a system mock- 2.3.6 437X-1/1A/1B or ANT-50A/51A/52
up to verify proper operation. Antenna
b. Adjust altitude trips to required altitudes as
described in the maintenance section for the Refer to the 437X-1/1A/1B instructions (CPN
ALT-50A. 523-0769099), ANT-50A instructions (CPN 523-

installation ALT-50/55
0769131), or ANT-52 instructions (CPN 523- stead of RG-214. RG-214 is not recom-
0773208) for maintenance and test procedures for mended because its jacket is made of PVC
the antennas. The ANT-50A procedures also may and does not meet FAR 23.1365 and FAR
be used for the ANT-51A Antenna. 25.831. Refer to Collins ALL AVIONICS
SIL 2-92 for additional information.
2.4 CABLING
Two coaxial cables are required to connect the ALT-
50A/55B to its associated 437X-1/1A/1B or ANT-
2.4.1 Aircraft Wiring 50A/51A/52 antennas. Length of each cable, when
using RG-393, must not exceed 5.48 m (18 ft). Four
TNC male connectors are also required to connect
Refer to Table 2-1 for mating connector kits and
the cables from the antennas to the ALT-50A/55B.
mount part number information. Refer to Table 2-2
for a list of the parts in the connector kits. Refer to
2.4.2.1 Aircraft Installation Delay (AID)
Table 2-3 for mating connector contacts and associ-
Requirement
ated special tools. Figure 2-1 is the suggested inter-
connect wiring diagram for the ALT-50 Radio Al-
The radio altimeter system must be adjusted to
timeter System. Figure 2-2 is the suggested inter-
read 0-foot altitude at the point of touchdown.
connect wiring diagram for the ALT-55 Radio Al-
Therefore, compensation for the antenna cable
timeter System. Figure 2-3 is the suggested inter-
lengths and the antenna height above the ground
connect wiring diagram for the DRI-55 Digital Ra-
at the point of touchdown must be made by apply-
dio Altitude Indicator.
ing AID bias. The AID bias is available in the ALT-
50A or ALT-55B by jumpering rear connector pins.
Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5 provide interconnect in-
Jumpering is physically accomplished by jumpering
formation to a tie point number. The tie point num-
connector pins on the rear of the shockmount con-
ber can be used to tie together one interconnect to
nector.
another interconnect diagram with the same num-
ber. Example: the tie numbers 355 and 356 are
In determining the correct height of the antenna,
dedicated to Radio Altimeter Hi/Lo altitude infor-
do not measure the antenna height of a parked air-
mation. The reference on the ALT diagram is to an
craft. The landing gear of a parked aircraft is
Autopilot system. On the appropriate Autopilot in-
loaded, and the antenna height is not the same as
stallation diagram, there is a tie point at 355 and
at the point of touchdown. A simulated touchdown
356 which is the Rad Alt H/L input. Figure 2-4 and
position can be obtained by jacking up the aircraft
Figure 2-5 are designed to minimize HIRF and
until the landing gear is unloaded; however, the
lightning hazards.
aircraft pitch attitude at touchdown must also be
taken into consideration.
Mating connector pin assignments are shown for
the ALT-50A (Figure 2-6), ALT-55B (Figure 2-7),
The ALT-50A and ALT-55B provide AID bias ad-
339H-4/4A/ALI-55A/B (Figure 2-8), and DRI-55
justments of 20, 40, and 57 feet. Selection of 20-foot
(Figure 2-9). The interconnect diagrams provide
AID is made by jumpering connector pin P1-22 to
both single and dual installation information. Refer
P1-19. Selection of 40-foot AID is made by jumper-
to the General System and Mount Information sec-
ing P1-24 to P1-19. Selection of 57-foot AID is made
tion for general interconnect guidelines to be fol-
by jumpering P1-27 to P1-19.
lowed. For information on wiring, bonding, and
other general installation practices refer to the In-
After the antenna height is determined, refer to
stallation Practices Manual (CPN 523-0775254).
Figure 2-10 to determine AID and cable length. The
antenna height shown in Figure 2-10 is one-half the
2.4.2 Antenna Cables distance of a path from the transmit antenna to
ground and back to the receive antenna.
Note

mended that RG-393 coax cable be used in-

Table 2-1. ALT-50A/55B Mating Connectors.
COLLINS
PART NUMBER
PREFERRED

*Installation kit (includes 30 contacts (CPN 372-2514-110) and TNC 634-4192-006 1
connectors)

*Connector kit 634-1021-001 1
Crimp contacts
Up to 0.050 in dia 372-2514-110 **30
or
0.050 to 0.080 in dia 372-2514-180 **30
TNC connectors (for RG-214/U coax) 357-7204-010 2

Crimp contacts
Up to 0.050 in dia 372-2514-110 **30
or
0.050 to 0.080 in dia 372-2514-180 **30
***ALTERNATE

*Installation kit (includes 30 contacts (CPN 372-2514-110) and TNC 634-4193-008 1
connectors)

Crimp contacts
Up to 0.050 in dia 372-2514-110 **30
or
0.050 to 0.080 in dia 372-2514-180 **30

Crimp contacts
Up to 0.050 in dia 372-2514-110 **30
or
0.050 to 0.080 in dia 372-2514-180 **30

KIT PART NUMBER COMPONENT DESCRIPTION COLLINS

QTY
PART NUMBER
634-1021-001 Thinline II connector 634-1112-001 1

Keyway 634-1116-001 2
Screw, 4-40 x 0.38, cap-hex drive 324-2604-000 2

Connector plate assembly 634-1130-003 1
Keyway 634-1116-001 2
Flat washer, no 4 310-0779-030 2
Screw, cap, 4-40 x 0.50 324-2605-000 2

Keyway 634-1116-001 2
Screw, cap, 4-40 x 0.50 324-2605-000 2

Connector, TNC (for RG-214/U coax) (in kits marked 357-7204-010 2
REV P or earlier)
Connector, TNC (for RG-393/U) (in kits marked 857-1511-010 2
REV R or later)
Contact 372-2514-110 30
Keyway 634-1116-001 2
Screw, 4-40 x 0.38 324-2604-000 2

REV H or earlier)
Connector, TNC (for RG-393/U) (in kits marked 857-1511-010 2
REV J or later)
Contact 372-2514-110 30
Keyway 634-1116-001 2
Screw, 4-40 x 0.50 324-2605-000 2
Flat washer, no 4 310-0779-030 2
COLLINS
PART NUMBER

with insulation up to 0.050 359-0697-010 *(Daniels DAK-188) *(Daniels DRK-230)
in dia) *(Daniels GMT-221)
with insulation 0.050 to *(Daniels GMT-221) *(Daniels DAK-188) *(Daniels DRK-230)
0.080 in dia)
*Special tools are available in connector kit 359-0697-080 (Daniels DME-593) or can be ordered from: Daniels Manufacturing Corp.,
6103 Anno Avenue, Orlando, FL, 32809. Phone: (407) 855-6161, Telex: 564321.

Figure 2-1. ALT-50 Radio Altimeter System for 2000-Foot

Operation, Interconnect Wiring Diagram

Figure 2-2. ALT-55 Radio Altimeter System for 2500-Foot Operation, Interconnect Wiring Diagram

Figure 2-3. DRI-55 Digital Radio Altitude Indicator, Interconnect

Wiring Diagram

Figure 2-4 (Sheet 1 of 3). ALT-50A/55B Radio Altimeter With

Indicator and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-4 (Sheet 2). ALT-50A/55B Radio Altimeter With Indicator


Figure 2-4 (Sheet 3). ALT-50A/55B Radio Altimeter With Indicator


Figure 2-5. ALT-55B Radio Altimeter With RAC-870 Converter and

Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-6. ALT-50A Radio Altimeter, Mating Connector Pin Assignments

Figure 2-7. ALT-55B Radio Altimeter, Mating Connector Pin Assignments

Figure 2-8. 339H-4/4A and ALI-55A/B Radio Altitude Indicators, Mating Connector Pin Assignments

Figure 2-9. DRI-55 Digital Radio Altitude Indicator, Mating Connector Pin Assignments

2.4.2.2 Antenna Cable Length 2.5 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

PROCEDURES
The required antenna cable lengths shown in
Figure 2-10 depend on the AID used and antenna 2.5.1 UMT-12 (Preferred) or 390R-19
height. Figure 2-10 provides cable lengths for ca- Mounting Tray
bles fabricated with an RG-214/U that has a propa-
gation factor of 0.66 and for an RG-393/U that has a 2.5.1.1 Location
propagation factor of 0.694. Cable lengths are criti-
cal and must be measured accurately. The AID and The UMT-12 or 390R-19 Mounting Tray is mounted
cable requirement graph was produced using the in the location determined for the ALT-50A or ALT-
following formula: 55B Radio Altimeter. Refer to the General System
and Mount Information section in this manual for
AID = P + K (Ct + Cr) installation and removal information for the UMT-
12 or 390R-19. Refer to UMT-( ) Mount and Thin-
Where:
line II Connectors Instruction Book for additional
AID = aircraft installation delay in feet. information. Refer to the 390R-18/19/20 Universal
P = total minimum path length in feet from Mount Assembly Instructions for additional infor-
transmitting antenna to ground and mation.
back to receiving antenna when the air-
craft is in the touchdown configuration. 2.5.2 ALT-50A or ALT-55B Radio Altimeter
K = reciprocal of the coaxial cable speed of
propagation. 2.5.2.1 Location
Ct = transmitter cable length in feet from the
ALT-50A or ALT-55B to the transmit an- The location of the ALT-50A or ALT-55B Radio Al-
tenna. It does not include any cable or timeter is dependent upon the length of the an-
delay within the receiver-transmitter or tenna cables. The length of the antenna cables is
antenna. defined in paragraph 2.4.2. For the ALT-50A out-
Cr = receiver cable length in feet from the line and mounting dimensions, refer to Figure 2-11.
ALT-50A or ALT-55B to the receive an- For the ALT-55B outline and mounting dimensions,
tenna. It does not include any cable or refer to Figure 2-12.
delay within the receiver-transmitter or
antenna. 2.5.2.2 Installation
a. Position ALT-50A or ALT-55B Radio Altimeter

Note
in front of mounting tray.
RG-393 cable, CPN 425-1684-010, or RG- b. Carefully slide ALT-50A or ALT-55B back on
115A/U cable, CPN 425-1571-000, is rec- mounting tray until rear connector firmly en-
ommended. Use of cable that does not con- gages with mounting tray connector. Connector
form to military standards for RG-393 or guide pins must be aligned to ensure correct
RG-115A/U will affect the ALT-50 or ALT- mating of connectors.
55 system performance, resulting in erratic c. Secure ALT-50A or ALT-55B to mounting tray
readings and intermittent operation. Refer by tightening two knurled knobs.
to COLLINS ALL AVIONICS SIL 2-92. d. Attach safety wire to knurled knobs.
e. Connect receive and transmit antenna cables to
Figure 2-10 assumes the length of a single cable two TNC connectors on front of radio altimeter.
and that both the transmit and receive antenna ca-
bles are of equal length. However, if installation 2.5.2.3 Removal
problems require unequal length cables, the cable
length shown in Figure 2-10 must be doubled and a. Disconnect two TNC connectors on receive and
the sum of the unequal transmit and receive cable transmit antenna cables at front of ALT-50A or
lengths must equal this amount. Any excessive ca- ALT-55B. Tag cables to ensure correct rein-
ble should be coiled up and secured to the aircraft. stallation.
The transmit and receive cables must be continuous b. Remove safety wire from two knurled knobs
without any intervening connectors or breaks. that secure radio altimeter to mounting tray.

Figure 2-10. Aircraft Installation Delay (AID) and RF Cable Requirements Chart
Below is a list of parameters for coaxial cable also approved for use with the ALT-50A or ALT-55B installations.
DIELECTRIC
COAXIAL VELOCITY OUTSIDE OUTSIDE TEMP LOSS/FT AT CHAR MATING
CABLE FACTOR DIAMETER (in) DIAMETER (in) RANGE (°C) 5 GHz (dB) IMP CONNECTOR
RG-393/U 0.694 0.285 0.390 –55 +200 0.210 50 857-1511-010
(CPN 425-1684-010)
RG-325/U 0.870 0.260 0.350 –55 +80 0.141 50 *258-T1800B
_________________
*No Collins part number. Vendor type number listed is for: Automatic Connector, Inc., 400 Moreland Road, Commack, NY 11725.
Phone: (516) 543-5000

c. Loosen two knurled knobs and disengage from 2.5.5 DRI-55 Digital Radio Altitude Indicator
retainer brackets on ALT-50A or ALT-55B. (Used With Either ALT-50 or ALT-55
d. Slide radio altimeter forward until rear connec- System)
tor is disengaged and clear of mounting tray
connector. The DRI-55 can be front or rear mounted using one
e. Remove ALT-50A or ALT-55B from mounting of the following three methods.
tray.
a. The DRI-55 may be front mounted using inte-
2.5.3 339H-4/4A Radio Altitude Indicator gral turnlock fasteners. This method uses the
(Used With ALT-50 System) least space and adds no extra weight.
b. The DRI-55 may be front mounted using an
2.5.3.1 Location adapter plate, CPN 629-8671-XXX. This method
requires that the four holes in the panel be
The 339H-4/4A Radio Altitude Indicator may be tapped or that mooring plate, CPN 629-8672-
front or rear mounted in the instrument panel. Refer 001, be used.
to Figure 2-13 for outline and mounting dimensions. c. The DRI-55 may be rear mounted using a
mooring plate, CPN 629-8672-001.
All of the above methods use the same panel
a. Connect 339H-4/4A rear connector to mating cutout. Refer to Figure 2-15 and Figure 2-16 for
connector on wiring harness. the outline and mounting diagrams. Figure 2-
b. Install 339H-4/4A in instrument panel recess 16 contains the panel cutout dimensions. Select
and secure with four screws. a mounting position that is convenient for pilot
or copilot view and control. Make the instru-
2.5.3.3 Removal ment panel cutout at this time.
a. Remove four screws that secure 339H-4/4A to d. Front Mounting Using Integral Turnlock
instrument panel. Fasteners
b. Pull 339H-4/4A out of panel recess and discon- Use this method to install the DRI-55 in in-
nect rear connector from mating connector. strument panels 1.27 mm (0.050 in) to 3.18
c. Remove 339H-4/4A from control panel. (0.125 in) thick. Turn the integral turnlock ac-
tuating screws counterclockwise until they will
2.5.4 ALI-55/55A/55B Radio Altitude Indicator no longer turn. This moves the integral clamp
(Used With ALT-55 System) out of the way so that the DRI-55 may be in-
serted in the instrument panel. From the front,
2.5.4.1 Location
slide the DRI-55 into the panel and hook up the
The ALI-55/55A/55B Radio Altitude Indicator can mating connector. Install the screw locks to se-
be front or rear mounted in the instrument panel. cure the mating connector to the rear connec-
Refer to Figure 2-14 for outline and mounting di- tor. Push the DRI-55 tight against the instru-
mensions. ment panel (do not push on the glass window)
while turning the integral turnlock actuating
2.5.4.2 Installation screws clockwise. Tighten the actuating screws
until the DRI-55 is held firmly in place.
a. Connect ALI-55/55A/55B rear connector to e. Front Mounting Using Adapter Plate, CPN 629-
mating connector on wiring harness. 8671-XXX
b. Install ALI-55/55A/55B in instrument panel re-
cess and secure with four screws. This method requires the use of an adapter
plate, CPN 629-8671-XXX. CPN 629-8671-001
2.5.4.3 Removal is the gray adapter plate and CPN 629-8671-
002 is the black adapter plate. This method re-
a. Remove four screws that secure ALI-55/55A/ quires that the four holes in the panel cutout be
55B to instrument panel. tapped or that the mooring plate, CPN 629-
b. Pull ALI-55/55A/55B out of panel recess and dis- 8672-001, be used. Either the tapped holes or
connect rear connector from mating connector. the mooring plate is required so that screws can
c. Remove ALI-55/55A/55B from control panel. be used to hold the adapter plate in place. From

the front, place the DRI-55 into the panel cut- 2.5.6.1 Location
out. If the mooring plate is to be used, slide this
into place from behind the instrument panel at The antennas should be mounted on the underside
this time and retain using the integral turnlock of the aircraft, positioned as near the point of rota-
fasteners if necessary. Hook up the mating con- tion as possible. Mounting the antenna near the
nector and install the screw locks. Secure the point of rotation reduces the change in altitude
mating connector firmly to the rear connector. readings due to aircraft pitch attitude during ap-
Push the DRI-55 into place against the instru- proach and landing. The location must provide a
ment panel and put the adapter plate in place. clearance cone from the antenna of not less than
Use four screws inserted from the front to se- 120 degrees.
cure the adapter plate and DRI-55 in place.
2.5.6.2 Mounting
f. Rear Mounting Using Mooring Plate, CPN 629-
8672-001
The 437X-1, ANT-50A, ANT-51A, and ANT-52 an-
Note tennas can be mounted either side by side or in
line. The 437X-1A and 437X-1B antennas can be
The DRI-55 may be rear mounted so as to mounted only in line. Refer to Figure 2-17 for typi-
be flush with the instrument panel, or it cal mounting placement. The antennas must be
may be rear mounted to extend approxi- separated by no more than the antenna height
mately 3/8 inch from the instrument panel. above the terrain at touchdown, but should be
For flush mounting, place space plate, CPN separated by at least 50.8 cm (20 in) (measured be-
629-8672-002, between the instrument tween antenna center lines). The antennas should
panel and the bezel of the DRI-55. always be installed as far apart as possible but not
more than the antenna height above the terrain at
Slide the DRI-55 into place from behind the in- touchdown. Otherwise, insufficient terrain area is
strument panel. Slide the mooring plate over the illuminated for ground level operation. If a dual
DRI-55 and retain using the integral turnlock fas- system is installed, the transmit antenna from one
teners. Hook up the mating connector to the rear system must be located as far as possible from the
connector and install the screw locks. Install four receive antenna of the other system. Except for the
screws from the front of the DRI-55 and tighten. ANT-52, the antennas should be mounted with the
connectors perpendicular to a line between the
2.5.6 437X-1/1A/1B or ANT-50A/51A/52 transmit and receive antennas to minimize an-
Antenna tenna-to-antenna signal leakage. The signal leak-
age should be at least 6 dB below the signal level
Caution required for operation. The surface area between
the transmit and receive antennas must be smooth
Do not paint the surface of any ALT an- and free from discontinuities.
tenna.
The combined squint angle of both transmit and re-
Refer to Figure 2-18 through Figure 2-30 for al- ceive antennas must not exceed 6 degrees. This an-
timeter antenna outline and mounting dimensions. gle is measured from the physical axis of the an-
tenna to a vertical line from the aircraft to the
Six types of antennas are available for installation reflecting terrain. In the case of antennas mounted
in the ALT-50 or ALT-55 Radio Altimeter System. side by side and on either side of the aircraft center
The 437X-1, ANT-50A, or ANT-51A is used when line, and depending on the symmetry and curva-
the mounting surface is relatively flat. The 437X-1A ture of the fuselage, the antennas can be pointing
or 437X-1B is used when the mounting surface is in opposite directions, each by some angle. In this
curved. The 437X-1A fits a curved surface with a case, the angle by which one antenna is tilted away
radius of 180.34 cm (71 in); the 437X-lB fits a ra- from the vertical cannot exceed 3 degrees (6 de-
dius of 81.23 cm (32 in). The ANT-52, because of its grees from the other antenna). In the case of in-line
relatively small size, can be used on either a flat or mounting, the antennas will (most likely) be point-
curved surface. The altimeter system requires two ing in the same direction, left or right (if not
antennas, one for transmit and one for receive. straight down), so that the squint angle of one will
be nearly the same as that of the other in magni-

tude and direction. In this case, the angle from the 2.5.6.3 Installation
vertical can be as much as 6 degrees for either or
both antennas. a. Install antenna ground gasket on 437X-1/1A/1B
or ANT-50A/51A/52 Antenna.
For all antennas except the ANT-52, the mounting b. Install antenna in airframe with TNC connector
hole in line with the connector should be marked facing antenna cable, and secure with 8 screws
with black paint on the face of the antenna before for the 437X-1/1A/1B or ANT-51A Antenna, 12
installation. This facilitates orientation of the an- screws for the ANT-50A Antenna, and 4 screws
tenna in the aircraft. These antennas should be ori- for the ANT-52 Antenna.
ented so that the antenna connectors are pointed in c. Connect antenna cable TNC connector to an-
the same direction and at 90 degrees to the center tenna connector and safety wire.
line between the antennas. The ANT-52 antenna d. Repeat previous steps for second antenna.
has a small arrow painted on the face. These an-
tennas should be mounted so that the arrows are in 2.5.6.4 Removal
line, pointing directly toward or directly away from
each other. a. Remove safety wire from TNC connector and
disconnect antenna cable from antenna.
The antenna mating flange and aircraft surface b. Remove 4, 8, or 12 screws and antenna from
must be free of paint or other insulation materials airframe. Do not disturb grounding gasket un-
to provide a continuous ground path. Improper less gasket on antenna is being replaced.
grounding results in side-lobe radiation. Do not re- c. Repeat previous steps for second antenna.
move the chromate finish from the antennas or the
aircraft structure, as it provides adequate ground-
2.6 POSTINSTALLATION TEST AND
ing and protects the aluminum from corrosion.
TROUBLESHOOTING
In certain aircraft installations, the possibility of
undesirable side-lobe radiation effects may necessi- 2.6.1 Postinstallation Test
tate that the antennas be installed with rf bonding
gaskets between the aircraft fuselage and the an-
Note
tenna. An rf gasket constructed of aluminum wire
cloth, impregnated with silicone rubber and made The ALI-55B Radio Altitude Indicator alti-
of type 40-8520 material, from Metex Electronic tude scale is calibrated in metres. The met-
Corporation, or equivalent, may be used. Precut an- ric distances in the postinstallation check
tenna ground gaskets are also available from the apply to an ALT-55 Radio Altimeter System
General Aviation Division of Rockwell Interna- with the ALI-55B installed.
tional under the part numbers shown in Table 2-4.
a. Turn on aircraft primary power.
b. Adjust DH knob on indicator to set DH index to
Table 2-4. Radio Altimeter Antenna Gaskets Available.
7.6 m (25 ft).
ANTENNA GASKET CPN
c. Depress TEST switch on indicator and observe
indicator. Indicated altitude should be 15.2 m
437X-1 018-1394-020 (50 ft) and flag should be in view.
437X-1A 018-1394-020 d. Adjust DH knob to increase DH index altitude
while depressing TEST switch. DH indicator
437X-1B (CPN 622-0954-001) 018-1394-030
should light at 13.7 to 16.7 m (45 to 55 ft).
437X-1B (CPN 622-0954-002) 018-1394-040 e. With TEST switch released, read altitude indi-
ANT-50A 018-1394-060 cated on indicator. Altitude should be –1.5 to
+1.5 m (–5 to +5 ft). In some installations, the
ANT-51A 018-1394-020
tolerance may be greater due to antenna loca-
ANT-52 018-1394-100 tion and the difference between aircraft touch-
down attitude and parked attitude.
f. Turn off aircraft primary power.

2.6.2 Postinstallation Troubleshooting b. Figure 2-31 provides the input/output diagram

of the internal circuits on the ALT-50A and
a. Refer to the maintenance section in this man- ALT-55B. It may aid in troubleshooting the ra-
ual for troubleshooting information on the ALT- dio altimeter.
50A or ALT-55B.

Figure 2-11. ALT-50A Radio Altimeter, Outline and

Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-12. ALT-55B Radio Altimeter, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-13. 339H-4/4A Radio Altitude Indicator, Outline and

Mounting Diagram

Figure 2-14. ALI-55/55A/55B Radio Altitude Indicator, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-15. DRI-55 Digital Radio Altitude Indicator, Outline and

Mounting Diagram

Figure 2-16. DRI-55 Digital Radio Altitude Indicator, Typical Installations

Figure 2-17. 437X-1/1A/1B or ANT-50A/51A/52 Antenna, Typical Installation

Figure 2-18 (Sheet 1 of 2). 437X-1 Antenna (CPN 522-4140-001, -007), Outline and Mounting Diagram

Figure 2-18 (Sheet 2). 437X-1 Antenna (CPN 522-4140-001, -006), Outline and Mounting Diagram

Figure 2-19. 437X-1 Antenna (CPN 522-4140-002, -004), Outline and Mounting Diagram

Figure 2-20. 437X-1 Antenna (CPN 522-4140-003), Outline and Mounting Dimensions
Figure 2-21. 437X-1A Antenna (CPN 522-4255-001, -007), Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-22. 437X-1A Antenna (CPN 522-4255-002), Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-24. 437X-1A (UBC) Antenna (CPN 522-4255-001, -006), Outline and Mounting Dimensions


Figure 2-26. 437X-1B Antenna (CPN 622-0954-001), Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-27. 437X-1B Antenna (CPN 622-0954-002), Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-28. ANT-50A Antenna (CPN 622-3698-001), Outline and

Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-29. ANT-51A Antenna (CPN 622-4550-001), Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-30. ANT-52 Antenna (CPN 622-6793-001), Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-31 (Sheet 1 of 2). ALT-50A/55B Input/Output Circuit Diagram

Figure 2-31 (Sheet 2). ALT-50A/55B Input/Output Circuit Diagram

þ 523-0775207-005118

Collins
BIA-32
Bearing Interface Adapter
Installation
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page
2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................2-1

2.2 PREINSTALLATION CHECK ................................................................................................................................2-1
2.3 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS ....................................................................................................................................2-1
2.4 PLANNING...............................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.4.1 Installation Configurations............................................................................................................................................2-1
2.4.2 Strapping Options...........................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.4.3 Loading Considerations..................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.4.4 Dual Mounting Options..................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.4.5 Cooling Considerations...................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.5.1 General............................................................................................................................................................................2-3
2.5.2 Connector Contact Assembly and Installation..............................................................................................................2-3
2.6 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES...........................................................................................................................2-3
2.6.1 BIA-32 Installation.........................................................................................................................................................2-3
2.6.2 Bearing Indicator Installation .......................................................................................................................................2-3
2.6.3 ADF Receiver Installation..............................................................................................................................................2-3
2.6.4 VOR Navigation Receiver Installation ..........................................................................................................................2-3
2.6.5 Compass Installation......................................................................................................................................................2-3
NOTICE: This section replaces fourth edition dated 2 December 1991 and all revisions.
Page No Issue
* Title ...........................................11 Apr 97

* 2-1 thru 2-17 .............................11 Apr 97
* 2-18 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-19 thru 2-21 ...........................11 Apr 97
* 2-22 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-23 thru 2-24 ...........................11 Apr 97


1st Ed 18 Jan 88 None
2nd Ed 27 Aug 88 None
3rd Ed 21 Jul 89 None
1 29 Sep 92 None
2 12 May 94 None
3 15 Sep 95 None

section II
installation
2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING 2.4 PLANNING

EQUIPMENT
Proper and careful planning prior to installation is
Unpack equipment carefully and make a careful essential for reliable performance and easy mainte-
visual inspection of the unit for possible shipping nance. The following list is a sample of the points to
damage. All claims for damage should be filed with be considered in planning an installation:
the transportation company involved. If claims for a. Single or dual installation
damage are to be filed, save the original shipping b. Installation location — adequate airflow for
container and materials. If no damage can be de- cooling, good bonding to aircraft ground, ease of
tected, replace packing materials in the shipping cable routing, room for single or dual mounting
container and save for future use (such as storage (piggyback or side-by-side)
or reshipment). c. Installation configuration (ADF or VOR)
d. Compatibility with other equipment — loading
2.2 PREINSTALLATION CHECK considerations
Before installing the equipment in an aircraft, con- 2.4.1 Installation Configurations

nect unit in a system mockup to verify proper op-
eration. The BIA-32 converts serial digital bearing data into
analog signals for an ac bearing indicator (RMI-30,
2.3 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS RMI-36, BDI-36 or equivalent). Table 2-1 lists typi-
cal installation configurations. The following list
The following instructions must be followed to en- provides a brief description of the typical installa-
sure proper installation of the BIA-32. Damage to tion configurations:
the equipment can occur if these instructions are
a. ADF serial digital data (ARINC 429 or CSDB)
not followed.
to 3-wire synchro signals for an ac bearing indi-
cator. Refer to Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3 for in-
a. The minimum wire size for power and synchro
terconnect wiring diagrams of this installation.
signal lines is #22 AWG. #24 AWG wire can be
b. VOR serial digital data (ARINC 429 or CSDB) to
used for all other signal and control lines.
VOR sin θ and cos θ signals for an ac bearing in-
Note dicator. Refer to Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5 for in-
terconnect wiring diagrams of this installation.
Aircraft approved wire must always be used c. VOR serial digital data (ARINC 429 or CSDB)
in installations and extra care must be used and compass information (CSDB, ARINC 429,
when selecting any wire smaller than #22 or 3-wire synchro) to 3-wire synchro signals for
AWG. an ac bearing indicator. Refer to Figure 2-6
through Figure 2-14 for interconnect wiring
b. Read all notes on drawings and interconnects diagrams of this installation.
and the planning paragraph before installing
any units or cabling. Note
c. All straps on the BIA-32 have specific return
pins on the rear connector. Straps used must be If compass information is supplied in 3-wire
connected to the appropriate return pin to en- synchro format, the BIA-32 must be located
sure reliable operation. as close as possible to the compass source to
avoid ground loop problems.

installation BIA-32
The -002 status unit has an added feature where kits are available, one to mount a UMT-10 over an-
the indicator needle will be parked at 90 degrees other UMT-10 and another that allows mounting two
horizontal if the input VOR or heading data is in- UMT-10’s over a UMT-12. Refer to Collins UMT-( )
valid and strap E is grounded. Mount and Thinline II Connectors instruction book
(523-0772277) for additional information.
2.4.2 Strapping Options
Table 2-1 lists the BIA-32 strapping options. In or- Note
der to provide reliable lightning protection, each
strap on the BIA-32 is assigned a unique return pin The ADF-462 and VIR-432 use a UMT-12
on the rear connector. Straps used must be con- mount; therefore, the two UMT-10’s over a
nected to the corresponding unique return pin in UMT-12 piggyback option would allow
order to provide reliable operation of the BIA-32. mounting two BIA-32’s over an ADF-462 or
VIR-432.
Note
No return pin exists for strap E. Strap E is
selected by tying to a common ground. The BIA-32 performs properly with convection
cooling at ambient air temperatures up to +55 °C
Note (+131 °F). However, as with all electronic equip-
ment, lower operating temperatures extend equip-
All connector straps should be kept as short ment life. On the average, reducing the operating
as possible, preferably under 75 mm (3 in). temperature by 15 to 20 °C (25 to 35 °F) doubles the
2.4.3 Loading Considerations mean time between failure.
Each serial input to the BIA-32, either ARINC 429 Units tightly packed in the radio rack heat each
or CSDB, should be considered as one load. A serial other through radiation, convection, and sometimes
transmitting port, either ARINC 429 or CSDB, by direct conduction. If space permits, separate the
typically is capable of driving up to five loads. The units from each other to significantly improve reli-
compass 3-wire synchro inputs have an impedance ability.
of approximately 37 kΩ. This input primarily Even a single unit operates at a much higher tem-
senses the 3-wire synchro signal and should not perature in still air than in moving air. Fans or
have any considerable loading effect on this signal. some other means of moving the air around elec-
2.4.4 Dual Mounting Options tronic equipment are usually a worthwhile invest-
ment. If a form of ram air cooling is installed, make
The BIA-32 requires a 3/16 ATR dwarf height mount certain that rainwater cannot enter and be sprayed
(UMT-10 mount). Two piggyback mounting adapter on the equipment.
Table 2-1. Installation Configurations and Strapping Options.
INTERCONNECT
INPUTS OUTPUT STRAPS
DIAGRAM
ADF ARINC 429 3-wire synchro 2-2 B

ADF CSDB 3-wire synchro 2-3 A
VOR ARINC 429 Sin θ /cos θ 2-4 C, E*
VOR CSDB Sin θ /cos θ 2-5 A, B, E*
VOR ARINC 429 and HDG CSDB (DGS-65) 3-wire synchro 2-6 D, E*
VOR CSDB and HDG CSDB (DGS-65) 3-wire synchro 2-7 B, C, E*
VOR ARINC 429 and HDG CSDB (AHC-85) 3-wire synchro 2-8 A, B, C, E*
VOR CSDB and HDG CSDB (AHC-85) 3-wire synchro 2-9 A, C, E*
VOR ARINC 429 and HDG ARINC 429 3-wire synchro 2-10 A, D, E*
VOR CSDB and HDG ARINC 429 3-wire synchro 2-11 B, D, E*
VOR ARINC 429 and HDG 3-wire synchro 3-wire synchro 2-12 C, D, E*
VOR CSDB and HDG 3-wire synchro 3-wire synchro 2-13 A, B, D, E*
*-002 unit only; when Strap E is grounded, the indicator needle will be parked if the input VOR data is invalid.

installation BIA-32
2.5 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS Refer to the general system and mount information
section for outline and mounting diagram of
2.5.1 General
mounts. Figure 2-16 provides the input/output cir-
Interconnect cables should be prepared in accor- cuit information of the BIA-32. The information
dance with the interconnect diagrams, Figure 2-2 may be useful in the installation or troubleshooting
through Figure 2-14. Since these interconnects are of the BIA-32.
typical, variations or modifications to meet cus-
tomer requirements are inevitable. Refer to para- a. Install the UMT-10 and connector kit according
graph 2.4, planning, for information on some of the to the procedures printed in the Collins UMT-( )
options that can affect the interconnecting cabling. Mount and Thinline II Connectors instruction
book (523-0772277).
Figure 2-14 is designed to minimize HIRF and
b. Verify all interconnect wiring before proceed-
lightning hazards.
ing. Make sure 26-V rms, 400-Hz input power is
The mounts, mating connectors, and contacts reapplied only to pins J1-57 and J1-58.
quired to install a BIA-32 are listed in Table 2-2. c. Slide unit into mount until mating connectors
Table 2-4 lists the special tools required for instal- are fully engaged.
lation. Figure 2-1 illustrates the mating connector d. Position knurled knobs on front of mount to en-
pin assignments. gage unit mounting projections and tighten
knurled knobs.
2.5.2 Connector Contact Assembly and
e. Press on front panel to ensure that the unit is
Installation
fully seated in the mount. Retighten knurled
For more detailed instructions on contact crimping, knobs until unit is secured in mount.
contact insertion, and contact extraction, refer to f. Ensure that a good electrical bond exists be-
Collins UMT-( ) Mount and Thinline II Connectors tween the unit and mount.
instruction book (523-0772277).
2.6.2 Bearing Indicator Installation
Crimp, installation, and removal procedures for
contacts used in the Thinline II connector are de- Refer to the installation section in the applicable
scribed in the General System and Mount Informa- bearing indicator manual for installation information.
tion section of this manual (Part A, Pro Line II in-
stallation manual). Refer to Figure 2-1 for BIA-32 2.6.3 ADF Receiver Installation
mating connector pin assignments.
For ADF-462 installation information, refer to Col-
2.6 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES lins ADF-462 Automatic Direction Finder Receiver
and ANT-462( ) ADF Antenna manual (523-
The following paragraphs provide instructions for 0773906) or Collins Pro Line II Comm/Nav/Pulse
installing the BIA-32. If other associated equipment System installation manual (523-0772719).
are to be installed, refer to the applicable equip-
ment manual for installation procedures. 2.6.4 VOR Navigation Receiver Installation
For VIR-432 installation information, refer to Col-

Warning lins VIR-432 Navigation Receiver manual (523-
0773863) or Collins Pro Line II Comm/Nav/Pulse
Ensure that the aircraft battery master System installation manual (523-0772719).
switch is turned off before installing any
equipment, mounts, or interconnect cables. 2.6.5 Compass Installation
2.6.1 BIA-32 Installation Refer to the installation section in the applicable

compass manual for installation information. For
The BIA-32 is normally mounted in the radio AHC-85 installation information, refer to Collins
equipment rack with the UMT-10 Universal Mount. AHS-85 Attitude Heading System instruction book
Refer to Table 2-2 for specific mount, mating con- (523-0772305). For DGS-65 installation informa-
nector, and contact information. Refer to Figure 2- tion, refer to Collins MCS-65 Magnetic Compass
15 for outline and mounting diagram of the BIA-32. System instruction book (523-0771835).

installation BIA-32
Table 2-2. Equipment Mounting Options.
DESCRIPTION COLLINS PART NUMBER QTY
UMT-10 mount 622-5210-001 1

**Installation kit 634-4192-007 1
UMT-10 mount 622-5210-001 1

**Connector kit 634-1021-001 1
Crimp contacts *26
Up to 0.050 in. insulation dia 372-2514-110
or
0.050 to 0.080 in. insulation dia 372-2514-180
*Quantity required for typical installation

**Refer to Table 2-3 for a complete listing of the components included in each kit.
KIT COLLINS
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION QTY
PART NUMBER PART NUMBER
634-4192-007 Thinline II 60 pin connector 634-1112-001 1

Keyway 634-1116-001 2
Contact, crimp up to 0.050 in. insulation dia 372-2514-110 60
634-1021-001 Thinline II 60 pin connector 634-1112-001 1

Screw 4-40 x 0.38, cap-hex drive 324-2604-000 2
Keyway 634-1116-001 2
Table 2-4. Required Tools for Mating Connector Contacts.
COLLINS
PART NUMBER

with insulation up to or 623-8579-001 (*Daniels DAK-188) (*Daniels DRK-230)
0.050 in. dia) (*Daniels GMT-221)

with insulation 0.050 to (*Daniels GMT-221) (*Daniels DAK-188) (*Daniels DRK-230)
0.080 in. dia)
6103 Anno Avenue, Orlando, FL 32809. Phone: (407) 855-6161; telex: 564321

installation BIA-32
Figure 2-1. BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter, Mating Connector Pin Assignments

installation BIA-32
Figure 2-2. BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter, ADF ARINC 429 Input With 3-Wire Synchro Output

installation BIA-32
Figure 2-3. BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter, ADF CSDB Input With 3-Wire Synchro Output

installation BIA-32
Figure 2-4. BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter, VOR ARINC 429 Input With Sin θ/Cos θ Output

installation BIA-32
Figure 2-5. BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter, VOR CSDB Input With Sin θ/Cos θ Output

installation BIA-32
Figure 2-6. BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter, VOR ARINC 429 and HDG CSDB (DGS-65) Input With 3-Wire Synchro Output

installation BIA-32
Figure 2-7. BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter, VOR CSDB and HDG CSDB (DGS-65) Input With 3-Wire Synchro Output

installation BIA-32
Figure 2-8. BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter, VOR ARINC 429 and HDG CSDB (AHC-85) Input With 3-Wire Synchro Output

installation BIA-32
Figure 2-9. BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter, VOR CSDB and HDG CSDB (AHC-85) Input With 3-Wire Synchro Output

installation BIA-32
Figure 2-10. BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter, VOR ARINC 429 and HDG ARINC 429 (AHC-85D) Input With 3-Wire Synchro Output

installation BIA-32
Figure 2-11. BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter, VOR CSDB and HDG ARINC 429 (AHC-85D) Input With 3-Wire Synchro Output

installation BIA-32
Figure 2-12. BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter, VOR ARINC 429 and HDG 3-Wire Synchro Input With 3-Wire Synchro Output

installation BIA-32
Figure 2-13. BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter, VOR CSDB and HDG 3-Wire Synchro Input With 3-Wire Synchro Output

installation BIA-32
Figure 2-14 (Sheet 1 of 3). BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter,

ADF and VOR to Synchro or VOR CSDB to Sin/Cos,

installation BIA-32
Figure 2-14 (Sheet 2). BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter, ADF and VOR to Synchro or VOR CSDB to Sin/Cos, Interconnect Diagram

installation BIA-32
20
Figure 2-14 (Sheet 3). BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter,

ADF and VOR to Synchro or VOR CSDB to Sin/Cos,

installation BIA-32
Figure 2-15. BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter, Outline and

Mounting Diagram

installation BIA-32
Figure 2-16. BIA-32 Input/Output Circuit Diagram

þ 523-0774357-004118

Collins
CAD-31
Control Adapter
Installation
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page
2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................2-1

2.3.1 General............................................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.3.2 Mount and Connector Selection .....................................................................................................................................2-1
2.4.1 General............................................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.5 CAD-31 CONTROL ADAPTER INSTALLATION .................................................................................................2-2
2.6 DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY .........................................................................................................................................2-2
2.7 POSTINSTALLATION TEST .................................................................................................................................2-2
NOTICE: This section replaces third edition dated 2 December 1991 and revision.
Page No Issue
* Title ...........................................11 Apr 97

* 2-1 thru 2-13 .............................11 Apr 97
* 2-14 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-15 thru 2-16 ...........................11 Apr 97
* 2-17 Added ................................11 Apr 97
* 2-18 Blank Added......................11 Apr 97


1st Ed 15 May 86 None
2nd Ed 21 Jul 89 None
3rd Ed 2 Dec 91 None
1 29 Sep 92 None

section II
installation
2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING Table 2-1. Materials Required for CAD-31 Installation.
EQUIPMENT
DESCRIPTION COLLINS QTY
PART NUMBER
Unpack equipment carefully and make a careful vis-
ual inspection of the unit for possible shipping dam- Mount, control adapter 653-9015-001 1
age. All claims for damage should be filed with the
Connector kit 653-9014-002 1
transportation company involved. If claims for dam-
age are to be filed, save the original shipping con- Includes the following:
tainer and materials. If no damage can be detected, Connector (DDMA-50SF00000) 371-0213-050 1
replace packing materials in the shipping container
Connector hood 371-0399-280 1
and save for future storage or reshipment. (MD50-000-J-VL-464.5)
Contacts 371-0213-110 *48
Keying plug 629-8339-001 2
Check the CAD-31 Control Adapter for physical *Quantity required for typical installation
damage, such as a scratched or dented dust cover or
bent pins on the connector.
Perform the final performance test (customer ac- 2.3.2 Mount and Connector Selection
ceptance test) in the maintenance section of the
CAD-31/62 instruction book (repair manual) (CPN Refer to Table 2-1 for a list of the materials re-
523-0773216) if verification of the unit to specifica- quired for installation of the CAD-31.
tions is required or connect the unit in a system
mockup to verify proper operation. 2.4 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS
2.3 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS 2.4.1 General
2.3.1 General Refer to the General System and Mount Informa-

tion section for general interconnect guidelines to
Proper and careful planning of any installation is be followed.
nance. The following listing is a sample of the 2.4.2 Connector Contact Assembly and
points to be considered in planning an installation: Installation
a. Single or dual installation Refer to Table 2-2 for CAD-31 connector pin as-
b. Radio locations — adequate airflow for cooling, signments for either NAV/DME mode or COMM
good bonding to aircraft ground, single or dual mode. Figure 2-2 shows front and rear views of the
mounting, piggyback or side by side mating connector. Refer to Figure 2-3 through
c. Compatibility with other equipment For infor- Figure 2-10 for partial interconnect diagrams of the
mation on bonding refer to the Installation CAD-31.
Practices Manual (CPN 523-0775254).

installation CAD-31
Figure 2-10 provides interconnect information to a 2.6 DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

tie point number. The tie point number can be used
to tie together one interconnect to another inter-
connect diagram with the same number. Example: Caution
the tie number 583 is DME Hold which is a hold
output from the CAD-31 to a DME. On the appro- The diagnostic routines are intended as an
priate DME installation diagram, there is a tie extension of the self-test capability. The pi-
point of 583 which is DME Hold input. Figure 2-10 lot should first observe any associated flag
is designed to minimize HIRF and lightning haz- indications for proper self-test response. If
ards. an improper response is observed, then the
cause may be verified in more detail using
2.5 CAD-31 CONTROL ADAPTER the diagnostics.
INSTALLATION
A list of the diagnostic codes for the CAD-31 can be
To minimize wire length, the CAD-31 should be found in the maintenance section of this manual.
mounted in the radio equipment rack adjacent to Note that the presence of a diagnostic (or flag) code
its companion radio. The mount allows the CAD-31 does not necessarily indicate a fault. An out-of-
to be mounted either vertically or horizontally. Two tolerance condition may exist that is caused by an
units can be mounted end to end in approximately atypical situation. The codes are a tool, designed to
the same length as a Collins Pro Line radio. Refer display conditions internal to the applicable units.
to Figure 2-1 for the CAD-31 outline and mounting
2.7 POSTINSTALLATION TEST
dimensions diagram. Install the mount for the
CAD-31 using the dimensions shown in Figure 2-1.
After the mount has been installed and the inter- Press the test button on the control of the system in
connect cable verified, tighten the Phillips-head which the CAD-31 is installed (CTL-32 on NAV/
screw on the front of the mount. Ensure that po- DME system; CTL-22 on COMM system). Check
larizing key plugs (CPN 629-8339-001) have been the diagnostic code on the control. If no fault is de-
inserted in positions 41 and 46 on the mating con- tected, code 00 will be displayed. If a code other
nector. Install the mating connector on the front of than 00 is displayed, check the CAD-31, installation
the CAD-31 and secure with the latch. wiring, or associated units. Figure 2-11 is an in-
put/output diagram of the CAD-31 internal circuits.
The CAD-31 is capable of driving a maximum of The diagram may be useful in troubleshooting the
two navigation receivers or two communications CAD-31 installation.
transceivers. If other equipment is to be supplied
with data available from the CAD-31, external load-
limiting facilities must be provided.

installation CAD-31
Table 2-2. CAD-31 Pin Assignments
PIN NAV/DME VHF COMM COMMON PROTOCOL

FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION
10 10.0 MHz A 10.0 MHz A NA Gnd = asserted
9 10.0 MHz B 10.0 MHz B NA Gnd = asserted
8 10.0 MHz C 10.0 MHz C NA Gnd = asserted
7 10.0 MHz D 10.0 MHz D NA Gnd = asserted
21 10.0 MHz E 10.0 MHz E NA Gnd = asserted
20 NAV disable Not used NA Gnd = asserted
2 Marker sensitivity high Not used NA Gnd = asserted
22 DME not hold Not used NA Gnd = asserted
26 ILS mode Not used NA Gnd = asserted
19 Self-test Squelch disable NA Gnd = asserted
25 DME hold Not used NA Gnd = asserted
40 Not used Push to talk NA Gnd = talk is asserted

(-002 only) (used for a keying plug on the CAD-62)
49 NA NA Freq common Gnd
30 NA NA CAD In 1A NA
14 NA NA CAD In 1B NA
45 NA NA Shield gnd Gnd
29 NA NA CAD Out 1A NA
13 NA NA CAD Out 1B NA

installation CAD-31
PIN NAV/DME VHF COMM COMMON PROTOCOL

FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION
(-001)
31 NA NA Source ident Pin 31 Description
Open #1
Gnd #2
(-002)
42 NA NA Source ident Pin 31 Pin 42 Description
(-002 only) Open Open #1
Gnd Open #2
Gnd Gnd #3 or DME
remote only
Open Gnd DME preset or
remote
(-001)
15 NA NA VHF mode select Pin 15 Mode
Open NAV/DME
Gnd VHF COMM
(-002)
32 NA NA DME mode select Pin 15 Pin 32 Mode
(-002 only) Open Open NAV DME
Gnd Open VHF COMM
Open Gnd DME
Gnd Gnd Not used
33 NA NA Not used Open (used for a keying plug on the CAD-62)
17 NA NA +28 V dc power #1 +20.5 to +32.2 V dc and/or power #2
50 NA NA +28 V dc power #2 +20.5 to +32.2 V dc and/or power #1
38 NA NA Power gnd Gnd
41 NA NA Keying plug Open (pin removed)
43 NA NA +5 V monitor +5 V dc
35 NA NA Not used Open
16 NA NA Not used Open - spare +4 V dc, 10 mA output
18 NA NA Not used Open - spare output
44 NA NA Not used Open - spare connector pin

installation CAD-31
Figure 2-1. CAD-31 Control Adapter, CPN 622-8332-001, Outline


installation CAD-31
Figure 2-2. CAD-31 Control Adapter, Connector Pin Orientation Diagram

installation CAD-31
Figure 2-3. CAD-31 Control Adapter, DME-42 Distance Measuring

Equipment, and Litton Inertial Navigation System, Partial

installation CAD-31
Figure 2-4. CAD-31 Control Adapter, CTL-22 Control, and VHF-20A/20B Communications Transceiver System,
Partial Interconnect Diagram

ADDENDUM 25
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

CAD-31 installation section (523-0774357-004118) in Part A of this manual.
This addendum sheet adds the following note to figure 2-5:
NOTE 5. WHEN INSTALLING DUAL CTL-32’s, DUAL CAD-31’s, AND

DUAL VIR-30/31’s, DO NOT CROSS-CONNECT THE SERIAL
DATA LINES BETWEEN PINS a,Z AND M,N ON THE CTL’s.
Addendum 25
28 Apr 1999 Sheet 1 of 2
523-0772719-0R711A (Facing Page 2-9)
installation CAD-31
Figure 2-5. CAD-31 Control Adapter, CTL-32 Control,

and VIR-30/31 Navigation Receiver System,

installation CAD-31
Figure 2-6. CAD-31 Control Adapter, CTL-32 Control, VIR-30/31 Navigation Receiver, and DME-40 Distance Measuring Equipment
System, Partial Interconnect Diagram

ADDENDUM 25
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

CAD-31 installation section (523-0774357-004118) in Part A of this manual.
This addendum sheet adds the following note to figure 2-6:
NOTE 6. WHEN INSTALLING DUAL CTL-32’s, DUAL CAD-31’s, AND DUAL

VIR-30/31’s, DO NOT CROSS-CONNECT THE SERIAL DATA
LINES BETWEEN PINS a,Z AND M,N ON THE CTL’s.
Addendum 25
523-0772719-0R711A (Facing Page 2-10)
installation CAD-31
Figure 2-7. CAD-31 Control Adapter, Dual RTU-42X0 Radio

Tuning Unit, And VHF-20A/20B Communications
Transceiver System, Partial Interconnect Diagram

installation CAD-31
Figure 2-8. Dual CAD-31 Control Adapter, Dual RTU-42X0 Radio Tuning Unit, DME-40 Distance Measuring Equipment, and
VIR-30/31 Navigation Receiver System, Partial Interconnect Diagram

installation CAD-31
Figure 2-9. CAD-31 Control Adapter With Two Navigation Receivers and One DME, DME Transfer Switch,

installation CAD-31
Figure 2-10 (Sheet 1 of 2). CAD-31 Control Adapter With CTL-22( )

or CTL-32( ) Control and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

installation CAD-31
Figure 2-10 (Sheet 2). CAD-31 Control Adapter With CTL-22( ) or CTL-32( ) Control and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

installation CAD-31
Figure 2-11. CAD-31 Control Adapter Input/Output

Circuit Diagram

þ 523-0772675-006118

Collins
CAD-62
Control Adapter
Installation
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page

2.3 SPECIAL PRELIMINARY INSTRUCTIONS ........................................................................................................2-1
2.4.1 General............................................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.5 CAD-62 CONTROL ADAPTER INSTALLATION .................................................................................................2-1
2.6 DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY .........................................................................................................................................2-4
NOTICE: This section replaces fifth edition dated 2 December 1991 and all revisions.
Page No Issue
* Title ...........................................11 Apr 97

* 2-1 thru 2-7 ...............................11 Apr 97
* 2-8 Blank...................................11 Apr 97
* 2-9 thru 2-10 .............................11 Apr 97


1 29 Sep 92 None
2 15 Sep 95 None

section II
installation
2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING Table 2-1. Materials Required for CAD-62 Installation.
EQUIPMENT
COLLINS
DESCRIPTION QTY
Unpack equipment carefully and make a careful PART NUMBER
visual inspection of the unit for possible shipping Mount, control adapter 653-9015-001 1
damage. All claims for damage should be filed with
the transportation company involved. If claims for Connector kit 653-9014-002 1
damage are to be filed, save the original shipping Includes the following:
container and materials. If no damage can be de- Connector 371-0213-050 1
tected, replace packing materials in the shipping (DDMA-50SF00000)
container and save for future use (such as storage Connector hood 371-0399-280 1
or reshipment). (MD50-000-J-VL-464.5)
2.2 PREINSTALLATION CHECK Contacts 371-0213-110 *50

Keying plug 629-8339-001 2
Perform the final performance test (customer ac-
ceptance test) in the maintenance section of the *Quantity required for typical installation
CAD-31/62 instruction book (repair manual) 523-
0773216 if verification of unit to specifications is 2.4.2 Connector Contact Assembly and
required or connect unit in a system mockup to Installation
verify proper operation.
The CAD-62 uses a 50-pin D-subminiature mating
2.3 SPECIAL PRELIMINARY connector. Refer to the D-subminiature contact as-
INSTRUCTIONS sembly and installation instructions in the General
Information and Mount Information section (Part
Proper and careful planning of any installation is
A, Pro Line II installation manual).
nance. Follow the guidelines in the General System
2.5 CAD-62 CONTROL ADAPTER
and Mount Information section for points to con-
INSTALLATION
sider in planning an installation. For information
on wiring, bonding, or general installation informa-
To minimize wire length, the CAD-62 should be
tion refer to the Installation Practices Manual
mounted in the radio equipment rack adjacent to
(CPN 523-0775254).
the ADF-60 ADF receiver or TDR-90 transponder.
2.3.1 Mount and Connector Selection The CAD-62 has its own mount included with each
unit. This single mount allows the CAD-62 to be
Refer to Table 2-1 for a list of the materials re- mounted either vertically or horizontally. Two units
quired for installation of the CAD-62. can be mounted end to end in approximately the
same length as an ADF-60 or TDR-90. Refer to
2.4 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS
Figure 2-5 for the CAD-62 outline and mounting
2.4.1 General diagram. Install the mount for the CAD-62 using
the dimensions shown on Figure 2-5. After the
Follow the cabling instructions in the General Sys- mount has been installed and the interconnect ca-
tem and Mount Information section (Part A, Pro ble verified, tighten the Phillips-head screw on the
Line II installation manual). Table 2-2 contains a front of the mount. Ensure that polarizing key
list of connector pin functions for the CAD-62. plugs (CPN 629-8339-001) have been inserted in

installation CAD-62
positions 33 and 40 on the mating connector. Install Figure 2-1 is the connector pin orientation diagram
the mating connector on the front of the CAD-62 for the CAD-62 control adapter. Table 2-2 is a list of
and secure with the latch. the connector pin functions for the CAD-62 control
adapter. Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-4 are overview
One CAD-62 is required for tuning each ADF-60( ) diagrams for the ADF and TDR systems.
receiver with a CTL-62, RTU-42X0, or equivalent
control. One CAD-62 is required for tuning single or Figure 2-2 shows a partial interconnect diagram of
dual TDR-90’s from a single CTL-92, RTU-42X0, or the CAD-62 (-002) with RTU-42X0 Radio Tuning
equivalent control. If other equipment is to be sup- Unit.
plied with the data available from the CAD-62, ex-
ternal load limiting facilities must be provided.
Figure 2-1. CAD-62 Control Adapter, Connector Pin Orientation Diagram

installation CAD-62
ADF COMMON
PIN TDR FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION PROTOCOL
21 ATC code (A-A4) Not used NA Gnd = asserted
23 ATC code (A-B4) 0.5 kHz NA Gnd = asserted
24 ATC code (A-B2) Not used NA Gnd = asserted
25 ATC code (A-B1) Not used NA Gnd = asserted
6 ATC code (A-C4) 1 kHz NA Gnd = asserted
36 ATC code (A-D4) 10 kHz NA Gnd = asserted
8 ALT Code (C-A4) 100 kHz NA Gnd = asserted
7 ALT code (C-A2) 200 kHz NA Gnd = asserted
10 ALT code (C-A1) 400 kHz NA Gnd = asserted
27 ALT code (C-B4) 1 MHz NA Gnd = asserted
11 ALT code (C-B2) Not used NA Gnd = asserted
12 ALT code (C-B1) Not used NA Gnd = asserted
4 ALT code (C-C4) 8 kHz NA Gnd = asserted
28 ALT code (C-D4) Not used NA Gnd = asserted
37 ALT reporting BFO mode NA Gnd = asserted
19 Not used ADF/antenna mode NA Gnd = antenna
1 Self-test Self-test NA Gnd = asserted
22 Unit #1 on Not used NA Gnd = asserted
26 Unit #2 on Not used NA Gnd = asserted
15 Reply lamp Lock monitor NA Gnd = reply

+4 to +30 V dc = lock
49 Code/ALT common Freq common NA Gnd
16 Ident Not used NA +4 V dc, 10 mA = ID

Open = no ID
31 Not used Unit #1/#2 select NA Open = unit #1

Gnd = unit #2
14 NA NA CAD In 1B NA
30 NA NA CAD In 1A NA

installation CAD-62
ADF COMMON
PIN TDR FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION PROTOCOL
13 NA NA CAD Out 1B NA
29 NA NA CAD Out 1A NA
17 NA NA +28 V dc power #1 +20.5 to +32.2 V dc and/or power

#2
50 NA NA +28 V dc power #2 +20.5 to +32.2 V dc and/or power

#1
32 (-002 only) NA NA TDR mode select Pin 32 Pin 42 Mode

Gnd Gnd Invalid
Gnd Open TDR mode
42 (-002 only) NA NA ADF mode select Open Gnd ADF mode
Open Open Mode
based on
serial
input
35 NA NA Spare output Open
43 NA NA +5 V monitor +5 V dc
40 NA NA Keying plug/spare input Open (pin removed)
41 NA NA Not used Open (used for a keying plug on the

CAD-31)
46 NA NA Not used Open (used for a keying plug on the

CAD-31)
44 NA NA Spare Open
2.6 DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY fault. An out-of-tolerance condition may exist that

is caused by an atypical situation. The codes are a
tool, designed to display conditions internal within
Caution the applicable units.
The diagnostic routines are intended as an
extension of the self-test capability. The 2.7 POSTINSTALLATION TEST
pilot should first observe any associated
flag indications for proper self-test re- Press the test button on the control of the system
sponse. If an improper response is ob- the CAD-62 is installed (CTL-62 on ADF system;
served, then the cause may be verified in CTL-92 on TDR system). Check diagnostic code on
more detail using the diagnostics. control. If no fault is detected, code 00 will be dis-
played. If a code other than 00 is displayed, check
A list of the diagnostic codes for the CAD-62 and, CAD-62, installation wiring, or associated units.
depending on installation, either an ADF-60 or a Figure 2-6 is an input/output diagram of the CAD-
TDR-90 can be found in the maintenance section 62 internal circuits. The I/O diagram may be a
of this manual. Note that the presence of a diag- useful aid in troubleshooting the CAD-62 installa-
nostic (or flag) code does not necessarily indicate a tion.

installation CAD-62
Figure 2-2. Dual CAD-62 Control Adapter, Dual RTU-42X0 Radio

Tuning Unit, ADF-60 ADF Receiver, and TDR-90 Transponder,

installation CAD-62
Figure 2-3. Dual ADF-60 System, Interconnect Overview and Cable Identification Diagram

installation CAD-62
Figure 2-4. Transponder System, Interconnect Overview and Cable Identification Diagram

installation CAD-62
Figure 2-5. CAD-62 Control Adapter With Mount, Outline and

Mounting Dimensions

installation CAD-62
Figure 2-6. CAD-62 Control Adapter Input/Output Circuit Diagram

þ 523-0774290-005118

Collins
CAD-870
Transponder Control
Adapter
Installation
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page

2.5 CAD-870 TRANSPONDER CONTROL ADAPTER AND MOUNT INSTALLATION ........................................2-2
2.5.1 Control Adapter Mount Installation..............................................................................................................................2-2
2.5.2 CAD-870 Transponder Control Adapter Installation ...................................................................................................2-2
2.5.2.1 CAD-870 Transponder Control Adapter Strapping Options .....................................................................................2-2
2.7 DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ..............................................................................................................................2-2
NOTICE: This section replaces fourth edition dated 12 May 1994 and revision.
Page No Issue
* Title ........................................... 8 May 80

* List of Effective Pages .............. 8 May 80


section II
installation
2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING 2.3 SPECIAL PRELIMINARY

EQUIPMENT INSTRUCTIONS
Unpack equipment carefully and make a careful Proper and careful planning of any installation is
visual inspection of the unit for possible shipping essential for reliable performance and easy mainte-
damage. All claims for damage should be filed with nance. Follow the guidelines in the General System
the transportation company involved. If claims for and Mount Information section for points to con-
damage are to be filed, save the original shipping sider in planning an installation. For information
container and materials. If no damage can be de- on wiring, bonding, or general installation informa-
tected, replace packing materials in the shipping tion, refer to the Installation Practices Manual
container and save for future use (such as storage (CPN 523-0775254).
or reshipment).
2.3.1 Mount and Connector Selection
Refer to Table 2-1 for a listing of the mount and
Perform the final performance test (customer ac- connector required for use with the equipment.
ceptance test) in the maintenance section of this
publication to determine that the equipment is op-
erating correctly before installation.
Table 2-1. CAD-870 Transponder Control Adapter Mating Connector Requirements.
COLLINS
DESCRIPTION QTY
PART NUMBER
Mount, control adapter 653-9015-002 1

Includes the following:
Connector (DDMA-50SF00000) 371-0213-050 1
Connector hood (MD50-000-J-VL-464.5) 371-0399-280 1
Contacts 371-0213-110 *48
Keying plug 629-8339-001 2
2.4 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS Follow the interconnect cabling instructions in the

General Information and Mount Information sec-
The CAD-870 requires a 50-pin D-subminiature tion (Part A, Pro Line II installation manual).
mating connector, to be attached to the front of the Figure 2-1 contains a list of the mating connector
unit. pin functions for the CAD-870.

installation CAD-870
Refer to Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3 for single and adapter to properly identify serial data input faults.
dual CAD-870 interconnect wiring diagrams re- An open circuit at P1-7 identifies the dual tran-
spectively. sponder system; grounding P1-7 identifies single
transponder systems.
2.5 CAD-870 TRANSPONDER CONTROL
ADAPTER AND MOUNT INSTALLATION 2.6 POSTINSTALLATION TEST
To minimize wire length, the CAD-870 should be The postinstallation checkout of the CAD-870 con-
mounted in the radio equipment rack adjacent to sists of using the ARINC 429 ATC control source to
the TDR-90 transponder. tune the TDR-90 transponder. If the aircraft is
equipped with dual ATC controls and CAD-870’s,
2.5.1 Control Adapter Mount Installation
set the ATC control DISABLE switch to the no 2
a. Refer to the CAD-870 outline and mounting position so that the no 1 CAD-870 can be checked
dimensions diagram, Figure 2-4, to determine first. A transponder ramp tester is required for the
the mounting hole requirements. following tests.
b. Carefully determine the mounting hole loca-
tions and drill the required holes. a. If necessary, select no 1 position on ATC 1/2
c. Position the control adapter mount over the select switch.
mounting holes and secure with four #6 wash- b. Turn on ATC control and set code to 1200. Ver-
ers, nuts, and screws of the appropriate length ify on ramp tester that mode A output code is
for the installation. 1200 and reply annunciator is lit.
c. Press ident button and verify ident on ramp
2.5.2 CAD-870 Transponder Control Adapter
tester. Ident timeout is approximately 25 sec-
Installation
onds.
a. Slide the transponder adapter onto the mount, d. Repeat steps a through c for no 2 transponder.
ensuring that the lip at the rear of the tran-
sponder adapter is under the raised angle at 2.7 DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
the rear of the mount.
b. Ensure that the latching bar at the front of the
mount is over the lip at the front of the Caution
transponder adapter. Tighten the Phillips-head
screw until the transponder adapter is secured The diagnostic routines are intended as an
to the mount. extension of the self-test capability. The pi-
c. Install the mating connector to the connector on lot should first observe any associated flag
the front of the transponder adapter and secure indications for proper self-test response. If
the latch. an improper response is observed, then the
cause may be verified in more detail using
2.5.2.1 CAD-870 Transponder Control Adapter the diagnostics.
Strapping Options
ATC information and altitude data can be supplied A list of the diagnostic codes for the CAD-870 and
through two serial ports in ARINC 429 continuous the TDR-90 transponder can be found in the main-
format: port A (P1-22/42) and port B (P1-26/39). In- tenance section of this manual. Note that the pres-
put Select P1-43 determines which port (A or B) is ence of a diagnostic (or flag) code does not neces-
active. Grounding P1-43 enables port A; opening sarily indicate a fault. An out-of-tolerance condition
the input to P1-43 enables port B. may exist that is caused by an atypical situation.
SDI (Source/Destination Identifier) strap P1-23 de- The codes are a tool designed to display conditions
termines if the unit is to be identified with the no 1 internal to the applicable units. Refer to Figure 2-5
or no 2 side. An open circuit at P1-23 enables the for an input/output circuit diagram for the CAD-
CAD-870 to receive and process data for the no 1 870. This diagram may be useful in troubleshooting
side transponder; grounding P1-23 selects no 2 side interconnect problems.
data.
(Table 2-2 deleted)
Installation strap P1-7 identifies the system con-
figuration for the transponder adapter. The con-
figuration must be known for the transponder

Figure 2-1. CAD-870 Transponder Control Adapter, Mating Connector Pin Assignments

Figure 2-2. CAD-870 Transponder Control Adapter, Single

Installation Interconnect Wiring Diagram

Figure 2-3. CAD-870 Transponder Control Adapter, Dual Installation Interconnect Wiring Diagram

Figure 2-4. CAD-870 Transponder Control Adapter,

Outline and Mounting Diagram

Figure 2-5. CAD-870 Transponder Control Adapter, Input/Output Circuit Diagram

þ 523-0774236-005118

Collins
CAD-870G
Transponder Control
Adapter
Installation
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page

2.3 SPECIAL PRELIMINARY INSTRUCTIONS .......................................................................................................2-1
2.5 CAD-870G TRANSPONDER CONTROL ADAPTER AND MOUNT INSTALLATION......................................2-6
2.5.1 UMT-10 Mount Installation...........................................................................................................................................2-6
2.5.2 CAD-870G Transponder Control Adapter Installation.................................................................................................2-6
2.5.2.1 CAD-870G Transponder Control Adapter Strapping Options...................................................................................2-6
2.7 DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ..............................................................................................................................2-7
NOTICE: This section replaces fourth edition dated 12 May 1994 and revision.
Page No Issue
* Title ...........................................11 Apr 97

* 2-1 thru 2-7 ...............................11 Apr 97
* 2-8 Blank...................................11 Apr 97
* 2-9 thru 2-12 .............................11 Apr 97


1st Ed 22 Aug 87 None
2nd Ed 21 Jul 89 SB 1
1 29 Sep 92 None
1 15 Sep 95 None

section II
installation
2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING System and Mount Information section for points to
EQUIPMENT consider in planning an installation. For informa-
tion on wiring, bonding, or general installation in-
Unpack equipment carefully and make a careful formation, refer to the Installation Practices Man-
visual inspection of the unit for possible shipping ual (CPN 523-0775254).
the transportation company involved. If claims for 2.3.1 Mount and Connector Selection
damage are to be filed, save the original shipping
container and materials. If no damage can be de- Refer to Table 2-1 for a listing of the mounts and
tected, replace packing materials in the shipping connectors required for use with the equipment.
or reshipment).
The CAD-870G requires a 50-pin D-subminiature
mating connector, to be attached to the front of the
Note unit. Follow the interconnect cabling instructions
and the D-subminiature assembly instructions in
The information and instructions provided the General System and Mount Information sec-
in this section are Collins General Aviation tion, (Part A, Pro Line II installation manual).
Division recommendations and do not nec- Figure 2-1 (sheet 1) and Table 2-3 contain a list of
essarily correspond with any actual aircraft the 50-pin D-subminiature mating connector pin
installation and wiring. This section cannot functions for the CAD-870G.
be used in place of a Supplemental Type
Certificate (STC), Type Certificate (TC), or
aircraft manuals. The CAD-870G also requires a 60-pin Thinline II
mating connector, to be attached to the rear of the
Perform the final performance test (customer ac- unit. Crimping, insertion, and extracting instruc-
ceptance test) in the maintenance section of the tions for the Thinline II connector are provided in
CAD-870G instruction book (repair manual) if veri- the General System and Mount Information sec-
fication of the unit to specifications is required or tion, (Part A, Pro Line II installation manual).
connect the unit in a system mockup to verify Figure 2-1 (sheet 2) and Table 2-3 contain a list of
proper operation. the Thinline II mating connector pin functions for
the CAD-870G.
2.3 SPECIAL PRELIMINARY
INSTRUCTIONS Refer to Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3 for single and
dual CAD-870G interconnect wiring diagrams re-
Proper and careful planning of any installation is spectively. Refer to Figure 2-5 for detailed circuit
essential for reliable performance and easy mainte- information for the CAD-870G system interface in-
nance. Follow the guidelines in the General put/output circuits.

installation CAD-870G
Table 2-1. CAD-870G Transponder Control Adapter Mating Connector Requirements.
DESCRIPTION COLLINS QTY

PART NUMBER
UMT-10 Mount 622-5210-001 1

*Installation kit 634-4192-015 1
UMT-10 Mount 622-5210-001 1

with
Crimp contacts
up to 0.050 in insulation diameter 372-2514-110 **26
or
0.050 to 0.080 in insulation diameter 372-2514-180 **26
Connector (DDMA-50S-FO) 371-0213-050 1
Locking mechanism 370-2297-000 1
Contacts 371-0213-110 **36
KIT COLLINS
PART NUMBER COMPONENT DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER QTY
634-4192-015 Thinline II 60 connector 634-1112-001 1

Screw, 4-40 × 0.38, cap-hex drive 324-2604-000 2
Keyway 634-1116-001 2
Contact, crimp up to 0.050 in insulation dia 372-2514-110 26
Connector (DDMA-50S-FO), sub D 371-0213-050 1
Locking mechanism 370-2297-000 1
Contacts 371-0213-110 36

Screw, 4-40 × 0.38, cap-hex drive 324-2604-000 2
Keyway 634-1116-001 2

Figure 2-1 (Sheet 1 of 2). CAD-870G Transponder Control Adapter (P2), Connector Pin Assignments

Figure 2-1 (Sheet 2). CAD-870G Transponder Control Adapter (P1), Connector Pin Assignments

Table 2-3. CAD-870G Transponder Control Adapter, Connector Pin Functions.
CONN CONN
PIN NO FUNCTION/TITLE PIN NO FUNCTION/TITLE
REAR CONNECTOR P1
1 ATC serial input port B-A 31 Not used

2 ATC serial input port B-B 32 Not used
3 On/standby xfeed-in 33 Not used
4 ATC port A/B select 34 Not used
5 ATC serial input port A-A 35 Not used
6 ATC serial input port A-B 36 Not used
7 *Alt port select 37 Not used
8 Burst tune enable 38 Not used
9 ATC serial input port C-A 39 Not used
10 ATC serial input port C-B 40 Not used
11 *Alt port SDI echo sel 41 Not used
12 SDI (CAD 1/2) 42 Not used
13 Suppression shield 43 Not used
14 Suppression in/out 44 Not used
15 On/standby xfeed-out 45 Not used
16 Ident echo 46 Not used
17 Alt serial input B-A 47 Not used
18 Alt serial input B-B 48 Not used
19 Not used 49 Not used
21 Alt serial input A-A 51 Not used
22 Alt serial input A-B 52 Not used
24 Test (output) 54 Not used
25 Serial out A-A 55 Not used
26 Serial out A-B 56 Not used
28 Fault monitor 58 Standby power (keep-alive)
29 Serial out B-A 59 Power ground
30 Serial out B-B 60 +28 V dc power in
FRONT CONNECTOR P2
1 Self-test 26 Not used

2 Mode A code – A1 27 Mode C code – B4
3 Mode A code – D2 28 Mode C code – D4
4 Mode C code – C4 29 Not used
5 Mode A code – C1 30 Suppression in/out
6 Mode A code – C4 31 Suppression shield
7 Mode C code – A2 32 Not used
9 Mode C code – C1 34 Mode C code – C2
11 Mode C code – B2 36 Mode A code – D4
12 Mode C code – B1 37 Alt rep on/off
13 Spare 38 Power ground
14 Spare 39 Mode A code – C2
15 Transponder reply 40 Not used
16 Ident 41 Not used
17 +28 V dc power out 42 Not used
18 Mode A code – D1 43 Not used
20 Mode A code – A2 45 Not used
21 Mode A code – A4 46 Not used
22 On/standby 47 Not used
23 Mode A code – B4 48 Not used
24 Mode A code – B2 49 Alt/ATC common
25 Mode A code – B1 50 Not used
*These pin functions are available only in CAD-870G CPN 622-7695-001 units with SB 1 installed and in the
CPN 622-7695-002 units.

2.5 CAD-870G TRANSPONDER CONTROL e. Install the mating connector to connector P2 on

ADAPTER AND MOUNT the front of the CAD-870G and secure the latch.
INSTALLATION
2.5.2.1 CAD-870G Transponder Control
To minimize wire length, the CAD-870G should be Adapter Strapping Options
mounted in the radio equipment rack adjacent to
the TDR-90 transponder. ATC information can be supplied to the CAD-870G
through the following three serial ports in either
2.5.1 UMT-10 Mount Installation ARINC 429 continuous or burst format:
ATC port A (P1-5/6)

Note ATC port B (P1-1/2)
ATC port C (P1-9/10)
Assembly instructions and additional in-
formation for the UMT-10 are contained in Altitude data is supplied through the following two
the Collins UMT- ( ) Mount and Thinline II serial ports in ARINC 429 continuous format:
Connectors Instruction Book, CPN 523-
0772277. Alt port A (P1-21/22)
Alt port B (P1-17/18)
a. Refer to the CAD-870G outline and mounting
dimensions diagram (Figure 2-4) to ensure ade- SDI (Source/Destination Identifier) strap P1-12 de-
quate vertical clearance for the CAD-870G and termines if the unit is to be identified with the no 1
UMT-10. Refer to the UMT-10 outline and or no 2 side. An open circuit at P1-12 enables the
mounting dimensions diagrams to determine CAD-870G to receive and process data for the no 1
the mounting hole requirements. Refer to the side transponders; grounding P1-12 selects no 2
General System and Mount Information section side data.
in the Pro Line II manual for outline and
mounting dimensions. Straps affecting ATC information ports are Burst
b. Carefully determine the mounting hole loca- Tune Enable P1-8 and ATC Port Select P1-4. ATC
tions and drill the required holes. Port Select P1-4 is dependent on Burst Tune En-
c. Position the mount over mounting holes and se- able strap P1-8. Refer to step a for continuous for-
cure with required hardware. mat and step b for burst format.
d. Position the CAD-870G rear interconnecting
cable (with mating connector installed) into the a. For ARINC 429 continuous format, Burst Tune
rear of the mount and secure with required Enable P1-8 must be open. ATC Port Select P1-
hardware. 4 determines which port (A or B) is active (port
C is not used with the continuous format).
2.5.2 CAD-870G Transponder Control Grounding P1-4 enables port A; opening the in-
Adapter Installation put to P1-4 enables port B.
b. For ARINC 429 burst format, Burst Tune En-
able P1-8 must be grounded. ATC Port Select
a. After the mount has been installed and the in- P1-4 is disabled. Burst information is read from
terconnect cable verified, tighten the Phillips- ports A, B, and C. If information in ARINC 429
head screw on the front of the mount. continuous format is supplied to port B, all data
b. Ensure that polarizing key plugs have been in- on ports A and C are ignored and only the con-
serted in the proper positions on the mating tinuous information on port B is used.
connectors.
c. Slide the CAD-870G into the mount until unit CAD-870G CPN 622-7695-001 units without SB 1
connector P1 and the mating connector are have no altitude data strapping options. Altitude
fully engaged. port select is determined by the ATC word (label
d. Position the knurled knob on the front of the 031, bit 14: if 0 – port A is selected, if 1 – port B is
mount to engage the holddown on the CAD- selected).
870G and tighten the knurled knob until the
CAD-870G is secured to the mount.

CAD-870G CPN 622-7695-001 units with SB 1 and CAD-870G’s, set the ATC control DISABLE switch
CPN 622-7695-002 units have two altitude data to the no 2 position so that the no 1 CAD-870G can
strapping options, Alt Port Select P1-7 and Alt Port be checked first. A transponder ramp tester is re-
SDI Echo Select P1-11. quired for the following tests.
Grounding Alt Port Select input P1-7 (or if bit 14 of
a. If necessary, select 1 position on ATC 1/2 select
the received ARINC 429 ATC word is logic 1)
switch.
makes the CAD-870G use cross-side (port A) alti-
b. Turn on ATC control and set code to 1200. Ver-
tude data and stay at port A, regardless of the
ify on ramp tester that mode A output code is
status of the altitude data received at port A.
1200 and reply annunciator is lit.
Opening the input to P1-7 makes the CAD-870G
c. Press ident button and verify ident on ramp
use on-side (port B) altitude data. However, if the
tester. Ident timeout is approximately 25 sec-
port B data changes to an unusable state (for ex-
onds.
ample, wrong SDI no input), the CAD-870G will
d. On ATC control, set ALT mode to on (mode C).
switch to port A as the altitude source. This pin has
Verify that altitude readout on ramp tester is
no effect on unit operation if the unit is in burst
approximately the same as airport altitude.
mode.
e. If a second altitude source is selectable on
Grounding Alt Port SDI Echo Select input P1-11 transponder, select second source and verify al-
(alt SDI echo on) makes the CAD-870G echo the titude readout on ramp tester.
SDI in the transmitted ARINC 203 altitude word, f. Repeat steps a through e for the no 2 trans-
ignoring the Unit Ident Sel (SDI discrete P1-12). ponder.
Opening P1-11 (off) makes the CAD-870G echo the
“all call” SDI (SDI-0) whenever the SDI in the re- 2.7 DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
ceived ARINC 203 altitude word does not match
the Unit Ident Sel discrete. In either case, if the
SDI in the received ARINC 203 altitude word Caution
matches the Unit Ident Sel discrete, the UUT will
echo the matching SDI. The diagnostic routines are intended as an
extension of the self-test capability. The
The altitude reversionary feature of the CAD-870G pilot should first observe any associated
is only active when the “ALT SDI ECHO SELECT” flag indications for proper self-test re-
discrete is grounded. The CAD-870G will automati- sponse. If an improper response is observed,
cally switch to the cross-side altitude port (port A) then the cause may be verified in more de-
whenever the on-side altitude data is invalid. When tail using the diagnostics.
using cross-side altitude, the CAD-870G will set bit
14 of the ATC output word to indicate the cross-side A list of the diagnostic codes for the CAD-870G
altitude is being used. If valid altitude data subse- (CPN 622-7695-001 without SB 1) and the TDR-90
quently returns to the on-side altitude port (port transponder can be found in the maintenance sec-
B), then the CAD-870G will switch back to the on- tion of this manual. A list of the diagnostic codes for
side altitude port and bit 14 of the ATC output the CAD-870G (CPN 622-7695-001 with SB 1 and
word will be set back to zero. Invalid is intended to –002) and the TDR-90 can be found in the mainte-
mean that the data has an SSM of NCD or FAIL, or nance section of this manual. Note that the pres-
the data is absent from the input bus. ence of a diagnostic (or flag) code does not neces-
2.6 POSTINSTALLATION TEST sarily indicate a fault. An out-of-tolerance condition
may exist that is caused by an atypical situation.
The postinstallation checkout of the CAD-870G The codes are a tool designed to display conditions
consists of using the ARINC 429 ATC control internal to the applicable units.
source to tune the TDR-90 transponder and, if in-
stalled, an ARINC-bused barometric altitude source Refer to Figure 2-5 for an internal input/output cir-
to verify the aircraft altitude at the airport. If the cuit diagram for the CAD-870G. This diagram may
aircraft is equipped with dual ATC controls and be useful in troubleshooting interconnect problems.

Figure 2-2. Single CAD-870G Transponder Control Adapter,

Interconnect Wiring Diagram

Figure 2-3. Dual CAD-870G Transponder Control Adapter, Interconnect Wiring Diagram

ADDENDUM 6
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

CAD-870G installation section (523-0774236-005118) in Part A of this manual.
This addendum replaces Figure 2-3 on page 2-10 with revised illustration below.
Addendum 6
523-0772719-06711A (Facing Page 2-10)
Figure 2-4. CAD-870G Transponder Control Adapter, Outline and

Mounting Diagram

Figure 2-5. CAD-870G Transponder Control Adapter, Input/Output Circuit Diagram

þ 523-0772496-008118

Collins
CTL-X2/X2A/23
Controls
Installation
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page

2.4 CABLING AND CONNECTOR CONTACT ASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ..........................2-2
2.5 CTL-22/23/32/62/92/22A/32A/62A/92A CONTROLS, INSTALLATION ................................................................2-2
NOTICE: This section replaces seventh edition dated 12 May 1994 and revision.
Page No Issue
* Title ...........................................11 Apr 97

* 2-1 thru 2-23 .............................11 Apr 97
* 2-24 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-25 thru 2-29 Added ................11 Apr 97
* 2-30 Blank Added......................11 Apr 97
* 2-31 thru 2-32 Added ................11 Apr 97


1 29 Sep 92 None
1 15 Sep 95 None

ADDENDUM 9
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

CTL-X2/X2A/23 Controls installation section (523-0772496-008118) in Part A of this manual.
This addendum sheet adds a note following the text in paragraph 2.3. In Table 2-1 reference has been added for
CTL-22C, note 2 has been revised, and note 3 has been deleted. Replace Table 2-1 with table below.
Note
The CTL-22C and CTL-23C essentially have the same installation requirements as the CTL-22/22A and
CTL-23 respectively. Important distinctions are noted in this section where applicable.
Table 2-1. Mating Connector List and Mounting Hardware
EQUIPMENT CRIMP CONTACTS CRIMP CONTACTS

SOLDER CUP CONTACTS
TYPE NO NO STRAIN RELIEF W/STRAIN RELIEF
MS TYPE COLLINS PN MS TYPE COLLINS PN MS TYPE COLLINS PN

CTL-22/22A/22C MS3116E20-41SW 371-6108-000 MS3126E20-41SW 359-0305-570 MS3126F20-41SW 359-0301-560
CTL-32/32A/23 MS3116E20-41S 371-6107-000 MS3126E20-41S 359-0305-560 MS3126F20-41S 359-0301-550
CTL-62/62A MS3116E20-41SX 371-6109-000 MS3126E20-41SX 359-0305-580 MS3126F20-41SX 359-0301-570
CTL-92/92A MS3116E20-41SY 371-6110-000 MS3126E20-41SY 359-0305-590 MS3126F20-41SY 359-0301-580
NOTES: 1. Mating connectors are the quick disconnect circular type with contacts.
2. Dzus panel adapter plates:
Part number Description

634-3569-001 2.984" H with dual CTL-X2( ) cut-out, black
634-3569-002 2.984" H with dual CTL-X2( ) cut-out, gray
634-2971-001 2.984" H with single CTL-X2( ) cut-out, black

634-2971-002 2.984" H with single CTL-X2( ) cut-out, gray


Addendum 9
523-0772719-09711A (Facing Page 2-1)
ADDENDUM 20
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

CTL-X2/X2A/23 installation section (523-0772496-008118) in Part A of this manual.
This addendum sheet completely replaces addendum 9, sheet 1.
This addendum sheet adds a note following the text in paragraph 2.3. In Table 2-1 reference has been added for
CTL-22C/23C, note 2 has been revised, and note 3 has been deleted. Replace Table 2-1 with table below.
Revised and added text is bolded.
Note
The CTL-22C and CTL-23C essentially have the same installation requirements as the
CTL-22/22A and CTL-23 respectively. Important distinctions are noted in this section
where applicable.
EQUIPMENT SOLDER CUP CONTACTS CRIMP CONTACTS CRIMP CONTACTS

CTL-22/22A/22C MS3116E20-41SW 371-6108-000 MS3126E20-41SW 359-0305-570 MS3126F20-41SW 359-0301-560
CTL-32/32A/23/23C MS3116E20-41S 371-6107-000 MS3126E20-41S 359-0305-560 MS3126F20-41S 359-0301-550
2. Dzus panel adapter plates:
Part number Description




Addendum 20
523-0772719-0L711A (Facing Page 2-1)
section II
installation
2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING 2.3 SPECIAL PRELIMINARY

EQUIPMENT INSTRUCTIONS
Unpack equipment carefully and make a careful

visual inspection of the unit for possible shipping Proper and careful planning of any installation is
damage. All claims for damage should be filed with essential for reliable performance and easy mainte-
the transportation company involved. If claims for nance. Follow the guidelines in the General System
damage are to be filed, save the original shipping and Mount Information section for points to con-
container and materials. If no damage can be de- sider in planning an installation. For information
tected, replace packing materials in the shipping on wiring, bonding, or general installation informa-
container and save for future use (such as storage tion, refer to the Installation Practices Manual
or reshipment). (CPN 523-0775254).

2.3.1 Mount and Connector Selection
Perform the performance test (customer acceptance
test) in the maintenance section of the CTL-X2/X2A
instruction book (repair manual) if verification of Refer to Table 2-1 for a listing of the mounting
the unit to specifications is required or connect the hardware and connectors available for use with the
unit in a system mockup to verify proper operation. CTL-22/23/32/62/92/22A/32A/62A/92A.
EQUIPMENT CRIMP CONTACTS CRIMP CONTACTS

SOLDER CUP CONTACTS
CTL-22/22A MS3116E20-41SW 371-6108-000 MS3126E20-41SW 359-0305-570 MS3126F20-41SW 359-0301-560

CTL-32/32A/23 MS3116E20-41S 371-6107-000 MS3126E20-41S 359-0305-560 MS3126F20-41S 359-0301-550
2. Black dzus mount bracket kit for two controls (Collins PN 634-3569-001).
3. Gray dzus mount bracket kit for two controls (Collins PN 634-3569-002).

installation CTL-X2/X2A/23
2.4 CABLING AND CONNECTOR CONTACT be performed as described to ensure proper opera-
ASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION tion and performance. Any deviations from these
INSTRUCTIONS instructions may result in reduced performance
and/or damage to the equipment. The outline and
For preparation of interconnect wiring cables refer mounting dimensions are given in Figure 2-13.
tion (Part A, Pro Line II installation manual). For Warning
connector contact assembly and installation infor-
mation, refer to the section on MS type connectors In the interest of personal safety, it is rec-
in the General Information and Mount Information ommended that the aircraft battery master
section. switch be turned off to disconnect power be-
fore installing or removing equipment from
2.5 CTL-22/23/32/62/92/22A/32A/62A/92A the aircraft.
CONTROLS, INSTALLATION
a. Pull the mating connector assembly through
The interconnect wiring information for the CTL- the panel cutout hole and mate to the control.
22/32/62/92/22A/32A/62A/92A Controls is integrated b. Using a 3/32-Allen wrench, ensure that all
with the companion equipment. For example, the three (two at bottom, one at upper right) inte-
interconnect wiring for the CTL-22/22A is found on gral turnlock fastener actuating screws are
the interconnect wiring diagram for the VHF turned fully counterclockwise until the stop
COMM; the CTL-32/32A with the NAV/DME, etc. nuts are contacted.
For interconnect information on the CTL-23, refer c. Insert the control into the panel cutout hole un-
to Figure 2-11 and Figure 2-12. til flush with the panel.
d. Tighten three actuating screws with the 3/32-
Figure 2-1 through Figure 2-5 are the connector pin Allen wrench until the control is held firmly in
orientation diagrams for the five controls. Table 2-2 place.
thru Table 2-6 are lists of the pin functions for each
control. Figure 2-6 shows the lighting and dimming 2.6 POSTINSTALLATION TEST
bus connections. Figure 2-7 through Figure 2-10 are
overview diagrams for the ADF, TDR, and COMM The postinstallation test for the controls is as fol-
systems. lows:
a. Turn on aircraft avionics.
The CTL-X2’s and the CTL-X2A’s are interchange- b. Check that the installed control’s display is lit
able. The difference is in the improved sunlight and that the appropriate frequency or code is
readability of the CTL-X2A’s. A CTL-X2A is needed displayed.
only when sunlight readability is a problem with a c. Check the backlighting by turning the associ-
CTL-X2. ated aircraft dimming control to full bright.
d. Press test button on control. Check the diagnos-
The CTL-23 is normally used as backup control unit tic code. Code 00 equals no fault detected. If a
for the VHF-422( ) (COM 1) and VIR-432 (NAV 1) code other than 00 is displayed, refer to the
radios. The radios are primarily tuned by an maintenance section of this manual for addi-
ARINC 429 control. The display on the CTL-23 acts tional information.
as a repeater of the active frequency when the CTL-
23 is in standby mode. When active, (ON or SQ Refer to Figure 2-14 for an input/output diagram of
OFF), the radios switch from ARINC 429 control the internal circuits on the CTL-92/92A. This dia-
and the CTL-23 outputs CSDB control data to both gram may be useful in troubleshooting interconnect
the COM and NAV. problems.
The following procedures are to be used to install

the CTL-X2/X2A Controls. These procedures must

ADDENDUM 20
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds CTL23/23C information to paragraph 2.5.
2.5 CTL-22/23/23C/32/62/92/22A/32A/62A/92A CONTROLS, INSTALLATION
Unlike the CTL-X2/X2A family of controls, the CTL-23 does not have an auto-dimming photocell.
The CTL-23C has a discrete input, pin P1-p, which connects directly to the CPU and selects the
operation of the control. The control is designated an 8.33-kHz bandwidth control. Thus, when
P1-p is open, the control provides 8.33-kHz tuning from 118.000 through 139.992 MHz, and 25-kHz
tuning from 137.000 through 151.975 MHz. When P1-p is grounded, the control operates as a 25-
kHz control head only.
Addendum 20
523-0772719-0L711A (Facing Page 2-2)
ADDENDUM 9
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds CTL-22C installation information to paragraph 2.5. Added text appears in bold type.
2.5 CTL-22/22C/23/32/62/92/22A/32A/62A/92A CONTROLS, INSTALLATION
...A CTL-X2A is needed only when sunlight readability is a problem with a CTL-X2.
The installation requirements for CTL-22C are similar to those for the CTL-22/22A. The difference is that
the CTL-22C provides selectable 8.33 kHz tuning via a discrete input (refer to Table 2-2).
The CTL-23 is normally used as backup control unit...
Addendum 9
523-0772719-09711A (Facing Page 2-2)
Figure 2-1. CTL-22/22A COMM Control, Connector Pin Orientation Diagram
Table 2-2. CTL-22/22A COMM Control, Connector Pin Functions.
CONN P1 INTERCONNECT COMPLETE FUNCTION/TITLE CONNECTS TO

PIN NO FUNCTION/TITLE OR DESCRIPTION UNIT/SYSTEM
A 5 V lighting, H 5 V ac/dc panel lighting, high 5 V lighting source

B On/off no 1 Discrete output, on/off no 1, 0 = off As required
C On/off, no 2 Same as B
D Shield, gnd Shield ground As required
E Self-test Discrete output/input, 0 = test As required
F TR tone inhibit Strap to ground to inhibit* As desired
G Not used
H Not used
J Reserved
K Remote sel Discrete input for remote tuning, As required
0 = remote tuning selected
L Shield, gnd Shield for M/N
M CTL data out, 2B Serial data output, 2B, same as R Alternate output
N CTL data out, 2A Serial data output, 2A, same as S Alternate output
P Shield, gnd Shield for R/S
R CTL data out, 1B Serial data output, 1B VHF-21( ): J1-25
VHF-22( ): J1-39
S CTL data out, 1A Serial data output, 1A VHF-21( ): J1-23
VHF-22( ): J1-40
T Shield, gnd Shield for U/V
U CTL data in, 1B Serial data input, 1B VHF-21( ): J1-11
VHF-22( ): J1-43
V CTL data in, 1A Serial data input, 1A VHF-21( ): J1-16
VHF-22( ): J1-44
W Mem rcl, in Discrete input, memory recall External switch
0 = recall (remote RCL) Ground
X Transfer Discrete input, transfer External switch
0 = transfer (remote XFR) Ground
Y Shield, gnd Shield for Z/a As required
Z CTL data in, 2B Serial data input, 2B For remote tuning
a CTL data in, 2A Serial data input, 2A For remote tuning
b COMM 1/2 sel, in Discrete input, COMM 1/2 select Ground for COMM no 2 opera-
0 = no 2 selected tion
c Test inhibit Discrete input, test inhibit Ground
0 = inhibit
d COMM 3 sel Discrete input, COMM 3 select Ground for COMM no 3 opera-
0 = COMM 3 selected tion

Table 2-2. CTL-22/22A COMM Control, Connector Pin Functions.

e Audio out, low Audio out, low Audio system

f Audio out, high Audio out, high Audio system
g Shield, gnd Shield for e/f
h Audio in, low Audio in, low VHF-21( ): J1-6
VHF-22( ): J1-29
i Audio in, high Audio in, high VHF-21( ): J1-5
VHF-22( ): J1-30
j 28 V dc sw, no 2 28 V dc switched output, +, no 2 0.25 A max
k 28 V dc sw, no 1 28 V dc switched output, +, no 1 VHF-21( ): switching relay,
VHF-22( ): J1-37; 0.25 A max
m Extnd freq** Extended frequency select Ground
0 = extended range enabled
n Dimming bus Dimming bus Other CTL’s for uniform dim-
ming
p Not used
q Panel light, - Panel lighting, common Lighting source
r 28 V panel lgts Panel lighting, 28 V dc + Lighting source
s Power ground +28 V dc power common Power source
t Power +28 V dc power, high Power source
*Provide ground directly from one of the ground pins on the rear connector.
**Transceiver model determines strapping need
DISCRETE OUTPUT DEFINITION
FUNCTION OUTPUT PINS
P1-E P1-B P1-C P1-j P1-k
OFF — Gnd Gnd Open Open

All other psns — Open Open 28 V dc + 28 V dc +
Max current load: 100 mA 100 mA 100 mA 0.25 A max 0.25 A max
TEST Gnd
Not TEST Open
SWITCHING/STRAPPING DEFINITION
PINS DEFINITIONS
GROUNDED OPEN
P1-K Remote tuning selected (Remotely tuned frequency is displayed in upper Local tuning selected
window if feedback bus is provided)
P1-W Memory recall (one memory cell for each push)
P1-X Transfer (preset and active frequencies exchanged)
P1-b COMM 2 selected COMM 1 selected
P1-c Self-test inhibited Self-test enabled
P1-d COMM 3 selected COMM 1 or 2 selected
P1-m 118.00 to 151.975 MHz (VHF-XXB/XXXB) 118.00 to 135.975 MHz
118.00 to 136.975 MHz (VHF-XXA/XXXA with extended range)

ADDENDUM 12
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds CTL-22C connector pin function data to Table 2-2. Added text appears in bold type.
P/O Table 2-2. CTL-22/22A/22C COMM Control, Connector Pin Functions.

n Dimming bus Dimming bus Other CTLs for uniform dimming
p Not used
p (CTL-22C only) 25/8.33 kHz KNOB SEL Discrete input (open = 8.33 kHz, ground Ground
= 25 kHz)
TEST Gnd
Not TEST Open
PINS DEFINITIONS
GROUNDED OPEN
P1-p (CTL-22C only) Operates as a 25-kHz control head only Provides 8.33-kHz tuning from
118.000 through 136.992 MHz
and 25-kHz tuning from
137.000 through 151.975 MHz.
Addendum 12
523-0772719-0C711A (Facing Page 2-4)
ADDENDUM 9
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds CTL-22C connector pin function data to Table 2-2. Added text appears in bold type.
P/O Table 2-2. CTL-22/22A/22C COMM Control, Connector Pin Functions.

n Dimming bus Dimming bus Other CTLs for uniform dimming
p Not used
p (CTL-22C only) Type installation Discrete input, type installation (0=8.33 Ground
kHz)
TEST Gnd
Not TEST Open
PINS DEFINITIONS
GROUNDED OPEN
P1-p (CTL-22C only) Operates as both an 8.33- and 25-kHz control head: Operates as a 25-kHz control
118.000 through 136.975 MHz (8.33- or 25-kHz) head only
137.000 through 151.975 MHz (25-kHz)
Addendum 9
523-0772719-09711A (Facing Page 2-4)
Figure 2-2. CTL-23 Control, Connector Pin Orientation Diagram
Table 2-3. CTL-23 Control, Connector Pin Functions.


B CSDB select out #1 Gnd = CSDB (ON, SQ OFF) VHF-422 pin 32 (selects CSDB or
Open = ARINC 429 (OFF, STBY) ARINC 429 control)
C CSDB select out #2 Gnd = CSDB (ON, SQ OFF) VIR-432 pin 6 (selects CSDB or
Open = ARINC 429 (OFF, STBY) ARINC 429 control)
D Shield, gnd Shield As required
E Reserved Reserved Reserved
F Unpaired DME select Gnd = enabled
G +28 V dc power input #1 +28 V dc input power #1 #1 power source
H DME hold output Open = Hold RMI/BDI
J Hold discrete input Gnd = Hold As required (remote switch)
K COM 3 select strap Gnd = COM 3 Ground for COM 3 operation
L Shield, gnd Shield As required
M Serial data out CSDB data out 2B Input CSDB data to Comm, NAV
or DME
N Serial data out CSDB data out 2A Input CSDB data to Comm, NAV
or DME
P Shield gnd Shield As required
R Serial data out CSDB data out 1B Input CSDB data to Comm, NAV
or DME
S Serial data out CSDB data out 1A Input CSDB data to Comm, NAV
or DME
T Shield gnd Shield As required
U Serial data input CSDB data in 1B Output CSDB data from VHF
Comm
V Serial data input CSDB data in 1A Output CSDB data from VHF
Comm
W Spare discrete input Reserved Reserved
X Spare discrete input Reserved Reserved
Y Shield gnd Shield As required
Z Serial data input CSDB data in 2B Output CSDB data from NAV
a Serial data input CSDB data in 2A Output CSDB data from NAV
b Radio 1/2 select strap Gnd = side 2
c Reserved Reserved Reserved
d Marker sensitivity Open = low sensitivity
e Reserved Reserved Reserved

Table 2-3. CTL-23 Control, Connector Pin Functions.

f Reserved Reserved Reserved

g Shield, gnd Shield As required
h Reserved Reserved Reserved
i Reserved Reserved Reserved
j Relay control Open = standby: Gnd = on, sq off 0.25 A max
k +28 V dc output Open = standby: +28 V dc = on, sq off 0.25 A max
m COM extended freq Extended frequency select
Strap Gnd = extended range enabled
n Dimming bus Dimming bus Other CTLs for uniform dim-
ming
p Reserved Reserved Reserved
q Panel light, – Panel light common Lighting source
r +28 V dc panel lights Panel light +28 V dc power Lighting source
s Ground +28 V dc power common Power source
t +28 V dc power input #2 Input power from #2 source #2 Comm/Nav power source
P1-B P1-C P1-j P1-k
OFF, STBY OPEN (ARINC 429) OPEN (ARINC 429) OPEN OPEN
ON, SQ OFF GND (CSDB) GND (CSDB) GND +28 V dc
Max current load: 100 mA 100 mA 100 mA 0.25 mA
PINS DEFINITIONS
GROUNDED OPEN
P1-F Unpaired DME channels enabled (133.00 - 135.95 MHz) 108.00 to 117.95 MHz (normal selectable range)
P1-K COMM 3 selected COMM 1 or 2 selected
P1-b NAV 2, DME 2, and COMM 2 or 3 selected NAV 1, DME 1 and COMM 1 or 3 selected
P1-c NAV self-test inhibited NAV self-test enabled
P1-d Marker high sensitivity selected Marker low sensitivity selected
P1-m 118.00 to 151.975 MHz (selectable frequencies) 118.000 to 135.975 MHz (selectable frequencies)

ADDENDUM 20
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds CTL-23C connector pin function data to Table 2-3.
P/O Table 2-3. CTL-23/23C Control, Connector Pin Functions.

n Dimming bus Dimming bus Other CTLs for uniform

dimming
p Reserved Reserved Reserved
p (CTL-23C 25/8.33 kHz KNOB SEL Discrete input (open = 8.33 kHz, Ground
only) ground = 25 kHz)
q Panel light, – Panel light common Lighting source
r +28 V dc panel lights Panel light +28 V dc power Lighting source
s Ground +28 V dc power common Power source
t +28 V dc power input #2 Input power from #2 source #2 Comm/Nav power source
P1-B P1-C P1-j P1-k
OFF, STBY OPEN (ARINC 429) OPEN (ARINC 429) OPEN OPEN
ON, SQ OFF GND (CSDB) GND (CSDB) GND +28 V dc
Max current load: 100 mA 100 mA 100 mA 0.25 mA
PINS DEFINITIONS
GROUNDED OPEN
P1-F Unpaired DME channels enabled (133.00 - 135.95 MHz) 108.00 to 117.95 MHz (normal selectable range)
P1-K COMM 3 selected COMM 1 or 2 selected
P1-b NAV 2, DME 2, and COMM 2 or 3 selected NAV 1, DME 1 and COMM 1 or 3 selected
P1-c NAV self-test inhibited NAV self-test enabled
P1-d Marker high sensitivity selected Marker low sensitivity selected
P1-m 118.00 to 151.975 MHz (selectable frequencies) 118.000 to 135.975 MHz (selectable frequencies)
P1-p (CTL-23C Operates as a 25-kHz control head only Provides 8.33-kHz tuning from 118.000
only) through 136.992 MHz and 25-kHz tuning from
137.000 through 151.975 MHz.
Addendum 20
523-0772719-0L711A (Facing Page 2-6)
Figure 2-3. CTL-32/32A NAV Control, Connector Pin Orientation Diagram
Table 2-4. CTL-32/32A NAV Control, Connector Pin Functions.


B On/off no 1 Discrete output, on/off no 1 As required
0 = off
C On/off no 2 Same as B
D Shield, gnd Shield As required
F Reserved
G 28 V dc input, + 28 V dc power input +, no 2 NAV power source no 2, or as re-
quired
H Hold output DME hold output only, 1 = hold RMI/BDI: P2-26
J Hold in/out DME hold input/output, 0 = hold As required
K Remote sel Discrete input for remote tuning, External tuning source
M CTL data out, 2B Serial data output, 2B Opposite side
CTL-32: P1-Z or NAV/DME
N CTL data out, 2A Serial data output, 2A Opposite side
CTL-32: P1-a or NAV/DME
R CTL data out, 1B Serial data output, 1B DME-42: P1-55 or VIR-32: P1-4
S CTL data out, 1A Serial data output, 1A DME-42: P1-54 or VIR-32: P1-3
U CTL data in, 1B Serial data input, 1B VIR-32: P1-37
V CTL data in, 1A Serial data input, 1A VIR-32: P1-39
W Mem rcl, in Discrete input, memory recall External switch
0 = recall Ground or FMS
X Transfer Discrete input, transfer External switch
0 = transfer Ground or FMS
Y Shield, gnd Shield for Z/a
Z CTL data in, 2B Serial data input, 2B Opposite side
CTL-32: P1-M, or remote serial
tuning
a CTL data in, 2A Serial data input, 2A Opposite side
CTL-32: P1-N, or remote serial
tuning

Table 2-4. CTL-32/32A NAV Control, Connector Pin Functions.

b NAV 1/2 sel, in Discrete input, side 1/2 select Ground for side 2 operation
0 = side 2 selected
0 = inhibit
d Mkr sens Discrete input, 1 = low select Ground
g Shield, gnd Shield for e/f
h Audio in, low Audio in, low VIR-32: P1-22
i Audio in, high Audio in, high VIR-32: P1-21
k 28 V dc sw, no 1 28 V dc switched output, +, no 1 0.25 A max
m Extnd freq Extended frequency select To ground
0 = unpaired DME channels enabled
n Dimming bus Dimming bus To other CTL’s for uniform dim-
ming
p Not used
q Panel light, – Panel lighting, common Lighting source
t 28 V dc input, + 28 V dc power input, +, no 1 NAV power source no 1 or as re-
quired

Max current load: 100 mA 100 mA 100 mA 0.25 A 0.25 A
TEST Gnd
Not TEST Open
PINS DEFINITIONS
GROUNDED OPEN
P1-K Remote tuning selected Local tuning selected

(Remotely tuned frequency is displayed in upper window if feedback bus is
provided)
P1-W Memory recall (one memory cell for each push) —
P1-b NAV 2 selected NAV 1 selected
P1-d
P1-m 133.00 to 135.95 MHz (extended frequencies) 108.00 to 117.95 MHz (normal
selectable range)

Figure 2-4. CTL-62/62A ADF Control, Connector Pin Orientation Diagram
Table 2-5. CTL-62/62A ADF Control, Connector Pin Functions.


0 = off
C On/off no 2 Same as B for no 2
D Shield, gnd Shield ground As required
F Reserved
G 28 V dc input, + 28 V dc power input, +, no 2 ADF no 2 power source for dual
installations
H Not used
J Reserved
M CTL data out, 2B Serial data output, 2B CAD-62 no 2: P1-14
N CTL data out, 2A Serial data output, 2A CAD-62 no 2: P1-30
R CTL data out, 1B Serial data output, 1B CAD-62 no 1: P1-14
S CTL data out, 1A Serial data output, 1A CAD-62 no 1: P1-30
U CTL data in, 1B Serial data input, 1B CAD-62 no 1: P1-13
V CTL data in, 1A Serial data input, 1A CAD-62 no 1: P1-29
W Mem rcl, input for single units Discrete input, memory recall External switch
0 = recall Ground
W ADF no 2 sel for dual units Discrete input, right side sel Strap to ground
0 = right side selected
X Transfer for single units Discrete input, transfer External switch
0 = transfer Ground
X ADF no 1 sel for dual units Discrete input, left side sel Strap to ground
0 = left side selected
Y Shield, gnd Shield ground for Z/a
Z CTL data in, 2B Serial data input, 2B CAD-62 no 2: P1-13
a CTL data in, 2A Serial data input, 2A CAD-62 no 2: P1-29
b ADF 1/2 sel, in Discrete input, side 1/2 select Ground for side 2 operation
0 = side 2 selected

Table 2-5. CTL-62/62A ADF Control, Connector Pin Functions.


0 = inhibit
d Reserved
g Shield, gnd Shield ground for e/f
h Audio in, low Audio in, low ADF-62: P1-52*
i Audio in, high Audio in, high ADF-62: P1-51*
m Extnd freq Extended frequency select, Strap to ground
0 = extended frequency range enabled
n Dimming bus Dimming bus Other CTL’s for uniform dim-
ming
p Not used
r 28 V panel lgts Panel lighting, 28 V dc + 28 V lighting source, if used
t 28 V dc input, + 28 V dc power input +, no 1 ADF no 1 power source

TEST (input/output) Gnd
Not TEST Open
P1-W P1-X
1/2 (dual units); 1 Open Gnd
2 Gnd Open
PINS DEFINITIONS
GROUNDED OPEN

P1-W Memory recall (one memory cell for each push) —
P1-X Transfer (preset and active frequencies exchanged)**
P1-b ADF 2 selected (input) ADF 1 selected
P1-m 190.00 to 1799 kHz and extended frequencies 2179 to 2185 kHz 190.00 to 1799.0 kHz
(normal selectable range)
*Applicable only to CTL-62 units with integral volume control.

**Does not apply to dual units.

Figure 2-5. CTL-92/92A Transponder Control, Connector Pin Orientation Diagram
Table 2-6. CTL-92/92A Transponder Control, Connector Pin Functions.


0 = off
C On/off no 2 Same as B
D Shield, gnd Shield ground
E Self-test Discrete input/output, 0 = test As required
F ALT code, C4 Altitude code C4 input Alt encoder
G 28 V dc input, + 28 V dc power input +, no 2 Transponder no 2 power source
H ALT code, C2 Altitude code C2 input Alt encoder
J ALT code, C1 Altitude code C1 input Alt encoder
M CTL data out, 2B Serial data output, 2B (Not used) TDR-94 no 2
N CTL data out, 2A Serial data output, 2A (Not used) TDR-94 no 2
R CTL data out, 1B Serial data output, 1B CAD-62: P1-14; TDR-94 no 1
S CTL data out, 1A Serial data output, 1A CAD-62: P1-30; TDR-94 no 1
U CTL data in, 1B Serial data input, 1B CAD-62: P1-13
V CTL data in, 1A Serial data input, 1A CAD-62: P1-29
W Select no 2/no 1 standby Discrete output, gnd = #1 in stby, open = #1
selected
X Select no 1/no 2 standby Discrete output, gnd = #2 in stby, open = #2
selected
Y Shield, gnd Shield for Z/a
Z CTL data in, 2B Serial data input, 2B *Remote input
a CTL data in, 2A Serial data input, 2A *Remote input
b IDENT input Discrete input, 0 = IDENT on External switch ground
c ALT code, A1 Altitude code A1 input Altitude encoder
d ALT code, A4 Altitude code A4 input Altitude encoder
e ALT code, A2 Altitude code A2 input Altitude encoder
f ALT code, B4 Altitude code B4 input Altitude encoder
*Or no 2 TDR echo on -2XX units

Table 2-6. CTL-92/92A Transponder Control, Connector Pin Functions.

g Common Common Altitude encoder common

h ALT code, B2 Altitude code B2 input Altitude encoder
i ALT code, B1 Altitude code B1 input Altitude encoder
m Selects pin Z or pin a as no 2 Gnd = no 2 echo envoked Strap ground
echo (TDR-94, -2XX units)
n Dimming bus Dimming bus Other CTL’s for uniform
dimming
p ALT code, D4 Altitude code D4 input Altitude encoder
s Power ground +28 V dc power, common Power source, common
t 28 V dc input, + 28 V dc power input +, no 1 Transponder no 1 power source
or as required

TEST (input/output) Gnd
Not TEST Open
P1-W P1-X
1/2 (dual units); 1 (#2 in stby) Open Gnd
2 (#1 in stby) Gnd Open
PINS DEFINITIONS
GROUNDED OPEN

P1-b IDENT selected (input) IDENT not selected

Figure 2-6. Pro Line II Equipment, Lighting and Dimming

Bus Installation, Interconnect Cable
and Optional Control Diagram

Figure 2-7. Dual ADF-60 System, Interconnect Overview and Cable Identification Diagram

Figure 2-8. Dual ADF-462 System With CTL-62( ), Interconnect Overview and Cable Identification Diagram

Figure 2-9. TDR-90 Transponder System, Interconnect Overview and Cable Identification Diagram

Figure 2-10. VHF COMM System, Interconnect Overview and Cable

Identification Diagram

Figure 2-11. CTL-23 Control, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-12 (Sheet 1 of 2). CTL-23 Control With Tie Points,


Figure 2-12 (Sheet 2). CTL-23 Control With Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-13 (Sheet 1 of 3). CTL-22/23/32/62/92/22A/32A/

62A/92A Controls, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-13 (Sheet 2). CTL-22/23/32/62/92/22A/32A/62A/92A Controls, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-13 (Sheet 3). CTL-22/23/32/62/92/22A/32A/62A/92A

Controls, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-14 (Sheet 1 of 7). CTL-92/92A Transponder Control,

Input/Output Circuits

Figure 2-14 (Sheet 2). CTL-92/92A Transponder Control, Input/Output Circuits




Figure 2-14 (Sheet 6). CTL-92/92A Transponder Control,

Input/Output Circuits


þ 523-0773962-004118
4th Edition, 2 December 1991

Collins
Collins DDA-42
Distance Data Adapter
Installation
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page
2.1 GENERAL INFORMATION....................................................................................................................................2-1

2.5 DDA-42 DISTANCE DATA ADAPTER INSTALLATION.....................................................................................2-6
2.5.1 Installation......................................................................................................................................................................2-6
2.5.2 Rear Connector Strapping..............................................................................................................................................2-6
2.6 POSTINSTALLATION CHECK..............................................................................................................................2-6
NOTICE: This section replaces third edition dated 21 July 1989.

Page No Issue
* Title .............................................2 Dec 91

* List of Effective Pages ................2 Dec 91
* 2-1 thru 2-3 .................................2 Dec 91
* 2-4 Blank.....................................2 Dec 91
* 2-4A .............................................2 Dec 91
* 2-4B Blank ..................................2 Dec 91
* 2-5 thru 2-8 .................................2 Dec 91


1st Ed 2 Aug 85 1
2nd Ed 2 Aug 87 2

section II
installation
2.1 GENERAL INFORMATION Table 2-1 lists the mating connector and the tools
required to assemble the mating connector.
This section contains all the information necessary
to install the DDA-42 Distance Data Adapter. Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2 are suggested intercon-
nect wiring diagrams for the DDA-42 Distance Data
2.2 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING Adapter. Figure 2-2 provides interconnect informa-
EQUIPMENT tion to a tie point number. The tie point number
can be used to tie together one interconnect to an-
Unpack equipment carefully and make a careful other interconnect diagram with the same number.
visual inspection of the unit for possible shipping Example: the tie numbers 527/577 and 528/578 are
damage. All claims for damage should be filed with dedicated to Distance Data Hi and Low for 6-wire
the transportation company involved. If claims for analog DME systems. On the appropriate DME In-
damage are to be filed, save the original shipping dicator installation diagram, there is a tie point at
container and materials. If no damage can be de- 527/577 and 528/578 which is the Distance Data
tected, replace packing materials in the shipping H/L input. Figure 2-2 is designed to minimize HIRF
container and save for future use (such as storage and lightning hazards.
or reshipment).
For preparation of interconnect wiring cables, refer
2.3 PREINSTALLATION CHECK to the general information and mount section (part
A of the Pro Line II installation manual). The DDA-
Perform the final performance test (customer accep- 42 mating connector is a 50-pin D-subminiature.
tance test) in the maintenance section of the DDA-42 For connector contact assembly and installation in-
instruction book (repair manual) if verification of formation, refer to the section on D-subminiature
unit to specifications is required or connect unit in a connectors in the general information and mount
system mockup to verify proper operation. section (part A of the Pro Line II installation man-
ual).
Ensure that polarizing key plugs (CPN 629-8339-
Figure 2-1 is the suggested interconnect wiring 001) have been inserted in positions 39 and 46 on
diagram for the DDA-42 Distance Data Adapter. the mating connector.
Table 2-1. Mating Connector and Tools Required.
Mount, special 653-9015-001 1

Includes the following:
Connector (DDMA-50SF00000) 371-0213-050 1
Connector hood (MD50-000-J-VL-464.5) 371-0399-280 1
Contacts 371-0213-110 *48
Keying plug 629-8339-001 2
Revised 2 December 1991 2-1

installation DDA-42
Figure 2-1. DDA-42 Distance Data Adapter, Interconnect Diagram

installation DDA-42
Figure 2-2 (Sheet 1 of 2). DDA-42 Distance Data Adapter With Tie
Points, Interconnect Diagram
Revised 2 December 1991 2-3/(2-4 blank)

installation DDA-42
Figure 2-2 (Sheet 2). DDA-42 Distance Data Adapter With Tie
Revised 2 December 1991 2-4A/(2-4B blank)

installation DDA-42
Figure 2-3. DDA-42 Distance Data Adapter, Connector Pin Assignments

installation DDA-42
2.5 DDA-42 DISTANCE DATA ADAPTER fier of the onside active CTL-32 control that is
INSTALLATION tuning the DME-42.
c. Channel 2 (P1-2 to P1-3)
2.5.1 Installation
A strap connection between these pins enables
To minimize wire length, the DDA-42 should be the DDA-42 to recognize the source identifier of
mounted in the radio equipment rack adjacent to the active cross-side CTL-32 control that is
the DME-42 DME Transceiver. A DDA-42 mount tuning the DME-42.
(CPN 653-9015-001) is required for each unit. This
d. Remote A (No straps)
single mount allows the DDA-42 to be mounted ei-
ther vertically or horizontally. Two units can be No straps enables the DDA-42 to recognize only
mounted end to end in approximately the same the source identifier of the remote A frequency
length as a DME-42. Refer to Figure 2-4 for the control that is tuning the DME-42.
DDA-42 outline and mounting diagram. Install the
mount for the DDA-42 using the dimensions shown
2.6 POSTINSTALLATION CHECK
on Figure 2-4. After the mount has been installed
and the interconnect cable verified, tighten the
The following installation checks are to be per-
Phillips-head screw on the front of the mount, se-
formed with the DDA-42 installed in the aircraft.
curing the DDA-42 in place. Ensure that polarizing
Checks should be made using aircraft power.
key plugs (CPN 629-8339-001) have been installed
in positions 39 and 46 on the mating connector. In-
a. Apply aircraft power to the instruments, DME
stall the mating connector on the front of the DDA-
transceiver, and (if applicable) the inertial
42 and secure the latch.
navigation system.
b. Press the DME indicator test button. During
2.5.2 Rear Connector Strapping (Refer to
the time the button is held in, the distance dis-
Figure 2-3)
play should be indicating 000.0 ±0.1.
a. Preset or Remote B (P1-20 to P1-21, P1-2 to P1-
3) Note
A strap connection between these pins enables
the DDA-42 to recognize only the source identi- If there is a DME station within range, the
fier of the onside preset CTL-32 control or the DME receiver can be tuned to its frequency
remote frequency control that is tuning the and the actual distance data will be dis-
DME-42. played on the DME indicator.
b. Channel 1 (P1-20 to P1-21)

Refer to Figure 2-5 for the input/output circuits of
A strap connection between these pins enables DDA-42. This diagram may be useful in trouble-
the DDA-42 to recognize only the source identi- shooting the installation, if necessary.

installation DDA-42
Figure 2-4. DDA-42 Distance Data Adapter With Mount, Outline

and Mounting Diagram

installation DDA-42
Figure 2-5. DDA-42 Distance Data Adapter Input/Output Circuit Diagram

þ 523-0773741-007118

Collins
DME-42/442
DME Transceiver and
IND-42( ) DME Indicator
Installation
Table of Contents
2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING 2.5.4.1 DME Hold............................................................2-9

EQUIPMENT.......................................................2-1 2.5.4.2 DME Audio Output.............................................2-9
2.5.4.3 DME-42/442 Transceiver and IND-42( )
Indicator Special Strapping Options ....................2-10
2.3 SPECIAL PRELIMINARY INSTRUCTIONS ....2-1 2.5.5 Supplementary CTL-32/DME-42/VIR-32
2.3.1 Mount and Connector Selection ............................ 2-1 Interconnect Information ......................................2-22
2.3.2 DME-42/442 Distance Measuring Equipment 2.5.5.1 Power and Ground Connections.......................2-22
Selection................................................................... 2-1 2.5.5.2 Cable Groupings ...............................................2-22
2.5.5.3 CTL-32 Serial Tuning Cross-Connections .......2-22
2.4 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS ...............................2-7 2.5.5.4 Remote Tuning..................................................2-22
2.4.1 General................................................................... 2-7 2.5.5.5 Remote VOR Tuning via 2 x 5 Parallel
2.4.2 DME-42/442 Receiver-Transmitter, Special Input.......................................................................2-22
Cabling Instructions................................................ 2-7 2.5.5.6 Remote DME Tuning via 2 x 5 .........................2-22
2.5 DME-42/442 DISTANCE MEASURING 2.6 POSTINSTALLATION CALIBRATION
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION.........................2-7 AND ADJUSTMENTS ...................................... 2-22
2.5.1 DME Antenna Installation.................................... 2-7 2.6.1 DME-42/442 Distance Measuring Equipment,
2.5.2 DME-42/442 Transceiver Installation .................. 2-9 Special Postinstallation Test/Calibration.............2-22
2.5.3 IND-42( ) DME Indicator Installation .................. 2-9 2.6.2 DME Audio Output..............................................2-23
2.5.4 DME-42/442 System, Special Installation
Considerations ......................................................... 2-9
Page No Issue
* Title ...........................................11 Apr 97

* 2-1 thru 2-23 .............................11 Apr 97
* 2-24 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-25............................................11 Apr 97
* 2-26 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-27 thru 2-35 ...........................11 Apr 97
* 2-36 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-37 thru 2-56 ...........................11 Apr 97
* 2-57 Added ................................11 Apr 97
* 2-58 Blank Added......................11 Apr 97


1st Rev 5 Jun 86 None
1 29 Sep 92 None
1 15 Sep 95 None

section II
installation
2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING nance. Figure 2-1 is an overview of the DME sys-
EQUIPMENT tem installation. For information on wiring, bond-
ing, and other general installation practices, refer
Unpack equipment carefully and make a careful to the Installation Practices Manual (CPN 523-
visual inspection of the unit for possible shipping 0775254).
the transportation company involved. If claims for
damage are to be filed, save the original shipping 2.3.1 Mount and Connector Selection
container and save for future use (such as storage Refer to Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 for a listing of the
or reshipment). mounts and connectors/connector kits available for
use with the equipment. Table 2-3 is a list of the
2.2 PREINSTALLATION CHECK contents of the connector kits, Table 2-4 and Table
2-5 list the mating connector contacts and special
Perform the final performance test (customer ac- tools needed for connector assembly. Table 2-6 is a
ceptance test) in the maintenance section of the list of the DME equipment available with an out-
DME-42 or DME-442 instruction book (repair man- line of the features of each combination.
ual) if verification of unit to equipment specifica-
tions is required or connect unit in a system
mockup to verify proper operation.
2.3.2 DME-42/442 Distance Measuring
2.3 SPECIAL PRELIMINARY Equipment Selection
INSTRUCTIONS
Proper and careful planning of any installation is Refer to Table 2-6 for a listing of DME-442 equip-
essential for reliable performance and easy mainte- ment available.

installation DME-42/442
Figure 2-1. DME-42/442 DME Transceiver and IND-42A/C DME Indicator, Installation Overview

Table 2-1. DME-42/442 Mating Connectors.
AIRCRAFT COLLINS
DESCRIPTION QTY
TYPE PART NUMBER
DME-442 (CPN 622-7309-001)
Composite UMT-13 Mount 622-5213-003 1

fixed-wing Installation kit (includes 55 contacts (CPN 372-2514-110), TNC connector, 634-4192-013 1
and lightning protection kit)***
DME-42 (CPN 622-6263-001, -003), DME-442 (CPN 622-7309-101)
PREFERRED

Installation kit (includes 55 contacts (CPN 372-2514-110), and TNC 634-4192-004 1
connector)
Composite UMT-13 Mount 622-5213-003 1

fixed-wing Installation kit (includes 55 contacts (CPN 372-2514-110), TNC connector, 634-4192-013 1
and lightning protection kit)***

Crimp contacts
Up to 0.050 in insulation dia 372-2514-110 *56
or
0.050 to 0.080 in insulation dia 372-2514-180 *56
TNC connector (for RG-214 cable) 357-7204-010 1
TNC connector, straight (for RG-393 cable) 857-1511-010 1
TNC connector, right-angle (for RG-393 cable) 857-1511-020 1

Crimp contacts
or
**ALTERNATE

Installation kit (includes 55 contacts (CPN 372-2514-110) and TNC connec- 634-4193-005 1
tor)

Crimp contacts
or

Table 2-1. DME-42/442 Mating Connectors.
AIRCRAFT COLLINS
DESCRIPTION QTY
TYPE PART NUMBER
**ALTERNATE (Cont)

Crimp contacts
or
Refer to Table 2-3 for a complete listing of the components included in each kit.
**Recommended installation only where UMT-series mount cannot be used.
***Lightning protection kit required when installing unit in a composite aircraft.
Table 2-2. IND-42A/42C Mating Connectors.
COLLINS
DESCRIPTION QTY
PART NUMBER
Connector (with solder tip contacts) 653-9016-001 1
Connector kit (with crimp contacts) 653-9016-004 1
Note
Refer to Table 2-3 for a complete listing of the components included in these kits.
KIT COLLINS

Keyway 634-1116-000 2

Connector 634-1112-001 1
Screw, 4-40 x 0.50 324-2605-000 2
Keyway 634-1116-001 2
Washer, flat, no 4 310-0779-030 2

Screw, 4-40 x 0.50 324-2605-000 2
Keyway 634-1116-000 2
Connector, male 634-1112-001 1

KIT COLLINS
634-4192-013 Connector plate kit (with lightning protection) 628-8205-005 1

Thinline II 60 connector 634-1112-001 1
Keyway 634-1116-001 2
*Contacts 372-2514-110 55
REV P or earlier)
Connector, TNC (for RG-393/U) (in kits marked REV R 857-1511-010 1
or later)
Grounding spring 634-1120-001 2

Keyway 634-1116-001 2
*Contacts 372-2514-110 55
REV P or earlier)
Connector, TNC (for RG-393/U) (in kits marked REV R 857-1511-010 1
or later)

Thinline II 60 connector 634-1112-001 1
Screw, 4-40 x 0.50 324-2605-000 2
Keyway 634-1116-001 2
*Contacts 372-2514-110 55
Flat washer, no 4 310-0779-030 2
REV H or earlier)
Connector, TNC (for RG-393/U) (in kits marked REV J or 857-1511-010 1
later)
653-9016-001 Connector shell 371-0221-000 1

Hood and latch assembly 371-0399-260 1
Keying pin 629-8339-001 2
653-9016-004 Connector shell 371-0213-030 1

Hood and latch assembly 371-0399-260 1
Keying pin 629-8339-001 2
**Contacts 371-0213-110 25
653-9016-005 Same as -004 except without contacts
*Standard contacts, for use with wire having an insulation OD of 0.050 in max. Optional contacts (CPN 372-2514-180) are for use
with wire having an insulation OD of 0.050 to 0.080 in max. See Table 2-4.
**Special tools are required for this contact (CPN 371-0213-110). See Table 2-5.

Table 2-4. Pro Line II Connector Mating Connector Contacts and Special Tools.
COLLINS
PART NO

(wire with insulation up to 0.050 in dia) 359-0697-010 *(Daniels DAK-188) *(Daniels DRK-230)
*(Daniels GMT-221)
(wire with insulation 0.050 to 0.080 in *(Daniels GMT-221) *(Daniels DAK-188) *(Daniels DRK-230)
dia)
*Special tools are available in connector kit CPN 359-0697-080 (Daniels DMC-593) or can be ordered from: Daniels Manufacturing
Corp., 2266 Franklin Road, Bloomfield Hills, Michigan, 48013.
Table 2-5. D-Subminiature Snap-In Contact (371-0213-110), Tool Requirements.
*COLLINS MILITARY ITT CANNON

TOOL TYPE
PART NUMBER STANDARD NUMBER PART NUMBER
Crimp 359-8102-010 with MS22520/2-01 NA

859-8102-080 positioner MS22520/2-08 NA
Alternate insertion/extraction 370-8053-020 M81969/1-02
Table 2-6. DME Equipment Available.
INSTALLATION DME-42
622-6263-001/003, CTL-32 IND-42A
CHANNEL DISPLAY
DME-442 622-6521-00X 622-6424-00X
CAPABILITY
622-7309-001/101, QTY / CRS-CPLD or IND-42C
(NUMBER)
and ANT-42* (DUAL) 622-7318-00X
DME / CONTROL 622-6591-001
Single / single 1 1 /— 1 - 42A 1 and 3

Single / single 1 1 /— 1 - 42C 1
Single / dual 1 2 / yes 1 - 42A 1, 2, and 3
Dual / dual 2 2 / no 2 - 42A 1 and 3 on each IND
Dual / dual 2 2 / yes 2 - 42A 1, 2, and 3 on each IND
Dual / dual 2 2 /X 2 - 42C 1 on each IND
*Alternate antenna: 237Z-1 (522-2632-000)

X = don’t care
CRS-CPLD = Cross-Coupled

2.4 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS A of the Pro Line II installation manual). The

DME-42 and DME-442 use a 60-pin Thinline II
2.4.1 General mating connector. For connector contact assembly
and installation information refer to the section on
Refer to Figure 2-6 for a dual DME-42/VIR-32 sys- Thinline II connectors in the general information
tem interconnect diagram and Figure 2-7 for a sin- and mount section.
gle DME-42/dual VIR-32 system interconnect.
Figure 2-8 shows a single DME-42 with a CTL-30 2.4.2 DME-42/442 Receiver-Transmitter,
interconnect diagram. Figure 2-9 shows a single Special Cabling Instructions
DME-42 with a CTL-32 interconnect diagram.
Figure 2-10 provides DME-42/CTL-32 interconnect
information to a tie point number. The tie point Note
number can be used to tie together one interconnect
to another interconnect diagram with the same On new aircraft installations, it is recom-
number. Example: the tie numbers 527 and 528 are mended that RG-393 coax cable be used in-
dedicated to Side 1 Distance Data Hi and Low for 6 stead of RG-214. RG-214 is not recom-
wire analog DME systems. On the appropriate in- mended because its jacket is made of PVC
stallation diagram (FMS, BDI or Flight Director), and does not meet FAR 23.1365 and FAR
there is a tie point at 527 and 528 which is the Side 25.831. Refer to Collins ALL AVIONICS
1 Distance Data H/L input. SIL 2-92 for additional information.
Figure 2-11 thru Figure 2-14 show interconnect RG-393/U is the preferred antenna cable type to be
diagrams for the DME-442. Figure 2-16 provides used with the DME-42 or DME-442 but RG-142B/U
the DME-42 rear connector pin assignments. can be substituted. For best results total cable at-
Figure 2-18 is the DME-442 rear connector pin as- tenuation should not exceed 3 dB. At 1 GHz, RG-
signments. Figure 2-24 is the rear connector pin as- 393/U has nominal 0.09 dB/ft attenuation, while
signments for the IND-42(A,C). Refer to Figure 2-2 RG-142B/U has 0.13 dB/ft attenuation.
for the DME-442 Transceiver transient voltage pro-
tection kit diagram. Figure 2-10, Figure 2-13, and
2.5 DME-42/442 DISTANCE MEASURING
Figure 2-14 are designed to minimize HIRF and
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
lightning hazards.
The interconnect diagrams provide both single and Table 2-8 shows the DME-42 connector pin func-
dual installation information. Refer to the General tions. Table 2-9 shows the DME-442 connector pin
System and Mount Information section for general functions and Table 2-10 shows the connector pin
interconnect guidelines to be followed. For informa- functions for the IND-42 (A,C).
tion on wiring, bonding, and other general installa-
tion practices refer to the Installation Practices 2.5.1 DME Antenna Installation
Manual (CPN 523-0775254).
Figure 2-21 and Figure 2-22 are the outline and
For preparation of interconnect wiring cables, refer mounting dimensions diagrams for the ANT-42 and
to the general information and mount section, (part 237Z-1 antennas respectively.

Figure 2-2. DME-442 Transceiver Special Transient Voltage Protection Kit Diagram
Caution tance; that is 38 dB for 8 feet, 44 dB for 16

feet, etc.
It is important that adequate isolation be
provided between two DME antennas, or a
DME antenna and a transponder antenna, The antenna connection on the front of the DME-
to prevent receiver front-end damage. It is 442 is a TNC female connector CPN 357-0026-010.
possible, with the use of DME Y-channels, The mating connector is a TNC, CPN 357-7204-010,
for one DME to transmit directly on the and connects the unit to the antenna through an
frequency of a second DME as well as the RG-393/U cable. If RG-142/U cable is preferred, use
receiver frequency of the transponder. The TNC mating connector CPN 357-9666-000. Refer to
transponder can also transmit directly on the general installation and mount section for in-
the receiver frequency of the DME. Mini- structions on assembly of a TNC mating connector
mum isolation of 40 dB between L-band to an RG-393/U or RG-142/U cable.
systems is suggested, including antenna
isolation plus cables losses. A separation of
4 feet between L-band stub antennas, on a In determining cable length, allow sufficient length
common ground plane, provides about 32 so that bends will have a minimum of 75-mm (3-in)
dB of isolation. The isolation increases 6 dB radius. Maximum cable length for RG-393/U is 9 m
for each doubling of the separation in dis- (30 ft) and for RG-142B/U, 7 m (22 ft).

RG-393/U cable requires a type TNC straight con- a. Perform the following to rear mount the indica-
nector (CPN 357-7204-010) or a type TNC 90° con- tor.
nector (CPN 357-7351-010) for connecting to the re- 1. Connect the indicator rear connector to the
ceiver-transmitter and to the ANT-42 antenna. A mating connector on wiring harness.
male type HN straight connector (CPN 357-9039- 2. Install the indicator in instrument panel
000) or a type HN 90° connector (CPN 357-9559- from rear and slide mooring plate over rear
000) is required for connecting the other end of the of indicator up against rear of bezel.
RG-393/U cable to the 237Z-1 L-Band Antenna. 3. Secure indicator from front of instrument
panel with four screws.
RG-142/B/U cable requires a type TNC straight b. Perform the following to front mount the indi-
connector (CPN 357-9666-000) or a type TNC 90° cator.
connector (CPN 357-9664-000) for connecting to J1 1. Connect the indicator rear connector to the
on the unit and to the ANT-42 antenna. A male mating connector on wiring harness.
type HN straight connector (Amphenol PN 82-534) 2. Install the indicator in instrument panel
or a type HN 90° connector (CPN 357-9870-000) is from front and slide mooring plate over rear
required for connecting the other end of the RG- of indicator up against rear of front panel.
142B/U cable to the 237Z-1 L-Band Antenna. 3. Secure from front of instrument panel with
four screws.
2.5.2 DME-42/442 Transceiver Installation
2.5.4 DME-42/442 System, Special Installation
The DME-42 or DME-442 Transceiver is normally
Considerations
mounted on the UMT-13 mount and must be lo-
cated to allow normal convection through the holes On DME-42 transceivers, the maximum distance
in the top and bottom. output of the 6-wire DME data is 256 nautical
Refer to the general installation and mount section miles. The maximum distance output of the CSDB
for mount information (outline and dimensions on data is 300 nautical miles.
UMT-13 and 390R-20 mounts). Refer to Figure 2-15
2.5.4.1 DME Hold
for DME-42 Transceiver outline and mounting di-
mensions. Refer to Figure 2-17 and Figure 2-19 for The CTL-32 control has the built-in capability to
DME-442 Transceiver outline and mounting di- keep the DME tuned to one channel while the NAV
mensions. Refer to CTL-X2/X2A installation section equipment is tuned to another channel. This is
for the CTL-32 outline and mounting dimensions. helpful especially in approach mode when the NAV
equipment is tuned to a localizer channel while the
a. Position DME Transceiver in front of mount.
DME continues to track a VORTAC station.
b. Carefully slide DME back on mount until rear
connector engages with mating connector. En- In DME-42 retrofit installations using a 313N-4D
sure pins are properly engaged and then firmly control, DME hold can be provided either by use of
push DME back until rear connector is firmly a special 339F-12( ) or IND-40( )/41( ) indicator or
and fully engaged with mount connector. by means of an external switch to interrupt the
c. Tighten the two knurled knobs to the hook tune-common wire. In those installations, where
projections on the front of the DME. DME hold was provided with a DME-40, the DME-
d. Connect the antenna cable to the TNC connec- 42 can be used directly with no change in wiring or
tor on the front of the DME. operation.
2.5.3 IND-42( ) DME Indicator Installation 2.5.4.2 DME Audio Output
The IND-42( ) requires no special cooling considera- The DME-442 audio outputs are balanced trans-
tions. It is recommended, however, that the unit be former coupled with floating common as shown in
mounted in such a manner as to minimize the risk Figure 2-3. If a similar transformer coupled output
of foreign matter (especially conductive materials) is required in DME-42 installations, an external
entering the unit. Refer to Figure 2-23 for the IND- transformer is needed. Use transformer CPN 667-
42( ) indicator outline and mounting dimensions. 9007-000, or equivalent, connected as shown in
Figure 2-4. Individual internal gain adjustments
The indicator can be front- or rear-mounted. are provided. These are normally factory set at 15.5

volts peak, however, installation requirements may a. Ch 1/2 Analog 6-Wire Select (P1-9 to P1-7)
dictate some other level. The output circuits are
A strap connection between these pins causes
shown in Figure 2-3.
the DME-42 to supply distance information on
the analog outputs (6-wire and 40 mV/nmi)
2.5.4.3 DME-42/442 Transceiver and IND-42( ) from DME channel 2. No strap (pins open) sup-
Indicator Special Strapping Options plies data from channel 1. There are no provi-
sions to supply channel 3 data on the analog
output pins. This strap has no effect on the se-
2.5.4.3.1 DME-42 External Strapping Options
rial data output. Data from all three channels,
or any combination depending on tuning, is al-
Refer to Table 2-7 for a listing of the strapping op- ways available on the serial output lines re-
tions available in the DME-42 system. gardless of the selection on the analog outputs.
Figure 2-3. DME-442 Audio Output Circuits, Partial Schematic Diagram

Figure 2-4. DME-42 Audio Output Circuits External Transformer Connections for Isolated Output

If the DME is operating on side two (see inter- The signal supplied at these input locations can be
connect on previous page), these pins should be in either of two formats, CSDB (commercial stan-
strapped, otherwise the two DME’s will supply dard digital bus) or ARINC 429M (429 modified). In
identical information to the RMI/BDI/HSI. Re- addition, the signals can be continuous or in the
member, with the CTL’s cross-connected, the form of data blocks known as burst tuning. The de-
pilot’s active NAV frequency is DME channel 1 sired tuning scheme is selected at installation by
on both sides, and the copilot’s active NAV fre- means of four external straps:
quency is DME channel 2 on both sides. The
DME channel 3 is the on-side preset frequency CSDB/429 Select (P1-48)
unless it is being tuned by a remote source. Port Select (P1-42)
Burst Tune Select (P1-50)
b. Ch 1, 2 x 5 / Serial Tune Select for DME-42,
Side 1/Side 2 Select (P1-9)
CPN 622-6263-001 (P1-48 to P1-7)
An external strap between these pins allows Refer to Figure 2-5 for strapping options.
tuning of DME channel 1 via the serial input
pins P1-54/55. No strap (pins open) configures a. Option 1 is the default condition which allows
the unit for 2 x 5 tuning of channel 1. Channels continuous ARINC 429M tuning at port B for all
2 and 3 can be tuned only via the serial input three DME channels.
and are totally independent of the channel 1
tuning source. There are no provisions for di- Note
rect tuning of either channels 2 or 3 via 2 x 5
source. The left-to-right position of the small trian-
gle under the rectangular signal symbol
c. Ch 1, 2, or 3, 2 x 5 / Serial Tune Select and 2 x 5 identifies the DME channel being tuned; ie,
Channel Select for DME-42, CPN 622-6263-003 the leftmost triangle identifies channel 1,
(P1-48 and/or P1-50 to P1-7) the center channel 2, and the right channel
A strap connection between pins P1-48 and P1- 3. Also, a solid triangle under a given port
7 with pin P1-50 open allows tuning of DME column identifies that port as being the
channel 1 via the serial input pins P1-54/55. primary tuning port for that channel while
With this strapping configuration, channels 2 an open triangle identifies that port as an
and 3 can only be tuned via the serial input and alternate tuning port for that channel. It is
are totally independent of the channel 1 tuning anticipated that port selections are made at
source. No strap on P1-48 and P1-50 configures the time of installation. The provision of an
the DME for 2 x 5 tuning of channel 1. With a alternate port is not intended to imply a
strap connection between pins P1-50 and P1-7 dynamic flexibility that would allow tuning
with pin P1-48 open, the DME is configured for of any given channel from more than one
2 x 5 tuning of channel 2. With both P1-48 and port simultaneously.
P1-50 strapped to P1-7, the DME is configured
for 2 x 5 tuning of channel 3. See Figure 2-8 for b. Option 2 has the port select pin grounded to
a diagram showing the tuning lines and neces- enable port A for the same continuous 429
sary strapping involved for the 2 x 5 tuning of tuning.
channels 1, 2, or 3 on the -003 status of the c. Option 3 has the CSDB/429 select pin grounded
DME-42. to select CSDB tuning.
d. Option 4 has P1-42 open to enable port B.
2.5.4.3.2 DME-442 Transceiver Strapping e. Option 5 has P1-48 open for 429 tuning and P1-
Options 50 grounded for burst tuning. In this particular
combination, the port select pin P1-42 has no
Tuning information can be supplied to the DME- function. In the first variation of this option,
442 through three serial ports identified as follows: burst tuning is enabled at all three ports and
for all three DME channels. Port A is consid-
Port A (P1-27/28) ered the primary port while ports B and/or C
Port B (P1-43/44) can accept tuning data for any channel that is
Port C (P1-54/55) not being tuned via port A.

Figure 2-5. DME-442 Strapping Options

In the second variation, continuous tuning for the companion DME channel 3 is enabled. The
channel 1 can be supplied at port B, leaving pilot can elect to display that information by
channels 2 and 3 to be burst tuned via ports A pressing the CH button. Unstrapped, the dis-
or C. play is limited to channels 1 or 2.
f. Options 6 and 7 are quite similar, differing only
in the tuning port for DME channel 3. In both b. Channel 2 Display At Power-Up (P1-19 to P1-
options, P1-48 is grounded to select the CSDB 25)
format and P1-50 is grounded to enable burst IND-42A:
tuning.
With these pins strapped together (at the rear
Notice that both ports A and B are enabled and connector), at power-on, the IND-42A first dis-
supplied only with continuous tuning (burst plays DME information from DME channel 2.
tuning is enabled). Keep in mind that continu- The operator can then select any other channel
ous tuning is nothing more than uninterrupted as desired.
burst tuning. Therefore, even though a port
may be enabled for burst tuning, it can never- IND-42C:
theless accept continuous tuning. The opposite In the case of the IND-42C, only channel 2 in-
condition however is not true; ie, if a port is en- formation can be displayed with this strap con-
abled for continuous tuning it cannot accept nected. Without the strap, channel 1 informa-
burst tuning. tion is displayed.
In option 6, P1-42 is open enabling port B for c. Auto Range Select (P1-20 to P1-25)
channels 1 and 2, and port A for channel 3.
However, if tuning data for channels 1 and/or 2 With this strap connected, distances below 20
is not supplied by port B, it can be supplied at nmi are displayed to the nearest 0.01 nmi.
port A instead. Additionally, and as shown in Without the strap the display is to the nearest
the second variation, burst tuning can be sup- 0.1 nmi. Other ranges are unaffected by the
plied at port A for DME channel 3 as well as for strap. This feature has limited utility in a high
channels 1 and/or 2. performance aircraft. In all but the slowest air-
craft, the 0.0X digit will likely change too fast to
g. Option 7 differs from option 6 only in that P1- read. The feature’s primary function is in bench
42 is also grounded. This has the effect of testing.
shifting the tuning port for DME channel 3
from port A (in option 6) to port B (in option 7). 2.5.4.3.4 Connector Kits for Installation
h. The side 1/side 2 strap allows for side discrimi-
nation in dual systems. It is anticipated that Two connector kits are available for installation of
the no 2 DME-442 would be strapped P1-9 to the DME-442. Kit CPN 634-4192-013 is for those
ground while the no 1 would be left open. This installations requiring special transient voltage
ensures that those units accept tuning informa- protection. This kit includes a special mating con-
tion specifically intended for that unit. Tuning nector mounting plate that includes an MOV
information that is intended for either (or both) (metallic oxide varister). All other installations use
unit(s) must present a source/destination iden- kit CPN 634-4192-004. Other than the connector
tifier “0”. This S/D is accepted regardless of P1- mounting plate, both kits include the DME-442
9 strapping. mating connector, antenna cable connector (TNC),
55 of CPN 372-2514-110 contacts, and other neces-
2.5.4.3.3 IND-42( ) Strapping Options sary hardware. The indicator mating connector
must be ordered separately.
Table 2-7 shows the strapping options for the IND-
42A/C indicator. The following paragraphs give ad- 2.5.4.3.5 DME-442 Standby/Keep Alive Power
ditional details. Input
a. Channel 3 Display Enable (P1-11 to P1-25),
On DME-442 Transceivers with Service Bulletin 2
(IND-42A only)
P1-58 is reserved. On DME-442 Transceivers with-
With these pins strapped together (at the rear out SB 2, P1-58 is keep alive power input. On units
connector), display of DME information from with SB 2 or on units with +28.0 V dc.

Table 2-7. DME-42 and IND-42( ) Strapping Options.
REAR CONNECTOR
UNIT OPERATING CHARACTERISTIC
PIN NO(S)
STRAPPED NOT STRAPPED
DME-42 P1-48 to P1-7 with P1-50 Serial tuning of channel 1 is selected. (DME 2 x 5 tuning of channel 1 is selected.
(-001, -003) not strapped hold is initiated by serial control data bit (DME hold must be initiated by inter-
from CTL.) rupting frequency common — P1-42.)
DME-42 P1-50 to P1-7 with P1-48 2 x 5 tuning of channel 2 is selected. (DME Same as above
(-001, -003) not strapped hold must be initiated by interrupting freq
common – P1-42.)
DME-42 P1-50 and P1-48 to P1-7 2 x 5 tuning of channel 3 is selected. (DME Same as above
(-001, -003) hold must be initiated by interrupting freq
common – P1-42.)
DME-42 P1-9 to P1-7 6-wire, 40-mV/nmi, and DME flag outputs 6-wire, 40-mV/nmi, and DME flag out-
are from channel 2. puts are from channel 1
IND-42A P1-11 to P1-25 Channel 3 display enabled; Channels 1, 2, Display limited to channels 1 or 2.
and 3 display selectable.
IND-42A P1-19 to P1-25 Channel 2 displayed upon initial power up. Channel 1 displayed upon initial power
up.
IND-42C P1-19 to P1-25 Displays only channel 2 data. Displays only channel 1 data.
RANGE (NMI) DISPLAY INCREMENT
STRAPPED NOT STRAPPED
IND-42( ) P1-20 to P1-25 0 to 19.9 0.01 nmi 0.1 nmi

20 to 199.9 0.1 nmi 0.1 nmi
200 to max 1 nmi 1 nmi

Table 2-8. DME-42 DME Transceiver, Connector Pin Functions.

1 1aA 1aA IND-42( ) P1-4
2 1aB DME serial data 1aB Serial data output IND-42( ) P1-5
3 Shield Shield
4 Hi Hi
5 Lo DME audio channel 2 Lo DME audio 2 output Audio system
6 Chassis gnd Chassis gnd Airframe
7 Strapping common (gnd) Common strapping connect Strapping options
8 R/t on/off R/t on/off, input, 0 = off IND-42( ) P1-9 or CTL-32: P1-C
9 Channel 1/2 select Channel 1/2 select for 6-wire and 40 P1-7 for ch 2
mV/nmi out; unstrapped = ch 1 (serial
output unaffected)
10 DME flag DME valid flag, +25 V dc < valid; +1 V FMS, ANS
dc > invalid
11 0.1 MHZ A(F) 2 x 5 tuning, 0.1 MHz, A FMS, ANS
12 0.1 MHZ E(F) 2 x 5 tuning, 0.1 MHz, E FMS, ANS
13 Suppression shield Shield for suppression
14 Suppression Suppression, input/output Other L-band equipment;

transponder, other DME, etc
15 Hi Hi
16 Lo DME audio channel 1 Lo DME audio channel 1 output Audio system
17 Gnd * Gnd *
18 Video test Video test input/output For bench testing
19 0.1 MHz C(F) 2 x 5 tuning, 0.1 MHz, C FMS, ANS
20 (Reserved — see note 1) No function in DME-42
21 Shield Shield
22 Spare
23 HI Clock Hi 6-wire, BCD distance BDI-36: P2-15/12

analog output, clock HIS-74: P3-33
24 Lo Lo BDI-36: P2-14/13
HIS-74: P3-38
25 Spare
26 Self-test (F) (see note 5) Discrete self-test input for channel 1 External switch (if desired) to
only; 0 = test. ground
Not needed if self-test is initiated on
CTL-32
27 0.1 MHz D(F) 2 x 5 tuning, 0.1 MHz, D FMS, ANS
*If audio line(s) is shielded, connect both shields to P1-17.


28 1 MHz A(F) 2 x 5 tuning, 1 MHz, A FMS, ANS

29 Shield Shield
30 Lo Data Lo 6-wire, BCD distance BDI-36: P2-18/9,
analog output, data HSI-74: P3-28
31 Hi Hi BDI-36: P2-19/8
HIS-74: P3-30
32 1 MHz C(F) 2 x 5 tuning, 1 MHz, C FMS, ANS
33 +40 mV/nmi shield Shield for 36/40
34 (Reserved — see note 2) No function in DME-42
35 1 MHz E(F) 2 x 5 tuning, 1 MHz, E FMS, ANS
36 +40 mV/nmi, hi 40 mV/nmi analog output RNAV, et al
37 Shield Shield
38 Lo Sync Lo 6-wire, BCD distance BDI-36: P2-16/11,
analog output, sync
39 Hi Hi HIS-74: P3-25
BDI-36: P2-27/10,
HIS-74: P3-29
40 +40 mV/nmi, common (gnd) 40 mV/nmi analog output, common RNAV, et al
41 Spare
42 R/t freq common 2 x 5 tuning common FMS, ANS
43 1 MHz D(F) 2 x 5 tuning, 1 MHz, D FMS, ANS
44 0.01 MHz C(F) 2 x 5 tuning, 0.01 MHz, C FMS, ANS
45 Shield Shield
46 1bB DME serial data 1bB Digital data output FMS
47 1bA 1bA FMS
48 Serial/parallel tune select Strap for serial tuning unstrapped = P1-7 for serial tuning (P1-50
2 x 5 tuning of channel 1 only, see note must not be strapped)
4
49 Test A Output for bench test Bench test only
50 2 x 5 channel select For DME-42 -003 only, strap to P1-7 for P1-7 for 2 x 5 channel 2 select
2 x 5 tuning of channel 2 (P1-48 must (P1-48 must not be strapped).
not be strapped in order to select chan- P1-7 and P1-48 for 2 x 5 chan-
nel 2). Strap to P1-7 along with P1-48 nel 3 select
for 2 x 5 tuning of channel 3. For P1-50
unstrapped, the function/description is
the same as given for P1-48.
51 10 MHz E(F) 2 x 5 tuning, 10 MHz, E FMS, ANS
52 10 MHz A(F) 2 x 5 tuning, 10 MHz, A FMS, ANS
53 Test B Output for bench test
54 1aA 1aA CTL-32: P1-S


55 1aB Serial control 1aB Serial control input CTL-32: P1-R

56 Shield
57 Spare
58 Spare
59 Power gnd 28 V dc power input, gnd Power source
60 +27.5 V dc DME pwr 28 V dc power input, + Power source
Note
1. STANDBY function in DME-40

2. +12 VDC Ref for 40 MV/nmi analog output from DME-40
3. (F) = “FALSE” OR “NOT”
4. For DME-42 -001, channels 2 and 3 are tuned only via serial tuning input and are independent of channel 1 tuning means. For
DME-42 -003, channel 1, 2, or 3 (as selected by strapping between P1-7, P1-48, and P1-50) may be tuned via 2 x 5 tuning.
5. For DME-42 -001, channel 1 can be self-tested via serial data or discrete (ground) input to P1-26. Channels 2 and 3 can be self-
tested only via serial data input. For DME-42 -003, a discrete (ground) input to P1-26 will initiate self-test on any channel cur-
rently being tuning via 2 x 5 parallel tuning input. The remaining channels can be self-tested only via the serial data input.

(NOTE)
1 DME CSDB data 1a A CSDB data output 1a A IND-42( ): P1-4
2 DME CSDB data 1a B CSDB data output 1a B IND-42( ): P1-5
3 DME CSDB data 1a shield CSDB data output shield
4 DME audio channel 2-hi DME audio ch 2 output - hi Audio system
5 DME audio channel 2-lo DME audio ch 2 output - lo
6 Gnd DME gnd
7 Strapping common (gnd) Common strapping connection (2) Strapping options
8 ____ ____ IND-42( ) P1-9, or CTL-32

R/t on/SBY R/t on/SBY input; 0=SBY P1-C
9 Side 1/side 2 select Side 1/side 2 S/D (source/destination) (1, 2) P1-7 or DME gnd
label select
10 Fault monitor Failure monitor output: +28 V dc (200 (3) As required

mA max) = valid; 1 V (max) n= invalid
11 Spare
12 Spare


(NOTE)
13 Suppression shield Shield for suppression
14 Suppression Suppression, input/output Other L-Band equipment:

DME, Transponder, etc
15 DME audio channel 1-hi DME audio ch 1 output - hi
16 DME audio channel 1-lo DME audio ch 1 output - lo Audio system
17 Gnd DME audio ch 1 output - gnd
18 Video test Video test input/output For bench testing
19 Spare
20 Reserved
21 Spare
22 Spare
23 Spare
24 Spare
25 Spare
26 Self-test (F) Self-test input; 0=test; not needed if IND-42C: P1-18

self-test is initiated through data bus
27 CTL Port A - A Tuning control port A hi input FMS, ANS, or CTL
28 CTL Port A - B Tuning control port A lo input FMS, ANS or CTL
29 429 Serial Data 1a shield ARINC 429M data output 1a shield
30 429 Serial Data 1aB ARINC 429M data output 1aB 429 data display
31 429 Serial Data 1aA ARINC 429M data output 1aA 429 data display
32 CTL Port A - shield Tuning control port A shield FMS, ANS, or CTL
33 Spare
34 Reserved
35 Spare
36 Spare
37 ARINC 429M Data 1b - shield ARINC 429M data output 1 b - shield
38 ARINC 429M Data 1b - B ARINC 429M data output 1b - B (2) 429 data display
39 ARINC 429M Data 1b - A ARINC 429M data output 1b - A (2) 429 data display
40 Control Port B - shield Control Port B - shield Tuning source
41 Spare
42 Port A/B select Port A/B select strap (1, 2) P1-7
43 Control Port B - A Control Port B - A (1) Tuning source
44 Control Port B - B Control Port B - B (1) Tuning source
45 DME CSDB Data 1b - shield CSDB data output 1b - shield CSDB display
46 DME CSDB Data 1b - B CSDB data output 1b - B (1) CSDB display


(NOTE)
47 DME CSDB Data 1b - A CSDB data output 1b - A (1) CSDB display
48 CSDB/429 select CSDB/ARINC 429M tune select strap (1, 2) P1-7
49 Test A Output for bench testing only Bench test only
50 Burst tune enable Burst tuning select strap (1, 2) P1-7
51 Spare
52 Spare
53 Test B Output for bench testing only
54 Control Port C - A Tune input port C - A (1) Tuning source
55 Control Port C - B Tune input port C - B (1) Tuning source
56 Control Port C - shield Tune input port C - shield Tuning source
57 Spare
58 RESERVED Reserved (4) On units without SB 2

+27.5-V dc source 200 µA
max
59 Power gnd 28 V dc power input, gnd Power source
60 +27.5 V dc DME pwr 28 V dc power input, + Power source
Note
1. Refer to DME-442 Strapping Options for description.

2. If strapping is done at rear connector, straps can be connected to P1-7. Otherwise, connect straps to DME ground.
3. Failure monitor output:
No warn: +28 V dc, (NLT +25.5 V dc) at 200-mA max load.
Warn: NMT +1 V dc
Primary power off
Diagnostic codes while not in self-test: 01, 02, 03, 09
At power-up only: 07, 08
In self-test: 04, 05, 06
CPU program execution interrupted
4. On DME-442 Transceivers with Service Bulletin 2, P1-58 is RESERVED. On DME-442 Transceivers without SB 2, P1-58 is the
keep-alive power input.
Without SB 2: A noninterrupting +27.5-V dc power source (battery) connected to P1-58, to retain tuning and lock-on information
in case of primary power (P1-60) interruptions of 1 second or more duration. Keep-alive source must supply at least 200 µA.

Table 2-10. IND-42( ) DME Indicator, Connector Pin Functions.

1 5 V panel lighting (+) 5 V ac/dc panel lighting in Lighting source

2 (Key)
3 (Reserved)
4 DME serial data (A) Serial data input (A) DME-42: P1-1
5 DME serial data (B) Serial data input (B) DME-42: P1-2
6 Spare
7 DME serial data (shield) Shield for 4/5 (May not be needed)
8 Spare
9 ____ ____ DME-442: P1-8
R/t on/SBY out R/t on/SBY output 0 = SBY, open = on
10 Dimming bus Dimming bus input Similar pins on other Pro Line
II IND or CTL’s
11 Ch 3 display select Strap to enable ch 3 display; Strap to P1-25
unstrapped = ch 3 inhibited
12 Spare
13 28 V dc power 28 V dc primary power, + Power source +
14 28 V lighting input 28 V dc lighting input + Lighting source
15 Lighting common 28 V/5 V lighting common Lighting source
16 Spare
17 Spare
18 Self-test input/output Self-test input/output Do not use unless suitable in-
terlocks are provided to protect
FMS and ANS.
19 Ch 2 enable* Strap for channel 2 data display; un- P1-25
strapped = channel 1 display
20 Extended auto range Strap for distance display to nearest Strap to P1-25 if desired
0.01 nmi for distances below 20 nmi;
unstrapped for distance display to near-
est 0.1 nmi
21 Self-test input Self-test input for indicator-only test External switch optional
22 (Key)
23 Spare
24 Spare
25 Power ground 28 V dc power common Power source
*IND-42A: Refers to initial display at power-up.

IND-42C: Refers to continuous display.

2.5.5 Supplementary CTL-32/DME-42/VIR-32 2.5.5.6 Remote DME Tuning via 2 x 5

Interconnect Information
a. For DME-42, CPN 622-6263-001
2.5.5.1 Power and Ground Connections
With DME P1-48 open, the DME channel 1
(only) can be tuned via a direct 2 x 5 input. Un-
See accompanying diagram for power and ground
like the VOR, the DME has no parallel-to-serial
connections.
conversion and feedback capability. Therefore,
other provisions are needed for VOR tuning in
2.5.5.2 Cable Groupings
this case. DME channels 2 and 3 are not af-
fected by the 2 x 5/serial strap and may still be
The red oval symbols are intended to show cable
tuned via the serial input.
groupings that may be conveniently tied into bun-
dles with a common source(s) and/or destina- b. For DME-42, CPN 622-6263-003
tions(s). These symbols should not be confused with
With DME P1-48 and P1-50 open, the DME
shield symbols.
channel 1 (only) can be tuned via a direct 2 x 5
input. Unlike the VOR, the DME has no paral-
2.5.5.3 CTL-32 Serial Tuning Cross-
lel-to-serial conversion and feedback capability.
Connections
Therefore, other provisions are needed for VOR
tuning in this case. With DME P1-48 open and
If an external serial tune source is used, that source
P1-50 strapped to P1-7, DME channel 2 is
connects to CTL-32 serial control input pins P1-a
tuned via the 2 x 5 input. With both P1-48 and
and Z and the CTL-32 cross-side connections are
P1-50 strapped to P1-7, DME channel 3 is
not used, or some means of disconnecting the cross-
tuned via the 2 x 5 input.
side CTL must be provided while the remote source
is active.
2.6 POSTINSTALLATION CALIBRATION
AND ADJUSTMENTS
2.5.5.4 Remote Tuning
2.6.1 DME-42/442 Distance Measuring
Grounding P1-K causes the CTL-32 to become to-
Equipment, Special Postinstallation
tally passive, delivering only the tuning informa-
Test/Calibration
tion supplied to the serial tuning input pins P1-a
and Z or P1-U and V. The upper window will dis-
An extensive self-test diagnostic routine can be ini-
play the frequency to which the VOR is tuned, as
tiated in the DME-42 or DME-442 by pushing the
supplied at the input pins P1-V and U, and the
TEST button on the CTL-32 NAV Control or by ac-
lower window is dashed. The CTL-32 will continue
tuating an external DME test switch. The self-test
to output serial data in this mode, allowing the
routine takes approximately 10 seconds to com-
DME-42 to be tuned serially if desired.
plete. After initiating self-test, all display segments
and annunciators on the IND-42( ) illuminate for a
2.5.5.5 Remote VOR Tuning via 2 x 5 Parallel lamp test. If an out-of-tolerance condition is de-
Input tected, dIAG is displayed in the numeric (left) dis-
play and the diagnostic code is displayed in the al-
If direct 2 x 5 tuning is used to tune the VIR (VIR phanumeric (right) display, and the test sequence
P1-6 and CTL P1-b open), the VIR feeds back tun- ends. Following the lamp test, and if no out-of-
ing information to the CTL-32, which in turn tunes tolerance condition is detected, the numeric display
the DME-42 channel 1 to the same station via the shows a test distance of 100 NM. The display in the
serial data lines (DME 2 x 5 serial tune select P1-48 alphanumeric window depends on what is selected;
grounded). (Channels 2 and 3 are unaffected by this ID, MIN, or KT and will show “AOK” at the comple-
tune select pin.) If the cross-side CTL is strapped tion of the test routine if no out-of-tolerance condi-
for side 2 operation and is cross-coupled to the on- tions have been detected. (The DME aural output
side CTL, the DME channel 2 can be tuned to the will be the Morse code .- --- -.-; the characters A, O,
cross-side NAV station. See Figure 2-8 for an inter- and K.) If KT is selected, the alphanumeric display
connect drawing of the tuning lines and necessary will show a test ground speed of 100 KT. If MIN is
strapping involved in this configuration. selected, the alphanumeric display will show a test

time of 60 MIN. Completion of self-test is indicated cycle, the test should be made as a preflight
when either the IND-42( ) displays return to nor- check and not during critical flight times.
mal or the word “dIAG” along with a self-test diag- Furthermore, self-test may be inhibited by
nostic code is displayed on the IND-42( ). A list of an interlock with autopilot engage logic,
the diagnostic codes is provided in the maintenance depending on the installation.
section of this manual. Figure 2-25 shows the in-
put/output circuit for the DME-42. Figure 2-26 2.6.2 DME Audio Output
shows the input/output circuit for the DME-442.
These diagrams may be useful as additional infor-
mation in troubleshooting the DME installation. The factory setting of the DME audio is 50 mW. In
a particular installation the audio system may re-
Note quire a level set other than the factory setting. Re-
fer to the maintenance section in the DME-42 or
Due to the length of time (approximately 10 DME-442 repair manual for the adjustment of the
seconds) it takes to complete the self-test DME audio.

INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM CHANGES
REVISION DESCRIPTION OF REVISION SERVICE

IDENTIFICATION AND REASON FOR CHANGE BULLETIN EFFECTIVITY
None The cable group symbols are shown in red

to more easily distinguish them from the
shield symbols.
A1 IND-42A/B is changed to IND-42( ). The

IND-42C replaces the IND-42B which is
discontinued. Therefore, an indicator with
DME self-test initiation capability is no
longer offered.
A2 VOR/LOC and marker beacon audio con-

nection is corrected. See the supplemen-
tary interconnect information for details.
A3 VIR-32 no 2 serial data lab output correct

to P1-47. VOR data common pin corrected
from P1-31 to P1-30.
A4 VIR-32 dc gnd, P1-40, corrected to show

the required external connection to gnd.
This is the primary power ground pin.
Therefore, with power properly connected
it should be operational.
A5 VOR 26-V ac reference source connection

added.
A6 HPU-74 DME no 1 data L pin corrected

from P3-28 to P3-26.
A7 Add DME hold line to HPU-74 P3-60 with

P3-20.
B1 Add notes 2 and 3.
Figure 2-6 (Sheet A). Dual DME/NAV System With RMI/BDI and HSI, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-6 (Sheet 1 of 2). Dual DME/NAV System With RMI/BDI

and HSI, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-6 (Sheet 2). Dual DME/NAV System With RMI/BDI and HSI, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-7 (Sheet 1 of 2). Single DME/Dual NAV System With

RMI/BDI and HSI, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-7 (Sheet 2). Single DME/Dual NAV System With RMI/BDI and HSI, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-8. Single DME-42 With CTL-30 Control,


Figure 2-9. Single DME-42 With CTL-32 Control, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-10 (Sheet 1 of 3). DME-42 System With Tie Points,


Figure 2-10 (Sheet 2). DME-42 System With Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-10 (Sheet 3). DME-42 System With Tie Points,


Figure 2-11. DME-442 Interconnect Wiring Diagram, Tuning Variations

Figure 2-12. DME-442 Interconnect Wiring Diagram, Tuning Variations

Figure 2-13 (Sheet 1 of 4). DME-442 System With CTL-32 Control


Figure 2-13 (Sheet 2). DME-442 System With CTL-32 Control and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-13 (Sheet 3). DME-442 System With CTL-32 Control and

Figure 2-13 (Sheet 4). DME-442 System With CTL-32 Control and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-14 (Sheet 1 of 2). DME-442 System With ARINC 429


Figure 2-14 (Sheet 2). DME-442 System With ARINC 429 Control and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-15. DME-42 Distance Measuring Equipment, Outline and

Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-16. DME-42 DME Transceiver, Connector Pin Assignments

Figure 2-17. DME-442 (CPN 622-7309-001) DME Transceiver,

Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-18. DME-442 (CPN 622-7309-001) DME Transceiver, Connector Pin Assignments

Figure 2-19. DME-442 (CPN 622-7309-101) DME Transceiver,


Figure 2-20. DME-442 (CPN 622-7309-101) DME Transceiver, Connector Pin Assignments

Figure 2-21. ANT-42 DME/Transponder Antenna, Outline and

Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-22. 237Z-1 DME/Transponder Antenna, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-23. IND-42A/C DME Indicator, Outline and

Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-24. IND-42A/C DME Indicator, Connector Pin Assignments

Figure 2-25 (Sheet 1 of 2). DME-42/CTL-32 Input/Output

Circuit Diagram

Figure 2-25 (Sheet 2). DME-42/CTL-32 Input/Output Circuit Diagram

Figure 2-26. DME-442 Input/Output Circuit Diagram

523-0778241-003118
3rd Edition, 5 May 1999
GPS-4000/4000A Global Positioning Receiver and

APR-4000 Approach Computer
Installation
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page
2.1 GENERAL INFORMATION ................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.2 OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.3 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING EQUIPMENT .............................................................................................. 2-16
2.4 PREINSTALLATION CHECK.............................................................................................................................. 2-16
2.5 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 2-16
2.6 PLANNING ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-16
2.6.1 Strapping Options........................................................................................................................................................ 2-16
2.6.2 Cooling Considerations................................................................................................................................................ 2-17
2.7 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................................................................. 2-17
2.8 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES ........................................................................................................................ 2-18
2.8.1 VHF COMM and GPS Spacing Guidelines................................................................................................................. 2-18
2.8.2 GPS-4000/-4000A and APR-4000 Installation............................................................................................................ 2-19
2.8.3 GPS-4000/-4000A and APR-4000 Removal................................................................................................................. 2-19
2.9 POST INSTALLATION CHECK .......................................................................................................................... 2-20
NOTICE: This section replaces second edition dated 6 January 1997.

Page No Issue
* Title ....................................... 5 May 1999
* List of Effective Pages........... 5 May 1999
* 2-1 thru 2-39 .......................... 5 May 1999


1st Ed 3 June 96 None
2nd Ed 6 Jan 97 1,2
3rd Ed 5 May 1999 3

section II
installation
2.1 GENERAL INFORMATI ON
This section provides all information needed to install the GPS-4000 (CPN 822-0931-001, -002, -003) Global
Positioning Receiver, GPS-4000A (CPN 822-1377-001) Global Positioning Receiver, and APR-4000 (CPN
822-0933-001) Approach Computer. The GPS-4000 is shown in Figure 2-1. The following topics are in-
cluded: Operational overview, unpacking, preinstallation check, special instructions, planning, cabling in-
structions, installation and removal, post installation check, system configuration, and diagnostics.
2.2 OPERATIONAL OVERV IEW
The GPS-4000/4000A and APR-4000 provide precise position, velocity, and time measurements for en route,
terminal and non-precision approaches conforming with ARINC 743A. The APR-4000 provides an additional
precision approach function. The position, velocity, and time determinations are computed by the GPS-
4000/4000A and APR-4000 based on satellite signals provided by the Global Positioning System (GPS) satel-
lite constellation. The GPS-4000 (-002 and –003 statuses), GPS-4000A, and APR-4000 may be used as a
primary means of navigation for oceanic/remote operations.
5 May 1999 2-1

installation 523-0778241
Figure 2-1. GPS-4000 Global Positioning Receiver
5 May 1999
2-2
PUBLICATION ATA NO COLLINS PART

NUMBER
Pro Line II Comm/Nav/Pulse System Installation Manual N.A. 523-0772719

Installation Practices Manual N.A. 523-0775254
Table 2-2. GPS-4000 Equipment Specifications.
Certification
TSO
FAA TSO-C129 Class B1
EUROCAE ED-TBD
Environmental
FAA DO-160C, [ A2F1]-BB[BLMY]E1XXXXX[BZ]AZZYZ[Z3Z3]XX,
refer to Table 2-3 for additional information.
EUROCAE ED-14C
Software DO-178B Level C Verification
Physical 2 MCU per ARINC 600-9

Size
Length 368.8 mm (14.52 in)
Mounting Information 1/4 ATR, refer to Table 2-8 for additional information
Maintenance Requirements On Condition.
Electrical
Power/Straps
Input Power (P1B-15A, P1B-15B) +27.5- (+22.0- to +34.0-) V dc input
Input current: 0.56 A
Power dissipation: 15 W max
Power Return (P1B-15D, P1B-15C) +27.5-V dc return
Power Gnd (P1C-2) Chassis ground
GPS Fault Return (P1B-4B) Internal Ground
Input Discrete Return (P1B-4D)
Data bus Inputs

General Purpose Bus 1 General Purpose #1 buses are discrete selectable (P1B-5C) between ARINC 429
(#1A)(P1B-2C) Low Speed input data and ARINC 419 Air Data input data. Onside General Pur-
(#1B)(P1B-2D) pose #1A and #1B (P1B-2C/D) prioritized bus pair data as Primary. Xside Gen-
eral Purpose #2A and #2B (P1B-12C/D) prioritized bus pair data as Secondary.
General Purpose Bus 1
(#2A)(P1B-12C)
(#2B)(P1B-12D)
5 May 1999 2-3

General Purpose Bus 2 General Purpose #2 buses are discrete selectable (P1A-12A) between ARINC 429
(#1A)(P1B-2A) High or Low Speed input data. Onside General Purpose #1A and #1B (P1B-2A/B)
(#1B)(P1B-2B) prioritized bus pair data as Primary. Xside General Purpose #2A and #2B (P1B-
12A/B) prioritized bus pair data as Secondary.
(#2A)(P1B-12A)
(#2B)(P1B-12B)
General Purpose Bus 3 General Purpose #3 buses are discrete selectable (P1A-12B) between ARINC 429
3C/D) prioritized bus pair data as Secondary.
(#2A)(P1B-3C)
(#2B)(P1B-3D)
Data Loader (A)(P1B-9A) Data Loader accepts ARINC 429 High Speed input data and conforms to ARINC
Data Loader (B)(P1B-9B) 615 protocol.
Discrete Inputs
FMS Type select (P1A-4A) Open = ARINC 743A (Collins FMS)
Grounded = ARINC 743 (Universal FMS)
DADS 429/419 select (P1B-5C) Open = General Purpose #1 buses accept ARINC 429 Low Speed inputs.
Grounded = General Purpose #1 buses accept ARINC 419 Low Speed inputs.
General Purpose #2 HS/LS select Open = General Purpose #2 buses accept ARINC 429 High Speed inputs.
(P1A-12A) Grounded = General Purpose #2 buses accept ARINC 429 Low Speed inputs.
(P1A-12B) Grounded = General Purpose #3 buses accept ARINC 429 Low Speed inputs.
Data Loader Mode select (P1B-7C) Open = Normal GPS operation mode selected.
Grounded = Data Load mode selected.
GPS Data HS/LS Select #1 HS/LS #1 HS/LS #2 Bus # = Bus Speed
(P1B-4C) OPEN OPEN Bus 1 and 2 = HS; Bus 3 = HS.
GPS Data HS/LS Select #2 OPEN GND Bus 1 and 2 = HS; Bus 3 = LS.
(P1A-5D) GND OPEN Bus 1 and 2 = LS; Bus 3 = LS.
GND GND Bus 1 and 2 = LS; Bus 3 = HS.
Source/Destination Identifier (SDI) SDI #1 SDI #2 Unit Installation
(SDI #1 P1B-5B) GND OPEN No. 1 or Left Unit
(SDI #2 P1B-5A) OPEN GND No. 2 or Right Unit
GND GND No. 3 or 3rd Unit
Air/Ground Input (P1B-7D) Open = Aircraft in air.
Grounded = Aircraft on ground.
Data Bus Outputs
GPS Data Bus #1 (A)(P1B-1A) GPS Data Output Buses #1 and #2 provide independently buffered redundant
GPS Data Bus #1 (B)(P1B-1B) ARINC 429 output data. The GPS Data Outputs buses are discrete selected
GPS Data Bus #2 (A)(P1B-6A) (P1B-4C) between either High or Low Speed ARINC 429. Output Buses #1 and
GPS Data Bus #2 (B)(P1B-6B) #2 are paired for High/Low Speed bus rate selection.
GPS Data Bus #3 (A)(P1B-11A) GPS Data Output Bus #3 provides independently buffered redundant ARINC 429
GPS Data Bus #3 (B)(P1B-11B) output data. The GPS Data output is discrete selectable (P1A-5D) between High
and Low Speed ARINC 429.
Maintenance Data Bus ARINC 429 Low Speed output containing maintenance data.
(A)(P1A-15A)
(B)(P1A-15B)
Data Loader Bus (A)(P1A-12C) ARINC 429 High Speed output dedicated for connection to an ARINC 615 data
Data Loader Bus (B)(P1A-12D) loader.
5 May 1999
2-4
Discrete Outputs
GPS Fault Discrete (P1B-4A) Open = Normal Operation.
Ground = Critical Fault Detected.
Time Mark #1 (A)(P1B-1C) Time Mark Outputs #1, #2, and #3 provide redundant differential “Time Mark”
Time Mark #1 (B)(P1B-1D) outputs used to synchronize the GPS output with various external avionics sys-
Time Mark #2 (A)(P1B-6C) tems. Each Time Mark Output is capable of driving up to three receiving devices
Time Mark #2 (B)(P1B-6D) with each receiving device having a 330Ω input load.
Time Mark #3 (A)(P1B-11C)
Time Mark #3 (B)(P1B-11D)
GPS RF In (P1C-5) RF input of 50 Ω impedance. Provides +12.00 ±10% at 100 mA preamplifier
power to the active Antenna through the RF cable center conductor.
Table 2-3. GPS-4000 Environmental Qualifications Form.
CONDITIONS DO-160C SPECIFICATION

PARA NO
Temp and Altitude 4.0 Categories 'A2' and 'F1'.

Temp Operation Range -40 C (-40 F) to +70 C (+158 F)
Temp Storage Range -55 C (-67 F) to +85 C (+185 F)
Decompression Altitude 55,000 ft
Overcompression Altitude –15,000 ft
Loss of Cooling Not Applicable
'A2' -15 C (+5 F), +70 C (+158 F), -55 C (-67 F), +85 C (+185 F) Certified
for installation in a partially controlled temperature and pressurized
location in an aircraft where pressures are no lower than an altitude
equivalent of 4600 m (15 000 ft) msl.
'F1' -20 C (-4 F), +55 C (+131 F), -55 C (-67 F), +85 C (+185 F) Certified
for installation in a nonpressurized but controlled temperature
location in an aircraft that is operated at altitudes up to 16 800 m
(55 000 ft) msl.
Temperature Variation 5.0 'B' Certified for installation in a noncontrolled or partially controlled
temperature location in the aircraft.
Humidity 6.0 'B' Certified for a Severe Humidity Environment - Level 1.
Shock 7.0
Operational 7.2 Tested at 6 g peak (11 ms duration)
Crash Safety: 7.3
Impulse 7.3.1 Tested at 15 g (11 ms duration)
Sustained 7.3.2 Tested at 12 g min (acceleration)
Vibration 8.0 'B'. Certified for equipment rack mounting in a fixed wing turbojet or
turbofan aircraft.
'L'. Certified for fuselage mounting in a multi-engine piston or turboprop
fixed wing aircraft over 5700 kg (12 500 lb).
'M'. Certified for fuselage or equipment rack mounting in a single or
multi-engine, piston or turboprop, fixed wing aircraft less than 5700 kg
(12 500 lb). Also certified for equipment rack mounting in a multi-engine
piston or turboprop fixed wing aircraft over 5700 kg (12 500 lb).
'Y'. Certified for fuselage mounting in a piston or turbojet rotary wing
aircraft.
5 May 1999 2-5

Table 2-3. GPS-4000 Environmental Qualifications Form.
CONDITIONS DO-160C SPECIFICATION

PARA NO
Explosion Proofness 9.0 'E1'. Certified for installation in a location where an explosive atmosphere
may occur as a result of leakage or spillage.
Waterproofness 10.0 'X' (no test required). Certified for installation in locations not subject to
falling water (including condensation), rain water, or sprayed water.
Fluids Susceptibility 11.0 'X' (no test required). Certified for installation in locations not exposed to
fluid contamination from fuel, hydraulic fluids, oil, solvents, etc.
Sand and Dust 12.0 'X' (no test required). Certified for installation in locations not subject to
blowing sand and dust.
Fungus Resistance 13.0 'X'. Fungus resistance test not performed.
Salt Spray 14.0 'X' (no test performed). Certified for installation in locations not subject to a
salt atmosphere.
Magnetic Effect 15.0 'Z'. Unit causes a 1 deflection of an uncompensated compass at a distance
less than 0.3 m (1.0 ft).
Power Input 16.0 'B'. Certified for use on aircraft electrical systems where primary power is
from engine driven alternator/rectifiers or dc generator where a
significant capacity battery is floating on the dc bus at all times.
'Z'. Certified for use on aircraft electrical systems not applicable to any other
category. For example, a dc system from a variable range generator
where a small capacity or no battery is floating on the dc bus.
Voltage Spike 17.0 'A'. Certified for installation in systems where a high degree of voltage spike
protection is required.
Audio Frequency Susceptibility 18.0 'Z'. Certified for use on aircraft electrical systems not applicable to any other
Induced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 'Z'. Certified for operation in systems where interference-free operation is
required.
RF Susceptibility 20.0 'Y'. Certified for installation in a severe electromagnetic environment.
Emission of RF Energy 21.0 'Z'. Certified for operation in systems where interference-free operation is
required.
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 'Z3 Z3'. Certified for operation in a moderately exposed environment.
Susceptibility
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 'X'. Certified for installation in an environment where lightning effects are
insignificant or not applicable.
Icing 24.0 'X' (no test performed). Certified for installation in a location not subject to
ice formation.
5 May 1999
2-6
Table 2-4. GPS-4000A and APR-4000 Equipment Specifications.
Certification
TSO
FAA GPS-4000A TSO-C129a, Classes B1
APR-4000 TBD
EUROCAE ED-72A
Environmental
FAA DO-160D,
[(A2)(F1)]BBB[(SLM)(TRCC1)U]EWXXXXZ[BZ]AZC[YYP]H[(Z3)(Z4)]XAA,
refer to Table 2-7 for additional information.
EUROCAE ED-14D
Software DO-178B Level B Verification
Physical 2 MCU per ARINC 600-10

Size
Length GPS-4000A 369.0mm (14.53 in) max
APR-4000 369.1 mm (14.53 in)
Weight GPS-4000A 2.71 Kg (5.96 lb)
APR-4000 2.99 Kg (6.59 lb) nominal
Mounting Information GPS-4000A 1/4 ATR, refer to Table 2-9 for additional information
APR-4000 ¼ ATR, refer to Table 2-10 for additional information

Electrical
Power/Straps +28.0- (+18.0- to +34.0-) V dc input
Input Power (P1B-15A, P1B-15B)
GPS-4000A
Power dissipation: 18.0 W max
APR-4000
Power dissipation: 30 W max
Power Return (P1B-15D, P1B-15C) +28.0-V dc return
Power Gnd (P1C-2) Chassis ground
GPS Fault Return (P1B-4B) Internal Ground
Input Discrete Return (P1B-4D)
Data bus Inputs
General Purpose Bus 1 General Purpose #1 buses are discrete selectable (P1B-5C) between ARINC 429
(#1A)(P1B-2C) High or Low Speed input data and ARINC 419 Air Data input data. Onside Gen-
(#1B)(P1B-2D) eral Purpose #1A and #1B (P1B-2C/D) prioritized bus pair data as Primary.
Xside General Purpose #2A and #2B (P1B-12C/D) prioritized bus pair data as
General Purpose Bus 1 Secondary.
(#2A)(P1B-12C)
(#2B)(P1B-12D)
5 May 1999 2-7

General Purpose Bus 2 General Purpose #2 buses are discrete selectable (P1A-12A) between ARINC 429
12A/B) prioritized bus pair data as Secondary.
(#2A)(P1B-12A)
(#2B)(P1B-12B)
General Purpose Bus 3 GPS-4000A

(#1A)(P1B-3A) General Purpose #3 buses are discrete selectable (P1A-12B) between ARINC 429
(#1B)(P1B-3B) High or Low Speed input data. Onside General Purpose #1A and #1B (P1B-3A/B)
prioritized bus pair data as Primary. Xside General Purpose #2A and #2B (P1B-
General Purpose Bus 3 3C/D) prioritized bus pair data as Secondary.
(#2A)(P1B-3C)
(#2B)(P1B-3D) APR-4000
Also processes External Differential Message ID (Label 045) and message data
(Label 046).
Continuous Tune Bus APR-4000 only
(#1A)(P1A-13A) Continuous Tune buses are discrete selectable between ARINC 429 High or Low
(#1B)(P1A-13B) Speed input data. Onside Continuous Tune bus is provided by #1A and #1B
(P1A-13A/B). Xside Continuous Tune bus is provided by #2A and #2B (P1A-
(#2A)(P1A-1D) 1D/2D)
(#2B)(P1A-2D)
Data Loader (A)(P1B-9A) Data Loader accepts ARINC 429 High Speed input data and conforms to ARINC
Data Loader (B)(P1B-9B) 615 protocol.
Burst-Tune Bus (A)(P1A-1A) Burst –Tune bus accepts ARINC 429 inputs for connection to a source for burst
(B)(P1A-2A) tuning.
RS-422 Test Bus (A)(P1B-10A) RS-422 Test bus is for GPS testing.
(B)(P1B-10B)
Discrete Inputs
FMS Type select (P1A-4A) Open = ARINC 743A (Collins FMS)
Grounded = ARINC 743 (Universal FMS)
DADS 429/419 select (P1B-5C) Open = General Purpose #1 buses accept ARINC 429 inputs.
Grounded = General Purpose #1 buses accept ARINC 419 Low Speed inputs.
General Purpose #1 HS/LS select Open = General Purpose #1 buses accept ARINC 429 Low Speed inputs.
(P1A-6C) Grounded = General Purpose #1 buses accept ARINC 429 High Speed inputs.
(P1A-12A) Grounded = General Purpose #2 buses accept ARINC 429 Low Speed inputs.
(P1A-12B) Grounded = General Purpose #3 buses accept ARINC 429 Low Speed inputs.
Data Loader Mode select (P1B-7C) Open = Normal GPS operation mode selected.
Grounded = Data Load mode selected.
GPS Data HS/LS Select #1 HS/LS #1 HS/LS #2 Bus # = Bus Speed
(P1B-4C) OPEN OPEN Bus 1 and 2 = HS; Bus 3 = HS.
GPS Data HS/LS Select #2 OPEN GND Bus 1 and 2 = HS; Bus 3 = LS.
(P1A-5D) GND OPEN Bus 1 and 2 = LS; Bus 3 = LS.
GND GND Bus 1 and 2 = LS; Bus 3 = HS.
Source/Destination Identifier (SDI) SDI #1 SDI #2 Unit Installation
(SDI #1 P1B-5B) GND OPEN No. 1 or Left Unit
(SDI #2 P1B-5A) OPEN GND No. 2 or Right Unit
GND GND No. 3 or 3rd Unit
5 May 1999
2-8
Air/Ground Input (P1B-7D) Open = Aircraft in air.

Grounded = Aircraft on ground.
VHF Power Input (P1A-10D) APR-4000 only
Open = Power supplied for VHF.
Grounded = Power not supplied for VHF.
Vertical A/C Strapping Inputs APR-4000 only
Vertical Offset Bit 1: TP06D
Vertical Offset Bit 2: TP07C
Vertical Offset Bit 3: TP07D
Vertical Offset Bit 4: TP08A
Vertical Offset Bit 5: TP08C
Vertical Offset Bit 6: TP09A
Vertical Offset Parity Bit: TP09B
(See Table 2-5 for inputs)
Longitudinal A/C Strapping Inputs APR-4000 only
Longitudinal Offset Bit 1: TP09C
Longitudinal Offset Bit 2: TP09D
Longitudinal Offset Bit 3: TP011B
Longitudinal Offset Bit 4: TP011C
Longitudinal Offset Parity Bit : TP011D
(See Table 2-6 for inputs)
External/Internal Data-Broadcast APR-4000 only
Select (P1A-5B) Open = Internal Differential Correction Source selected.
Grounded = External Differential Correction Source selected.
Continuous Tune Port Select APR-4000 only
(P1A-4B) Open = Onside Continuous Tune port selected.
Grounded = Xside Continuous Tune port selected.
Burst Tune Enable Select (P1A-4C) APR-4000 only
Open = Burst Tune disabled.
Grounded = All 3 input ports burst tune.
GLS Bus Speed Select (P1A-6B) APR-4000 only
Open = Low Speed selected.
Grounded = High Speed selected.
Continuous Tune Input Bus Speed APR-4000 only
Select (P1A-4D) Open = Low Speed selected.
Burst Tune Bus Speed Select APR-4000 only
(P1A-6A) Open = Low Speed selected.
Data Bus Outputs
GPS Data Bus #1 (A)(P1B-1A) GPS Data Output Buses #1 and #2 provide independently buffered redundant
GPS Data Bus #1 (B)(P1B-1B) ARINC 429 output data. The GPS Data Outputs buses are discrete selected
GPS Data Bus #2 (A)(P1B-6A) (P1B-4C) between either High or Low Speed ARINC 429. Output Buses #1 and
GPS Data Bus #2 (B)(P1B-6B) #2 are paired for High/Low Speed bus rate selection.
GPS Data Bus #3 (A)(P1B-11A) GPS Data Output Bus #3 provides independently buffered redundant ARINC 429
GPS Data Bus #3 (B)(P1B-11B) output data. The GPS Data output is discrete selectable (P1A-5D) between High
and Low Speed ARINC 429.
Data Loader Bus (A)(P1A-12C) ARINC 429 High Speed output dedicated for connection to an ARINC 615 data
Data Loader Bus (B)(P1A-12D) loader.
5 May 1999 2-9

GLS Data Bus #1 APR-4000 only

(#1A)(P1A-1B) ARINC 429 High or Low Speed outputs contain deviation and associated status
(#1B)(P1A-2B) data.
GLS Data Bus #2
(#2A)(P1A-7A)
(#2B)(P1A-7B)
VHF Data Bus (A)(P1A-1C) APR-4000 only
(B)(P1A-2C) ARINC 429 High Speed outputs contain data from VHF receiver module.
Maintenance Data Bus ARINC 429 Low Speed output containing maintenance data.
(A)P1A-15A)
(B)(P1A-15B)
RS-422 Data Bus (A)(P1B-10C) RS-422 output bus used for GPS testing.
(B)(P1B-10D)
Discrete Outputs
Time Mark #1 (A)(P1B-1C) Time Mark Outputs #1, #2, and #3 provide redundant differential “Time Mark”
Time Mark #1 (B)(P1B-1D) outputs used to synchronize the GPS output with various external avionics sys-
Time Mark #2 (A)(P1B-6C) tems. Each Time Mark Output is capable of driving up to three receiving devices
Time Mark #2 (B)(P1B-6D) with each receiving device having a 330 Ω input load. The Time Mark outputs
Time Mark #3 (A)(P1B-11C) are protected against damage from indefinite short circuits.
Time Mark #3 (B)(P1B-11D)
GPS Fault Discrete (P1B-4A) Open = Normal Operation.
Ground = Critical Fault Detected.
GPS RF In (P1C-5) RF input of 50 Ω impedance. Provides +8.5 to +14.0 V dc, at 100 mA preamplifier
power to the active Antenna through the RF cable center conductor. Maximum
VSWR (voltage standing wave ratio) at the input is no worse than 1.5:1 over the
frequency range of 1575.42 ± 8 MHz. Protected against permanent damage due
to shorting of RF cable connection.
VHF RF In (P1C-1) APR-4000 only
RF input of 50 Ω impedance. When VHF power on center conductor input open,
apply +10 ± 10% V dc, 60mA preamplifier power to VHF splitter through VHF RF
cable center conductor.
5 May 1999
2-10
Table 2-5. Vertical A/C Strapping Discretes.
DISTANCE GPS AN- TP09B TP09A TP08C TP08A TP07D TP07C TP06D
TENNA ABOVE GCP
More than 0.05 m below N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
0.05 m below – 0.05 m Ground Open Open Open Open Open Open
above
0.05 – 0.15 m above Open Open Open Open Open Open Ground
0.15 – 0.25 m Open Open Open Open Open Ground Open
0.25 – 0.35 m Ground Open Open Open Open Ground Ground

0.35 – 0.45 m Open Open Open Open Ground Open Open
0.45 – 0.55 m Ground Open Open Open Ground Open Ground
0.55 – 0.65 m Ground Open Open Open Ground Ground Open
0.65 – 0.75 m Open Open Open Open Ground Ground Ground

0.75 – 0.85 m Open Open Open Ground Open Open Open
0.85 – 0.95 m Ground Open Open Ground Open Open Ground
0.95 – 1.05 m Ground Open Open Ground Open Ground Open

1.05 – 1.15 m Open Open Open Ground Open Ground Ground
1.15 – 1.25 m Ground Open Open Ground Ground Open Open
1.25 – 1.35 m Open Open Open Ground Ground Open Ground
1.35 – 1.45 m Open Open Open Ground Ground Ground Open

1.45 – 1.55 m Ground Open Open Ground Ground Ground Ground
1.55 – 1.65 m Open Open Ground Open Open Open Open

1.65 – 1.75 m Ground Open Ground Open Open Open Ground
1.75 – 1.85 m Ground Open Ground Open Open Ground Open

1.85 – 1.95 m Open Open Ground Open Open Ground Ground
1.95 – 2.05 m Ground Open Ground Open Ground Open Open
2.05 – 2.15 m Open Open Ground Open Ground Open Ground

2.15 – 2.25 m Open Open Ground Open Ground Ground Open
2.25 – 2.35 m Ground Open Ground Open Ground Ground Ground
2.35 – 2.45 m Ground Open Ground Ground Open Open Open
2.45 – 2.55 m Open Open Ground Ground Open Open Ground
2.55 – 2.65 m Open Open Ground Ground Open Ground Open
2.65 – 2.75 m Ground Open Ground Ground Open Ground Ground

2.75 – 2.85 m Open Open Ground Ground Ground Open Open
2.85 – 2.95 m Ground Open Ground Ground Ground Open Ground
2.95 – 3.05 m Ground Open Ground Ground Ground Ground Open
3.05 – 3.15 m Open Open Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground
3.15 – 3.25 m Open Ground Open Open Open Open Open
3.25 – 3.35 m Ground Ground Open Open Open Open Ground
5 May 1999 2-11

Table 2-5. Vertical A/C Strapping Discretes.
DISTANCE GPS AN- TP09B TP09A TP08C TP08A TP07D TP07C TP06D
TENNA ABOVE GCP
3.35 – 3.45 m Ground Ground Open Open Open Ground Open
3.45 – 3.55 m Open Ground Open Open Open Ground Ground
3.55 – 3.65 m Ground Ground Open Open Ground Open Open
3.65 – 3.75 m Open Ground Open Open Ground Open Ground

3.75 – 3.85 m Open Ground Open Open Ground Ground Open
3.85 – 3.95 m Ground Ground Open Open Ground Ground Ground
3.95 – 4.05 m Ground Ground Open Ground Open Open Open
4.05 – 4.15 m Open Ground Open Ground Open Open Ground
4.15 – 4.25 m Open Ground Open Ground Open Ground Open
4.25 – 4.35 m Ground Ground Open Ground Open Ground Ground

4.35 – 4.45 m Open Ground Open Ground Ground Open Open
4.45 – 4.55 m Ground Ground Open Ground Ground Open Ground

4.55 – 4.65 m Ground Ground Open Ground Ground Ground Open
4.65 – 4.75 m Open Ground Open Ground Ground Ground Ground

4.75 – 4.85 m Ground Ground Ground Open Open Open Open
4.85 – 4.95 m Open Ground Ground Open Open Open Ground
4.95 – 5.05 m Open Ground Ground Open Open Ground Open

5.05 – 5.15 m Ground Ground Ground Open Open Ground Ground
5.15 – 5.25 m Open Ground Ground Open Ground Open Open
5.25 – 5.35 m Ground Ground Ground Open Ground Open Ground

5.35 – 5.45 m Ground Ground Ground Open Ground Ground Open
5.45 – 5.55 m Open Ground Ground Open Ground Ground Ground
5.55 – 5.65 m Open Ground Ground Ground Open Open Open
5.65 – 5.75 m Ground Ground Ground Ground Open Open Ground

5.75 – 5.85 m Ground Ground Ground Ground Open Ground Open
5.85 – 5.95 m Open Ground Ground Ground Open Ground Ground
5.95 – 6.05 m Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Open Open

6.05 – 6.15 m Open Ground Ground Ground Ground Open Ground
6.15 – 6.25 m Open Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Open
6.25 – 6.35 m Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground

More than 6.35 m above N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A = Not Available, APR can not accommodate this installation
5 May 1999
2-12
Table 2-6. Longitudinal A/C Strapping Discretes.
DISTANCE GPS ANTENNA BEHIND TP011D TP011C TP011B TP09D TP09C

OF GCP
More than 1.875 m in front N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
1.875 – 1.125 m in front Ground Open Open Open Open
1.125 – 0.375 m in front Open Open Open Open Ground
0.375 m in front – 0.375 m behind Open Open Open Ground Open

0.375 – 1.125 m behind Ground Open Open Ground Ground
1.125 – 1.875 m behind Open Open Ground Open Open
1.875 – 2.625 m behind Ground Open Ground Open Ground
2.625 – 3.375 m behind Ground Open Ground Ground Open
3.375 – 4.125 m behind Open Open Ground Ground Ground

4.125 – 4.875 m behind Open Ground Open Open Open
4.875 – 5.625 m behind Ground Ground Open Open Ground
5.625 – 6.375 m behind Ground Ground Open Ground Open
6.375 – 7.125 m behind Open Ground Open Ground Ground

7.125 – 7.875 m behind Ground Ground Ground Open Open
7.875 – 8.625 m behind Open Ground Ground Open Ground
8.625 – 9.375 m behind Open Ground Ground Ground Open

9.375 – 10.125 m behind Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground
More than 10.125 m behind N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A. = Not Available, APR can not accommodate this installation
5 May 1999 2-13

Table 2-7. GPS-4000A and APR-4000 Environmental Qualifications Form.
CONDITIONS DO-160D SPECIFICATION

PARA NO
Temp and Altitude 4.0 Categories 'A2' and 'F1'.

Temp Operation Range -40 C (-40 F) to +70 C (+158 F)
Temp Storage Range -55 C (-67 F) to +85 C (+185 F)
Decompression Altitude 55,000 ft
Overcompression Altitude –15,000 ft
Loss of Cooling Not Applicable
'A2'. -15 °C (+5 °F), +70 °C (+158 °F), -55 °C (-67 °F), +85 °C (+185 °F) Certified
for installation in a partially controlled temperature and pressurized
location in an aircraft where pressures are no lower than an altitude
'F1'. -40 °C (-40 °F), +70 °C (+158 °F), -55 °C (-67 °F), +85 °C (+185 °F) Certified
for installation in a non-pressurized but controlled temperature location in
an aircraft that is operated at altitudes up to 16 800 m (55 000 ft) msl.
Temperature Variation 5.0 'B' Certified for installation in a non-controlled or partially controlled
temperature location in the aircraft where temperature variation is less
than 5 °C per minute.
Humidity 6.0 'B' Certified for a Severe Humidity Environment - Level 1.
Shock 7.0 'B'. Certified for installation in fixed-wing aircraft or helicopters and tested for
standard operational shock and crash safety.
Operational 7.2 Tested at 6 g peak (11 ms duration)
Crash Safety: 7.3
Impulse 7.3.1 Tested at 20 g (11 ms duration)
Sustained 7.3.2 Tested at 20 g min (acceleration)
Vibration 8.0
Standard
Random (jet) 'C, C1, R'. Certified for fuselage mounting in a fixed wing turbojet or
turbofan aircraft.
Sinusoidal (prop) 'L'. Certified for fuselage mounting in a multi-engine piston or turboprop fixed
wing aircraft more than 5700 kg (12 500 lb). Also certified for nacelle or
engine-pylon mounting in a multi-engine piston or turboprop fixed wing
aircraft less than 5700 kg (12 500 lb).
'M'. Certified for fuselage, panel, console, or equipment rack mounting in a
single or multi-engine, piston or turboprop fixed wing aircraft. Also
certified for nacelle or engine-pylon mounting in a single-engine piston or
turboprop fixed wing aircraft less than 5700 kg (12 500 lb).
(Helicopter) 'U'
Explosion Proofness 9.0 'E2'. Certified for installation in a location where an explosive atmosphere may
occur as a result of leakage or spillage.
Waterproofness 10.0 'W'. Certified for installation in locations subject to falling water as a result of
condensation.
Fluids Susceptibility 11.0 'X' (no test required). Certified for installation in locations not exposed to
fluid contamination from fuel, hydraulic fluids, oil, solvents, etc.
Sand and Dust 12.0 'X' (no test required). Certified for installation in locations not subject to
blowing sand and dust.
Fungus Resistance 13.0 'X'. Fungus resistance test not performed.
Salt Spray 14.0 'X' (no test performed). Certified for installation in locations not subject to a
salt atmosphere.
Magnetic Effect 15.0 'Z'. Unit causes a 1 deflection of an uncompensated compass at a distance
5 May 1999
2-14
Table 2-7. GPS-4000A and APR-4000 Environmental Qualifications Form.
CONDITIONS DO-160D SPECIFICATION

PARA NO
less than 0.3 m (1.0 ft).
Power Input 16.0 'B'. Certified for use on aircraft electrical systems where primary power is
from engine driven alternator/rectifiers or dc generator where a
'Z'. Certified for use on aircraft electrical systems not applicable to any other
Voltage Spike 17.0 'A'. Certified for installation in systems where a high degree of voltage spike
protection is required.
Audio Frequency Susceptibility 18.0 'Z'. Certified for use on aircraft electrical systems not applicable to any other
Induced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 'C'. Certified for operation in systems where interference-free operation is
required and where severe coupling occurs due to long wire runs or
minimum wire separation.
RF Susceptibility 20.0 'YYP'. Certified for installation in a severe electromagnetic environment.
Emission of RF Energy 21.0 'H'. Certified for equipment located in areas in direct view of the radio
receiver’s antenna, typically for equipment located outside the aircraft.
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 'Z3Z4'. Certified for installation in a moderate to severe environment, such as
Susceptibility the more electromagnetically open areas of an aircraft composed
principally of metal (e.g. cockpit).
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 'X'. (no test required). Certified for operation for which lightning effects are
insignificant or not applicable.
Icing 24.0 'A'. Certified for installation in a non-controlled temperature location where ice
or frost may form due to condensation.
Electrostatic Discharge 25.0 'A'. Certified for installation where electronic equipment is installed, repaired,
or operated in an aerospace environment.
5 May 1999 2-15

2.3 UNPACKING AND INSP ECTING EQUIPMENT
Unpack the equipment carefully and make a careful visual inspection of each unit for possible shipping
damage. All claims for damage should be filed with the transportation company involved. If claims for dam-
age are to be filed, save the original shipping container and materials. If no damage can be detected, replace
packing materials in the shipping container and save for future use, such as storage or reshipment
2.4 PREINSTALLATION CH ECK
Verify that tested okay tags are attached.
2.5 SPECIAL INSTRUCTION S
The following instructions must be followed to ensure proper installation of the GPS-4000/4000A and APR-
4000.
a. The minimum wire size for power lines is #20 AWG. #22 AWG wire can be used for all other lines.
Note
Aircraft approved wire must always be used.
b. Read all notes on drawings and interconnects and the planning paragraph 2.6 before installing any units
or cabling.
c. All straps on the GPS-4000/4000A and APR-4000 have specific return pins on the rear connector. Straps
used must be connected to the appropriate return pin to ensure reliable operation.
2.6 PLANNING
Proper and careful planning prior to installation is essential for reliable performance and easy maintenance.
The items listed below are points that should be considered in planning an installation.
a. Single or dual installation.

b. Installation location - adequate airflow for cooling, good bonding to aircraft, ease of cable routing, room
for single or dual mounting (piggyback or side-by-side).
c. Compatibility with other equipment - loading considerations.
Planning and cabling instructions are given in the general information and mount section (part A of the Pro
Line II installation manual). Additional information about wiring, bonding, and other general installation
practices, can be found in the Collins Installation Practices Manual.
Refer to the GPS-4000 interconnect diagram Figure 2-3 and equipment specifications, Table 2-2.
Refer to the GPS-4000A equipment specifications, Table 2-4.
Refer to the APR-4000 equipment specifications, Table 2-6.
5 May 1999
2-16
The GPS-4000/4000A and APR-4000 perform properly with convection cooling at ambient air temperatures
up to +70 C (+158 F). However, as with all electronic equipment, lower operating temperatures extend
equipment life. On the average, reducing the operating temperature by 15 to 20 C (25 to 35 F) doubles the
mean time between failure (MTBF).
Units tightly packed in the radio rack heat each other through radiation, convection, and sometimes by di-
rect conduction. If space permits, separate the units from each other to significantly improve reliability.
Even a single unit operates at a much higher temperature in still air, as opposed to moving air. Fans or
some other means of moving the air around electronic equipment are usually a worthwhile investment. If a
form of ram air cooling is installed, make certain that rainwater cannot enter and be sprayed on the equip-
ment.
2.7 CABLING INSTRUCTIO NS
Interconnect cables should be prepared in accordance with the interconnect diagram in Figure 2-3 for GPS-
4000. Since this interconnect is generic in nature, variations or modifications to meet customer requirements
are inevitable. Refer to paragraph 2.6, planning, for information on some of the options that can affect the
interconnecting cabling.
Mating connector information is listed in Table 2-8 (GPS-4000), Table 2-9 (GPS-4000A), Table 2-10 (APR-
4000), and Table 2-11. Mating connector pin assignments are illustrated in Figure 2-4 (GPS-4000), Figure 2-
6 (GPS-4000A), and Figure 2-8 (APR-4000).
Warning
Ensure that the aircraft battery master switch is turned off before installing any of the interconnect
cabling.
During preparation of the interconnect cables, observe the following precautions:
a. Read all notes on drawings and interconnect diagrams prior to fabricating interconnect wiring cables.
b. Bond and shield all parts of the aircraft electrical system, such as generator and ignition systems.
c. Keep the interconnect cables away from circuits carrying heavy current, pulse transmitting equipment,
and other sources of interference.
d. Make all external connections of the equipment through the designated connectors listed on the outline
and mounting diagrams.
e. For balanced connections, use twisted-pair shielded wiring to minimize pickup of electrostatic and mag-
netic fields. Avoid long runs of wire and keep input and output circuits separated as much as possible.
f. All interconnect wires and cables should be marked in accordance with the Aircraft Electronics Associa-
tion Wire Marking Standard (refer to Collins Installation Practices Manual CPN 523-0775254).
g. Avoid excessive cable lengths, but allow sufficient slack for movement due to vibration.
h. After installation of the cables in the aircraft, and before installation of the equipment, check to ensure
that aircraft power is applied only to the pins specified on the interconnect diagrams and that all other
wires and shields are properly terminated.
5 May 1999 2-17

2.8 INSTALLATION PROCE DURES
Warning
Ensure that the aircraft battery master switch is turned off before installing or removing any equip-
ment, mounts, or interconnect cables.
Caution
The GPS contains ESDS components that can be damaged by improper handling of the unit. Caution
must be used to avoid contact with the exposed pins at the rear of the unit.
The GPS-4000/4000A and APR-4000 install into a 2-MCU rack mount normally located in the aircraft avi-
onics bay. For GPS-4000 refer to the outline and mounting dimensions diagram shown in Figure 2-5. For
GPS-4000A refer to the outline and mounting dimensions diagram shown in Figure 2-7. For APR-4000 refer
to the outline and mounting dimensions diagram shown in Figure 2-9. For additional mounting information
on any of the three units, refer to Table 2-8 (GPS-4000), Table 2-9 (GPS-4000A), and Table 2-10 (APR-4000).
Note
The GPS-4000/4000A and APR-4000 may take 15 to 30 minutes to navigate after initial installation.
2.8.1 VHF COMM and GPS Sp acing Guidelines
Information is provided for spacing guidelines of installed equipment to address VHF COMM and GPS mu-
tual interference.
The GPS-4000/4000A and APR-4000 receivers calculate the position using very low-level RF signals from or-
biting satellites. These low-level signals may be interfered with, causing the loss of satellite tracking capa-
bility and loss of position. VHF COMM radios, at certain transmit frequencies, produce harmonics which
could cause such interference.
The assumptions behind the spacing guidelines are as follows:
1. There is a 2 dB loss from the antenna to the antenna port terminal of the units.
2. The antenna has no gain or loss.
Note
Any deviation from the assumptions must be accounted for independently.
The three spacing guidelines are the GPS antenna to the VHF antenna (D1), the GPS antenna to the VHF
transceiver (D2), and the GPS receiver to the VHF transceiver. Refer to Figure 2-2.
5 May 1999
2-18
Figure 2-2. VHF COMM and GPS Spacing
For D1 and D3, the recommended spacing is a minimum of 1 meter. For D2, the recommended spacing is as
far apart as possible with a minimum separation of 25 feet. The minimum separation for D2 may be reduced
by isolating the VHF radio in shielded enclosures (e.g., equipment bay) and by orienting the radio so that the
face of the VHF COMM points away from the GPS antenna.
2.8.2 GPS-4000/4000A and APR -4000 Installation
1. To ensure that +28-V dc power is applied only to GPS-4000/4000A or the APR-4000 power input pins
(P1B-4B, P1B-15B), check the interconnect wiring .
2. To begin the installation, mount the GPS-4000/4000A or the APR-4000 into a 2-MCU rack mount. The
mating connectors to the GPS-4000/4000A and the APR-4000 are attached to the rear of the mounting tray.
3. To install, carefully slide the GPS-4000/4000A or the APR-4000 on the mount tray until rear connector
firmly engages with mounting tray connector. The connector guide pins must be aligned to ensure correct
mating of connectors.
4. Now, secure GPS-4000/4000A or the APR-4000 to mounting tray by tightening the knurled knob located
on the front of the mounting tray.
5. If applicable, attach the safety wire to the knurled knob.
2.8.3 GPS-4000/4000A and APR -4000 Removal
1. To remove the GPS-4000/4000A or APR-4000, if applicable, remove safety wire from knurled knob.
2. Next, loosen the knurled mounting knob until the locking tab on the GPS-4000/4000A or the APR-4000 is
free.
3. The last step is to slide the GPS-4000/4000A or the APR-4000 receiver forward until the rear connector is
disengaged and clear of the mounting tray.
5 May 1999 2-19

2.9 POST INSTALLATION C HECK
The GPS-4000/4000A and APR-4000 receivers may be self-tested when the aircraft is on the ground. With
power applied to the system, momentarily push the TEST button on the GPS-4000/4000A and the APR-4000
front panels. The GPS-4000/4000A and the APR-4000 front panel LED indicators, LRU STATUS and AN-
TENNA FAIL, are energized for self-test mode operation only. The indicators are disabled for all other,
power-up and continuous, test operations. The self-test takes approximately 10 seconds for the GPS-4000 to
complete, less than 15 seconds for the GPS-4000A and the APR-4000 to complete, and operates in the fol-
lowing sequence:
a. Lamp Test - Both of the GPS-4000/4000A and the APR-4000 front panel indicators are activated and
indicate red for first two seconds, followed by the LRU STATUS indicator turning green while the AN-
TENNA FAIL indicator continues to be red for two seconds.
b. Self-Test-In-Progress - Both LEDs are extinguished for the next two-plus seconds while the self-test
operation is in progress.
c. Test Results - The Self-Test-In-Progress sequence is followed by the display of the appropriate results
of the self-test. The GPS-4000/4000A and the APR-4000 receivers pass the self-test if the LRU STATUS in-
dicator is green and the ANTENNA FAIL indicator is off. If the LRU STATUS stays red, remove the power
and replace the GPS-4000/4000A or APR-4000 unit. If the ANTENNA FAIL indicator stays red, look for the
problem in the antenna or an associated coaxial cable. The LEDs continue to display results for 30 seconds
or until the manually requested self-test operation is restarted by a subsequent push of the TEST button.
d. End-of-Test - At the end of the test period, all LEDs are returned to an all-off condition.
5 May 1999
2-20
Table 2-8. Equipment Required But Not Supplied with GPS-4000.
EQUIPMENT TYPE OR DESCRIPTION QTY
Antenna, GPS Active Comant p/n CI-401-22-A per ARINC 743A section 5 1
2MCU Mount ECS p/n 6064-102 (CPN 840-5035-010) convection cooled, 2MCU mounting holes 1
are installer specified and drilled per ARINC 600-9
Mating connector kit, RG-142B Each CPN 628-8848-002 kit contains:
or RG-400 coax
a. Pin, crimp, 22 AWG, ITT Cannon PN 030-2259-000 (CPN 370-0066-060) 39
b. Socket, crimp, 16 AWG, ITT Cannon PN 031-1303-000 (CPN 370-0066-080) 1
c. Receptacle, coax, size 5, ITT Cannon PN 249-2078-000 (CPN 370-0055-060) 1
d. Shell, size 1, ARINC 600, ITT Cannon P/N BKAD1-67400-72 1
(CPN 859-3477-020)
e. Screw, panhd, 6-32 unc xx 0.38 (eff on kits marked REV A or later); used to 4
attach mating connector to mounting tray
Mating connector kit, RG-58 coax Each CPN 628-8848-001 kit (same as –002 RG-400 kit except for item c):
Table 2-9. Equipment Required But Not Supplied with GPS-4000A .
or RG-400 coax
(CPN 859-3477-020)
e. Screw, panhd, 6-32 unc xx 0.38; used to attach mating connector to mounting 4
tray
5 May 1999 2-21

Table 2-10. Equipment Required But Not Supplied with APR-4000.
or RG-400 coax
(CPN 859-3477-020)
e. Screw, panhd, 6-32 unc xx 0.38; used to attach mating connector to mounting 4
tray
VENDOR
CONTACTS TOOL/DESCRIPTION COLLINS PART
NUMBER NAME PART NUMBER
Coax Crimper (outer) 359-8018-100 Thomas & Betts WT-410

Extraction 370-8046-010 Cannon CET-C8
16 Crimper 359-8101-010 Daniels AF8 (M22520/101)

Gauge
Sockets Positioner 359-8101-020 Daniels TH1A (M22520/1-02)
Insertion/Extraction 371-8445-080 Cannon CET16-9
22 Crimper 359-8102-010 Daniels AFM8 (M22520/2-01)

Gauge
Pins Positioner 359-8102-130 Daniels K267-1 (M22520/2-23)
Insertion/Extraction 371-8445-020 Cannon CIET-22
5 May 1999
2-22
Figure 2-3 (Sheet 1 of 4). GPS-4000 System Interconnect
5 May 1999 2-23

Figure 2-3 (Sheet 2). GPS-4000 System Interconnect
5 May 1999
2-24
5 May 1999 2-25

5 May 1999
2-26
Figure 2-4. GPS-4000 Rear Connector Pin Assignments
5 May 1999
2-28
P1A (TOP PLUG) P1A (TOP PLUG) P1B (MIDDLE PLUG)
1A RESERVED
15A OMS MAINTENANCE DATA OUT (A) 12A GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 2 - IN #2 (A)
1B RESERVED (RESERVED) 12B GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 2 - IN #2 (B)
1C RESERVED
15B OMS MAINTENANCE DATA OUT (B) 12C GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 1 - IN #2 (A)
1D RESERVED
(RESERVED) 12D GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 1 - IN #2 (B)
15C MAINTENANCE MODE SEL
2A RESERVED (RESERVED)
13A SPARE
2B RESERVED 15D RESERVED
13B SPARE
2C RESERVED
13C SPARE
2D RESERVED
P1B (MIDDLE PLUG) 13D SPARE
3A RESERVED
1A GPS DATA OUT #1 (A) 14A SPARE
3B RESERVED
1B GPS DATA OUT #1 (B) 14B SPARE
3C RESERVED
1C TIME MARK OUT #1 (A) 14C SPARE
3D RESERVED
1D TIME MARK OUT #1 (B) 14D SPARE
4A STRAP #1 (FMS TYPE SELECT)

2A GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 2 - IN #1 (A) 15A 28 VOLTS (+)
4B STRAP #2 (RESERVED)
2B GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 2 - IN #1 (B) 15B 28 VOLTS (+)
4C STRAP #3 (RESERVED)
2C GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 1 - IN #1 (A) 15C 28 VOLTS RETURN
4D STRAP #4 (RESERVED)
2D GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 1 - IN #1 (B) 15D 28 VOLTS RETURN
5A STRAP #5 (RESERVED)
3A GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 3 - IN #1 (A) P1C (BOTTOM PLUG)
5B STRAP #6 (RESERVED)
3B GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 3 - IN #1 (B)
5C STRAP #7 (RESERVED)
3C GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 3 - IN #2 (A)
5D GPS DATA OUT HS/LS SEL #2 1 RESERVED
3D GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 3 - IN #2 (B)
2 CHASSIS GROUND
3 (RESERVED) 115 VOLTS, 400 HZ AC
6A RESERVED
4A GPS FAULT OUT DISC 4 (RESERVED) 115 VOLTS, 400 HZ AC
6B RESERVED
4B GPS FAULT RETURN (RESERVED) RETURN
6C RESERVED
4C GPS DATA OUT HS/LS SEL #1 5 GPS RF IN
6D RESERVED
4D INPUT DISC RETURN
7A RESERVED
5A SDI INPUT #2
7B RESERVED
5B SDI INPUT #1
7C RESERVED
5C DADS 429/419 DISC SEL IN
7D RESERVED
5D SPARE
8A RESERVED
6A GPS DATA OUT #2 (A)
8B RESERVED
6B GPS DATA OUT #2 (B)
8C RESERVED
6C TIME MARK OUT #2 (A)
8D RESERVED
6D TIME MARK OUT #2 (B)
9A RESERVED
7A OMS MAINTENANCE DATA IN (A)
9B RESERVED
(RESERVED)
9C RESERVED
7B OMS MAINTENANCE DATA IN (B)
9D RESERVED
(RESERVED)
7C DATA LOADER MODE DISC SEL
10A RESERVED 7D AIR/GROUND DISC SEL
10B RESERVED
10C RESERVED
8A SPARE
10D RESERVED
8B SPARE
8C RESERVED for TEST
11A RESERVED 8D RESERVED for TEST
11B RESERVED
11C RESERVED
9A DATA LOADER IN (A)
11D RESERVED
9B DATA LOADER IN (B)
9C DATA LOADER OUT (A) (RESERVED)
12A GENERAL PURPOSE #2 IN HS/LS SEL 9D DATA LOADER OUT (B) (RESERVED)
12B GENERAL PURPOSE #3 IN HS/LS SEL
12C DATA LOADER OUT (A)
10A SPARE
12D DATA LOADER OUT (B)
10B SPARE
10C SPARE
13A ANNUN PNL IN (A) (RESERVED) 10D SPARE
13B ANNUN PNL IN (B) (RESERVED)
13C ANNUN PNL OUT (A) (RESERVED)
11A GPS DATA OUT #3 (A)
13D ANNUN PNL OUT (B) (RESERVED)
14A RESERVED 11D TIME MARK OUT #3 (B)
14B RESERVED
14C RESERVED
14D RESERVED
5 May 1999 2-29

Figure 2-5 (Sheet 1 of 2). GPS-4000 Outline and Mounting Dimensions
5 May 1999 2-31

000
Figure 2-5 (Sheet 2). GPS-4000 Outline and Mounting Dimensions
5 May 1999
2-32
Figure 2-6. GPS-4000A Rear Connector Pin Assignments
5 May 1999
2-34
1A BURST TUNE DISC IN (A)

1B RESERVED 15A OMS MAINTENANCE DATA OUT (A) 11A GPS DATA OUT #3 (A)
1C RESERVED (RESERVED) 11B GPS DATA OUT #3 (B)
1D RESERVED 15B OMS MAINTENANCE DATA OUT (B) 11C TIME MARK OUT #3 (A)
(RESERVED) 11D TIME MARK OUT #3 (B)
2A BURST TUNE DISC IN (B) (RESERVED)
2B RESERVED 12A GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 2-
15D RESERVED
C RESERVED IN #2 (A)
2D RESERVED 12B GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 2-
P1B (MIDDLE PLUG) IN #2 (B)
12C GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 1-
3A RESERVED IN #2 (A)
3B RESERVED 1A GPS DATA OUT #1 (A)
12D GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 1-
3C RESERVED 1B GPS DATA OUT #1 (B)
IN #2 (B)
3D RESERVED 1C TIME MARK OUT #1 (A)
13A SPARE
4A STRAP #1 (FMS TYPE SELECT) 13B SPARE
4B STRAP #2 (RESERVED) 2A GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 2-
13C SPARE
4C STRAP #3 (RESERVED) IN #1 (A)
13D SPARE
4D STRAP #4 (RESERVED) 2B GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 2-
IN #1 (B)
2C GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 1- 14A SPARE
5A STRAP #5 (RESERVED) IN #1 (A) 14B SPARE
5B STRAP #6 (RESERVED) 2D GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 1- 14C SPARE
5C STRAP #7 (RESERVED) IN #1 (B) 14D SPARE
5D GPS DATA OUT HS/LS SEL #2
3A GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 3- 15A 28 VOLTS (+)

6A RESERVED IN #1 (A) 15B 28 VOLTS (+)
6B RESERVED 3B GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 3- 15C 28 VOLTS RETURN
6C GENERAL PURPOSE #1 IN HS/LS SEL IN #1 (B) 15D 28 VOLTS RETURN
6D RESERVED 3C GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 3-
IN #2 (A)
P1C (BOTTOM PLUG)
7A RESERVED 3D GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 3-
7B RESERVED IN #2 (B)
7C RESERVED 1 RESERVED
7D RESERVED 2 CHASSIS GROUND
4A GPS FAULT OUT DISC
4B GPS FAULT RETURN (RESERVED)
8A RESERVED 4C GPS DATA OUT HS/LS SEL #1
RETURN
8B RESERVED 4D INPUT DISC RETURN
5 GPS RF IN
8C RESERVED
8D RESERVED 5A SDI INPUT #2
5B SDI INPUT #1
9A RESERVED 5C DADS 429/419 DISC SEL IN
9B RESERVED 5D SPARE
9C RESERVED
9D RESERVED 6A GPS DATA OUT #2 (A)
10A RESERVED 6C TIME MARK OUT #2 (A)
10B RESERVED 6D TIME MARK OUT #2 (B)
10C RESERVED
10D RESERVED 7A OMS MAINTENANCE DATA IN (A)
(RESERVED)
11A RESERVED 7B OMS MAINTENANCE DATA IN (B)
11B RESERVED (RESERVED)
11C RESERVED 7C DATA LOADER MODE DISC SEL
11D RESERVED 7D AIR/GROUND DISC SEL
12A GENERAL PURPOSE #2 IN HS/LS SEL 8A SPARE

12B GENERAL PURPOSE #3 IN HS/LS SEL 8B SPARE
12C DATA LOADER OUT (A) 8C RESERVED for TEST
12D DATA LOADER OUT (B) 8D RESERVED for TEST
13A ANNUN PNL IN (A) (RESERVED) 9A DATA LOADER IN (A)

13B ANNUN PNL IN (B) (RESERVED) 9B DATA LOADER IN (B)
13C ANNUN PNL OUT (A) (RESERVED) 9C DATA LOADER OUT (A) (RESERVED)
13D ANNUN PNL OUT (B) (RESERVED) 9D DATA LOADER OUT (B) (RESERVED)
14A RESERVED 10A RS-422 TEST DISC IN (A)

14B RESERVED 10B RS-422 TEST DISC IN (B)
14C RESERVED 10C RS-422 TEST DISC OUT (A)
14D RESERVED 10D RS-422 TEST DISC OUT (B)
5 May 1999 2-35

Figure 2-7 (Sheet 1 of 2). GPS-4000A Outline and Mounting Dimensions
5 May 1999 2-37

Figure 2-7 (Sheet 2). GPS-4000A Outline and Mounting Dimensions
5 May 1999
2-38
Figure 2-8. APR-4000 Rear Connector Pin Assignments
5 May 1999
2-40
1A BURST TUNE DISC IN (A) 13A CONTINUOUS TUNE DISC #1- IN (A) 10A RS-422 DISC IN (A)
1B GLS DISC IN #1 (A) 13B CONTINUOUS TUNE DISC #1- IN (B) 10B RS-422 DISC IN (B)
1C VHF DISC OUT (A) 13C RESERVED 10C RS-422 DISC OUT (A)
1D CONTINUOUS TUNE DISC IN #2 (A) 13D RESERVED 10D RS-422 DISC OUT (B)
2A BURST TUNE DISC IN (B) 14A RESERVED 11A GPS DATA OUT #3 (A)
2B GLS DISC IN #1 (B) 14B RESERVED 11B GPS DATA OUT #3 (B)
2C VHF DISC OUT (B) 14C RESERVED 11C TIME MARK OUT #3 (A)
2D CONTINUOUS TUNE DISC IN #2 (B) 14D RESERVED 11D TIME MARK OUT #3 (B)
3A RESERVED 15A OMS MAINTENANCE DATA OUT (A) 12A GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 2 - IN #2 (A)
3B RESERVED (RESERVED) 12B GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 2 - IN #2 (B)
3C RESERVED 15B OMS MAINTENANCE DATA OUT (B) 12C GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 1 - IN #2 (A)
3D RESERVED (RESERVED) 12D GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 1 - IN #2 (B)
(RESERVED)
4A STRAP #1 (FMS TYPE SELECT) 13A RESERVED
15D TUNE/TEST INHIBIT DISC SELECT
4B STRAP #2 (CONTINUOUS TUNE PORT 13B RESERVED
(RESERVED)
SELECT) 13C SPARE
4C STRAP #3 (BURST TUNE ENABLE 13D SPARE
SELECT) P1B (MIDDLE PLUG)
4D STRAP #4 (CONTINUOUS TUNE BUS
14A RESERVED
SPEED SELECT)
1A GPS DATA OUT #1 (A) 14B RESERVED
1B GPS DATA OUT #1 (B) 14C RESERVED
5A STRAP #5 (GLS DATA ON 743 DISC IN 1C TIME MARK OUT #1 (A) 14D RESERVED
SELECT)(RESERVED) 1D TIME MARK OUT #1 (B)
5B STRAP #6 (EXTERNAL/INTERNAL VDL
15A 28 VOLTS (+)
SELECT)
2A GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 2 - IN #1 (A) 15B 28 VOLTS (+)
5C STRAP #7 (APPROACH SELECT)
2B GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 2 - IN #1 (B) 15C 28 VOLTS RETURN
(RESERVED)
2C GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 1 - IN #1 (A) 15D 28 VOLTS RETURN
5D GPS DATA OUT HS/LS SEL #2
P1C (BOTTOM PLUG)
6A BURST TUNE BUS SPEED SELECT
3A GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 3 - IN #1 (A)
6B GLS BUS SPEED SELECT
3B GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 3 - IN #1 (B)
6C GENERAL PURPOSE #1 IN HS/LS 1 VHF DATA LINK RF IN
3C GENERAL PURPOSE BUS 3 - IN #2 (A)
SELECT 2 CHASSIS GROUND
6D VERTICAL OFFSET BIT 1 3 (RESERVED) 115 VOLTS, 400 HZ AC
4A GPS FAULT OUT DISC RETURN
7A GLS DISC IN #2 (A)
4B GPS FAULT RETURN 5 GPS RF IN
7B GLS DISC IN #2 (B)
4C GPS DATA OUT HS/LS SEL #1
7C VERTICAL OFFSET BIT 2
4D INPUT DISC RETURN
7D VERTICAL OFFSET BIT 3
5A SDI INPUT #2
8A VERTICAL OFFSET BIT 4
5B SDI INPUT #1
8B DIAS APPROACH MODE OUT DISC
5C DADS 429/419 DISC SEL IN
(RESERVED)
5D SPARE
8C VERTICAL OFFSET BIT 5
8D DGNSS STATUS INDICATOR OUT DISC
(RESERVED) 6A GPS DATA OUT #2 (A)
9A VERTICAL OFFSET BIT 6
9B VERTICAL OFFSET PARITY BIT (ODD)
9C LONGITUDINAL OFFSET BIT 1
9D LONGITUDINAL OFFSET BIT 2 7A OMS MAINTENANCE DATA IN (A)
(RESERVED)
7B OMS MAINTENANCE DATA IN (B)
10A RESERVED FOR GROUND
(RESERVED)
10B RESERVED FOR GROUND
7C DATA LOADER MODE DISC SEL
10C RESERVED FOR GROUND
7D AIR/GROUND DISC SEL
10D VHF POWER CENTER CONDUCTOR
8A SPARE
11A FACTORY TEST DISC IN (RESERVED)
8B SPARE
11B LONGITUDINAL OFFSET BIT 3
8C RESERVED for TEST
11C LONGITUDINAL OFFSET BIT 4
8D RESERVED for TEST
11D LONGITUDINAL OFFSET PARITY BIT
9A DATA LOADER IN (A)

12A GENERAL PURPOSE #2 IN HS/LS SEL
9B DATA LOADER IN (B)
12B GENERAL PURPOSE #3 IN HS/LS SEL
9C DATA LOADER OUT (A) (RESERVED)
12C DATA LOADER OUT (A)
9D DATA LOADER OUT (B) (RESERVED)
12D DATA LOADER OUT (B)
5 May 1999 2-41

Figure 2-9 (Sheet 1 of 2). APR-4000 Outline and Mounting Dimensions
5 May 1999 2-43

Figure 2-9 (Sheet 2). APR-4000 Outline and Mounting Dimensions
5 May 1999
2-44
9ebb_di
Pro Line II
installation manual Part B
MND-640
RAC-870
RMI/BDI-36
RTU-870A/870T
RTU-42X0 and AIU-4000
TDR-90
TDR-94/94D
VHF-21( )/22( )/422( )
VIR-32/33/432/433

æ 523 - 0772719 - 00711A
9ebb_di
Pro Line II
installation manual Part B
Part A of this installation manual includes: Part B of this installation manual includes:
General Information 523-0772720 Installation (Continued) 523-0772439
Installation 523-0772439
Equipment covered Part B Installation:
Equipment covered Part A Installation: MND-640 Multisensor Navigation Display
General System and Mount Information System
ADF-462 ADF Receiver and RAC-870 Radio Altimeter Converter
ANT-462( ) ADF Antenna RMI/BDI-36 Radio Magnetic Indicator
ADF-60 Automatic Direction Finding System RTU-870A/870T Radio Tuning Unit
ALT-50/55 Radio Altimeter Systems RTU-42X0 Radio Tuning Unit and
BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter AIU-4000 Audio Interface Unit
CAD-31 Control Adapter TDR-90 Transponder
CAD-62 Control Adapter TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder System
CAD-870 Transponder Control Adapter VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) VHF Comm Transceiver
CAD-870G Transponder Control Adapter VIR-32/33/432/433 Navigation Receiver
CTL-X2/X2A/23 Controls Systems
DDA-42 Distance Data Adapter
DME-42/442 DME Transceiver and Operation 523-0772721
IND-42( ) DME Indicator Maintenance 523-0772450
GPS-4000 Global Positioning Sensor Appendix 523-0773276

Printed in the United States of America
PRO L I NE I I I M APR 1 1 / 9 7
WARNING
INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS
This document may contain information subject to the International Traffic in Arms
Regulation (ITAR) or the Export Administration Regulation (EAR) of 1979 which may
not be exported, released, or disclosed to foreign nationals inside or outside of the
United States without first obtaining an export license. A violation of the ITAR or EAR
may be subject to a penalty of up to 10 years imprisonment and a fine of up to
$1,000,000 under 22 U.S.C.2778 of the Arms Export Control Act of 1976 or section
2410 of the Export Administration Act of 1979. Include this notice with any repro-
duced portion of this document.
CAUTION
The material in this publication is subject to change. Before attempting any

maintenance operation on the equipment covered in this publication, verify that
you have complete and up-to-date publications by referring to the applicable
Publications and Service Bulletin Indexes.
SOFTWARE COPYRIGHT NOTICE
All software resident in this equipment is protected by copyright.
We welcome your comments concerning this publication. Although every effort

has been made to keep it free of errors, some may occur. When reporting a
specific problem, please describe it briefly and include the publication part num-
ber, the paragraph or figure number, and the page number.
Send your comments to: Publications Department MS 106-124
or by Internet E-Mail to:
GENAVPUB@COLLINS.ROCKWELL.COM
GENERAL ADVISORIES FOR ALL UNITS
Warning
Service personnel are to obey standard safety precautions, such as wearing safety glasses, to prevent
personal injury while installing or doing maintenance on this unit.
Warning
Use care when using sealants, solvents, and other chemical compounds. Do not expose to excessive heat or
open flame. Use only with adequate ventilation. Avoid prolonged breathing of vapors and avoid prolonged
contact with skin. Observe all cautions and warnings given by the manufacturer.
Warning
Remove all power to the unit before disassembling it. Disassembling the unit with power connected is
dangerous to life and may cause voltage transients that can damage the unit.
Warning
This unit may have components that contain materials (such as beryllium oxide, acids, lithium, radioactive
material, mercury, etc) that can be hazardous to your health. If the component enclosure is broken, handle
the component in accordance with OSHA requirements 29cfr 1910.1000 or superseding documents to prevent
personal contact with or inhalation of hazardous materials. Since it is virtually impossible to determine
which components do or do not contain such hazardous materials, do not open or disassemble components for
any reason.
Warning
This unit exhibits a high degree of functional reliability. Nevertheless, users must know that it is not
practical to monitor for all conceivable system failures and, however unlikely, it is possible that erroneous
operation could occur without a fault indication. The pilot has the responsibility to find such an occurrence
by means of cross-checks with redundant or correlated data available in the cockpit.
Caution
Turn off power before disconnecting any unit from wiring. Disconnecting the unit without turning power off
may cause voltage transients that can damage the unit.
Caution
This unit contains electrostatic discharge sensitive (ESDS) components and ESDS assemblies that can be
damaged by static voltages. Although most ESDS components contain internal protection circuits, good
procedures dictate careful handling of all ESDS components and ESDS assemblies.
Obey the precautions given below when moving, touching, or repairing all ESDS components and units
containing ESDS components.
a. Deenergize or remove all power, signal sources, and loads used with the unit.
b. Place the unit on a work surface that can conduct electricity (is grounded).
i
GENERAL ADVISORIES FOR ALL UNITS (CONT)
c. Ground the repair operator through a conductive wrist strap or other device using a 470-kΩ or 1-MΩ
series resistor to prevent operator injury.
d. Ground any tools (and soldering equipment) that will contact the unit. Contact with the operator's hand
is a sufficient ground for hand tools that are electrically isolated.
e. All ESDS replacement components are shipped in conductive foam or tubes and must be stored in their
shipping containers until installed.
f. ESDS devices and assemblies, that are removed from a unit, must immediately be put on the conductive
work surface or in conductive containers.
g. Place repaired or disconnected circuit cards in aluminum foil or in plastic bags that have a layer of, or
are made with, conductive material.
h. Do not touch ESDS devices/assemblies or remove them from their containers until they are needed.
Failure to handle ESDS devices as described above can permanently damage them. This damage can cause
immediate or premature device failure.
ii
PRO LINE II installation manual (Part B) 523-0772719
RECORD OF ADDENDUMS FOR PART B
INSERTION
SECTION ED/REV DATE ADDENDUM DATE
DATE/BY
Installation 7/0 11 Apr 97 None

MND-640 Multisensor 3/0 11 Apr 97 None
Navigation Display System
RAC-870 Radio Altimeter 6/0 11 Apr 97 None
Converter
RMI-36 Radio Magnetic 7/0 11 Apr 97 None
Indicator & BDI-36 Bearing
Distance Indicator
RTU-870A/870T Radio Tuning 2/1 15 Sep 95 None
Unit
RTU-42X0 Radio Tuning Unit 3/0 11 Apr 97 17 21 Dec 98
and AIU-4000 Audio Interface 22 (superseded) 3 Feb 99
Unit 26 (superseded) 28 Apr 99
32 1 Sep 99
33 22 Oct 99
36 27 Jan 00
TDR-90 Transponder 10/0 11 Apr 97 None
TDR-94/94D Mode S 8/0 11 Apr 97 1 6 Jun 97
Transponder 7 20 Oct 97
27 16 Jul 99
40 23 Mar 00
VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) VHF 7/0 11 Apr 97 10 29 Oct 97
Comm Transceiver 13 11 Feb 98
15 12 Feb 98
21 18 Jan 99
23 (superseded) 9 Feb 99
28 (superseded) 16 Jul 99
31 24 Aug 99
37 3 Feb 00
39 23 Feb 00
VIR-32/33/432/433 Navigation 7/0 11 Apr 97 38 4 Feb 00
Receiver
Operation 7/0 11 Apr 97 24 (superseded) 9 Feb 99
29 16 Jul 99
Maintenance 7/0 11 Apr 97 None
Appendix 4/1 15 Sep 95 None
NOTE: Addendum sheets should not be removed from a manual unless otherwise specified.
Addendum information will be incorporated in the next edition of the manual.
Addendum 40
23 Mar 2000 iii
523-0772719-0g711A (Follows Advisories page)
523-0772439-007118

Pro Line II
Installation
(continued)
This installation manual includes the following individual system or unit installation elements:
Part A
General System and Mount Information 523-0775917
ADF-462 ADF Receiver and ANT-462( ) ADF Antenna 523-0773908
ADF-60 Automatic Direction Finding System 523-0766186
ALT-50/55 Radio Altimeter System 523-0775918
BIA-32 Bearing Interface Adapter 523-0775207
CAD-870 Transponder Control Adapter 523-0774290
CAD-870G Transponder Control Adapter 523-0774236
CTL-X2/X2A/23 Controls 523-0772496
DDA-42 Distance Data Adapter 523-0773962
DME-42/442 Distance Measuring Equipment and IND-42( ) DME Indicator 523-0773741
GPS-4000 Global Positioning Sensor 523-0778241
Part B
MND-640 Multisensor Navigation Display System 523-0775937
RAC-870 Radio Altimeter Converter 523-0774273
RMI-36/BDI-36 Radio Magnetic Indicator 523-0766804
RTU-870A/870T Radio Tuning Unit 523-0776529
RTU-42X0 Radio Tuning Unit and AIU-4000 Audio Interface Unit 523-0778075
TDR-90 Transponder 523-0765130
TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder System 523-0775654
VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) VHF Comm Transceiver 523-0771856
VIR-32/33/432/433 Navigation Receiver 523-0772451
þ 523-0775937-003118
3rd Edition, 11 April 1997

Collins
MND-640( )
Multisensor Navigation
Display System
Installation
Table of Contents
2.1 GENERAL.............................................................2-1 2.6 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS ...............................2-4

2.2 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING 2.6.1 General ...................................................................2-4
EQUIPMENT.......................................................2-1 2.6.2 Interconnect Wiring Check....................................2-4
2.3 PREINSTALLATION CHECK ............................2-1 2.7 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES.......................2-7
2.7.1 SDD-640/640A Sensor Display Driver ..................2-7
2.4 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS ................................2-1
2.7.1.1 Installation..........................................................2-7
2.5 PLANNING...........................................................2-1 2.7.1.2 Removal...............................................................2-8
2.5.1 Installation Configurations................................... 2-2 2.7.2 SDU-640A/640B Sensor Display Unit ..................2-8
2.5.2 Strapping Options.................................................. 2-2 2.7.2.1 Installation..........................................................2-8
2.5.2.1 SDD-640 Strapping Options............................... 2-2 2.7.2.2 Removal...............................................................2-8
2.5.2.2 SDD-640A Strapping Options ............................ 2-2 2.8 TESTING ..............................................................2-8
2.5.3 CRT Dimming Control........................................... 2-3 2.8.1 Preinstallation Testing..........................................2-8
2.5.4 Loading Considerations......................................... 2-3 2.8.2 Postinstallation Testing ........................................2-8
2.5.5 Dual Mounting Options......................................... 2-4 2.8.2.1 Power Requirements...........................................2-8
2.5.6 Cooling Considerations.......................................... 2-4 2.8.2.2 Diagnostic Information.......................................2-8
NOTICE: This section replaces second edition dated 2 December 1991 and revision.
Page No Issue
* Title...........................................11 Apr 97
* 2-1 thru 2-15 .............................11 Apr 97
* 2-16 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-17 thru 2-19 ...........................11 Apr 97
* 2-20 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-21 thru 2-29 ...........................11 Apr 97
* 2-30 Blank.................................11 Apr 97


1st Ed 30 May 90 None
1 29 Sep 92 None
3rd Ed 11 Apr 97 None

section II
installation
2.1 GENERAL
Caution
This section provides all information needed to in-
stall the MND-640( ) system. Installation data in this Improper operation may occur if the fol-
section consists of aircraft wiring procedures and lowing instructions are not followed.
precautions, installation and removal of the MND-
640( ) units, and the system interconnect diagram. a. The minimum wire size for power lines is #20
AWG. #22 AWG wire can be used for all other
lines.
Note
Note
The information and instructions provided
in this section are recommendations and do Aircraft approved wire must always be used
not necessarily correspond with any actual and extra care must be used when selecting
aircraft installation and wiring. This sec- any wire smaller than #22 AWG.
tion cannot be used in place of a supple-
mental type certificate (STC) or type certifi- b. Read all notes on drawings and interconnects
cate (TC). and the planning paragraph before installing
2.2 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING c. All straps on the SDD-640( ) have specific re-
EQUIPMENT turn pins on the rear connector. Straps used
must be connected to the appropriate return
Unpack the equipment carefully and make a care- pin to ensure reliable operation.
ful visual inspection of each unit for possible ship-
ping damage. All claims for damage should be filed 2.5 PLANNING
with the transportation company involved. If claims
for damage are to be filed, save the original ship- Proper and careful planning prior to installation is
ping container and materials. If no damage can be essential for reliable performance and easy main-
detected, replace packing materials in the shipping tenance. For information on wiring, bonding, and
container and save for future use, such as storage other general installation practices, refer to the In-
or reshipment. stallation Practices Manual (CPN 523-0775254).
The following list is a sample of the points to be
2.3 PREINSTALLATION CHECK considered in planning an installation:
Before installing the equipment in the aircraft, per- a. Single or dual installation - isolation of the no 1
form the final performance (customer acceptance) system from the no 2 system may be required.
test in the maintenance section of the repair man- Refer to the applicable FARs for specific re-
ual or connect the units in a system mockup to ver- quirements.
ify proper operation. b. Installation location - adequate airflow for
cooling, good bonding to aircraft ground, ease of
2.4 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS cable routing, and room for single or dual
mounting (piggyback or side by side)
The following instructions must be followed to en- c. Installation configuration
sure proper installation of the MND-640( ) Mul- d. Compatibility with other equipment - loading
tisensor Navigation Display System. considerations

installation MND-640( )
2.5.1 Installation Configurations f. IAPS FMS 429 port (strap 6) (SDD P1-42, P2-
19) strapped to ground selects the IAPS FMS
a. A typical MND-640 system consists of one SDD- 429 port, strapped open the port is ignored.
640 Sensor Display Driver providing the drive g. DME 429 port (strap 7) (SDD P1-43, P2-18)
signals for one or two SDU-640A Sensor Dis- strapped to ground selects the DME 429 port,
play Units. strapped open the port is ignored.
b. A typical MND-640B system consists of one h. ADF 429 port (strap 8) (SDD P1-44, P2-17)
SDD-640A Sensor Display Driver providing the strapped to ground selects the ADF 429 port,
drive signals for one or two SDU-640B Sensor strapped open the port is ignored.
Display Units and outputs for one or two RTU-
870A Radio Tuning Units. 2.5.2.2 SDD-640A Strapping Options
2.5.2 Strapping Options The following applies only to the SDD-640A. The
SDD-640A strap commons for the no 1 side are P1-
The SDD port selection straps determine which in- 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23, 27, 31, and 47. The strap com-
put ports the SDD will read. The straps also con- mons for the no 2 side are P2-14, 30, 34, 38, 42, 46,
figure the sensor number annunciation on the SDU 50, 54, and 58.
display. When only one sensor is installed, the NAV
sensor annunciation does not include the number a. Burst tune 429 port (strap 1) (SDD P1-37, P2-
following the annunciation (eg, ADF1 would appear 24) strapped to ground selects the burst tune
only as ADF). 429 port for configurations 1, 2, 3, and 4,
strapped open the port is ignored.
Caution b. TACAN 429 port (strap 2) (SDD P1-38, P2-23)
strapped to ground selects the TACAN 429
All connector straps should be kept as short port, strapped open the port is ignored.
as possible, preferably under 75 mm (3 in). c. MLS 429 port (strap 3) (SDD P1-39, P2-22)
strapped to ground selects the MLS 429 port,
strapped open the port is ignored.
Caution d. VOR/ILS 429 port (strap 4) (SDD P1-40, P2-21)
strapped to ground selects the VOR/ILS 429
To provide reliable lightning protection, port, strapped open the port is ignored.
each strap is assigned a unique return pin e. VLF/ATC 429 port (strap 5) (SDD P1-41, P2-20)
on the rear connector. Always strap to the strapped to ground selects the VLF/ATC 429
assigned return pin; never strap directly to port, strapped open the port is ignored. If strap
ground. 10 is open, VLF data is selected; if strap 10 is
grounded, ATC data is selected.
2.5.2.1 SDD-640 Strapping Options f. IAPS FMS/VHF 429 port (strap 6) (SDD P1-42,
P2-19) strapped to ground selects the IAPS
The following applies only to the SDD-640. The FMS/VHF 429 port, strapped open the port is
SDD-640 strap commons for the no 1 side are P1-3, ignored. If strap 10 is open, low-speed IAPS
7, 11, 15, 19, 23, 27, 31, 35, and 47. The strap com- FMS data is selected; if strap 10 is grounded,
mons for the no 2 side are P2-14, 26, 30, 34, 38, 42, VHF data is selected.
46, 50, 54, and 58. g. DME 429 port (strap 7) (SDD P1-43, P2-18)
strapped to ground selects the DME 429 port,
a. Spare 429 port (strap 1) (SDD P1-37, P2-24) strapped open the port is ignored.
b. Spare 429 port (strap 2) (SDD P1-38, P2-23) h. ADF 429 port (strap 8) (SDD P1-44, P2-17)
c. MLS 429 port (strap 3) (SDD P1-39, P2-22) strapped to ground selects the ADF 429 port,
strapped to ground selects the MLS 429 port, strapped open the port is ignored.
strapped open the port is ignored. i. MAG/TRUE heading reference (strap 9) (SDD
d. VOR 429 port (strap 4) (SDD P1-40, P2-21) P1-36, P2-25). If connected to strap 9 common,
strapped to ground selects the VOR 429 port, the heading display on the SDU is TRUE refer-
strapped open the port is ignored. enced and any MAG referenced data other than
e. VLF 429 port (strap 5) (SDD P1-41, P2-20) VOR or TACAN bearings are converted to
strapped to ground selects the VLF 429 port, TRUE referenced by the SDD. The strap 9
strapped open the port is ignored. commons are SDD P1-35 and P2-26. If strap 9

is open, the heading display on the SDU will be NAV HSI page and VLF on the long-range
MAG referenced and any TRUE referenced NAV data page.
data will be converted to MAG referenced by 8. Configuration 8 - (strapped 1, 1, 1). The SDD
the SDD. does not read the FMS (LRN) high-speed in-
j. Configuration (straps 10, 11, and 12) (SDD P1- put. The SDD receives FMS bearing from the
32, 28, 24, P2-29, 33, 37). Refer to Table 2-1 for IAPS FMS low-speed input and VLF data
a matrix of SDD-640A configurations. from the VLF low-speed input. There is no
radio tune data on the RTU bus. In this con-
figuration, the SDU annunciates VLF on the
Note
long-range NAV data page and there is no
A strap connected to ground = 0; a strap left long-range NAV HSI page.
open = 1. k. Crosstrack deviation scale (straps 13, 14) (SDD
P1-20, 16, P2-41, 45). Strapped (1, 0); the
1. Configuration 1 - (strapped 0, 0, 0). The SDD crosstrack deviation scale is 7.5 nmi/two dots
receives FMS data on the FMS (LRN) high- for en route mode or 1.25 nmi/two dots in ap-
speed input and receives radio tune data for proach mode. Strapped (0, 1); the scale is 7.5
ATC and VHF COMM on the low-speed in- nmi/two dots for en route mode or 2.0 nmi/two
puts. The SDD outputs radio tune data on dots in approach mode. Strapped (1, 1); the
the RTU bus. Radio tune burst data will scale is 10 nmi/two dots for en route mode or
come from the high-speed FMS (LRN) input 2.0 nmi/two dots in approach mode.
if strap 1 is open or the low-speed burst tune 2.5.3 CRT Dimming Control
input if strap 1 is grounded. In this configu-
ration, the SDU will annunciate FMS on the Refer to Figure 2-1 for the SDU-640( ) crt bright-
long-range NAV HSI and data pages. ness curve. The curve shown is for a +27.5-V dc
2. Configuration 2 - (strapped 0, 0, 1). Same as dimming bus input. If the dimming bus input is
configuration 1 except the SDU annunci- from 0 to +2 V dc, the crt is bright. This prevents a
ates LRN on the long-range NAV HSI and shorted or open dimming bus from blanking the crt
data pages. display. The crt brightness increases from blank at
3. Configuration 3 - (strapped 0, 1, 0). Same as +3 V dc to full brightness at +27.5 V dc.
configuration 1 except the SDU annunci-
ates LNV on the long-range NAV HSI and 2.5.4 Loading Considerations
data pages. Figure 2-7 through Figure 2-9 are MND system
4. Configuration 4 - (strapped 0, 1, 1). Same as schematics. These diagrams show all input and
configuration 1 except the SDU does not output pin numbers with a schematic first or last
display any long-range NAV HSI or data stage to show loading. The diagrams are included
pages. to aid installation planning.
5. Configuration 5 - (strapped 1, 0, 0). Spare
6. Configuration 6 - (strapped 1, 0, 1). The
SDD receives FMS data on the FMS (LRN)
high-speed input. This data is from an IOC
and contains unique Collins FMS data
words. The SDD receives VLF data from
the VLF low-speed input. There is no radio
tune data on the RTU bus. In this configu-
ration, the SDU annunciates FMS on the
long-range NAV HSI page and VLF on the
long-range NAV data page.
7. Configuration 7 - (strapped 1, 1, 0). The
SDD does not read the FMS (LRN) high-
speed input. The SDD receives FMS bear-
ing and VLF/LRN data from the VLF low-
speed input. There is no radio tune data on
the RTU bus. In this configuration, the
SDU annunciates VLF on the long-range Figure 2-1. CRT Brightness Curve

2.5.5 Dual Mounting Options to paragraph 2.5, Planning, for information on

some of the options that can affect the interconnect
The SDD-640( ) requires a ¼-ATR dwarf-height cabling.
mount (UMT-11 Mount). A piggyback mounting
adapter kit is available to mount a UMT-11 over The mounts, mating connectors, and contacts re-
another UMT-11. Refer to the Collins UMT-( ) quired to install an MND-640( ) system are listed in
Mount and Thinline II Connectors manual (CPN Table 2-3. Table 2-2 lists the special tools required
523-0772277) for additional information. for installation. Figure 2-2 illustrates the mating
connector pin assignments.
The SDD-640( ) and SDU-640( ) perform properly Warning

with convection cooling at ambient air temperatures
up to +70 °C (+158 °F). However, as with all elec- Ensure that the aircraft battery master
tronic equipment, lower operating temperatures ex- switch is turned off before installing any of
tend equipment life. On the average, reducing the the interconnect cabling.
operating temperature by 15 to 20 °C (25 to 35 °F)
doubles the mean time between failures (MTBF). For preparation of interconnect wiring cables, refer
to the general information and mount section (part
Units tightly packed in the radio rack heat each A of the Pro Line II installation manual). The SDD-
other through radiation, convection, and sometimes 640/640A requires two Thinline II mating connec-
by direct conduction. If space permits, separate the tors. The SDU-640A/640B requires a 15-pin D-
units from each other to significantly improve reli- subminiature mating connector. For connector con-
ability. tact assembly and installation information, refer to
the section on Thinline II or D-subminiature con-
Even a single unit operates at a much higher tem- nectors in the general information and mount sec-
perature in still air than in moving air. Fans or tion (part A of the Pro Line II installation manual).
some other means of moving the air around elec- Additional information on the Thinline II connec-
tronic equipment are usually a worthwhile invest- tors is located in the Collins UMT-( ) Mount and
ment. If a form of ram air cooling is installed, make Thinline II Connectors manual (CPN 523-0772277).
certain that rainwater cannot enter and be sprayed
2.6.2 Interconnect Wiring Check
on the equipment.
2.6 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS For information on wiring, bonding, and other gen-
eral installation practices, refer to the Installation
2.6.1 General Practices Manual (CPN 523-0775254). Additional
information is also contained in All Avionics Serv-
Interconnect cables should be prepared in accor- ice Information Letter 1-88. The Collins CTS-10
dance with the interconnect diagrams, Figure 2-3 Breakout Box Test Set (CPN 622-4561-001) is rec-
and Figure 2-4. Since these interconnects represent ommended for any SDD-640( ) Sensor Display
a typical system, variations or modifications to Driver wiring checkout and troubleshooting that
meet customer requirements are inevitable. Refer requires a breakout box for Thinline II half-height
60-pin connectors.

Table 2-1. SDD-640A Configurations.
IAPS FMS/ VLF/ATC

STRAPS VHF PORT PORT ANNUNCIATION
CONFIG BURST REMARKS

IAPS FMS TUNE RTU
VHF VLF ATC HSI DATA
10 11 12 FMS (LRN) (LS) OUTPUT
(LS) (LS) (LS) PAGE PAGE
(LS) (HS) (NOTE (LS)
1)
1 0 0 0 X X X X X FMS FMS
2 0 0 1 X X X X X LRN LRN
3 0 1 0 X X X X X LNV LNV
4 0 1 1 X X X X X NO PG NO PG
5 1 0 0 NO PG NO PG Spare
6 1 0 1 X X FMS VLF
(note 2)
7 1 1 0 X VLF VLF FMS
bearing
from VLF
input port
8 1 1 1 X X NO PG VLF
Notes:
1. For configurations 1 through 4, radio burst tune data is received from the low-speed burst tune port for strap 1 connected to strap
common = “0” or radio burst tune data is received from the high-speed FMS (LRN) input port for strap 1 open = “1.” For configu-
rations 5 through 8, strap 1 is a “don’t care.”
2. The FMS (LRN) high-speed input is programmed to receive non-GAMA 429 data that is unique to Collins IOC formats.
PREFERRED ALTERNATE
DESCRIPTION VENDOR NAME VENDOR

COLLINS PART COLLINS PART
AND PART NAME AND
NUMBER NUMBER
NUMBER PART NUMBER
SDD-640/640A
Contact, female tuning fork *372-2514-110
Contact, female tuning fork *372-2514-180
Required tools for female tuning fork
contacts
Kit, tool (contains all 359-0697-0X0 359-0697-080 DAN DMC593
part numbers listed below)
Crimp tool **359-0697-010 DAN GMT-221 †623-8579-000
‡623-8580-000
Insertion tool 359-0697-050 DAN DAK188 359-8029-010 QPL MS3323-22
(tweezer type) (probe type)
Extraction tool 359-0697-020 DAN DRK230
a. Replacement probes (qty 2) 359-0697-040 DAN DRK230-1
b. Replacement ejector 359-0697-030 DAN DRK188-3

PREFERRED ALTERNATE
DESCRIPTION VENDOR NAME VENDOR

COLLINS PART COLLINS PART
AND PART NAME AND
NUMBER NUMBER
NUMBER PART NUMBER
SDU-640A/640B
Contact, crimp socket 371-0213-110 CNN 031-1007-067
Crimp tool 359-8102-010 QPL M22520/2-01
Locator 359-8102-080 QPL M22520/2-08
Insertion/extraction tool 371-8445-010 CNN CIET-20HD 371-8053-020 AMP 91066-4
*372-2514-110 female fork type contacts are used with wire insulation diameters up to 1.27 mm (0.050 in). Wire with insulation di-
ameters from 1.27 mm (0.050 in) to 2.03 mm (0.080 in) use contacts 372-2514-180. The installer must order the quantity of each de-
sired.
**This crimp tool has two jaw openings, one for each range of insulation diameter given.
†This crimp tool is for use with contacts 372-2514-110 only.
‡This crimp tool is for use with contacts 372-2514-180 only.
Vendor codes: AMP = AMP, CNN = ITT Cannon, DAN = Daniels Mfg., QPL = Military Spec
Table 2-3. MND-640( ) Multisensor Navigation Display System Installation Hardware Listing.
COLLINS VENDOR NAME AND

QTY DESCRIPTION NOTES PART NUMBER PART NUMBER
SDD-640/640A INSTALLATION HARDWARE
1 Mating connector kit, Collins Thinline, half-height, 60-pin (1)(6) 634-1021-002

connector. Kit contains the following:
Connector, male-TL II, 60-pin (qty 2) 634-1112-001
Keyway (qty 4) 634-1116-001
Retainer, keyway (qty 5) 634-1117-001
Insert, fastener (qty 4) 334-2117-010
Screw, cap-hex drive (qty 4) 324-2604-000
Mating connector kit, Collins Thinline, half-height, 60-pin (1)(7) 634-4192-014
connector. Kit contains the following:
Connector, male-TL II, 60-pin (qty 2) 634-1112-001
Keyway (qty 4) 634-1116-001
Retainer, keyway (qty 5) 634-1117-001
Insert, fastener (qty 4) 334-2117-010
Screw, cap-hex drive (qty 4) 324-2604-000
Contact, female tuning fork (qty 90) 372-2514-110
Plate kit, connector (qty 1) 628-8205-006
Ground spring (qty 1) 634-1120-001
120 Contacts, female tuning fork (2)(4) 372-2514-110

(2)(4) 372-2514-180
1 UMT-11 Mount, ¼-ATR half-height 622-5211-003

Table 2-3. MND-640( ) Multisensor Navigation Display System Installation Hardware Listing.
COLLINS VENDOR NAME AND

QTY DESCRIPTION NOTES PART NUMBER PART NUMBER
SDU-640A/640B INSTALLATION HARDWARE
1 Mating connector housing, 15-pin, D-subminiature (3) 371-0213-020 CNN DAMA15S-A183-F0

15 Contacts, crimp socket (2) 371-0213-110 CNN 031-1007-067
1 Hood/cable clamp (8) 371-0145-000 CNN DA24658
1 Screw-lock assembly kit (2 per kit) 371-0040-010 CNN D20419-120
1 Key plug kit (2 per kit) 629-8381-001
4 Machine screw (0.138-32 UNC-2A) Customer supplied
1 Mooring plate 553-6590-004
(1) Choose one.

(2) Refer to Table 2-2 for contact tooling information.
(3) Mating connector part number does not include snap-in crimp socket contacts.
(4) Choose as required for total quantity per unit.
(5) Vendor codes: CNN = ITT Cannon, QPL = Military Spec, PTR = Positronics
(6) Mating connector kit (CPN 634-1021-002) does not include female tuning fork contacts. Contacts must be ordered separately
(100 contacts minimum required).
(7) Mating connector kit (CPN 634-4192-014) includes female tuning fork contacts and a special connector plate with lightning pro-
tection circuitry.
(8) Hood/cable clamp CPN 371-0184-000 is interchangeable with CPN 371-0145-000.
2.7 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES 2.7.1.1 Installation
The following paragraphs provide instructions for a. Install the UMT-11 Mount and mating connec-
installing the MND-640( ) Multisensor Navigation tor kit according to the procedures printed in
Display System. If other associated equipment is to the Collins UMT-( ) Mount and Thinline II
be installed, refer to the applicable equipment Connectors manual (CPN 523-0772277).
manual for installation procedures. b. Install and orient the mating connector keyway
pins (part of the mating connector kits). Refer
Warning to Figure 2-2 (sheets 1, 2, 3, and 4) for mating
connector keyway pin indexing. The darkened
Ensure that the aircraft battery master part of keyway indicates the blocked portion.
switch is turned off before installing any c. Position the SDD interconnecting cables, with
equipment, mounts, or interconnect cables. mating connectors, into the rear of the mount.
Secure the mating connectors to the connector
2.7.1 SDD-640/640A Sensor Display Driver bracket at the rear of the mount.
d. Verify all interconnect wiring before proceed-
The SDD-640/640A is normally mounted in the ra- ing. Make sure the +28-V dc input power is ap-
dio equipment rack with a UMT-11 Mount. Refer to plied only to pins P1-57 and P2-4.
Figure 2-5 for the SDD-640/640A Sensor Display e. Remove aircraft power and slide the SDD into
Driver outline and mounting diagram. Refer to the the mount until the mating connectors are fully
general information and mount section (part A of engaged.
the Pro Line II installation manual) for the UMT- f. Position the knurled knobs on the front of the
11 Mount outline and mounting diagram. The mount to engage the SDD holddown hooks.
UMT-11 connector mounting accommodates 4-row Tighten the knurled knobs to secure the unit to
Collins Thinline II type connectors. Mating connec- the mount. Safety-wire the knurled knobs.
tors are not supplied with the mount. One mating g. Ensure that a good electrical bond exists be-
connector kit, CPN 634-1021-002 or CPN 634-4192- tween the unit and mount.
014, is required for installation of the SDD-
640/640A Sensor Display Driver.

2.7.1.2 Removal b. Slide the unit out of instrument panel until the
mating connector can be reached. Disconnect
the mating connector and carefully remove the
Caution unit.
Remove all power to a unit before it is dis- 2.8 TESTING
connected and removed.
2.8.1 Preinstallation Testing
a. Remove the safety wire and loosen the knurled
knobs that secure the unit to the mount. To verify proper operation before installing the
b. Slide the SDD-640/640A straight out to discon- equipment in the aircraft, perform the final per-
nect it from the mount connectors. Pin and formance (customer acceptance) test in the mainte-
socket damage may occur if the unit is moved nance section of the repair manual or connect the
up or sideways while the connectors are still units in a system mockup.
engaged.
2.8.2 Postinstallation Testing
2.7.2 SDU-640A/640B Sensor Display Unit
Ensure that all equipment connectors and mating
The SDU-640A/640B Sensor Display Unit is connectors are securely mated. After all cabling has
mounted from the front of the aircraft flight in- been installed and the equipment has been
strument panel. It is secured by four screws. Refer mounted in the aircraft, perform the following test
to Figure 2-6 for the desired panel cutout and the procedure to verify the operation of the MND-640( )
outline and mounting dimensions. in the aircraft. Refer to Table 2-4 for postinstalla-
tion tests.
2.8.2.1 Power Requirements
a. Install the SDU-640( ) mating connector.
b. Connect the screw-lock cable assembly to the All power required to perform the system tests is
rear connector of the SDU-640A/640B. provided by the aircraft in which the system is in-
c. Slide the unit into the instrument panel and se- stalled.
cure with four 0.138-32 UNC-2A (#6-32) screws,
one in each corner. If a mooring plate is used, it 2.8.2.2 Diagnostic Information
must be installed over the instrument case be-
fore the cable is connected. Refer to the maintenance section of this manual for
diagnostic code information.
2.7.2.2 Removal
a. Remove the four screws, one in each corner,

that secure the SDU-640A/640B to the aircraft
instrument panel.

Table 2-4. Postinstallation Test.
TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULT
1.0 POWER UP
1.1 Connect the aircraft battery and apply power to the Check that the SDU display is normal.
MND-640( ) system and to any other systems that supply
data to the MND-640( ) system (such as the FMS, AHRS,
NAV, and AUX systems).
1.2 Operate the dimming circuits associated with the in- Verify that the display intensity is controlled.
strument panel lighting.
2.0 SDD-640( ) SENSOR DISPLAY DRIVER
2.1 Push and hold the external MND TEST switch (applies The SDU displays the SDD and SDU software part numbers
only to the MND-640B system). and the SDD diagnostic data for 10 seconds. After 10 sec-
onds, the SDU displays a calibration raster as long as the
TEST switch is held in.
Release the external MND TEST switch.
3.0 SDU-640( ) SENSOR DISPLAY UNIT
3.1 Turn the FORMAT knob to each position. Verify that different navigation formats are displayed.
SDD-640: RMI, VLF, MLS, VOR1/LOC1, DME, VOR2/LOC2,
and RMI
SDD-640A: RMI, TCN1, VLF1/FMS1/LRN1/LNV1 (data
page), VLF1/FMS1/LRN1/LNV1 (HSI page), MLS1,
VOR1/LOC1, DME, VOR2/LOC2, MLS2,
VLF2/FMS2/LRN2/LNV2 (HSI page),
VLF2/FMS2/LRN2/LNV2 (data page), TCN2, and RMI
Note
Only those navigation sources enabled by interconnect strapping will be shown as possible selections.
3.2 Select the RMI format and turn the single-bar knob in Verify that the display cycles through the possible bearing
the lower left corner. pointer sources for the no 1 side (VOR1, ADF1, FMS1, or
TCN1).
3.3 Turn the double-bar knob in the lower right corner. Verify that the display cycles through the possible bearing
pointer sources for the no 2 side (VOR2, ADF2, FMS2, or
TCN2).
3.4 Select the VOR format and turn the heading knob in the Verify that the knob controls the selected heading bug.
lower left corner.
3.5 Turn the course select knob in the lower right corner. Verify that the knob controls the course arrow.
3.6 Turn the BRT trim knob in the upper left corner of the Verify that the SDU brightness is controlled.
SDU.
3.7 Repeat steps 2.1 through 3.6 for the no 2 side SDU.

Figure 2-2 (Sheet 1 of 5). SDD-640 Sensor Display Driver, Mating Connector Pin Assignments

ADDENDUM 39
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL
Insert this addendum in Part B of this manual facing page 2-11

of the VHF-21/22/422 Installation Section (523-0771856-007118).
NOTE: This addendum supersedes addendum 13.
This addendum sheet adds a note following the text in paragraph 2.5.
Note
Channel spacing in 8.33-kHz increments from 118.000 through 136.992 MHz can be accomplished by using a
CTL-22C control with a VHF-21/22/422(C/D) unit. In this configuration, discrete input P1-p on the CTL-22C must
be open to operate as an 8.33-kHz control head. 8.33-kHz or 25-kHz channel spacing may be selected with the
addition of an external switch controlling pin p. If multiple CTL-22C’s are installed, pin p needs to be diode isolated
or isolated through a multiple-pole switch.
Addendum 39
523-0772719-0f711A (Facing VHF-21/22/422 Installation Page 2-11)
Figure 2-2 (Sheet 2). SDD-640 Sensor Display Driver, Mating Connector Pin Assignments

Figure 2-2 (Sheet 3). SDD-640A Sensor Display Driver, Mating Connector Pin Assignments

Figure 2-2 (Sheet 4). SDD-640A Sensor Display Driver, Mating Connector Pin Assignments

Figure 2-2 (Sheet 5). SDU-640A/640B Sensor Display Unit, Mating Connector Pin Assignments


(This page will contain interconnect

diagram revision information)
Figure 2-3 (Sheet A). MND-640 Multisensor Navigation Display System, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-3 (Sheet 1 of 2). MND-640 Multisensor Navigation Display

System, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-3 (Sheet 2). MND-640 Multisensor Navigation Display System, Interconnect Diagram


None SDD-640A STRAP 2 (TACAN 2 SELECT) REV C

pin corrected from P2-21 to P2-23.
None SDD-640A STRAP 4 (VOR/ILS 2 SE- REV C

LECT) pin corrected from P2-23 to P2-21.
Figure 2-4 (Sheet A). MND-640B Multisensor Navigation Display System, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-4 (Sheet 1 of 2). MND-640B Multisensor Navigation

Display System, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-4 (Sheet 2). MND-640B Multisensor Navigation Display System, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-5. SDD-640( ) Sensor Display Driver, Outline and

Mounting Diagram

Figure 2-6. SDU-640( ) Sensor Display Unit, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Figure 2-7 (Sheet 1 of 2). SDD-640 Sensor Display Driver,

System Schematic

Figure 2-7 (Sheet 2). SDD-640 Sensor Display Driver, System Schematic

Figure 2-8 (Sheet 1 of 2). SDD-640A Sensor Display Driver,

System Schematic

Figure 2-8 (Sheet 2). SDD-640A Sensor Display Driver, System Schematic

ADDENDUM 40
TO
INSTALLATION MANUAL
Insert this addendum in Part B of this manual facing page 2-29

of the TDR-94/94D Installation Section (523-0775654-008118)
New Figure 2-7. TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder, Outline and Mounting Dimensions.
Figure 2-7. TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder, Outline and Mounting Dimensions
Addendum 40
23 Mar 2000 Sheet 1 of 1
523-0772719-0g711A (Facing TDR-94/94D Installation Page 2-29)
Figure 2-9. SDU-640A/640B Sensor Display Unit,

System Schematic

þ 523-0774273-006118

Collins
RAC-870
Radio Altimeter Converter
Installation
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page

2.5 RAC-870 RADIO ALTIMETER CONVERTER AND MOUNT INSTALLATION................................................2-2
2.5.1 Mount Installation..........................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.5.2 RAC-870 Radio Altimeter Converter Installation ........................................................................................................2-2
NOTICE: This section replaces fifth edition dated 12 May 1994 and revision.
Page No Issue
* Title ...........................................11 Apr 97

* 2-1 thru 2-6 ...............................11 Apr 97


1st Ed 5 Mar 86 None
1 15 Sep 95 None

section II
installation
2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING 2.3.1 Mount and Connector Selection

EQUIPMENT
Refer to Table 2-1 for a listing of the mounts and
connectors required for use with the equipment.
Note

Table 2-1. Radio Altimeter Converter Mating Connector
in this section are Collins General Aviation Requirements.
Division recommendations and do not nec-
essarily correspond with any actual aircraft COLLINS
DESCRIPTION QTY
installation and wiring. This section cannot PART NUMBER
be used in place of a Supplemental Type
Mount, special 653-9015-001 1
Certificate (STC) or Type Certificate (TC).
Unpack equipment carefully and make a careful Includes the following:
visual inspection of the unit for possible shipping
damage. All claims for damage should be filed with Connector (DDMA-50SF00000) 371-0213-050 1
the transportation company involved. If claims for Connector hood 371-0399-280 1
damage are to be filed, save the original shipping (MD50-000-J-VL-464.5)
container and materials. If no damage can be de- Contacts 371-0213-110 *48
tected, replace packing materials in the shipping Keying plug 629-8339-001 2
or reshipment). *Quantity required for typical installation

Perform the final performance test (customer ac- 2.4 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS
RAC-870 instruction book (repair manual) if verifi-
The RAC-870 requires a D-subminiature mating
cation of the unit to equipment specifications is re-
connector (refer to Table 2-1), to be attached to the
quired or connect the unit in a system mockup to
front of the unit. Figure 2-2 shows a typical instal-
verify proper operation.
lation of the RAC-870.
INSTRUCTIONS
For preparation of interconnect wiring cables, refer
Proper and careful planning of any installation is to the general information and mount section (part
essential for reliable performance and easy mainte- A of the Pro Line II installation manual). Table 2-2
nance. Follow the planning and cabling instructions is a listing of the tool requirements for a D-
in the general information and mount section (part subminiature contact. For connector contact assem-
A of the Pro line II installation manual). For addi- bly and installation information, refer to the section
tional information on wiring, bonding, and other on D-subminiature connectors in the general in-
general installation practices, refer to the Installa- formation and mount section (part A of the Pro
tion Practices Manual (CPN 523-0775254). Line II installation manual).

installation RAC-870
*COLLINS ITT CANNON MIL STANDARD

TOOL TYPE
PART NUMBER PART NUMBER NUMBER
Crimp 359-8102-010 with M22520/2-01

359-8102-080 positioner M22520/2-08
Alternate insertion/extraction tool 370-8053-020 NA M81969/1-02
2.5 RAC-870 RADIO ALTIMETER a. Slide radio altimeter converter onto mount, en-
CONVERTER AND MOUNT suring that lip at rear of radio altimeter con-
INSTALLATION verter is under raised angle at rear of mount.
b. Ensure that latching bar at front of mount is
To minimize wire length, the RAC-870 should be over lip at front of radio altimeter converter
mounted in the radio equipment rack adjacent to and tighten screw until radio altimeter con-
the ALT-55B Radio Altimeter. verter is secured to mount.
c. Install mating connector to connector on front
2.5.1 Mount Installation of radio altimeter converter and secure latch.
a. Refer to RAC-870 outline and mounting dimen- 2.6 POSTINSTALLATION CHECK

sions diagram, Figure 2-3, to determine
mounting hole requirements. a. Turn on aircraft primary power and radio al-
b. Carefully determine mounting hole locations timeter system power.
and drill required holes. b. Depress radio altimeter TEST switch and ob-
c. Position mount over mounting holes and secure serve radio altimeter indicator. Indicated alti-
with required hardware. tude should be +15.2 m (+50 ft) and flag should
be in view.
2.5.2 RAC-870 Radio Altimeter Converter c. With TEST switch released, read altitude indi-
Installation cated on altimeter. Altitude should be –1.5 to
+1.5 m (–5 to +5 ft). In some installations, the
After mount has been installed and interconnect ca- tolerance may be greater due to antenna loca-
ble verified, tighten Phillips-head screw on front of tion and the difference between aircraft touch-
mount. Ensure that polarizing key plugs have been down attitude and parked attitude.
inserted in proper positions. Figure 2-4 shows the d. Turn off radio altimeter system power and air-
RAC-870 input/output circuits. This diagram may be craft primary power.
useful during installation or troubleshooting.

Figure 2-1. RAC-870 Radio Altimeter Converter, Connector Pin Assignments

Figure 2-2. RAC-870 Radio Altimeter Converter, Typical Interconnect Wiring Diagram

Figure 2-3. RAC-870 Radio Altimeter Converter, Outline and

Mounting Diagram

Figure 2-4. RAC-870 Input/Output Circuit Diagram

þ 523-0766804-007118

Collins
RMI-36 Radio Magnetic Indicator
and BDI-36 Bearing Distance Indicator
Installation
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page
2.1 GENERAL.................................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.5 CABLING..................................................................................................................................................................2-1
NOTICE: This section replaces sixth edition dated 12 May 1994.

Page No Issue
* Title ...........................................11 Apr 97

* 2-1 thru 2-17 .............................11 Apr 97
* 2-18 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-19 thru 2-20 ...........................11 Apr 97
* 2-21 Added ................................11 Apr 97
* 2-22 Blank Added......................11 Apr 97


1st Ed 2 Feb 76 None
2nd Ed 1 Nov 76 None
3rd Ed 1 Nov 78 None
4th Ed 1 Mar 82 SB 1 thru 5
1 29 Sep 92 None

section II
installation
2.1 GENERAL 622-3702-001 thru -014), or Figure 2-6 for the

BDI-36 (CPN 622-3702-015/-016/-020/-021). Be
The installation data contained in this section con- careful to avoid damage to adjacent equipment
sists of unpacking and inspection checks, special in- and cables, and allow adequate space for in-
structions, installation procedures, and postinstal- stallation of connectors and cables.
lation testing. b. Engage mating connector(s) to indicator rear
connector(s).
For information on wiring, bonding, and other gen-
c. Slide indicator into position, and secure to
eral installation practices refer to the Installation
mount using four #6-32 UNC-2B mounting
screws.
EQUIPMENT 2.5 CABLING
Unpack the equipment carefully and make a careful Figure 2-12 through Figure 2-17 are the intercon-
visual inspection of each unit for possible shipping necting wiring diagrams for the RMI-36 and BDI-
damage. All claims for damage should be filed with 36. Figure 2-16 is the interconnecting wiring dia-
the transportation company involved. If claims for gram for the DME section of the BDI-36. The mat-
damage are to be filed, save the original packing car- ing connector part numbers are shown on the out-
ton and materials. If no defects can be detected, re- line and mounting diagrams. Refer to Figure 2-2 for
place packing materials in the shipping container and RMI-36 connector and mating connector pin as-
save for future use such as storage or reshipment. signments. Refer to Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5 for
BDI-36 (CPN 622-3702-001 thru -014) connector
2.3 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS and mating connector pin assignments. Refer to
Figure 2-7 through Figure 2-11 for BDI-36 (CPN
Listed below are special instructions that must be 622-3702-015/-016/-020/-021) connector and mating
followed to ensure proper installation of the RMI-36 connector pin assignments.
or BDI-36. Damage to equipment and/or reduced
performance may result if these instructions are Figure 2-17 provides interconnect information on
not followed. dual RMI-36 to a tie point number. The tie point
number can be used to tie together one interconnect
a. The minimum wire size for 5-volt/27.5-volt dc
diagram to another interconnect diagram with the
lines is #22 AWG.
same number. Example: the tie number 801 is dedi-
b. Read all notes on drawings and interconnects
cated to ADF Number 1 dc sin information. The ref-
prior to installing unit.
erence on the RMI diagram is to an ADF system
2.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES such as the ADF-60A. On the appropriate ADF-60A
installation diagram, there is a tie point at 801 which
The following installation procedures must be per- is the ADF 1 sin output. Figure 2-17 is designed to
formed as described to ensure proper operation and minimize HIRF and lightning hazards.
performance. Any deviation from these instructions
may result in reduced performance and/or damage The installation and removal of connector contacts
to the equipment. requires special tools such as those listed in Table
2-1. In using these tools for the assembly and repair
a. Mark, punch, and drill required mounting holes of the connectors, observe the instructions de-
and modify panel as indicated in Figure 2-1 for scribed in the general information and mount sec-
the RMI-36, Figure 2-3 for the BDI-36 (CPN tion (part A of the Pro Line II installation manual).

installation RMI/BDI-36
*COLLINS PART ITT CANNON MIL STANDARD

TOOL TYPE
NUMBER PART NUMBER NUMBER
Crimp 359-8102-010 with M22520/2-01

359-8102-080 positioner M22520/2-08
Alternate insertion/extraction tool 370-8053-020 NA M81969/1-02
2.6 POSTINSTALLATION CHECK installed in the aircraft. Refer to the applicable

ADF or VOR or DME receiver manual for postin-
A postinstallation check should be performed with stallation check.
the RMI-36 or BDI-36 and its associated equipment

Figure 2-1. RMI-36 Radio Magnetic Indicator, Outline and

Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-2. RMI-36 Radio Magnetic Indicator, Mating Connector Pin Assignments

Figure 2-3. BDI-36 Bearing Distance Indicator (CPN 622-3702-001

thru -014), Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-4. BDI-36 Bearing Distance Indicator (CPN 622-3702-001 thru -014), Mating Connector, P1, Pin Assignments

Figure 2-5. BDI-36 Bearing Distance Indicator (CPN 622-3702-001 thru -014), Mating Connector, P2, Pin Assignments

Figure 2-6. BDI-36 Bearing Distance Indicator (CPN 622-3702-015,

-016, -020, -021), Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-7. BDI-36 Bearing Distance Indicator (CPN 622-3702-015, -020, -021), Mating Connector, P1, Pin Assignments

Figure 2-8. BDI-36 Bearing Distance Indicator (CPN 622-3702-015, -021), Mating Connector, P2, Pin Assignments

Figure 2-9. BDI-36 Bearing Distance Indicator (CPN 622-3702-020), Mating Connector, P2, Pin Assignments



Figure 2-12 (Sheet 1 of 2). RMI-36 or BDI-36, ADF-60A Interconnect Wiring Diagram
Figure 2-12 (Sheet 2). RMI-36 or BDI-36, ADF-60A Interconnect Wiring Diagram

Figure 2-13 (Sheet 1 of 2). RMI-36 or BDI-36, ADF-60B Interconnect Wiring Diagram
Figure 2-13 (Sheet 2). RMI-36 or BDI-36, ADF-60B Interconnect Wiring Diagram

Figure 2-14 (Sheet 1 of 2). RMI-36 or BDI-36, VIR-30A Interconnect Wiring Diagram
Figure 2-14 (Sheet 2). RMI-36 or BDI-36, VIR-30A Interconnect Wiring Diagram

Figure 2-15 (Sheet 1 of 2). RMI-36 or BDI-36, VIR-31A Interconnect Wiring Diagram
Figure 2-15 (Sheet 2). RMI-36 or BDI-36, VIR-31A Interconnect Wiring Diagram

Figure 2-16. BDI-36, Dual DME-40 Interconnect Wiring Diagram

Figure 2-17 (Sheet 1 of 2). Dual RMI-36 With Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-17 (Sheet 2). Dual RMI-36 With Tie Points,


þ 523-0776529-102118
2nd Edition, 12 May 1994
1st Revision, 15 September 1995

Collins
RTU-870A/870T
Radio Tuning Unit
Installation
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page
2.1 GENERAL.................................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.4.1 Strapping Options...........................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.4.2 Brightness Control Adjustment .....................................................................................................................................2-1
2.6.1 RTU Installation.............................................................................................................................................................2-4
2.6.2 RTU Removal..................................................................................................................................................................2-4
NOTICE: This section replaces first edition dated 2 December 1991.

Page No Issue
* Title ...........................................15 Sep 95

* List of Effective Pages ..............15 Sep 95
2-1 thru 2-5 ..............................12 May 94
2-6 Blank.....................................2 Dec 91
2-7.............................................12 May 94
2-8 Blank..................................12 May 94
2-9 thru 2-11 ............................12 May 94
2-12 Blank................................12 May 94
* 2-13............................................15 Sep 95
2-14 Blank................................12 May 94
2-15 thru 2-16 ..........................12 May 94
2-17...........................................12 May 94
* 2-18 thru 2-19 ...........................15 Sep 95
2-20...........................................12 May 94
* 2-21 thru 2-22 ...........................15 Sep 95
2-23...........................................12 May 94
2-24 Blank................................12 May 94


1st Ed 2 Dec 91 None
1 29 Sep 92 None
1 15 Sep 95 None
section II
installation
2.1 GENERAL 2.4 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
This section provides all information needed to Proper and careful planning of any installation is
install the RTU-870A and RTU-870T. The following essential for reliable performance and easy mainte-
topics are included in this section: mounting, mat- nance. Figure 2-1 is an overview of a dual RTU in-
ing connectors and contacts, cabling, and system installation. The RTU is connected to a data concen-
terconnect. trator for return data from the tuned radios. Figure
2-2 is a system block diagram of the concentrators
Note currently available.
The information and instructions provided Follow the planning and cabling instructions in the
in this section are recommendations and do general information and mount section (part A of
not necessarily correspond with any actual the Pro Line II installation manual). For additional
aircraft installation and wiring. This sec- information on wiring, bonding, and other general
tion cannot be used in place of a supple- installation practices, refer to the Installation Prac-
mental type certificate (STC) or type certifi- tices Manual (CPN 523-0775254).
cate (TC).
Throughout this section, all references to the RTU
refer to the RTU-870A and RTU-870T. Variations Caution
between the two units are identified where applica-
ble in all text, tables, and figures. The identification All connector straps should be kept as short
method is by direct reference to differences or by as possible, preferably under 75 mm (3 in).
showing RTU-870A or RTU-870T data (pin names,
functions, etc) in parenthesis. Table 2-1 is a listing of the strapping options for the
RTU. The RTU provides many strapping and
2.2 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING switchable discrete input options to accommodate
EQUIPMENT installation requirements. Refer to the aircraft
manuals for specific strapping installation informa-
tion.
2.4.2 Brightness Control Adjustment
The RTU display can be dimmed by applying an ex-
ternal dimming voltage of 0 to 28 V dc or by ad-
justing the manual control in the upper right-hand
corner of the unit. When using an external dim-
or reshipment).
ming voltage control, refer to the following proce-
2.3 PREINSTALLATION CHECK dure:
Perform the final performance (customer accep- Adjust the external dimming control to midposition
tance) test in the maintenance section of the RTU- (approximately +16.5 V dc into the RTU). Adjust the
870A/870T repair manual if verification of the unit brightness control in the upper right-hand corner of
to equipment specifications is required or connect the RTU to the approximate center of its range. The
unit in a system mockup to verify proper operation. RTU brightness control has a 20-degree “dead spot”
Revised 12 May 1994 2-1

installation RTU-870A/870T
near the middle of the adjustment range. This “dead RTU brightness control and verify the RTU bright-
spot” is the desired location for the RTU dimming ness level does not change. Aircraft 115-V ac, 400-Hz
control when using an external dimming voltage. To supply is used to backlight the line select and dedi-
verify that you are within the “dead spot,” vary the cated key legends.
Table 2-1. RTU-870A/870T Strapping Options.
STRAP FUNCTION GROUND OPEN
RTU on/off (P1-9) RTU disabled RTU enabled
Remote ident (P1-11) Transponder ident function enabled Transponder ident function disabled
ATC no 1 select (P1-13) No 1 transponder is active No 2 transponder is active
MLS no 1 select (P1-16) No 1 MLS is installed No 1 MLS is not installed
Display engine data select (P1-39) Display engine data inputs Normal display of radio frequencies
COMM extended frequency select (P1-54) Extended COMM tuning frequency range Normal COMM tuning frequency range
NAV extended frequency select (P1-55) Extended NAV tuning frequency range Normal NAV tuning frequency range
ADF extended frequency select (P1-56) Extended ADF tuning frequency range Normal ADF tuning frequency range
ADF no 2 select (P1-57) One ADF unit is installed in aircraft Two ADF units are installed in aircraft
DME no 2 select (P1-59) One DME unit is installed in aircraft Two ADF units are installed in aircraft
RTU test enable (P1-60) RTU test mode Normal RTU operation
Marker hi sens (P1-61) Selects HI sensitivity marker beacon Selects LO sensitivity marker beacon
operation operation
MLS no 2 select (P1-62) No 2 MLS system is installed No 2 MLS system is not installed
Cross-side RTU disable (P1-63) Cross-side RTU is disabled Cross-side RTU is enabled
RTU side 2 select (P1-64) RTU is installed as side 2 control RTU is installed as side 1 control

Table 2-1. RTU-870A/870T Strapping Options.
STRAP FUNCTION GROUND OPEN
Remote tune enable (P1-12) +28 V dc: RTU receives remote radio RTU ignores remote radio tuning
tuning command words command words
UHF-1 select (P1-17) (RTU-870T) Selects UHF transceiver as left-side Selects vhf COMM1 transceiver as
COMM. UHF is shown on the display in left-side COMM. COM1 is shown on the
place of COM1. VHF1 is shown if SIDE 2 display in place of UHF.
is grounded.
UHF-2 select (P1-18) (RTU-870T) Selects UHF transceiver as right-side Selects vhf COMM1 transceiver as
COMM. UHF is shown on the display in right-side COMM. COM2 is shown on the
place of COM2. VHF1 is shown if SIDE 2 display in place of UHF.
is grounded.
TACAN-1 select (P1-19) (RTU-870T) Selects TACAN transceiver as left-side TACAN is not selected to replace left-side
DME transceiver. TCN is shown on the DME transceiver.
last line of the display if SIDE 2 is open.
TACAN-2 select (P1-20) (RTU-870T) Selects TACAN transceiver as right-side TACAN is not selected to replace
DME transceiver. TCN is shown on the right-side DME transceiver
last line of the display if SIDE 2 is
grounded.
TCAS on board (P1-21) (RTU-870T) TCAS system is on the aircraft and TCAS system is not on the aircraft
connected to the ATC system
TCAS threat traffic only (P1-22) Evokes “display threat traffic only” Envokes “display all TCAS traffic”
(RTU-870T with SB 13)
ADF TC-X (P1-23) (RTU-870T) Uses the 2091-2094 kHz AD extended Uses ADF normal tuning frequency range
tuning frequency range
INV TCN INH (P1-24) (RTU-870T) Disables the inverse TCN function Enables the inverse TCN function
2.5 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS The mounts, mating connectors, and contacts re-
quired to install an RTU are listed in Table 2-2.
Interconnect cables should be prepared in accor- Table 2-3 lists the special tools required for instal-
dance with the interconnect diagrams, Figure 2-5 lation. Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-4 illustrate the
and Figure 2-6. Figure 2-6 provides interconnect in- mating connector pin assignments for RTU-870A
formation to a tie point number. The tie point num- and RTU-870T respectively.
ber can be used to tie together one interconnect to
another interconnect diagram with the same num- Figure 2-8 provides input/output information to the
ber. Figure 2-6 is designed to minimize HIRF and RTU. This information is supplied to aid in trouble-
lightning hazards. Since these interconnects are shooting of the RTU installation.
typical, variations or modifications to meet cus-
tomer requirements are inevitable.

2.6 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES 2.7 POSTINSTALLATION CHECK
The following paragraphs provide instructions for in- The postinstallation checkout of the RTU consists of
stalling the RTU. If other associated equipment are using the RTU to tune the on-board radios. Apply
to be installed, refer to the applicable equipment in- aircraft power to the RTU and its associated radios.
stallation manual for installation procedures. If the aircraft is equipped with dual RTU’s, set the
RTU disable switch to the no 2 RTU DISABLE posi-
tion so that both the A and A ARINC output buses
Warning
from the no 1 RTU can be checked first. Use the fol-
Ensure that the aircraft battery master lowing steps for a postinstallation check of the RTU:
switch is turned off before installing any
equipment, mounts, or interconnect cables. Note
If two RTU’s are installed, they may be

2.6.1 RTU Installation
swapped with each other to verify aircraft
wiring and to isolate a failed unit.
The RTU is instrument panel mounted and re-
quires no special cooling considerations. Refer to a. With the RTU installed in the aircraft, apply
Figure 2-7 for outline and mounting diagrams of power to the RTU. If the RTU is completely
the equipment and mounts. Use the following steps dead, check circuit breakers and verify that
to install an RTU: +27.5 V dc is at RTU mating connector P1-1
a. Using Figure 2-7 for dimensions, determine the and/or P1-7 and ground at P1-3.
panel cutout requirements. b. Select local ADF, COMM, and NAV frequencies
b. Select a mounting position that is convenient that can be received with the aircraft on the
for pilot and/or copilot view and control. ground. Tune both side 1 and side 2 (if applica-
c. Proceed to making the instrument panel cutout. ble) to these frequencies. Verify that both side 1
d. Using a 2.38-mm (0.09375-in, 3/32-in) hexhead and side 2 radios are tuned to the selected fre-
(Allen) wrench, turn the integral turnlock actu- quency by identifying the station over the air-
ating clamps counterclockwise until they will craft audio system.
not turn anymore. This moves the RTU’s clamp c. If there is a control tower on the field, the ATC
out of the way so the unit may be inserted into code may be verified with the cooperation of
the instrument panel. someone in the control tower. To test ATC code,
e. Pull the mating connector assembly through the the transponder must be switched from STBY
front panel cutout hole and mate to the RTU. mode to ATC mode by pressing the ATC STBY
f. Insert the RTU into the instrument panel cut- button. The REPLY annunciator illuminates
out hole. Push the RTU tight against the in- when the transponder replies to an interroga-
strument panel (do not push on the glass dis- tion. If the aircraft is equipped with dual
play). Then turn the integral turnlock clamps transponders, selection of ATC 1 or ATC 2 must
clockwise using the hexhead wrench. Tighten be made from the aircraft reversion panel.
the actuating clamps until the RTU is held d. Operation of installed switchable discrete strap
firmly in place. options must be checked. Refer to Table 2-1 for
switchable discrete options. Refer to the aircraft
2.6.2 RTU Removal manuals for specific test information on in-
stalled discretes and straps.
The following steps provide information on removal e. Check the RTU display and annunciator dim-
of the RTU: ming by varying the aircraft instrument light-
a. Push the RTU tight against the instrument ing. The illumination of both the RTU display
panel (do not push on the glass display). Turn and the RTU discrete annunciators (if any are
the turnlock actuating clamps counterclockwise lit) should vary evenly as the dimming control
using a 2.38-mm (0.09375-in, 3/32-in) hexhead is adjusted.
(Allen) wrench. f. If applicable, set panel-mounted RTU DIS-
b. Gently pull the unit out of the instrument ABLE switch to the no 1 RTU DISABLE posi-
panel. tion and repeat postinstallation steps to check
c. Remove the mating connector from the RTU. the no 2 RTU A and B ARINC output buses.

Table 2-2. RTU Mating Connector Requirements.
Connector 359-0601-010 1
Connector contacts (MS27491-22) 359-0608-020 *65
Strain relief (MS27506F20-2) 359-0637-070 *1
*These parts are included with the connector.
Table 2-3. RTU Mating Connector Special Tools.
COLLINS PART MANUFACTURER

DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER
NUMBER PART NUMBER
Crimp tool 359-8102-010 Military standard MS22520/2-01
Contact locator 359-8102-060 Military standard MS22520/2-06
*Contact locator 359-8025-060 Daniels Mfg. Corp. A156

ITT Cannon Electric L3198-CLS
Buchanan Electrical Products 613693
Insertion tool 359-8032-010 Military standard M81069/14-01
Extraction tool 359-8032-010 Military standard M81969/14-01
*This locator is optional and is used in the military standard MS3198-1 crimp tool.
Revised 12 May 1994 2-5/(2-6 blank)

Figure 2-1. Radio Tuning Unit, Overview Diagram

Figure 2-2. Radio Tuning Unit and Data Concentrator, System Block Diagram

Figure 2-3. RTU-870A Rear Connector Pin Assignments

Figure 2-4. RTU-870T Rear Connector Pin Assignments

Figure 2-5. RTU-870A/870T Radio Tuning Unit,

Revised 15 September 1995 2-13/(2-14 blank)

Figure 2-6 (Sheet 1 of 2). RTU-870A/870T Radio Tuning Unit

to Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-6 (Sheet 2). RTU-870A/870T Radio Tuning Unit to Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-7. RTU-870A/870T Radio Tuning Unit,


Figure 2-8 (Sheet 1 of 3). RTU-870A Radio Tuning Unit, System Interface Input/Output Circuits
Revised 15 September 1995 2-18

Figure 2-8 (Sheet 2). RTU-870A Radio Tuning Unit,

System Interface Input/Output Circuits

Figure 2-8 (Sheet 3). RTU-870A Radio Tuning Unit, System Interface Input/Output Circuits

Figure 2-9 (Sheet 1 of 3). RTU-870T Radio Tuning Unit,


Figure 2-9 (Sheet 2). RTU-870T Radio Tuning Unit, System Interface Input/Output Circuits

Figure 2-9 (Sheet 3). RTU-870T Radio Tuning Unit,


ADDENDUM 36
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL
Insert this addendum sheet in Part B of this manual facing the section title page of the
RTU-42X0 Radio Tuning Unit and AIU-4000 Audio Interface Unit Installation Section (523-0778075-003118).
This addendum is issued to inform you that the RTU-42X0 Radio Tuning Unit and AIU-4000 Audio Interface Unit
installation section (523-0778075) is out-of-date and will be deleted from the Pro Line II installation manual during
the next revision cycle. Information in this section is included in a new RTU-42X0 Radio Tuning Unit installation
manual (523-0780424).
Addendum 36
523-0772719-0c711A (Facing RTU-42X0 Installation Title Page)
þ 523-0778075-003118
3rd Edition, 11 April 1997

Collins
RTU-42X0 Radio Tuning Unit
and
AIU-4000 Audio Interface Unit
Installation
Table of Contents
2.1 GENERAL INFORMATION................................2-1 2.9 RTU-42X0 POST INSTALLATION CHECK .... 2-60
2.2 RTU-42X0 OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW ...........2-9 2.10 RTU-42X0 DIAGNOSTICS .............................. 2-61
2.3 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING RTU-42X0 2.10.1 Diagnostics .........................................................2-61
EQUIPMENT.....................................................2-13 2.10.2 System Diagnostics............................................2-61
2.10.3 Radio Diagnostics ..............................................2-62
2.4 RTU-42X0 PREINSTALLATION CHECK .......2-13 2.10.4 Radio Fault History (applicable to all RTUs
except -004 RTU-4210s) ........................................2-65
2.5 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS ..............................2-13
2.10.5 Reset Radio Fault History (applicable to all
2.6 RTU-42X0 PLANNING ......................................2-13 RTUs except -004 status RTU-4210s)...................2-66
2.6.1 Installation Configurations................................. 2-13 2.10.6 RTU-42X0 Labels...............................................2-66
2.6.2 Strapping Options................................................ 2-17 2.11 AIU-4000 AUDIO INTERFACE UNIT
2.6.3 Cooling Considerations........................................ 2-17 OVERVIEW........................................................ 2-71
2.7 RTU-42X0 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS...........2-17 2.12 AIU-4000 INSTALLATION DATA .................. 2-75
2.8 RTU-42X0 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES ..2-20 2.12.1 General ...............................................................2-75
2.8.1 Installation........................................................... 2-48 2.12.2 Unpacking and Inspecting Equipment .............2-75
2.8.2 Removal................................................................ 2-48 2.12.3 Installation Procedure .......................................2-75
2.8.3 System Configuration.......................................... 2-48 2.12.4 Installation Interface Considerations...............2-76
2.8.4 System Configuration Verification in an IOC 2.12.5 Removal Procedure ............................................2-76
Installation ............................................................ 2-48 2.13 AIU-4000 LABELS ........................................... 2-76
2.8.5 System Configuration Setup and Verification
in a Stand-alone or SDD Installation ................... 2-50
2.8.6 Configuration Error Pages .................................. 2-58
NOTICE: This section replaces second edition dated 3 June 1996.

Page No Issue
* Title .................................... 11 April 1997

* List of Effective Pages ....... 11 April 1997
* 2-1 thru 2-66 ...................... 11 April 1997
* 2-67 thru 2-78 Added ......... 11 April 1997


1st Ed 30 Oct 95 None
2nd Ed 3 Jun 96 None

section II
installation
2.1 GENERAL INFORMATION figuration, post installation check, and diagnostics.

Table 2-1 lists equipment covered in this section.
This installation section provides all the informa- Related publications are listed in Table 2-2. Table
tion needed to install and verify operation of the 2-3 lists the RTU-42X0 equipment specifications.
RTU-42X0 and AIU-4000. The following topics are AIU-4000 equipment specifications are given in
included: operational overview, unpacking, prein- Table 2-9. Table 2-4 is the RTU-42X0 environ-
stallation check, special instructions, cabling in- mental qualifications form. The AIU-4000 environ-
structions, installation and removal, system con- mental qualifications form is in Table 2-10.
COLLINS PART
EQUIPMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
AIU-4000 Audio Interface Unit. Works with volume control equipped RTU-40X0/42X0 Radio 822-0271-001
Tuning Units to provide volume control of up to 12 radios.
RTU-4200 Radio Tuning Unit, black, provides centralized control and display of aircraft com- 822-0668-001
munication and navigation radio subsystems via ARINC 429 or CSDB serial bus.
Standard features include tuning capability for dual COM, NAV, DME, XPDR, and
ADF radios, FMS interface via ARINC 429 and CSDB serial bus, and an ON/OFF
control for switching RTU power. The unit is designed for front panel mounting with
screws or with a Dzus mounting adapter (included) and is compatible with 28 V dc, 5
V dc, or 5 V ac integral lighting sources.
RTU-4200 Same features as the -001 RTU-4200 except the color is gray. 822-0668-002
RTU-4200 Same features as the -001 RTU-4200 except includes a volume control. 822-0668-101
RTU-4200 Same features as the -001 RTU-4200 except includes a volume control and the color 822-0668-102
is gray.
RTU-4210 Same features as the -005 RTU-4210 except does not have the ON/OFF switch. 822-0836-001
RTU-4210 Same features as the -005 RTU-4210 except does not have the ON/OFF switch and 822-0836-002
the color is gray.
RTU-4210 Same features as the -005 RTU-4210 except does not have the CSDB FMS interface, 822-0836-004
and the color is gray.
Standard features include tuning capability for dual COM, NAV, DME, XPDR, ADF
radios, single TCAS tuning, FMS interface via ARINC 429 and CSDB serial bus, and
an ON/OFF control for switching RTU power. The unit is designed for front panel
mounting with screws or with a Dzus mounting adapter (included) and is compatible
with 28 V dc, 5 V dc, or 5 V ac integral lighting sources.
is gray.
RTU-4210 Same features as the -005 RTU-4210 except provides additional tuning capability for 822-0836-203
COM3/HF-9000.

COLLINS PART
EQUIPMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
COM3/HF-9000 and the color is gray.
COM3/HF-9000 and includes a volume control.
COM3/single HF-9000, includes a volume control, and the color is gray.
Standard features include tuning capability for dual COM, NAV, DME, XPDR, ADF
radios, single TCAS and HF-9000 tuning, FMS interface via ARINC 429 and CSDB
serial bus, backup HSI display mode, and an ON/OFF control for switching RTU
power. The unit is designed for front panel mounting with screws or with a Dzus
mounting adapter (included) and is compatible with 28 V dc, 5 V dc, or 5 V ac inte-
gral lighting sources.
is gray.
dual HF-9000s.
dual HF-9000s and the color is gray.
dual HF-9000s. This unit contains customized software for the Falcon 900EX aircraft
and is a non-standard gray color.
dual HF-9000s and includes a volume control.
dual HF-9000s, includes a volume control, and the color is gray.
dual HF-9000s and includes a volume control. This unit contains customized soft-
ware for the Falcon 50EX and Falcon 2000 aircraft and is a non-standard gray color.
Standard features include tuning capability for dual COM, NAV, DME, XPDR, ADF,
HF-9000 radios, single TCAS tuning, FMS interface via ARINC 429 and CSDB serial
bus, backup HSI and engine/fuel display modes, and an ON/OFF control for switch-
ing RTU power. The appearance of this unit differs from that of other RTUs in the
RTU-42X0 family in that it has five dedicated push button function keys located un-
der the LCD display. This unit is designed for front panel mounting with integral
Dzus fasteners and is compatible with 28 V dc, 5 V dc, or 5 V ac integral lighting
sources. Software in this unit is customized for the Gulfstream G5 aircraft.
Notes:
1. An AIU-4000 Audio Interface Unit is required for RTUs having volume controls.

ADDENDUM 33
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL (PART B)
Insert this addendum sheet between page 2-2 and Addendum 17 sheet 1,
facing page 2-2 of the RTU-42X0 Installation Section (523-0778075-003118).
This addendum sheet adds a table which lists the new top level CPNs following installation of service bulletin 11
on the RTU-4200/4210/4220 Radio Tuning Units listed below.
This information will be incorporated into the Installation Manual at the next revision.
COLLINS PART NUMBER

UNIT
BEFORE CONVERSION AFTER CONVERSION
RTU-4200 822-0668-011 822-0668-021
RTU-4200 822-0668-012 822-0668-022
RTU-4200 822-0668-111 822-0668-121
RTU-4200 822-0668-112 822-0668-122
RTU-4210 822-0836-014 822-0836-024
RTU-4210 822-0836-015 822-0836-025
RTU-4210 822-0836-016 822-0836-026
RTU-4210 822-0836-113 822-0836-123
RTU-4210 822-0836-114 822-0836-124
RTU-4210 822-0836-213 822-0836-223
RTU-4210 822-0836-214 822-0836-224
RTU-4210 822-0836-313 822-0836-323
RTU-4210 822-0836-314 822-0836-324
RTU-4220 822-0730-011 822-0730-021
RTU-4220 822-0730-012 822-0730-022
RTU-4220 822-0730-111 822-0730-121
RTU-4220 822-0730-112 822-0730-122
RTU-4220 822-0730-211 822-0730-221
RTU-4220 822-0730-212 822-0730-222
RTU-4220 822-0730-214 822-0730-224
RTU-4220 822-0730-311 822-0730-321
RTU-4220 822-0730-312 822-0730-322
RTU-4220 822-0730-314 822-0730-324
Addendum 33
523-0772719-0Z711A (Facing Page 2-2)
ADDENDUM 17
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL
Insert addendum sheets 1-3 facing page 2-2 of the

RTU-42X0 installation section (523-0778075-003118) in Part B of this manual.
Addendum sheets 1-3 consolidate some existing and additional RTU-4XXX descriptions into a table format. Insert
Table 2-1A, Table 2-1B, and Table 2-1C following Table 2-1.
Table 2-1A. RTU-4200 Radio Tuning Unit.
Options Panel Color Part

8.33-kHz Volume Black Gray Number
Tuning Control
X 822-0668-001
X -002
X X -101
X X -102
X X 822-0668-011
X X -012
X X X -111
X X X -112
Standard Features: Dual COMM / NAV / DME / XPDR / ADF

ON/OFF Switch
PL4 Panel Lighting
Addendum 17
523-0772719-0H711A (Facing Page 2-2)
COLLINS PART
PUBLICATION ATA NO
NUMBER
ARINC 429 General Aviation Subset n/a 523-0774610

Commercial Standard Digital Bus n/a 523-0772774
ADF-60 Automatic Direction Finding System Instruction Book 34-53-10 523-0766184
ADF-462 Automatic Direction Finder Receiver and ANT-462 ADF Antenna Instruction 34-53-40 523-0773906
Book
CAD-31/62 Control Adapter Instruction Book n/a 523-0773216
CAD-870 Repair Manual n/a 523-0774242
DME-42 DME Transceiver Instruction Book 34-56-10 523-0772458
DME-442 DME Transceiver Repair Manual 34-52-40 523-0774368
Pro Line II Comm/Nav/Pulse System Installation Manual n/a 523-0772719
TCAS-94 Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System Install Manual n/a 523-0775833
TDR-90 Transponder Instruction Book 34-50-90 523-0765128
TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder System Instruction Book n/a 523-0775652
VHF-21/22 VHF Comm Transceiver Instruction Book 23-12-10 523-0771854
VHF-422 VHF Comm Transceiver Instruction Book 23-12-40 523-0773785
VIR-32 Navigation Receiver Instruction Book 34-55-32 523-0772819
VIR-432 Navigation Receiver Instruction Book 34-55-40 523-0773863
Installation Practices Manual n/a 523-0775254
Table 2-3. RTU-42X0 Equipment Specifications.
Certification
TSO
FAA TSO documents applicable to all RTUs:
-C34e, -C35d, -C36e, -C37d, -C38d, -C40c , -C41d, -C66c, -C74c, -C112, -C113, -C119a
Additional TSO documents applicable only to RTU-4220s and RTU-4280s:
-C6d, -C31d, -C32d
Environmental
FAA DO-160C categories [A2F1]-BB[BMNPS]E1XXXXXZ[BZ]AZAWA[Z3Z3]XX. Refer to the
Environmental Qualifications Form supplied in Table 2-4 for additional information.
Software DO-178B
Physical
Size Panel Mounted Dzus Mounted Dzus Mounted
RTU-4200/4210/4220 RTU-4200/4210/4220 RTU-4280
Height case 83.24 mm (3.277 in) 83.24 mm (3.277 in) 83.24 mm (3.277 in)
bezel 95.25 mm (3.750 in) 95.25 mm (3.750 in) 104.78 mm (4.125 in)
Width case 113.72 mm (4.477 in) 113.72 mm (4.477 in) 113.72 mm (4.477 in)
bezel 126.30 mm (4.975 in) 146.05 mm (5.750 in) 146.05 mm (5.750 in)

ADDENDUM 17
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL
Table 2-1B. RTU-4210 Radio Tuning Unit.

ON/OFF 8.33-kHz HF/3rd Volume Black Black Gray Number
Switch Tuning COMM Control Knobs/Buttons
X 822-0836-001
X -002
X X 822-0836-003/-005
X X -004/-006
X X X -103
X X X -104
X X X 822-0836-203
X X X -204
X X X X -303
X X X X -304
X X X X 822-0836-014
X X X -015
X X X -016
X X X -113
X X X -114
X X X X 822-0836-213
X X X X -214
X X X X X -313
X X X X X -314

Single TCAS
PL4 Panel Lighting
Addendum 17
523-0772719-0H711A (Facing Page 2-2)
ADDENDUM 17
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL
Table 2-1C. RTU-4220 Radio Tuning Unit.

Unique Colors 8.33-kHz 2nd HF Volume Black Gray Number
Tuning Control
X 822-0730-001
X -002
X X -101
X X -102
X X 822-0730-201
X X -202
X X X -204
X X X 822-0730-301
X X X -302
X X X X -304
X X 822-0730-011
X X -012
X X X -111
X X X -112
X X X 822-0730-211
X X X -212
X X X X -214
X X X X 822-0730-311
X X X X -312
X X X X X -314

Single TCAS / HF-9000 / 3RD COMM
ON/OFF Switch, HSI
PL4 Panel Lighting
Addendum 17
523-0772719-0H711A (Facing Page 2-2)
Length (measured from rear 163.33 mm (6.43 in) 163.33 mm (6.43 in) 163.33 mm (6.43 in)
surface of bezel to
end of connector)
Weight 1.2 kg (2.75 lb) 1.3 kg (3.00 lb) 1.65 kg (3.65 lb)
Mounting Information RTU-4200/4210/4220s are designed to be front panel mounted with screws or Dzus panel
mounting adapter, CPN 827-7402-00X (supplied with RTU-4200/4210/4220s). RTU-
4280s are front panel mounted with integral Dzus fasteners.
Cooling Convection
Electrical
Power/Straps
+28 VDC PRIMARY (J1-98/99) +18.0 to +32.2 V dc analog source capable of supplying a nominal .54 amps (15 watts)
PWR
+28 VDC PWR RTN (J1-96/100) Return path for the primary +28 V dc input source
+28 VDC ALT PWR (J1-2/3) Alternate +18.0 to +32.2 V dc analog source capable of supplying a nominal .54 amps
(15 watts)
+28 VDC ALT PWR (J1-8/16) Return path for the standby +28 V dc input source
RTN
CHAS GND (J1-1) Chassis ground connection
Discrete Inputs Electrical Definition: Open means not less than 100 kΩ; Gnd means not more than +3 V
dc
CONCENTRATED (J1-7) Open = Concentrated data source not utilized; Gnd = concentrated data source is util-
DATA ized
CONCENTRATOR TYPE (J1-15) Open = IOC concentrator type; Gnd = SDD concentrator type
WEIGHT ON WHEELS (J1-17) Open = aircraft not on the ground; Gnd = aircraft on the ground
RMT IDENT (J1-27) Open = inactive state; Gnd = initiate identification
ATC-2 SELECT/ XRTU (J1-86) If ATC is configured for external selection, Open = ATC-1 and Gnd = ATC-2.
XPDR ON If ATC is configured for internal selection, Open = cross-side RTU transponder not se-
lected and Gnd = cross-side RTU transponder selected.
SIDE-2 SELECT (J1-42) Open = select RTU side 1; Gnd = select RTU side 2
RTU DISABLE (J1-58) Open = RTU enabled (on); Gnd = RTU disabled (off). This input has a max current
handling capacity of 125 mA and is also internally controlled by the front panel ON/OFF
switch present on most RTUs.
XSD RTU DISABLE (J1-48) Open = cross-side RTU enabled; Gnd = cross-side RTU disabled
RMT TUNE DISABLE (J1-49) Open = remote tune enabled; Gnd = remote tune disabled
INPUT
EXT COM/NAV CTL IN (J1-50) Open = CTL is not controlling radios; Gnd = CTL is controlling radios
CONTROL
MKR SENSE HI (J1-51) Open = marker sensitivity lo; Gnd = marker sensitivity hi
EXT LCD BRIGHTNESS (J1-53) Open = external LCD brightness control disabled
ENBL Gnd = external LCD brightness control enabled
ATC TDR STBY (J1-74) If ATC is configured for external selection, Open = selected transponder not in standby
and Gnd = selected transponder in standby. If ATC is configured for internal selection
pin J1-74 is reserved.
NAV TEST INHIBIT (J1-75) Open = NAV test not inhibited; Gnd = NAV test inhibited

ONSD AUTO DISP (J1-84) Open = Autotune mode inactive; Gnd = Autotune mode active (controls autotune an-
(RTU-4200/4210/4220s nunciator in the RTU when using an FMS in a non-IOC installation)
only)
PGM MODE (J1-90) Open = Programming of unit software inhibited; Gnd = Programming of unit software
enabled
Spare Discrete Inputs (J1-84) RTU-4280s
(J1-18,32,56,79) RTU-4200/4210/4220s only
Serial Data Bus Inputs
A429 INPUT-1A (J1-61) #1 ARINC 429 bus: configurable to accept high or low-speed serial data (12.5 kHz or 100
A429 INPUT-1B (J1-62) kHz respectively). This input connects to the on-side FMS in a stand-alone RTU instal-
lation and in SDD installations where the FMS is connected directly to the RTU.
A429 INPUT-2B (J1-69) kHz respectively). This input connects to the right FADEC (full authority digital engine
controller) on RTU-4280’s.
A429 INPUT-3A (J1-70) #3 ARINC 429 bus: accepts low-speed (12.5 kHz) serial data only. If an IOC data source
A429 INPUT-3B (J1-71) is used, this input connects to the right A IOC data concentrator bus. If an SDD concen-
trated data source it used, this input connects to the right side SDD data concentrator
bus.
A429 INPUT-4B (J1-73) is used, this input connects to the right B data concentrator bus.
A429 INPUT-5A (J1-40) #5 ARINC 429 bus: accepts low-speed (12.5 kHz) serial data only. This input connects to
A429 INPUT-5B (J1-41) the FQMS (fuel quantity measurement system) on RTU-4280’s.
A429 INPUT-6B (J1-14) kHz respectively). This input connects to the cross-side FMS in a stand-alone RTU in-
stallation and in SDD installations where the FMS is connected directly to the RTU.
A429 INPUT-7B (J1-60) kHz respectively). This input connects to the left FADEC (full authority digital engine
controller) on RTU-4280’s.
A429 INPUT-8B (J1-29) is used, this input connects to the left A IOC data concentrator bus. If an SDD concen-
trated data source it used, this input connects to the left side SDD data concentrator
bus.
A429 INPUT-9B (J1-31) is used, this input connects to the left B IOC data concentrator bus.
A429 RTU XSD IN-A (J1-43) #10 ARINC 429 bus: accept low-speed (12.5 kHz) serial data only.
A429 RTU XSD IN-B (J1-44)
CSDB INPUT-1A (J1-46) #1 CSDB bus: accepts data at a 12.5 kHz rate with a data format of 6 bytes/block.
CSDB INPUT-1B (J1-55)

CSDB INPUT-8A (J1-77) #8 CSDB bus: accepts data at a 50 kHz rate with a data format of 8 bytes/block.
Discrete Outputs Electrical Definition: Open means not less than 100 kΩ; Gnd means not more than +3 V
dc.
STRAP GROUND (J1-47) Ground level voltage source for hardware strapping
RMT TUNE DISABLE (J1-54) Open = Remote tuning enabled; Gnd = Remote tuning disabled
OUTPUT
RTU XPDR ON OUT (J1-87) Open = On-side RTU XPDR not selected; Gnd = On-side RTU XPDR selected
BURST TUNE ENABLE (J1-94) Open = Inhibits burst tuning in controlled radios; Gnd = Enables bursting tuning mode
in controlled radios (all RTUs except -001 and -002 RTU-4210s)
Spare Discrete Outputs (J1-85) All RTUs
Serial Data Bus Outputs
A429 XSIDE CTL OUT-A (J1-19) Transmits low speed (12.5 kHz) ARINC 429 data to the cross-side radios.
A429 XSIDE CTL OUT-B (J1-20)
A429 ONSIDE CTL (J1-80) Transmits low speed (12.5 kHz) ARINC 429 data to the on-side radios.
OUT-A
A429 ONSIDE CTL (J1-81)
OUT-B
A429 RTU XSD OUT-A (J1-21) Transmits low speed (12.5 kHz) ARINC 429 data to the cross-side RTU.
A429 RTU XSD OUT-B (J1-22)
A429 SPARE OUT-A (J1-23) Spare low speed (12.5 kHz) ARINC 429 transmit bus.
A429 SPARE OUT-B (J1-24)
CSDB XSIDE CTL (J1-33) Transmits low speed (12.5 kHz) CSDB data to the cross-side radios.
OUT-A
CSDB XSIDE CTL (J1-37)
OUT-B
CSDB ONSIDE CTL (J1-65) Transmits low speed (12.5 kHz) CSDB data to the on-side radios.
OUT-A
CSDB ONSIDE CTL (J1-36)
OUT-B
LCD Dimming Control **
+5 VDC LCD DIM CTL (J1-34) 0 to +5 V dc analog input for dimming the LCD backlighting
INPUT
LCD DIM CTL PWR (J1-45) Ground return for the LCD dimming reference inputs.
RTN
+28 VDC LCD DIM CTL (J1-66) 0 to +32 V dc analog input for dimming the LCD backlighting
IN
+5 VAC LCD DIM CTL (J1-76) 0 to +5 V ac analog input for dimming the LCD backlighting
INPUT
Panel Dimming Control
+28 VDC PNL LTNG (J1-25) 0 to +32 V dc analog source capable of supplying 7.5 watts for incandescent panel light-
REF ing (install a 22 AWG jumper wire between J1-52 and J1-67 when using J1-25).
PNL LTNG RTN (J1-35) Ground return for the incandescent panel lighting.
+5 VDC CONV OUTPUT (J1-52) +5 V dc converted output developed from the +28 V dc panel lighting reference (J1-25).

+5 VAC/DC PNL LTNG (J1-67) 0 to 5 V ac/dc analog source capable of supplying 7.5 watts for incandescent panel light-
ing.
Reserved Pins (J1-2,4,5,9,10,16,63, All RTUs
91-93,95,96,97,99)
(J1-18,32,56,74,79) RTU-4280s only
(J1-94) -001 and -002 RTU-4210 only
Notes:
**Ensure that the LCD dimming control is connected to only one lighting source.
Table 2-4. RTU-42X0, Environmental Qualifications Form.
DO-160C
CONDITIONS SPECIFICATION
PARA NO
Temp and Altitude 4.0 Categories A2 and F1.

Low Operating Temp 4.5.1 -20 °C (-4 °F)
High Operating Temp 4.5.3 +70 °C (+158 °F)
Low Storage Temp 4.5.1 -55 °C (-67 °F)
High Storage Temp 4.5.2 +85 °C (+185 °F)
Altitude 4.6.1 Category A2. Certified for installation in a partially controlled temperature loca-
tion in an aircraft where pressures are no lower than an altitude
Category F1. Certified for installation in a nonpressurized but controlled tempera-

ture location in an aircraft that is operated at altitudes up to 16 800
m (55 000 ft) msl.
Temperature Variation 5.0 Category B. Certified for installation in a noncontrolled or partially controlled
temperature location in the aircraft.
Humidity 6.0 Category B. Certified for a Severe Humidity Environment.
Shock 7.0
Operational 7.2 Tested at 6 g peak
Crash Safety 7.3 Tested at 15 g (11 ms duration)
Vibration 8.0 Categories B, M, N, P, and S.
Category B. Certified for equipment rack mounting in a fixed wing turbojet or

turbofan aircraft.
Category M. Certified for fuselage or equipment rack mounting in a single or

multi-engine, piston or turboprop, fixed wing aircraft less than 5700
kg (12 500 lb). Also certified for equipment rack mounting in a multi-
engine piston or turboprop fixed wing aircraft over 5700 kg (12 500
lb).
Category N. Certified for equipment rack mounting in a piston or turbine rotary

wing aircraft.
Category P. Certified for panel, console, or vibration isolated equipment rack

(Cont) mounting in a piston or turbine rotary wing aircraft.

DO-160C
PARA NO
Vibration (Cont) 8.0 Category S. Certified for panel, console, or vibration isolated equipment rack
mounting in piston or turboprop fixed wing aircraft.
Explosion Proofness 9.0 Category E1. Certified for installation in a location where an explosive atmosphere
may occur as a result of leakage or spillage.
Waterproofness 10.0 Category X. (no test required)

Certified for installation in locations not subject to falling water
(including condensation), rain water, or sprayed water.
Fluids Susceptibility 11.0 Category X. (no test required)

Certified for installation in locations not exposed to fluid contamina-
tion from fuel, hydraulic fluids, oil, solvents, etc.
Sand and Dust 12.0 Category X. (no test required)

Certified for installation in locations not subject to blowing sand and
dust.
Fungus Resistance 13.0 Category X. Fungus resistance test not performed.
Salt Spray 14.0 Category X. Salt spray test not performed.
Magnetic Effect 15.0 Category Z. Unit causes a 1° deflection of an uncompensated compass at a dis-
tance less than 0.3 m (1.0 ft).
Power Input 16.0 Categories B and Z
Category B. Certified for use on aircraft electrical systems where primary power
is from engine driven alternator/rectifiers or dc generator where a
Category Z. Certified for use on aircraft electrical systems not applicable to any
other category. For example, a dc system from a variable range gen-
erator where a small capacity or no battery is floating on the dc bus.
Voltage Spike 17.0 Category A. Certified for installation in systems where a high degree of voltage
spike protection is required.
Audio Frequency Suscepti- 18.0 Category Z. Certified for use on aircraft electrical systems not applicable to any
bility other category. For example, a dc system from a variable range gen-
erator where a small capacity or no battery is floating on the dc bus.
Induced Signal Suscepti- 19.0 Category A. Certified for operation in systems where interference-free operation
bility is desired.
RF Susceptibility 20.0 Category W. Certified for installation in a severe electromagnetic environment.
Emission of RF Energy 21.0 Category A. Certified for operation in systems where interference-free operation
is desired.
Lightning Induced Tran- 22.0 Category Refer to FAA AC 20-136.

sient Susceptibility Z3Z3.

DO-160C
PARA NO
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 Category X. (test still under development)

Certified for installation in an environment where lightning effects
are insignificant or not applicable.
Icing 24.0 Category X. (no test performed)

Certified for installation in a location not subject to ice formation.
2.2 RTU-42X0 OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW which are unique to the RTU-4280. Theses buttons
provide direct access to the TCAS main display
The RTU provides integrated control of several page, backup engine/fuel and HSI display pages,
combinations of aircraft communications and navi- and the international display pages. The ATC
gation radio subsystems. The integrated control in- ON/OFF button allows direct STBY/ON control of
cludes the setting of radio frequencies/channels, the selected transponder without having the enter
modes, and volume. The RTU supports full cross- the ATC main display page. All RTU operator con-
side and reversionary tuning, thus allowing single trols and LCD displayed are described below.
point control of both on-side and cross-side radios
from the pilot’s or copilot’s cockpit position. Line Select Buttons
The RTU has seven panel mounted line select but-

Typically, each RTU controls one VHF COM radio,
tons adjacent to the display, four on the left side
one NAV radio, one DME radio, one ADF radio, and
and three on the right. The line select buttons have
one ATC transponder (with or without TCAS, de-
momentary non-latching push button actions. Some
pending on the configuration). These are the core
of the line select buttons may have simulated
radios of an installation. Additionally, RTU-4220s,
latching functions implemented through software.
RTU4280s, and some RTU-4210s provide tuning
The functions performed by any specific line select
capability of a third VHF COM radio, and one or
button depend solely on the page format present on
two HF COM radios.
the display.
All RTUs have the ability to display RTU/system/ Each line select button is continually monitored for
radio diagnostic data, internally select and/or dis- switch transitions. All line select switches (buttons)
play aircraft radio subsystem configurations, and are debounced. When a button is pushed, only the
accept external tuning inputs from an FMS. The function associated with that button is activated. In
block diagram in Figure 2-1 illustrates the hierar- this manner, a stuck line select button disables only
chy of the display pages. its associated function and cannot disable or other
wise affect the overall operation of the entire RTU.
An RTU-4280 is illustrated in Figure 2-2. This RTU Pushing an unassigned line select button does
contains all of the operator controls found on RTU- nothing to affect the operation of the RTU. Detec-
4200s, RTU-4210s and RTU-4220s, plus five addition of the line select buttons is disabled when the
tional dedicated push buttons under the display volume or tune knobs are rotated.

Figure 2-1. Display Hierarchy

Figure 2-2. RTU-42X0 Controls
1/2 Button display to the radio diagnostic page for the on-side
radio.
The 1/2 button is a dedicated momentary action,
non-latching push button. Pushing this button al- DME-H Button
lows display of the cross-side radio data. Pushing
the 1/2 button displays the cross-side top level dis- The DME-H button is a dedicated momentary ac-
play (assuming valid operation of the cross-side tion, non-latching push button. Pushing this button
RTU). Pushing the 1/2 button again, returns the toggles the DME hold function on the controlled
display to the on-side display page that was present DME channel. This button has no effect if pushed
before the 1/2 button was pushed the first time. from the cross-side radio tuning inoperative page,
configuration error page, menu page, or any display
page under these pages in the hierarchy.
Operation of the 1/2 button is disabled if the con-
figuration error page, menu page, or any page un-
IDENT Button
der these pages in the hierarchy is displayed, ex-
cept for radio main and radio diagnostics pages.
The IDENT button is a dedicated momentary action,
non-latching push button. Pushing this button initi-
If a radio main page is displayed when the 1/2 but- ates the command for the active ATC to transmit the
ton is pushed for the first time, the radio main page aircraft identifier. This button has no effect if pushed
for the cross-side radio is displayed. Pushing the from the cross-side radio tuning inoperative page,
1/2 button a second time returns the display to the configuration error page, menu page, or any display
on-side radio main page. page under these pages in the hierarchy.
If a radio diagnostic page is displayed when the 1/2 TCAS Button (RTU-4280s only)
button is pushed for the first time, the radio diag-
nostic page for the cross-side radio is displayed. The TCAS button is a dedicated momentary action,
Pushing the 1/2 button a second time returns the non-latching push button. Pushing this button from

the top level, main, or preset radio display pages HSI page, configuration error page, menu page, or
switches the display to the TCAS main display any display page under these pages in the hierar-
page. This button has no effect if pushed while on chy.
the TCAS main display page, configuration error
page, menu page, or any display page under these The HSI page is a backup navigation display for the
pages in the hierarchy. on-side aircraft heading, course data, VOR lateral
deviation, glideslope deviation, DME distance, and
INT’L Button (RTU-4280s only) marker beacons. It also incorporates subdisplays of
the on-side VHF COM, NAV, and selected TDR fre-
The INT’L button is a dedicated momentary action, quencies/channels. Line keys adjacent to the radio
non-latching push button. Pushing this button from subdisplays permit selection and tuning of the as-
the top level, main, or preset radio display pages sociated radio from the HSI display. Pushing the
switches the display to the international display line key adjacent to the RETURN label on the HSI
page. This button has no effect if pushed while on display page, switches the display to the top level
the international display page, configuration error radio tune page.
page, menu page, or any pages under these pages
in the hierarchy. ATC ON/STBY Button (RTU-4280s only)
The international page provides an operational The ATC ON/STBY button is a dedicated momen-
summary or subdisplay of on-side/cross-side HF tary action, non-latching push button. Pushing this
COM, on-side/cross-side VHF COM, on-side NAV, button from the top level, main, or preset radio dis-
and selected transponder (with a TCAS subdisplay) play pages toggles selected transponder between
controlled by that RTU. Pushing the line key adja- the ON and STBY modes, while the unselected
cent to the RETURN label on the INT’L display transponder is maintained in STBY mode.
page, switches the display to the top level radio
tune page. This button has no effect if pushed from the cross-
side radio tuning inoperative page, configuration
ENG Button (RTU-4280s only) error page, menu page, or any display page under
these pages in the hierarchy.
The ENG button is a dedicated momentary action,
non-latching push button. Pushing this button from Concentric Tune/Volume Knobs
the top level, main, or preset radio display pages
switches the display to the backup engine/fuel dis- If the RTU contains a three tier concentric knob as-
play. This button has no effect if pushed while on sembly, the smallest knob is the volume control and
engine/fuel display page, the configuration error is used in conjunction with an audio interface unit
page, menu page, or any display page under these (AIU) to adjust the volume of subsystems controlled
pages in the hierarchy. by the RTU. An AIU is required for each RTU with
a volume control.
The ENG page provides a backup display of six en-
gine/fuel parameters for each engine (left and The volume control is an optional feature that will
right). If engine data is not available, or the data be available only on certain status units. The two
indicates a failure warning or test, dashes are dis- larger knobs perform the frequency/channel select
played in place of the associated parameters. functions and are typically referred to as tune
Pushing the line key adjacent to the RETURN label knobs. Those units without the volume control
on the ENG display page, switches the display to function will have a two tier concentric knob as-
the top level radio tune page. sembly used for the tune function.
HSI Button (RTU-4280s only) Subsystem functions controlled by the tune knobs
include: active frequency/channel selection, preset
The HSI button is a dedicated momentary action, frequency/channel selection, channel numbers in
non-latching push button. Pushing this button from the preset field, page scrolling, TCAS altitude lim-
the top level, main, or preset radio display pages its, and configuration codes. In certain applications,
switches the display to the backup HSI display. the incremental step change caused by the tune
This button has no effect if pushed while on the knob outputs is adjusted according to the rate of

tune knob rotation. Rate adjusting the tune outputs Caution

in this fashion means that fewer rotations of the
knob are required to cover a given range when the Improper operation may occur if the fol-
knob is rotated at a higher rate. Volume controls lowing instructions are not followed.
are not rate adjusted.
a. The minimum wire size for power lines is #22
LCD Display AWG. #24 AWG wire can be used for all other
lines.
The RTU uses a 2.365 x 2.4-inch (60.06 x 60.97- Note
mm) color active matrix LCD graphic display with
a 384 x 384 pixel resolution. The viewing angle is Aircraft approved wire must always be used
±45 degrees from the vertical centerline, 10 degrees and extra care must be used when selecting
up from the horizontal center line, and 30 degrees any wire smaller than #22 AWG.
down from the horizontal center line.
b. Read all notes on drawings and interconnects
BRT Control and the planning paragraph before installing
The BRT control in the upper right hand corner of c. All straps on the RTU-42X0 have specific re-
the front panel serves as the primary LCD bright- turn pins on the rear connector. Straps used
ness control when the RTU is not connected to an must be connected to the appropriate return
external dimming source. When the RTU is con- pin to ensure reliable operation.
nected to an external dimming source the BRT con- 2.6 RTU-42X0 PLANNING
trol functions as a secondary, or trim control for the
LCD brightness. The BRT control also functions as Proper and careful planning prior to installation is
an on/off switch for all RTUs except the -001 and essential for reliable performance and easy main-
-002 status RTU-4210s. tenance. The items listed below are points that
should be considered in planning an installation:
2.3 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING a. Single or dual installation
RTU-42X0 EQUIPMENT b. Installation location - adequate airflow for
cooling, good bonding to aircraft, ease of cable
Unpack the equipment carefully and make a care- routing, room for single or dual mounting,
ful visual inspection of each unit for possible ship- (piggyback or side-by-side)
ping damage. All claims for damage should be filed c. Configuration options (discrete strap inputs)
with the transportation company involved. If claims d. Compatibility with other equipment - loading
for damage are to be filed, save the original ship- considerations
ping container and materials. If no damage can be
detected, replace packing materials in the shipping Planning and cabling instructions are given in the
container and save for future use, such as storage general information and mount section (part A of
or reshipment. the Pro Line II installation manual). Additional in-
formation about wiring, bonding, and other general
2.4 RTU-42X0 PREINSTALLATION CHECK installation practices can be found in the Collins
Installation Practices Manual (CPN 523-0775254).
Verify proper operation of the RTU before installa-
2.6.1 Installation Configurations
tion by performing the final performance (customer
acceptance) test presented in the testing and fault Figure 2-3, Figure 2-4, and Figure 2-5 illustrate
isolation section of the RTU-42X0 Component three basic RTU installations. Note that in each of
Maintenance Manual. the three installations, certain ARINC 429 buses
are dedicated for specific purposes.
2.5 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
Figure 2-3 shows a dual RTU installation using
The following instructions must be followed to en- dual IOC data concentrators. FMS, air data, and
sure proper installation of the RTU-42X0. radio feedback data is supplied to the RTU through

Figure 2-3. Typical Installation With Dual RTUs and An IOC Data Concentrator

Figure 2-4. Typical Installation With Dual RTUs and An SSD Data
Concentrator

Figure 2-5. Typical Installation With Dual RTUs and No Data Concentrator

the data concentrators. The third VHF COM and ment, lower operating temperatures extend equip-
HF COM radios apply only to installations using ment life.
RTU-4210s (-203/-204/-303/-304 statuses only),
RTU-4220s, and RTU-4280s. The radio feedback Units tightly packed in the radio rack heat each
buses shown connected directly to the RTU, supply other through radiation, convection, and sometimes
data for driving the backup HSI display page on by direct conduction. If space permits, separate the
RTU-4220s and RTU-4280s; thus they do not apply units from each other to significantly improve reli-
to RTU-4200 and RTU-4210 installations. ability.
Figure 2-4, shows a dual RTU installation with the Even a single unit operates at a much higher tem-
FMS, air data, and radio feedback data connected perature in still air, as opposed to moving air. Fans
through an SDD data concentrator. Dashed bus lines or some other means of moving the air around elec-
in this installation illustrate an option for connecting tronic equipment are usually a worthwhile invest-
the FMS and air data directly to the RTU. This con- ment. If a form of ram air cooling is installed, make
figuration is not possible in an IOC installation. The certain that rainwater cannot enter and be sprayed
third VHF COM and HF COM radios apply only to on the equipment.
RTU-4210 (-203/-204/-303/-304 statuses only), RTU-
2.7 RTU-42X0 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS
4220, and RTU-4280 installations. This installation
also shows RTU inputs from an FQMS and two Interconnect cables should be prepared in accor-
FADECs, which supply data for the backup en- dance with one of the three interconnect wiring
gine/fuel display page on the RTU-4280. diagrams provided in Figure 2-7, Figure 2-8, or
Figure 2-5 illustrates a stand-alone installation Figure 2-9. The interconnect diagram illustrated in
using two RTUs. All data sources connect directly Figure 2-7 must be used for -004 status RTU-4210s
to the RTUs without the use of a data concentrator. and may also be used for -002 status RTU-4210s,
The third VHF COM and HF COM radios apply however it should be noted that this interconnect
only to RTU-4210 (-203/-204/-303/-304 statuses does not support DME CSDB tuning. The intercon-
only), RTU-4220, RTU-4280 installations. nect diagram in Figure 2-8 should be used for RTU-
4200s, RTU-4210s (all statuses except -004), and
2.6.2 Strapping Options RTU-4220s when the core radios are to be tuned via
Table 2-5 is a list of strap options for the RTU- Arinc 429 serial bus. The interconnect diagram in
42X0. These inputs may be hardwired or controlled Figure 2-9 should be used for RTU-4200s, RTU-
by switches to accommodate installation require- 4210s (all statuses except -004), and RTU-4220s
ments. Refer to the appropriate aircraft manuals when the core radios are to be tuned via CSDB se-
for specific strapping installation information. rial bus. The RTU connections illustrated in the
three interconnect diagrams are generic in nature,
and will most certainly require changes or modifi-
Caution
cation to meet customer requirements. The infor-
mation provided under 2.6 RTU-42X0 PLANNING
All connector straps should be kept as short
is intended to familiarize the installer with options
as possible, preferably under 75-mm (3-in).
that can affect the interconnect cabling.
Caution The mating connector information is listed in Table
2-6 and Figure 2-6 illustrates the mating connector
To provide reliable lightning protection, pin assignments.
each strap is assigned a unique return pin
on the rear connector. Always strap to the
Warning
assigned return pin, never strap directly to
ground.
Ensure that the aircraft battery master
2.6.3 Cooling Considerations switch is turned off before installing any of
the interconnect cabling.
The RTU-42X0 performs properly with convection
cooling at ambient air temperatures up to +70 °C During preparation of the interconnect cables, ob-
(+158 °F). However, as with all electronic equip- serve the following precautions:

Table 2-5. Discrete Inputs and Outputs.
DISCRETE INPUT SIGNALS

GROUND (0 to +3 V input) OPEN (=> 100 kΩ input impedance)
(REAR CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT)
MKR SENSE HI (J1-51) Selects HI sensitivity marker beacon op- Selects LO sensitivity marker beacon
eration. operation.
CONCENTRATED DATA (J1-7) Indicates the use of a concentrated data Indicates that a concentrated data
source. source is not used.
CONCENTRATOR TYPE (J1-15) Selects SDD concentrated data source. Selects IOC concentrated data source.
WEIGHT ON WHEELS (J1-17) Weight is on wheels (aircraft is on the Weight is off wheels (aircraft is air-
ground). borne).
RMT IDENT (J1-27) Initiate aircraft identification Inactive state
ATC-2 SELECT/XRTU XPDR ON (J1-86) Selects ATC-2 when configured for exter- Selects ATC-1 when configured for
nal ATC switching. external ATC switching.
Selects cross-side RTU ATC-2 when con- Deselects cross-side RTU ATC-2
figured for internal ATC switching. when configured for internal ATC
switching.
RTU-2 SELECT (J1-42) Identifies the copilot’s RTU (right side). Identifies the pilot’s RTU (left side).
XSD RTU DISABLE (J1-48) Indicates that the cross-side RTU is dis- Indicates that the cross-side RTU is
abled. enabled.
RMT TUNE DISABLE (J1-49) Disables remote tuning. Enables remote tuning.
CTL CONTROL (J1-50) Indicates that a backup CTL is controlling Indicates that the backup control is
the on-side radios. not controlling the on-side radios.
EXT LCD BRIGHTNESS ENBL (J1-53) Selects an external dimming source to Selects the internal brightness con-
control the LCD display brightness. trol as the dimming source for the
LCD display.
TDR STBY (J1-74) Indicates that transponders are in standby Indicates that transponders are not in
mode. standby mode.
NAV TEST INH (J1-75) Inhibits test function in navigation radios. Permits test function in navigation
radios
ONSD AUTO DISP (J1-84) Indicates autotune mode is active Indicates autotune mode is inactive
(RTU-4200/4210/4220s only)
PGM MODE (J1-90) Enables the programming of RTU operat- Inhibits the programming of RTU op-
ing software. erating software.
**************************************************************
DISCRETE OUTPUT SIGNALS

GROUND (0 to +3 V input) OPEN (=> 100 kΩ input impedance)
(REAR CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT)
RMT TUNE DISABLE OUTPUT (J1-54) Remote tuning disabled Remote tuning enabled
RTU XPDR ON OUT (J1-87) Onside RTU ATC selected Onside RTU ATC not selected
BURST TUNE ENABLED/RESERVED Burst tuning mode enabled Burst tuning mode inhibited
(J1-94)
SPARE DISCRETE OUTPUT (J1-85)
Notes:
1. J1-84 is a spare discrete input on RTU-4280s.
2. J1-18, -32, -56, and -79 are spare discrete inputs on RTU-4210s and RTU-4220s.
3. J1-94 is reserved on -001 and -002 status RTU-4210s.

PIN DESCRIPTION PIN DESCRIPTION
1 CHAS GND 51 MKR SENSE HI

2 +28 VDC ALT PWR (see note 11) 52 +5 VDC CONV OUTPUT
3 +28 VDC ALT PWR 53 EXT LCD BRIGHTNESS ENBL
4 RESERVED 54 RMT TUNE DISABLE OUTPUT
5 RESERVED 55 CSDB INPUT-1B (see note 1)
6 CSDB INPUT-6A (see note 1) 56 SPARE DISCRETE IN (see note 11)
7 CONCENTRATED DATA 57 CSDB INPUT-4A (see note 1)
8 +28 VDC ALT PWR RTN 58 RTU DISABLE
9 RESERVED 59 A429 INPUT-7A (see note 13)
10 RESERVED 60 A429 INPUT-7B (see note 13)
11 CSDB INPUT-2A (see note 1) 61 A429 INPUT-1A (see note 2)
12 CSDB INPUT-2B (see note 1) 62 A429 INPUT-1B (see note 2)
13 A429 INPUT-6A (see note 2) 63 RESERVED
14 A429 INPUT-6B (see note 2) 64 CSDB INPUT-4B (see note 1)
15 CONCENTRATOR TYPE 65 CSDB ONSIDE CTL OUT-A
16 +28 VDC ALT PWR RTN (see note 11) 66 +28 VDC LCD DIM CTL IN
17 WEIGHT ON WHEELS 67 +5 VAC/DC PNL LTNG
18 SPARE DISCRETE IN (see note 11) 68 A429 INPUT-2A (see note 14)
19 A429 XSIDE CTL OUT-A 69 A429 INPUT-2B (see note 14)
20 A429 XSIDE CTL OUT-B 70 A429 INPUT-3A (see note 5)
21 A429 RTU XSD OUT-A 71 A429 INPUT-3B (see note 5)
22 A429 RTU XSD OUT-B 72 A429 INPUT-4A (see note 6)
23 A429 SPARE OUT-A 73 A429 INPUT-4B (see note 6)
24 A429 SPARE OUT-B 74 ATC XPDR STBY (see note 7)
25 +28 VDC PNL LTNG REF 75 NAV TEST INHIBIT
26 CSDB INPUT-6B (see note 1) 76 +5 VAC LCD DIM CTL INPUT
27 RMT IDENT 77 CSDB INPUT-8A (see note 8)
28 A429 INPUT-8A (see note 3) 78 CSDB INPUT-8B (see note 8)
29 A429 INPUT-8B (see note 3) 79 SPARE DISCRETE IN (see note 11)
30 A429 INPUT-9A (see note 4) 80 A429 ONSIDE CTL OUT-A
31 A429 INPUT-9B (see note 4) 81 A429 ONSIDE CTL OUT-B
32 SPARE DISCRETE INPUT (see note 11) 82 CSDB INPUT-3A (see note 1)
33 CSDB XSIDE CTL OUT-A 83 CSDB INPUT-3B (see note 1) NOTES:
34 +5 VDC LCD DIM CTL INPUT 84 ONSD AUTO DISP (see note 15)
35 PNL LTNG RTN 85 SPARE DISCRETE OUT 1 This bus is setup to receive CSDB data at a 12.5 kHz rate with a data format of 6 bytes/block.
36 CSDB ONSIDE CTL OUT-B 86 ATC-2 SELECT/XRTU XPDR ON (see note 9) 2 In a stand alone installation (no concentrated data source), connect the on-side FMS to J1-61/62 and the cross-side FMS to J1-13/14.
37 CSDB XSIDE CTL OUT-B 87 RTU XPDR ON OUT 3 If an IOC data source is used, connect the IOC LA-GPBUS-1 output bus to this input. If an SDD data source is used, connect the SDD L-SDD output bus to this input.
38 CSDB INPUT-5A (see note 1) 88 CSDB INPUT-7A (see note 1) 4 If an IOC data source is used, connect the IOC LB-GPBUS-2 output bus to this input.
5 If an IOC data source is used, connect the IOC RA-GPBUS-1 output bus to this input. If an SDD data source is used, connect the SDD R-SDD output bus to this input.
39 CSDB INPUT-5B (see note 1) 89 CSDB INPUT-7B (see note 1) 6 If an IOC data source is used, connect the IOC RB-GPBUS-2 output bus to this input.
40 A429 INPUT-5A (see note 12) 90 PGM MODE 7 J1-74 is reserved on RTU-4280s and on RTU-4200/4210/4220s when the ATC is configured for internal selection. J1-74 serves as ATC XPDR STBY
41 A429 INPUT-5B (see note 12) 91 RESERVED on RTU-4200/4210/4220s when the ATC is configured for external selection.
42 SIDE-2 SELECT 92 RESERVED 8 This bus is setup to receive CSDB data at a 50 kHz rate with a data format of 8 bytes/block.
43 A429 RTU XSD IN-A 93 RESERVED 9 When configured for external ATC selection ground selects ATC-2 and open selects ATC-1.
44 A429 RTU XSD IN-B 94 BURST TUNE ENABLE (see note 10) When configured for internal ATC selection ground selects the cross-side RTU ATC and open deselects cross-side RTU ATC.
45 LCD DIM CTL PWR RTN 95 RESERVED 10 J1-94 is RESERVED on -001 and-002 RTU-4210s.
46 CSDB INPUT-1A (see note 6) 96 +28 VDC RTN (see note 11) 11 This pin RESERVED on RTU-4280s.
47 STRAP GND 97 RESERVED 12 Connect the FQMS to this input on RTU-4280s.
48 XSD RTU DISABLE 98 +28 VDC PRIMARY PWR 13 Connect the left FADEC to this input on RTU-4280s.
49 RMT TUNE DISABLE INPUT 99 +28 VDC PRIMARY PWR (see note 11) 14 Connect the right FADEC to this input on RTU-4280s.
50 EXT COM/NAV CTL IN CONTROL 100 +28 VDC PWR RTN 15 J1-84 is a SPARE DISCRETE IN on RTU-4280s
Figure 2-6. RTU-42X0 Rear Connector Pin Assignments

Table 2-6. RTU-42X0 Mating Connector Information.
ITEM AND DESCRIPTION COLLINS PART NUMBER VENDOR PART NUMBER OR MIL SPEC
100-pin, female, environmentally sealed, bayonet- 359-0645-440 MS27484T22F35S

type connector with removable crimp-type contacts
Strain relief 859-6604-170 M85049/49-2-22N
Crimp type socket contacts, #22D 359-0608-110 M39029/56-354
Crimp tool 359-8102-010 M22520/2-01
Locator tool 359-8102-060 M22520/2-06
a. Read all notes on drawings and interconnect 2.8 RTU-42X0 INSTALLATION

diagrams prior to fabricating interconnect wir- PROCEDURES
ing cables.
Warning
b. Bond and shield all parts of the aircraft electri-
cal system, such as generator and ignition sys- Ensure that the aircraft battery master
tems. switch is turned off before installing or re-
moving any equipment, mounts, or inter-
c. Keep the interconnect cables away from circuits connect cables.
carrying heavy current, pulse transmitting
equipment, and other sources of interference. Caution
d. Make all external connections of the equipment The RTU contains ESDS components that
through the designated connectors listed on the can be damaged by improper handling of
outline and mounting diagrams. the unit. Caution must be used to avoid
contact with the exposed pins at the rear of
the unit.
e. For balanced connections, use twisted-pair
shielded wiring to minimize pickup of electro-
RTU-4200/4210/4220 Radio Tuning Units are front
static and magnetic fields. Avoid long runs of
mounted to the instrument panel or center console.
wire and keep input and output circuits sepa-
If the selected mounting location does not have
rated as much as possible.
Dzus mounting rails, a custom panel cutout like the
one shown in Figure 2-10 must be provided. To in-
f. All interconnect wires and cables should be stall the RTU in a custom panel cutout, the Dzus-
marked in accordance with the Aircraft Elec- mount panel adapter (827-7402-00X) supplied with
tronics Association Wire Marking Standard unit must be removed before installation. The RTU
(refer to Collins Installation Practices Manual, is secured in the panel with four 4-40 hex socket
CPN 523-0775254). head screws (827-7394-00X). If the selected RTU
mounting location has Dzus mounting rails, install
g. Avoid excessive cable lengths, but allow suffi- the RTU with the Dzus-mount panel adapter on the
cient slack for movement due to vibration. unit. Secure the RTU with the four 1/4-turn Dzus
fasteners in the Dzus mount adapter.
h. After installation of the cables in the aircraft,
and before installation of the equipment, check RTU-4280s are designed to be front mounted to the
to ensure that aircraft power is applied only to instrument panel or center console with four inte-
the pins specified on the interconnect diagrams gral 1/4-turn Dzus fasteners. Refer to the outline
and that all other wires and shields are prop- and mounting dimensions diagram in Figure 2-11
erly terminated. for additional information.

Figure 2-7 (Sheet 1 of 6). RTU-4210 (-002 and -004 statuses only)
System Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-7 (Sheet 2). RTU-4210 (-002 and -004 statuses only) System Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-7 (Sheet 3). RTU-4210 (-002 and -004 statuses only)


Figure 2-7 (Sheet 5). RTU-4210 (-002 and -004 statuses only)


ADDENDUM 17
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL
Insert addendum sheets 4-11 facing page 2-26 of the

RTU-42X0 installation section (523-0778075-003118) in Part B of this manual.
Addendum sheets 4-11 entirely replace Figure 2-8.
Figure 2-8 (Sheet 1 of 8). RTU-4200/4210 (all statuses except -004)/4220 Arinc 429 Tuning Interconnect Diagram
Addendum 17
523-0772719-0H711A (Facing Page 2-26)
ADDENDUM 17
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL
Figure 2-8 (Sheet 2). RTU-4200/4210 (all statuses except -004)/4220 Arinc 429 Tuning Interconnect Diagram
Addendum 17
523-0772719-0H711A
ADDENDUM 17
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL
Addendum 17
523-0772719-0H711A
ADDENDUM 17
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL
Addendum 17
523-0772719-0H711A
ADDENDUM 17
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL
Addendum 17
523-0772719-0H711A
ADDENDUM 17
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL
Addendum 17
523-0772719-0H711A
ADDENDUM 17
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL
Addendum 17
11 Jan 1999 Sheet 10 of 11
523-0772719-0H711A
ADDENDUM 17
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL
Addendum 17
11 Jan 1999 Sheet 11 of 11
523-0772719-0H711A
Figure 2-8 (Sheet 1 of 8). RTU-4200/4210 (all statuses except

-004)/4220 Arinc 429 Tuning Interconnect Diagram


Figure 2-8 (Sheet 3). RTU-4200/4210 (all statuses except









Figure 2-9 (Sheet 1 of 9). RTU-4200/4210 (all statuses except

-004)/4220 CSDB Tuning Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-9 (Sheet 2). RTU-4200/4210 (all statuses except -004)/4220 CSDB Tuning Interconnect Diagram












(This page intentionally left blank.)

Figure 2-10 (Sheet 1 of 2). RTU-4200/4210/4220 Radio Tuning

Unit Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-10 (Sheet 2). RTU-4200/4210/4220 Radio Tuning Unit Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-11 (Sheet 1 of 2). RTU-4280 Radio Tuning Unit Outline


is transferred from the IOC in the form of central-

ized strap words (data label 360) within two min-
utes after RTU powerup. If the RTU is configured
for stand-alone operation or operation in an SDD
installation, the system configuration must be
manually entered into the RTU after the system in-
stallation is complete.
Note
Access to all system configuration related

information through the RTU, is inhibited
when the aircraft is airborne. This condi-
tion is sensed through the weight-on-wheels
Figure 2-11 (Sheet 2). RTU-4280 Radio Tuning Unit Outline
discrete input. On the ground this input is
and Mounting Dimensions grounded; in the air this input is open. If
the aircraft takes off with configuration-
2.8.1 Installation related information displayed on the RTU,
the display automatically changes to the
Check the interconnect wiring to ensure that +28 V on-side top level display page.
dc power is applied only to RTU power input pins
J1-2,3,98,99.
2.8.4 System Configuration Verification in an
Extend the aircraft cabling out through the mount- IOC Installation
ing hole in the instrument panel or center console
and attach the cable to the connector at the rear of In installations using an IOC data concentrator,
the RTU. Carefully slide the RTU and cabling back radios are configured at a central strapping loca-
into the mounting hole and secure the RTU to the tion, which is read by the data concentrator. The
instrument panel or center console with four hex strap information is formatted into centralized
socket head screws or integral Dzus fasteners in the strapping words. After processing all of the discrete
corners of the RTU front bezel assembly. strap inputs, the centralized strap words are
transmitted to the RTU in a single burst. The con-
2.8.2 Removal figuration data must be successfully received by the
RTU three consecutive times before it is accepted
Remove four mounting screws or unlock the four as valid data. If the configuration data is not re-
Dzus fasteners at the corners of the RTU front ceived from the IOC within two minutes after
bezel assembly. Slide the RTU out of the instru- power up, a system error results.
ment panel far enough to disconnect the cable at
the rear of the unit. When system configuration information is loaded
into the RTU from an IOC, the configuration can-
2.8.3 System Configuration not be changed or modified in any way through the
RTU. Although it cannot be changed, the system
System configuration information is stored in non- configuration should be viewed on the RTU to ver-
volatile RAM and used to correctly configure the ify the installation. The procedure below outlines
RTU each time it is powered up. This information the steps that must be performed to view system
identifies which radios are present in the installa- configuration information on the RTU.
tion and also describes how each radio is config-
ured. If the RTU is strapped to indicate the pres- a. Apply power to the RTU. A top level display
ence of an IOC-type data concentrator (J1-7= page similar in format to that illustrated in
ground and J1-15=open), configuration information Figure 2-12 should be displayed.

Figure 2-12. System Configuration Display Pages When an IOC Data Concentrator is Used

Note 4. Push the RETURN line key to return to the

SYSTEM CONFIG page.
The performance of LCD displays and fluo- e. Select MANUAL CONFIG SETUP to view the
rescent backlight bulbs is degraded by ex- individual radio configuration pages.
tremely low temperatures. A 4-second 1. The MANUAL CONFIG page is displayed.
power-up delay is common when the ambi- 2. Rotation of either tune knob scrolls the dis-
ent temperature is -20°C to +70°C (-4°F to play to a second MANUAL CONFIG page
158°F). Below -20°C (-4°F), the power-up (not shown).
delay can be 1 minute for each degree (°C) 3. Push the line key adjacent to any radio se-
less than -20°C (-4°F). However, the power- lection to display the configuration page for
up delay should never exceed 10 minutes. that radio. Radio configuration pages are
After the display turns on, full brightness similar to that illustrated in Figure 2-12.
may not be achieved for an addition 10 4. The SELECTION NOT ALLOWED mes-
minutes. sage displayed on each radio configuration
page is a reminder that the configuration
b. Access the MENU page illustrated in Figure 2- cannot be changed from the RTU.
12 from the top level display page by simulta- 5. Pushing the RETURN line key from any
neously pushing and holding the top left, top radio configuration page returns the dis-
right, and bottom right line select keys until play to the MANUAL CONFIG page.
the MENU page appears (approximately two 6. Push the RETURN line key on the MAN-
seconds). UAL CONFIG page to return to the SYS-
c. Push the line select key adjacent to REVIEW TEM CONFIG page.
SYSTEM CONFIG to access the SYSTEM f. Push the RETURN line key on the SYSTEM
CONFIG display page illustrated in Figure 2- CONFIG page to return to the MENU page.
12. (the REVIEW SYSTEM CONFIG selection g. Push the RETURN line key on MENU page to
will not appear on the MENU page if the return to the top level display page and com-
weight-on-wheels discrete is open). The current plete the system configuration verification pro-
system configuration codes for RTU1 and RTU2 cedure.
are summarized at the top of the page by two
11-digit (-004 RTU-4210s), 14-digit (RTU-4200 / 2.8.5 System Configuration Setup and
RTU-4210s (all statuses except -004) / 4220)), or Verification in a Stand-alone or SDD
13-digit (RTU-4280) hexadecimal numbers. If Installation
the cross-side RTU configuration is not re-
ceived, or is invalid, dashes are displayed in In a stand-alone or SDD installation, the system
place of the configuration code. configuration information must be programmed
d. Select CONFIG CODE SETUP to view the on- into the RTU through the configuration display
side system configuration code. pages. The following procedure outlines all of steps
1. The CONFIG CODE page is displayed. that must be performed to view and/or update the
2. Rotation of the large tune knob moves a system configuration information maintained in
window across the on-side CONFIG CODE non-volatile RAM. Although not specifically re-
displayed at the top of the page. As the quired for configuring system radios, bit definitions
window is moved from digit to digit, the for the configuration codes have been provided in
configuration options represented by that Table 2-7 and Table 2-8 simply for reference infor-
digit are displayed. mation.
3. The SELECTION NOT ALLOWED mes-
sage displayed in the lower right corner is a a. Apply power to the RTU. A top level display
reminder that the configuration cannot be page similar in format to that illustrated in
changed from the RTU. Figure 2-13 should be displayed.

Figure 2-13 (Sheet 1 of 2). System Configuration Display Pages When an IOC Data Connector is Not Used

Figure 2-13 (Sheet 2). System Configuration Display Pages When an IOC Data Connector is Not Used

Table 2-7. System Configuration Codes For RTU-4210 (-004 statuses only).
DIGIT CONFIG OPTION BIT CONFIG SETTING
1 VHF COM 1 0 (0 = Not Present, 1 = Present)

VHF COM 2 1 (0 = Not Present, 1 = Present)
VHF Freq Range Code 2 Bit 3 of Bit 2 of
VHF Freq Range Code 3 Digit 1 Digit 1 Range Code
0 0 118-151.975 MHz
0 1 118-151.975 MHz
1 0 118-136.975 MHz
1 1 118-135.975 MHz
2 NAV 1 0 (0 = Not Present, 1 = Present)

NAV 2 1 (0 = Not Present, 1 = Present)
ADF 1 2 (0 = Not Present, 1 = Present)
ADF 2 3 (0 = Not Present, 1 = Present)
3 ADF Freq Range Code 0 Bit 1 of Bit 0 of

ADF Freq Range Code 1 Digit 3 Digit 3 Range Code
0 0 Extended
0 1 190.0-1799.0 kHz
1 0 190.0-1749.5 kHz
1 1 190.0-1749.5 kHz
DME 1 2 (0 = Not Present, 1 = Present)
4 DME Frequency Range 0 (0 = Extended, 1 = 108-117.95 MHz)

Independent DME Tuning 1 (0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled)
ATC 1 2 (0 = Not Present, 1 = Present)
5 ATC 1 Type Code 0 (0 = Mode A/C, 1 = Mode S)

ATC 2 Type Code 1 (0 = Mode A/C, 1 = Mode S)
ATC Select 2 (0 = External, 1 = Internal)
TCAS 3 Part of TCAS table below
6 TCAS 0 Bit 0 of Bit 3 of

Digit 6 Digit 5 TCAS
0 0 Not Present
0 1 Display Tracking
1 0 Display Separate
TCAS ABV/BEL Select 1 (0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled)
TCAS ABS/REL 2 (0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled)
TCAS Range 3 Part of TCAS range table below
7 TCAS Range 0 Bit 1 of Bit 0 of Bit 3 of

TCAS Range 1 Digit 7 Digit 7 Digit 6 RANGE CONTROL
0 0 0 Disabled
0 0 1 6/12 NM
0 1 0 3/5/10/20/40 NM
0 1 1 5/10/20/40 NM
1 0 0 6/12/20/40 NM
1 0 1 6/12 NM
1 1 0 6/12 NM
1 1 1 6/12 NM
TCAS Traffic 2 (0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled)
TCAS Alt Limit B (note 1) 3 (1 = 100 Feet)
8 TCAS Alt Limit B 0 (1 = 200 Feet)

TCAS Alt Limit B 1 (1 = 400 Feet)

Table 2-7. System Configuration Codes For RTU-4210 (-004 statuses only).

Marker Beacon 1 2 (0 = Not Present, 1 = Present)
10 Marker Beacon Sense Sel 0 (0 = External, 1 = Internal)

FMS Type Code 1 Bit 3 of Bit 2 of Bit 1 of
FMS Type Code 2 Digit 10 Digit 10 Digit 10 TYPE CODE
FMS Type Code 3 0 0 0 Not Present
0 0 1 Collins/GNS/UNS
0 1 0 Honeywell
11 RMT Tune Select 0 (0 = External, 1 = Internal)

Page/Window Timeout 1 Bit 2 Bit 1
Page/Window Timeout 2 Digit 11 Digit 11 Setting Code
0 0 Disabled
0 1 Page
1 0 Page/Window
1 1 Page/Window
Invalid Feedback 3 (0 = Color Change, 1 = Dashes)
Note 1: When the B Altitude limit is set to less than 2700 feet, the RTU will force it to be 2700 feet. When the B Altitude limit is
set to more than 9900 feet, the RTU will force it to be 9900 feet.
Table 2-8. System Configuration Codes For RTU-4200/-4210 (all statuses except -004)/-4220/-4280).
1 VHF COM 1 0 (0 = Not Present, 1 = Present)

VHF COM 2 1 (0 = Not Present, 1 = Present)
VHF Freq Range Code 2 Bit 3 of Bit 2 of
VHF Freq Range Code 3 Digit 1 Digit 1 Range Code
0 0 118-151.975 MHz
0 1 118-151.975 MHz
1 0 118-136.975 MHz
1 1 118-135.975 MHz
2 VHF COM 3 0 Bit 1 of Bit 0 of

VHF COM 3 1 Digit 2 Digit 2 Setting Code
0 0 Not Present
0 1 Pilot
1 0 Pilot
1 1 Copilot
3 ADF 1 0 (0 = Not Present, 1 = Present)

(Cont) ADF 2 1 (0 = Not Present, 1 = Present)

ADDENDUM 32
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

of the Installation Section (523-0778075-003118)
This addendum supersedes Addendum 26 and changes the name of Table 2-8 to “System Configuration Codes
For RTU-42X0 (except 4210 -004) with status numbers of –X1X format.” and adds new Table 2-8a.
Table 2-8a. System Configuration Codes For RTU-42X0 (except 4210 –004) with –X1X statuses.

1 VHF COM 1 0 Digit 1 1
VHF COM 1 1 Bit 1 0 Range/Present Code
0 0 not present
0 1 118-151.975 MHz
1 0 118-136.975 MHz
1 1 118-136.975 MHz
VHF COM 2 2 Digit 1 1
0 0 not present
0 1 118-151.975 MHz
1 0 118-136.975 MHz
1 1 118-136.975 MHz
0 0 not present
0 1 118-151.975 MHz
1 0 118-136.975 MHz
1 1 118-136.975 MHz
VHF COM 3 2 (0 = pilot, 1 = copilot)
VHF Channel Separation 3 (0 = 25 KHz, 1 = 8.33 KHz)
3 NAV 1 1 (0 = not present, 1 = present)
NAV 2 2 (0 = not present, 1 = present)
ADF 1 3 (0 = not present, 1 = present)
4 ADF Freq Range Code 0 Digit 4 4
ADF Freq Range Code 1 Bit 1 0 Range Code
0 0 extended 1
0 1 190.0 -1799.0 KHz
1 0 190.0 - 1749.5 KHz
1 1 extended 2
DME 1 2 (0 = not present, 1 = present)
5 DME Frequency Range 0 (0 = extended 1, 1 = 108 - 117.95 MHz)

Independent DME Tuning 1 (0 = disabled, 1 = enabled)
ATC 1 2 (0 = not present, 1 = present)
ATC Select 2 (0 = external, 1 = internal)
6 TCAS 3 Digit 7 6
Bit 0 3 TCAS
7 TCAS 0 0 0 not present
0 1 display tracking
1 0 display separate
Addendum 32
1 Sep 1999 Sheet 1 of 2
523-0772719-0Y711A (Facing Page 2-54)
ADDENDUM 32
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

Table 2-8a. System Configuration Codes For RTU-42X0 (except 4210 –004) with –X1X statuses.

7 TCAS ABV/BEL Select 1 (0 = disabled, 1 = enabled)
TCAS ABS/REL Alt 2 (0 = disabled, 1 = enabled)
7 TCAS Range 3 Digit 8 8 7
Bit 1 0 3 Range Control
8 TCAS Range 0 0 0 0 disabled
TCAS Range 1 0 0 1 6/12 NM
0 1 0 3/5/10/20/40 NM
0 1 1 5/10/20/40 NM
1 0 0 6/12/20/40 NM
1 0 1 6/12 NM
1 1 0 6/12 NM
1 1 1 6/12 NM
8 TCAS Traffic 2 (0 = disabled, 1 = enabled)
8 TCAS ALT Limit B (Note 1) 3 (1 = 100 ft.)
9 TCAS ALT Limit B 0 (1 = 200 ft.)
TCAS ALT Limit B 1 (1 = 400 ft.)
TCAS ALT Limit B 2 (1 = 800 ft.) > binary sequence
10 HF 1 2 (0 = not present, 1 = present)
HF 2 3 (0 = not present, 1 = present)
11 ITU Channels 0 (0 = All, 1 = ITU disabled)
Marker Beacon 1 1 (0 = not present, 1 = present)
Marker Beacon Sens. Sel 3 (0 = external, 1 = internal)
12 FMS Input 0 Digit 12 12
FMS Input 1 Bit 1 0 Input Code
0 0 not present
0 1 ARINC direct
1 0 concentrator (Note 2)
1 1 CSDB direct
RMT Tune Select 2 (0 = external, 1 = internal)
FMS Type 3 (0 = standard, 1 = alternate)
13 Page/Window Timeout 0 Digit 13 13

Page/Window Timeout 1 Bit 1 0 Setting Code
0 0 disabled
0 1 page
1 0 page/window
1 1 page/window
Invalid Feedback 2 (0 = color change, 1 = dashes)
RTU 1 HSI 3 (0 = HSI not present, 1 = HSI present)
14 RTU 2 HSI 0 (0 = HSI not present, 1 = HSI present)
NOTE 1: If the TCAS altitude limit B configuration setting is less than 2700 feet, the TCAS altitude limit B is set to 2700 feet. If the TCAS
altitude limit B configuration setting is greater than 9900 feet, the TCAS altitude limit B is set to 9900 feet.
NOTE 2: In a stand alone system, the concentrator FMS input code (10) shall indicate an ARINC direct input.
Addendum 32
1 Sep 1999 Sheet 2 of 2
523-0772719-0Y711A (Backs Addendum Sheet 1)
ADDENDUM 26
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

of the Installation Section (523-0778075-003118)
This addendum supersedes Addendum 22 and changes the name of Table 2-8 to “System Configuration Codes
For RTU-42X0 (except 4210 -004) with status numbers of -X0X format.” and adds new Table 2-8a.
Table 2-8a. System Configuration Codes For RTU-42X0 (except 4210 -004) with all other statuses.

0 0 not present
0 1 118-151.975 MHz
1 0 118-136.975 MHz
1 1 118-136.975 MHz
VHF COM 2 2 Digit 1 1
0 0 not present
0 1 118-151.975 MHz
1 0 118-136.975 MHz
1 1 118-136.975 MHz
0 0 not present
0 1 118-151.975 MHz
1 0 118-136.975 MHz
1 1 118-136.975 MHz
VHF COM 3 2 (0 = pilot, 1 = copilot)
VHF Channel Separation 3 (0 = 25 KHz, 1 = 8.33 KHz)
3 NAV 1 1 (0 = not present, 1 = present)
NAV 2 2 (0 = not present, 1 = present)
4 ADF Freq Range Code 0 Digit 4 4
ADF Freq Range Code 1 Bit 1 0 Range Code
0 0 extended 1
0 1 190.0 -1799.0 KHz
1 0 190.0 - 1749.5 KHz
1 1 extended 2
5 DME Frequency Range 0 (0 = extended 1, 1 = 108 - 117.95 MHz)
Independent DME Tuning 1 (0 = disabled, 1 = enabled)
ATC Select 2 (0 = external, 1 = internal)
6 TCAS 3 Digit 7 6
7 TCAS 0 Bit 0 3 TCAS
0 0 not present
0 1 display tracking
Addendum 26
523-0772719-0S711A (Facing Page 2-54)
ADDENDUM 26
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL
Table 2-8a. System Configuration Codes For RTU-42X0 (except 4210 -004) with all other statuses.

7 TCAS ABV/BEL Select 1 (0 = disabled, 1 = enabled)
TCAS ABS/REL Alt 2 (0 = disabled, 1 = enabled)
7 TCAS Range 3 Digit 8 8 7
8 TCAS Range 0 Bit 1 0 3 Range Control
TCAS Range 1 0 0 0 disabled
0 0 1 6/12 NM
0 1 0 3/5/10/20/40 NM
0 1 1 5/10/20/40 NM
1 0 0 6/12/20/40 NM
1 0 1 6/12 NM
1 1 0 6/12 NM
1 1 1 6/12 NM
8 TCAS Traffic 2 (0 = disabled, 1 = enabled)
8 TCAS ALT Limit B (Note 1) 3 (1 = 100 ft.)
TCAS ALT Limit B 2 (1 = 800 ft.) > binary sequence
10 HF 1 2 (0 = not present, 1 = present)
HF 2 3 (0 = not present, 1 = present)
11 ITU Channels 0 (0 = All, 1 = ITU disabled)
Marker Beacon Sens. Sel 3 (0 = external, 1 = internal)
12 FMS Input 0 Digit 12 12
FMS Input 1 Bit 1 0 Input Code
0 0 not present
0 1 ARINC direct
1 0 concentrator (Note 2)
1 1 CSDB direct
RMT Tune Select 2 (0 = external, 1 = internal)
FMS Type 3 (0 = standard, 1 = alternate)
13 Page/Window Timeout 0 Digit 13 13
Page/Window Timeout 1 Bit 1 0 Setting Code
0 0 disabled
0 1 page
1 0 page/window
1 1 page/window
Invalid Feedback 2 (0 = color change, 1 = dashes)
RTU 1 HSI 3 (0 = HSI not present, 1 = HSI present)
14 RTU 2 HSI 0 (0 = HSI not present, 1 = HSI present)
NOTE 1: If the TCAS altitude limit B configuration setting is less than 2700 feet, the TCAS altitude limit B is set to 2700 feet. If the TCAS
altitude limit B configuration setting is greater than 9900 feet, the TCAS altitude limit B is set to 9900 feet.
NOTE 2: In a stand alone system, the concentrator FMS input code (10) shall indicate an ARINC direct input.
Addendum 26
523-0772719-0S711A (Backs Addendum Sheet 1)
3 ADF Freq Range Code 2 Bit 3 of Bit 2 of

(Cont) ADF Freq Range Code 3 Digit 3 Digit 3 Range Code
0 0 Extended 1 (190.0-1799.0 kHz and
2179.0-2185.0 kHz)
0 1 190.0-1799.0 kHz
1 0 190.0-1749.5 kHz
1 1 Extended 2 (190.0-1799.0 kHz, 2088.0-
2094.0, and 2179.0-2185.0 kHz)
4 DME 1 0 (0 = Not Present, 1 = Present)

DME Frequency Range 2 (0 = Extended, 1 = 108.117.95 MHz)
Independent DME Tuning 3 (0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled)
5 ATC 1 0 (0 = Not Present, 1 = Present)
6 ATC Select 0 (0 = External, 1 = Internal)
TCAS 1 Bit 2 of Bit 1 of
TCAS 2 Digit 6 Digit 6 TCAS
0 0 Not Present
0 1 Display Tracking
TCAS ABV/REL Select 3 (0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled)
7 TCAS ABS/REL Alt 0 (0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled)
TCAS Range 1 Bit 3 of Bit 2 of Bit 1 of
TCAS Range 2 Digit 7 Digit 7 Digit 7 RANGE CONTROL
TCAS Range 3 0 0 0 Disabled
0 0 1 6/12 NM
0 1 0 3/5/10/20/40 NM
0 1 1 5/10/20/40 NM
1 0 0 6/12/20/40 NM
1 0 1 6/12 NM
1 1 0 6/12 NM
1 1 1 6/12 NM
8 TCAS Traffic 0 (0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled)
TCAS Alt Limit B (note 1) 1 (1 = 100 Feet)
10 HF 1 0 (0 = Not Present, 1 = Present)
HF 2 1 (0 = Not Present, 1 = Present)
ITU Channels 2 (0 = All, 1 = ITU Disabled)
11 Marker Beacon 2 0 (0 = Not Present, 1 = Present)
Marker Beacon Sense Sel 1 (0 = External, 1 = Internal)
FMS Input Code 2 Bit 3 of Bit 2 of
FMS Input Code 3 Digit 11 Digit 11 INPUT CODE
0 0 Not Present
0 1 ARINC Direct
1 0 Concentrator (only when strapped for
SSD concentrator; otherwise reserved)
1 1 CSDB Direct

12 RMT Tune Select 0 (0 = External, 1 = Internal)

FMS Type Code 1 Bit 3 of Bit 2 of Bit 1 of
FMS Type Code 2 Digit 12 Digit 12 Digit 12 TYPE CODE
FMS Type Code 3 0 0 0 Standard
0 0 1 Alternate
0 1 0 Standard
0 1 1 Standard
1 0 0 Standard
1 0 1 Standard
1 1 0 Standard
1 1 1 Standard
13 Page/Window Timeout 0 Bit 1 Bit 0

Page/Window Timeout 1 Digit 13 Digit 13 Setting Code
0 0 Disabled
0 1 Page
1 0 Page/Window
1 1 Page/Window
Invalid Feedback 2 (0 = Color Change, 1 = Dashes)
RTU 1 HSI/CDI 3 (0 = HSI Not Present, 1 = HSI Present)
14 RTU 2 HSI/CDI 0 (0 = HSI Not Present, 1 = HSI Present)
Note:
1. When the B Altitude limit is set to less than 2700 feet, the RTU will force it to be 2700 feet. When the B Altitude limit is set to
more than 9900 feet, the RTU will force it to be 9900 feet.
2. The RTU 1 HSI/CD1 and RTU 2 HSI/CD1 configuration options (bit 3 of digit 13 and bit 0 of digit 14 respectively) apply only to
RTU-4220s.
Note the MENU page appears (approximately two

seconds).
The performance of LCD displays and fluo- c. Push the line select key adjacent to SET SYS-
rescent backlight bulbs is degraded by ex- TEM CONFIG to access the SYSTEM CONFIG
tremely low temperatures. A 4-second display page illustrated in Figure 2-13 (rotation
power-up delay is common when the ambi- of either tune knob scrolls the display to second
ent temperature is -20°C to +70°C (-4°F to SYSTEM CONFIG page). The current system
158°F). Below -20°C (-4°F), the power-up configuration codes for RTU1 and RTU2 are
delay can be 1 minute for each degree (°C) summarized at the top of the page by two 11-
less than -20°C (-4°F). However, the power- digit (-004 status RTU-4210s), 14-digit (RTU-
up delay should never exceed 10 minutes. 4200 / RTU-4210s (all statuses except -004) /
After the display turns on, full brightness RTU-4220)), or 13-digit (RTU-4280) hexadeci-
may not be achieved for an addition 10 mal numbers. If the cross-side RTU configura-
minutes. tion is not received, or is invalid, dashes are
displayed in place of the configuration code.
If the system powers up with CONFIG ERROR d. Select CONFIG CODE SETUP to directly enter
pages displayed on the RTUs, this is an indica- the on-side configuration code when the con-
tion that the RTU1 and RTU2 configuration figuration code is known. Configuration codes
codes do not match. Refer to paragraph 2.8.6 for are typically recorded in the aircraft’s mainte-
the appropriate action to be taken. nance log when the system is initially config-
ured or anytime there after when a configura-
b. Access the MENU page illustrated in Figure 2- tion change is made.
13 from the top level display page by simulta- The CONFIG CODE SETUP method allows the
neously pushing and holding the top left, top digits of the configuration code to be entered
right, and bottom right line select keys until directly without having to navigate through

layers of menus to select the configuration op- 3. Selection of a radio from the MANUAL
tions for each radio. CONFIG page displays the RADIO CON-
FIGURATION PAGE for that radio. Radio
1. The CONFIG CODE INSTRUCTIONS page
configuration options are selected by push-
illustrated in Figure 2-13 is displayed. Push
ing the line key adjacent to the configura-
the CONTINUE line key on this page to
tion option. After selecting the radio con-
display the CONFIG CODE page illus-
figuration options, push the RETURN line
trated in Figure 2-13.
key to exit back to the previous MANUAL
2. The current on-side configuration code is
CONFIG page.
displayed on the CONFIG CODE page. Ro-
4. Configure all system radios in a similar
tation of the large tune knob moves a win-
manner by repeating step 2.8.5.e.3 (above).
dow from digit to digit in the CONFIG
When configuration options have been se-
CODE. Rotation of the small tune knob
lected for all radios, push the RETURN line
changes the configuration digit inside the
key on the MANUAL CONFIG page. If con-
window.
figuration changes were made to any of the
3. Push the RETURN line key to exit the
radios, the appropriate UPDATE CONFIG-
CONFIG CODE page. If no changes were
page (RTU1→RTU2 or RTU1←RTU2) is
made to the configuration, the display re-
displayed. If no configuration changes were
turns directly to the SYSTEM CONFIG
made, the display returns directly to the
page. If changes were made to the configu-
SYSTEM CONFIG page.
ration, the appropriate UPDATE CONFIG
5. To update the system configuration code
page (RTU1→RTU2 or RTU1←RTU2) is
push the CONFIRM line key on the UP-
displayed.
DATE CONFIG page. This action copies the
4. To update the system configuration code,
new configuration from scratch pad mem-
push the CONFIRM line key on the UP-
ory into non-volatile RAM and also trans-
DATE CONFIG page. This action copies the
fers the new system configuration code to
new configuration from scratch pad mem-
non-volatile RAM in the cross-side RTU (if
ory into non-volatile RAM and also trans-
one is present). A completion message is
fers the new system configuration code to
displayed when both RTUs have been up-
non-volatile RAM in the cross-side RTU (if
dated. Push the RETURN line key on the
one is present). A completion message is
UPDATE CONFIG page to return the dis-
displayed when both RTUs have been up-
play to the SYSTEM CONFIG page.
dated. Push the RETURN line key on the
6. Push the CANCEL line key on the UP-
UPDATE CONFIG page to return to the
DATE CONFIG page to abort all configura-
SYSTEM CONFIG page.
tion changes entered. This action returns
5. Push the CANCEL line key on the UP-
the display to the SYSTEM CONFIG page
DATE CONFIG page to abort all configura-
without updating the system configuration
tion changes entered. This action returns
code in either RTU.
the display to the SYSTEM CONFIG page.
f. Select UPDATE RTU1→RTU2 from the SYS-
e. Select MANUAL CONFIG SETUP when con-
TEM CONFIG page to copy the system configu-
figuring the system radios for the first time, or
ration codes from RTU1 into RTU2.
making a change to the current configuration.
1. The UPDATE CONFIG RTU1→RTU2 page
This method of configuring the system radios
is displayed.
allows the operator to individually select each
2. Push the CONFIRM line key to execute the
radio and choose the configuration options re-
configuration update in non-volatile RAM of
quired for that radio from a menu.
both RTUs. A completion message annunci-
1. The MANUAL CONFIG page illustrated in
ates when the configuration code has been
Figure 2-13 is displayed. This menu page
updated both RTUs. Push the RETURN
provides access to the individual radio con-
line key to return to the SYSTEM CONFIG
figuration pages, such as the one illustrated
page.
in Figure 2-13.
3. Push the CANCEL line key to abort the
2. Rotation of either tune knob scrolls the dis-
configuration update. This action returns
play to a second MANUAL CONFIG page.

the display directly to the SYSTEM CON- RTU. This error must be corrected before normal
FIG page. RTU operation can resume.
g. Select UPDATE RTU1←RTU2 from the SYS-
Configuration errors are not reported by a CONFIG
TEM CONFIG page to copy the system configu-
ERROR page in an IOC-type installation. The con-
ration codes from RTU2 into RTU1.
figuration verification procedures in paragraph
1. The UPDATE CONFIG RTU1←RTU2 page
2.8.4 should be performed after configuring an IOC
is displayed and presents the operator with
installation. Any errors in the configuration should
the same menu selections as described
be detected here.
above (step 2.8.5.f).
h. Select RESTORE LAST CONFIG from the sec- a. -004 RTU-4210 Configuration Error Page
ond SYSTEM CONFIG page when it is desired
The CONFIG ERROR page illustrated in
to restore the previous configuration code (the
Figure 2-14 is applicable only to -004 RTU-
RTU always saves copy of the current system
4210s. CONFIGURATION CODES for RTU1
configuration code before accepting a new sys-
and RTU2 are displayed near the top of the
tem configuration code).
page for comparison.
1. The appropriate UPDATE CONFIG page
(RTU1→RTU2 or RTU1←RTU2) is dis- If it is known which RTU contains the correct
played. configuration code, the easiest solution to
2. Push the CONFIRM line key to copy the clearing the configuration error is to transfer
previous configuration code, from the on- the configuration code from the correct RTU. To
side RTU, into the non-volatile RAM de- do this, push the UPDATE CONFIG line key to
vices of both RTUs. A completion message access to the UPDATE CONFIG page (also
annunciates when the configuration codes shown in Figure 2-14). From this page, the con-
have been updated both RTUs. Push the figuration code can be copied from RTU1
RETURN line key to return to the SYSTEM toRTU2, or RTU2 to RTU1 (which ever is ap-
CONFIG page. propriate). If the configuration error is cor-
3. Push the CANCEL line key to abort the rected on the UPDATE CONFIG page, the RTU
configuration update. This action returns will resume normal operation. If the configura-
the display directly to the SYSTEM CON- tion error is not corrected, the CONFIG ER-
FIG page. ROR page will return to the display. Refer to
i. Push the RETURN line key on the SYSTEM paragraphs 2.8.5.f and 2.8.5.g for operation on
CONFIG page to return to the MENU page. the UPDATE RTU1→RTU2 and UPDATE
j. Push the RETURN line key on the MENU page RTU1←RTU2 pages (respectively).
to return to the top level display page.
If it is not known which configuration code is
k. If changes were made to the system configura-
wrong, push the CONFIG CODE SETUP line
tion while performing the system configuration
key to enter the CONFIG CODE INSTRUC-
setup procedure, cycle power to the RTUs at
TIONS page preceding the CONFIG CODE
this time to ensure that the new configuration
page.
codes are written into the EEPROM section of
the non-volatile RAM devices. Refer to paragraph 2.8.5.d.1. for operation of
the CONFIG CODE page. If the configuration
error is corrected on the CONFIG CODE page,
2.8.6 Configuration Error Pages the RTU will resume normal operation. If the
configuration is not corrected, the CONFIG
When the RTU is configured to operate in a stand- ERROR page will return.
alone or SDD installation and the aircraft is on the
ground, configuration errors are reported by a b. RTU-4200/4210/4220 Configuration Error Page
CONFIG ERROR page that appears on the RTU The CONFIG ERROR page illustrated in
display. Configuration errors result when the RTU1 Figure 2-15 is applicable to RTU-4200s, RTU-
and RTU2 configuration codes do not match. This 4220s and all RTU-4210 statuses except -004.
condition can occur if one of the RTUs is replaced CONFIGURATION CODES for RTU1 and
and the operator forgets to transfer the configura- RTU2 are displayed near the top of the page for
tion code into the new RTU from the cross-side comparison, however, unlike the configuration

error page for the -004 RTU-4210, it does not RTU1 and RTU2 are displayed near the top of
provide any line key menu selections. The only the page for comparison. Unlike the other two
course of action to be taken is to access the sys- configuration error pages described, line keys
tem configuration setup pages through the are provided for direct access to the UPDATE
MENU page. Recall that the MENU page is ac- RTU1→RTU2 and UPDATE RTU1←RTU2
cessed by simultaneously pushing and holding pages. If the configuration error is corrected on
the top left, top right, and bottom right line se- the UPDATE CONFIG page, the RTU will re-
lect keys. Refer to the paragraph 2.8.5.b. sume normal operation. If the configuration is
not corrected, the CONFIG ERROR page will
c. RTU-4280 Configuration Error Page
return. Refer to paragraphs 2.8.5.f and 2.8.5.g
The CONFIG ERROR page illustrated in for operation on the UPDATE RTU1→RTU2
Figure 2-16 is applicable only to RTU-4280s. and UPDATE RTU1←RTU2 pages.
Again, the CONFIGURATION CODES for
Figure 2-14. RTU-4210 (-004 status only) Configuration Error Display Page
Figure 2-15. RTU-4200/4210 (all statuses except -004)/

RTU-4220 Configuration Error Display Page
Figure 2-16. RTU-4280 Configuration Error Display Page

2.9 RTU-42X0 POST INSTALLATION CHECK lishing two way communications with a second
party.
The post installation checkout of the RTU consists c. If there is a control tower on the field, the ATC
of using the RTU to tune the on-board radios. Per- code may be verified with cooperation of some-
form the following steps: one in the control tower. To test the ATC code,
the selected transponder must be switched from
a. Apply power to the RTU(s) and associated ra- STBY to ATC mode. The REPLY annunciator
dios. A top level display page similar to that il- illuminates when the transponder replies to an
lustrated in Figure 2-12 should be displayed. interrogation.
If the aircraft is equipped with dual transpon-
Note ders, selection between the transponders is in-
stallation as well as RTU dependent. RTUs
The performance of LCD displays and fluo- with the front panel ON/OFF switch may be
rescent backlight bulbs is degraded by ex- configured for internal or external ATC
tremely low temperatures. A 4-second switching. Cross communication between the
power-up delay is common when the ambi- RTUs ensures that one ATC is put in standby
ent temperature is -20°C to +70°C mode before the other is selected to be active
(-4°F to 158°F). Below -20°C (-4°F), the (on mode).
power-up delay can be 1 minute for each
degree (°C) less than -20°C (-4°F). However, When configured for internal switching, selec-
the power-up delay should never exceed 10 tion between ATC 1 and ATC 2 is made from
minutes. After the display turns on, full the ATC main display page on either RTU.
brightness may not be achieved for an addi- Verify proper operation of the ATC switching
tion 10 minutes. discretes by performing the following steps:
1. Select ATC 1 as the active ATC.
If the LCD display does not light up, check to 2. Enter the DISCRETE INPUT STATUS
ensure that circuit breakers are closed and ver- pages on both RTUs through the SYSTEM
ify that +27.5 V dc aircraft power is indeed DIAG selection on the MENU page (refer to
supplied to pins 2, 3, 98, and 99 of the RTU paragraphs 2.10 and 2.10.2). The DIS-
mating connector and pins 8, 16, 96, and 100 CRETE INPUT STATUS page on RTU-1
are ground. should indicate that pin 86, XRTU XPDR
ON is OPEN. The DISCRETE INPUT
Note STATUS page on RTU-2 should indicate
that pin 86, XRTU XPDR ON is GND.
If two RTUs are installed, try swapping the 3. Select the RETURN line key to exit the
RTUs. This can help to determine if it is the DISCRETE INPUT STATUS, SYSTEM
RTU or aircraft wiring that is at fault. DIAG, and MENU pages on both RTUs.
4. From the ATC main display page on either
If the RTUs powerup with the CONFIG ER- RTU, select ATC 2 as the active ATC.
ROR pages displayed, the configuration codes 5. Again, enter the DISCRETE INPUT
stored in RTU1 and RTU2 do not match (a STATUS pages on both RTUs as before.
CONFIG ERROR page should never be dis- The DISCRETE INPUT STATUS page on
played if an installation uses only one RTU). RTU-1 should now indicate that pin 86,
Refer to paragraph 2.8.6. XRTU XPDR ON is GND and the DIS-
CRETE INPUT STATUS page on RTU-2
b. Assuming that the RTU is displaying a top level
should indicate that pin 86, XRTU XPDR
display page, select and perform radio checks
ON is OPEN.
for each of the radios controlled by the RTUs.
6. Exit the DISCRETE INPUT STATUS,
Tune the side 1 and side 2 radios to a selected
SYSTEM DIAG, and MENU pages on both
station and verify transmission and/or recep-
RTUs as before.
tion of that station. Identify NAV, DME, and
ADF stations by listening for the ident code or When configured for external switching, the
station call letters over the aircraft audio sys- ATC1/ATC2 selection disappears from the ATC
tem. Verify VHF and HF COM radios by estab- main display page and transponder selection is

controlled by an external ATC select switch. 2.10 RTU-42X0 DIAGNOSTICS

Verify discrete input J1-86 through the DIS-
CRETE INPUT STATUS page as before. It RTU, system, and radio diagnostic display pages
should respond as previously described for the are accessible through the MENU display on all
internal switching configuration. RTUs. All RTUs except the -004 status RTU-4210
provide access to a radio fault log maintained in the
Transponder selection on the RTU-4280s can
RTUs non-volatile memory. A message in the lower
only be controlled internally. If only one RTU-
right corner of the MENU display page indicates
4280 is used in an installation, or a dual RTU
the number of radio faults currently logged.
installation is operating in reversionary mode
(one RTU disabled), ATC selection is made
2.10.1 Diagnostics
through the ATC main display page of the ac-
tive RTU, just like RTU-4200, RTU-4210 or
Selection of RTU DIAG from the MENU page pro-
RTU-4220s configured for internal ATC selec-
vides access to RTU DIAGNOSTICS pages 1 and 2,
tion.
as illustrated in Figure 2-17. Page 1 displays the
In dual installations with both RTU-4280s ac- CPNs of the application, boot block, and parameter
tive, the ATC selection disappears from the software currently loaded in the RTU (RTU-4280s
ATC main display page and each RTU controls and -004 RTU4210s do not display a CPN for pa-
only the transponder on its side. Pushing the rameter software). Page 2 displays the current in-
dedicated ATC STBY/ON button on either put voltage level, LCD brightness level (if con-
RTU-4280 essentially toggles the displayed trolled by an external source), and total number of
transponder between standby and on mode. hours that the RTU has operated. Rotation of either
Cross communication between the RTUs en- tune knob scrolls the display between the two diag-
sures that the cross-side transponder is put into nostic pages. The RETURN line key returns the
standby mode when the on-side transponder is display to the MENU page.
selected to be active (on mode).
2.10.2 System Diagnostics
d. Operation of installed switchable discrete strap
options must be checked. Refer to Table 2-5 for Selection of SYSTEM DIAG from the MENU page
switchable discrete options. Refer to the aircraft provides access to SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS page
manuals for specific test information on in- illustrated in Figure 2-18. From this page, the op-
stalled discretes and straps. erator can display the INPUT BUS STATUS or
e. Check the RTU display and annunciator dim- DISCRETE STATUS pages. Push the RETURN
ming by varying the aircraft instrument light- line key on the SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS page to
ing controls. Illumination of the RTU display return to the MENU page.
and annunciators should vary evenly as the
dimming control is adjusted. There are two pages of INPUT BUS STATUS in-
f. If the installation uses external RTU reversion- formation. Rotation of either tune knob scrolls the
ary switching, set the RTU 1 reversion switch display between the two pages. The information
to disable and repeat step 2.9.b. If both RTUs displayed on these pages reflects the activity status
have the front panel ON/OFF switches, rever- of each ARINC and CSDB bus input as well as its
sionary switching is normally handled inter- configured operating speed. Push the RETURN line
nally. If this is the case, simply turn off RTU 1 key on either of these pages to return to the SYS-
and repeat step 2.9.b. TEM DIAGNOSTICS page.
g. Enable RTU 1 and disable RTU 2 with the ex-
ternal reversionary switch (or RTU ON/OFF There are three DISC INPUT STATUS pages. Ro-
switch) and repeat step 2.9.b again. tation of either tune knob scrolls the display be-
h. If an FMS is installed, disable both RTUs with tween the pages. The information displayed on
their respective reversionary switches (or RTU these pages reflects the current state (OPEN or
ON/OFF switches) and verify that the radios on GND) of each discrete strap input to the RTU, as
both side can be burst tuned by the FMS. En- well as its rear connector pin number. Push the
able both RTUs after verifying burst tune capa- RETURN line key on either of these pages to re-
bility. turn to the SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS page.

2.10.3 Radio Diagnostics
Selection of RADIO DIAG from the MENU page

displays the RADIO DIAGNOSTICS page illus-
trated in Figure 2-19. This page provides access to
radio-specific diagnostic displays. Three sets of dis-
play pages are normally available for on-side ra-
dios: the ARINC 429/CSDB maintenance word
pages, the ARINC 429 diagnostic pages, and the
CSDB diagnostic pages. Only the ARINC 429 and
CSDB diagnostic pages may be displayed for cross-
side radios.
If an on-side radio communicates via ARINC 429

and CSDB buses, the ARINC 429 maintenance
word page is displayed first. Rotation of either tune
knob scrolls the display to the CSDB diagnostic
word page. If the selected radio communicates on
only one of the two data bus types, only that diag-
nostic maintenance word is displayed. Figure 2-19
illustrates ARINC 429 and CSDB maintenance
word displays for COM1. These display formats are
typical for any of the on-side radios. The mainte-
nance information is presented as binary coded
data, thus the appropriate maintenance manual for
each radio must be consulted to interpret the in-
formation.
IOC data concentrators do not retransmit the

ARINC 429/CSDB maintenance words (labels
350/F3). Thus, if an IOC-type data concentrator is
used in the installation, the ARINC 429/CSDB
maintenance words transmitted by each radio can
not be displayed by the RTU.
Rotation of either tune knob from the maintenance

word display scrolls the display to the ARINC 429
diagnostic page. This page monitors the actual
ARINC 429 data being transmitted (CMD) from the
RTU and transmitted (ECHO) from the selected
radio. Figure 2-19 illustrates the ARINC 429 diag-
nostic page for COM1. This page is typical for all
radios communicating on the ARINC 429 bus. If a
radio does not communicate via the ARINC 429
bus, dashes are displayed for all of the data.
Rotation of either tune knob from the ARINC 429

diagnostic page scrolls the display to the CSDB di-
agnostic page. This page monitors the actual CSDB
data being transmitted (ECHO) from the selected
radio. Rotation of either tune knob again displays a
Figure 2-17. RTU Diagnostic Display Pages
second CSDB diagnostic page showing the CSDB

Figure 2-18. SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC Display Pages

Figure 2-19. Examples of Radio-Specific Diagnostic Display Pages

data being received (CMD) by the radio. Figure 2- trated in Figure 2-20. The RTU logs radio FAULT
19 also illustrates examples of the CSDB diagnostic HISTORY only in installations configured for
pages for COM1. These pages are also typical for stand-alone RTU operation and installations using
other radios communicating on the CSDB bus. If a an SDD data concentrator. In addition, only those
radio does not communicate via CSDB bus, dashes radio failures that occur during flight are recorded
are displayed for the data on both CSDB diagnostic in the fault history log. The fault history log has the
pages. capacity to store up to 100 faults, however, only
those faults that have occurred within the last 100
2.10.4 Radio Fault History (applicable to all legs are retained (a leg is defined as the flight time
RTUs except -004 RTU-4210s) between each takeoff and landing). Faults of a
given nature are logged only one time per leg, even
Selection of FAULT HISTORY from the MENU though there may be multiple occurrences during a
page displays the FAULT HISTORY page illus- leg.
Figure 2-20. Radio Fault History Display Pages

The FAULT HISTORY page displays five radio tion appears on the MENU page only when the
faults at a time, with the most recent being listed RTU is configured for stand-alone RTU operation
first. When more than five faults are logged, rota- and installations using an SDD data concentrator.
tion of the tune knobs scrolls the display from page Pushing the line key adjacent to CONFIRM clears
to page. Each radio fault is characterized by the leg the entire fault history log. A completion message
number in which the fault occurred, the Greenwich annunciates after all entries in the fault history log
mean time and date of the failure, the LRU iden- have been cleared. Push the RETURN line key to
tity, and error code. The LRU identity and error return to the MENU page.
code are extracted from the radio’s diagnostic word.
Refer to the appropriate maintenance manuals for Push the CANCEL line key on the RESET FAULT
explanation of error codes. HISTORY page to abort clearing the RESET
FAULT HISTORY menu selection. This action re-
2.10.5 Reset Radio Fault History (applicable turns the display back to the MENU PAGE.
to all RTUs except -004 status
RTU-4210s) 2.10.6 RTU-42X0 Labels
Selection of RESET FAULT HISTORY from the Table 2-9 through Table 2-15 provide lists of all
MENU page displays the RESET FAULT HIS- ARINC and CSDB labels that the RTU can receive
TORY page illustrated in Figure 2-20. This selec- and transmit.
Table 2-9. ARINC 429 Input Labels From Controlled Radios.
LABEL (OCTAL) RATE (words/sec) PARAMETER NOTES
013 10.0 TCAS Control Word 1
030 10.0 VHF COM Frequency (Echo) 1
030 N/A FMS VHF COM Frequency (Echo) 5,6
031 5.0 Beacon Code (Echo)
031 N/A FMS Beacon Code (Echo) 5,6
032 5.0 ADF Frequency (Echo)
032 N/A FMS ADF Frequency (Echo)
034 5.0 VOR/ILS Frequency (Echo)
034 N/A FMS VOR/ILS Frequency (Echo) 5,6
035 30.0 DME Frequency (Echo) 2
035 N/A FMS DME Frequency (Echo) 5,6,7
203 19.0 Altitude (29.92) (from ADC)
203 16.0 Altitude (from ADIR)
203 5.0 Altitude (29.92) (from TDR) 3
204 19.0 Baro-Corrected Altitude (from ADC)
206 19.0 Indicated Airspeed 4
270 5.0 FCC Mode Word 1
350 5.0 ADF Diagnostics
350 15.0 DME Diagnostics 8
350 5.0 TDR Diagnostics
350 5.0 VHF COM Diagnostics

Table 2-9. ARINC 429 Input Labels From Controlled Radios.
350 5.0 VIR Diagnostics
361 25.0 Inertial Altitude (from ADIRS) 9
364 50.0 Inertial Vertical Acceleration 9,10
Notes:
1. Word rate is variable and can be as low as 2 words/sec.
2. Three channels of data exist with each channel being transmitted at 10 words/sec.
3. System installation determines which altitude word is transmitted by the transponder.
4. Used to determine bus type.
5. Word is distinguished by SDI.
6. These parameters consist of a burst of 20 words.
7. Two channels of data exist with each channel being distinguished by a subaddress field.
8. Three channels of data exist with each channel being transmitted at 5 words/sec. Each channel follows the respective
frequency word.
9. Parameter received as high speed data.
10. Word utilized strictly to establish source ident.
Table 2-10. ARINC 429 Output Labels To Controlled Radios.
013 2.0 TCAS Control Word 1 1
015 2.0 TCAS Altitude Select Limits 1
016 2.0 TCAS Control Word 2 1
030 5.0 VHF COM Frequency
031 5.0 Beacon Code 2
032 5.0 ADF Frequency
034 5.0 VOR/ILS Frequency
035 15.0 DME Frequency 3
203 20.0 Altitude (29.92) (from TDR) 4
204 20.0 Baro-Corrected Altitude (from ADC) 4
350 5.0 RTU Diagnostic Word 1 5
351 5.0 RTU Diagnostic Word 2 5
352 N/A RTU Powerup Failure Word 5,6
Notes:
1. SDI is set to zeros.
2. This word is transmitted only to the selected transponder.
4. Reported altitude is based on the selected altitude source and the validity of the data.
5. The RTU diagnostic labels are only transmitted on the A429 RTU-2 OUT bus.
6. This word is transmitted at powerup only if a failure during the powerup sequence is detected. The transmission rate is 5
words/sec.

Table 2-11. CSDB Input Labels From Controlled Radios.
LABEL (HEX) RATE (updates/sec) PARAMETER NOTES
A5 N/A Sync Data 1
11 10.0 VHF COM Data
1F 10.0 Transponder Output Data
21 10.0 VOR Data
25 30.0 DME Frequency and Distance 2
2B 10.0 ADF Data
30 N/A Remote NAV Tune 4
31 N/A Remote COM Tune 4
32 N/A Remote ADF Tune 4
33 N/A Remote ATC Tune 4
34 N/A Remote DME Tune 4
41 52 Accelerations (DG Mode) 5
43 52 Altitude/Heading 5
A0 20.0 Pressure/Baro Altitudes
F3 10.0 ADF Diagnostics
F3 5.0 DME Diagnostics 3
F3 10.0 TDR Diagnostics
F3 10.0 VHF Diagnostics
F3 10.0 VIR Diagnostics
Notes:
1. The rate of the Sync word varies with the rate of the incoming data word.
2. Three blocks of data exist with each block being transmitted at 10 updates/sec. Blocks of data are distinguished by source
ident.
3. Each block follows the frequency/distance block.
5. These parameters are received at a rate of 50 kHz with a data format of 8 bytes/block.
Table 2-12. CSDB Output Labels To Controlled Radios.
LABEL (HEX) RATE (updates/sec) PARAMETER NOTES
A5 20.0 Sync Data
10 10.0 VHF COM Frequency
1E 10.0 Transponder ATC Code/Altitude
20 10.0 NAV Frequency
2C 10.0 ADF Frequency
Notes:
1. Three block of data exist with each block being transmitted at 10 updates/sec. Blocks of data are distinguished by source
ident.

Table 2-13. ARINC 429 Cross-Side RTU Labels.
001 N/A Acknowledgment Word
002 N/A Cross-side RTU Discrete Data
003 N/A Cross-side RTU Bus Signature
004 N/A Radio Test Flags
005 5.0 Cross-side RTU Feedback Data
006 N/A Configuration Word 0 1
007 5.0 Validity Flags
013 N/A TCAS Control Word 1
016 N/A TCAS Control Word 2
030 N/A VHF COM Frequency
031 N/A Beacon Code
032 N/A ADF Frequency
034 N/A VOR/ILS Frequency
035 N/A DME Frequency 2
140 N/A Startof Block
141 N/A Block Word
142 N/A End of Block
203 5.0 Altitude (29.92) (to TDR)
204 5.0 Baro-Corrected Altitude (from ADC)
350 5.0 RTU Diagnostic Word 1
351 5.0 RTU Diagnostic Word 2
371 5.0 RTU Sanity Word
377 5.0 Displayed Altitude
Notes:
1. Each word is distinguished by a word subaddress field. When the cross-side bus validity is established, these words are
transmitted.
2. Three channels of data exist with each channel being distinguished by a subaddress field.
3. Only the on-side altitude data is transmitted, if the date is considered valid.
Table 2-14. ARINC 429 Input Labels From IOC Concentrator.
030 10.0 VHF COM Frequency (Echo) 1
031 5.0 Beacon Code (Echo)

Table 2-14. ARINC 429 Input Labels From IOC Concentrator.
032 5.0 ADF Frequency (Echo)
034 5.0 VOR/ILS Frequency (Echo)
035 30.0 DME Frequency (Echo) 2
064 (350) 5.0 TDR Diagnostics
203 19.0 Altitude (29.92) (from ADC)
272 20.0 DCU Discrete Word 1 3
301 N/A FMC VHF COM Tune Word 3,4
302 N/A FMC NAV Receiver Tune Word 3,4
303 N/A FMC DME Tune Word 3,4,5
304 N/A FMC ADF Frequency 3,4
305 N/A FMC Beacon Code 3,4
360 N/A Centralized Strapping Words 0-15 6
Notes:
6. There are sixteen centralized strapping words, of which only six are used by the RTU. Each word is distinguished by a word
subaddress field. The update rate for all 16 words is a 4.2 words/sec.
Table 2-15. ARINC 429 Input Labels From SSD Concentrator.
020 (203) 20 ATC Altitude
030 10.0 VHF COM 1 and 3 Frequency 1
031 5.0 Beacon Code
032 5.0 ADF Frequency
034 20.0 VOR/ILS Frequency
037 20.0 HF Frequency Words 1-6
063 (350) 5.0 ADF Diagnostics
064 (350) 5.0 TDR Diagnostics
067 (350) 15.0 DME Diagnostics
074 (350) 5.0 VHF Diagnostics
075 (350) 5.0 VIR Diagnostics

Table 2-15. ARINC 429 Input Labels From SSD Concentrator.
173 20.0 Localizer
174 20.0 Glideslope
202 30.0 DME Distance 2
203 5.0 ADC Altitude
222 20.0 VOR Bearing/Marker Beacon
270 10.0 Autotune Word
301 N/A FMS VHF Tune Word 3,4
302 N/A FMS NAV Tune Word 3,4
303 N/A FMS DME Tune Word 3,4,5
304 N/A FMS ADF Frequency 3,4
305 N/A FMS Beacon Code 3,4
314 20.0 (52) True Heading
320 20.0 (52) Mag Heading
350 10.0 SDD Diagnostics
351 5.0 HF COMM Diagnostics
361 25.0 Inertial Altitude 6
Notes:
6. SDI derived from Heading label.
2.11 AIU-4000 AUDIO INTERFACE UNIT into non-volatile memory, and select the ARINC-
OVERVIEW 429 data port.
The AIU-4000 incorporates special features to

The AIU-4000 Audio Interface Unit controls the
eliminate the risk of a single AIU-4000 failure pre-
volume of up to 12 audio signals (radio outputs).
venting use of the equipment connected to it.
The AIU-4000 works with volume control equipped
RTU-40X0/42X0 Radio Tuning Units to control vol-
First, the AIU-4000 can continue to function in the
ume of the radios. The gain of each channel is con-
absence of volume commands from the RTU. The
trolled by ARINC 429 data sent from the RTU to
AIU-4000 contains non-volatile memory that can
the AIU. The AIU-4000 has 2 ARINC 429 inputs
store a default volume setting for each of the 12
and can receive the control data in either normal or
channels. If no volume commands are received from
burst tuning formats. All audio channel amplifiers
the RTU after power up, the AIU-4000 uses the de-
are completely bypassed when primary power is
fault settings. The AIU-4000 overrides the default
removed.
settings when valid volume commands are re-
ceived. The non-volatile volume setting memory is
The AIU-4000 controls 12 audio signals. The level controlled by a discrete input. Grounding the dis-
of volume is set by serial ARINC 429 data using la- crete input copies the current volume settings to
bel 215. Additional inputs identify the AIU-4000 memory. Leaving the discrete input unconnected
installation (pilot/copilot), store the audio levels leaves the memory unchanged.

Second, all audio channels pass through the AIU- commands or an internal error is detected the dis-
4000 with a 3 dB (50%) attenuation in the event of crete diagnostic output will switch from a high level
loss of power to the unit. When power is restored, to a low level.
the AIU-4000 will return to the volume settings in
non-volatile memory until valid volume commands Table 2-9 lists the equipment specifications and
are received. Table 2-10 lists the environmental qualifications for
the AIU-4000.
Third, the AIU-4000 has a discrete diagnostic out-
put. If the AIU-4000 does not receive valid volume
Table 2-16. AIU-4000 Audio Interface Unit, Equipment Specifications.
Certification
TSO
FAA TSO-C50c
RTCA DO-170
Environmental
FAA DO-160C, refer to Table 2-10 for additional information.
Software Not applicable
Physical
Size
Height 88.14 mm (3.470 in)
Width 41.66 mm (1.640 in)
Length 348.10 mm (13.705 in)
Mounting Information 3/16 ATR, short, dwarf (refer to Table 2-18 for additional information)
Electrical
Power/Straps
Input Power (P1-1, P1-2) +28 V dc power input.
Power Gnd (P1-3, P1-4, P1-8, P1-11, Power Ground
P1-15, P1-16, P1-19, P1-20, P1-45,
P1-49, P1-53, P1-57)
Inputs NOTE: Ground refers to any voltage less than +3 V dc.
Manual Reset (P1-12) Ground = reset
Open = normal operation
ARINC 429 Receive Port A Receives ARINC 429 serial data. The AIU-4000 recognizes ARINC 429 data with label
High (P1-5) 215 (octal) and fully decodes the source/destination identifier. Inputs are considered
Low (P1-9) valid only when the received label is 215 (octal) and the source/destination identifier for
the data matches the source/destination identifier straps.
ARINC 429 Receive Port B
High (P1-6)
Low (P1-10)
ARINC 429 Receive Port Select Ground = Receive on ARINC 429 Receive Port A
(P1-7) Open = Receive on ARINC 429 Receive Port B
Source/Destination Identifier - Least Identifies the AIU-4000 for comparison with the ARINC 429 control word SDI field.
Significant Bit (P1-14)

Source/Destination Identifier - Most Unit 1 (Left) - P1-13 ground, P1-14 open

Significant Bit (P1-13) Unit 2 (Right) - P1-13 open, P1-14 ground (Other combinations not used)
Non-Volatile Memory Update Ground = store current volume settings in non-volatile memory
Control (P1-17) Open = memory not updated.
Input Audio Channel 1 (P1-58) The AIU-4000 can control the volume of up to 12 radios. Each input channel has an in-
Input Audio Channel 2 (P1-59) put impedance of 16 kΩ. Each channel is diode-clamped to provide lightning protection.
Input Audio Channel 3 (P1-60)
Input Audio Channel 4 (P1-54) A potential radio compliment could be:
Input Audio Channel 5 (P1-55) 2 VHF Communications Transceivers
Input Audio Channel 6 (P1-56) 1 HF Communications Transceiver
Input Audio Channel 7 (P1-50) 1 Navigation Receiver
Input Audio Channel 8 (P1-51) 1 DME Transceiver
Input Audio Channel 9 (P1-52) 1 ADF Receiver
Input Audio Channel 10 (P1-46) 1 ILS Receiver
Input Audio Channel 11 (P1-47) 1 Marker Beacon Receiver
Input Audio Channel 12 (P1-48) 1 SATCOM Transceiver
1 MLS Receiver
2 Spare
Outputs
Discrete Diagnostic Output (P1-18) Ground = AIU-4000 failure
Open = AIU-4000 valid
Output Audio Channel 1 The AIU-4000 outputs are balanced and can supply at least 100 mW into 600 Ω.
High (P1-37)
Low (P1-41)
Output Audio Channel 2
High (P1-38)
Low (P1-42)
High (P1-39)
Low (P1-43)
High (P1-40)
Low (P1-44)
High (P1-29)
Low (P1-33)
High (P1-30)
Low (P1-34)
High (P1-31)
Low (P1-35)
High (P1-32)
Low (P1-36)
High (P1-21)
Low (P1-25)
High (P1-22)
Low (P1-26)


High (P1-23)
Low (P1-27)
High (P1-24)
Low (P1-28)
Table 2-17. AIU-4000, Environmental Qualifications Form.
DO-160C
PARA NO
Temp and Altitude 4.0 Categories ‘A2’ and ‘F2’.

Low Operating Temp -55 °C (-67 °F)
High Operating Temp +70 °C (+158 °F)
Low Storage Temp -55 °C (-67 °F)
High Storage Temp +85 °C (+185 °F)
Altitude
Low Operating Alt. -304.8 m (-1 000 ft)
High Operating Alt. 16 764 m (55 000 ft)
Overpressure -4 572 m (-15 000 ft)
Decompression 16 764 m (55 000 ft)
Category A2. Certified for installation in a partially controlled temperature, pres-
surized aircraft location where pressures are normally no lower
than the equivalent of 4.572 km (15 000 ft) msl.
Category F2. Certified for installation in a nonpressurized and noncontrolled
temperature location in an aircraft that is operated at altitudes up
to 16 764 m (55 000 ft) msl.
Temperature Variation 5.0 Category ‘B’. Certified for installation in a controlled or noncontrolled tempera-
ture location in the aircraft.
Humidity 6.0 Category ‘B’. Certified for severe humidity environment, 0 to 95% relative hu-
midity from 68 to 38 °C (154.4 to 82.4 °F), 240 hour exposure.
Shock 7.0
Operational 7.2 Tested at 6 g peak
Crash Safety 7.3 Tested at 15 g (11 ms duration), 12 g minimum (3 seconds duration) sustained
Vibration 8.0 Categories ‘C’, ‘LM’, and ‘NY’

Category ‘C’. Certified for fuselage mounting in a fixed wing turbojet aircraft.
Category ‘LM’. Certified for fuselage mounting in a fixed wing turbopropeller air-
craft.
Category ‘NY’. Certified for fuselage mounting in a helicopter.
Explosion Proofness 9.0 Category ‘E1’. Not hermetically sealed and not contained in cases designed to pre-
vent flame and explosion propagation.
Waterproofness 10.0 Category ‘X’. (No test required.) Certified for installation in locations not subject
to falling water (including condensation), rain water, or sprayed
water.
Fluids Susceptibility 11.0 Category ‘X’. (No test required.) Certified for installation in locations not exposed
to fluid contamination from fuel, hydraulic fluids, oil, solvents, etc.
Sand and Dust 12.0 Category ‘X’. (No test required.) Certified for installation in locations not subject
to blowing sand and dust.
Fungus Resistance 13.0 Category ‘X’. Fungus resistance test not performed.
Salt Spray 14.0 Category ‘X’. Salt spray test not performed.

Table 2-17. AIU-4000, Environmental Qualifications Form.
DO-160C
PARA NO
Magnetic Effect 15.0 Category ‘Z’. Unit causes a 1° deflection of an uncompensated compass at a dis-
tance less than 0.3 m (1.0 ft).
Power Input 16.0 Category ‘B’ and ‘Z’.

Normal Category B Category Z
Maximum 30.3 V dc 29.5 V dc
Nominal 27.5 V dc 27.5 V dc
Minimum 24.8 V dc 22.0 V dc
Emergency 20.0 V dc 18.0 V dc
Abnormal
Maximum 32.2 V dc 32.2 V dc
Nominal 27.5 V dc 27.5 V dc
Minimum 22.0 V dc 20.5 V dc
Normal Surges 40 V dc, 30 ms; 15 V dc, 30 ms 50 V dc, 30 ms; 12 V dc, 30 ms
Abnormal Surges 46.3 V dc 100 ms; 37.8 V dc, 1 s 80 V dc, 100 ms; 48 V dc, 1 s
Voltage Spike 17.0 Category ‘A’. Certified for installation in systems where a high degree of voltage
spike protection is required. Tested with repetitive 10 µs spikes of
±600 V (50 of each polarity in 1 minute) applied to power leads.
Audio Frequency Suscepti- 18.0 Category ‘Z’. Sine wave applied to ungrounded power lines with rms amplitude of
bility each component frequency equal to that of the allowable power in-
put ripple.
Induced Signal Suscepti- 19.0 Category ‘A’. Certified for operation in systems where interference-free operation
bility is desired.
RF Susceptibility 20.0 Category ‘U’. Partially protected environment, 20 V/m, full performance.
Category ‘W’. Severe, 100 V/m, recovery without damage.
Emission of RF Energy 21.0 Category ‘A’. Certified for operation in systems where interference-free operation
is desired.
Lightning Induced Tran- 22.0 Category ‘Z3Z3’. Moderately exposed environment using waveform sets other than
sient Susceptibility those specified in Table 22-1 of DO-160C.
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 Category ‘X’. Test not applicable.
Icing 24.0 Category ‘A’. Certified for installation in non-temperature-controlled aircraft lo-
cations.
2.12 AIU-4000 INSTALLATION DATA 2.12.2 Unpacking and Inspecting Equipment
Table 2-11 lists equipment required but not sup- Unpack the equipment carefully and make a care-
plied for proper installation and operation of the ful visual inspection of each unit for possible ship-
AIU-4000. Table 2-12 lists AIU-4000 mating con- ping damage. All claims for damage should be filed
nector contacts and special tools. Figure 2-21 illus- with the transportation company involved. If claims
trates the AIU-4000 rear connector pin assign- for damage are to be filed, save the original ship-
ments. The AIU-4000 outline and mounting ping container and materials. If no damage can be
dimensions are shown in Figure 2-22. detected, replace packing materials in the shipping
container and save for future use, such as storage
2.12.1 General or reshipment.
The AIU-4000 Audio Interface Unit is a rack 2.12.3 Installation Procedure

mounted in the equipment bay, in a UMT-10
mount. Refer to Figure 2-22 for the outline and The AIU-4000 contains electrostatic discharge sen-
mounting dimensions of the AIU-4000 Audio Inter- sitive (ESDS) components that can be damaged by
face Unit. improper handling. Caution must be used to avoid

contact with the exposed pins in the rear connector. trols do not require an AIU-4000 or an RTU with a
Install the AIU-4000 by carefully sliding the unit volume control.
into the UMT-10 rack until the unit mates with the
mating connector in the rack and secure with the 2.12.5 Removal Procedure
knurled nut on the rack.
Remove the AIU-4000 from its equipment rack by
2.12.4 Installation Interface Considerations loosening the knurled nut on the front of the rack
and then gently slide the AIU-4000 out of the rack.
Audio output from the AIU-4000 is connected to the
aircraft audio switching panel. Also note, the AIU- 2.13 AIU-4000 LABELS
4000 does not include a speaker amplifier. Aircraft
installations with dual RTU-40X0/42X0 units, also The AIU-4000 has 2 digital input ports to accept
require dual AIU-4000 installation. Aircraft in- ARINC 429 serial data with a label value of 215
stallations that have audio panels with volume con- (octal).
UMT-10 Mount 3/16 ATR mount, Collins part number 634-5210-001 1
Mating Connector Kit Collins part number 634-4192-007. This kit includes 60 pin Thinline II connector 1
(Collins Part Number 634-1021-001) and contacts (Collins Part Number
372-2514-110).
Crimp Contacts For wires with: *60

up to 0.050 in. insulation dia (372-2514-110)
or
0.050 to 0.080 in. insulation dia (372-2514-180)

(wire with insulation to 359-0697-010 *(Daniels DAK-188) *(Daniels DRK-230)
0.050 in dia) *(Daniels GMT-221)

(wire with insulation *(Daniels GMT-221) *(Daniels DAK-188) *(Daniels DRK-230)
0.050 to 0.080 in dia)
Corp., 6103 Anno Ave., Orlando, FL 32809. Phone: (407) 855-6161; Telex: 564321

PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION
1 +28 V Dc Input Aircraft Power 31 Output Audio Channel 7 High

2 +28 V Dc Input Aircraft Power 32 Output Audio Channel 8 High
3 Ground 33 Output Audio Channel 5 Low
5 Arinc 429 Receive Port A High 35 Output Audio Channel 7 Low
6 Arinc 429 Receive Port B High 36 Output Audio Channel 8 Low
7 Arinc 429 Receive Port Select 37 Output Audio Channel 1 High
8 Ground 38 Output Audio Channel 2 High
9 Arinc 429 Receive Port A Low 39 Output Audio Channel 3 High
10 Arinc 429 Receive Port B Low 40 Output Audio Channel 4 High
12 Manual Reset 42 Output Audio Channel 2 Low
13 Source/destination Identifier MSB 43 Output Audio Channel 3 Low
14 Source/destination Identifier LSB 44 Output Audio Channel 4 Low
15 Ground 45 Ground
16 Ground 46 Input Audio Channel 10
17 Nonvolatile Memory Update Control 47 Input Audio Channel 11
18 Diagnostic Discrete Output 48 Input Audio Channel 12
19 Ground 49 Ground
20 Ground 50 Input Audio Channel 7
21 Output Audio Channel 9 High 51 Input Audio Channel 8
23 Output Audio Channel 11 High 53 Ground
25 Output Audio Channel 9 Low 55 Input Audio Channel 5
27 Output Audio Channel 11 Low 57 Ground
Figure 2-21. AIU-4000, Rear Connector Pin Assignments

Figure 2-22. AIU-4000 Audio Interface Unit, Outline and Mounting

Dimensions

þ 523-0765130-00A118

Collins
TDR-90
Transponder
Installation
Table of Contents
2.1 GENERAL.............................................................2-1 2.4.5 CAD-870( )/CAD-62 Transponder Adapter and

Mount Installation.................................................2-41
2.4.5.1 Mount Installation............................................2-41
2.2.1 General................................................................... 2-1 2.4.5.2 Transponder Adapter Installation ...................2-42
2.2.2 Test Equipment Required ..................................... 2-1 2.4.6 613L-3 Control Unit Installation ........................2-42
2.2.3 Procedures.............................................................. 2-1 2.4.6.1 613L-3 Panel Mounting Cutout Procedure......2-42
2.2.3.1 Test Procedures Using an ARINC-429 2.4.6.2 613L-3 Installation ...........................................2-42
Control ..................................................................... 2-2 2.4.7 ANT-42/237Z-1 Antenna Installation .................2-42
2.2.3.2 Test Procedures Using the CTL-92 Control 2.4.8 CTL-90 Control Unit Installation .......................2-43
Unit .......................................................................... 2-3 2.4.8.1 Standard Front Mount Controls ......................2-43
2.2.3.3 Test Procedures Using the 613L-3 Control 2.4.8.2 Installation........................................................2-43
Unit .......................................................................... 2-3
2.2.3.4 Test Procedures Using the CTL-90 Control 2.5 POSTINSTALLATION CHECK........................ 2-43
Unit .......................................................................... 2-3 2.5.1 Self-Test ...............................................................2-43
2.5.2 Ramp Test ............................................................2-43
2.3 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS ...............................2-4
2.5.2.1 General ..............................................................2-43
2.3.1 Aircraft Wiring Harness, Except Antenna 2.5.2.2 Test Equipment Required ................................2-43
Cables....................................................................... 2-4 2.5.2.3 Pro Line II Test Procedures Using the
2.3.2 Control Mating Connector Installation and ATC-600A..............................................................2-43
Removal.................................................................. 2-36 2.5.2.4 Pro Line I Test Procedures Using the
2.3.2.1 CTL-92 Control Unit and CAD-62 Control ATC-600A...............................................................2-45
Adapter................................................................... 2-36 2.5.2.5 Pro Line I Test Procedures Using the
2.3.2.2 CAD-870( ) Transponder Tuning Adapter ....... 2-36 476X-3 ....................................................................2-45
2.3.2.3 613L-3 Control Unit Mating Connector........... 2-36
2.3.2.4 CTL-90 Control Unit Mating Connector ............. 2-36 2.6 TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................... 2-46
2.3.3 Antenna Cabling.................................................. 2-40 2.6.1 General .................................................................2-46
2.6.2 Test Equipment Required ...................................2-46
2.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES.....................2-40
2.6.3 Pro Line II Troubleshooting Procedures Using
2.4.1 UMT-11 Mount Installation................................ 2-40 the ATC-600A ........................................................2-46
2.4.2 390R-18 Mount Installation................................ 2-41 2.6.4 Pro Line I Troubleshooting Procedures Using
2.4.3 TDR-90 Transponder Installation ...................... 2-41 the ATC-600A ........................................................2-47
2.4.4 CTL-92 Installation ............................................. 2-41 2.6.5 Pro Line I Troubleshooting Procedures Using
2.4.4.1 CTL-92 Panel Mounting Cutout Procedure..... 2-41 the 476X-3 ..............................................................2-48
2.4.4.2 CTL-92 Installation .......................................... 2-41 2.6.6 Mount ...................................................................2-49
NOTICE: This section replaces ninth edition dated 2 December 1991 and all revisions.
Page No Issue
* Title ...........................................11 Apr 97

* 2-1 thru 2-13 .............................11 Apr 97
* 2-14 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-15............................................11 Apr 97
* 2-16 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-17............................................11 Apr 97
* 2-18 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-19............................................11 Apr 97
* 2-20 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-21............................................11 Apr 97
* 2-22 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-23............................................11 Apr 97
* 2-24 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-25............................................11 Apr 97
* 2-26 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-27............................................11 Apr 97
* 2-28 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-29............................................11 Apr 97
* 2-30 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-31............................................11 Apr 97
* 2-32 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-33 thru 2-42 ...........................11 Apr 97
* 2-43 thru 2-56 Added ................11 Apr 97


1st Ed 1 Oct 73 None 7th Ed 10 Mar 88 7
2nd Ed 1 Jan 74 None 8th Ed 21 Jul 89 None
1 16 Jun 75 1 9th Ed 2 Dec 91 None
3rd Ed 15 Apr 77 None 1 29 Sep 92 None
4th Ed 29 Sep 78 None 2 12 May 94 None
1 1 May 80 None 10th Ed 11 Apr 97 None
2 15 Sep 83 None
5th Ed 1 Jun 84 None
6th Ed 5 Mar 86 None

section II
installation
2.1 GENERAL unit in a system mockup to verify proper operation

before installation.
Note
2.2.2 Test Equipment Required
in this section are Rockwell Collins, Inc. The test equipment required for the preinstallation
recommendations and do not necessarily test on the TDR-90 is listed in Table 2-1. This is
correspond with any actual aircraft instal- only a guide, and equivalent equipment may be
lation and wiring. This section cannot be substituted.
used in place of a Supplemental Type Cer-
tificate (STC) or Type Certificate (TC). A test fixture must be fabricated to permit prein-
stallation testing of the TDR-90. Refer to the main-
Installation data contained in this section consists tenance section in the TDR-90 repair manual for an
of preinstallation check, cabling procedures and re- illustration of the test fixture. If installation per-
quirements, removal and installation of the equip- sonnel desire a test fixture for preinstallation test-
ment, and postinstallation checks. Refer to Figure ing only, the mode C altitude simulator components
2-1 for a typical installation for the TDR-90 system. of the test fixture may be omitted.
For information on wiring, bonding, and other gen- Table 2-1. Preinstallation Test Equipment Required.
eral installation practices, refer to the Installation
DESCRIPTION TYPE
Dummy load A 50-ohm, 10-watt dummy load
2.2 PREINSTALLATION CHECK with no more than 1.5 to 1 vswr
28-V dc power supply HP 6291A or equivalent
2.2.1 General
Perform the performance test (customer acceptance 2.2.3 Procedures

test) in the maintenance section of the TDR-90 in-
struction book (repair manual) if verification of unit Three control units are available for use with the
to equipment specification is required or connect TDR-90: two serial digital controls and one Pro
Figure 2-1. Typical Installation for TDR-90 System

installation TDR-90
Line I control. Paragraph 2.2.3.1 contains test pro- b. If a select 1/2 switch is used, set the select 1/2
cedures using an ARINC 429 control, paragraph switch to 1.
2.2.3.2 contains test procedures using the Pro Line c. Set the code select switches to display any code
II CSDB control CTL-92 Control Unit, and para- other than emergency codes (7500, 7600, and
graph 2.2.3.3 contains test procedures using the 7700).
Pro Line I 613L-3 Control Unit.
2.2.3.1 Test Procedures Using an ARINC-429 Note

Control
The TDR-90 has a 60-second (nominal) time
a. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-2 delay from the time primary power is ap-
and turn the power supply ON. plied until the unit can transmit.
Figure 2-2. Preinstallation Test Setup

installation TDR-90
d. Observe REPLY indicator. After the 60-second 2.2.3.3 Test Procedures Using the 613L-3
time delay, REPLY annunciator should light, Control Unit
indicating that the TDR-90 is functioning prop-
erly in mode A. a. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-2.
e. Set the mode switch to the ALT position. The b. Set the 613L-3 code selector switches to any
REPLY annunciator should light, indicating code other than emergency codes (7500, 7600,
that the TDR-90 is functioning properly in or 7700).
mode C. c. Set the 613L-3 ALT/OFF switch to the OFF po-
f. Momentarily depress the TEST switch. The sition.
REPLY annunciator should light. If the results d. Set the 613L-3 function selector switch to the
are different than stated here, refer to the ON position.
ARINC-429 control operating description for e. Set the 613L-3 SYS 1/2 switch to the 1 position
the specific control used. (dual system control unit only).
g. If the correct results are obtained, the system is f. Set the 613L-3 MON/TEST switch to the off po-
operating properly. If incorrect results are ob- sition.
tained, refer to the troubleshooting procedures, g. Set the power supply power switch to the ON
paragraph 2.6. position, and allow the equipment to warm up
for at least 5 minutes before continuing.
2.2.3.2 Test Procedures Using the CTL-92 h. Momentarily depress the 613L-3 MON/TEST
Control Unit switch to the TEST position. The 613L-3 RPLY
lamp should light, indicating the TDR-90 is
a. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-2. functioning properly in mode A.
b. Set the CTL-92 1/2 select switch to 1 (dual sys- i. Set the 613L-3 ALT/OFF switch to the ALT po-
tem control only). sition, and repeat step h. The 613L-3 RPLY
c. Set the power supply power switch to the ON lamp should light, indicating the TDR-90 is
position and the CTL-92 power and mode functioning properly in mode C.
switch to the ON position. j. If the correct results are obtained in steps h
d. Set the CTL-92 code select switches to display and i, the system is operating properly. If incor-
any code other than emergency codes (7500, rect results are obtained, refer to the trouble-
7600, and 7700). shooting procedures.
2.2.3.4 Test Procedures Using the CTL-90

Note Control Unit
The TDR-90 has a 60-second (nominal) time a. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-2.
delay from the time primary power is ap- b. Rotate the CTL-90 code select knobs to any re-
plied until the unit can transmit. ply code other than emergency codes (7500,
7600, or 7700).
e. Observe the CTL-92 TX indicator. After the 60- c. Rotate the CTL-90 function switch to the ON
second (nominal) time delay, the TX annuncia- position.
tor should light, indicating the TDR-90 is func- d. Set the 1/2 switch to the 1 position (dual control
tioning properly in mode A. unit only).
f. Set the CTL-92 power and mode switch to the e. Allow the equipment to warm up for at least 5
ALT position. The TX annunciator should light, minutes before continuing with the test proce-
indicating the TDR-90 is functioning properly dure.
in mode C. f. Momentarily press the CTL-90 TEST button.
g. Momentarily depress the CTL-92 TEST switch. The REPLY light should light for approxi-
The TX annunciator should light and the se- mately 1 second, indicating that the TDR-90 is
lected code display brightness should alter- functioning properly in mode A operation.
nately change from maximum to minimum. g. If the installation is equipped with a digitized
h. If the correct results are obtained in steps e, f, altitude source, rotate the CTL-90 function
and g, the system is operating properly. If in- switch to ALT REP and repeat step f for mode
correct results are obtained, refer to the trou- C operation.
bleshooting procedures.

installation TDR-90
h. If the correct results are obtained in steps f and mation to a tie point number. The tie point number
g, the system is operating properly. If incorrect can be used to tie together one interconnect to an-
results are obtained, refer to the troubleshoot- other interconnect diagram with the same number.
ing procedures. Example: the tie number 540 is dedicated to Sup-
pression to a DME system. On the appropriate in-
2.3 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS stallation diagram (DME-42 or DME-442), there is
a tie point at 540 which is Suppression from the
2.3.1 Aircraft Wiring Harness, Except DME. Figure 2-12 and Figure 2-13 are designed to
Antenna Cables minimize HIRF and lightning hazards.
Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-4 are ARINC 429 intercon- Refer to the General System and Mount Informa-
nect wiring diagrams for single and dual TDR-90 tion section for general interconnect guidelines to
installations when using a CAD-870 Transponder be followed. For information on wiring, bonding,
Adapter Unit; refer to Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6 and other general installation practices, refer to the
when using a CAD-870G. Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8 Installation Practices Manual (CPN 523-0775254).
are Pro Line II CSDB interconnect diagrams, and Refer to Figure 2-14 for TDR-90 connector pin as-
Figure 2-9 through Figure 2-11 are the Pro Line I signments.
interconnect wiring diagrams for single and dual
TDR-90 installations. The TDR-90 uses a Thinline mating connector. Re-
fer to the General System and Mount Information
Figure 2-12 provides TDR-90 to ARINC 429 intersection (Pro Line II installation manual, part A) for
connect information to a tie point number. Figure Thinline connector and contact information.
2-13 provides TDR-90 to CSDB interconnect infor-

installation TDR-90
Figure 2-3. Interconnect Wiring Diagram, Pro Line II, ARINC 429
(With CAD-870), Single Installation

installation TDR-90
Figure 2-4. TDR-90 Interconnect Wiring Diagram, Pro Line II, ARINC 429 (With CAD-870), Dual Installation

installation TDR-90
Figure 2-5. TDR-90 Interconnect Wiring Diagram, Pro Line II,

ARINC 429 (With CAD-870G), Single Installation

installation TDR-90
Figure 2-6. TDR-90 Interconnect Wiring Diagram, Pro Line II, ARINC 429 (With CAD-870G), Dual Installation

installation TDR-90
Figure 2-7. TDR-90 Interconnect Wiring Diagram, Pro Line II,

CSDB, Single Installation

installation TDR-90
Figure 2-8. TDR-90 Interconnect Wiring Diagram, Pro Line II, CSDB, Dual Installation

installation TDR-90
Figure 2-9. TDR-90 Interconnect Wiring Diagram, Pro Line I,

Single Installation

installation TDR-90
Figure 2-10. TDR-90 Interconnect Wiring Diagram, Pro Line I, Dual Installation

installation TDR-90
Figure 2-11. TDR-90 Interconnect Wiring Diagram, CTL-90

Control Unit, Single or Dual Installation

installation TDR-90
Figure 2-12 (Sheet 1 of 4). TDR-90 With ARINC 429 Control and

installation TDR-90
Figure 2-12 (Sheet 2). TDR-90 With ARINC 429 Control and Tie

installation TDR-90

installation TDR-90

installation TDR-90
Figure 2-13 (Sheet 1 of 5). TDR-90 With CSDB Control and


installation TDR-90
Figure 2-13 (Sheet 2). TDR-90 With CSDB Control and Tie Points,

installation TDR-90

installation TDR-90

installation TDR-90

installation TDR-90
Figure 2-14. TDR-90 Transponder, Connector Pin Assignments

installation TDR-90
Table 2-2. TDR-90 Transponder Mating Connectors (Preferred).
AIRCRAFT COLLINS
TYPE DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER QTY

Installation kit (includes 55 contacts (CPN 372-2514-110) and 634-4192-004
TNC connector)

Crimp contacts
Up to 1.27-mm (0.050-in) insulation diameter 372-2514-110 *45
or
1.27-mm (0.050-in) to 2.03-mm (0.080-in) insulation diameter 372-2514-180 *45
Rotary-wing UMT-11 Mount 622-5211-003 1

Crimp contacts
or
1.27-mm (0/050-in) to 2.03-mm (0.80-in) insulation diameter 372-2514-180 *45
Refer to Table 2-4 for a complete listing of components included in each kit.
Table 2-3. TDR-90 Transponder Mating Connectors (**Alternate).
AIRCRAFT COLLINS
TYPE DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER QTY

Installation kit (includes 45 contacts (CPN 372-2514-110) and 634-4193-006 1
TCN connector)

Crimp contacts
or
Rotary-wing 390R-18 Mounting Tray 622-1194-301 1

Crimp contacts
or
Refer to Table 2-4 for a complete listing of components included in each kit.
**Recommended installation only where UMT-series mount cannot be used

installation TDR-90

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER QTY
634-1021-001 Thinline II 60-pin connector 634-1112-001 1

Keyway 634-1116-001 2

Screw, 4-40 x 0.50 324-2605-000 2
Keyway 634-1116-001 2
Washer, flat, no 4 310-0779-030 2

Screw, 4-40 x 0.50 324-2605-000 2
Keyway 634-1116-001 2
634-4192-004 Thinline II 60-pin connector 634-1112-001 1

Keyway 634-1116-001 2
Contact 372-2514-110 55
Connector, TNC, straight (for RG-393 cable) 857-1511-010 1

Thinline II 60-pin connector 634-1112-001 1
Screw, 4-40 x 0.50 324-2605-000 2
Keyway 634-1116-001 2
Contact 372-2514-110 45
Washer, flat, no 4 310-0779-030 2
MATING CONNECTOR ASSOCIATED SPECIAL TOOLS
COLLINS
DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER CRIMPING INSERTION EXTRACTION

(wire with insulation up to or (Daniels DAK-188)* (Daniels DRK-230)*
1.27 mm (0.050 in) in dia) 359-0697-010
(Daniels GMT-221)*

(wire with insulation 1.27 (Daniels GMT-221)* (Daniels DAK-188)* (Daniels DRK-230)*
mm (0.050 in) to 2.03 mm
(0.080 in) in dia)
*Special tools are available in connector kit CPN 359-0697-080 (Daniels DMC-593) or can be ordered from Daniels
Manufacturing Corp., 6103 Anno Ave., Orlando, FL 32809. Phone: (407) 855-6161; Telex: 564321

installation TDR-90
2.3.2 Control Mating Connector Installation Table 2-6. 613L-3 Control Unit Mating Connector
Kit (621-8976-001).
and Removal
The ARINC 429 control and CTL-92 (CSDB control) QTY DESCRIPTION COLLINS
are the preferred controls for the TDR-90. A CAD- PART NUMBER
870( ) Transponder Control Adapter is required 2 Screw, lock 371-0040-030
when using an ARINC-429 control to tune a TDR-
90. A CAD-62 Control Adapter is required when 1 Adapter 371-0186-000
using a CTL-92 Control. 1 Connector, 37-pin 371-0922-040
2.3.2.1 CTL-92 Control Unit and CAD-62 27 *Contact, snap-in 371-0946-060

Control Adapter
*A total of 23 contacts are required for the 613L-3; the
remainder are spares.
The CTL-92 is used with a CAD-62 to provide ATC
Contacts 371-0946-060 will accept wire sizes 20 thru 26.
code and altitude data to a TDR-90. For informa-
tion on the installation of the CTL-92, refer to the
CTL-X2 installation section in part A of the Pro
Line II installation manual. For information on the
installation of the CAD-62, refer to the CAD-62 in-
2.3.2.4.1 Mating Connector Kit
stallation section in part A of the Pro Line II in-
stallation manual.
2.3.2.2 CAD-870( ) Transponder Tuning Note
Adapter
The CPN 634-0058-003 and -004 kits are
The CAD-870( ) is used to convert ATC code and al- the same as the CPN 634-0058-001 and -
titude data from ARINC 429 serial control into the 002 kits, respectively, except that the con-
parallel octal data format required by the TDR-90 nectors have crimp-type contacts instead of
Transponder. For information on the installation of solder-pot type contacts. The CPN 634-
the CAD-870( ), refer to the CAD-870 or CAD-870G 0058-005 kit is the same as the -001 kit ex-
installation section in part A of the Pro Line II in- cept that it has two built-in power relays to
stallation manual. increase the switching capability of the two
28-V dc output lines. The CPN 634-0058-
2.3.2.3 613L-3 Control Unit Mating Connector 006 kit is the same as the -005 kit except
(Refer to Table 2-6 for mating connec- the connectors use crimp-on type contacts.
tor information)
Assemble the CTL-90 mating connector as follows:
The mating connector contact crimping, insertion,
and removal information for the 613L-3 Control a. Mount the two index pins in the hexholes of the
Unit is the same as for the CAD-62 Control connector plate. Orient the pins so they will
Adapter. Refer to paragraph 2.3.2.1. Refer to mate with the keying receptacles in the rear of
Figure 2-15 for mating connector pin locations and the CTL-90. Secure the index pins to the con-
pin functions. nector plate with two 4-40 x 0.25 screws.
2.3.2.4 CTL-90 Control Unit Mating Connector Note
Note
Install either the slidelock assembly or the
Additional information for the CTL-90 Con- screw locks. It is not necessary to install
trol Unit is contained in the Collins CTL-X0 both.
Controls Instruction Book (repair manual)
(CPN 523-0769247). b. Position the floating connector (P3) over the top
and bottom mounting holes on the connector
Refer to Figure 2-16 for an assembly view of the CTL- plate. Orient the connector so that pin 1 is in
90 mating connector. Refer to Figure 2-17 for CTL-90 the bottom row and secure with two 2-56 x 0.25
mating connector pin assignments and locations. screws.

installation TDR-90
Figure 2-15. 613L-3 Control Unit, Connector Pin Assignments

installation TDR-90
Figure 2-16. CTL-90 Control Unit, Mating Connector Assembly Diagram

installation TDR-90
Figure 2-17. CTL-90 Control Unit, Mating Connector Pin Assignments and Location Diagram

installation TDR-90
c. This step applies only when the slidelock as- outlet hole is located at the top or the bottom of
sembly is used; if screw locks are used, proceed the assembly. Secure the connector hood with
to step d. Orient the nonfloating connector (P2) four 4-40 x 0.25 screws. Secure the interconnect
over the mounting holes on the center connec- cable to either tab of the hood using the pro-
tor position with pin 1 in the bottom row. Insert vided tie-wrap.
a flat washer over each mounting hole, but un-
der connector P2. Set the sliding clip over con-
2.3.3 Antenna Cabling
nector P2 so that if viewed from the side of the
mating connector, the slidelock assembly would
Antenna cabling information is contained in Table
lock in the most right-hand position. Secure the
2-7.
sliding clip, flat washers, and connector to the
mounting plate with two slotted-head screws.
Check the slidelock assembly operation by 2.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
sliding the clip back and forth, noting that the
clip latches into both the lock and release posi- 2.4.1 UMT-11 Mount Installation
tions. Proceed to step e.
d. This step applies only when the screw locks are
used. Orient the nonfloating connector (P2) Note
over the mounting holes on the center connec-
tor position with pin 1 in the bottom row. Insert Assembly instructions and additional in-
a flat washer under connector P2 over each formation for the UMT-11 Mount are con-
mounting hole. Secure the connector to the tained in the Collins UMT-( ) Mounts and
mounting plate with two slotted-head screws. Thinline II Connectors Instruction Book,
Then, insert two 4-40 x 0.75 screws through the CPN 523-0772277.
connector plate and force a spring sleeve over
each screw thread. a. Refer to the general system and mount infor-
e. Refer to the pin function assignments and the mation section in the Pro Line II installation
interconnect diagrams. Crimp or solder the ap- manual for UMT-11 outline and mounting di-
propriate wiring to the mating connector con- mensions diagrams. Refer to the TDR-90 out-
tacts. line and mounting dimensions diagram (Figure
f. Position the connector hood over the mounting 2-18) to ensure adequate vertical clearance for
holes on the rear side of the connector plate. the TDR-90 and UMT-11.
The hood may be oriented so that the wiring
Table 2-7. Antenna/TDR-90 Cabling/Connector Requirements.
*CABLE MAX LENGTH TDR-90 MATING CONN ANT-42 MATING CONN 237Z-1 MATING CONN
TYPE METRES (FEET)
RG-393/U 18.3 TNC straight TNC straight

(60) 857-1511-010 857-1151-010
or or
TNC 90° TNC 90°
857-1511-020 857-1511-020
RG-142B/U 7.0 TNC straight TNC straight HN straight

(23.1) 357-9666-000 357-9666-000 Amphenol 82-534
or or or
TNC 90° TNC 90° HN 90°
357-9664-000 357-9664-000 357-9870-000
*Either RG-393/U or RG-142B/U may be used, but RG-393/U is the recommended cable type. In determining cable length, allow
sufficient length so that bends will have a minimum radius of 76.2 mm (3 in).

installation TDR-90
b. Carefully determine the mounting hole loca- b. Carefully determine the panel mounting cutout
tions and drill the required holes. hole location and cut the mounting hole in the
c. Position mount over mounting holes and secure panel. Ensure that hole edges are free of burrs
with required hardware. and sharp edges.
d. Position the TDR-90 interconnecting cable (with
mating connector installed) into the rear of the 2.4.4.2 CTL-92 Installation
mount and secure with required hardware.
2.4.2 390R-18 Mount Installation the panel cutout hole and attach the connector
to the rear of the control.
b. Using a 3/32 Allen wrench, ensure that all
Note three (two at bottom, one at upper right) inte-
gral turnlock fastener actuating screws on the
Assembly instructions and additional in- front of the front panel are turned fully coun-
formation for the 390R-18 Mount are con- terclockwise until the stop nuts are contacted.
tained in the Collins Universal Mounts As- c. Insert the control into the panel cutout hole un-
sembly Instructions, CPN 523-0766506. til flush with panel.
a. Refer to the general system and mount infor- d. Tighten the three actuating screws with the
mation section in the Pro Line II installation 3/32 Allen wrench until the control is firmly
manual for 390R-18 outline and mounting di- against the panel.
mensions diagrams. Refer to the TDR-90 out-
line and mounting dimensions diagram (Figure 2.4.5 CAD-870( )/CAD-62 Transponder
2-18) to ensure adequate vertical clearance for Adapter and Mount Installation
the TDR-90 and 390R-18.
b. Carefully determine the mounting hole loca- 2.4.5.1 Mount Installation
tions and drill the required holes.
c. Position mount over mounting holes and secure 2.4.5.1.1 CAD-870/CAD-62 Mount Installation
with required hardware.
d. Position the TDR-90 interconnecting cable a. Refer to the CAD-870 or CAD-62 installation
(with mating connector installed) into the rear section in the Pro Line II installation manual
of the mount and secure with required hard- for the outline and mounting diagram for the
ware. CAD-870 or CAD-62 respectively.
2.4.3 TDR-90 Transponder Installation tions and drill the required holes.
c. Position the mount over the mounting holes
a. Slide the TDR-90 into the mount until the unit and secure with required hardware.
and mating connector are fully engaged.
b. Position the knurled knob on the front of the 2.4.5.1.2 UMT-10 Mount Installation (for CAD-
mount to engage the holddown hook on the 870G installations)
TDR-90 and tighten the knurled knob until the
TDR-90 is secured to the mount.
c. Ensure that a good electrical bond exists be- Note
tween the TDR-90 and mount.
Assembly instructions and additional in-
d. Connect the antenna cable to the antenna con-
formation for the UMT-10 are contained in
nector (J1) on the front of the TDR-90.
the Collins UMT-( ) Mounts and Thinline II
Connectors Instruction Book, CPN 523-
2.4.4 CTL-92 Installation
0772277.
2.4.4.1 CTL-92 Panel Mounting Cutout
Procedure a. Refer to the general system and mount infor-
mation section in the Pro Line II installation
a. Refer to the CTL-X2 installation section in the manual for UMT-10 outline and mounting di-
Pro Line II installation manual for the outline mensions diagrams. Refer to the CAD-870G in-
and mounting diagram for the CTL-92. stallation section in the Pro Line II installation

installation TDR-90
manual for the outline and mounting diagram 2.4.6.2 613L-3 Installation
for the CAD-870G.
tions and drill the required holes.
the panel cutout hole and attach to connector at
c. Position the mount over mounting holes and se-
rear of 613L-3.
cure with required hardware.
b. Insert the 613L-3 into the panel cutout hole un-
d. Position the CAD-870G rear interconnecting
til flush with panel.
cable (with mating connector installed) into the
c. Secure 613L-3 to panel with required hard-
rear of the mount and secure with required
ware.
hardware.
2.4.7 ANT-42/237Z-1 Antenna Installation
2.4.5.2 Transponder Adapter Installation
2.4.5.2.1 CAD-870/CAD-62 Transponder Either the ANT-42 or 237Z-1 antenna may be used
Adapter Installation with the TDR-90. The Pro Line II ANT-42 is pre-
ferred and the Pro Line I 237Z-1 is the alternate
a. Slide the transponder adapter onto the mount, antenna. Refer to the outline and mounting dia-
ensuring that the lip at the rear of the grams (Figure 2-20 and Figure 2-21) for mounting
transponder adapter is under the raised angle hole information.
at the rear of the mount.
b. Ensure the latching bar at the front of the mount
is over the lip at the front of the transponder Note
adapter and tighten the screw until the transpon-
der adapter is secured to the mount. Additional information for both the ANT-42
c. Install the mating connector to the connector on and 237Z-1 antennas is contained in the
the front of the transponder adapter and secure Collins General Aviation Antennas Instruc-
the latch. tion Book, CPN 523-0769091.
2.4.5.2.2 CAD-870G Installation Caution
a. Slide the CAD-870G into the mount until the It is important that adequate isolation be
unit and mating connector are fully engaged. provided between two DME antennas or a
b. Position the knurled knob on the front of the DME antenna and a transponder antenna
mount to engage the holddown on the CAD- to prevent receiver front-end damage. It is
870G and tighten the knurled knob until the possible, with the use of DME Y-channels,
CAD-870G is secured to the mount. for one DME to transmit directly on the
c. Install the mating connector to the connector on frequency of a second DME as well as on
the front of the CAD-870G and secure the latch. the receiver frequency of the transponder.
2.4.6 613L-3 Control Unit Installation The transponder can also transmit directly
on the receiver frequency of the DME.
2.4.6.1 613L-3 Panel Mounting Cutout Minimum isolation of 40 dB between L-
Procedure band systems is suggested, including an-
a. Refer to the 613L-3 outline and mounting di- tenna isolation plus cables losses. A separa-
mensions diagram (Figure 2-19) to determine tion of 1.219 m (4 ft) between L-band stub
the panel mounting cutout hole dimensions. For antennas, on a common ground plane, pro-
convenience, all outline and mounting dia- vides about 30 dB of isolation. The isolation
grams are grouped together toward the end of increases 6 dB for each doubling of the
this section. separation in distance; that is, 36 dB for
b. Carefully determine the panel mounting cutout 2.438 m (8 ft), 42 dB for 4.876 m (16 ft), etc.
hole location and cut the mounting hole in the
panel. Ensure that hole edges are free of burrs a. Carefully determine the mounting hole loca-
and sharp edges. tions and drill the required holes.

installation TDR-90
Note c. Check that all four integral turnlock fastener ac-

tuating screws are in contact with the stop nuts. If
The antenna mating flange and aircraft not, turn the actuating screws fully counterclock-
surface must be free of paint or other insu- wise until the stop nuts are contacted.
lation materials to provide a continuous d. Place the CTL-90 in the panel cutout hole and
ground path. Improper grounding results in push until the CTL-90 is flush with the
increased side-lobe radiation. Do not re- mounting panel surface.
move the chromate finish from the antenna e. Tighten the four actuating screws with a 3/32
or the aircraft structure, as it protects the Allen wrench until the CTL-90 is firmly held in
aluminum from corrosion. place to the mounting panel.
f. Replace the lens filter and tighten using 0.050
b. Place gasket (optional for ANT-42, supplied Allen wrench.
with 237Z-1) on antenna.
c. Install the coaxial cable mating connector on 2.5 POSTINSTALLATION CHECK
the antenna and secure. Ensure that any bends 2.5.1 Self-Test
in the coaxial cable have a minimum radius of
76.2 mm (3 in). a. Energize the TDR-90 system by turning the
d. Position the antenna over the mounting holes necessary aircraft circuit breakers on and posi-
and secure with required hardware. tioning the CTL-92 power and mode switch or
613L-3 function selector switch to ON. In dual
2.4.8 CTL-90 Control Unit Installation installation system, place CTL-92 1/2 select
switch or 613L-3 SYS 1/2 switch to 1. The TDR-
Note 90 has a built-in 60-second delay from the time
primary power is applied before the unit is in
Additional information for the CTL-90 Con- the operate condition.
trol Unit is contained in the Collins CTL-X0 b. Depress the CTL-92 TEST switch or 613L-3
Controls Instruction Book, CPN 523- MON/TEST switch to the TEST position. If the
0769247. TDR-90 is functioning normally, the TX annun-
ciator or RPLY lamp will illuminate and remain
2.4.8.1 Standard Front Mount Controls lit for 1 second after release of TEST switch.
c. On dual TDR-90 installations, place 1/2 select
Outline and mounting dimensions are given for switch or SYS 1/2 switch to 2 and repeat step b.
single and dual controls in Figure 2-22.
2.5.2 Ramp Test
Note
2.5.2.1 General
All CTL-90's have a 5-volt REPLY bulb in- After the equipment has been installed in the air-
stalled except for the -019, -020, and -021 craft and all cabling has been checked, perform the
statuses, which have a 20-volt bulb. The 5- operational check given below. This test may be
volt REPLY bulb may be replaced with a made using aircraft power with the engines run-
28-volt bulb (CPN 262-1883-020, not sup- ning or with auxiliary power applied to the aircraft.
plied with unit) and connected to the 28-
volt aircraft annunciator bus as indicated in 2.5.2.2 Test Equipment Required
note 6 of the CTL-90 interconnect, Figure 2-
11. The test equipment required for the ramp test on
the TDR-90 is listed in Table 2-8. This is only a
2.4.8.2 Installation guide and equivalent equipment may be substi-
tuted.
a. Remove the lens filter from the CTL-90 using a
0.050 Allen wrench. 2.5.2.3 Pro Line II Test Procedures Using the
b. Pull the mating connector assembly through the ATC-600A
panel cutout hole and mate to the CTL-90 rear
connectors. Lock the slidelock slip and tighten the a. Secure the remote test antenna on the tripod
screws locks with a 3/32 Allen wrench. and adjust the tripod so the remote test an-
tenna height is the same as that of the

installation TDR-90
transponder antenna on the aircraft. Position Table 2-8. Postinstallation/Troubleshooting

Test Equipment Required.
the remote test antenna horizontally from the
aircraft antenna equal to the distance marked
DESCRIPTION TYPE
on the remote test antenna coax cable
(approximately 53.34 cm (21 in)). If the aircraft Ramp test set IFR, Inc. ATC-600A
contains dual TDR-90's, ensure that the remote Transponder and DME Test Set
test antenna is positioned relative to the an- or
tenna for transponder no 1. The bearing from Ramp test set Collins 476X-3 ATC
the aircraft antenna is not critical. Transponder Ramp Test Set
(CPN 522-4475-001)
Caution
Do not position the remote test antenna by again depressing the PWR switch once to
closer than 30.48 cm (12 in) to the aircraft the BAT position
antenna or the ATC-600A can be damaged.
g. Set the CTL-92 code select knobs to display any
b. Route the loose end of the remote test antenna code other than emergency codes (7500, 7600,
coax cable into the aircraft (via door, window, or 7700). The ATC-600A numerical display
etc) and connect to the ANTENNA connector on should indicate the same code. If desired, sev-
the ATC-600A. eral codes may be checked.
c. Set the CTL-92 power and mode switch to ON h. Depress and release the CTL-92 IDENT button.
and the 1/2 switch to 1 (dual installations). The CTL-92 should display the letters “id” in the
lower display window for approximately 15 sec-
Note
onds and the ATC-600A IDENT lamp should il-
The TDR-90 has a built-in 60-second delay luminate for approximately 25 seconds.
from the time primary power is applied un-
til the unit is ready to transmit. Note
d. If 102- to 120-V ac, 50- to 400-Hz power is If the aircraft does not have a source of
available, connect ATC-600A power cord to digitized altitude information, skip steps i
power source. The ATC-600A contains an in- through k and proceed to step m.
ternal battery for test set operation when ac
power is not available.
e. Depress the ATC-600A PWR switch to AC if ac i. Set the aircraft barometric altimeter to indicate
power is available or to BAT if battery opera- 29.92 in Hg.
tion is desired. The ON lamp should illuminate, j. Set the CTL-92 power and mode switch to ALT.
indicating that the test set is ready for opera- k. Set the ATC-600A mode switch to A/C ALT.
tion. No warmup period is required. The ATC-600A numerical display should indi-
f. Set ATC-600A controls to the following positions: cate the barometric altitude in thousands of
feet (eg, 000.2 equals 200 feet). Also, the num-
INTERR control 0 ber displayed by the ATC-600A numerical dis-
FRAMING control 0 play should be the same number as displayed
XPDR SIG control Fully ccw by the numerical readout of the barometric al-
Mode switch A/C CODE timeter.
l. For dual installations, position the remote test
antenna relative to transponder no 2 antenna,
Note
set the CTL-92 1/2 switch to 2, and repeat steps
Although the ATC-600A contains a 2-hr Ni- f through k.
Cad battery, it also contains a timer that m. If the correct results are obtained in steps g
shuts off battery power after 7 to 10 minutes. through l, the system is operating properly. If
If the ON lamp extinguishes during the test incorrect results are obtained, refer to the trou-
procedures, reset the timer circuit bleshooting procedures.

installation TDR-90
2.5.2.4 Pro Line I Test Procedures Using the Note

ATC-600A
Although the ATC-600A contains a 2-hr
a. Secure the remote test antenna on the tripod NiCad battery, it also contains a timer that
and adjust the tripod so the remote test an- shuts off battery power after 7 to 10 min-
tenna height is the same as that of the utes. If the ON lamp extinguishes during
transponder antenna on the aircraft. Position the test procedures, reset the timer circuit
the remote test antenna horizontally from the by again depressing the PWR switch once to
aircraft antenna equal to the distance marked the BAT position.
(approximately 53.34 cm (21 in)). If the aircraft g. Set the 613L-3 code selector switches to display
contains dual TDR-90's, ensure that the remote any code other than emergency codes (7500,
test antenna is positioned relative to the an- 7600, or 7700). The ATC-600A numerical dis-
tenna for transponder no 1. The bearing from play should indicate the same code. If desired,
the aircraft antenna is not critical. several codes may be checked.
Caution Note
Do not position the remote test antenna If the aircraft does not have a source of
closer than 30.48 cm (12 in) to the aircraft digitized altitude information, skip steps h
antenna or the ATC-600A can be damaged. through j and proceed to step k.
b. Route the loose end of the remote test antenna h. Set the aircraft barometric altimeter to indicate
coax cable into the aircraft (via door, window, 29.92 inHg.
etc) and connect to the ANTENNA connector on i. Set the 613L-3 ALT/OFF switch to ALT.
the ATC-600A. j. Set the ATC-600A mode switch to A/C ALT.
c. Set the 613L-3 function selector switch to ON The ATC-600A numerical display should indi-
and the SYS 1/2 switch to 1 (dual installations). cate the barometric altitude in thousands of
feet (eg, 000.2 equals 200 feet). Also, the num-
Note ber displayed by the ATC-600A numerical dis-
play should be the same number as displayed
The TDR-90 has a built-in 60-second delay by the numerical readout of the barometric al-
from the time primary power is applied un- timeter.
til the unit is ready to transmit. k. Depress and release the 613L-3 IDENT switch.
The ATC-600A IDENT lamp should illuminate
d. If 102- to 120-V ac, 50- to 400-Hz power is for approximately 25 seconds.
available, connect ATC-600A power cord to l. For dual installations, set the 613L-3 SYS 1/2
power source. The ATC-600A contains an in- switch to 2 and repeat the test procedures for
ternal battery for test set operation when ac transponder no 2.
power is not available. m. If the correct results are obtained in steps g
e. Depress the ATC-600A PWR switch to AC if ac through k, the system is operating properly. If
power is available or to BAT if battery opera- incorrect results are obtained, refer to the trou-
tion is desired. The ON lamp should illuminate, bleshooting procedures.
indicating that the test set is ready for opera-
tion. No warmup period is required. 2.5.2.5 Pro Line I Test Procedures Using the
f. Set ATC-600A controls to the following positions: 476X-3
INTERR control 0
a. Perform the preoperational check as described
FRAMING control 0
in paragraph 3.3.1 of the 476X-3 ATC
XPDR SIG control Fully ccw
Transponder Ramp Test Set Instruction Book
Mode switch A/C CODE
(CPN 523-0783700).

installation TDR-90
b. Disconnect 476X-3 T/R DIRECT connector P504 o. Momentarily depress the 613L-3 IDENT switch.
from rf connector J503. Connect antenna con- Both the 476X-3 CODE and IDENT flags should
nector P503 to rf connector J503. blink for approximately 15 to 30 seconds.
c. Locate the 476X-3 in relation to the aircraft and p. For dual installations, set the 613L-3 SYS 1/2
set the T/R ATTEN control as determined in switch to 2 and repeat the test procedures for
paragraph 3.2.3 of the 476X-3 instruction book. transponder no 2.
q. If the correct results are obtained in steps i
Note through o, the system is operating properly. If
incorrect results are obtained, refer to the trou-
Ensure that the open top cover (containing bleshooting procedures.
the antenna) is facing the aircraft antenna.
2.6 TROUBLESHOOTING
d. Set the 476X-3 CODE selector switches to any
code other than emergency codes (7500, 7600, 2.6.1 General
or 7700). This section presents information for isolating a
e. Set the 613L-3 code selector switches to the trouble to the suspected unit. In this section, it is
same code as that on the 476X-3. assumed that the TDR-90 Transponder is mounted
f. Set the 613L-3 ALT/OFF switch to the OFF po- in the aircraft and the 27.5-volt dc power source
sition and the SYS 1/2 switch to 1 (dual instal- fuses or circuit breakers have been checked and are
lations). good.
g. Set the 613L-3 function selector switch to STBY
and permit the equipment to warm up for 5 The Pro Line II (preferred) system is composed of the
minutes. TDR-90 Transponder, CTL-92 Control, CAD-62 Con-
h. Set the 476X-3 MODE selector to mode A. The trol Adapter, ANT-42 Antenna, UMT-11 Mount,
476X-3 MODE A flag will appear. power source, and the interconnecting wiring. The
i. Set the 613L-3 function selector switch to ON. Pro Line I (nonpreferred) system is composed of the
The 476X-3 CODE flag should appear. TDR-90 Transponder, 613L-3 Control Unit, 237Z-1
Note Antenna (alternate), 390R-18 Mount, power source,
and the interconnecting wiring.
If aircraft does not have a source of digit-
ized altitude information, skip steps j When the trouble has been localized to a defective
through l and proceed to step m. unit, it should be replaced by a unit known to be oper-
ating properly. The procedures should be performed in
j. Set the 613L-3 ALT/OFF switch to ALT and the sequence to facilitate rapid location of the defective
476X-3 CODE selector to the code correspond- unit. Figure 2-23 provides the input/output circuits of
ing to field elevation. (Use the calculator sup- the TDR-90. This diagram may aid in installation and
plied with the 476X-3 to convert from altitude troubleshooting of the TDR-90.
to code.)
k. Set the 476X-3 MODE selector to mode C. The 2.6.2 Test Equipment Required
476X-3 MODE C and CODE flags should ap-
pear. The test equipment required for troubleshooting the
l. Set the 613L-3 ALT/OFF switch to the OFF po- TDR-90 system is listed in Table 2-8. This is only a
sition. The 476X-3 CODE flag should disappear. guide and equivalent equipment may be substituted.
m. Set the 476X-3 MODE selector to mode A and
the CODE selector to the complement of the 2.6.3 Pro Line II Troubleshooting Procedures
test code on the 476X-3. Using the ATC-600A
Note a. Secure the remote test antenna on the tripod

and adjust the tripod so the remote test an-
To find the complement of the test code, tenna height is the same as that of the
subtract the test code from 7777. transponder antenna on the aircraft. Position
the remote test antenna horizontally from the
n. The 476X-3 CODE flag should appear. aircraft antenna equal to the distance marked

installation TDR-90
(approximately 53.34 cm (21 in)). If the aircraft g. Set the CTL-92 code select knobs to display any
contains dual TDR-90's, ensure that the remote code other than emergency codes (7500, 7600,
test antenna is positioned relative to the an- or 7700). The ATC-600A numerical display
tenna for the system being checked. The bear- should indicate the same code. If desired, sev-
ing from the aircraft antenna is not critical. eral codes may be checked.
h. Depress and release the CTL-92 IDENT button.
Caution The CTL-92 should display the letters “id” in the
lower display window for approximately 15 sec-
Do not position the remote test antenna onds and the ATC-600A IDENT lamp should il-
closer than 30.48 cm (12 in) to the aircraft luminate for approximately 25 seconds.
antenna or the ATC-600A can be damaged.
Note
b. Route the loose end of the remote test antenna
coax cable into the aircraft (via door, window, If the aircraft does not have a source of
etc) and connect to the ANTENNA connector on digitized altitude information, skip steps i
the ATC-600A. through k and proceed to step l.
c. Set the CTL-92 power and mode switch to ON
and the 1/2 switch (dual installations) to the i. Set the aircraft barometric altimeter to indicate
position corresponding to the system being 29.92 inHg.
checked. j. Set the CTL-92 power and mode switch to ALT.
k. Set the ATC-600A mode switch to A/C ALT. The
Note ATC-600A numerical display should indicate the
barometric altitude in thousands of feet (eg, 000.2
The TDR-90 has a built-in 60-second delay equals 200 feet). Also, the number displayed by
from the time primary power is applied un- the ATC-600A numerical display should be the
til the unit is ready to transmit. same number as displayed by the numerical read-
out of the barometric altimeter.
d. If 102- to 120-V ac, 50- to 400-Hz power is l. If the correct results are obtained in steps g
available, connect ATC-600A power cord to through k, the system is operating properly. If
power source. The ATC-600A contains an in- incorrect results are obtained, replace the units,
ternal battery for test set operation when ac one at a time, with units known to be opera-
power is not available. tional. Replace the units in the following se-
e. Depress the ATC-600A PWR switch to AC if ac quence: TDR-90 Transponder, CAD-62 Control
power is available or to BAT if battery opera- Adapter, CTL-92 Control. Repeat the entire test
tion is desired. The ON lamp should illuminate, and/or troubleshooting procedures after each
indicating that the test set is ready for opera- unit is replaced until the system operates prop-
tion. No warmup period is required. erly.
f. Set ATC-600A controls to the following positions:
INTERR control 0 2.6.4 Pro Line I Troubleshooting Procedures
FRAMING control 0 Using the ATC-600A
XPDR SIG control Fully ccw
Mode switch A/C CODE a. Secure the remote test antenna on the tripod
and adjust the tripod so the remote test an-
Note tenna height is the same as that of the
transponder antenna on the aircraft. Position
Although the ATC-600A contains a 2-hr the remote test antenna horizontally from the
NiCad battery, it also contains a timer that aircraft antenna equal to the distance marked
shuts off battery power after 7 to 10 min- on the remote test antenna coax cable
utes. If the ON lamp extinguishes during (approximately 53.34 cm (21 in)). If the aircraft
the test procedures, reset the timer circuit contains dual TDR-90's, ensure that the remote
by again depressing the PWR switch once to test antenna is positioned relative to the an-
the BAT position. tenna for the system being checked. The bear-
ing from the aircraft antenna is not critical.

installation TDR-90
Caution Note
Do not position the remote test antenna If the aircraft does not have a source of
closer than 30.48 cm (12 in) to the aircraft digitized altitude information, skip steps h
antenna or the ATC-600A can be damaged. through j and proceed to step k.
b. Route the loose end of the remote test antenna h. Set the aircraft barometric altimeter to indicate
coax cable into the aircraft (via door, window, 29.92 inHg.
etc) and connect to the ANTENNA connector on i. Set the 613L-3 ALT/OFF switch to ALT.
the ATC-600A. j. Set the ATC-600A mode switch to A/C ALT. The
c. Set the 613L-3 function selector switch to ON and ATC-600A numerical display should indicate the
the SYS 1/2 switch (dual installations) to the posi- barometric altitude in thousands of feet (eg, 000.2
tion corresponding to the system being checked. equals 200 feet). Also, the number displayed by
the ATC-600A numerical display should be the
Note same number as displayed by the numerical read-
out of the barometric altimeter.
The TDR-90 has a built-in 60-second delay k. Depress and release the 613L-3 IDENT switch.
from the time primary power is applied un- The ATC-600A IDENT lamp should illuminate
til the unit is ready to transmit. for approximately 25 seconds.
l. If the correct results are obtained in steps g
d. If 102- to 120-V ac, 50- to 400-Hz power is through k, the system is operating properly. If
available, connect ATC-600A power cord to incorrect results are obtained, replace the units,
power source. The ATC-600A contains an in- one at a time, with units known to be opera-
ternal battery for test set operation when ac tional. Replace the units in the following se-
power is not available. quence: TDR-90 Transponder, 613L-3 Control
e. Depress the ATC-600A PWR switch to AC if ac Unit. Repeat the entire test and/or trouble-
power is available or to BAT if battery opera- shooting procedures after each unit is replaced
tion is desired. The ON lamp should illuminate, until the system operates properly.
indicating that the test set is ready for opera-
tion. No warmup period is required. 2.6.5 Pro Line I Troubleshooting Procedures
f. Set ATC-600A controls to the following positions: Using the 476X-3
INTERR control 0 a. Perform the preoperational check as described

FRAMING control 0 in paragraph 3.3.1 of the 476X-3 instruction
XPDR SIG control Fully ccw book (CPN 523-0758370).
Mode switch A/C CODE b. Disconnect 476X-3 T/R DIRECT connector P504
from rf connector J503. Connect antenna con-
Note nector P503 to rf connector J503.
c. Locate the 476X-3 in relation to the aircraft and
Although the ATC-600A contains a 2-hr set the T/R ATTEN control as determined in
NiCad battery, it also contains a timer that paragraph 3.2.3 of the 476X-3 instruction book.
shuts off battery power after 7 to 10 min-
Note
utes. If the ON lamp extinguishes during
the test procedures, reset the timer circuit Ensure that the open top cover (containing
by again depressing the PWR switch once to the antenna) is facing the aircraft antenna.
the BAT position.
d. Set the 476X-3 CODE selector switches to any
g. Set the 613L-3 code selector switches to display code other than emergency codes (7500, 7600,
any code other than emergency codes (7500, or 7700).
7600, or 7700). The ATC-600A numerical dis- e. Set the 613L-3 code selector switches to the
play should indicate the same code. If desired, same code as that on the 476X-3.
several codes may be checked.

installation TDR-90
f. Set the 613L-3 ALT/OFF switch to the OFF po- n. If the correct results are obtained in steps i
sition and the SYS 1/2 switch to the position through m, the TDR-90 system is operating
corresponding to the system being checked. properly.
g. Set the 613L-3 function selector switch to STBY o. If incorrect results are obtained in steps i
position and permit the equipment to warm up through m, momentarily depress the 613L-3
for 5 minutes. MON/TEST switch to the TEST position. If the
h. Set the 476X-3 MODE selector to mode A. The 613L-3 RPLY lamp lights, the TDR-90 and
476X-3 MODE A flag will appear. 613L-3 are operating properly and any mal-
i. Set the 613L-3 function selector switch to the function is in the altitude digitizer or antenna
ON position. The 476X-3 CODE flag should ap- system.
pear each time the MODE A flag appears. p. If correct results were obtained in steps i and j,
j. When the MODE A flag is in view, momentarily but not k, the altitude digitizer is most probably
depress the 613L-3 IDENT switch. The 476X-3 faulty. If all results were incorrect, the antenna
IDENT and CODE flags should appear in a is probably faulty.
blinking condition for approximately 15 to 30 q. Replace the malfunctioning unit with one
seconds or for the length of time that the known to be operational and repeat steps i
MODE A flag is visible. through m.
k. If the TDR-90 system includes an altitude dig-
itizer, set the 613L-3 ALT/OFF switch to the
ALT position, the 476X-3 MODE selector to Note
mode C, and the CODE selector to the code cor-
responding to field elevation. (Use the calcula- If shock isolators are used with the UMT-11
tor supplied with the 476X-3 for converting alti- or 390R-18 Mount, perform the following
tude to code.) The 476X-3 CODE flag should steps.
appear when the MODE C flag is visible. 2.6.6 Mount
Note a. Visually check the mount in the normal loaded
position. Notice particularly any sagging of the
Be certain that the digitizer code (field ele- shock isolators.
vation) and the 476X-3 code are the same. A b. Depress the corners of the mount in turn, until
malfunction will be indicated if the codes they are at the bottom of their movement. The
are different. isolators should permit a maximum travel of
5.33 mm (0.213 in).
l. Set the 613L-3 ALT/OFF switch to the OFF po- c. Lift the corners of the mount in turn, until the
sition. The 476X-3 CODE flag should disappear. isolators are at the top of their movement. The
m. Set the 613L-3 code selector switches to the isolators should permit a maximum travel of
complement of the test code used in step d and 5.33 mm (0.213 in).
the 476X-3 CODE selector switches to the test d. If the shock isolators permit mount motion in
code. The 476X-3 CODE flag should appear excess of that given in steps b/c, replace the
when the MODE A flag appears. shock isolators.

installation TDR-90
Figure 2-18. TDR-90 Transponder, Outline and Mounting

Dimensions

installation TDR-90
Figure 2-19. 613L-3 Control Unit, Outline and

Mounting Dimensions

installation TDR-90
Figure 2-20. ANT-42 L-Band Antenna, Outline and

Mounting Dimensions

installation TDR-90
Figure 2-21. 237Z-1 Antenna, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

installation TDR-90
Figure 2-22 (Sheet 1 of 2). CTL-90 Control Unit, Outline and

Mounting Dimensions

installation TDR-90
Figure 2-22 (Sheet 2). CTL-90 Control Unit, Outline and

Mounting Dimensions

installation TDR-90
Figure 2-23. TDR-90 Input/Output Circuit Diagram

þ 523-0775654-008118

Collins
TDR-94/94D (-002/-003)
Mode S
Transponder System
Installation
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page
2.1 GENERAL.................................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1 Transponder System Description...................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1.1 Control Selection..........................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1.2 Antenna Diversity Configurations..............................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1.3 Altitude Strapping .......................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1.4 Mode S (Select) ............................................................................................................................................................2-3
2.1.1.5 Data Link Operation ...................................................................................................................................................2-6
2.1.1.6 Transponder Installation, General Description .........................................................................................................2-6
2.2.1 Test Equipment Required ..............................................................................................................................................2-6
2.3 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION .............................................................................................2-6
2.4.1 General............................................................................................................................................................................2-7
2.4.2 TDR-94/94D Transponder, Special Antenna Cabling Instructions..............................................................................2-7
2.4.3 Transponder Cable Selection .........................................................................................................................................2-7
2.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION..............................................................................................................................2-8
2.5.1 ANT-42 or 237Z-1 L-Band Antenna Installation ..........................................................................................................2-8
2.5.2 TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder Interconnect Cable Assembly ...............................................................................2-9
2.5.3 TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder Installation ............................................................................................................2-9
2.5.4 CTL-92/92A Control Installation ...................................................................................................................................2-9
2.6 DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY ....................................................................................................................................... 2-13
NOTICE: This section replaces seventh edition dated 15 September 1995.

Page No Issue
* Title ...........................................11 Apr 97

* 2-1 thru 2-13 .............................11 Apr 97
* 2-14 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-15............................................11 Apr 97
* 2-16 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-17 thru 2-33 ...........................11 Apr 97
* 2-34 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-35 thru 2-37 ...........................11 Apr 97
* 2-38 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-39 thru 2-50 ...........................11 Apr 97


1st Ed 4 Apr 89 None
1 29 Sep 92 None

section II
installation
2.1 GENERAL 2.1.1.2 Antenna Diversity Configurations

The TDR-94D is intended for use with TCAS II in-
This section contains information necessary for
stallations which require antenna diversity capabil-
proper installation of the TDR-94 and TDR-94D
ity. The antenna diversity configuration uses a dual
Transponder, the ANT-42 and 237Z-1 DME/Tran
antenna configuration, one on top and the other on
sponder Antenna, and the CTL-92/92A Control. The
bottom of the fuselage. This is needed to avoid the
title page at the beginning of this section provides
possible shadowing or blocking of direct single an-
an index of the section contents.
tenna line-of-sight contact with other aircraft or the
ground beacon radar. This can easily happen when
Figure 2-1 is a diagram of a single TDR-94D in-
the aircraft is in a coordinated turn maneuver. Fur-
stallation with a single CTL-92/92A Control. A dia-
ther, antenna diversity also includes a dual receiver
gram using an ARINC 429 control unit would ap-
and transmitter function and the ability to select the
pear similar to that unit replacing the CTL-92/92A.
side that is providing the best result for any given
However, in this case, the altitude encoder must be
condition. Antenna diversity is required for all TCAS
connected directly to the TDR-94D. There is no
II installations .
provision for altitude encoder input to an ARINC
429 control unit. In dual TDR-94D Transponder installations it may
be necessary to use special antenna switching re-
lays if space for four antennas is not available. This
Note may also be true in dual TDR-94 Transponder in-
stallations.
This manual uses the convention of identi-
fying ground straps as logic 0 and open 2.1.1.3 Altitude Strapping
straps as logic 1. This is reflected in various 2.1.1.3.1 Control/Altitude Select (J1-14) and
strapping tables. You should be aware that Altitude Type Select (J2-41, 42)
this may be seen as opposite from the con-
vention used by various ARINC documents The processor monitors these discrete inputs during
where the presence of a strap is identified the altitude input processing cycle, at least once each
by a ‘1’ and the absence of a strap is identi- second. The processor then selects the desired alti-
fied by a ‘0’. tude for reporting according to the following:
2.1.1 Transponder System Description ALTITUDE

J1-14 J2-41 J2-42 TYPE SELECTED
Table 1-1, in the general information section of this
Open *Gnd *Gnd ARINC 429 format data in on
manual, is a listing of equipment associated with
ARINC-429 altitude Port A and
the TDR-94 and TDR-94D ATC Transponder.
Port B
Open Open *Gnd CSDB altitude in on CSDB alti-
2.1.1.1 Control Selection tude Port A and Port B
Open *Gnd Open ARINC 575 format data in on
The TDR-94/94D ATC Transponder is controlled by ARINC-429 altitude Port A and
the CTL-92/92A Control or by a compatible ARINC Port B
429 control. The CTL-92/92A is available as single Open Open Open ARINC 572 Gillham in on the sin-
or dual transponder control models and operates gle parallel port
using the CSDB data format. *Connect Gnd to J2-52.

installation TDR-94/94D
ALTITUDE Example 1: Port A is selected as primary port but

J1-14 J2-41 J2-42 TYPE SELECTED data is unavailable or invalid.
*Gnd *Gnd *Gnd Use Port A altitude from the se-
lected control bus (can be either Port B has valid data.
ARINC 429 or CSDB control).
Use Port B altitude from The TDR-94/94D uses Port B for alti-
ARINC 429 Port B. tude reporting and reports on the bus
*GND Open *Gnd Use Port A altitude from the se- that Port B is the source of altitude
lected control bus (can be either data.
ARINC 429 or CSDB control).
Use Port B altitude from CSDB
Example 2: Port B is selected as primary port but
Port B.
*Gnd *Gnd Open Use Port A altitude from the se-
data is unavailable or invalid.
lected control bus (can be either
ARINC 429 or CSDB control). Port A has valid data.
Use Port B altitude from ARINC
575 Port B. The TDR-94/94D uses Port A for alti-
*Gnd Open Open Use Port A altitude from the se- tude reporting and reports on the bus
lected control bus (can be either that Port A is the source of altitude
ARINC 429 or CSDB control). data.
Use Port B altitude from single
ARINC 572 Gillham parallel in-
put port.
Example 3: Port A is selected as primary port but
data is unavailable or invalid.
*Connect Gnd to J2-52.
Port B has unavailable or invalid data.
2.1.1.3.2 Altitude Port Select, A/B (J2-48) The TDR-94/94D processes Port A alti-
tude data as required and reports on
This discrete input determines if Port A or Port B the bus that Port A is the source of al-
will be used for altitude reporting. When J2-48 is titude data and is currently invalid.
grounded, Port B becomes the primary port. If J2-
48 is left open, Port A is the primary port. 2.1.1.3.4 CSDB/ARINC 429 Control Select
(J2-56)
2.1.1.3.3 Auto Altitude Select Enable (J1-28)
If CSDB/ ARINC 429 Control Select discrete input
is left open, then ARINC-429 control inputs are
Note
processed. Conversely, when this pin is connected
This function is not applicable to Gillham to ground (0.0 to +3.5 V dc, relative to aircraft
altitude sources. ground), then the CSDB Control is selected.
The auto altitude select is active (enabled) when 2.1.1.3.5 ARINC Control Port Select S0, S1
J1-28 is low (grounded). When enabled, the TDR- (J2-57, 58)
94/94D automatically selects the secondary port if
the primary port becomes unavailable or invalid. If J2-57 J2-58 DEFINITION
the primary port becomes valid again, it switches
back to that port. The selection (strapping) for pri- *Gnd Open Port A selected (J2-17, 18)
mary and secondary altitude ports remains the Open Open Port B selected (J2-13, 14)
same with or without auto altitude select enabled. Open *Gnd Port C selected (J2-21, 22)
After determining altitude port selection, the TDR- *Gnd *Gnd (not defined)
94/94D reports on the bus the source used for alti-
tude reporting. Following are examples when auto *Connect Gnd to J2-52
altitude select is enabled.

2.1.1.3.6 Burst Tune Enable (J2-59) mode S code is accompanying registration of the
aircraft “N” number.
Burst mode is enabled when Burst Tune Enable
discrete input is connected to ground (0.0 to +3.5 V A special and unpublished conversion is used to as-
dc, relative to aircraft ground). In this mode, the sign the aircraft identification code. The FAA sup-
strapping of Control Port Selects are ignored. In plies the octal number and the installer must then
burst mode, burst data is accepted on Ports A, B, translate it into the required strapping configura-
and C as ARINC-429 words spaced over an interval tion.
of 1.5 seconds (500 milliseconds dwell time per
port). If any port has continuous data, it will dwell Special
NoteNote
on that port as long as data is present. When data
ceases, the 500-millisecond sequencing of the ports If the aircraft identification (tail or “N”)
will restart. number is changed for any reason, a new
2.1.1.4 Mode S (Select) mode S address must be assigned by the
regulatory agency and the aircraft strap-
A unique aircraft identification code must be as- ping must be changed accordingly. Be
signed at installation for mode S operation. This sure to check with your regulatory agency
involves a special strapping configuration on the for proper aircraft mode S identification. Re-
rear connector of the TDR-94/94D. Regulatory fer to the following paragraphs and table to
agencies in each country establish their own proce- determine the proper strapping.
dures for assignment of the aircraft’s code. If
needed, contact Mr. Edward Godberson at ICAO Use the following table to determine the proper
headquarters in Montreal, Canada for assistance in strapping.
finding the appropriate agency for each country. To use this table, enter your assigned 8-digit octal
His telephone number is 514-954-8189, the fax code in the spaces at the top of the columns, one
number is 514-954-6759. digit in each space, in the order given. Then read
For USA registered aircraft, the assignment of the down each column to the row corresponding with
code is coordinated by the Aircraft Registration the value entered at the top. The pins listed at that
Branch, FAA Aeronautical Center, Oklahoma City, point is the strapping required.
Oklahoma, USA, telephone number 405-954-3116.
At the time of this publication, assignment of the
Write In Your Assigned 8-Digit Octal Code Here
Octal Digit
0 None None None None None None None None
1 P1-35 P1-38 P1-41 P1-44 P1-47 P1-50 P1-53 P1-56
2 P1-34 P1-37 P1-40 P1-43 P1-46 P1-49 P1-52 P1-55
3 P1-34 P1-37 P1-40 P1-43 P1-46 P1-49 P1-52 P1-55

P1-35 P1-38 P1-41 P1-44 P1-47 P1-50 P1-53 P1-56
4 P1-33 P1-36 P1-39 P1-42 P1-45 P1-48 P1-51 P1-54
5 P1-33 P1-36 P1-39 P1-42 P1-45 P1-48 P1-51 P1-54

P1-35 P1-38 P1-41 P1-44 P1-47 P1-50 P1-53 P1-56
6 P1-33 P1-36 P1-39 P1-42 P1-45 P1-48 P1-51 P1-54

P1-34 P1-37 P1-40 P1-43 P1-46 P1-49 P1-52 P1-55
7 P1-33 P1-36 P1-39 P1-42 P1-45 P1-48 P1-51 P1-54

P1-34 P1-37 P1-40 P1-43 P1-46 P1-49 P1-52 P1-55
P1-35 P1-38 P1-41 P1-44 P1-47 P1-50 P1-53 P1-56

For example: suppose an octal code 64072153.
Write In Your Assigned 8-Digit Octal Code Here
Octal Digit 6 4 0 7 2 1 5 3
0 None None None None None None None None
1 P1-35 P1-38 P1-41 P1-44 P1-47 P1-50 P1-53 P1-56
2 P1-34 P1-37 P1-40 P1-43 P1-46 P1-49 P1-52 P1-55
3 P1-34 P1-37 P1-40 P1-43 P1-46 P1-49 P1-52 P1-55

P1-35 P1-38 P1-41 P1-44 P1-47 P1-50 P1-53 P1-56
4 P1-33 P1-36 P1-39 P1-42 P1-45 P1-48 P1-51 P1-54
5 P1-33 P1-36 P1-39 P1-42 P1-45 P1-48 P1-51 P1-54

P135 P1-38 P1-41 P1-44 P1-47 P1-50 P1-53 P1-56
6 P1-33 P1-36 P1-39 P1-42 P1-45 P1-48 P1-51 P1-54

P1-34 P1-37 P1-40 P1-43 P1-46 P1-49 P1-52 P1-55
7 P1-33 P1-36 P1-39 P1-42 P1-45 P1-48 P1-51 P1-54

P1-34 P1-37 P1-40 P1-43 P1-46 P1-49 P1-52 P1-55
P1-35 P1-38 P1-41 P1-44 P1-47 P1-50 P1-53 P1-56
To properly enter the code example into the table P1-34 must be strapped for the first digit, which is
above, enter the first number (6) in the first col- a 6. Reading down the second column, the table
umn, the second number (4) in the second, (0) in shows that pin P1-36 must be strapped for the sec-
the third, etc, as shown in the above example. Then ond digit, which is a 4. Continuing this process for
read down each column to the row that corresponds all eight digits produces the following strapping
to the value of the number entered at the head of configuration:
the column. The table shows that pins P1-33 and
6 4 0 7 2 1 5 3
P1-33 P1-36 (None) P1-42 P1-46 P1-50 P1-51 P1-55

P1-34 P1-43 P1-53 P1-56
P1-44
All other pins must be left open for this code. sary to adjust the tab values for proper screen or
printer display results.
For added convenience, a relatively short BASIC
program listing is included in Figure 2-16. This
Mode S operation also requires the use of special
program can be typed into your computer equipped
weight-on-wheels strut switching and maximum
with a BASIC interpreter. It produces a strapping
airspeed strapping. The interconnect wiring dia-
configuration listing for any 8-digit octal code with
gram, Figure 2-6, provides information for these
TDR-94/94D or ARINC 718 pin identification. De-
requirements.
pending on the type of computer, it may be neces-
Revised 11 April 1997 4

Figure 2-1. TDR-94D Mode S Transponder, Installation Diagram

2.1.1.5 Data Link Operation Component Maintenance Manual for a list of test
equipment required.
For data link operation, special interconnection is
required between the TDR-94/94D and a data link 2.3 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR
processor. INSTALLATION
2.1.1.6 Transponder Installation, General Proper and careful planning of any installation is
Description essential for reliable performance and easy main-
tenance. Figure 2-1 is an overview of a typical sin-
A transponder installation will consist of either one gle transponder installation. The following listing is
or two transponders, a single or dual control with a sample of the points to be considered in planning
either CSDB or ARINC 429 data format, and a sin- an installation.
gle or dual antenna. For mode C and TCAS opera-
tion, some type of altitude source is needed. The a. Single or dual transponder installation:
TDR-94/94D can accept altitude information in one
l TCAS installations require use of the TDR-94D
of the following formats:
with antenna diversity
CSDB l Be sure to provide for adequate airflow for cooling
ARINC 429 l In a dual installations, the unit can be mounted
ARINC 575 side by side or one on top of the other (piggyback)
ARINC 572 (Gillham code) l In dual antenna installations, the requirements
for matched antenna cables can influence the
A message processor is required for data link op-
location of the units
eration. This system allows air-to-ground and
l Be sure the mount is electrically bonded to the
ground-to-air data link communication, providing
aircraft.
the crew with a variety of flight advisory and ATC
l The location should provide good accessibility
services.
for maintenance
The TDR-94D meets the TCAS II requirements for b. Code selection units:
larger regional airliners and corporate aircraft by
l Single or dual
providing the antenna diversity required in these
l The type of control to be used — CSDB or
installations. The non-diverse TDR-94 typically is
ARINC 429
used in smaller corporate aircraft and regional air-
l The location of the code selector — pedestal or
liners seating fewer than 30 passengers. TCAS in-
instrument panel mounting.
stallations also require the use of a TCAS proces-
sor, TCAS receiver-transmitter, TCAS directional c. Antenna:
antenna, and TCAS display unit.
l Single or dual: The TDR-94 uses only one an-
tenna; the TDR-94D uses either one or two an-
tennas. Special strapping is required for single
Before the equipment is installed in the aircraft, in- antenna operation. In single antenna installa-
terconnect the transponder system and perform the tions the antenna is mounted on the bottom of
Final Performance/Customer Acceptance Test the fuselage. In dual antenna installations, one
which can be found in the TDR-94/94D Mode S is mounted on the bottom and the other on top.
Transponder Component Maintenance Manual, l Locations: Antenna locations should be chosen
Testing and Fault Isolation paragraph. Properly so that they are reasonably clear of interference
performed, this test provides reasonable assurance sources and other antennas, and away from
that the equipment is operational and any difficul- places where the antenna can be physically
ties discovered after installation can be traced more damaged or contaminated (as with hydraulic
easily to wiring or installation errors. fluid or petroleum spillage).
l Antenna cables in dual installations: Keep in
2.2.1 Test Equipment Required mind the special considerations associated with
antenna cable matching in dual antenna in-
Refer to the Special Tools, Fixtures, and Equipment
stallations; all antenna cables must provide be-
paragraph of the TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder
tween 1 to 3 dB of loss. In dual antenna instal-

ADDENDUM 27
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

TDR-94/94D installation section (523-0775654-008118) in Part B of this manual.
The following paragraph replaces paragraphs 2.2 and 2.2.1.
Before the TDR-94/94D is installed in the aircraft, be

sure a tested okay tag is attached.
Addendum 27
523-0772719-0T711A (Facing Page 2-6)
ADDENDUM 7
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet replaces the text in paragraph 2.2 on page 2-6.
Before installation in the aircraft, connect the equipment in a system mockup to verify proper operation.
Addendum 7
523-0772719-07711A (Facing Page 2-6)
lations, the two cables must be matched so that Max length = 3 / loss factor
the difference in propagation delay is less than
40 nanoseconds and the difference in signal loss Table 2-1 shows the loss factor and resulting
is not more than 1 dB. In terms of cable length, maximum lengths for a number of acceptable cable
this translates into about 15.8 feet (4.8 m) (1.26 types. This table, however, does not allow for con-
nsec/ft). (See also paragraph 2.4.2.) nector loss which may become a significant factor
when the required cable length approaches the
2.4 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS maximum length allowed. For example, suppose
you need a minimum cable length of 20 feet. The
Note table suggests you could use RG-142/U. However,
20 feet of RG-142/U cable will give 2.6 dB of cable
On new aircraft installations, it is recom- loss, leaving only 0.4 dB for the two connectors.
mended that RG-393 coax cable be used in- This may be marginal. In this case you should use a
stead of RG-214. RG-214 is not recom- lower loss cable for added connector loss (and cable
mended because its jacket is made of PVC deterioration) margin.
and does not meet FAR 23.1365 and FAR
25.831. Refer to Collins ALL AVIONICS Furthermore, in diversity installations, the two ca-
SIL 2-92 for additional information. bles must have a maximum signal loss differential
of 1 dB. This means that the shorter cable must be
2.4.1 General
at least 2/3 the length of the longer cable. The
Refer to Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6 for the intercon- minimum length for the shorter cable, based on the
nect wiring diagrams. The TDR-94/94D uses a maximum length for the longer cable, is also shown
Thinline II mating connector. Refer to the General in Table 2-1.
System and Mount Information section, (Pro Line
II installation manual, part A), for Thinline II con- Cable selection procedure: Determine the minimum
nector and contact information. For information on length of cable run required, or the minimum
wiring, bonding, and other general installation length of the longest cable run required in a diver-
practices refer to the Installation Practices Manual sity installation. Based on that required length, re-
(CPN 523-0775254). fer to the MAXIMUM LENGTH column in Table 2-
1 and select any one of the cable types that show a
2.4.2 TDR-94/94D Transponder, Special maximum length greater than the length you need.
Antenna Cabling Instructions In a diversity installation, the minimum length of
the shorter cable must be at least 2/3 the length of
The preferred antenna cable type is RG-393/U. the longer cable. Any excess must be coiled and se-
However, cable loss considerations may dictate the cured to prevent chafing and excessive flexing or
use of an alternate. Paragraph 2.4.3 provides de- vibration.
tails on the different types of cables that can be
used. Table 2-1 shows the loss factors for each cable
type and the resulting maximum lengths. Table 2-2 Note
shows the mating connectors. In planning a TDR-
94/94D transponder antenna cable installation, the In diversity installations only: If a type of
following restrictions apply: antenna cable not shown above is being
considered, contact your Collins General
a. Individual cable loss, including connectors,
Aviation Field Representative for guidance.
must not exceed 3 dB.
In addition to the loss/length considera-
b. Cable-to-cable match in a diversity installation:
tions, the two cables must be matched so
1. Signal delay difference must be less than 40
that the cable delay differential is less than
nanoseconds.
40 nanoseconds. The cables listed above are
2. Signal loss difference must not exceed 1 dB.
all well within this limitation. However, if
2.4.3 Transponder Cable Selection you are considering a cable, with signifi-
cantly less loss than those shown for an in-
The maximum antenna cable length is limited by stallation with a substantially longer cable
the maximum allowable cable loss which is 3 dB. run, delay differential may become a sig-
The maximum cable length is determined by: nificant factor.

Table 2-1. TDR-94/94D Antenna Cable Selection.
*MAXIMUM LENGTH **MINIMUM LENGTH

CABLE TYPE LOSS FACTOR OF LONGEST CABLE OF SHORTER CABLE
dB/ft ***dB/m ft m ft m
RG-142/U 0.13 0.43 23.1 7.0 15.4 4.7
RG-393/U 0.05 0.164 60 18.3 40.0 12.2
ECS 311201 0.0589 0.19 51 15.8 34 10.4
IW 3051 0.045 0.15 66.7 20 44.5 13.6
PIC S22089 0.038 0.12 79 25 52.7 16.1
*Maximum length shown here is more a theoretical length because it neglects connector and other cable losses. It is deter-
mined by: 3/LF. Installers should reduce the maximum length to accommodate the total of cable loss, connector loss and ca-
ble deterioration within the 3 dB limit.
**Applies to diversity installations only and is at least 2/3 the length of the longer cable.
l ECS cable is available from Electronic Cable Specialists, 2065 Smithtown, Milwaukee WI 53220-0856
l IW cable is available from Insulated Wire Inc., P.O. Box 37, Ronkonokoma, NY 11779
l PIC cable is available from Pic Wire & Cable Supply, Inc., N63 W22619, Main St, Sussex, WI 53809-0030.
***From Reference Data for Radio Engineers, by H.P. Westman, copywrite 1968.
Conversion factor applied: 3.281 ft/m or 0.3048 m/ft.
2.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

Caution
Warning It is important that adequate isolation be
provided between the transponder and the
In the interest of personal safety, it is rec-
DME antenna. The transponder reply fre-
ommended that the aircraft battery master
quency is 1090 MHz and the interrogation
switch be turned off to disconnect power be-
frequency is 1030 MHz. The DME ground-
fore installing or removing equipment from
to-air frequency for DME channel 69Y, and
the aircraft.
the air-to-ground frequency for DME chan-
nel 6X and 6Y, is also 1030 MHz, the
2.5.1 ANT-42 or 237Z-1 L-Band Antenna
transponder receive frequency. A similar
Installation
situation exists on the transmit frequency.
Refer to Figure 2-13 for the outline and mounting Minimum isolation of 40 dB between L-
dimensions for the ANT-42 Antenna. Refer to band systems is suggested, including an-
Figure 2-14 for the outline and mounting dimen- tenna isolation and cable loss. A separation
sions for the 237Z-1 antenna. The ANT-42 is a ca- of 4 feet between L-band antennas, on a
pacitive coupled antenna while the 237Z-1 is induc- common ground plane, provides about 32
tively coupled. Either antenna can be used with the dB of isolation. The isolation increases 6 dB
TDR-94/94D. However, only the 237Z-1 antenna for each doubling of separation in distance;
can be used as the optional lower TCAS omnidirec- that is 38 dB for 8 feet, 44 dB for 16 feet,
tional antenna. The Collins TTR-920 TCAS trans- etc.
mitter/receiver requires an antenna with a low dc
resistance (less than 80 Ω). The ANT-42 has a very
high dc resistance. L-band antenna compatibility is
summarized in Table 2-2.

ADDENDUM 7
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet corrects an invalid figure reference in paragraph 2.5.4 on page 2-9. Replace first paragraph
in 2.5.4 with text below.
2.5.4 CTL-92/92A Control Installation
Refer to Table 2-2 and Table 2-3 for mating connectors and special tool information. Figure 2-4 shows the mating
connector pin orientation and pin functions for the CTL-92/92A Control. Figure 2-12 shows the outline and
mounting dimensions.
Addendum 7
523-0772719-07711A (Facing Page 2-9)
The antenna cable connections are on the rear of 2.5.3 TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder
the TDR-94/94D. Table 2-3 shows the various mat- Installation
ing connectors needed to interconnect the TDR-
94/94D with the antennas. Directions for cable con- The TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder is normally
nector assembly are provided in the General Sys- mounted on the MMT-150 Modular Mounting Tray.
tem and Mount Information section, (Pro Line II It must be located to allow normal convection cool-
installation manual, part A). ing. Refer to Figure 2-7 for outline and mounting-
dimensions.
The TDR-94 uses a single antenna which is usually
mounted on the bottom of the fuselage. The TDR-
Figure 2-9 and Figure 2-10 give outline and
94D uses two antennas. These are mounted one on
mounting dimensions for piggyback mounting of
top and the other on the bottom of the fuselage. In
the TDR-94/94D on the MMT-150 mounting tray.
dual transponder installations, it is highly recom-
Figure 2-11 gives outline and mounting dimensions
mended that dedicated antennas be provided for
for piggyback mounting of the MMT-150 mounting
each transponder. However, if the availability of
tray with UMT( ) mounts.
antenna mounting surface prohibits this, you can
use the relay switching scheme shown in Figure 2-
a. Position the TDR-94/94D in front of the mount.
2.
b. Carefully slide the unit back on the mount until
The horizontal spacing between the top and bottom the rear main connectors and rf connectors en-
antennas, in a diversity installation, must be less gage with the mating connectors.
than 7.6 m (25 ft). Both antennas should be c. When you are sure the unit is properly seated,
mounted as near the fuselage center line as possi- tighten the two holddown fasteners on the front
ble. of the mount. Be sure they are fully seated in
the lockdown pawls.
2.5.2 TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder
Interconnect Cable Assembly 2.5.4 CTL-92/92A Control Installation
The interconnect wiring diagram for the TDR- Refer to Table 2-2 and Table 2-3 for mating connec-
94/94D Transponder with the CTL-92/92A Control tors and special tool information. Figure 2-4 shows
and all of the interfacing systems or other equip- the mating connector pin orientation and pin func-
ment is given in Figure 2-5. Figure 2-6 provides tions for the CTL-92/92A Control. Error! Refer-
similar interconnect data for an ARINC 429 control ence source not found. shows the outline and
unit. Figure 2-3 shows the rear connector pin orien- mounting dimensions.
tation and lists the pin functions. Be especially
alert to the strapping options associated with the a. Pull the mating connector assembly through
various control options and data sources. Study the the panel cutout hole and mate it to the CTL-
diagrams carefully. Figure 2-7 through Figure 2-11 92/92A.
give the outline and mounting dimensions for TDR- b. Use a 3/32-Allen wrench and ensure that all
94/94D transponder and MMT-150 mounting tray three integral turnlock fasteners actuating
installation. All interconnect wires should be screws (two at the bottom and one at upper
marked in accordance with the Aircraft Electronics right) are turned fully counterclockwise until
Association Wire Marking Standard (Refer to the the stop nuts are contacted.
General System and Mount Information section, c. Insert the CTL-92/92A into the panel cutout
Pro Line II installation manual, part A). hole until flush with panel.
d. Tighten three actuating screws with the 3/32-
Figure 2-15 gives partial schematic diagram detail
Allen wrench until the CTL-92/92A is held
for the external interfacing circuits. These can be
firmly in place.
helpful in planning special installation configura-
tions.

Table 2-2. L-Band Equipment and TCAS Antenna Compatibility.
L-BAND ANTENNA DME-40-42/442 TDR-90/94 TDR-94D TTR-920
LOWER LOWER UPPER LOWER UPPER LOWER
ANT-42 Omni Yes Yes Yes Yes No
237Z-1 Omni Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
TRE-920 Directional Only Yes
Table 2-3. TDR-94/94D to Antenna Cable, Connector List.
*CABLE TYPE TDR-94/94D ANT-42 237Z-1

MATING CONNECTOR MATING CONNECTOR MATING CONNECTOR
RG-393/U TNC straight TNC straight HN straight

857-1511-010 857-1511-010 357-9039-000
or or or
TNC 90° TNC 90° HN 90°
857-1511-020 857-1511-020 357-9559-000
RG-142/U TNC straight TNC straight HN straight
357-9666-000 357-9666-000 AMP 82-534
or
HN 90°
357-9870-000
ECS 311201 TNC straight TNC straight Not
857-1502-010 857-1502-010 available
or or
TNC 90° TNC 90°
857-1502-020 857-1502-020
S22089 TNC straight TNC straight Not
#125-81-9 #125-81-9 available
or or
TNC 90° TNC 90°
#126-51-9 #126-51-9
*RG-393/U is the preferred cable. In selecting cable length, allow sufficient length so that bends will have a minimum radius of
76.2 mm (3 in). Observe the maximum lengths specified above. See paragraph 2.4 for additional antenna cable restrictions.
#Available from: King Electronics Co. Inc., 40 Marbledale Road, Tuckahoe, NY 10707-9914; tel 914-0793-5000, fax 914-793-5092

ADDENDUM 27
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

The following information will be added to Table 2-4:
Mating connector kits (CPN 628-8661-001, -002 and 628-8660-001, -002) also contain the
following:
• Screw, cap, socket head, CPN 324-2604-000 (qty 4)
• Screw, machine, 6-32 X 5/16, CPN 343-0168-000 (qty 4)
Addendum 27
523-0772719-0T711A (Facing Page 2-11)
Table 2-4. TDR-94/94D Transponder and MMT-150 Mounting Tray, Installation Kits.
INSTALLATION KIT CPN
UNIT OR
ITEM DESCRIPTION 628-8661 628-8660
001 002 001 002
TDR-94 Mating conn kit with contacts X
TDR-94D Mating conn kit with contacts X
Mating conn kit Conn plate: CPN 628-8657-002 1 1

contents (*) (**)
Conn plate: CPN 628-8657-001 1 1
Conn, 60-pin male: CPN 634-1112-001 2 2 2 2
Keyway: CPN 634-1116-001 4 4 4 4
Retainer, keyway: CPN 634-1117-001 5 5 5 5
Insert, fastener: CPN 334-2117-010 4 4 4 4
Contact: CPN 372-2514-110 25 25
Contact: CPN 372-2514-180 75 75
Coax conn, TNC 90°:****(RG-214) CPN 357-7351-010 2 1
Spring, ground (***) CPN 634-1120-001 2 2 2 2
MMT-150 Modulator mounting tray: CPN 622-9672-003 One MMT-150 required for each
TDR-94/94D.
Special Kits (**) Piggyback mount kit CPN 628-8644-008 is used to mount Mounts or special kits are not included in
one MMT-150 on top of another MMT-150. mating conn kits. Order separately as
needed.
Piggyback mount kit CPN 653-9071-001 is used to mount:
*Two UMT-10 mounts on top of an MMT-150.
*One UMT-10 and one UMT-11 on top of an
MMT-150
*Two UMT-11 mounts on top of an MMT-150 or
*One UMT-12 on top of an MMT-150
Piggyback mount kit CPN 634-1103-008 is used to mount

an MMT-150 on top of a UMT-13.
Piggyback mount kit CPN 653-9075-001 is used to mount

an UMT-13 on top of an MMT-150.
Connector cover kits:

Piggy Kit: CPN 628-8650-009
Single mount CPN-628-8647-009
(*) Kit contents are listed for information only. Contacts and coax connectors must be supplied separately for -8661- kits.
(**) Kits also contain various and necessary hardware items not listed here.
(***) Included in kits effective REV A.
(****) Refer to Table 2-3 for a listing of coax connectors for other cable types. At the date of this publication, installation kits inlude
coax connectors for RG-214 cable only.

Table 2-5. TDR-94/94D Mating Connector Contacts and Special Tools.
MATING CONNECTOR CONTACTS *ASSOCIATED SPECIAL TOOLS
DESCRIPTION COLLINS PART NUMBER CRIMPING INSERTION EXTRACTION

(for wire insulation or or
dia up to <0.060 in) 359-0697-010 359-0697-050
(for wire insulation or or
dia 0.060 - 0.080 in) 359-0697-010 359-0697-050
Manufacturer data:
COLLINS
ITEM PART NUMBER MANUFACTURER PART NUMBER
Crimping tool 623-8579-001 Military Standard
Crimping tool 623-8580-001 Military Standard
Insertion tool 359-8029-010 Military Standard MS3323-22
Crimping tool 359-0697-010# Daniels Mfg GMT-221
Extraction tool 359-0697-020# Daniels Mfg DRK230
Ejector replacement 359-0697-030# Daniels Mfg DRK188-1
Probe replacement 359-0697-040# Daniels Mfg DRK230-1
Insertion tool 359-0697-050# Daniels Mfg DAK188
Probe replacement 359-0697-070# Daniels Mfg DRK188-1
*The tools identified by # are available in kit form from Collins General Aviation Division, Rockwell International Corporation,
under CPN 359-0697-080, or from Daniels Manufacturing Corp., 6103 Anno Avenue, Orlando, FL 32809, under Daniels kit
number DMC-593.
Table 2-6. CTL-92/92A Control, Mating Connectors.
DESCRIPTION COLLINS PART NUMBER QTY REQD
Connector (MS3126F20-41SY) (with strain relief) 359-0301-580 1

or (MS3126E20-41SY) (without strain relief) 359-0305-590 1
Contacts, supplied with connector for #20 AWG wire (MS3193A20-20A) 359-0032-020 41

Table 2-7. CTL-92/92A Control, Mating Connector Contacts and Special Tools.
DESCRIPTION COLLINS PART NUMBER MANUFACTURER/PART NUMBER
Crimping tool 359-8102-010 MIL STD / M22520/2-01
Locator 359-8102-020 MIL STD / M22520/2-02

Daniels Mfg / K1S
Insertion tool 359-4078-010 MIL STD / MS24256A20
Extraction tool 359-4078-020 MIL STD / MS24256R20
2.6 DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY An extensive self-test diagnostic routine can be

started in the TDR-94( ) by pushing the TEST but-
ton on the CTL-92/92A Transponder control. Refer
Caution to the maintenance section of this manual for a list
of diagnostic codes.
extension of the self-test capability. The
pilot should first observe the indicators and
associated units for the proper self-test re-
sponses. If a problem exists, then the prob-
diagnostics.

Figure 2-2. Antenna Switching Relay, Installation Diagram

Figure 2-3. TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder, Mating Connector

Pin Orientation and Pin Function Diagram

Figure 2-4. CTL-92/92A ATC Control, Mating Connector Pin Orientation and Pin Function Diagram

Figure 2-5 (Sheet 1 of 6). TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder With

CTL-92/92A ATC Control Panel, Interconnect Wiring Diagram

Figure 2-5 (Sheet 2). TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder With CTL-92/92A ATC Control Panel, Interconnect Wiring Diagram

ADDENDUM 27
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

Refer to Figure 2-5, NOTE 34. Circuit breakers 1TDR and 2TDR are shown as 2A. This is not correct.
The correct size should be 3A for these two circuit breakers.
Addendum 27
523-0772719-0T711A (Facing Page 2-20)
Figure 2-5 (Sheet 3). TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder With CTL-

92/92A ATC Control Panel, Interconnect Wiring Diagram


Figure 2-5 (Sheet 5). TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder With CTL-

92/92A ATC Control Panel, Interconnect Wiring Diagram


Figure 2-6 (Sheet 1 of 4). TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder With

ARINC 429 Tuning Unit, Interconnect Wiring Diagram

Figure 2-6 (Sheet 2). TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder With ARINC 429 Tuning Unit, Interconnect Wiring Diagram

Figure 2-6 (Sheet 3). TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder With

ARINC 429 Tuning Unit, Interconnect Wiring Diagram

Figure 2-6 (Sheet 4). TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder With ARINC 429 Tuning Unit, Interconnect Wiring Diagram

Figure 2-7. TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder, Outline


Figure 2-8. MMT-150 Modular Mounting Tray, With Cover, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

ADDENDUM 7
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet revises front and rear bracket part numbers which are part of piggyback mount kit CPN
628-8644-008. On page 2-31, refer to Figure 2-9, note 7 for locations of front and rear brackets. Change the part
numbers per the table below.
DESCRIPTION OLD CPN NEW CPN
Front bracket 628-8645-008 628-8633-001
Rear bracket 628-8646-008 628-8634-001
Addendum 7
523-0772719-07711A (Facing Page 2-31)
Figure 2-9. TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder, Piggyback

Mounting on MMT-150 Modular Mounting Tray, Without Cover,

Figure 2-10. TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder, Piggyback Mounting on MMT-150 Modular Mounting Tray, With Cover,

Figure 2-11. TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder, Piggyback

Mounting on MMT-150 Modular Mounting Tray With UMT-( ),
Without Cover, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-12 (Sheet 1 of 3). CTL-92/92A ATC Control, Outline and

Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-12 (Sheet 2). CTL-92/92A ATC Control, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-12 (Sheet 3). CTL-92/92A ATC Control, Outline and

Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-13. ANT-42 L-Band Antenna, Outline


Figure 2-14. 237Z-1 L-Band Antenna, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-15 (Sheet 1 of 8). TDR-94/94D Input/Output Circuits, Partial Schematic Diagram

Figure 2-15 (Sheet 2). TDR-94/94D Input/Output Circuits, Partial Schematic Diagram







Figure 2-16 (Sheet 1 of 2). TDR-94/94D and ARINC 718 Transponder, Mode S Address Octal Conversion Program

Figure 2-16 (Sheet 2). TDR-94/94D and ARINC 718 Transponder, Mode S Address Octal Conversion Program

þ 523-0771856-007118

Collins
VHF-21( )/22( )/422( )
VHF Comm Transceiver
Installation
Table of Contents
2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING 2.5.4 VHF COMM Microphone Connection .................2-12
EQUIPMENT.......................................................2-1 2.5.5 VHF-21( ) Strapping and Connection
Options ...................................................................2-13
2.2 PREINSTALLATION CHECK ............................2-1 2.5.6 VHF-22( ) Strapping and Connection
Options ...................................................................2-13
2.5.7 VHF-422( ) Strapping and Connection
INSTRUCTIONS.................................................2-1
Options ...................................................................2-13
2.3.1 Mount and Connector Selection ............................ 2-1 2.5.7.1 CSDB Tuning (J1-32)........................................2-13
2.3.2 VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) COMM Transceiver 2.5.7.2 ARINC 429 Tuning (J1-32, J1-7, J1-14) ..........2-13
Selection................................................................... 2-1 2.5.7.3 Power-On Relay Option (J1-37, J1-38) ............2-14
2.3.2.1 VHF COMM Antenna Selection......................... 2-1 2.5.7.4 Frequency Save Option.....................................2-14
2.3.2.2 VHF COMM Transceiver Selection ................... 2-1 2.5.7.5 Discrete Inputs and Outputs............................2-14
2.3.3 COMM-to-COMM Interference ............................. 2-7
2.6 VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) COMM TRANSCEIVER
2.4 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS ...............................2-7 POSTINSTALLATION TEST/
2.4.1 General................................................................... 2-7 CALIBRATION PROCEDURES ...................... 2-14
2.4.2 VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) COMM Transceiver, 2.6.1 Transceiver Adjustments ....................................2-14
Special Cabling Instructions................................... 2-7 2.6.1.1 VHF-21( ) Audio Compression Enable.............2-14
2.5 VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) COMM 2.6.1.2 Receive Audio and Sidetone Level
TRANSCEIVER SYSTEM Adjustment.............................................................2-14
INSTALLATION ...............................................2-11 2.6.1.3 Microphone Gain Adjustment ..........................2-15
2.5.1 VHF COMM Antenna Installation ..................... 2-11 2.6.1.4 Noise Squelch Adjustment ...............................2-15
2.5.2 VHF-21( ) COMM Transceiver Installation ....... 2-12 2.6.2 Transceiver Tests.................................................2-15
2.5.3 VHF-22( )/422( ) COMM Transceiver 2.6.3 Additional Dual Transceiver Tests .....................2-16
Installation ............................................................ 2-12
Page No Issue
* Title ...........................................11 Apr 97

* 2-1 thru 2-17 .............................11 Apr 97
* 2-18 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-19 thru 2-39 ...........................11 Apr 97
* 2-40 Blank.................................11 Apr 97


1 29 Sep 92 None
1 15 Sep 95 None

section II
installation
2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING 2.3.2 VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) COMM Transceiver
EQUIPMENT Selection
Unpack equipment carefully and make a careful 2.3.2.1 VHF COMM Antenna Selection
damage. All claims for damage should be filed with Both selection and placement of the vhf COMM an-
the transportation company involved. If claims for tenna are important for good performance of the
damage are to be filed, save the original shipping transceiver. Refer to paragraph 2.5.1 for informa-
container and materials. If no damage can be de- tion on placement of the antenna.
container and save for future use (such as storage The transceivers are intended for use with a 50-
or reshipment). ohm, vertically polarized, vhf COMM antenna. The
antenna should have a vswr of less than 3:1 and a
2.2 PREINSTALLATION CHECK radiating efficiency of more than 25 percent.
Perform the final performance test (customer ac- 2.3.2.2 VHF COMM Transceiver Selection
VHF-21( )/22( ) or VHF-422( ) instruction book The VHF-21( ), VHF-22( ), and VHF-422( ) are in-
(repair manual) if verification of the unit to equip- tended for 2-way air traffic control and advisory
ment specifications is required or connect the unit communications in piston- or turbine-powered air-
in a system mockup to verify proper operation. planes or helicopters. The VHF-21( ) and VHF-22( )
transceivers can be used with either the CTL-20,
2.3 SPECIAL PRELIMINARY CTL-22, or 313N-( ) COMM control. The VHF-422( )
INSTRUCTIONS transceiver can be used with either the ARINC 429
or CSDB (CTL-22) COMM control.
Proper and careful planning of any installation is
essential for reliable performance and easy mainte- The VHF-21( ) can be installed in existing VHF-
nance. Refer to the General System and Mount In- 20( ) installations without changing either the in-
formation section for general information on points terconnect cabling or the mount. The VHF-22( ) and
to be considered in planning an installation. For in- VHF-422( ) use a different rear connector, with
formation on wiring, bonding, and other general in- more pins, to provide additional operating features
stallation practices, refer to the Installation Prac- and improved performance in multiple transceiver
tices Manual (CPN 523-0775254). Refer to Figure 2- installations.
1 for an overview of the transceiver installation.
VHF-21( ), VHF-22( ), and VHF-422( ) transceivers
2.3.1 Mount and Connector Selection with part numbers ending in -XX1 are approved for
operations in the United States of America and
Refer to Table 2-1, Table 2-2, and Table 2-3 for a other regions where the vhf COMM system employs
listing of the mounts and connectors/connector kits 25-kHz channel spacing with or without offset car-
available for use with the equipment. Table 2-4 riers. The -XX2 status is intended for use in regions
shows information on the mating connector con- where the frequency tolerance of ground transmit-
tacts and tools required to crimp the contacts. ters is not controlled accurately enough to support
the 25-kHz channel spacing.

installation VHF-21/22/422
Figure 2-1. VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) VHF COMM Transceiver, Installation Overview

ADDENDUM 10
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) installation section (523-0771856-007118) in Part B of this manual.
This addendum sheet adds text to paragraph 2.3.2.2. Added text appears in bold type.
2.3.2.2 VHF COMM Transceiver Selection
Both -XX1 and -XX2 status transceivers use 25-kHz channel spacing. The only difference between them is in the
receiver bandwidth. The wider band receiver in the -XX2 status will pass signals with frequency errors up to 13
kHz from nominal channel frequency. This greater bandwidth, however, limits the ability of the receiver to reject
undesired signals on an adjacent 25-kHz channel. Therefore, the -XX1 status should be selected for use in
regions employing the 25-kHz channel spacing.
The VHF-21/22/422(C) transceivers cover the frequency range of 118.000 through 136.975 MHz. The VHF-
21/22/422(D) transceivers cover the frequency range of 118.000 through 151.975 MHz.
The VHF-21/22/422(C/D) transceivers provide channel spacing in both 8.33- and 25- kHz increments from
118.000 to 136.975 MHz and 25-kHz increments from 137.000 to 151.975 MHz with a CTL-22C or equivalent
control head.
The VHF-21A and VHF-22A -00X transceivers cover the frequency range of 118.000 through 135.975 MHz. The
VHF-21A and VHF-22A -01X transceivers cover the frequency range from 118.000 through 136.975 MHz. The
VHF-21B and VHF-22B transceivers cover the frequency range from 118.000 through 151.975 MHz.
The VHF-422A covers the frequency range from 118.000 through 136.975 MHz. The VHF-422B covers the
frequency range from 118.000 through 151.975 MHz.
Addendum 10
523-0772719-0A711A (Facing Page 2-3)
Table 2-1. VHF-21( ) Mating Connectors.
AIRCRAFT TYPE DESCRIPTION COLLINS QTY

PART NUMBER
PREFERRED INSTALLATIONS

Installation kit (includes DPA connector and coax insert) 634-4192-001 1

Connector mounting plate 634-1124-001 1
DPA connector 370-2225-010 1
Coax insert 370-2182-000 1
*ALTERNATE INSTALLATIONS

Installation kit (includes DPA connector and coax insert) 634-4193-001 1

DPA connector 370-2225-010 1
Coax insert 370-2182-000 1
*Recommended installation only where UMT-series mount cannot be used
Both -XX1 and -XX2 status transceivers use 25-kHz The VHF-422A covers the frequency range from
channel spacing. The only difference between them 118.000 through 136.975 MHz.
is in the receiver bandwidth. The wider band re-
ceiver in the -XX2 status will pass signals with fre- The VHF-22( ) and VHF-422( ) can be used in air-
quency errors up to 13 kHz from nominal channel craft in which one crew member transmits with one
frequency. This greater bandwidth, however, limits transceiver while another crew member simultane-
the ability of the receiver to reject undesired signals ously monitors a different channel with a second
on an adjacent 25-kHz channel. Therefore, the -XX1 transceiver. In these installations, the SIMUL-
status should be selected for use in regions em- COMM input (P1-21) on each transceiver should be
ploying the 25-kHz channel spacing. connected to the key-line input (P1-35) of the other
transceivers. This is shown in the VHF-22( ) inter-
The VHF-21A and VHF-22A -00X transceivers connect diagrams, Figure 2-9, Figure 2-11, and
cover the frequency range of 118.000 through Figure 2-13, and VHF-422( ) interconnect diagrams,
135.975 MHz. The VHF-21A and VHF-22A -01X Figure 2-14, Figure 2-15, Figure 2-16, and Figure 2-
transceivers cover the frequency range from 17.
118.000 through 136.975 MHz.

Table 2-2.VHF-22( )/422( ) Mating Connectors.

PART NUMBER
VHF-422A CPN 622-7292-001, -002

VHF-422B CPN 622-7293-001, -002

*Installation kit (includes 34 contacts (CPN 372-2514-110), 634-4192-011 1
coax insert, and lightning protection kit)
VHF-22A CPN 622-6152-001, -002, -011, -012

VHF-22B CPN 622-6153-001, -002
VHF-422A CPN 622-7292-101, -102
VHF-422B CPN 622-7293-101, -102

Installation kit (includes 34 contacts (CPN 372-2514-110) 634-4192-002 1
and coax insert)


Crimp contacts
Up to 0.050 in insulation dia 372-2514-110 **34
or
0.050 to 0.080 in insulation dia 372-2514-180 **34

Crimp contacts
or
***ALTERNATE

Installation kit (includes 34 contacts (CPN 372-2514-110) 634-4193-002 1
and coax insert)

Crimp contacts
or

ADDENDUM 10
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds VHF-22(C/D) and VHF-422(C/D) mating connector information to Table 2-2. Added
text appears in bold type.
P/O Table 2-2.VHF-22( )/422( ) Mating Connectors.

PART NUMBER
VHF-422A CPN 622-7292-001, -002

VHF-422B CPN 622-7293-001, -002
VHF-422C CPN 822-1115-001
VHF-422D CPN 822-1116-001
VHF-22A CPN 622-6152-001, -002, -011, -012

VHF-22B CPN 622-6153-001, -002
VHF-22C CPN 822-1111-001
VHF-22D CPN 822-1112-001
VHF-422A CPN 622-7292-101, -102
VHF-422B CPN 622-7293-101, -102
VHF-422C CPN 822-1115-001
VHF-422D CPN 822-1116-001
Addendum 10
523-0772719-0A711A (Facing Page 2-4)
Table 2-2.VHF-22( )/422( ) Mating Connectors.

PART NUMBER

Crimp contacts
or
*Lighting protection kit required when installing unit in a composite aircraft.

KIT COMPONENT COLLINS QTY


Keyway, connector 634-1116-001 2
Retainer, keyway 634-1117-001 3
Screw, 4-40 x 0.38 324-2604-000 2
634-1514-001 Screw, 4-40 x 0.50 324-2605-000 2

Washer, flat, no. 4 310-0779-030 2

Screw, 4-40 x 0.050 324-2605-000 2
634-4192-001 Coax insert 370-2182-000 1

Mounting plate, connector 634-1124-001
Connector, mating 370-2225-010 1
634-4192-002 Contact 372-2514-110 34

Coax insert (for RG-58 cable) (in kits marked REV T or 372-2519-040 1
earlier) 372-2519-100 1
Screw, 4-40 x 0.38 334-2117-010 2
Retainer, keyway


634-4192-011 Contact 372-2514-110 34

Coax insert (for RG-58 cable) (in kits marked REV T or 372-2519-040 1
earlier) 372-2519-100 1
Screw, 4-40 x 0.38 334-2117-010 2
Spring, ground 628-8205-004 1
Plate kit, connector
634-4193-001 Mating connector 370-2225-010 1

Coax insert 370-2182-000 1
634-4193-002 Contact 372-2514-110 34

Coax insert (for RG-56) (in kits marked REV K or earlier) 372-2519-040 1
Coax insert (for RG-400) 372-2519-100 1
Screw, 4-40 x 0.50 324-2605-000 2
Washer, flat, no. 4 310-0779-030 2
Table 2-4. Mating Connector Contact and Special Tools.
DESCRIPTION COLLINS PART NO CRIMPING INSERTION EXTRACTION
Snap in tuning fork 372-2514-110 623-8579-001 or 359-0697-050 359-0697-020

(wire with insulation up 359-0697-010 *(Daniels DAK-188) *(Daniels DRK-230)
to 0.050 in dia) *(Daniels GMT-221)
Snap in tuning fork 372-2514-180 359-0697-010 359-0697-050 359-0697-020
(wire with insulation *Daniels GMT-221) *(Daniels DAK-188) *(Daniels DRK-230)
0.050 to 0.080 in dia)
Coaxial insert 372-2519-040, -100 359-8103-010 370-8040-030
with
359-8103-050
Corp., 6103 Anno Ave., Orlando, FL 32809. Phone: (407) 855-6161; Telex: 564321
Installation of the COMM antennas in a dual sys- put of +16 to +28 V dc at a minimum of 100 µA to
tem must meet the criteria given in paragraph 2.3.3 P1-22 is needed to cause the transceiver to auto-
to minimize COMM-to-COMM interference. matically tune to the last frequency used before the
transceiver primary power was turned off. With
On VHF-422( ) transceivers with service bulletin 8,
service bulletin 8, the VHF-422( ) will retain the
rear connector P1-22 is reserved. On VHF-422( ) -
most recent tuning and output information for an
10X units without service bulletin 8, rear connector
indefinite period of time.
P1-22 is a memory save input. A memory save in-

2.3.3 COMM-to-COMM Interference ual) for interconnect wiring guidelines to be fol-

lowed. The VHF-21( ) uses a DPA solder mating
Special precautions must be taken to achieve ac- connector. The VHF-22( ) and VHF-422( ) use a
ceptable performance in aircraft where two crew Thinline II mating connector. Refer to the General
members may use two vhf COMM transceivers si- System and Mount Information section (part A of
multaneously. In these installations, keying one Pro Line II installation manual) for Thinline II
transceiver may open the squelch on the other connector contact assembly and installation in-
transceiver, or the extremely strong signal from the structions.
on-board transmitter may desensitize the other re-
ceiver and distort the relatively weak received sig- 2.4.2 VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) COMM Trans-
nal. ceiver, Special Cabling Instructions
In these installations, the SIMULCOMM input of

An external power relay is required if dc power to
each transceiver should be connected to the key-
the VHF-21( ) is to be controlled by the COMM con-
line input of the other transceivers. Keying a
trol power on/off switch. A power relay is built into
transmitter then attenuates the transmitted signal
the VHF-22( ) and VHF-422( ).
received by the other receivers by approximately 10
dB. This reduces the possibility of undesired
squelch opening, uncontrolled desensitization, and Figure 2-2, Figure 2-3, and Figure 2-4 show the
distortion in the receivers. connector pin orientations and functions for the
VHF-21( ), VHF-22( ), and VHF-422( ) respectively.
Antenna installation is also critical in these instal-
lations. Satisfactory performance requires at least For interconnect wiring information, refer to Figure
40 dB of isolation (even with this much isolation, 2-8 through Figure 2-17. Figure 2-8, Figure 2-10,
the signal for the on-board transmitter can still be and Figure 2-12 are interconnect wiring diagrams
more than 100 dB stronger than some desired infor the VHF-21( ). Figure 2-9, Figure 2-11, and
coming signals). Achieving this much isolation Figure 2-13 are interconnect diagrams for the VHF-
normally requires mounting one antenna on the top 22( ). Figure 2-14, Figure 2-15, Figure 2-16, and
and the other on the belly of the aircraft. If possi- Figure 2-17 are interconnect diagrams for the VHF-
ble, one antenna should be well forward and the 422( ).
other well aft.
Coupling can also occur through the shields of the Figure 2-10, Figure 2-11, Figure 2-16, and Figure 2-
antenna cables. Therefore, these cables must be 17 have interconnect information to a tie point
separated as far as possible within the fuselage. number. The tie point number can be used to tie to-
gether one interconnect to another interconnect
Despite these precautions, interference may still be diagram with the same number. Example: the tie
experienced when two transceivers are tuned to number 1402 is dedicated to Mic audio, which is an
within a few channels of each other. input to the VHF. On the appropriate installation
2.4 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS diagram there is a tie point at 1402 which is Mic
audio output from the aircraft microphone system.
2.4.1 General Figure 2-10, Figure 2-11, Figure 2-16, and Figure 2-
Refer to the General System and Mount Informa- 17 are designed to minimize HIRF and lightning
tion section (part A of Pro Line II installation man- hazards.

Figure 2-2. VHF-21( ) VHF COMM Transceiver, Connector Pin Assignments



ADDENDUM 10
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

Note
Channel spacing in 8.33- kHz increments from 118.000 through 136.975 MHz can be accomplished by using a
be connected to ground to operate as an 8.33- kHz control head.
Addendum 10
523-0772719-0A711A (Facing Page 2-11)
ADDENDUM 13
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

Note
Channel spacing in 8.33- kHz increments from 118.000 through 136.992 MHz can be accomplished by using a
be open to operate as an 8.33- kHz control head.
Addendum 13
523-0772719-0D711A (Facing Page 2-11)
ADDENDUM 15
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

Add the following text after paragraph 2.5:
2.5.A VHF COMM and GPS Spacing Guidelines
This information provides installed equipment spacing guidelines to address VHF COMM and GPS mutual interference:
Background: GPS receivers calculate position by receipt of very low-level RF signals from orbiting satellites. These
low-level signals may be interfered with, causing loss of satellite tracking capability (and loss of position). VHF COMM
radios, at certain transmit frequencies, produce harmonics which could cause such interference. (Note that the only item
of concern being addressed is interference with the GPS.)
Assumptions: 2 dB loss from antenna to the antenna port terminals of the units.
Unity antenna characteristic (no gain, no loss).
Any deviation from these assumptions must be accounted for independently.
Recommendation D1:
Antenna -to- antenna spacing of no less than 1 Meter.
Recommendation D2:
GPS antenna -to- VHF transceiver spacing be as far apart as possible, and not closer than 25 feet.
This 25 foot spacing may be reduced by isolating the VHF radio in shielded enclosures (e.g.
equipment bay), and by orienting the radio so that the face of the COMM points away from the GPS
antenna.
Recommendation D3:
Receiver-to-transceiver spacing of not less than 1 Meter.

Addendum 15
523-0772719-0F711A (Facing Page 2-11)
2.5 VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) COMM bly, one antenna is mounted on top of the fuselage
TRANSCEIVER SYSTEM INSTALLATION and the other on the bottom. The top antenna
should be mounted at the highest point above the
Warning cabin to ensure a good radiation pattern. Typically,
the top-mounted antenna should be connected to
Ensure that the aircraft battery master COMM 2, and the belly antenna to COMM 1. This
switch is turned off before installing any arrangement provides optimum communications
equipment, mounts, or interconnect cables. while on the ground via COMM 2 and, when air-
borne, via COMM 1.
Certain aircraft are required by federal regulation
to have at least one COMM radio connected to the If it is absolutely necessary to mount both antennas
emergency power bus. Installers should be familiar on the same side of the aircraft, keep in mind that
with the applicable requirements and comply ac- the antennas can interact with each other and pro-
cordingly. duce large directional “dead spots.” For 40 dB of
isolation, a line-of-sight distance of approximately
The VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) is normally mounted in 11.6 metres (38 feet) is required when both anten-
the radio equipment rack with either the UMT-12 nas are on the same side of the aircraft.
Universal Mount (preferred) or the 390R-19 Uni-
versal Mounting Kit. Refer to Table 2-1 or Table 2-2 Many variables, in addition to antenna spacing, af-
for specific mount and mating connector informa- fect the electrical isolation between two antennas
tion. Refer to the General System and Mount In- on an aircraft. Therefore, it is not possible to specify
formation section (part A) for outline and mounting a minimum antenna spacing that is acceptable to
dimensions. all aircraft. For simultaneous dual COMM installa-
tions, it may be necessary to experiment with the
2.5.1 VHF COMM Antenna Installation antenna locations to obtain the necessary isolation
of 40 dB or more and a sufficiently uniform radia-
Proper installation of a high-quality COMM an- tion pattern for each antenna.
tenna is essential for optimum transceiver per-
formance. Refer to paragraph 2.3.2.1 for informa- The antenna base should be well bonded to metal
tion on antenna selection. aircraft skin. Remove paint from around the
mounting holes and use external-tooth lockwashers
Mount COMM antennas as far as possible away between the antenna base and the skin, or under
from other antennas and from the vertical stabi- the screw heads, to assure a good connection be-
lizer. Ideally, vhf COMM antennas should be at tween antenna and skin. Inadequate bonding often
least 8 feet from other similar antennas and from results in poor range and in interference to other
the vertical tail. In many aircraft, this is impossi- receivers.
ble. Closer spacings, though, produce ragged radia-
tion patterns with weak zones at some bearings. COMM antennas should be mounted on skin that
Mounting the COMM antenna as far as possible is, as nearly as possible, horizontal in cruising
from the navigation antenna helps reduce COMM- flight. The skin should extend at least 24 inches
to-NAV interference. COMM antennas should also from the base of the antenna in every direction.
be well separated from the emergency locator Any less will probably reduce the usable communi-
transmitter (ELT) antenna. With close spacing, the cation distance at some bearings around the air-
ELT antenna perturbs the COMM radiation pat- craft.
tern. Additionally, many ELT’s radiate broadband Aircraft with fabric, fiberglass, or composite skins
noise when excited by a COMM transmission: this require special antenna mounting techniques. In
is a frequent cause of COMM-to-NAV or COMM-to- many cases, a metal doubler plate must be installed
COMM interference. Keeping the antennas well inside the skin to structurally support the antenna.
apart minimizes the problem. The doubler plate should, then, extend at least 24
If a dual-transceiver installation is being made, vhf inches, in every direction, from the antenna base. If
COMM antennas must be no closer than 1.2 metres this is impractical, it may be possible to cement
(4 feet) apart to avoid COMM transceiver damage metal foil inside the skin to extend the electrical
due to receiver overloading. To minimize interac- ground plane to the minimum 24 inches. A foil ex-
tion, at least 40 dB of isolation is required; prefera- tension must be well bonded to the doubler plate to
be effective.

COMM transceiver performance depends heavily and Figure 2-21 for outline and mounting dimen-
on the integrity of electrical bonding of the aircraft sions for the VHF-422( ).
structure. If the electrical resistance between adja-
cent skin panels changes intermittently, noisy These transceivers perform properly with convec-
communications often result. Control surfaces not tion cooling at ambient air temperatures up to +70
bonded to the wing or empennage may cause the °C. As with all electronic equipment, however,
same problem. Radio-frequency currents flow in the lower operating temperatures extend equipment
airframe while transmitting and while receiving. If life. On the average, reducing the operating tem-
the airframe characteristics change, the currents perature by 15 to 20 °C appears to double the mean
change, and the result is noise. time between failures.
Connect the antenna to the VHF-21( )/22( )/422( )
Tightly packed units heat each other by radiation,
with a 50-ohm coaxial cable. Avoid sharp bends in
convection, and sometimes by direct conduction. If
the cable. Keep the COMM antenna cables well
space permits, separating the units from each other
away from other antenna cables; do not bundle sev-
can significantly improve reliability.
eral cables together. Typical coaxial cables leak
signals through the shield. If cables for different
Even a single unit operates at a much higher tem-
types of equipment are close together, considerable
perature in stagnant air than in moving air. Fans
interference may occur.
or other means of moving the air around electronic
The antenna input cannot be protected against equipment are usually a worthwhile investment. If
lightning voltages and currents without seriously any form of ram air cooling is used, care must be
degrading performance. In composite aircraft, it exercised to ensure that rainwater cannot be
may be necessary to connect the antenna to the sprayed on the equipment.
transceiver with triaxial cable with the outer shield
grounded to low-resistance structures at both ends After the mount and connector have been installed
to help divert lightning currents away from the and the interconnect cable verified, slide the trans-
transceiver. ceiver into the mount until the connector is fully
engaged. Tighten the two retaining nuts on the
Connector corrosion is an easily prevented problem front of the mount, while pushing the transceiver
that is all too often encountered with antenna in- against the mating connector, to secure the trans-
stallations. An excellent means of retarding, and in ceiver in the mount.
many cases eliminating, corrosion is a liberal appli-
cation of Dow Corning DC-4 silicon grease (CPN 2.5.4 VHF COMM Microphone Connection
005-0201-000) both inside and outside of the con-
nector and its mate. DC-4 will not adversely affect Currents flowing through the aircraft structure
performance in any way; its sole purpose here is to sometimes induce noise in the microphone circuit,
provide an effective barrier against moisture. producing noisy transmissions. This noise can often
be eliminated by insulating the microphone jacks
2.5.2 VHF-21( ) COMM Transceiver from the aircraft structure and connecting the mi-
Installation crophone to the transceiver as shown in Figure 2-5
or Figure 2-6.
Refer to Figure 2-18 for outline and mounting di-
mensions for the VHF-21( ). The VHF-21( ) COMM
Transceiver is for direct replacement of the VHF-
20( ) COMM Transceiver; therefore, no special in-
stallation instructions apply other than those appli-
cable to installation or replacement of a VHF-20( )
transceiver.
2.5.3 VHF-22( )/422( ) COMM Transceiver

Installation
Refer to Figure 2-19 for outline and mounting di-

mensions for the VHF-22( ). Refer to Figure 2-20 Figure 2-5. VHF-22( ), Insulated Microphone Jack Connections


Options
a. Serial/Parallel Tuning Select Strap (P1-32).
This strap selects serial (CSDB) tuning when
strapped to P1-32 or parallel (2 × 5) tuning
when open.
b. Unit Ident Select Straps (P1-27, P1-28). These
straps identify the unit as COMM 1, 2, or 3.
Strap as follows:
Figure 2-6. VHF-422( ), Insulated Microphone Jack Connections Unit ident A Open Grounded Open
Unit ident B Open Open Grounded
In a multiple-transceiver installation, care must be c. Squelch Disable (P1-36). This strap, when
exercised to ensure that all microphone jack shells strapped to ground, disables the squelch cir-
are grounded only at pin 33 on the VHF-22( ) or pin cuits.
1 on the VHF-422( ). This requires a 3-pole trans- d. AGC Test (P1-10), Carrier Squelch Test (P1-5),
mitter selector switch because all three leads from and Noise Squelch Test (P1-6) are used for
the jack must be switched. bench testing only.
Note Options
2.5.7.1 CSDB Tuning (J1-32)
The VHF-21( ) does not have an audio
ground pin on the rear connector. When in- If the VHF-422( ) is to be tuned by a CTL-22
stalling the VHF-21( ) into a noisy installa- COMM control, ground J1-32. This enables the sin-
tion, the microphone jack shell and the gle CSDB input to accept tune data from the CTL-
shield should be connected to a ground lug 22. When J1-32 is grounded, the ARINC tune input
installed at the rear of the UMT-12 or ports are disabled, but the ARINC output ports as
390R-19 mount. This solution, however, well as the CSDB output ports remain active.
may be less effective than the one described
above for the VHF-22( ) and VHF-422( ). 2.5.7.2 ARINC 429 Tuning (J1-32, J1-7, J1-14)
2.5.5 VHF-21( ) Strapping and Connection If the VHF-422( ) is to be tuned by an ARINC 429
Options COMM control, J1-32 must be open (no external
connection). When J1-32 is open, the CSDB tune
a. Serial/Parallel Tuning Select Strap (P1-9, P1- input port is disabled, but the CSDB output ports
10, and P1-24 to P1-3). This strap allows the as well as the ARINC output ports remain active.
selection of either serial (CSDB) tuning when The three ARINC input ports can accept either con-
tinuous or burst tune information. Pins J1-7 and
strapped or parallel (2 × 5) tuning when not
J1-14 control which input ports are active and what
strapped.
type of tune information can be received.
b. Unit Ident Select Straps (P1-19, P1-20). These
straps are used only when serial (CSDB) tuning
is selected. They identify the unit as COMM 1,
Logic Strap
2, or 3. Strap as follows:
Gnd: Enables all three ARINC input ports to
accept burst tune data; enables ARINC
Unit ident A Open Grounded Open input port B to also accept continuous
Unit ident B Open Open Grounded tune data (if continuous tune data is re-
ceived at port B, all data at ports A and
c. Squelch Disable (P1-4). This strap, when
C is ignored); ignores port B/A select in-
strapped to ground (P1-3), disables the squelch
put.
circuits.

Open: Tune port determined by the port B/A b. Fault Monitor (J1-20)
select input; ARINC input port C is not
The fault monitor output provides a +28-V dc,
enabled.
200-mA output when the transceiver is operat-
b. Port B/A Select (J1-14) — ARINC Control Logic ing properly in the ARINC tuning mode and
Strap/Switch Input switches to an open connection when a fault is
detected. The monitor trips when any of the
Gnd: Enables only ARINC input port A to re-
following diagnostic codes occur: 05, 14, 17, 26,
ceive continuous tune data; burst tune
27, or 99 (also 98 if -10X status).
enable strap must be open.
c. Self-Test (J1-19)
Open: Enables only ARINC input port B to re-
This input is provided so that the transceiver
self-test mode can be initiated by an external
switch during the ARINC tuning mode. This
2.5.7.3 Power-On Relay Option (J1-37, J1-38) discrete input is not operational during the
CSDB tuning mode. A momentary ground on
The +28-V dc input power to the transceiver is ap- J1-19 initiates self-test mode.
plied through an internal power-on relay that can
be controlled by an external +28-V dc, low-power 2.6 VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) COMM
signal between J1-37 and J1-38. If this option is not TRANSCEIVER POSTINSTALLATION
required, J1- 37 must be connected to J1-49 or J1- TEST/CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
50 (+28-V dc input power) and J1-38 must be con-
nected to J1-41 or J1-42 (power ground). 2.6.1 Transceiver Adjustments
2.5.7.4 Frequency Save Option

Caution
On VHF-422( ) transceivers with service bulletin 8, Some audio panels have an optional inter-
rear connector P1-22 is reserved. On VHF-422( ) - nal microphone bias circuit. This circuit
10X units without service bulletin 8, rear connector must be disabled or a 30-dB loss in receiver
P1-22 is a memory save input. A memory save in- sensitivity will occur.
put of +16 to +28 V dc at a minimum of 100 µA to
P1-22 is needed to cause the transceiver to auto- 2.6.1.1 VHF-21( ) Audio Compression Enable
matically tune to the last frequency used before the
transceiver primary power was turned off. With The VHF-21( ) is delivered with the receiver audio
service bulletin 8, the VHF-422( ) will retain the compression feature disabled so that it is directly
most recent tuning and output information for an interchangeable with a VHF-20( ) COMM Trans-
indefinite period of time. ceiver. If audio compression is desired, a strap on
receiver board A2 must be removed. Refer to the
2.5.7.5 Discrete Inputs and Outputs maintenance section in the VHF-21( )/22( ) instruc-
tion book (repair manual) for strap removal instruc-
a. Unit Ident Inputs (J1-27, J1-28) tions.
Two unit identification inputs are provided to
2.6.1.2 Receive Audio and Sidetone Level
identify the unit as COMM 1, 2, or 3 as shown
Adjustment
below.
COMM 1 J1-27 open, J1-28 open Both the receive audio and transmitter sidetone
COMM 2 J1-27 open, J1-28 ground output levels can be adjusted independently with-
COMM 3 J1-27 ground, J1-28 open out removing the transceiver cover. The recom-
mended method for adjustment is as follows:
Each transceiver and its associated control
must be strapped for the same number for a. Set the pilot-operated volume control to one-
proper operation. half to three-fourths of its full clockwise
(highest volume) rotation.

ADDENDUM 31
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum supersedes Addendum 28 and revises paragraph 2.6.2.a.
2.6.2 Transceiver Tests
a. Apply power to the VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) by turning on the aircraft circuit breakers and the on/off switch
on the control. When the transceiver is first turned on, it sounds a brief tone (refers to VHF-21/22( )
and –0XX status VHF-422(A/B) transceivers; VHF-422(A/B) status –1XX and all status VHF-
422(C/D) transceivers are shipped with this tone set for minimum output) while the
microprocessor checks its own memory. If there is a memory defect, the tone continues, thus indicating
that the transceiver can neither receive nor transmit. After the memory check, the CTL-22 control
displays the same active and preset frequencies that were present when the equipment was turned off.
Note
If two short 800-Hz tones (refers to VHF-21/22( ) and –0XX status VHF-422(A/B) transceivers;
VHF-422(A/B) status –1XX and all status of VHF-422(C/D) transceivers are shipped with this
tone set for minimum output) are heard at any time after the memory test, this should be interpreted
as an indication that the transceiver has detected an internal fault. If this continues, the unit should be
returned to the shop for maintenance.
Addendum 31
523-0772719-0X711A (Facing Page 2-15)
b. Refer to Figure 2-7 and set the screwdriver ad- tions given in the maintenance section of the VHF-
justment (REC AUDIO LEVEL ADJUST- 21( )/22( ) or VHF-422( ) repair manual.
MENT) for a comfortable audio level.
c. Perform sidetone adjustment after microphone
gain adjustment, step 2.6.1.3. Speak normally Note
into the microphone and listen on the headset
while transmitting. Refer to Figure 2-7 and set Higher noise squelch settings can result in
the screwdriver adjustment (SIDETONE missed calls during weak signal conditions.
LEVEL ADJUSTMENT) for a comfortable
2.6.2 Transceiver Tests
audio level.
After all cabling has been installed and the equip-
Note ment has been mounted in the aircraft, make the
operational check given below to ensure proper op-
Audio level is somewhat a matter of pilot eration of the equipment in the aircraft. These tests
preference, the aircraft type, the ambient can be made using the aircraft power supply with
noise level normally present in the cockpit, engines running or with an auxiliary power unit.
as well as the type of audio system in use.
Therefore, individual operator/user needs a. Apply power to the VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) by
and desires should be considered in this turning on the aircraft circuit breakers and the
case. on/off switch on the control. When the trans-
ceiver is first turned on, it sounds a brief tone
2.6.1.3 Microphone Gain Adjustment (refers to -00X VHF-422( ) transceivers; VHF-
422( ) status -10X transceivers are shipped with
The factory adjustment of the microphone gain is this tone set for zero (off) output) while the mi-
usually satisfactory for most microphones and air- croprocessor checks its own memory. If there is
craft. If the transceiver is used with either a very a memory defect, the tone continues, thus indi-
high- or low-level microphone, or if the aircraft is cating that the transceiver can neither receive
unusually noisy, it may be desirable to readjust the nor transmit. After the memory check, the CTL-
microphone gain. This screwdriver adjustment is 22 control displays the same active and preset
accessible through a hole in the transceiver cover as frequencies that were present when the equip-
shown on Figure 2-7. ment was turned off.
For in-aircraft adjustment, rotate the gain control Note

fully counterclockwise. Have an operator key the
transmitter and speak normally into the micro- If two short 800-Hz tones (refers to -00X
phone. Monitor the transmission with a portable VHF-422( ) transceivers; VHF-422( ) status
receiver that does not have audio compression (be -10X transceivers are shipped with this tone
certain that the transmission does not overload the set for zero (off) output) are heard at any
receiver) and rotate the gain control slowly clock- time after the memory test, this should be
wise. The receiver audio will become louder until interpreted as an indication that the trans-
transmitter compression begins, then will remain ceiver has detected an internal fault. If this
constant as the control is rotated further. Proper continues, the unit should be returned to
adjustment is at the point where clockwise rotation the shop for maintenance.
stops increasing the received audio signal.
b. Push the TEST button of the control to initiate
2.6.1.4 Noise Squelch Adjustment a self-test of the transceiver. Several audio
tones should be heard from the audio system
The factory adjustment of the noise squelch is satis- while the self-test routine is being executed.
factory for most aircraft. If a different squelch set- Completion of self-test is indicated when either
ting is required for a particular installation, refer to the tuned frequency or a diagnostic code is dis-
Figure 2-7 for location of the noise squelch adjust- played on the CTL-22. Refer to the mainte-
ment. The noise squelch should be adjusted ac- nance section of this manual for a listing of
cording to the noise squelch adjustment instruc- VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) diagnostic codes.

c. Check the squelch disable circuit by initiating Note

self-test or SQ OFF. Noise from the receiver
should be heard on the aircraft audio system. Perform the following step while a signal is
(Adjust volume if needed.) When self-test is ini- being received.
tiated, the receiver squelch circuits are dis-
abled, thus allowing a noise output. c. Slowly turn up the volume on the transceiver
that was turned down. Audio cancellation is oc-
curring if any position of this volume control re-
Note sults in less audio volume than was produced
by the other receiver alone.
Some installations may choose the option of
disabling the squelch feature by means of a Note
rear connector strap. In those cases, the
previous test will reflect no change in audio If the aircraft has more than two vhf
output. COMM transceivers, the above test should
be repeated with each combination of two.
d. Tune to the operating frequency of any active
station within the immediate area. If cancellation occurs, ensure that the AUDIO H
e. Press the push-to-talk button and obtain a ra- and AUDIO L wires from all transceivers are con-
dio check with that station. nected to the proper terminals at the audio panel or
f. Repeat steps d and e with a few other active amplifier. If a single VHF-21( ), VHF-22( ), or VHF-
stations if available. 422( ) is installed with one or more transceivers of a
different type, it may be necessary to reverse the
2.6.3 Additional Dual Transceiver Tests AUDIO H and AUDIO L wires between one trans-
ceiver and the audio panel to eliminate the cancel-
lation.
Warning
Severe distortion or total cancellation of the Note

audio output of two COMM transceivers
can occur if their audio outputs are oppo- All AUDIO L pins (17, 25, and 29) on the
sitely phased and they are used simultane- VHF-22( ) and VHF-422( ) are internally
ously while tuned to the same frequency or connected together. If RCVR AUDIO or
to different frequencies that are transmit- SIDETONE AUDIO is used, it may not be
ting the same message. This situation can possible to interchange the high and low
result in complete loss of an important mes- audio wires to correct cancellation. In this
sage. case, it may be necessary to connect an iso-
lation transformer between the transceiver
Perform the following test to check for audio can- and the audio panel to achieve the desired
cellation: phasing.
a. Tune both transceivers to the same frequency
(tune to an automated terminal information d. Figure 2-22, Figure 2-23, and Figure 2-24 are
service (ATIS) if available). Set the audio selec- input/output circuit diagrams for the VHF-21( ),
tor switches so that both transceivers can be VHF-22( ), and VHF-422( ) respectively. These
heard simultaneously. diagrams are useful during installation and
b. Turn down the volume on one of the transceiv- troubleshooting of the COMM interconnect
ers and adjust the other transceiver for a com- wiring.
fortable audio level.

ADDENDUM 21
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds an illustration showing adjustment controls on the VHF-21/22/422(C/D) radios.
Figure 2-7A. VHF-21/22/422(C/D) Audio Level and Microphone Gain Control, Location Diagram
Addendum 21
523-0772719-0M711A (Facing Page 2-17)
Figure 2-7. Audio Level and Microphone Gain Control, Location Diagram

ADDENDUM 37
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL
Insert this addendum sheet in Part B of this manual facing

page 2-19 of the VHF-21/22/422 Installation Section (523-0771856-007118).
This addendum sheet adds note 13 to Figure 2-8. Also, hex-boxed note references are added to the diagram
where shown below.
Notes:
13 APPLICABLE ONLY TO CTLS WITH INTEGRAL VOLUME CONTROL. OTHERWISE, INTERFACE AUDIO LINES
DIRECTLY WITH THE AIRCRAFT AUDIO SYSTEM.
13
13
P/O Figure 2-8. VHF-21( ) VHF Comm Transceiver With CTL-22 Control,
Affected area of diagram

(black represents size of entire page)
Addendum 37
523-0772719-0d711A (Facing VHF-21/22/422 Installation Page 2-19)
Figure 2-8. VHF-21( ) VHF COMM Transceiver With CTL-22

Control, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-9. VHF-22( ) VHF COMM Transceiver With CTL-22 Control, Interconnect Diagram

ADDENDUM 37
TO
INSTALLATION MANUAL (MORE BOOK TYPE)

where shown below.
Notes:
15
15
P/O Figure 2-9. VHF-22( ) VHF Comm Transceiver With CTL-22


Addendum 37
ADDENDUM 37
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds the following text to note 17 of Figure 2-10, sheet 1.
“ APPLICABLE ONLY TO CTLS WITH INTEGRAL VOLUME CONTROL. OTHERWISE, INTERFACE AUDIO LINES
DIRECTLY WITH THE AIRCRAFT AUDIO SYSTEM.”
Addendum 37
Figure 2-10 (Sheet 1 of 2). VHF-21( ) VHF COMM Transceiver With

CTL-22 Control and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-10 (Sheet 2). VHF-21( ) VHF COMM Transceiver With CTL-22 Control and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

ADDENDUM 37
TO

This addendum sheet adds hex-boxed references to note 17 on Figure 2-10, sheet 2.
17
17
P/O Figure 2-10 (Sheet 2). VHF-21( ) VHF COMM Transceiver

With CTL-22 Control and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Addendum 37 (black represents size of entire page)
ADDENDUM 37
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

This addendum sheet adds note 20 to Figure 2-11, sheet 1.
Notes:
Addendum 37
Figure 2-11 (Sheet 1 of 2). VHF-22( ) VHF COMM Transceiver With



ADDENDUM 37
TO

20
20
20
20


Addendum 37


Figure 2-13. VHF-22( ) VHF COMM Transceiver With CTL-20 Control, Interconnect Diagram

ADDENDUM 37
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

where shown below.
Notes:
15
15
P/O Figure 2-14. VHF-422( ) VHF Comm Transceiver

With CTL-22 Control, Interconnect Diagram

Addendum 37


Figure 2-15. VHF-422( ) VHF COMM Transceiver With ARINC 429 Control, Interconnect Diagram

ADDENDUM 37
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

Notes:
Addendum 37
Figure 2-16 (Sheet 1 of 2). VHF-422( ) VHF COMM Transceiver



ADDENDUM 37
TO
22
22
22
22


Addendum 37
Figure 2-17 (Sheet 1 of 2). VHF-422( ) VHF COMM Transceiver

With ARINC-429 Control and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-17 (Sheet 2). VHF-422( ) VHF COMM Transceiver With ARINC-429 Control and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-18. VHF-21( ) VHF COMM Transceiver,


Figure 2-19. VHF-22( ) VHF COMM Transceiver, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-20. VHF-422A/B VHF COMM Transceiver,

CPN 622-7292-00X and 622-7293-00X,
Outline and Mounting Diagram

Figure 2-21. VHF-422A/B VHF COMM Transceiver, CPN 622-7292-10X and 622-7293-10X, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Figure 2-22. VHF-21( ) VHF COMM Transceiver, Input/Output

Circuit Diagram

Figure 2-23. VHF-22( ) VHF COMM Transceiver, Input/Output Circuit Diagram

Figure 2-24. VHF-422( ) VHF COMM Transceiver, Input/Output

Circuit Diagram

þ 523-0772451-007118

Collins
VIR-32/33/432/433
Navigation Receiver
Installation
Table of Contents
2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING 2.6.4.7 VIR-32/33 Flag Outputs ...................................2-11

EQUIPMENT.......................................................2-1 2.6.5 Supplementary VIR-432/433 Interconnect
Information ............................................................2-11
2.6.5.1 CSDB Tuning (J1-6, J1-3/4) .............................2-11
2.3 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS ................................2-1 2.6.5.2 ARINC 429 Tuning (J1-6, J2-8, J1-31,
J1-34/45, J1-29/33, J2-15/16) ................................2-11
2.4 PLANNING...........................................................2-1 2.6.5.3 Power Options (J1-41, J1-18, J1-40,
2.5 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS ...............................2-1 J2-25)......................................................................2-11
2.6.5.4 VOR/LOC and Marker Beacon Audio
2.6 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES.......................2-3 (J2-21/22/39, J1-7/8/11) .........................................2-11
2.6.1 Receiver Installation ............................................. 2-3 2.6.5.5 Strap Options ....................................................2-11
2.6.2 NAV Control Installation ...................................... 2-3 2.6.5.6 Discretes............................................................2-12
2.6.3 Antenna Installation ............................................. 2-3 2.6.5.7 Marker Beacon Lamp Outputs (J1-12,
2.6.3.1 VOR/LOC Antenna Installation......................... 2-6 J1-15, J1-16)...........................................................2-12
2.6.3.2 GS Antenna Installation .................................... 2-6 2.7 POSTINSTALLATION TEST ........................... 2-12
2.6.3.3 MB Antenna Installation ................................... 2-6
2.6.4 Supplementary VIR-32/33 Interconnect 2.7.1 VOR Self-Test.......................................................2-13
Information .............................................................. 2-6 2.7.2 ILS (Localizer and Glideslope) Self-Test ............2-13
2.6.4.1 CTL-32 Serial Tuning Cross-Connections......... 2-6 2.7.3 Marker Beacon Self-Test .....................................2-13
2.6.4.2 Remote Tuning.................................................... 2-6 2.7.4 Optional Marker Beacon In-Flight
Sensitivity Test ......................................................2-13
2.6.4.3 Remote VOR Tuning via 2 × 5 Parallel
2.7.4.1 Airways Marker Test ........................................2-13
Input....................................................................... 2-10
2.7.4.2 Outer Marker Test............................................2-14
2.6.4.4 Remote DME Tuning via 2 × 5 Parallel
2.7.4.3 Middle Marker Test ..........................................2-14
Input....................................................................... 2-10
2.6.4.5 VOR/LOC and Marker Beacon Audio .............. 2-10 2.8 DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY ................................... 2-14
2.6.4.6 VIR-32/33 Strapping Options........................... 2-10
NOTICE: This section replaces sixth edition dated 15 September 1995.

Page No Issue
* Title ...........................................11 Apr 97

* 2-1 thru 2-7 ...............................11 Apr 97
* 2-8 Blank...................................11 Apr 97
* 2-9 thru 2-29 .............................11 Apr 97
* 2-30 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 2-31 thru 2-46 ...........................11 Apr 97
* 2-47 thru 2-48 Added ................11 Apr 97


1 29 Sep 92 None
2 12 May 94 None

section II
installation
2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING 2.4 PLANNING

EQUIPMENT
Proper and careful planning of the navigation sys-
tem prior to installation is essential for reliable per-
formance and easy maintenance. Refer to Figure 2-
1 for an overview of the receiver installation. Refer
tion (part A, Pro Line II installation manual) for
general information on points to be considered in
planning an installation.
or reshipment).
The VIR-32/33/432/433 performs properly with con-
vection cooling at ambient air temperatures up to
+70 °C. However, as with all electronic equipment,
Perform the final performance test (customer ac- lower operating temperatures extend equipment
ceptance test) in the maintenance section of the life. On the average, reducing the operating tem-
VIR-32/33 or VIR-432/433 instruction book (repair perature by 15 to 20 °C doubles the mean time be-
manual) if verification of the unit to equipment tween failures.
specifications is required or connect the unit in a
system mockup to verify proper operation. Units tightly packed in the radio rack heat each
other through radiation, convection, and sometimes
2.3 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS by direct conduction. If space permits, separate the
units from each other to significantly improve reli-
The following special instructions must be followed
ability.
to ensure proper installation of the VIR-
32/33/432/433. Damage to the equipment can occur Even a single unit operates at a much higher tem-
if these instructions are not followed. perature in stagnant air than in moving air. Fans
a. The minimum wire size for the receiver power or some other means of moving the air around elec-
lines is #22 AWG. #24 AWG wire can be used tronic equipment are usually a worthwhile invest-
for all other signal and control wires. ment. If a form of ram air cooling is installed, en-
b. Read all notes on drawings and interconnects sure that rainwater cannot enter and be sprayed on
and the planning paragraph before installing the equipment.
any units or cabling. 2.5 CABLING INSTRUCTIONS
c. Dual NAV receiver installations using a single
antenna require the use of a 2-set antenna cou- The receiver interconnect cables should be prepared
pler to provide isolation between receivers. Do in accordance with the interconnect diagrams,
not use a coaxial T for this purpose. Figure 2-5 through Figure 2-14. Since these inter-
connects are typical, variations or modification to
For information on wiring, bonding, and other gen- meet customer requirements are inevitable. Refer
eral installation practices, refer to the Installation to paragraphs 2.6.4 and 2.6.5 for information on
Practices Manual (CPN 523-0775254). some of the options that can affect the interconnect
cabling.

installation VIR-32/33/432/433
Figure 2-1. VIR-32/33/432/433 Navigation Receiver, Installation Overview

cuits for the VIR-432/433. These simplified circuit

Note diagrams are added information for use in the in-
stallation and/or installation troubleshooting of the
Interconnect diagrams for VIR-32 are appli- VIR-32/33/432/433.
cable to VIR-33. Likewise, interconnect dia-
grams for VIR-432 are applicable to VIR- 2.6.1 Receiver Installation
433.
The VIR-32/33/432/433 is normally mounted in the
Figure 2-8, Figure 2-11, and Figure 2-14 have in- radio equipment rack with either the UMT-12
terconnect information to a tie point number. The (preferred) or the 390R-19 (alternate) Universal
tie point number can be used to tie together one in- Mount. Refer to Table 2-1 for specific mount and
terconnect to another interconnect diagram with mating connector information. Note that only one
the same number. Example: the tie number 107 is mount and one mating connector kit can be used to
dedicated to Delayed Ils Mode side 1, which is an install the VIR-432/433, CPN 622-7194-001. A vari-
output to an RMI/flight director. On the appropri- ety of options exist if installing the VIR-32/33 or the
ate RMI installation diagram (such as an RMI-36), VIR-432/433. Refer to Figure 2-15 through Figure
there is a tie point of 107, which is Delayed Ils 2-19 for outline and mounting diagrams of the re-
Mode side 1 input from a NAV. Figure 2-8, Figure ceiver and the mounts.
2-11, and Figure 2-14 are designed to minimize
HIRF and lightning hazards. If installing the VIR-32/33 or VIR-432/433 in a
The mating connectors, contacts, and special con- composite aircraft, use connector kit CPN 634-4192-
nector tools for the VIR-32/33/432/433 are listed in 012, and attach connector plate kit (with MOV) to
Table 2-1, Table 2-2, and Table 2-3. Figure 2-2 illus- mount using four screws supplied with the mount.
trates the receiver mating connector pin assign- Be sure to wire +28-V dc input power to bottom
ments for the VIR-32/33. Figure 2-3 illustrates the MOV power terminal and to P1-41. Connect other
receiver mating connector pin assignments for the MOV wire to power ground.
VIR-432/433.
2.6.2 NAV Control Installation
Refer to the General System and Mount Informa-
tion section (part A of Pro Line II installation man- The VIR-32/33 can be controlled by a CSDB or 2 × 5
ual) for interconnect wiring guidelines to be fol- NAV control. The VIR-432/433 can be controlled by
lowed. The VIR-32/33 and VIR-432/433 use a CSDB or ARINC 429 NAV control (RTU-870( )).
Thinline II mating connectors. Refer to the General Refer to the CTL-X2/X2A/23 installation section for
System and Mount Information section (part A of an outline and mounting diagram for the CTL-32
Pro Line II installation manual) for Thinline II NAV control. Refer to the RTU-870( ) installation
connector contact assembly and installation in- section for an outline and mounting diagram for the
structions. RTU control.
2.6 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
2.6.3 Antenna Installation
The following paragraphs provide instructions for
installing the VIR-32/33/432/433. Refer to applica- Customer supplied 50-ohm VOR/LOC, glideslope,
ble equipment instruction book for installation pro- and marker beacon antennas are required. Follow
cedures on other units. the manufacturer’s recommendations for proper in-
stallation.
Warning
Note
Ensure that the aircraft battery master
switch is turned off before installing any Dual navigation receiver installations using
equipment, mounts, or interconnect cables. a single antenna require the use of a split-
Figure 2-23 shows the input/output circuits for the ter to provide isolation between receivers.
VIR-32/33. Figure 2-24 shows the input/output cir- Do not use a coaxial T for this purpose.

Table 2-1. VIR-32/432 Mating Connectors.
AIRCRAFT TYPE MATING CONNECTOR COLLINS QTY

PART NUMBER
VIR-432 (CPN 622-7194-001)

*Installation kit (includes all contacts, coax insert, and 634-4192-012 1
lightning protection kit)
VIR-32 (CPN 622-6137-001, -201); VIR-33 (CPN 822-0400-001)

VIR-432 (CPN 622-7194-101, -201); VIR-433 (CPN 822-0393-001)
PREFERRED

Installation kit (includes all contacts and coax insert) 634-4192-003 1

*Installation kit (includes all contacts, coax insert, and 634-4192-012 1
lightning protection kit)

Crimp contacts
0.050 to 0.080 insulation dia 372-2514-180 **4

Crimp contacts
***ALTERNATE

Installation kit (includes all contacts and coax insert) 634-4193-003 1

Crimp contacts
0.050 to 0080 insulation dia 372-2514-180 **4

Crimp contacts
*Lightning protection kit required when installing unit in a composite aircraft.

**Quantity required for typical VIR-32/33 installation. Typical VIR-432/433 installation requires 45 contacts.
***Recommended installation only where UMT-series mount cannot be used.



Screw, 4-40 x -0.38 324-2604-000 4

Screw, 4-40 x 0.50 324-2605-000 4
Spacer, connector 634-1128-001 2
Washer, flat, no. 4 310-0779-030 2

Screw, 4-40 x 0.50 324-2605-000 4

Screw, 4-40 x 0.38 324-2604-000 4
Crimp contact 372-2514-110 75

Screw, 4-40 x 0.38 324-2604-000 4
Spring, gnd 634-1120-001 2
Plate kit, connector 628-8205-004 1

Screw, 4-40 x 0.50 324-2605-000 4
Spacer, connector 634-1128-001 2
Washer, flat, no. 4 310-0779-030 2
Coax insert (for RG-58 cable) (in kits marked REV K or earlier) 372-2519-040 3

DESCRIPTION COLLINS PART CRIMPING INSERTION EXTRACTION

NUMBER

with insulation to 0.050 in 359-0697-010 *(Daniels DAK-188) *(Daniels DRK-230)
dia) *(Daniels GMT-221)
with insulation 0.050 to *(Daniels GMT-221) *(Daniels DAK-188) *(Daniels DRK-230)
0.080 in dia)
Coax insert 372-2519-040, -100 359-8103-010 with 370-8040-030
359-8103-050
Corp., 6103 Anno Ave., Orlando, FL 32809. Phone: (407)855-6161; Telex: 564321
2.6.3.1 VOR/LOC Antenna Installation 2.6.4 Supplementary VIR-32/33 Interconnect

Information
The following lists some of the available NAV an-
tenna manufacturers.
2.6.4.1 CTL-32 Serial Tuning Cross-
Sensor Systems Inc. Connections
8929 Fullbright Ave.
Chatsworth, CA 91311 If an external serial tune source is used, that source
(818) 341-5366 connects to CTL-32 serial control input pins P1-a
Telefax (818) 341-9059 and Z. The CTL-32 cross-side connections are not
used, so some means of disconnecting the cross-side
Dorne and Margolin Inc.
CTL-32 must be provided while the remote source
2950 Veterans Memorial Highway
is active.
Bohemia, NY 11716
Dayton-Granger Inc. 2.6.4.2 Remote Tuning
812 N.W. 1st Street
Ft. Lauderdale, FL 33302 Grounding P1-K causes the CTL-32 to become to-
tally passive, delivering only the tuning informa-
2.6.3.2 GS Antenna Installation tion supplied to serial tuning input pins P1-a and Z
Refer to Figure 2-20 or Figure 2-21 for outline and or P1-U and V. The upper window displays the fre-
mounting dimensions. quency to which the VOR is tuned, as supplied at
input pins P1-V and U, and the lower window is
2.6.3.3 MB Antenna Installation dashed. The CTL-32 will continue to output serial
Refer to Figure 2-22 for outline and mounting di- data in this mode, allowing the DME-42 to be tuned
mensions. serially if desired.

Figure 2-2. VIR-32/33 Navigation Receiver, Connector Pin Assignments

Figure 2-3. VIR-432/433 Navigation Receiver,

Connector Pin Assignments

2.6.4.3 Remote VOR Tuning via 2 × 5 Parallel marker beacon audio output. If a simple H/L audio
Input output is required, the center tap should be left
open and the other two pins used as the H and L
If direct 2 × 5 tuning is used to tune the VIR-32/33 outputs. In this case, the L can be referenced to
(VIR-32/33 P1-6 and CTL-32 P1-b open), the VIR- ground at the load end. The connection options are
32/33 feeds back tuning information to the CTL-32, as shown in Figure 2-4.
which in turn tunes DME-42 channel 1 to the same
station via the serial data lines (DME-42 2 × 5 se- 2.6.4.6 VIR-32/33 Strapping Options
rial tune select P1-48 grounded). (Channels 2 and 3
are unaffected by this tune select pin.) If the cross- a. Source Ident (P1-14 to P1-40)
side CTL-32 is strapped for side 2 operation and is
This strap must be connected on the right side
cross-coupled to the on-side CTL-32, DME-42 chan-
unit if the left and/or right CTL-32’s are cross-
nel 2 can be tuned to the cross-side NAV station.
connected.
2.6.4.4 Remote DME Tuning via 2 × 5 Parallel b. Glideslope Bias Disable (P1-20 to P1-40)
Input
With this strap connected, the glideslope flag
and pointer are biased in view when the unit is
With DME-42 P1-48 open, DME-42 channel 1 (only)
in VOR mode. Unstrapped, the GS flag and
can be tuned via a direct 2 × 5 input. Unlike the
pointer are biased out of view in VOR mode.
VOR, the DME-42 has no parallel-to-serial conver-
sion and feedback capability. Therefore, other pro- c. D/R, U/L ST (Down/Right, Up/Left, Self-Test
visions are needed for VOR tuning in this case. Indication) (P1-52 to P1-40)
DME-42 channels 2 and 3 are not affected by the 2
With this strap connected, the VOR bearing
× 5/serial strap and may still be tuned via the serial
self-test indication is up/left. Unstrapped, it is
input.
down/right.
2.6.4.5 VOR/LOC and Marker Beacon Audio d. Serial-Parallel Tune (P1-6 to P1-40)
With this strap connected, the VIR-32/33 can be
Both of these audio outputs from the VIR-32/33 are
tuned only via the serial data input, P1-3/4.
transformer outputs with the secondary center
Without the strap, the unit tunes via the 2 × 5
tapped. Thus, the VIR-32/33 can provide a balanced
input, P1-3/4/7/8/12/15/16/19/23/25.
100-mW VOR/LOC audio output and a 50-mW
Figure 2-4. VIR-32/33/432/433 Audio Output Connections

2.6.4.7 VIR-32/33 Flag Outputs Open: Tune port determined by the port B/A
select input; ARINC input port C is not
a. VOR Super Flag (P1-18/29) enabled.
Flag warn output: At least +12 V dc at 250 mA b. Port B/A Select (J1-31) — ARINC Control Logic
max with primary input voltage at 16 to 32.2 V Strap/Switch Input
dc.
Gnd: Enables only ARINC input port A to re-
b. VOR Low-Level Flag (P2-14/17) ceive continuous tune data; burst tune
Flag warn output: From 1.0 to 1.5 V dc and cur-
rent limited to 10 mA max. Open: Enables only ARINC input port B to re-
c. Glideslope Super Flag (P1-17/38)
Same as VOR.
2.6.5.3 Power Options (J1-41, J1-18, J1-40,
d. Glideslope Low-Level Flag (P1-9/13)
J2-25)
Same as VOR.
+28-V dc input power is applied to either J1-41 or
2.6.5 Supplementary VIR-432/433 Interconnect J1-18. Normal power connection is to J1-41. Power
Information is applied to J1-18 only if rotor mod filtering is re-
quired (helicopter installations); the J1-41 connec-
2.6.5.1 CSDB Tuning (J1-6, J1-3/4) tion is optional if power is applied to J1-18. Power
ground is attached to J1-40.
If the VIR-432/433 is to be tuned by a CTL-32 NAV
control, ground J1-6. This enables the single CSDB On VIR-432 units with SB 4 and on VIR-433 units,
input to accept tune data from the CTL-32. When J2-25 is reserved. On VIR-432 units without SB 4, a
J1-6 is grounded, the ARINC tune input ports are frequency keep-alive input (J2-25) may be con-
disabled, but the ARINC output ports as well as the nected to a 28-V dc aircraft battery. This input al-
CSDB output ports remain active. lows the VIR-432 to retain the last tuned frequency
for use in the next flight. This input is usable only
2.6.5.2 ARINC 429 Tuning (J1-6, J2-8, J1-31, in burst tune mode.
J1-34/45, J1-29/33, J2-15/16)
2.6.5.4 VOR/LOC and Marker Beacon Audio
(J2-21/22/39, J1-7/8/11)
If the VIR-432/433 is to be tuned by a low-speed
ARINC 429 NAV control, J1-6 must be open (no ex- Both the VOR/LOC and marker beacon audio sig-
ternal connection). When J1-6 is open, the CSDB nals are transformer outputs with the secondary
tune input port is disabled, but the CSBD output center tapped. The VIR-432/433 can provide a bal-
ports as well as the ARINC output ports remain ac- anced 100-mW VOR/LOC audio output and a 50-
tive. The three ARINC input ports can accept either mW marker beacon audio output. If a simple H/L
continuous or burst tune information. Pins J2-8 and audio output is required, the center tap pin should
J1-31 control which input ports are active and what be left open and the other two pins used as the H
type of tune information can be received. and L outputs. The connection options are shown in
Figure 2-4.
2.6.5.5 Strap Options
Logic Strap
Keep all rear connector straps as short as possible,
Gnd: Enables all three ARINC input ports to
preferably less than 75.0 mm (3.0 in).
accept burst tune data; enables ARINC
input port B also to accept continuous a. D/R — U/L Self-Test Select (J1-52 to J1-51)
tune data (if continuous tune data is re-
This strap may be installed to set the ILS self-
ceived at port B, all data at ports A and
test indication up/left. The self-test indication is
C is ignored); ignores the port B/A select
down/right if the strap is not installed. A toggle
input.
switch may be installed between J1-52 and

ground (J1-51) so that both up/left and able only when the VIR-432/433 is tuned by an
down/right indications can be obtained. ARINC source. A ground on J2-4 inhibits VIR-
432/433 tune/test capability, and an open se-
b. LRU Ident (J1-14 to J1-51)
lects normal operation.
This strap must be installed on the right side
f. Marker Beacon High/Low Sense (J1-43 to J1-
unit to identify the unit as NAV 2. The unit is
44)
identified as NAV 1 (left side) if the strap is not
installed. These pins are provided to allow strapped or
switched sensitivity control. This connection is
2.6.5.6 Discretes made to set the marker beacon receiver thresh-
old for high sensitivity. The threshold is at the
a. Standby/On (J1-10) low sensitivity level if the connection is broken.
This input pin is provided so that the NAV con-
2.6.5.7 Marker Beacon Lamp Outputs (J1-12,
trol can set the VIR-432/433 to standby or nor-
J1-15, J1-16)
mal-on modes. When a ground is switched to
J1-10, the VIR-432/433 goes to standby mode
Typically, 6.3-V, 200-mA bulbs are installed on the
and dissipates very little power. When the
marker beacon analog outputs (J1-12, J1-15, J1-16).
ground is removed (or when J1-10 is left open),
Some installations that do not require these bulbs
the VIR-432/433 operates normally.
have been found to indicate a slightly longer beacon
b. Delayed ILS Mode (J2-40) passage time than installations having the bulbs.
Loading the marker beacon analog outputs on these
This output pin is provided so that the VIR-
installations with a 39-Ω, 1-W resistor will allow
432/433 can switch an external VOR/LOC relay
more uniform sensitivity readings between best
in a flight control system. J2-40 is a low-level
bench and various installations.
output when an ILS frequency is selected; oth-
erwise, this output is open.
2.7 POSTINSTALLATION TEST
c. Fault Monitor (J2-44)
The postinstallation test is performed using the
This output pin provides a +28-V dc, 200-mA
VIR-32/33/432/433 self-test routine or a ramp
output when continuous internal diagnostics
tester. The self-test routine is initiated through the
are satisfied that NAV operation is correct. It
serial input bus by the NAV control. A discrete self-
switches to an open condition if an error is de-
test input also is available on non-CSDB/ARINC
tected. The monitor opens when one of the fol-
429 tune installations. During self-test, the VIR-
lowing diagnostic codes occurs: 02, 03, 04, 05,
32/33/432/433 performs internal integrity checks
09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 17, 25, 28, 32, 40, 41, 42,
and generates verifiable VOR, ILS, and marker
43, or 44.
beacon test outputs. Note that the receiver instru-
d. Self-Test (J2-5) mentation is checked during self-test, not the ac-
tual receiver circuits.
This input is provided so that an ARINC 429
NAV control can toggle a discrete to put the
On new installations, a thorough checkout with a
VIR-432/433 into self-test mode. Normally, self-
ramp tester is recommended. A ramp tester, such
test is selected using the digital CSDB or
as an IFR-401L, can verify the antenna and re-
ARINC bus. This discrete input is available
ceiver circuits of the VIR system. The VOR, LOC,
only when the VIR-432/433 is tuned by an
and glideslope receivers should be checked on at
ARINC source. A ground on J2-5 initiates self-
least one frequency. Checking VOR accuracy at 30-
test mode, and an open selects normal opera-
degree increments (0°, 30°, 60°, etc) will verify the
tion.
proper operation of the VOR instrumentation and
e. ARINC Tune/Test Inhibit (J2-4) the accuracy of the VOR.
This input is provided so that the flight control
The following paragraphs describe the required
system can prevent the VIR-432/433 from re-
procedures and expected results of the self-test op-
tuning or going into self-test mode during a
eration.
coupled approach. This discrete input is avail-

2.7.1 VOR Self-Test Note
a. Select any VOR frequency (such as 117.00 An interconnect strap option exists which
MHz) using the NAV control unit. It is not nec- allows an up/left indication to be obtained
essary to actually receive a valid signal at this during ILS self-test instead of the
VOR channel. down/right indication. Some installations
b. Set the ND (navigation display, EHSI) to select may have a switch installed (instead of this
the VIR-32/33/432/433 as the active NAV and strap) to allow selection of either an up/left
bearing pointer source. Rotate the OBS knob to or down/right self-test indication.
approximately 0°.
c. Press and hold the TEST button on the NAV
control unit. f. The VIR-32/33/432/433 will return to normal
d. The VOR sensor display should be red (NAV operation after approximately 15 seconds, even
flag indication). The color of the VOR (EHSI) if the TEST button is held.
display prior to test is irrelevant.
e. After approximately 3 seconds, the VOR sensor 2.7.3 Marker Beacon Self-Test
display should change to green (NAV flag out of
view), the EHSI or HSI lateral deviation bar The marker beacon function is automatically tested
should approximately center, the EHSI or HSI during both the VOR and the ILS self-tests. The
should show a TO indication, and the VOR marker beacon receiver is operating properly if the
bearing pointer should indicate approximately three marker lamps flicker perceptibly at a 30-Hz
0° magnetic bearing. rate during test. In addition, an audible tone should
f. The VIR-32/33/432/433 will return to normal be present in the marker audio output.
operation after approximately 15 seconds, even
if the TEST button is held. If an EFIS system provides the marker beacon an-
2.7.2 ILS (Localizer and Glideslope) Self-Test nunciation, either the inner MB symbol or a cycling
display of all three MB symbols indicates a valid
a. Select any LOC frequency (such as 110.10 MHz) self-test. The marker beacon self-test display is a
on the NAV control unit. It is not necessary to function of the EFIS configuration.
actually receive a valid signal at this ILS chan-
nel.
2.7.4 Optional Marker Beacon In-Flight
b. Verify that a LOC sensor display and glideslope
Sensitivity Test
scale display appear on the EHSI or HSI.
c. Press and hold the TEST button on the NAV
control unit. 2.7.4.1 Airways Marker Test
d. The LOC sensor display should be red (NAV
flag indication) and a red GS display should
appear (GS flag indication). The color of the Fly the aircraft over an airways marker. The audio
LOC display prior to test is irrelevant. indication (3000 Hz) should be heard before the in-
e. After approximately 3 seconds, the LOC sensor dicator lights. The white (inner) lamp should flicker
display should change to green (NAV flag out of while the aircraft is flying through the airways
view), the red GS display should disappear (GS marker beacon. The length of time the light will
flag out of view), the EHSI or HSI lateral devia- stay on is determined by the altitude and speed of
tion bar should deflect right approximately two- the aircraft. In general, the lamp should flicker
thirds of full scale, and the GS pointer should from 20 to 40 seconds when flying at 457 m (1500
deflect down approximately two-thirds of full ft) at 177 km/h (110 mi/h). This is not an absolute
scale. value, but a guide for beginning reference.

2.7.4.2 Outer Marker Test brightness to annunciate that self-test is in

progress.
Fly a normal approach along the glideslope local-
1. If an out-of-tolerance condition was de-
izer course. The blue lamp should flicker for 8 to 16
tected prior to actuating self-test, the CTL-
seconds when over the outer marker and on course
32 displays the diagnostic code associated
for an ILS approach. The audio signal (400 Hz)
with that condition for approximately 3 sec-
should be heard in the headphones at the same
onds immediately after the TEST button is
time.
pressed (the code will appear in the preset
2.7.4.3 Middle Marker Test display). Note that if a valid signal is not
received at the selected frequency, code 18
The amber indicator should flicker for 4 to 8 sec-
(VOR) or 26 (ILS) will be displayed for the
onds when flying over the middle marker and on
first 2 or 3 seconds. This is a normal diag-
course for an ILS approach. The audio tone (1300
nostic condition and does not indicate a
Hz) should be heard in the headphones at the same
fault in the unit.
time, or slightly before the indicator lights.
2. If an out-of-tolerance condition is detected
2.8 DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY during self-test, the CTL-32 displays that
diagnostic code along with the word “dIAG”
Caution or “FLAG” in the active display after ap-
proximately 3 seconds.
The diagnostic routines are intended as an 3. If no out-of-tolerance condition is found, the
extension of the self-test capability. The pi- CTL-32 displays four dashes (----) and code
lot should first observe the deviation dis- 00.
plays and associated flag indications for 4. Self-test is completed when the normal fre-
proper self-test response. If an improper re- quency display returns or when a diagnostic
sponse is observed, then the cause may be code is displayed.
verified in more detail using the diagnos-
tics. A list of diagnostic codes for the VIR-32/33 and for
the VIR-432/433 can be found in the maintenance
An extensive self-test diagnostic routine also is ini- section of this manual. The TEST button must be
tiated in the VIR-32/33/432/433 by pushing the pushed before any diagnostic code can be displayed.
TEST button on the CTL-32 NAV control. Note that the presence of a diagnostic (or flag) code
The following describes a typical self-test routine: does not necessarily indicate a fault. An out-of-
tolerance condition may exist that is caused by a
a. Push TEST button. typical NAV situation. The codes are a tool, de-
b. The CTL-32 modulates the active and preset signed to display conditions internal to the VIR-
display intensities from minimum to maximum 32/33/432/433.

ADDENDUM 38
TO

Insert this addendum sheet in Part B of this manual facing page 2-15
of the VIR-32/33/432/433 Installation Section (523-0772451-007118).
This addendum sheet adds note 5 references to Figure 2-5, sheet 1.
5
5
5 5

Addendum 38
523-0772719-0e711A (Facing VIR-32/33/432/433 Installation Page 2-15)
Figure 2-5 (Sheet 1 of 2). Dual DME-42 and Dual VIR-32/33

System With RMI/BDI and EHSI-74, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-5 (Sheet 2). Dual DME-42 and Dual VIR-32/33 System With RMI/BDI and EHSI-74, Interconnect Diagram

ADDENDUM 38
TO

Notes:
Addendum 38
ADDENDUM 38
TO

This addendum sheet adds note 5 to Figure 2-6, sheet 1. Also, note references are added to the diagram where
shown below.
Notes:
5
5
5 5

Addendum 38
Figure 2-6 (Sheet 1 of 2). Single DME-42 and Dual VIR-32/33

System With RMI/BDI and EHSI-74, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-6 (Sheet 2). Single DME-42 and Dual VIR-32/33 System With RMI/BDI and EHSI-74, Interconnect Diagram

ADDENDUM 38
TO

19
19

Addendum 38
Figure 2-7 (Sheet 1 of 2). Single VIR-32/33 Navigation Receiver

With CTL-32 Control, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-7 (Sheet 2). Single VIR-32/33 Navigation Receiver With CTL-32 Control, Interconnect Diagram

ADDENDUM 38
TO

Notes:
Addendum 38
ADDENDUM 38
TO

Notes:
Addendum 38
Figure 2-8 (Sheet 1 of 3). Dual VIR-32/33 Navigation Receivers

With CTL-32 Controls and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-8 (Sheet 2). Dual VIR-32/33 Navigation Receivers With CTL-32 Controls and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

ADDENDUM 38
TO

29
29

Addendum 38
ADDENDUM 38
TO

29
29

Addendum 38
Figure 2-8 (Sheet 3). Dual VIR-32/33 Navigation Receivers With

CTL-32 Controls and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-9 (Sheet 1 of 2). VIR-32/33 Navigation Receiver With CTL-30 Parallel Tuning NAV Control, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-9 (Sheet 2). VIR-32/33 Navigation Receiver With CTL-30

Parallel Tuning NAV Control, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-10. VIR-432/433 Navigation Receiver, CSDB Tune Interconnect Diagram

ADDENDUM 38
TO

This addendum sheet adds note 1 to Figure 2-10. Also, note references are added to the diagram where shown
below.
Notes:

Addendum 38
ADDENDUM 38
TO

Notes:
Addendum 38
Figure 2-11 (Sheet 1 of 3). Dual VIR-432/433 Navigation Receiver


Figure 2-11 (Sheet 2). Dual VIR-432/433 Navigation Receiver With CTL-32 Control and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

ADDENDUM 38
TO

27
27

Addendum 38
ADDENDUM 38
TO

27
27

Addendum 38
Figure 2-11 (Sheet 3). Dual VIR-432/433 Navigation Receiver With


Figure 2-12 (Sheet 1 of 2). VIR-432/433 Navigation Receiver,

ARINC 429 Tune Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-12. (Sheet 2). VIR-432/433 Navigation Receiver, ARINC 429 Tune Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-13. Dual VIR-432/433 Navigation Receiver and Dual

ARINC 429 Control Unit, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-14 (Sheet 1 of 3). Dual VIR-432/433 Navigation Receivers With ARINC 429 Controls and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-14 (Sheet 2). Dual VIR-432/433 Navigation Receivers

With ARINC 429 Controls and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-14 (Sheet 3). Dual VIR-432/433 Navigation Receivers With ARINC 429 Controls and Tie Points, Interconnect Diagram

Figure 2-15. VIR-32 Navigation Receiver,


Figure 2-16. VIR-33 NAV Receiver, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-17. VIR-432 Navigation Receiver

(CPN 622-7194-001, -011), Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-18. VIR-432 Navigation Receiver (CPN 622-7194-101, -201), Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-19. VIR-433 NAV Receiver,


Figure 2-20. 37P-4 Glideslope Antenna, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-21. 37P-5 Glideslope Antenna, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-22. 37X-2 Airborne Marker Beacon Antenna, Outline and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-23 (Sheet 1 of 3). VIR-32/33 Navigation Receiver,

Input/Output Circuit Diagram

Figure 2-23 (Sheet 2). VIR-32/33 Navigation Receiver, Input/Output Circuit Diagram

Figure 2-23 (Sheet 3). VIR-32/33 Navigation Receiver,

Input/Output Circuit Diagram

Figure 2-24. VIR-432/433 Navigation Receiver, Input/Output Circuit Diagram

þ 523-0772721-007118

Collins
Pro Line II
Operation
Table of Contents

3.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................3-1 3.11 RTU-870A AND RTU-870T RADIO TUNING UNITS,
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ............................................... 3-53
3.2 ADF-60 AUTOMATIC DIRECTION FINDING SYSTEM WITH
CTL-62 ADF CONTROL, OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .......3-1 3.12 RTU-42X0 RADIO TUNING UNIT AND AIU-4000 AUDIO
3.2.1 Introduction ........................................................................................ 3-1 INTERFACE UNIT, OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ............ 3-91
3.2.2 Operating Controls ............................................................................. 3-1
3.13 TDR-90 TRANSPONDER WITH CTL-92 ATC CONTROL,
3.2.3 Operating Procedures......................................................................... 3-1
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ............................................... 3-91
3.2.4 Normal Operation............................................................................... 3-6
3.2.5 ADF Operational Considerations ...................................................... 3-7 3.13.1 Introduction..................................................................................... 3-91
3.2.6 Self-Test .............................................................................................. 3-8 3.13.2 Operating Procedures ..................................................................... 3-95
3.13.3 Normal Operation ........................................................................... 3-95
3.3 ADF-462 AUTOMATIC DIRECTION FINDING SYSTEM 3.13.4 Self-Test........................................................................................... 3-96
WITH CTL-62 ADF CONTROL, OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS..........................................................................3-8 3.14 TDR-94/94D TRANSPONDER OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS ....................................................................... 3-96
3.3.1 Introduction ........................................................................................ 3-8
3.3.2 Operation............................................................................................. 3-8 3.14.1 Introduction..................................................................................... 3-96
3.14.2 Operating Instructions ................................................................... 3-97
3.4 ALT-55 RADIO ALTIMETER SYSTEM,
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ................................................3-10 3.15 VHF-21( )/22( ) VHF COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
WITH CTL-22 COMM CONTROL, OPERATING
3.4.1 Introduction ...................................................................................... 3-10
INSTRUCTIONS ....................................................................... 3-99
3.4.2 Operating Procedures....................................................................... 3-14
3.15.1 Introduction..................................................................................... 3-99
3.5 ALT-50 RADIO ALTIMETER SYSTEM, 3.15.2 Operating Controls ......................................................................... 3-99
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ................................................3-14 3.15.3 Operating Procedures ................................................................... 3-101
3.6 DME-42 DISTANCE MEASURING EQUIPMENT, 3.16 VHF-422( ) VHF COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ................................................3-15 WITH CTL-22 COMM CONTROL, OPERATING
3.6.1 Introduction ...................................................................................... 3-15 INSTRUCTIONS ..................................................................... 3-104
3.6.2 Operating Controls ........................................................................... 3-16 3.16.1 Introduction................................................................................... 3-104
3.6.3 Operating Procedures....................................................................... 3-20 3.16.2 Operating Controls ....................................................................... 3-104
3.16.3 Operating Procedures ................................................................... 3-104
3.7 DME-442 DISTANCE MEASURING EQUIPMENT WITH
CTL-32 NAV CONTROL, OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.....3-23 3.17 VIR-32 NAVIGATION RECEIVER WITH CTL-32 NAV
3.7.1 Introduction ...................................................................................... 3-23 CONTROL, OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS......................... 3-107
3.7.2 Operating Controls ........................................................................... 3-23 3.17.1 Introduction................................................................................... 3-107
3.7.3 Operating Procedures....................................................................... 3-23 3.17.2 Operating Controls ....................................................................... 3-107
3.17.3 Operating Procedures ................................................................... 3-110
3.8 GPS-4000 GLOBAL POSITIONING SENSOR,
3.17.4 Indicators and Displays ................................................................ 3-113
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ................................................3-25
3.18 VIR-432 NAVIGATION RECEIVER WITH CTL-32 NAV
3.9 MND-640( ) MULTISENSOR NAVIGATION DISPLAY CONTROL, OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS......................... 3-122
SYSTEM, OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS...............................3-25
3.18.1 Introduction................................................................................... 3-122
3.9.1 SDU-640A/640B Displays and Controls, 3.18.2 Operating Controls ....................................................................... 3-122
Operational Description................................................................... 3-25 3.18.3 Operating Procedures ................................................................... 3-122
3.10 RMI-36 BDI-36 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ......................3-44 3.18.4 Indicators and Displays ................................................................ 3-126
3.10.1 Displays and Controls .................................................................... 3-44 3.19 CTL-23 CONTROL.................................................................... 3-126
3.10.2 Operating Procedures..................................................................... 3-45
NOTICE: This section replaces sixth edition dated12 May 1994 and revision.
Page No Issue
* Title ...........................................11 Apr 97

* 3-1 thru 3-51 .............................11 Apr 97
* 3-52 Blank.................................11 Apr 97
* 3-53 thru 3-117 .........................11 Apr 97
* 3-118 Blank ...............................11 Apr 97
* 3-119 thru 3-127........................11 Apr 97
* 3-128 Blank ...............................11 Apr 97
* 3-129 thru 3-130 Deleted ..........11 Apr 97


1 29 Sep 92 None
1 15 Sep 95 None

section III
operation
3.1 INTRODUCTION 3.2 ADF-60 AUTOMATIC DIRECTION

FINDING SYSTEM WITH CTL-62 ADF
The following paragraphs provide a brief review of CONTROL, OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
the operational features of the Pro Line II Comm/ 3.2.1 Introduction
Nav Pulse units that are available. The operation of
the following are covered in this section: The original Pro Line ADF-60 system provides re-
ception of signals from a selected ground station
ADF-60/462 Automatic Direction Finding System within the frequency range of 190 to 1749.5 kHz
with CTL-62 Control with three functional modes of operation. In ANT
ALT-50/55 Radio Altimeter Systems mode, the ADF receiver functions as an aural re-
DME-42/442 Distance Measuring Equipment ceiver, providing only an aural output of the re-
GPS-4000 Global Positioning Sensor ceived signal. In ADF mode, it functions as an
MND-640 Multisensor Navigation Display System automatic direction finder receiver in which bear-
RMI/BDI-36 Radio Magnetic Indicator ing-to-the-station is presented on an associated
RTU-870A/870T Radio Tuning Unit bearing indicator and an aural output of the re-
RTU-42X0 Radio Tuning Unit and AIU-4000 Audio ceived signal is provided. A TONE mode provides a
Interface Unit 1000-Hz aural output tone, when a signal is being
TDR-90 Transponder with CTL-92 Control received, to allow identification of keyed CW sig-
TDR-94/94D Transponder nals. The ADF-60 system is used with the CTL-62
VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) VHF Comm Transceiver with ADF Control and the CAD-62 Control Adapter.
CTL-22 Control 3.2.2 Operating Controls
VIR-32/432 Navigation Receiver with CTL-32
Control All operating controls for the ADF-60 system are lo-
cated on the CTL-62 ADF Control. Both models of
The CTL-X2A controls are operationally the same the CTL-62 are shown in Figure 3-1; the controls
as the CTL-X2s. The -X2As should be used only if a and indicators are described in Table 3-1.
sunlight readability problem exists with the CTL- 3.2.3 Operating Procedures
X2’s.
Caution
Warning The ADF-60 system and CTL-62 have been

designed to exhibit a very high degree of
It is possible that electronic control systems functional integrity. Nevertheless, the user
on board an airplane (for example, engine must recognize that it is not practical to
controls, fuel controls, temperature sensors, provide monitoring for all conceivable sys-
autopilots, etc) could be susceptible to tem failures and, however unlikely, it is
transmissions from communications equip- possible that erroneous operation could oc-
ment, DME, transponder, etc, that could in- cur without a fault indication. It is the re-
terfere with airplane operation. If such a sponsibility of the pilot to detect such an oc-
situation occurs, discontinue transmission currence by means of cross-checks with
(if an hf is tuning, select a new frequency) redundant or correlated information avail-
and, if necessary, turn off the radio. able in the cockpit.

operation 523-0772721
Figure 3-1. CTL-62 ADF Control, Controls and Indicators

Table 3-1. CTL-62 ADF Control, Controls and Indicators.
CONTROL/INDICATOR FUNCTION/DESCRIPTION
Active frequency display The active frequency; the frequency to which the ADF-60 is tuned. In dual versions of the CTL-62,
the upper window displays the number 1 ADF frequency, while the lower window displays the num-
ber 2 ADF frequency. In self-test mode and if an out-of-tolerance condition is detected, the word
“dIAG” is displayed in the upper window while the diagnostic code is displayed in the lower window.
Preset frequency display The preset frequency is displayed in the lower window. In dual versions of the CTL-62, the lower
window displays the number 2 ADF frequency. In self-test mode and if an out-of-tolerance condition
is detected, the diagnostic code is displayed in the lower window.
Compare annunciator ACT momentarily illuminates when frequencies are being changed. If the ACT annunciator contin-
ues flashing, the receiver is not tuned to the displayed active frequency.
Annunciators The single ADF control contains MEM (memory) and RMT (remote) annunciators. The MEM an-
nunciator illuminates whenever a frequency is displayed in the lower window. (The dual versions
have no memory capability.) The RMT annunciator may or may not illuminate when an external
switch (LOCAL/REMOTE or similar) is in the REMOTE position. This indicates that the radio is
being tuned by another control unit (2-out-of-5, for example). Dashes will appear in the lower win-
dow and all of the controls on the CTL-62 are disabled. The frequency displayed in the upper win-
dow is the current active frequency being sent by the radio to the CTL-62 control. The RMT annun-
ciator will not illuminate when the radio is being tuned by an FMS or similar flight management
system. An FMS simply “tunes” the CTL-62 just like the frequency select knobs do, and the control
then tunes the radio. All controls on the CTL-62 remain operational when an FMS is being used to
“tune” the radio.
Volume control The optional volume control, if present, is concentric with the power and mode switch.
Light sensor The built-in light sensor automatically controls the display brightness. There are several installa-
tion options for either manual or automatic dimming. Consult the aircraft drawings for details.
Power and mode switch The power and mode switch contains four detented positions.
OFF (optional) The optional OFF position can interrupt system power. (Some installations may have other facilities
for primary power switching.) Selecting ANT, ADF, or TONE applies power to the ADF system and
establishes the system mode of operation.
ANT In ANT mode, the ADF receiver functions as an aural receiver, providing only an aural output of the
received signal.
ADF In ADF mode, it functions as an automatic direction finder receiver in which bearing-to-the-station
is presented on an associated bearing indicator and an aural output of the received signal is pro-
vided.
TONE TONE mode provides a 1000-Hz aural output tone when a keyed CW signal is being received.
XFR/MEM switch (single This switch is a 3-position, spring-loaded toggle switch. When moved to the XFR position, the preset
version units only) frequency is transferred up to the active display and the ADF-60 retunes. The previously active fre-
quency becomes the new preset frequency and is displayed in the lower window. When this switch is
moved to the MEM position, one of the four stacked memory frequencies is loaded into the preset
display. Successive pushes to the MEM position cycles the four memory frequencies through the dis-
play (...2,3,4,1,2,3....). The frequency that was in the preset window is:
1. Maintained in memory if it was originally assigned as a stored frequency, or
2. Discarded if it was originally direct tuned either as a preset or active.
1/2 switch The 1/2 switch connects the tuning knobs to either the upper window or lower window for tuning, 1
for upper and 2 for lower.
Tuning (single version Normally, tuning is accomplished by entering a frequency into the preset window and then either
units) storing that frequency in memory (STO) or entering it into the active window (XFR) to tune the re-
ceiver. An alternate method is to press the ACT button for at least 2 seconds (this gives direct tun-
ing access to the upper window) and insert the desired frequency directly into the active window.
Tuning (dual version units) Dual units can be tuned only by the direct/active method.

Table 3-1. CTL-62 ADF Control, Controls and Indicators.
Frequency select knobs Two concentric knobs control the preset or active frequency displays. The larger knob changes the
1000’s and 100’s kHz digits. The smaller knob changes the 10’s, units, and tenths kHz digits. Each
detent of the larger knob changes the frequency in 100-kHz steps. Each detent of the smaller knob
changes the frequency in 1-kHz steps with the exception that the first two detent positions following
a change in rotational direction will cause a 0.5-kHz change. Rapid rotation of the smaller knob will
cause frequency changes greater than 1 kHz as a function of the rate of rotation. Frequencies roll
over at the upper and lower limits. The two frequency select switches are independent of each other
such that the upper and lower limit rollover of the 10-kHz digit will not cause the 100-kHz digit to
change.
ACT button (single version Push the ACT button for approximately 2 seconds to directly change the active display window from
units only) the frequency select knobs. The bottom window will display dashes. Push the ACT button a second
time for about 2 seconds to return the control to the normal 2-display tune/preset mode of operation.
The active tuning feature is not affected by power removal. If active tuning is selected (one push of
the ACT button) and power is removed from the control, active tuning will still be enabled the next
time power is reapplied to the control.
STO button (single units The STO button allows up to four preset frequencies to be selected and entered into the control’s
only) nonvolatile memory. To store a frequency, simply toggle the MEM switch until the upper window
displays the desired channel number (CH 1 through CH 4), rotate the frequency select knobs until
the lower window displays the frequency to be stored, and press the STO button twice within 5 sec-
onds. After approximately 5 seconds, the control will return to the normal 2-display tune/preset
mode of operation.
TEST button Push the TEST button to initiate the radio self-test routine. Self-test is active only while the TEST
button is pushed. In dual versions, both ADF units are tested and both displays modulate in inten-
sity while the TEST button is pushed.
3.2.3.1 Equipment Turn On mode of operation as determined by the mode select

switch — the 1/2 switch only determines which fre-
The ADF-60( ) receiver and the CTL-62 ADF Con-
quency is being changed by the frequency select
trol are turned on by rotating the power and mode
knobs.
switch on the ADF control to the ANT, ADF, or
TONE position (on those controls that have the op- For future developments, the CTL-62 has a normal
tional OFF position) or by turning on the avionics frequency range of 190.00 to 1799.5 kHz. However,
master switch (for those controls that do not have when used with the ADF-60, the upper frequency is
an OFF position). limited to 1749.5 kHz. Rotation of either frequency
select knob increases or decreases the frequency
After power is applied, the CTL-62 displays the fre-
corresponding to the position of the 1/2 select
quencies in the upper and lower windows that were
switch. The larger outer knob changes the fre-
present when the equipment was last turned off.
quency in 1000- and 100-kHz increments (first and
3.2.3.2 Frequency Selection (ADF Controls second numbers from the left). The smaller inner
With 1/2 Select Switch) knob changes the frequency in 10’s, units, and
tenths kHz increments (third, fourth, and fifth
Frequency selection is made by using either the
numbers from the left).
frequency select knobs or a remote tuning input
from another system (NCS, FMS, etc) or control The ACT annunciator on the control momentarily
(such as a 2-out-of-5 control). illuminates while the receiver is tuning to the new
frequency.
The upper window displays the frequency of the
number 1 ADF, and the lower window displays the
frequency of the number 2 ADF. To change fre- Note
quencies, position the 1/2 select switch to 1 or 2 (1
for the upper window frequency, 2 for the lower If the ACT annunciator starts flashing, it
window frequency), and use the frequency select indicates that the receiver is not tuned to
knobs to enter the new frequency in the applicable the frequency displayed in the upper or
window. The pilot should note that both ADF re- lower window as determined by the position
ceivers will be active and both will have the same of the 1/2 select switch.

3.2.3.3 Frequency Selection (ADF Controls The CTL-62 has a nonvolatile memory that permits
With XFR/MEM Switch) storing up to four preset frequencies. Once stored,
these frequencies can be recalled to the preset dis-
play (lower window) by positioning the XFR/MEM
Note switch to the MEM position. The storage location
(CH 1 through CH 4) for the recalled frequency is
The following discussion assumes that di- displayed in the upper window while the XFR/MEM
rect active tuning is not selected. If the con- switch is in the MEM position. All four stored fre-
trol is in the direct active tuning mode, the quencies can be displayed one at a time in the lower
lower window will be displaying dashes in- window with their memory locations shown in the
stead of a preset frequency, and the fre- upper window by repeatedly toggling the XFR/
quency select knobs will only change the ac- MEM switch to the MEM position. After the desired
tive frequency displayed in the upper stored frequency has been recalled to the preset
window. To cancel direct active tuning and display, it can be transferred to the active display
return the control to the normal 2-display by momentarily positioning the XFR/MEM switch
tune/preset mode, press the ACT button for to the XFR position. (The XFR/MEM switch is not
about 2 seconds, then release it. available on controls with a 1/2 select switch.)
Frequency selection is made using either the fre- When the ADF-60 is being remotely tuned, the
quency select knobs, the XFR/MEM (transfer/ RMT annunciator may or may not illuminate, de-
memory recall switch), or a remote tuning input pending on the installation. If wired, it will illumi-
from another system (NCS, FMS, etc) or control nate when an external switch (LOCAL/REMOTE or
(such as a 2-out-of-5 control). similar) is in the REMOTE position. This indicates
that the radio is being tuned by another control
For future developments, the CTL-62 has a normal unit (2-out-of-5, for example). Dashes will appear in
frequency range of 190.00 to 1799.5 kHz. However, the lower window and all of the controls on the
when used with the ADF-60, the upper frequency is CTL-62 will be inoperative until LOCAL control is
limited to 1749.5 kHz. Rotation of either frequency selected. The frequency displayed in the upper
select knob increases or decreases the frequency in window is the current active frequency being sent
the preset frequency display. The larger outer knob by the radio to the CTL-62 control and is stored in
changes the frequency in 1000- and 100-kHz incre- nonvolatile memory. The RMT annunciator will not
ments (first and second numbers from the left). The illuminate when the radio is being tuned by an
smaller inner knob changes the frequency in 10’s, FMS or similar flight management system. An FMS
units, and tenths kHz increments (third, fourth, simply “tunes” the CTL-62 just like the frequency
and fifth numbers from the left). select knobs do, and the control then tunes the ra-
dio. All controls on the CTL-62 remain operational
After the desired preset frequency is set in the when an FMS is being used to “tune” the radio.
lower window, it can be transferred to the upper
window (active frequency) by momentarily posi- During normal 2-display tune/preset operation, all
tioning the XFR/MEM switch to the XFR position. frequency selections and revisions are done to the
At the same time that the preset frequency is trans- preset frequency shown in the lower window. How-
ferred to the active display, the previously active ever, the active frequency shown in the upper win-
frequency is transferred to the preset display. Also, dow can be selected directly as described in the fol-
the ACT annunciator on the control momentarily lowing paragraph. (On controls with a 1/2 select
illuminates while the receiver is tuning to the new switch, the frequency to be tuned is determined by
frequency. the position of the 1/2 select switch.)
3.2.3.4 Direct Active Frequency Selection
Note The active frequency shown in the upper window
can be selected directly with the frequency select
If the ACT annunciator starts flashing, it knobs by pushing the ACT button for about 2 sec-
indicates that the receiver is not tuned to onds. The direct active tuning mode is indicated by
the active frequency displayed in the upper dashes appearing in the lower window. Also, the
window. ACT annunciator will flash as the frequency select

knobs are turned to indicate that the receiver is Note

being retuned. Pressing the ACT button for about 2
seconds a second time returns the control to the When storing a frequency, the second ac-
normal 2-display tune/preset mode. The active tuation of the STO button must be done
tuning feature is not affected by power removal. If within 5 seconds after the first actuation of
active tuning is selected (one push of the ACT but- the STO button. If more than 5 seconds
ton) and power is removed from the control, active elapse, the control will revert to the normal
tuning will still be enabled the next time power is 2-display tune/preset mode of operation. If
reapplied to the control. (The ACT button is not this occurs, pushing the STO button twice
available on controls with a 1/2 select switch.) within 5 seconds will store the frequency in
the selected location.
Note
After a frequency has been stored in memory, it will
If the ACT annunciator starts flashing after remain there for repeated use until changed by
the frequency has been selected, it indicates using the STO button (recalling a stored frequency
that the receiver is not tuned to the active for use does not remove it from memory). Memory
frequency displayed in the upper window. is retained even when the unit is turned off for an
As a safety feature, the CTL-62 automatically extended period of time.
switches to the direct active tuning mode when a
3.2.4 Normal Operation
frequency select knob is operated while the STO,
TEST, or XFR/MEM switches are actuated or the a. Function selection: Ensure that all applicable
remote transfer or memory recall inputs to the con- circuit breakers are in and that the avionics
trol are grounded. To return to the normal 2- master switch is on. Position the mode switch to
display tune/preset mode, simply push the ACT ANT, ADF, or TONE (BFO).
button for about 2 seconds, then release it. b. Frequency selection: Using the preceding fre-
3.2.3.5 Remote Transfer and Selection of quency select procedures, tune the ADF until
Frequencies the desired frequency is indicated in the upper
window on those controls with an XFR/MEM
Some aircraft may be equipped with a remote switch or in the upper or lower window as de-
transfer/memory recall switch, usually mounted on termined by the position of the 1/2 select switch
the yoke or cyclic, to permit remote transfer and on those controls with a 1/2 select switch.
selection of frequencies. Operation of this switch is Aurally verify the station identifier.
identical to that of the XFR/MEM switch on the 1. ANT function: Position the CTL-62 mode
CTL-62. (Remote transfer/memory recall is not switch to ANT. The RMI pointer will park
available on controls with a 1/2 select switch.) horizontally. Select ADF on the audio sys-
tem, and adjust the volume (volume control
3.2.3.6 Frequency Storage is optional on the CTL-62) as required for
comfortable audio reception.
Up to four preset frequencies can be stored in the
nonvolatile memory in the CTL-62 for future recall. Note
The control must be in the 2-display tune/preset
mode in order to store frequencies (frequencies An ADF-60A receiver will park the RMI
cannot be stored if the control is in the direct active pointer at 90 degrees (right-wing position)
tuning mode). To program the memory: with a top-mounted antenna and at 270 de-
grees (left-wing position) with a bottom-
a. Toggle the MEM switch until the upper window mounted antenna. The ADF-60B receiver
displays the desired channel number (CH 1 will park the RMI pointer at 90 degrees
through CH 4). (right-wing position) with either a top-
b. Rotate the frequency select knobs until the mounted or bottom-mounted antenna.
lower window displays the frequency to be
stored. 2. ADF function: Position the CTL-62 mode
c. Push the STO button twice within 5 seconds. switch to ADF. The RMI pointer will indi-
(The STO button is not available on controls cate bearing to the tuned station. Adjust
with a 1/2 select switch.) the volume as required.

Note c. The propagation path of low-frequency trans-

missions is affected by variations in terrain and
The RMI pointer will remain parked in ground conductivity. This can result in inaccu-
ADF mode if the ADF-60 system is not re- rate ADF bearings when a shoreline is inter-
ceiving a reliable signal. The ADF-60 may posed between the aircraft and the station
also cause the RMI pointer to momentarily (shoreline effect) or when the propagation path
park during station passage because of sig- is “bent” by mountainous terrain.
nal loss. d. ADF navigation is based upon the reception of
ground waves from the transmitter. Skywaves
3. TONE function: Position the CTL-62 mode reflected from the ionosphere may interfere
switch to TONE (BFO). A 1000-Hz tone will with the ground waves at night, especially at
identify keyed CW stations. long ranges when the ground waves are weak.
3.2.5 ADF Operational Considerations This may result in inaccurate ADF bearings
that fluctuate with the skywave path.
a. While the ADF-60 bearing operation is im- e. In some parts of the country, commercial
proved in the presence of atmospheric interfer- broadcast stations may offer the only naviga-
ence or precipitation static, extremely severe tional aid available. Broadcast stations can of-
interference levels can disrupt its performance. ten be used to supplement the low-frequency
Caution navigation facilities, but they must be used
with care. Several limitations of commercial
High rf field strength during hf communica- broadcast stations should be understood before
tion transmissions may interfere with ADF- they are used in air navigation.
60( ) operation and cause significant bear- 1. At commercial broadcast frequencies, the
ing changes. However, the ADF-60A with ground waves may be overridden by unreli-
Service Bulletin 6 and the ADF-60B with able skywaves, particularly at night.
Service Bulletin 5 provide an hf disable 2. More than one station may be transmitting
function when the hf ptt line is connected to on the same frequency in a given area. It is
the ADF-60( ). With these modified units, absolutely necessary to identify the station
when HF COMM is selected and the mic is being used. Check for time of operation,
keyed, the ADF bearing pointer will “freeze” frequency, and call letters of the station to
for 15 to 30 seconds or until the mic is unk- ensure the correct station is being received.
eyed, at which time normal ADF operation 3. For best results in ADF use of commercial
is restored. If the mic is keyed for 15 to 30 stations, try to choose stations of relatively
seconds, the ADF bearing pointer will park high power and low frequency.
until the mic is unkeyed, at which time
Caution
normal ADF operation is restored.
b. Many cochannel station assignments are in ex- Commercial broadcast stations are not
istence in both the low-frequency and broadcast authorized for primary IFR navigation.
bands. The operator should aurally identify the
station that is being received before relying f. The term “nondirectional radio beacon” (NDB)
upon the indicated bearing. is a general designation for lf/mf radio naviga-
tion aids primarily intended for use with a mo-
Caution bile direction finder to provide bearing informa-
tion. They generally operate within the 200- to
Nondirectional beacon signals are subject to 415-kHz band, radiating a nondirectional signal
interfering signals that could result in er- modulated by 1000 Hz, which may be used for
roneous bearing information. Nearly all dis- navigation guidance either while enroute or as
turbances which affect ADF bearing will be an approach to an airport.
apparent in the audio along with the sta-
tion identification. Interfering voice, music, Low-powered nondirectional radio beacons are
or erroneous identification signals should installed at some fan marker sites or at other
be regarded as a warning that erroneous locations near the airport to help the pilot fol-
bearing information could be displayed. low a more precise holding pattern or are used

in conjunction with instrument approaches. The The ADF control unit selects ANT, ADF, tone and
beacon should not be depended upon for ranges self-test functions. The ADF control unit may be ei-
over 15 or 20 miles. ther a Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB)
g. Compass locator transmitters are often situated control, such as a CTL-62, or an ARINC 429 ADF
at either the middle (LMM) or the outer (LOM) control. The relative bearing indicator may be a
marker beacon sites. The operating frequencies sine/cosine radio magnetic indicator (RMI) such as
are between 200 and 415 kHz with an effective the Collins RMI-36 or BDI-36, a CSDB indicator
range of at least 15 miles. At some locations, (part of the Electronic Flight Instrumentation Sys-
higher powered radio beacons are used as outer tem), or an ARINC 429 indicator.
marker compass locators. These generally carry
transcribed weather broadcast information. 3.3.2 Operation
Compass locators transmit 2-letter ID groups.
The outer locator transmits the first two letters The ADF-462 system receives transmissions from a
of the localizer ID group, and the middle locator selected ground station, indicates relative bearing
transmits the last two letters of the group. to that station, and provides audio for determining
station identification and listening to voice an-
3.2.6 Self-Test nouncements. The ground station must be within
Position the CTL-62 mode switch to ADF and tune the normal operating range of 190 to 1799.5 kHz or
a nearby NDB, outer marker, or broadcast station. the extended frequency range of 2179 to 2185 kHz.
Push and hold the TEST button on the CTL-62 (The extended frequency range is strap enabled at
ADF Control. During self-test, the CTL-62 modu- the Collins CTL-62 control mating connector.) The
lates the intensity of the upper and lower displays ADF-462 (-111 status) tunes an additional fre-
from minimum to maximum to annunciate that quency range of 2088 to 2094 kHz. The CTL-62 is
self-test is in progress. The RMI pointer will rotate shown in Figure 3-1 and described in Table 3-1.
90 degrees clockwise (top-mounted antenna) or 90 3.3.2.1 Function Selection
degrees counterclockwise (bottom-mounted an-
tenna) from the previous valid indication. Release Set ADF control unit function switch to ANT, ADF,
the TEST button and verify that the RMI pointer or tone.
returns to that indication.
3.3.2.2 Frequency Selection
Note Tune the ADF control unit until desired frequency
is indicated in the control unit display window.
If the signal received is weak or of poor Verify the station identifier.
quality, the bearing pointer rotation will be
slow. 3.3.2.3 ANT Function
3.2.6.1 CTL-62 ADF Control (622-6522-001
Set ADF control unit function switch to ANT. The
Through -016) Diagnostic Codes
bearing indicator pointer will park horizontally or
When the CTL-62 is used with the CAD-62 to con- indicate an invalid bearing. Adjust the volume as
trol the ADF-60 system, certain diagnostic codes required for comfortable audio reception.
can be displayed in the self-test mode. (The TEST
button must be pushed before any diagnostic code 3.3.2.4 ADF Function
can be displayed.) Refer to the maintenance section Set ADF control unit function switch to ADF. The
of this manual for a listing of the diagnostic codes. bearing indicator pointer will indicate bearing to
the tuned station. Adjust the volume as required.
3.3 ADF-462 AUTOMATIC DIRECTION
FINDING SYSTEM WITH CTL-62 ADF 3.3.2.5 Tone Function
CONTROL, OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Set ADF control unit function switch to TONE. A
3.3.1 Introduction
1000-Hz tone will identify a keyed CW station. The
The ADF-462 system requires an ADF control unit tone heard is generated by an a stable multivibra-
and a relative bearing indicator for system operator in the ADF-462 receiver and is not an actual
tion. beat frequency oscillator.

3.3.2.6 Functional Test when ANT mode is selected, or when ADF mode
is selected, but no signal is present at the an-
Note tenna.
b. Use ANT mode for clearer audio reception.
When the ADF-462 system is not receiving c. The TONE switch enables a 1000-Hz generator
a reliable signal, the relative bearing indi- to make identification of CW signals possible.
cator pointer will remain parked or invalid d. Functional testing (self-test) of the ADF-462
in ADF mode. The ADF-462 may momen- can be accomplished at any time.
tarily park during station crossings because
of signal loss. Caution
With ADF control unit in ADF function, activate The ADF-462 Automatic Direction Finding
the self-test switch. The bearing indicator pointer System has been designed to exhibit a very
will rotate 90 degrees from previous valid indica- high degree of functional integrity. Never-
tion and return to that indication when self-test theless, the user must recognize that it is
switch is released. CSDB systems with CTL-62 not practical to provide monitoring for all
Control will display a diagnostic code in the control conceivable system failures and that, how-
display during self-test. Diagnostic displays in ever unlikely, it is possible that erroneous
ARINC 429 systems depend on the type of control operation could occur without a fault indi-
or indicator used. A list of the diagnostic codes and cation. It is the responsibility of the pilot to
their meanings for CSDB and ARINC systems can detect such an occurrence by means of
be found in the maintenance section of this manual. cross-checks with redundant or correlated
information available in the cockpit.
3.3.2.7 Points to Remember
e. While the ADF-462 bearing operation is im-

Caution proved over the ADF-60( ) in the presence of
atmospheric interference, or precipitation
Nondirectional beacon signals are subject to static, extremely severe interference levels can
interfering signals that could result in er- disrupt its performance.
roneous bearing information. Nearly all dis- f. Many cochannel station assignments are in ex-
turbances which affect ADF bearing will be istence in both the low-frequency and broadcast
apparent in the audio. Interfering voice, bands. The operator must aurally identify the
music, or erroneous identification signals station that is being received before relying
should be regarded as a warning that erro- upon the indicated bearing.
neous bearing information could be dis- g. The propagation path of low-frequency trans-
played. missions is affected by variations in terrain and
ground conductivity. This can result in inaccu-
Caution rate ADF bearings when a shoreline is inter-
posed between the aircraft and the station
High rf field strength during hf communica- (shoreline effect) or when the propagation path
tions transmissions may interfere with is “bent” by mountainous terrain.
ADF-462 operation and cause significant h. ADF navigation is based upon the reception of
bearing changes. However, the ADF-462 ground waves from the transmitter. Skywaves
ADF Receiver includes an hf disable func- reflected from the ionosphere may interfere
tion when the hf push-to-talk line is con- with the ground waves at night when at long
nected to the ADF-462. When the hf system ranges where the ground waves are weak. This
is selected and the microphone is keyed, the may result in inaccurate ADF bearings that
ADF relative bearing indicator pointer will fluctuate with the skywave path.
“freeze” until the microphone is unkeyed, at i. In some parts of the country commercial broad-
which time normal ADF operation is re- cast stations may offer the only navigational
stored. aid available. Broadcast stations often can be
used to supplement the low-frequency naviga-
a. The bearing indicator pointer will park in a tion facilities, but they must be used with care.
horizontal position or indicate invalid bearing Several limitations of commercial broadcast

stations should be understood before they are tion. Compass locators transmit 2-letter ident
used in navigation. groups. The outer locator transmits the first
1. At commercial broadcast frequencies, the two letters of the localizer ident group and the
ground waves may be overridden by unreli- middle locator the last two letters of the group.
able skywaves, particularly at night.
2. More than one station may be transmitting 3.4 ALT-55 RADIO ALTIMETER SYSTEM,
on the same frequency in a given area. It is OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
absolutely necessary to identify the station
being used. Check for time of operation, 3.4.1 Introduction
frequency, and call letters of the station to
ensure the correct station is being received. The purpose of this paragraph is to describe the op-
3. For best results in ADF use of commercial eration of the ALT-55 Radio Altimeter System. This
broadcast stations, try to choose stations of includes a description of the controls, displays, and
relatively high power and low frequency. indicators on the various indicators available.
Figure 3-2 and Figure 3-3 show the controls and in-
Note dicators of the ALI-55/55A/55B indicator. These are
described in Table 3-2. Figure 3-4 and Figure 3-5
Commercial broadcast stations are not show the DRI-55 Digital Radio Altitude Indicator.
authorized for primary IFR navigation. The controls and indicators for the DRI-55 are de-
scribed in Table 3-3.
j. The term “nondirectional beacon” (ndb) is a
general designation for lf/mf radio navigation The ALI-55 indicator is used primarily in fixed-
aids primarily intended for use with a mobile wing aircraft. The display of the ALI-55 is linear
direction finder to provide bearing information. from 0 to 500 feet with major scale divisions every
They generally operate within the 190 to 850 50 feet and minor divisions every 10 feet. From 500
kHz and 1615 to 1799.5 kHz bands, radiating a to 2500 feet, the scale is compressed and linear
nondirectional signal modulated by 1020 Hz, with major scale marks every 500 feet and minor
which may be used for navigation guidance ei- scale marks every 100 feet.
ther while enroute or as an approach to an air-
port. The ADF-462 (-111 status) also operates The ALI-55A indicator is intended for use in heli-
in the frequency range of 2088 to 2094 kHz. copters. The scale is linear from 0 to 100 feet with
Low-powered nondirectional radio beacons are major divisions every 10 feet and minor divisions
installed at some fan marker sites or at other every 5 feet. The scale is compressed and linear
locations near the airport to help the pilot fol- from 100 to 500 feet with major scale marks every
low a more precise holding pattern or are used 100 feet and minor scale marks every 50 feet. From
in conjunction with instrument approaches. The 500 to 2500 feet the scale is compressed and linear
beacon should not be depended on for ranges with major scale marks every 500 feet.
over 25 to 30 km (15 to 20 miles).
k. Compass locator transmitters are often situated The ALI-55B is a metric scaled unit used primarily
at either the middle (LMM) or the outer (LOM) in fixed-wing aircraft. The scale of the ALI-55B is
marker beacon sites. The operating frequencies linear from 0 to 152.4 metres with major scale divi-
are between 190 and 535 kHz with an effective sions every 10 metres and minor divisions every 5
range of at least 25 km (15 miles). At some loca- metres. The display is compressed and linear from
tions, higher powered radio beacons are used as 152.4 to 750 metres with major scale divisions
outer marker compass locators. These generally every 100 metres and minor divisions every 50 me-
carry transcribed weather broadcast informa- tres.

Figure 3-2. ALI-55/55A/55B Radio Altitude Indicator
Figure 3-3. ALI-55 Radio Altitude Indicator, Controls and Indicators

Figure 3-4. DRI-55 Digital Radio Altitude Indicator
Figure 3-5. DRI-55 Digital Radio Altitude Indicator, Controls and Indicators

Table 3-2. ALI-55/55A/55B Radio Altitude Indicator, Controls and Indicators.
Pointer and dial scale The pointer indicates aircraft height above the terrain during the approach phase of flight. The scale
of the indicators displays altitude between –20 and 2500 feet (ALI-55/55A) or –6.1 and +750 metres
(ALI-55B).
Decision height (DH) index The DH knob selects the decision height, which is displayed by the decision height index.
and DH adjustment knob
DH indicator The DH indicator lights when the aircraft descends to the selected decision height, as indicated by
the DH index.
Warning flag The warning flag indicates a loss of power whenever it comes into view during normal operation
(excluding self-test). The ALI-55/55A/55B indicator also provides an instrument flag output for an
external system (such as a flight director). When power is lost, the indicator flag comes into view
and the instrument flag output to the external systems changes to a warn state.
TEST switch Pushing the TEST switch on the ALI-55/55A/55B indicator initiates a functional test of the ALT-55
Radio Altimeter System (excluding antennas). When the ALT-55 system, excluding antennas, is
functioning properly, the pointer indicates a self-test altitude of 50 ±5 feet (ALI-55/55A) or 15.2 me-
tres (ALI-55B).
Table 3-3. DRI-55 Digital Radio Altitude Indicator, Controls and Indicators.
Radio altitude display The radio altitude display indicates aircraft height above the terrain. The display increments are 10
feet below 1000 feet and 50 feet above 1000 feet. The display range is from 0 to 2500 feet (when used
with an ALT-55 system). Above 2500 feet the display is blanked.
Decision height (DH) knob The DH/PUSH TEST knob selects the decision height which is displayed in the DH window. The de-
and display cision height is selected by turning the DH/PUSH TEST knob clockwise or counterclockwise until
the DH display indicates the desired decision height. The user may set the decision height anywhere
between the 10-foot increments by interpolating. The decision height range is from 0 to 980 feet. The
DH annunciator lights when the aircraft descends to a selected decision height, as indicated on the
DH display.
DH/PUSH TEST knob Pushing the DH/PUSH TEST knob on the DRI-55 indicator initiates a functional self-test routine of
the radio altimeter system (excluding antennas). The routine is as follows.
a. Decision height is displayed in the RAD ALT display window for 2 seconds (to the nearest foot)
and may be adjusted during the first 2 seconds the knob is pushed.
b. The system test altitude (50 feet or 15.2 metres) is displayed for 2 seconds.
c. Lamp test (8888) is displayed until the DH/PUSH TEST knob is released.

3.4.2 Operating Procedures This is normal for aircraft where the altimeter
antennas are nearer the ground when the air-
Caution craft is parked than at touchdown.
b. The radio altimeter is intended to give accurate
Although the ALT-55 Radio Altimeter Sys- altitude information over a wide variety of ter-
tem has been designed to exhibit a very rain characteristics. Altimeter accuracy may be
high degree of functional integrity, the user affected, however, under exceptional circum-
must recognize that it is not practical to stances. The dominant reflecting surface may
provide monitoring and/or self-test for all not coincide with treetop level when flying over
conceivable system failures and, however triple-tier jungle or with the top of the snow
unlikely, it is possible that erroneous opera- when flying over very deep, fluffy snow.
tion could occur without a fault indication. c. The time constant of the radio altimeter is
It is the responsibility of the pilot to detect about 90 milliseconds. While this allows the al-
such an occurrence by means of cross- timeter output to follow most terrain accu-
checks with redundant or correlated infor- rately, the altimeter will not respond to ex-
mation available in the cockpit. tremely rapid fluctuations in terrain.
d. At large pitch and/or roll attitudes, altimeter
3.4.2.1 Self-Test accuracy may be impaired.
e. Frequent use of the self-test feature, especially
a. Apply power to the ALT-55 Radio Altimeter before takeoff and at the beginning of the ap-
System. proach, will increase the probability of detect-
b. Adjust DH knob on indicator to set DH index to ing altimeter system malfunctions.
20 (ALI-55/55A) feet or 6.1 metres (ALI-55B).
c. Push and hold TEST switch on indicator and 3.5 ALT-50 RADIO ALTIMETER SYSTEM,
observe indicator for the following indications: OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
1. Pointer or digital readout: indicates 50 ±5
feet or 15.2 metres +1.52 metres. The descriptive material presented in the preceding
2. DH indicator is off. paragraph applicable to the ALT-55 Radio Altime-
3. Flag is in view. ter System applies equally to the ALT-50 Radio Al-
d. With TEST switch pushed, slowly adjust DH timeter System with the exception that the ALT-50
knob to increase DH index altitude indication, maximum altitude is limited to 2000 feet. The alti-
and verify that DH indicator lights when DH tude indicators used with the ALT-50 system are
index is between 45 and 55 feet or 13.7 and 16.7 the 339H-4 and 339H-4A depicted in Figure 3-6.
metres. These two indicators are equivalent to the ALI-55
e. Release TEST switch and observe indicator. and ALI-55A indicators described above except for
Warning flag should be out of view and altitude the different scales; a consequence of the reduced
indication should be 0 foot nominal. altitude maximum. Compare Figure 3-2 and Figure
3.4.2.2 Points to Remember 3-6. The DRI-55 indicator described above can be
used with either system. Collins General Aviation
a. In some installations, the altimeter indicator Division does not offer a metric 339H-4 indicator
may read less than zero altitude on the ramp. equivalent to the ALI-55B.

Figure 3-6. 339H-4/4A Radio Altitude Indicator
3.6 DME-42 DISTANCE MEASURING The design of the CTL-32 control allows for cross-
EQUIPMENT, OPERATING side coupling so that tuning information from one
INSTRUCTIONS side can be supplied to the opposite side. For the
sake of consistent identification, a convention has
3.6.1 Introduction been established that the on-side (eg, pilot’s side)
active frequency tunes the DME-42 channel 1, the
opposite side (copilot’s side) active frequency tunes
The DME-42 transceiver can simultaneously track channel 2, and the on-side preset tunes channel 3.
and provide complete information from any three of
the 252 DME channels available. For the sake of Most new installations will have dual NAV and,
discussion, assume an arbitrary channel identifica- consequently, dual CTL-32. Therefore, in most dual
tion for these three channels as channel 1, channel installations the opposite side control will be avail-
2, and channel 3. able to supply the channel 2 tuning frequency.
Some or all of the computed DME information can
In order for the DME-42 to tune, it must have tun- be displayed on the IND-42A or IND-42C indicator
ing information. One of the channels, which has and includes channel number (1, 2, or 3) (IND-42A
been designated as channel 1, can be independently only), distance, ground speed, time-to/from-station,
tuned either by the CSDB serial-digital format or and the station identifier, including the identifier of
by the parallel (2 × 5) format. The remaining chan- a DME collocated with an ILS. The IND-42A indi-
nels (2 and 3) can be tuned only by the serial tuning cator is used when information from more than one
input. The CTL-32 description in later paragraphs DME station is to be pilot selectable. The IND-42C
shows that a single control can provide tuning in- is a single channel display unit, but it can be rear-
formation for only two NAV frequencies at one connector-strapped to display the data from either
time. Thus a single CTL-32 is not adequate and a of two stations, channel 1 or 2 (assuming the DME-
second source supplying a third channel of tuning 42 is properly tuned to either or both of those chan-
information is needed for 3-channel tracking capa- nels and provided the on-side or opposite side CTL
bility. is properly strapped).

3.6.2 Operating Controls indicator installations, either with companion dual

DME-42 transceivers, or as separate indicators op-
Except for frequency selection, the self-test switch, erating from a single DME-42. The IND-42C can be
and the optional DME HLD (hold) selection, all op- strapped to operate from either channel 1 or chan-
erating controls necessary for operation of the DME nel 2. Both indicators are shown on Figure 3-8 and
system are located on the IND-42A. Frequency se- described in Table 3-5.
lection and DME hold (optional) is accomplished on
the CTL-32 NAV Control as described in paragraph If an IND-42C is used, either the TEST button on
3.2.3.2. The operating controls on the CTL-32 are the CTL-32 or an externally supplied self-test
shown on Figure 3-7 and described in Table 3-4. switch is used to initiate DME self-test.
The DME-42 self-test routine can be initiated using
the TEST button on the CTL-32 control or by actu-
ating a separate installer supplied switch. The
IND-42C DME Indicator is a single channel indica-
tor similar to the IND-42A, intended for use in dual
Figure 3-7. CTL-32 NAV/DME Control, Controls and Indicators

Table 3-4. CTL-32 NAV Control, Controls and Indicators.
Active frequency display On units operating on the left side, the active frequency is the frequency to which the DME-42
(upper window) channel 1 is tuned. In DME or NAV self-test, diagnostic messages are displayed in the upper win-
dow.
On units operating on the right side and cross-connected to the left-side unit, the active frequency is
the frequency to which the DME-42 channel 2 is tuned.
Preset frequency display On units operating on the left side, the preset (inactive) frequency is the frequency to which the
(lower window) DME-42 channel 3 is tuned. In NAV self-test, diagnostic messages are displayed in the lower win-
dow.
On units operating on the right side with cross-coupling to the left, the preset frequency is not used
for DME-42 operation.
Compare annunciator ACT momentarily illuminates when frequencies are being changed. ACT continues to flash if the
frequency the radio is actually tuned to is not identical to the frequency shown in the active fre-
quency display.
Annunciators The CTL-32 control contains MEM (memory), RMT (remote), and HLD (hold) annunciators.
Mem The MEM annunciator illuminates whenever a frequency is displayed in the lower window.
RMT The RMT annunciator may or may not illuminate, depending on the installation. If wired, it will il-
luminate when an external switch (LOCAL/REMOTE or similar) is in the REMOTE position. This
indicates that the VIR-32 and DME are being tuned by another control unit (2-out-of-5, for example).
Dashes will appear in the lower window and all of the controls on the CTL-32 are disabled. The fre-
quency displayed in the upper window is the current active frequency being sent by the radio to the
CTL-32 control. The RMT annunciator will not illuminate when the radio is being tuned by an FMS
or similar flight management system. An FMS simply “tunes” the CTL-32 just like the frequency
select knobs do, and the control then tunes the radio. All controls on the CTL-32 remain operational
when an FMS is being used to “tune” the radio.
HLD The HLD annunciator indicates that the DME is in DME hold. In this mode it is normally tuned to
the frequency that was displayed in the active window at time of selection. After selecting hold, the
upper window displays the NAV frequency and the lower window displays the DME hold frequency1.
Tuning of the active frequency can take place during this time. When completed, the unit will al-
ways revert back to display of the DME hold frequency in the lower window.
Volume control The optional volume control, when present, is concentric with the power and mode switch. It nor-
mally controls only the NAV receiver volume.
Power and mode switch The NAV control power (optional) and mode switch may contain two or three detented positions
(depending on the control). The available positions are: OFF/ON, OFF/ON/HLD, and NORM/HLD.
Controls with the OFF/ON positions switch system power. Controls with the NORM position will
normally have their power controlled by an avionics master switch. The optional HLD position al-
lows the NAV frequency to be changed but holds the DME to the current active NAV frequency.
Light sensor The built-in light sensor can automatically control the display brightness. (Some installations may
choose to use other display dimming schemes.)
XFR/MEM switch This switch is a 3-position, spring-loaded toggle switch. When moved to the XFR position, the preset
frequency is transferred up to the active display and the NAV/DME retunes. The previous active
frequency becomes the new preset frequency and is displayed in the lower window. When this switch
is moved to the MEM position, one of the four stacked memory frequencies is loaded into the preset
display and the memory location number is displayed in the upper window. Successive pushes of the
MEM switch cycles the four memory locations and frequencies through the displays. (See also the
description on the STO function below.)
1Thefrequency that was being displayed in the preset window is now hidden but remains in the preset memory register and can be
recalled to the active display via the XFR switch.

Frequency select knobs Two concentric knobs select the preset or active frequencies. The larger knob changes the three dig-
its to the left of the decimal point in 1-MHz steps. The smaller knob changes the two digits to the
right of the decimal point in 0.05-MHz steps. Frequencies roll over at the upper and lower limits.
The two frequency select switches are independent of each other such that the upper and lower limit
rollover of the 0.1-MHz digit will not cause the 1.0-MHz digit to change.
ACT button Push the tune active (ACT) button for approximately 2 seconds to enable the frequency select knobs
to directly retune the active (upper) display. The bottom window will display dashes. Push the ACT
button a second time to return the control to the 2-display tune/preset mode of operation. The active
tuning feature is not affected by power removal. If active tuning is selected (one push of the ACT
button) and power is removed from the control, active tuning will still be enabled the next time
power is reapplied to the control.
STO button The store (STO) button is used to enter a frequency from the preset display into a memory location.
MEM or STO can be used to access memory and depends on whether or not the frequency to be en-
tered into memory is already present in the preset display. To store a frequency, simply toggle the
MEM switch until the upper window displays the desired channel number (CH 1 through CH 4), ro-
tate the frequency select knobs until the lower window displays the frequency to be stored, and push
the STO button twice within 5 seconds. After approximately 5 seconds, the control will return to the
normal 2-display tune/preset mode of operation.
Note
If there is no tuning or switching activity for a period of 5 seconds, the display automatically re-
verts to the 2-display tune/preset mode of operation.
Points to remember:
1. STO must be used to actually enter a frequency into memory. If STO is used to access memory,
it must be pushed a second time to actually make an entry into memory.
2. Entering a frequency into preset and then transferring it to active (XFR) does not effect a mem-
ory insertion.
3. Using MEM to access memory, entering a frequency into preset, and then allowing the 5-second
time to elapse does not effect a memory insertion.
4. A frequency can be entered into memory only from the preset display. If a frequency is tuned
directly into the active display, it must first be transferred into the preset display before it can
be entered into a memory location.
5. The active and preset displays are best seen as temporary and working storage locations, sepa-
rate from the permament storage locations in memory.
TEST button Push the TEST button to initiate the radio self-test diagnostic routine. (In the case of the VIR-32
NAV receiver, self-test is active only while the TEST button is pushed. In the case of the DME-42
transceiver, the self-test routine requires about 10 seconds for completion.)

Figure 3-8. IND-42( ) DME Indicator, Controls and Indicators
Table 3-5. IND-42( ) DME Indicator, Controls and Indicators.
Numeric display The numeric display presents the NM (distance) and diagnostic code.
Alphanumeric display The alphanumeric display presents the KT (velocity), MIN (time-to-station), ID (2-, 3-, or 4-letter
station identifier), and diagnostic identifier. See Table 3-8.
Power (PWR) switch The latching push-on/push-off PWR switch controls the power applied to the IND-42A and may con-
trol the power to the DME-42 transceiver as well, depending on the installation.
Mode selector (SEL) switch The nonlatching pushbutton SEL switch selects the information to be displayed in the alphanumeric
display. (When power is initially applied, NM (distance) is shown in the numeric display and ID
(DME station identifier) is shown in the alphanumeric display.) Pressing the SEL switch will se-
quentially select KT (velocity), MIN (time-to-station), and ID (2-, 3-, or 4-letter station identifier).
KT, MIN, and ID are shown in the alphanumeric display and NM (distance) is continuously shown
in the numeric display, provided the DME is locked on a signal.

Table 3-5. IND-42( ) DME Indicator, Controls and Indicators.
Channel (CH) switch The momentary pushbutton CH switch sequentially selects the information from the next DME
(IND-42A only) channel and lights the appropriate channel annunciator 1, 2, or 3. A strapping option is provided to
enable channel 3 display. A strapping option allows for power-up selection of either channel 1 or
channel 2.
Annunciators The annunciators provide an indication of which DME channel is selected, system operational in-
formation, and units of measure. The following list describes the annunciators.
ANNUNCIATOR DESCRIPTION
1 2 3* Sequentially controlled by the channel (CH) button to indicate which DME channel is providing the
information being displayed in the numeric and alphanumeric displays. *Channel 3 can be strap en-
abled (open = inhibited).
NM Automatically illuminates after power on when valid DME data is available. Indicates that the
numbers displayed in the numeric display are slant range DME distance in nautical miles.
HLD Indicates that DME hold has been selected on the CTL-32 NAV Control, an external switch, or by
interruption of the frequency common line if parallel tuning is used. When in HLD, KTS and MIN
will revert to ID after approximately 5 seconds.
KT Indicates that the value displayed in the alphanumeric display is the computed rate of change of
DME distance. Note that this value is accurate only when the airplane is flying directly to or from
the station.
MIN Indicates that the value displayed in the alphanumeric display is the computed time-to-station in
minutes. Like the ground speed (KT) display, time-to-station is also based on rate-of-change of DME
distance and it, too, is accurate only when flying directly toward the station. The pilot must recog-
nize that for an increasing distance display, the MIN display represents time-from-station.
ID Automatically illuminates after power on. The DME ident is transmitted once every 30 seconds and
it is possible that 2 minutes could elapse before the station ident is displayed in the alphanumeric
display. The station identifier is usually 3 letters, but can be 2, 3, or 4 letters, depending on the type
of facility being received.
3.6.3 Operating Procedures 3.6.3.1 Equipment Turn On

The PWR button on the IND-42( ) controls the
power applied to the IND-42( ) as well as the DME-
Caution 42, depending on the installation.
The DME-42, IND-42A, and IND-42C are Apply power by pressing the PWR button on the
designed to exhibit a very high degree of IND-42( ). The NM and ID annunciators and the
functional integrity. Nevertheless, the user channel 1 or 2 annunciator will be illuminated.
must recognize that it is not practical to (Which channel annunciator illuminates is deter-
provide monitoring for all conceivable sys- mined during installation. In a dual installation,
tem failures and, however unlikely, it is the pilot’s IND-42( ) could annunciate 1 and the co-
possible that erroneous operation could oc- pilot’s IND-42A could annunciate 2.) If the DME-42
cur without a fault indication. It is the re- is within range of the selected station, the numeric
sponsibility of the pilot to detect such an oc- display will show the slant range distance, and af-
currence by means of cross-checks with ter two DME idents have been received and proc-
redundant or correlated information avail- essed, the alphanumeric display will show the 2-,
able in the cockpit. 3-, or 4-letter station identifier.

Caution (The DME hold frequency is normally the active

NAV frequency existing at the time DME hold is
Every effort has been made to allow auto- selected.) The NAV frequency in the upper window
matic DME ident detection under widely can be changed during the time DME hold is se-
varying characteristics of the DME/TACAN lected without affecting the held DME frequency.
ground stations identifier, well beyond When NAV tuning is completed, the CTL-32 reverts
published specifications for ground station back to display of the DME hold frequency in the
identity transmissions. However, certain lower window. During DME hold, the preset fre-
ground stations may exhibit characteristics quency that was being displayed in the lower win-
deviating even more from published specifi- dow (prior to selecting DME hold) is hidden but
cations than those the DME-42 will accept. remains in the preset memory and can be recalled
In those rare cases, the DME-42 may not to the active display by using the XFR function.
decode the identity transmissions correctly.
Table 3-6 lists the vhf NAV frequencies and corre-
It is the responsibility of the pilot to verify
sponding DME channels. The frequency is listed
reception of the intended ground station
across the top and down the left side of the table.
through the audio identifier as necessary.
This frequency matrix is used to determine the
DME channel; for example: ILS-LOC frequency
108.30 MHz is DME channel 20, VOR frequency
114.70 MHz is DME channel 94, etc. The DME
In earlier paragraphs, the convention was estab-
channels listed in the table are the DME X chan-
lished that the NAV frequency for DME channel 1
nels. The DME Y channels can be determined from
is the frequency shown in the active frequency dis-
the table by adding 0.05 MHz to each of the 0.1-
play of the on-side CTL-32. This frequency can be
MHz columns; for example: ILS-LOC frequency
changed either by direct input with the frequency
108.35 MHz is DME channel 20Y, VOR frequency
select knobs or by transfer from present storage.
114.75 MHz is DME channel 94Y, etc. The 126 X
DME channel 2 is the frequency shown in the ac-
channels and 126 Y channels total the 252 DME
tive frequency display of the opposite side CTL-32
channels available.
(provided there is a right-side CTL-32 and it is con-
nected to the on-side CTL-32). DME channel 3 is 3.6.3.3 Channel Selection
the frequency shown in the preset frequency dis-
play of the on-side CTL-32. After the three vhf NAV frequencies are tuned,
DME information from any one of the three can be
Using the on-side and opposite-side active, and the displayed on the IND-42A by sequentially pushing
on-side preset displays, select the desired VORTAC the CH button to call up 1, 2, or 3. If the selected
or ILS frequency for paired DME channels or the channel has invalid data, dashes are displayed.
vhf NAV frequency for unpaired channels. The
When DME data is valid and ID is selected, se-
DME channel that is associated with the VORTAC,
quentially pushing the CH button on the IND-42A
ILS, or unpaired vhf NAV frequency is automati-
will display the NM and ID for each of the three
cally selected.
channels.
Note Only one channel, channel 1 or channel 2 depend-
ing on strapping, can be displayed on the IND-42C.
The DME-42 can operate on all 252 DME
channels. In order to operate on the un- The numeric display will show the slant range dis-
paired channels, the CTL-32 NAV Controls tance from 0 to 300 nmi. The distance is accurate to
must be strapped during installation to al- ±0.1 nmi, and the display will show tenths of a mile
low the 133.00- to 135.95-MHz frequencies from 0 to 199.9 nmi and 1-mile increments from
to be tuned. 200 to 300 nmi. A special strapping option allows
for distance display to 0.01 nmi for distances under
When the DME is placed in hold (either by select- 20 nmi. The NM and ID annunciators will be illu-
ing HLD on the CTL-32 mode switch or by actuat- minated and the alphanumeric display will show
ing an external DME HOLD switch), the CTL-32 the station identifier. If the received signal is tem-
upper window displays the NAV frequency and the porarily lost or weak, a 10- to 14-second memory in
lower window displays the DME hold frequency. the DME-42 prevents dashes from being displayed.

Table 3-6. VHF Frequencies Versus DME X-Channels.
VHF NAV 0.1 MHz

(CTL-32)
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
134 - - - - 1 2 3 4 5 6
135 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Unpaired channels
108 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
109 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
110 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
111 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
112 57 58 59 - - - - - - -
Even number channels paired with ILS localizer
Odd number channels paired with VOR
133 - - - 60 61 62 63 64 65 66
134 67 68 69 - - - - - - -
Unpaired channels
112 - - - 70 71 72 73 74 75 76
113 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
114 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96
115 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106
116 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116
117 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126
Channels paired with VOR
Note tic code is displayed in the alphanumeric (right)

display, and the test sequence ends. Following the
The maximum range of the DME-42 is 300 lamp test, and if no out-of-tolerance conditions are
nautical miles. The range capability of a detected, the numeric display shows a test distance
DME is limited by aircraft altitude, obstruc- of 100 NM. The display in the alphanumeric win-
tions such as hills or mountains, and the dow depends on what is selected; ID, MIN, or KT
curvature of the earth. and will show “AOK” at the completion of the test
routine if no out-of-tolerance conditions have been
3.6.3.4 Self-Test detected. (The DME aural output will be the Morse
code .- --- -.-, or the characters A, O, and K.) If KT is
An extensive self-test diagnostic routine can be ini- selected, the alphanumeric display will show a test
tiated in the DME-42 by pushing the TEST button ground speed of 100 KT. If MIN is selected, the al-
on the CTL-32 NAV Control or by actuating an ex- phanumeric display will show a test time of 60
ternal DME test switch. The self-test routine takes MIN. Completion of self-test is indicated when ei-
approximately 10 seconds to complete. After initi- ther the IND-42( ) displays return to normal or the
ating self-test, all display segments and annuncia- word “dIAG,” along with a self-test diagnostic code,
tors on the IND-42A/C illuminate for a lamp test. If is displayed on the IND-42( ). A list of the diagnos-
an out-of-tolerance condition is detected, “dIAG” is tic codes can be found in the maintenance section of
displayed in the numeric (left) display, the diagnos- this manual.

Note 3.7.2 Operating Controls
Due to the length of time (approximately 10 Except for frequency selection, the self-test switch
seconds) it takes to complete the self- and the optional DME HLD (hold) selection, all op-
testcycle, the test should be made as a pre- erating controls necessary for operation of the DME
flight check and not during critical flight system are located on the IND-42A. Frequency se-
times. Furthermore, self-test may be inhib- lection and DME hold (optional) is accomplished on
ited by an interlock with autopilot engage the CTL-32 NAV Control as described in paragraph
logic, depending on the installation. 3.2.3.2. The operating controls on the CTL-32 are
shown on Figure 3-7 and described in Table 3-4.
3.7 DME-442 DISTANCE MEASURING
The DME-442 self-test routine can be initiated us-
EQUIPMENT WITH CTL-32 NAV CON-
ing the TEST button on the CTL-32 control or by
TROL, OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
actuating a separate installer-supplied switch. The
IND-42C DME indicator is a single-channel indica-
3.7.1 Introduction
tor similar to the IND-42A, intended for use in dual
indicator installations, either with companion dual
The DME-442 Transceiver can simultaneously DME-442 transceivers, or as separate indicators
track and provide complete information from any operating from a single DME-442. The IND-42C
three of the 252 DME channels available. For the can be strapped to operate from either channel 1 or
sake of discussion, assume an arbitrary channel channel 2. Both indicators are shown on Figure 3-8
identification for these three channels as channel 1, and described in Table 3-5.
channel 2, and channel 3.
The design of the CTL-32 control allows for cross- If an IND-42C is used, either the TEST button on
side coupling so that tuning information from one the CTL-32 or an externally supplied self-test
side can be supplied to the opposite side. For the switch is used to initiate DME self-test.
sake of consistent identification, a convention has
been established that the on-side (eg, pilot’s side) 3.7.3 Operating Procedures
active frequency tunes the DME-442 channel 1, the
opposite side (copilot’s side) active frequency tunes
channel 2, and the on-side preset tunes channel 3.
Most new installations will have dual NAV and,

The DME-442, IND-42A, and IND-42C are
consequently, dual CTL-32. Therefore, in most dual
installations the opposite side control will be avail-
functional integrity. Nevertheless, the user
able to supply the channel 2 tuning frequency.
must recognize that it is not practical to
provide monitoring for all conceivable sys-
Some or all of the computed DME information can
tem failures and, however unlikely, it is
be displayed on the IND-42A or IND-42C indicator
possible that erroneous operation could oc-
and includes channel number (1, 2, or 3) (IND-42A
cur without a fault indication. It is the re-
only), distance, ground speed, time-to/from-station,
sponsibility of the pilot to detect such an oc-
and the station identifier, including the identifier of
currence by means of cross-checks with
a DME collocated with an ILS. The IND-42A indi-
redundant or correlated information avail-
cator is used when information from more than one
able in the cockpit.
DME station is to be pilot selectable. The IND-42C
is a single-channel display unit, but it can be rear-
connector strapped to display the data from either 3.7.3.1 Equipment Turn On
of two stations, channel 1 or 2 (assuming the DME-
442 is properly tuned to either or both of those The PWR button on the IND-42( ) controls the
channels and provided the on-side or opposite side power applied to the IND-42( ) as well as the DME-
CTL is properly strapped). 442, depending on the installation.

Apply power by pressing the PWR button on the Note

IND-42( ). The NM and ID annunciators and the
channel 1 or 2 annunciator will be illuminated. The DME-442 can operate on all 252 DME
(Which channel annunciator illuminates is deter- n
mined during installation. In a dual installation, paired channels, the CTL-32 NAV Controls
the pilot’s IND-42( ) could annunciate 1 and the co- l
pilot’s IND-42A could annunciate 2.) If the DME- low the 133.00 to 135.95 MHz frequencies to
442 is within range of the selected station, the nu-
meric display will show the slant range distance,
and after two DME idents have been received and When the DME is placed in hold (either by selec -
processed, the alphanumeric display will show the t
2-, 3-, or 4-letter station identifier. ing an external DME HOLD switch), the CTL-32
lower window displays the DME hold frequency.

Caution
NAV frequency existing at the time DME hold is
Every effort has been made to allow auto-
matic DME ident detection under widely
can be changed during the time DME hold is s -
varying characteristics of the DME/TACAN
ground stations identifier, well beyond
When NAV tuning is completed, the CTL-32 reverts
published specifications for ground station
identity transmissions. However, certain
lower window. During DME hold, the preset fr -
ground stations may exhibit characteristics
n
deviating even more from published specifi-
dow (prior to selecting DME hold) is hidden but
cations than those the DME-442 will accept.
In those rare cases, the DME-442 may not
to the active display by using the XFR function.
decode the identity transmissions correctly.
It is the responsibility of the pilot to verify
36 e
reception of the intended ground station
sponding DME channels. The frequency is listed
through the audio identifier as necessary.
This frequency matrix is used to determine the
108.30 MHz is DME channel 20, VOR frequency
In earlier paragraphs, the convention was estab-
lished that the NAV frequency for DME channel 1
channels listed in the table are the DME X cha -
is the frequency shown in the active frequency dis-
play of the on-side CTL-32. This frequency can be
the table by adding 0.05 MHz to each of the 0.1-
changed either by direct input with the frequency
select knobs, or by transfer from present storage.
108.35 MHz is DME channel 20Y, VOR frequency
DME channel 2 is the frequency shown in the ac-
tive frequency display of the opposite side CTL-32
channels and 126 Y channels total the 252 DME
(provided there is a right side CTL-32 and it is con-
nected to the on-side CTL-32). DME channel 3 is
the frequency shown in the preset frequency dis- 3. .3 Channel Selection
play of the on-side CTL-32.
Using the on-side and opposite-side active, and the DME information from any one of the three can be
on-side preset displays, select the desired VORTAC
or ILS frequency for paired DME channels or the the CH button to call up 1, 2, or 3. If the selected
vhf NAV frequency for unpaired channels. The
DME channel that is associated with the VORTAC,
ILS, or unpaired vhf NAV frequency is automati- When DME data is valid and ID is selected, s -
cally selected.

will display the NM and ID for each of the three mal or the word “dIAG” along with a self-test diag-
channels. nostic code is displayed on the IND-42( ). A list of
the diagnostic codes can be found in the mainte-
Only one channel, channel 1 or channel 2 depend- nance section of this manual.
ing on strapping, can be displayed on the IND-42C.
Note
The numeric display will show the slant range dis-
tance from 0 to 300 nmi. The distance is accurate to Due to the length of time (approximately 10
±0.1 nmi, and the display will show tenths of mile seconds) it takes to complete the self-test
from 0 to 199.9 nmi, and 1 mile increments from cycle, the test should be made as a preflight
200 to 300 nmi. A special strapping option allows check and not during critical flight times.
for distance display to 0.01 nmi for distances under Furthermore, self-test may be inhibited by
20 nmi. The NM and ID annunciators will be illu- an interlock with autopilot engage logic,
minated and the alphanumeric display will show depending on the installation.
the station identifier. If the received signal is tem-
porarily lost or weak, a 10- to 14-second memory in 3.8 GPS-4000 GLOBAL POSITIONING SEN-
the DME-442 prevents dashes from being dis- SOR, OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
played.
Refer to the GPS-4000 installation section of this
manual.
Note
3.9 MND-640( ) MULTISENSOR NAVIGATION
The maximum range of the DME-442 is 300
DISPLAY SYSTEM, OPERATING
nautical miles. The range capability of a
INSTRUCTIONS
DME is limited by aircraft altitude, obstruc-
tions such as hills or mountains, and the
The purpose of this section is to familiarize the
curvature of the earth.
reader with the MND-640( ) displays and controls
and to give a brief operational description of each.
3.7.3.4 Self-Test
3.9.1 SDU-640A/640B Displays and Controls,
Operational Description
tiated in the DME-442 by pushing the TEST button
on the CTL-32 NAV Control or by actuating an ex-
The SDU-640A/640B Sensor Display Unit is a 3-
ternal DME test switch. The self-test routine takes
inch, high-resolution, monochrome cathode-ray
approximately 10 seconds to complete. After initi-
tube (crt) specifically designed for aircraft cockpit
ating self-test, all display segments and annuncia-
displays. The display unit contains the crt, deflec-
tors on the IND-42A/C illuminate for a lamp test. If
tion yoke, video and deflection amplifiers, and a
an out-of-tolerance condition is detected, dIAG is
high-voltage power supply. The SDU-640A has six
displayed in the numeric (left) display and the di-
display formats: RMI, VLF, MLS, VOR, LOC, and
agnostic code is displayed in the alphanumeric
DME. The SDU-640B has two additional formats of
(right) display, and the test sequence ends. Fol-
FMS and TCN. Following is a description of the
lowing the lamp test, and if no out-of-tolerance con-
control and indicator functions.
ditions are detected, the numeric display shows a
test distance of 100 NM. The display in the alpha-
numeric window depends on what is selected; ID, 3.9.1.1 Front Panel Controls
MIN, or KT and will show “AOK” at the completion
of the test routine if no out-of-tolerance conditions 3.9.1.1.1 FORMAT Knob
have been detected. (The DME aural output will be
the Morse code .- --- -.-, or the characters A, O, and The FORMAT knob in the upper right corner of the
K.) If KT is selected, the alphanumeric display will front panel is used to select the display format of
show a test ground speed of 100 KT. If MIN is se- the indicator. The currently selected format is an-
lected, the alphanumeric display will show a test nunciated in the upper left portion of the display.
time of 60 MIN. Completion of self-test is indicated Turning the FORMAT knob in a clockwise direction
when either the IND-42( ) displays return to nor- selects the formats in the order shown below. After

RMI format is selected, rotate the knob in the opp - In case of power interruption, the SDU shall return
r e
Format knob turn indicator: In the RMI format, a 3. .1 .2
displayed to indicate the direction that the FO - The single-bar heading knob in the lower left co -
r
mat. pointer source when the format is RMI, VLF, or
o
SDU-640B FORMATS cated immediately above the knob, along with a
RMI cycles through the legends shown below. This pa -

e
TCN1 versed if the knob is rotated in a counterclockwise
VLF1/FMS1/LRN1/LNV1
SINGLE-BAR SENSORS
VOR1/LOC1
(HSI page)
OFF
MLS1
VOR1
VOR1/LOC1
ADF1
DME
FMS1/LRN1/LNV1/
VOR2/LOC2 VLF1
MLS2 TCN1
MLS is selected, the single-bar heading knob co -

(HSI page)
If a localizer frequency is selected while VOR

(data page)
place of VOR1 and the bearing pointer is removed.
by the SDD configuration A word (label 360) will be

RMI
included in the menus for both pointers as dete -
n
ued rotation of the FORMAT knob in the same d - one sensor is installed, the NAV sensor annunci -
s n
play. Reversing knob rotation will present the same nunciation (eg, ADF1 would appear only as ADF).
Any sensor that is not installed or present on the or TCN1 pointer will be removed and the bearing
from the menu. When only one sensor is installed, FMS1 pointer will operate normally. The ADF1
m
ber following the annunciation (eg, TCN1 would source annunciator will flash 10 times and then
Revised 11 April 1997

3.9.1.1.3 Double-Bar Course Select Knob Only those sensors that are installed as determined
by the SDD configuration A word (label 364) will be
The double-bar course select knob in the lower right included in the pointer menu. Non-dual sensors are
corner of the front panel selects the double-bar included in the menus for both pointers as deter-
bearing pointer source when the format is RMI, mined by the SDD configuration A word. When only
VLF, or DME. The annunciation of the selected one sensor is installed, the NAV sensor annuncia-
source is located immediately above the knob, along tion does not include the number following the an-
with a double-bar symbol. Clockwise rotation of the nunciation.
knob cycles through the legends shown below. This
pattern is repeated continuously and is simply re- If the heading display is in TRUE mode, the VOR2
versed if the knob is rotated in a counterclockwise or TCN2 pointer will be removed and the bearing
direction. source annunciator will flash continuously. The
FMS2 and ADF2 pointers operate normally, and
DOUBLE-BAR SENSORS the bearing source annunciator flashes 10 times
and then remains on.
SDU-640A SDU-640B
3.9.1.1.4 Brightness (BRT) Knob
OFF OFF
VOR2 VOR2 The brightness (BRT) knob in the upper left corner
of the front panel is a brightness trim control. The
ADF2 ADF2
primary brightness control is supplied by the 28-V
FMS2/LRN2/LNV2/ FMS2/LRN2/LNV2/ dc aircraft dimming bus input.
VLF2 VLF2
3.9.1.2 Radio Magnetic Indicator (RMI)
TCN2
Format
When an HSI format such as VOR, LOC, or MLS is
The RMI format provides a full-screen RMI display
selected, the double-bar course select knob controls
similar in appearance to a conventional electrome-
the course arrow on the compass rose. When an
chanical RMI. The format annunciator in the upper
FMS HSI format is selected, the course arrow is
left portion of the display shows RMI. No additional
controlled by the FMS.
data is displayed in the center section of the indica-
tor. Bearing pointers (when displayed) appear as
If a localizer frequency is selected while VOR
full-length single- and dual-bar pointers. Figure 3-9
bearing is being displayed, LOC2 is annunciated in
illustrates the RMI format.
place of VOR2 and the bearing pointer is removed.

operation
Figure 3-9. RMI Format, SDU-640A/B Sensor Display Unit, Controls and Displays

operation
9.1 .1 Compass Display and Heading station. Rotate the lower right knob to display the
nsor bearing pointer and select the NAV source which
VOR2, ADF2, FMS2 or LRN2 or LNV2 or VLF2,

rose with letters at the cardinal points and num and TCN2) and a double-bar symbol are annunc -
bers at the 30-degree marks. Markings are provided ated near the knob.
every 45 degrees around the perimeter of the card
aircraft heading is read against the lubber line. If is displayed, LOC2 annunciates and the pointer is
the heading sensor is magnetic referenced, the lu - removed. If valid bearing data is not available, the
ber line is triangle shaped. If the heading sensor is
heading sensor is in directional gyro mode, the let If the heading sensor is referenced to true north,
ters DG are annunciated to the right of the lubber the VOR2 or TCN2 pointer disappears and the
line. i-
9.1 .2 Marker Beacon Annunciation normally when the heading sensor is true refer
enced. The ADF2 pointer also operates normally.
However, the bearing sensor annunciator flashes 10
boxed “OM” (outer marker), “MM” (middle marker),
or “ a-
3.9 .3 TCN Format (SDU-640B Only)
3.9 .2.3 a-
Knob and Annunciator
Bearing pointers are not displayed in TCN format.
A single-bar pointer may be selected for display. A fixed airplane symbol is displayed in the center of
station. Rotate the lower left knob to display the lubber line. Figure -10
bearing pointer and select the NAV source which
3.9 .3.1
VOR1, ADF1, FMS1 or LRN1 or LNV1 or VLF1,
and TCN1) and a single-bar symbol are annunc - TCN1 or TCN2 is annunciated in the upper left
ated near the knob. portion of the screen when TCN1 or TCN2 format is
elected.
is displayed, LOC1 annunciates and the pointer is 9.1 .2 Heading Select Knob
removed. If valid bearing data is not available, the
the selected heading cursor symbol around the

If the heading sensor is referenced to true north, compass rose. HDG annunciates near the heading
the VOR1 or TCN1 pointer disappears and the n-
i- s-
normally when the heading sensor is true refer This symbol rotates around the compass rose when
enced. The ADF1 pointer also operates normally. the heading select (HDG) knob is turned. When the
However, the bearing sensor annunciator flashes 10
moves the heading cursor in 1-degree steps. Rap
idly turning the knob results in larger heading
3.9 .2.4
changes as a function of the rate of rotation. Once
Knob and Annunciator
A double-bar pointer may be selected for display. card to present a continuous display of selected
heading.

Figure 3-10. TCN Format, SDU-640B Sensor Display Unit, Controls and Displays
3.9.1.3.3 Course Select Knob tion. Once set, the heading cursor rotates with the
compass card to present a continuous display of se-
Rotate the lower right course (CRS) knob to select
lected heading.
the desired course angle. CRS annunciates near the
course select knob (instead of a bearing pointer
3.9.1.3.4 To/From Arrow
sensor annunciation) in this format. Selected course
is shown by the relationship of the solid single-bar
The to/from arrow is displayed to indicate that the
course arrow with respect to the compass card. The
selected course is either “to” or “from” the selected
aircraft symbol pictorially shows actual aircraft po-
navaid. The to/from arrow rotates with the course
sition in relation to this selected course. The se-
arrow and switches pointing direction when the
lected course is repeated digitally in the lower right
course differs from the selected TCN radial by more
corner of the display.
than 90 degrees.
When the CRS knob is turned slowly, each detent of
the knob moves the heading cursor in 1-degree
steps. Rapidly turning the knob results in larger
heading changes as a function of the rate of rota-

3.9.1.3.5 Lateral Deviation Bar Accuracy and resolution of the displayed data is 1
knot.
The lateral deviation bar is the center portion of the
selected course arrow. This bar moves left or right Magnetic track (in degrees) is shown digitally on
from the pointer head and tail to indicate lateral the second line of the data page after the letters
deviation from the selected course. The amount of TRK. The magnetic track display range is from 0 to
deviation is read against a deviation scale, which 360 degrees. Accuracy and resolution of the dis-
consists of four dots displayed perpendicular to the played data is 1 degree.
lateral deviation bar. Each dot represents 5 degrees
of deviation. As deviation increases between ap- Present position data (longitude and latitude) is
proximately 1.5 dots and full-scale deflection, the shown digitally on the third and fourth lines of the
length of the deviation bar begins to linearly de- data page. The latitude display in degrees and
crease. This is done to prevent the deviation bar minutes is shown after the letter N or S, and longi-
from obstructing the compass card. tude in degrees and minutes is shown after the let-
ter E or W.
3.9.1.3.6 TCN Distance Display
The range of values for the latitude display is from
The TCN distance (in nautical miles) from the air- 0 degree, 00.0 minute, to 99 degrees, 59.9 minutes.
craft to the tuned TCN station is displayed in the Accuracy of the displayed data is 1/10 minute. A
upper right portion of the screen, followed by the degree symbol, decimal point, and tick mark sepa-
letters NM. The TCN display range is from 0 to rate the latitude data.
399.9 nmi. Resolution is 0.1 nmi below 100 nmi and
1 nmi above 100 nmi. If TCN data is invalid, the The range of values for the longitude display is
distance display is replaced by a boxed TCN fail from 0 degree, 00.0 minute, to 199 degrees, 59.9
annunciation. minutes. Accuracy of the displayed data is 1/10 mi-
nute. A degree symbol, decimal point, and tick
The center section of the indicator simulates an mark separate the longitude data.
HSI display in the TCN format. Bearing pointers
are not displayed in TCN format. A fixed airplane 3.9.1.4.2 Single-Bar Select Knob and
symbol is displayed in the center of the rose. This Annunciator
reference symbol points toward the lubber line.
A single-bar pointer may be selected for display.
3.9.1.4 VLF/FMS/LRN/LNV Format (Data The pointer head and reciprocal tail indicate the
Page) bearing to a selected NAV station. Rotate the lower
left single-bar knob to display the bearing pointer
This format provides a display of ground speed, and select the NAV source which drives the pointer.
magnetic track, and present position coordinates as The selected source (none, VOR1, ADF1, FMS1 or
received from the selected sensor. The information LRN1 or LNV1 or VLF1, and TCN1) and a single-
is displayed as a data page in the center section of bar symbol are annunciated near the knob.
the SDU-640( ). The format annunciator in the up-
per left portion of the display shows VLF1, FMS1, If a localizer frequency is tuned while VOR bearing
LRN1, LNV1 or VLF2, FMS2, LRN2, LNV2, de- is displayed, LOC1 annunciates and the single-bar
pending upon the installed sensors. Bearing point- pointer is removed. If valid bearing data is not
ers (when selected) are only partially displayed so available, the pointer is not displayed.
that the navigation data in the center of the screen
is not overwritten. Figure 3-11 illustrates the If the heading sensor is referenced to true north,
VLF/FMS/LRN/LNV (data page) format. the VOR1 or TCN1 pointer disappears and the
bearing sensor annunciator flashes until a compati-
3.9.1.4.1 Data Page Annunciators ble selection is made. The FMS1 pointer operates
normally when the heading sensor is true refer-
Ground speed (in knots) is shown digitally at the enced. The ADF1 pointer also operates normally.
top of the data page after the letters GS. The However, the bearing sensor annunciator flashes 10
ground speed display range is from 0 to 4096 knots. times before becoming steady.

Figure 3-11. VLF Format (Data Page), SDU-640A/B Sensor Display Unit, Controls and Displays
3.9.1.4.3 Double-Bar Select Knob and If a localizer frequency is tuned while VOR bearing
Annunciator is displayed, LOC2 annunciates and the pointer is
removed. If valid bearing data is not available, the
A double-bar pointer may be selected for display. pointer is not displayed.
The pointer head and reciprocal tail indicate the
bearing to a selected NAV station. Rotate the lower If the heading sensor is referenced to true north,
right double-bar knob to display the bearing pointer the VOR2 or TCN2 pointer disappears and the
and select the NAV source which drives the pointer. bearing sensor annunciator flashes until a compati-
The selected source (none, VOR1, ADF1, FMS1 or ble selection is made. The FMS2 pointer operates
LRN1 or LNV1 or VLF1, and TCN1) and a double- normally when the heading sensor is true refer-
bar symbol are annunciated near the knob. enced. The ADF2 pointer also operates normally.

However, the bearing sensor annunciator flashes 10 sired track. The desired track is repeated digitally
times before becoming steady. in the lower right corner of the display.
3.9.1.5 VLF/FMS/LRN/LNV Format (HSI Page, In the VLF/FMS/LRN/LNV format, the desired
SDU-640B Only) track arrow is automatically set to the desired track
by the DTK input from the navigation sensor. Once
In this format, the center section of the SDU simu- set, the desired track arrow relates with the com-
lates the appearance of a conventional HSI. The pass card to present a continuous display of desired
formats are similar except for the format annuncia- track. Because the desired track arrow is automati-
tor in the upper left portion of the display, which cally set in this format, the lower right knob is not
shows VLF1, FMS1, LRN1, LNV1 or VLF2, FMS2, used (rotating the knob causes no change in the
LRN2, LNV2, depending upon the selected naviga- display).
tion sensor. Bearing pointers are not displayed in
the VLF/FMS/LRN/LNV format. Figure 3-12 illus- 3.9.1.5.5 To/From Arrow
trates the VLF/FMS/LRN/LNV (HSI) format.
The to/from arrow indicates the relative direction of
3.9.1.5.1 Aircraft Symbol the “to” waypoint in relation to the desired track
pointer. Inputs received from the navigation sensor
When related to the moving parts of the display, determine whether this direction is “to” or “from”
the fixed aircraft reference symbol shows aircraft the waypoint. The to/from arrow rotates with the
position and heading in relation to the compass desired track arrow.
card, crosstrack deviation, selected heading, and
desired track. 3.9.1.5.6 Crosstrack Deviation Bar
3.9.1.5.2 Heading Cursor The center portion of the desired track arrow is the
crosstrack deviation bar, which indicates course de-
The heading cursor shows the selected heading ref- viation. This bar moves laterally with respect to the
erence. The cursor is set to the desired heading by desired track arrow and the deviation dots to indi-
turning the lower left heading (HDG) knob. When cate deviation from the desired track. In the
the HDG knob is turned slowly, each detent of the VLF/FMS/LRN/LNV (HSI) format, a 2-dot deviation
knob moves the heading cursor in 1-degree steps. can represent either 1.25 or 2.0 nmi if in approach
Rapidly turning the knob results in larger heading mode or 7.5 or 10 nmi if en route. The actual dis-
changes as a function of the rate of rotation. Once tance represented by a 2-dot deviation depends
set, the heading cursor rotates with the compass upon strapping options in the interconnect wiring
card to present a continuous display of selected and whether the aircraft is en route or in approach
heading. mode. As deviation increases between approxi-
mately 1.5 dots and full-scale deflection, the length
3.9.1.5.3 Heading Select Knob and of the deviation bar begins to linearly decrease.
Annunciator This is done to prevent the deviation bar from ob-
structing the compass card.
Rotate the lower left heading (HDG) knob to move
the selected heading cursor around the compass 3.9.1.5.7 APPR (Approach) Annunciator
card. HDG is annunciated near the heading select
knob in this format (instead of a bearing pointer This annunciator indicates that VLF/FMS/LRN/
sensor annunciation) to indicate the knob’s func- LNV APPR mode is selected on the long-range
tion. navigation system. In this configuration, a 2-dot
deviation on the crosstrack deviation bar represents
3.9.1.5.4 Desired Track Display
either 1.25 or 2.0 nmi. The actual distance repre-
Desired track is shown by the relationship of the sented by a 2-dot deviation when the APPR annun-
solid single-bar desired track arrow with respect to ciator is illuminated depends upon strapping op-
the compass card. The aircraft symbol pictorially tions in the interconnect wiring made at the time of
shows actual aircraft position in relation to the de- installation.

Figure 3-12. VLF Format (HSI Page), SDU-640B Sensor Display Unit, Controls and Displays
3.9.1.5.8 Distance to Waypoint 3.9.1.5.9 Flight Plan Annunciations
The distance (in nautical miles) to the waypoint as- When received from a compatible navigation sen-
sociated with the desired track arrow is shown in sor, a NO FLIGHT PLAN message is displayed
the upper right portion of the display, followed by above the aircraft symbol. When this message ap-
the letters NM. The display range is from 0 to 9999 pears, the to/from arrow, XTK annunciator, desired
nmi. Resolution is 0.1 nmi below 100 nmi and 1 nmi track arrow, desired track digital readout, distance
above 100 nmi. If the input value exceeds 9999 nmi, to waypoint, deviation scale, and deviation bar are
the distance digits show 9999 and flash continu- removed from the display. All flags and indicators
ously. associated with desired track, distance to waypoint,
and crosstrack deviation are disabled when the NO
FLIGHT PLAN message appears. The DR annun-
ciator, however, is not disabled.
Waypoint alert is indicated by a flashing to/from 3.9.1.6.3 Course Select Knob

arrow when the alert input is received from a com-
Rotate the lower right course (CRS) knob to select
patible navigation sensor. Dead reckoning mode is
the desired course angle. CRS is annunciated near
indicated by the boxed letters DR, which appear
the course select knob (instead of a bearing pointer
above the aircraft symbol. This annunciation re-
mains in view if a NO FLIGHT PLAN message ap-
is shown by the relationship of the solid single-bar
pears.
course arrow with respect to the compass card. The
aircraft symbol pictorially shows actual aircraft po-
When a selected crosstrack warning input is re-
sition in relation to this selected course. The se-
ceived from a compatible navigation sensor, the
lected course is repeated digitally in the lower right
boxed letters XTK appear below and to the left of
corner of the display.
the aircraft symbol. This annunciation is removed
from the display if the NO FLIGHT PLAN message When the CRS knob is turned slowly, each detent of
appears. the knob moves the heading cursor in 1-degree
steps. Rapidly turning the knob results in larger
When received from a compatible navigation sen- heading changes as a function of the rate of rota-
sor, the boxed letters MSG (message) appear below tion. Once set, the heading cursor rotates with the
and to the right of the aircraft symbol. This annun- compass card to present a continuous display of se-
ciation flashes until acknowledged by the pilot. The lected heading.
MSG annunciation can appear in all MND-640B
display formats. 3.9.1.6.4 MLS Azimuth Deviation Bar
The center portion of the selected course arrow is
3.9.1.6 MLS Format the MAZ deviation bar, which represents the center
line of the selected course. This bar moves left or
In the MLS format, the center section of the SDU in- right from the course arrow head and tail to indi-
dicator simulates the appearance of a conventional cate MAZ deviation. The amount of deviation is
HSI. The MLS format also provides selected MAZ read against a deviation scale, which consists of
(microwave azimuth) angle and selected MGP four dots displayed perpendicular to the MAZ de-
(microwave glidepath) angle displays. The to/from viation bar. Each dot represents approximately 1
arrow and the bearing pointers are not displayed in degree of deviation. As deviation increases between
MLS format. Figure 3-13 illustrates the MLS format. approximately 1.5 dots and full-scale deflection, the
length of the deviation bar begins to linearly de-
3.9.1.6.1 MLS Format Annunciator crease. This is done to prevent the deviation bar
from obstructing the compass card.
MLS1 or MLS2 annunciates in the upper left por-
tion of the screen when MLS1 or MLS2 format is 3.9.1.6.5 MLS Glidepath Deviation Display
selected.
When the MLS format is selected, an MGP devia-
tion scale and pointer appears on the right side of
3.9.1.6.2 Heading Select Knob
the display. The scale consists of two dots above
and below a center index. The aircraft is below the
MGP if the pointer is deflected upward.
the selected heading cursor symbol around the
compass rose. HDG annunciates near the heading 3.9.1.6.6 DME Distance Display
select knob (instead of a bearing pointer sensor an-
nunciation) in this format. The heading cursor The channel 2 DME distance (in nautical miles)
shows the selected heading reference. The cursor is from the aircraft to the tuned MLS station is dis-
set to the desired heading by turning the lower left played in the upper right portion of the display,
heading (HDG) knob. When the HDG knob is followed by the letters NM. The DME display range
turned slowly, each detent of the knob moves the is from 0 to 399.9 nmi. Resolution is 0.1 nmi below
heading cursor in 1-degree steps. Rapidly turning 100 nmi and 1 nmi above 100 nmi. If DME data is
the knob results in larger heading changes as a invalid, the distance display is replaced by a boxed
function of the rate of rotation. Once set, the head- DME fail annunciation. A boxed H annunciates un-
ing cursor rotates with the compass card to present der the DME distance display when DME hold is
a continuous display of selected heading. selected.

Figure 3-13. MLS Format, SDU-640A/B Sensor Display Unit, Controls and Displays
3.9.1.6.7 Selected Azimuth Angle 3.9.1.6.8 Selected Glidepath Angle
The selected azimuth angle is numerically dis- The selected glidepath angle is numerically dis-
played in the lower left portion of the display, fol- played in the upper left portion of the display, fol-
lowed by the letters MAZ. The display range is from lowed by the letters MGP. The display range is
0 to 360 degrees, with 0 degree displayed as 360 from 0 to 25.6 degrees, with a resolution of 0.1 de-
degrees. Resolution of this display is 1 degree. If a gree.
valid MAZ angle is not available, the display is re-
placed with dashes. 3.9.1.7 VOR Format
In the VOR format, the center section of the indica-

tor simulates the appearance of a conventional HSI.
Bearing pointers are not displayed in VOR format.

A fixed airplane symbol is displayed in the center of steps. Rapidly turning the knob results in larger
the rose. This reference symbol points toward the heading changes as a function of the rate of rota-
lubber line. Figure 3-14 illustrates the VOR format. tion. Once set, the heading cursor rotates with the
compass card to present a continuous display of se-
3.9.1.7.1 VOR Format Annunciator lected heading.
VOR1 or VOR2 is annunciated in the upper left 3.9.1.7.4 To/From Arrow

portion of the screen when VOR1 or VOR2 format is
selected. The to/from arrow is displayed to indicate that the
selected course is either “to” or “from” the selected
3.9.1.7.2 Heading Select Knob navaid. The to/from arrow rotates with the course
arrow and switches pointing direction when the
Rotate the lower left heading (HDG) knob to move course differs from the selected VOR radial by more
the selected heading cursor symbol around the than 90 degrees. The to/from arrow is removed from
compass rose. HDG annunciates near the heading view whenever a localizer frequency is tuned.
select knob (instead of a bearing pointer sensor an-
nunciation) in this format. A cursor symbol is dis- 3.9.1.7.5 Lateral Deviation Bar
played to indicate a selected heading reference.
This symbol rotates around the compass rose when The lateral deviation bar is the center portion of the
the heading select (HDG) knob is turned. When the selected course arrow. This bar moves left or right
HDG knob is turned slowly, each detent of the knob from the pointer head and tail to indicate lateral
moves the heading cursor in 1-degree steps. Rap- deviation from the selected course. The amount of
idly turning the knob results in larger heading deviation is read against a deviation scale, which
changes as a function of the rate of rotation. Once consists of four dots displayed perpendicular to the
set, the heading cursor rotates with the compass lateral deviation bar. Each dot represents 5 degrees
card to present a continuous display of selected of deviation. As deviation increases between ap-
heading. proximately 1.5 dots and full-scale deflection, the
3.9.1.7.3 Course Select Knob
crease. This is done to prevent the deviation bar
Rotate the lower right course (CRS) knob to select from obstructing the compass card.
the desired course angle. CRS annunciates near the
course select knob (instead of a bearing pointer 3.9.1.7.6 DME Distance Display
is shown by the relationship of the solid single-bar The DME distance (in nautical miles) from the air-
course arrow with respect to the compass card. The craft to the tuned VOR station is displayed in the
aircraft symbol pictorially shows actual aircraft po- upper right portion of the screen, followed by the
sition in relation to this selected course. The se- letters NM. The DME display range is from 0 to
lected course is repeated digitally in the lower right 399.9 nmi. Resolution is 0.1 nmi below 100 nmi and
corner of the display. 1 nmi above 100 nmi. If DME data is invalid, the
distance display is replaced by a boxed DME fail
When the CRS knob is turned slowly, each detent of annunciation. A boxed H appears under the DME
the knob moves the heading cursor in 1-degree distance display when DME hold is selected.

Figure 3-14. VOR Format, SDU-640A/B Sensor Display Unit, Controls and Displays
3.9.1.8 LOC Format to/from arrow and the bearing pointers are not dis-
played in the LOC format. A marker beacon display
In the LOC format, the center section of the indica- may appear in any of the formats. However, it is
tor simulates the appearance of a conventional HSI. described in the LOC format because of its associa-
LOC format is similar to the VOR format except for tion with an ILS approach. Figure 3-15 illustrates
the format annunciator in the upper left portion of the LOC format.
the display, which is either LOC1 or LOC2. The
LOC format also provides a glideslope deviation 3.9.1.8.1 LOC Format Annunciator
display. If the navigation receiver is tuned to a
VOR frequency, then a VOR format is displayed. If LOC1 or LOC2 annunciates in the upper left por-
the navigation receiver is tuned to an ILS fre- tion of the screen when LOC1 or LOC2 format is
quency, then a LOC format is displayed. The selected.

Figure 3-15. LOC Format, SDU-640A/B Sensor Display Unit, Controls and Displays
3.9.1.8.2 Heading Select Knob ing cursor rotates with the compass card to present
a continuous display of selected heading.
the selected heading cursor symbol around the 3.9.1.8.3 Course Select Knob
compass rose. HDG is annunciated near the head-
ing select knob (instead of a bearing pointer sensor Rotate the lower right course (CRS) knob to select
annunciation) in this format. The heading cursor the desired course angle. CRS is annunciated near
shows the selected heading reference. The cursor is the course select knob (instead of a bearing pointer
set to the desired heading by turning the lower left sensor annunciation) in this format. Selected course
heading (HDG) knob. When the HDG knob is is shown by the relationship of the solid single-bar
turned slowly, each detent of the knob moves the course arrow with respect to the compass card. The
heading cursor in 1-degree steps. Rapidly turning aircraft symbol pictorially shows actual aircraft po-
the knob results in larger heading changes as a sition in relation to this selected course. The se-
function of the rate of rotation. Once set, the head-

lected course is repeated digitally in the lower right 1 nmi above 100 nmi. If DME data is invalid, the
corner of the display. distance display is replaced by a boxed DME fail
annunciation. A boxed H appears under the DME
When the CRS knob is turned slowly, each detent of distance display when DME hold is selected.
the knob moves the heading cursor in 1-degree
steps. Rapidly turning the knob results in larger 3.9.1.9 DME Format
heading changes as a function of the rate of rota-
tion. Once set, the heading cursor rotates with the The DME format provides channel 1 DME data
compass card to present a continuous display of se- from both DMEs in a dual DME installation or
lected heading. channel 1 and 2 data in a single DME installation.
DME information is displayed in the center section
3.9.1.8.4 Lateral Deviation Bar of the SDU-640( ) in two data columns. Column 1
shows DME data from the pilot’s DME, and column
The center portion of the selected course arrow is 2 shows DME data from the copilot’s DME. Dis-
the lateral deviation bar, which represents the cen- played DME data includes the DME ident or fre-
ter line of the localizer. This bar moves left or right quency and DME distance. The format annunciator
from the course arrow head and tail to indicate lo- in the upper left portion of the display shows DME.
calizer deviation. The amount of deviation is read Bearing pointers (when selected) are only partially
against a deviation scale, which consists of four displayed so that the DME data in the center of the
dots displayed perpendicular to the lateral devia- screen is not overwritten. Figure 3-16 illustrates
tion bar. Each dot represents approximately 1 de- the DME format.
gree of deviation. As deviation increases between
approximately 1.5 dots and full-scale deflection, the 3.9.1.9.1 DME Format Annunciator
crease. This is done to prevent the deviation bar DME annunciates in the upper left portion of the
from obstructing the compass card. screen when DME format is selected. The
ident/frequency display line shows the 3- or 4-letter
3.9.1.8.5 Glideslope Deviation Display DME ident codes of the tuned stations. If a valid
ident is not available, the DME frequency of the
When the navigation receiver is tuned to an ILS tuned station is displayed. If DME hold is selected,
frequency, a glideslope deviation scale and pointer the ident/frequency is replaced with a boxed HOLD
appears on the right side of the display. The scale annunciation.
consists of two dots above and below a center index.
3.9.1.9.2 DME Distance Display
For glideslope, each of the inner scale dots repre-
sents approximately 1/4-degree displacement and The distance display line shows the computed DME
the outer dots represent approximately 1/2-degree distance (in nautical miles) to the tuned stations.
displacement. The aircraft is below the glideslope if All distance displays are followed by the letters
the pointer is deflected upward. NM. The DME display range is from 0 to 399.9 nmi.
Resolution is 0.1 nmi below 100 nmi and 1 nmi
When the LOC format is being displayed and back
above 100 nmi. If DME data is invalid, the distance
course localizer mode is detected, the glideslope
display is replaced by a boxed DME fail annuncia-
scale and pointer are removed from view and re-
tion.
placed with a B/C annunciation. The back course
mode occurs when the difference between the se- 3.9.1.9.3 Single-Bar Bearing Pointer
lected course (usually front course) and aircraft
heading exceeds approximately 90 degrees. A single-bar pointer may be selected for display.
The pointer head and reciprocal tail indicate the
3.9.1.8.6 DME Distance Display
bearing to a selected NAV station. Rotate the lower
The DME distance (in nautical miles) from the air- left knob to display the bearing pointer and select
craft to the tuned VOR station is displayed in the the NAV source which drives the pointer. The se-
upper right portion of the screen, followed by the lected source (none, VOR1, ADF1, FMS1 or LRN1
letters NM. The DME display range is from 0 to or LNV1 or VLF1, and TCN1) and a single-bar
399.9 nmi. Resolution is 0.1 nmi below 100 nmi and symbol are annunciated near the knob.

Figure 3-16. DME Format, SDU-640A/B Sensor Display Unit, Controls and Displays
If a localizer frequency is tuned while VOR bearing 3.9.1.9.4 Double-Bar Bearing Pointer
is displayed, LOC1 annunciates and the pointer is
removed. If valid bearing data is not available, the A double-bar pointer may be selected for display.
pointer is not displayed. The pointer head and reciprocal tail indicate the
bearing to a selected NAV station. Rotate the lower
If the heading sensor is referenced to true north, right knob to display the bearing pointer and select
the VOR1 or TCN1 pointer disappears and the the NAV source which drives the pointer. The se-
bearing sensor annunciator flashes until a compati- lected source (none, VOR2, ADF2, FMS2 or LRN2
ble selection is made. The FMS1 pointer operates or LNV2 or VLF2, and TCN2) and a double-bar
normally when the heading sensor is true refer- symbol are annunciated near the knob.
enced. The ADF1 pointer also operates normally.
However, the bearing sensor annunciator flashes 10 If a localizer frequency is tuned while VOR bearing
times before becoming steady. is displayed, LOC2 is annunciated and the pointer

is removed. If valid bearing data is not available, moved from view and an X is superimposed on the
the pointer is not displayed. LOC format annunciator in the upper left portion of
the display. The same annunciations also occur if
If the heading sensor is referenced to true north, the localizer sensor is good but no computed data is
the VOR2 or TCN2 pointer disappears and the received by the SDU.
bearing sensor annunciator flashes until a compati-
ble selection is made. The FMS2 pointer operates 3.9.1.10.5 GS Deviation Flag
normally when the heading sensor is true refer-
enced. The ADF2 pointer also operates normally. If glideslope data becomes invalid while being dis-
However, the bearing sensor annunciator flashes 10 played, the GS deviation pointer and vertical devia-
times before becoming steady. tion scale are removed from view. They are re-
placed by a GS annunciation with an X
3.9.1.10 Warning Flags superimposed on the annunciation. The same an-
nunciations also occur if the glideslope sensor is
3.9.1.10.1 Heading Flag good but no computed data is received by the SDU.
If a failure of the heading sensor is detected, the 3.9.1.10.6 VOR/ILS Frequency Flag
lubber line is replaced by the boxed letters HDG
with an X superimposed. The compass card ro- If VOR/ILS frequency data becomes invalid, the
tates to the selected course angle for VOR/ILS mode selection remains as it was when
VOR/LOC/TCN/MLS or to the desired track angle the failure occurred. This means that VOR dis-
for FMS/VLF/LRN/LNV (HSI) format. VOR, TCN, played data will not be able to switch from LOC
and FMS/VLF/LRN/LNV bearing pointers (if se- mode to VOR mode if LOC mode was previously
lected) are removed from view, but the pointer sen- selected, or from VOR to LOC if VOR mode was
sor annunciations and single- or double-bar symbol previously selected. The same operation also occurs
remain in view. The same annunciations also occur if the VOR/LOC sensor is good but no computed
if the heading sensor is good but no computed data data is received by the SDU.
is received by the SDU.
3.9.1.10.7 DME Distance and Frequency Flag
3.9.1.10.2 Bearing Pointer Flag
If a DME failure is detected, the DME distance dis-
If a bearing pointer sensor failure is detected, the play, NM legend, and DME hold annunciation (if
associated bearing pointer is removed from view present) are removed from all of the format pages
and an X is superimposed on the single- or double- where DME data appears. A DME flag consisting of
bar bearing pointer sensor annunciator. The single- a DME annunciation with an X superimposed on
or double-bar symbol remains in view. The same the annunciation replaces the distance and NM
annunciations also occur if the bearing pointer sen- legend in the VOR/LOC and MLS formats or in the
sor is good but no computed data is received by the IDENT/FREQ/HOLD field in the DME format. Note
SDU. that the DME distance display for the MLS format
is affected only by DME channel 2 distance. This
3.9.1.10.3 VOR/TCN Lateral Deviation Flag display does not have a frequency ident associated
with it. If the DME sensor is good but no computed
If VOR/TCN data becomes invalid while being dis- data is received by the SDU, all distance displays
played, the lateral deviation bar and scale are re- have their digits replaced by dashes. In the case of
moved from view and an X is superimposed on the no computed data, the NM legend remains in view.
VOR or TCN format annunciator in the upper left
portion of the display. The same annunciations also 3.9.1.10.8 DME Ident Flag
occur if the VOR or TCN sensor is good but no com-
puted data is received by the SDU. If the DME identifier is inactive or fails, the DME
distance displays remain in view. If the DME for-
3.9.1.10.4 LOC Lateral Deviation Flag mat is being displayed, the ident for that DME is
replaced by the frequency if available. If frequency
If localizer data becomes invalid while being dis- data is not available, the DME flag symbol (the let-
played, the lateral deviation bar and scale are re- ters DME with an X superimposed) is displayed.

3.9.1.10.9 VLF/FMS/LRN/LNV (Data Page) are removed from view. A TACAN flag consisting of
Flag a boxed TCN annunciation with an X superimposed
on the annunciation replaces the distance and NM
If latitude, longitude, ground speed, or track data legend. The same annunciations also occur if the
becomes invalid while being displayed, the invalid TACAN sensor is good but no computed data is re-
data is replaced with dashes and an X is superim- ceived by the SDU.
posed on the VLE, FMS, LRN, or LNV format an-
nunciator in the upper left portion of the display. 3.9.1.10.15 Distance To Go Flag
The same annunciations also occur if the
VLF/FMS/LRN/LNV sensor is good but no com- If distance to go becomes invalid while being dis-
puted data is received by the SDU. played in the VLF/FMS/LRN/LNV (HSI) format,
the distance display and the NM legend are re-
3.9.1.10.10 VLF Only (Data Page) Caution moved from view. A distance to go flag consisting of
a boxed VLF, FMS, LRN, or LNV annunciation
If a caution bit is received when a VLF is the se- with an X superimposed on the annunciation re-
lected sensor, all latitude, longitude, ground speed, places the distance to go and NM legend. The same
and track data remains in view with an X superim- annunciations also occur if the VLF/FMS/LRN/LNV
posed over the displayed data. sensor is good but no computed data is received by
the SDU.
3.9.1.10.11 MLS Lateral Deviation Flag
3.9.1.10.16 Crosstrack Flag
If MAZ (microwave azimuth) data becomes invalid
while being displayed, the lateral deviation bar and If crosstrack data becomes invalid while being dis-
scale are removed from view and an X is superim- played in the VLF/FMS/LRN/LNV (HSI) format,
posed on the MLS format annunciator in the upper the cross-track deviation bar and scale are removed
left portion of the display. The same annunciations from view and an X is superimposed on the
also occur if the MLS sensor is good but no com- VLF/FMS/LRN/LNV format annunciator in the up-
puted data is received by the SDU. per left portion of the display. The same annuncia-
tions also occur if the VLF/FMS/LRN/LNV sensor is
3.9.1.10.12 MLS Vertical Deviation Flag good but no computed data is received by the SDU.
3.9.1.10.17 Desired Track Flag
If MGP (microwave glidepath) data becomes invalid
while being displayed, the deviation pointer and If desired track data becomes invalid while being
vertical deviation scale are removed from view. displayed in the VLF/FMS/LRN/LNV (HSI) format,
They are replaced by an MGP annunciation with an the desired track arrow, deviation bar, to/from ar-
X superimposed on the annunciation. The same an- row, and desired track digital display are removed
nunciations also occur if the MLS sensor is good but from view. A desired track flag consisting of a boxed
no computed data is received by the SDU. DTK annunciation with an X superimposed on the
annunciation replaces the digital desired track dis-
3.9.1.10.13 MLS Angular Data Flag play in the lower right portion of the display. If the
VLF/FMS/LRN/LNV sensor is good but no com-
If the selected MGP angle (in the upper left portion puted data is received by the SDU, the desired
of the screen) or the selected MAZ angle (in the track arrow and to/from arrow are removed from
lower left portion of the screen) becomes invalid view, and the desired track digital display is re-
while being displayed, the digital data associated placed by dashes.
with the respective display is replaced by dashes.
The same annunciations also occur if the MLS sen- 3.9.1.10.18 VLF/FMS/LRN/LNV Status Flag
sor is good but no computed data is received by the
SDU. If the VLF/FMS/LRN/LNV status word becomes in-
valid, inactive, or anything other than normal while
3.9.1.10.14 TACAN Distance Flag the VLF/FMS/LRN/LNV (HSI) format is selected,
the crosstrack deviation bar and scale and the
If a TACAN distance becomes invalid while being to/from arrow are removed from view and an X is
displayed, the distance display and the NM legend superimposed on the VLF/FMS/LRN/LNV format

annunciator in the upper left portion of the display. and Figure 3-20 indicates the controls and indica-
If the VLF/FMS/LRN/LNV data page format is se- tors and Table 3-8 describes the function of each
lected, the latitude, longitude, ground speed, and item for the BDI-36 (CPN 622-3702-015/-016) con-
track data displays are replaced by dashes. trols and indicators are presented in Figure 3-19
and Figure 3-21 and Table 3-9 describes the
3.10 RMI-36 BDI-36 OPERATING function of each listed item.
INSTRUCTIONS
3.10.1 Displays and Controls
The purpose of this section is to acquaint you with
the operation of the RMI-36 and BDI-36. A descrip- 3.10.1.1 Compass Card
tion of the display and control functions is pre-
sented. Figure 3-17 and Figure 3-20 indicates the The compass card displays the heading of the air-
controls and indicators and Table 3-7 describes the craft read against a fixed lubber line.
function of each item for the RMI-36. Figure 3-18
Figure 3-17. RMI-36 Controls and Indicators

Table 3-7. RMI-36 Controls and Indicators.
CONTROL OR INDICATOR FUNCTION
Single bar pointer Indicates VOR or ADF bearing.

Double bar pointer Indicates VOR or ADF bearing.
Single bar VOR/ADF switch Switches single bar pointer to either ADF or VOR indication.
Double bar VOR/ADF switch Switches double bar pointer to either ADF or VOR indication.
Compass card Indicates heading of the aircraft read against a fixed lubber line.
Heading flag Monitors servo error, compass validity, and instrument power.
Lubber Line Provides a reference for the compass card.
3.10.1.2 Single Bar Pointer segment displays will indicate all eights to provide
a lamp test. The intensity of the distance display
The single bar pointer displays either an ADF or and HOLD, MAN or DF annunciator is variable
VOR bearing. The mode of operation is selected by with an externally-wired control or voltage.
single bar VOR/ADF switch located on the front of
the bezel. The BDI-36 (CPN 622-3702-015/-016) 3.10.1.6 DME-2 (VOR-1) Display (BDI-36 Only)
status displays either a TCN or VOR bearing. The
mode of operation is selected by single bar The DME-2 display (VOR-1 display in -016 status)
VOR/TCN switch located on front of the bezel. is independent of, and functions identically to, the
DME-1, TCN/DME-1 or TCN display.
3.10.1.3 Double Bar Pointer
3.10.1.7 HOLD (MAN) Annunciator (BDI-36
The double bar pointer displays either an ADF or Only)
VOR bearing. The mode of operation is selected by
double bar VOR/ADF switch. Each pointer may be DME frequency hold capability enables the pilot to
switched independent of the other to a separate change the station being used as a VOR reference
ADF, VOR, or TCN receiver. without changing the station being used as a DME
reference. The HOLD (MAN) annunciator will illu-
3.10.1.4 Heading Flag minate to indicate frequency hold when the HOLD
flag input is not grounded.
The heading flag monitors servo error, compass va-
lidity, and instrument power. If any one is in error, 3.10.1.8 HOLD (DF) Annunciator (BDI-36
the flag will appear. Only)
3.10.1.5 DME-1 (TCN/DME-1 or TCN) Display The HOLD (DF) display is independent of, and
(BDI-36 Only) functions identically to, the HOLD (MAN) display.
The DME-1 (TCN/DME-1 or TCN) display in the 3.10.2 Operating Procedures

BDI-36 (CPN 622-3702-015/-016 status respec-
tively) provides a 3-digit display of distance. A 3.10.2.1 Typical RMI Operating Procedures
trailing decimal point is displayed when the dis-
tance is equal to or greater than 100 miles. The
decimal point is switched on between the second Note
and third digits to indicate to the nearest tenth
mile when distance is less than 100 miles. The indi- The following typical operating procedures
cator displays dashes when there is no valid data to are for general information only and are not
display. With an external self-test switch, the six 7- intended as flight operation instructions.

Figure - . BDI-36 Controls and Indicators
10 .1 Typical VOR Operating Procedures d. i

tion if the VOR signal is lost or weak.
Energize the radio navigation receivers by
10 .1 Typical ADF Operating Pr cedures
and the necessary aircraft circuit breakers.
Select a VOR channel and identify the st tion. Set the ADF control unit until desired fr -
Push VOR/ADF switch to select VOR on indic - n
r dow.
ing from the aircraft to the selected VOR st - Set ADF control unit function switch to ADF.

Table 3-8. BDI-36 Controls and Indicators.

Lubber line Provides a reference for the compass card.
DME displays Displays DME distances from two DME receiver/transmitters.
DME HOLD annunciators Illuminates to indicate DME HOLD in DME-1 or DME-2.
c. Push VOR/ADF switch to select ADF on indica- a. Frequency Selection

tor. The RMI pointer indicates magnetic bear-
ing from the aircraft to the selected ADF sta- Select assigned VHF frequency of VOR or ILS
tion. localizer ground station on control unit that is
paired with the desired DME station, or select
Note the VHF NAV frequency assigned to unpaired
channels.
When the ADF system is not receiving a re-
liable signal, the RMI pointer will remain b. Warmup and Search Time
parked in the 3 o’clock position in the ADF
mode. The indicator displays dashes when there is no
valid distance to display; for instance, when out
3.10.2.1.3 Compass Card
of range of a ground station or during warmup
Magnetic compass information is indicated on the and search time. (DME-40 requires approxi-
compass card. When the heading warning flag is mately 60 seconds to warm up; search time is 1
out of view, information displayed by the indicator second nominal.)
is reliable. The buffered compass output from the c. Dimming
bootstrap transmitter (option) is valid when the
heading warning flag is out of view. Adjust display lighting to comfortable bright-
3.10.2.1.4 DME Operation ness with external dim control.
The DME system measure the line-of-sight distance d. Normal Operation

from the aircraft to a selected ground station. The
ground station must be within the operating range Windows display distance to two ground sta-
of the DME. The BDI-36 can present a continuously tions.
updated display of distance to two independent sta- e. Identification
tions.
The coded audio identification signal from the
3.10.2.1.5 Typical DME Operating Procedures
DME station is heard in the aircraft audio sys-
Note tem every 30 seconds. This ident is synchro-
nized in the VOR station ident so that four VOR
The typical operating procedures are for idents (6 seconds apart) can be heard at 1020
general information only and are not in- Hz. The fifth ident (DME) can be distinguished
tended for flight operation. by its higher tone (1350 Hz).

Figure 3-19. BDI-36 (-015, -016 Only), Controls and Indicators
f. Self-Test 2. Release test pushbutton. The indicator dis-

plays 888, or 88.8 for the memory period (8
The self-test mode verifies distance accuracy by
to 12 seconds). This feature provides the
injecting a simulated target in place of the
lamp test of the 7-segment displays.
DME station reply. Lamp test is included in the
3. After the memory period, normal DME op-
self-test sequence.
eration is resumed. (Dashes are displayed
1. Push and hold the externally-wired test until the DME receiver-transmitter reac-
pushbutton. The DME simulated test target quires the station.) A complete test of the
distance (0.0 or 0.1 miles) will be displayed DME system operation requires capability
by the indicator. to lock onto a DME station and hear the
audio ident.

Table 3-9. BDI-36 (-015/-016 Only), Controls and Indicators.
Single bar pointer Indicates VOR or TACAN bearing.
Single bar VOR/TCN switch Switches single bar pointer to either TCN or VOR indication.
Distance displays Displays distances from two DME/TCN receiver/transmitters (-015).
Displays distances from two TCN/VOR receiver/transmitters (-016).
Annunicators Illuminates to indicate DME HOLD in TCN/DME-1 or DME-2 (-015).
Illuminates to indicate MAN in TCN or DF in VOR-1 (-016).
g. Frequency Hold (Option)

Caution
DME frequency hold capability enables the pi-
lot to change the station being used as a VOR It is very important to listen to the DME
reference without changing the station being audio. This is the only means of identifying
used as a DME reference. If the system is the DME station being tracked while in the
turned off or a transient occurs in the power HOLD mode.
lines, frequency hold will be lost and the DME
frequency hold switch must be returned to the
normal position to reload the desired frequency Caution
into the DME-40.
The RMI-36 and BDI-36 indicators have
1. Select VHF frequency associated with de- been designed to exhibit a very high degree
sired DME station and obtain lock-on. of functional integrity. Nevertheless, the
2. Set frequency hold switch to the hold posi- user must recognize that it is not practical
tion. Indicator DME HOLD annunciator to provide monitoring for all conceivable
lights indicating DME hold. failures and, however unlikely, it is possible
3. Select different VHF frequency on same that erroneous operation could occur with-
control unit to select new VOR or ILS lo- out a fault indication. It is the responsibility
calizer station. of the pilot to detect such an occurrence by
4. The indicator continues displaying informa- means of cross checks with redundant or
tion from previously selected DME station correlated information available in the
while VOR or ILS information is from new cockpit.
station. Listen to coded audio identification
signal from the DME station to ensure the
DME ident is the first station selected.

Figure 3-20. RMI-36 and BDI-36, VOR/ADF Selection Indications

Figure 3-21. BDI-36 (015, -016 Only), VOR/ADF/TCN Selection Indications

3.11 RTU-870A AND RTU-870T RADIO ences or by showing RTU-870A or RTU-870T data
TUNING UNITS, OPERATING (pin names, functions, etc) in parenthesis.
INSTRUCTIONS
In a reversionary mode, the RTU suspends normal
The RTU-870A is a panel-mounted radio tuning COM, NAV, ADF, and ATC control and display
unit that gives centralized control and display of functions in order to display engine data from the
frequency/ATC code and operating modes used by left and right side engine buses.
the -4XX series of Collins General Aviation Pro
Line II radios, including VHF COMM, VHF NAV, Figure 3-22 through Figure 3-28 and Table 3-10
DME, ADF, ATC transponder, and an ARINC-429 provide the operating instructions for the RTU-
MLS receiver. 870A. Figure 3-29 and Table 3-11 provide the oper-
ating instructions for the RTU-870T. The RTU pro-
The RTU-870A is designed to be installed in pairs vides dual concentric rotary knobs in the lower
and each unit can control two complete sets of right corner of the unit for frequency/ATC code
COMM, NAV, ADF, and ATC radios, providing retuning, five line keys along the right-hand edge to
versionary tuning capabilities. select which radio is to be tuned and to access mode
pages for each radio, six dedicated function push-
The RTU-870T is a panel-mounted radio tuning buttons located at the bottom center, a brightness
unit used as the primary controller for uhf/vhf control located at the upper right, and two annun-
COMM, vhf NAV/DME, ADF, ATC/TCAS, and TA- ciators located at the top center of the RTU. Table
CAN radios. It, too, is designed to be installed in 3-10 and Table 3-11 describe the function of each
pairs and each unit can control two sets of radios, line key, push-button annunciator, and control. The
providing reversionary tuning capabilities. straps and switchable discrete inputs affect display
of data on the RTU. The controls and indicators
Throughout this paragraph, all references to the listed in the tables describe all of the RTU functions
RTU refer to the RTU-870A and RTU-870T. Varia- and modes. The RTU-870T reversionary mode page
tions between the two units are identified where controls are the same as shown for the RTU-870A;
applicable in all text, tables, and figures. The iden- however, some of the functions and modes of each
tification method is by direct reference to differ- unit may not be installed in certain configurations.

Figure 3-22. RTU-870A Radio Tuning Unit, Controls and Displays

Table 3-10. RTU-870A Radio Tuning Unit, Controls and Displays.
CONTROL OR DISPLAY FUNCTION/DESCRIPTION
Brightness control Rotate the BRT knob to adjust display brightness in conjunction with the dimming bus control or
override the external 5-28 V dc dimming bus input.
Set the brightness control as follows: Adjust the master dimming bus control to mid-position
(approximately +16.5 V dc into the RTU). Adjust the RTU brightness control fully counterclockwise.
Note
The RTU brightness control has a 20-degree “dead spot” near the middle of the adjustment
range to aid in proper adjustment of the control. Display brightness does not vary when the
dead spot is reached.
Adjust the brightness control clockwise to middle of the dead spot. The dead spot is the desired po-
sition for the brightness control. This position makes RTU brightness track with the brightness of
other aircraft instruments when the aircraft dimming bus control is changed.
Note
Do not change the brightness control after adjustment. Changing the control after adjust-
ment makes the reference voltage in the RTU too high or low with respect to the dimming
bus input voltage. A reference voltage offset makes the RTU unable to attain maximum or
minimum brightness when the aircraft dimming bus control is adjusted to maximum or
minimum brightness, respectively.
Line keys Push one of the five line keys to select a COM, PRE, NAV (VOR or ILS), ADF, or ATC tune/control
function. These line keys are used to select a radio for tuning and to access the mode control pages.
Push a line key next to a line not marked by the selector star to display the star on that line. The
frequency/ATC code select knobs may now be used to change that frequency or code display. The
knobs directly tune the radio when the star is at the COM, NAV, ADF, or ATC line. Note that the
ATC line key is active only on the RTU which is controlling the selected transponder.
Push the line key again (while that line is marked by the selector star) to display the
COM/NAV/ADF/ATC mode page for that radio. The mode pages are used to select a variety of con-
trol functions. The PRE function is described later in this table.
Selector star The selector star indicates the radio that can be tuned by the frequency/ATC code select knobs, and
the mode page that can be displayed using a line key. The selector star is normally displayed on the
PRE line, and automatically returns to this line after approximately 15 seconds of knob/button inac-
tivity.
COM display Push the COM line key to display the selector star on the COM display line. The frequency displayed
on this line is the VHF COM radio active frequency. Rotate the frequency select knobs to change the
displayed frequency and directly tune the radio. Push the COM key again (while star is displayed) to
view the COM mode page.
The digit to the right of the COM legend (1 or 2) indicates which radio is tuned to the displayed fre-
quency. Refer to the description of the 1/2 button.

COM preset display If the star is not already on the PRE line, press the PRE line key to display the selector star on the
COM preset display line. Rotate the frequency select knobs to change the displayed preset fre-
quency. Press the PRE line key again (while star is displayed) to interchange the preset and active
COMM frequencies. The VHF COMM radio tunes to the new COMM frequency (top line) and the
previous COMM frequency becomes the new preset frequency (second line). The old frequency is
available for instant recall by pushing the PRE line key again.
An upward pointing arrow is displayed to the right of the PRE legend while this line is selected. This
arrow indicates that the preset frequency can be moved upward and become the active frequency
when the PRE line key is pushed.
MLS display If a MLS system is installed on the RTU-870A side, the top line of the VOR mode page displays ON
or OFF MLS. This line allows the pilot to select MLS on or off. When MLS is selected ON from the
VOR mode page, the COM preset frequency display on the main mode page is replaced the MLS
channel number. When MLS is OFF (as selected from the VOR mode page) the COM preset display
is shown on the main mode page and no MLS mode page is available. If an MLS system is not in-
stalled, then MLS is not displayed on the top line of the VOR mode page.
Push the MLS line key to display the selector star on the MLS display line. The MLS channel dis-
played on this line is the active MLS channel number. Rotate the code select knobs to change the
displayed channel number. Push the line key again (while the star is displayed) to view the MLS
mode page.
NAV display The NAV display controls the VIR radio active frequency and the DME X-Y channel tuning frequen-
cies.
Push the NAV (VOR or ILS) line key to display the selector star on the NAV display line. The fre-
quency displayed on this line is the VIR radio active frequency and the DME channel tuning fre-
quency. “AUT” is displayed when the radio is being tuned by the FMS. Rotate the frequency select
knobs to change the displayed frequency and directly tune the radio. Push the NAV key again (while
star is displayed) to view the NAV mode page.
The digit to the right of the VOR legend (1 or 2) indicates which radio is tuned to the displayed fre-
ADF display Push the ADF line key to display the selector star on the ADF display line. The frequency displayed
on this line is the ADF radio active frequency. Rotate the frequency select knobs to change the dis-
played frequency and directly tune the radio. Push the ADF key again (while star is displayed) to
view the ADF mode page.
The digit to the right of the ADF legend (1 or 2) indicates which radio is tuned to the displayed fre-
quency. Refer to the description of the 1/2 button. If a single ADF receiver is installed, the right RTU
does not display an ADF 2 line.
ATC display This line is displayed only on the RTU that is controlling the active transponder. Push the ATC line
key to display the selector star on the ATC display line. The ATC code displayed on this line is the
active transponder code. Rotate the code select knobs to change the displayed code; the transponder
immediately responds to the new code. Push the ATC key again (while star is displayed) to view the
ATC mode page.
The digit to the right of the ATC legend (1 or 2) indicates which transponder is active. ATC 1/2 selec-
tion is made on the aircraft reversion panel.
Frequency/ATC code select Rotate these two concentric knobs to change the frequency or code displayed on the starred display
knobs line. The larger knob changes the most significant digits, and the smaller knob changes the two
least significant digits of the display.

COM squelch button Push the COM SQ button to momentarily disable the VHF COMM receiver squelch circuits. When
the button is released, squelch returns to normal.
ADF test button Push the ADF TEST button to initiate the ADF radio self-test routine. Note that “TEST” is dis-
played (instead of “ADF”) in the ADF display line while the button is pushed.
1/2 button Normally each RTU controls only the on-side COMM/NAV/ADF radios. Push and hold the 1/2 button
to display the cross-side frequencies; these frequencies can only be changed by the cross-side RTU.
The RTU becomes enabled to control both the left (1) and right (2) side radios when the cross-side
RTU is in reversion mode (ENG DATA or DISABLED). Push the 1/2 button to select either the left
(1) or right (2) bank of COMM/NAV/ADF radios to be controlled by the RTU. ATC 1/2 selection is
made on the aircraft reversion panel.
The COM, NAV, ADF, and ATC display lines indicate the selected side next to the line keys.
DME hold button Push the DME HLD button to hold the DME to the current frequency, and allow the NAV receiver
to be independently tuned. When this button is pushed, the DME HOLD annunciator (located on top
center of the RTU) lights. Push the DME HLD button a second time to cancel hold; the DME then
tunes to the active NAV frequency.
ATC standby/on button The ATC STBY button is active only on the RTU which is controlling the selected transponder. Push
this button to apply power to the TDR transponder, but prevent it from transmitting replies
(standby mode). Push this button again to reactivate replies to ground interrogations. Note that
“STBY” is displayed (instead of “ATC”) in the ATC display line when this button is pushed.
ATC identification button The ATC ID button is active only on the RTU which is controlling the selected transponder. Push
this button to transmit a special identification pattern that is displayed on the ground controller’s
radar screen. Push this button only when requested to “squawk ident” by the ground controller.
Note that “ID” is displayed (instead of “ATC” in the ATC display line for about 20 seconds when this
button is pushed.
DME hold annunciator The DME HOLD annunciator lights to indicate that the DME is being held to the NAV frequency
that was active when DME hold was selected. The DME hold frequency is displayed on the NAV
mode page.
ATC reply annunciator The REPLY annunciator lights when the transponder replies to an interrogation.

Figure 3-23. RTU-870A Radio Tuning Unit, COM Mode Page Controls and Displays

COM Mode Page Push the COM line key twice to select the COM mode page. The RTU will automatically return to
the main menu page after approximately 15 seconds of inactivity.
COM active frequency This display indicates the active VHF COMM radio frequency.
display
COM preset frequency This display indicates the preset COM frequency that is available to immediately tune the VHF ra-
display dio.
COM source annunciator The COM source annunciator indicates which radio (COM 1 or COM 2) is being tuned by the RTU.
Selector star The selector star indicates which COM frequency can be changed by the frequency select knobs. Line
keys move the star to either the active COM (RTN) or to the preset COM (PRE) line.
Return to main menu Push the RTN key to move the selector star to the active frequency display line (if not already
select key there). Rotate the frequency select knobs to change the displayed COM frequency and directly tune
the radio.
Push the RTN key again to return to the RTU main menu page.
COM preset key Push the PRE key to move the selector star to the preset frequency display. An upward pointing ar-
row appears to the right of the PRE legend. Rotate the frequency select knobs to change the dis-
played preset frequency.
Push the PRE key again to interchange the preset and active COM frequencies. The radio tunes to
the new COM frequency (top line); the previous COM frequency becomes the new preset frequency
(second line). The old frequency is available for instant recall by pushing the PRE key again.
Squelch key and Push the SQ key to alternately enable (ON SQ) or disable (OFF SQ) the receiver squelch circuits.
annunciator
COM test key Push the TST key to initiate the VHF radio self-test and annunciator routine (ON TST). When the
key is released, test mode turns off (TST).

Figure 3-24. RTU-870A Radio Tuning Unit, NAV Mode Page Controls and Displays

*NAV Mode Page Push the NAV (VOR or ILS) line key twice to select the NAV mode page. The RTU will automati-
cally return to the main menu page after approximately 15 seconds of inactivity.
NAV frequency display This display indicates the active VIR NAV/DME tuning/channel frequency that can be directly
changed by the frequency select knobs.
NAV source annunciator The NAV source annunciator indicates which radio (VOR1, ILS1, VOR2, or ILS2) is being tuned by
the RTU. VOR or ILS annunciates, depending on the selected NAV frequency; AUT annunciates
when the radio is being tuned by the FMS.
Return to main menu Push the RTN key to return to the RTU main menu page.
select key
NAV test key and Push the TST key to initiate the VOR radio self-test routine (ON TST). When the key is released,
annunciator test mode turns off (TST).
DME hold display This display indicates the frequency that the DME is held to. This display is presented only if the
DME is in hold mode (DME HLD button pushed).
MLS ON/OFF control When MLS is installed in the aircraft, use this line key to turn MLS on or off.
* In installations using a single DME-442, the convention has been established to make the pilot’s side active VOR frequency tune
DME channel 1, and the opposite side (copilot’s side) active VOR frequency tune channel 2. Most new installations have dual
NAV and, consequently, dual RTU-870A’s. Therefore, in most dual installations, the opposite side control will be available to sup-
ply the channel 2 tuning frequency.

Figure 3-25. RTU-870A Radio Tuning Unit, ADF Mode Page Controls and Displays

ADF Mode Page Push the ADF line key twice to select the ADF mode page. The RTU will return automatically to the
main menu page after approximately 15 seconds of inactivity.
ADF frequency display This display indicates the active ADF frequency that can be directly changed by the frequency select
knobs.
ADF source annunciator The ADF source annunciator indicates which radio (ADF 1 or ADF 2) is being tuned by the RTU. If a
single ADF receiver is installed, the ADF 2 functions are not available.
ADF line key and mode Push the ADF line key to select the ADF mode. A selector star on this line annunciates ADF mode
line selection. The ADF radio provides bearing-to-the-station and aural outputs in ADF mode.
ANT line key and mode Push the ANT line key to select the ANT mode. A selector star on this line annunciates ANT mode
line selection. The ADF radio provides only an aural output in ANT mode.
BFO line key and Push the BFO key to select (ON BFO) or deselect (OFF BFO) the BFO mode. The ADF radio pro-
annunciator vides a 1000-Hz aural output tone in BFO mode when a keyed cw signal is received.
select key

Figure 3 26 s

operation
Table - . RTU-870A Radio Tuning Unit, Controls and Displays.
Push the ATC line key twice to select the ATC mode page. The RTU will return automatically to the
i
ATC code display
select knobs.
s
played instead of “RTN” (for about 20 seconds) when the ATC ID button is pushed.
a nunciator
Altitude reporting (ON ALT) mode is the normal operating mode. The transponder replies to inte -
Reply (OFF ALT) mode normally is used only when requested by ATC. The transponder replies to
ALT display
ATC test key and Push the TST key to initiate the TDR self-test routine (ON TST). When the key is released, test
n
Return to main menu and Push the RTN key to return to the RTU main menu page.

Figure 3-27. RTU-870A Radio Tuning Unit, MLS Mode Page Controls and Displays

MLS Mode Page Push the MLS line key twice to select the MLS mode page. The RTU will return automatically to the
Glidepath angle display This display indicates the aircraft glidepath angle. An A or M appears next to the line key. This let-
ter indicates automatic (A) or manual (M) control of the glidepath angle.
Manual/automatic Push the GP line key to toggle the glidepath angle selection to and from automatic (A) and manual
glidepath selection line (M) angle selection by the MLS system. Changing from manual to automatic or automatic to manual
key on this line also changes the azimuth display to show manual or automatic. If the ARINC-429
maximum selectable glidepath word or azimuth word is not valid for any reason, then the glidepath
and azimuth displays switch to automatic and manual can not be selected.
Selected channel The display indicates the selected MLS channel and can be directly changed by the code knobs.
select key
Manual/automatic azi- Push the AZ line key to toggle the azimuth angle selection to and from automatic (A) and manual
muth selection line key (M) angle selection by the MLS system. Changing from manual to automatic or automatic to manual
on this line also changes the azimuth display to show manual or automatic. If the ARINC-429
maximum selectable azimuth word or glidepath word is not valid for any reason then the azimuth
and glidepath displays switch to automatic and manual can not be selected.
MLS test key and Push the TST key to initiate the MLS self-test routine (ON TST). When the key is released, test
annunciator mode turns off (TST).
MLS source annunciator The MLS source annunciator indicates which MLS system (MLS1 or MLS2) is being controlled by
the RTU. If a single MLS is installed, the MLS 2 functions are not available.

523-0772721
Figure 3-28. RTU-870A Radio Tuning Unit, Reversionary Mode Page Controls and Displays
3-68
Reversionary mode page Toggle the RTU switch (on the aircraft center reversionary panel) to the ENG DATA position to dis-
play the reversion page. The RTU suspends normal COM, NAV, ADF, and ATC control and display
functions; parameters from both left and right side EDC engine data concentrators are then dis-
played.
Interturbine temperature The TT display indicates the interturbine temperature (in °C × 10).
display
Torque display The TQ display indicates the engine torque (in percent of red line value).
Prop rpm display The PR display indicates the propeller speed (in rpm × 10).
Internal engine speed The N1 display indicates the internal engine compressor speed (in percent of red line value).
display

Figure 3-29 (Sheet 1 of 10). RTU-870T Radio Tuning Unit, Controls and Displays

Table 3-11. RTU-870T Radio Tuning Unit, Controls and Displays.
The main menu page of each RTU indicates the units that can be presently controlled by that RTU.
Brightness control Rotate the BRT knob to adjust display brightness.
Line keys Push 1 of the 5 line keys to select a UHF COM, VHF COM, PRE (COM), NAV (VOR or ILS), ADF,
TCN, ATC, or MLS tune/control head function. These line keys select a radio for retuning and access
the mode control pages.
Push a line key next to a line not marked by the selector star to display the star on that line. Rotate
the tuning knobs to change that frequency, channel, or code display. The knobs directly retune the
radio when the star is at the UHF, VHF, VOR, ILS, ADF, TCN, ATC, or MLS line.
Push the line key again (while that line is marked by the selector star) to display the (UHF COM,
VHF COM, NAV, ADF, TCN, ATC, or MLS) mode page for that radio. These mode pages are used to
select a variety of control head functions. The PRE function is described later in this table.
Selector star The selector star marks the radio that can be retuned by the tuning knobs, and the mode page that
can be displayed using a line key. The selector star normally displays on the PRE line, and automati-
cally returns to this line after approximately 15 seconds of inactivity.
UHF COM display Push the UHF line key to move the selector star to the UHF COM display line. This line can display
either a channel number or a frequency.
When a channel number displays, it represents the UHF COM radio active frequency. Rotate the
tuning knobs to change the displayed channel and directly retune the radio. Push the UHF key again
(while star is displayed) to view the UHF COM (channel) mode page. Refer to Figure 3-29, sheet 2.
When a frequency displays, it is the UHF COM radio active frequency. Rotate the tuning knobs to
change the displayed frequency and directly retune the radio. Push the UHF key again (while star is
displayed) to view the UHF COM (frequency) mode page. Refer to Figure 3-29, sheet 3.
VHF COM display Push the VHF line key to move the selector star to the VHF COM display line. The frequency dis-
played on this line is the VHF COM radio active frequency. Rotate the tuning knobs to change the
displayed frequency and directly retune the radio. Push the VHF key again (while star is displayed)
to view the VHF COM mode page. Refer to Figure 3-29, sheet 4.
The digit to the right of the VHF legend (2) shows that the VHF radio tuned to the displayed fre-
quency is a number 2 (right side) unit.
COM display Push the COM line key to display the selector star on the COM display line. The frequency displayed
on this line is the VHF COM radio active frequency. Rotate the frequency select knobs to change the
displayed frequency and directly tune the radio. Push the COM key again (while star is displayed) to
view the COM mode page. Refer to Figure 3-29, sheet 5.
The digit to the right of the COM legend (1 or 2) indicates which radio is tuned to the displayed fre-
COM preset display The PRE display shows the UHF COM or VHF COM frequency that can be transferred to the (top) ac-
tive display line. Note that if the UHF COM active display shows a channel number (instead of a fre-
quency), then the PRE line will also display a channel number.
Push the PRE line key to move the selector star to the preset display line (if not already there). Ro-
tate the tuning knobs to change the preset display. Push the PRE line key again (while star is dis-
played) to interchange the preset and active COM values. The COM radio retunes to the new fre-
quency/channel (top line) and the previous active frequency/channel becomes the new preset (second
line). The old value is available for instant recall by pushing the PRE line key again.
An upward pointing arrow displays to the right of the (VHF COM) PRE legend while this line is se-
lected. This arrow indicates that the preset frequency is immediately available to be moved upward
and become the active frequency. An arrow does not display by the (UHF COM) PRE legend.

MLS display (not shown) If a MLS system is installed on the RTU side, the top line of the VOR mode page displays ON or OFF
MLS. This line allows the pilot to select MLS on or off. When MLS is selected ON from the VOR mode
page, the COM preset frequency display on the main mode page is replaced by the MLS channel
number. When MLS is OFF (as selected from the VOR mode page) the COM preset display is shown
on the main mode page and no MLS mode page is available. If an MLS system is not installed, then
MLS is not displayed on the top line of the VOR mode page.
Push the MLS line key to display the selector star on the MLS display line. The MLS channel dis-
played on this line is the active MLS channel number. Rotate the code select knobs to change the dis-
played channel number. Push the line key again (while the star is displayed) to view the MLS mode
page.
NAV display Push the NAV (VOR or ILS) line key to move the selector star to the NAV display line. The frequency
displayed on this line is the active VIR (also DME, unless held) radio frequency. Either “VOR” or
“ILS” displays, depending on the tuned frequency; “AUT” displays when the radio is being autotuned
by the FMS. Rotate the tuning knobs to change the displayed frequency and directly retune the radio.
Push the NAV key again (while star is displayed) to view the NAV mode page. Refer to Figure 3-29,
sheet 6.
The digit to the right of the VOR or ILS legend (1 or 2) shows which radio is tuned to the displayed
frequency. Refer to the description of the 1/2 button.
ADF display Push the ADF line key to move the selector star to the ADF display line. The frequency displayed on
this line is the ADF radio active frequency. Rotate the tuning knobs to change the displayed fre-
quency and directly retune the radio. Push the ADF key again (while star is displayed) to view the
ADF mode page. Refer to Figure 3-29, sheet 7.
The digit to the right of the ADF legend (1) shows that the ADF radio tuned to the displayed fre-
quency is a number 1 (left side) unit.
TCN display Push the TCN line key to move the selector star to the TCN display line. The channel number dis-
played on this line is the TACAN radio active channel. Rotate the tuning knobs to change the dis-
played channel and directly retune the radio. Push the TCN key again (while star is displayed) to
view the TCN mode page. Refer to Figure 3-29, sheet 8.
Available TACAN channels are from 1X to 126X and from 1Y to 126Y. Change the X or Y label by ro-
tating the RTU inner tune knob to rollover the least significant digit of the display.
Note that “AUT” displays on this line instead of “TCN” when the radio is being autotuned by the
FMS.
ATC display Push the ATC line key to move the selector star to the ATC display line. The ATC code displayed on
this line is the active transponder reply code. Rotate the tuning knobs to change the displayed code;
the transponder immediately responds to the new code. Push the ATC key again (while star is dis-
played) to view the ATC mode page. Use this page to control the transponder and TCAS; refer to
Figure 3-29, sheet 9.
The digit to the right of the ATC legend (2) shows that the transponder tuned to the displayed fre-
quency is a number 2 (right side) unit.
Tuning knobs Rotate these two concentric knobs to change the frequency, channel, or code shown on the starred
display line. The outer knob changes the most significant (left) digits, and the inner knob changes the
least significant (right) digits of the display.
COM squelch button Push the COM SQ button to momentarily disable the UHF COM or the VHF COM receiver squelch
circuits. When the button is released, squelch returns to normal.
ADF TEST button The ADF TEST button is active only on the RTU that is controlling the ADF receiver. Push the ADF
TEST button to initiate the ADF radio self-test routine. Note that “TEST” displays (instead of “ADF”)
on the ADF display line while the button is pushed.

1/2 button Normally each RTU controls only the onside radios. Push and hold the 1/2 button to display cross-side
tuning; these values can be changed only by the other RTU.
The RTU becomes enabled to control both the left and right bank of radios when the cross-side RTU is
in reversion mode (pedestal RTU switch set to DSBL). Then push the 1/2 button to alternately select
the left (1) or right (2) bank of radios to be controlled by the RTU.
Note that most of the display lines show a left (1) or right (2) side radio identifier next to the line key.
The UHF (COM) and TCN display lines do not show a 1/2 identifier; these units are left side radios.
DME hold button Push the DME HLD button to hold the DME at the current NAV frequency, and allow the VOR/LOC
receiver to be independently retuned. When this button is pushed, DME HOLD annunciates on the
top center of the RTU. Push the DME HLD button a second time to cancel hold; the DME automati-
cally retunes to the active NAV frequency.
DME hold annunciator The DME HOLD annunciator lights to show that the DME is being held to the NAV frequency that
was active when DME hold was selected. The DME hold frequency is displayed on the NAV mode
page.
ATC standby/on button The ATC STBY button is active only on the RTU that is controlling the transponder. Push this button
to select standby or normal (on) mode. Standby mode applies power to the transponder, but prevents
it from transmitting replies; use this mode only during taxi or when requested by ATC. Note that
“STBY” displays (instead of “ATC 2”) on the ATC display line in standby mode.
ATC identification button The ATC ID button is active only on the RTU that is controlling the transponder. Push this button to
transmit a special identification pattern that displays on the ground controller’s radar screen. Push
this button only when requested to “squawk ident” by the ground controller. Note that “ID” displays
(instead of “ATC 2”) on the ATC display line for about 20 seconds when this button is pushed.
ATC reply annunciator The REPLY annunciator is active only on the RTU that is controlling the transponder. This annun-
ciator lights when the TDR transponder replies to an interrogation.

Figure 3-29 (Sheet 2). RTU-870T Radio Tuning Unit, Controls and Displays

This page is available for display only when the RTU main menu page shows UHF COM active and
preset channels (not frequencies). Channels are digits from 0 to 20. Note that channel 0 is not user
programmable; this channel is an RTU default assigned to any unpaired frequency.
UHF COM mode page Push the UHF line key twice to select the UHF COM (channel) mode page. The RTU automatically
redisplays the main menu page after approximately 15 seconds of inactivity.
UHF COM active This display shows the UHF COM radio active channel on the top line and the frequency that has
been paired (programmed) to this channel on the second line. Channel pairing is described later on
this page.
Selector star The selector star displays by the active channel number or frequency to show that this value can be
changed by the tuning knobs. Line keys move the star to either the channel (RTN) or to the frequency
(SET) line. Rotate the tuning knobs to change the display and directly retune the radio.
Squelch key Push the SQ key to alternately enable (ON SQ) or disable (OFF SQ) the receiver squelch circuits.
Tone key Push the TN key to alternately enable (ON TN) or disable (OFF TN) tone mode. This mode enables a
1020-Hz transmit tone.
Guard key Push the GD key to alternately enable (ON GD) or disable (OFF GD) the UHF guard receiver.
Return to main menu Push the RTN key to redisplay the RTU main menu select key page.
Chan/freq pair Push the SET key (twice) to star the SET line set key and then choose a page used to display or
change the UHF COM channel programming. This page is also used to select either the UHF COM
channel or the UHF COM frequency display format on the main menu page. The RTU automatically
The top two lines show the active channel and frequency. Push the first or second RTN line key to
move the selector star to one of these lines. Then rotate the tuning knobs to change the active chan-
nel or frequency and directly retune the radio. Push the RTN line key a second time (after star is
moved to the line) to redisplay the RTU main menu page. If the star is at the frequency RTN line, the
RTU main menu page shows the UHF COM active and preset frequencies. If the star is at the chan-
nel RTN line, the main menu page shows the UHF COM active and preset channels (unless both
would display as zeros; then frequencies display).
Note that channel 0 is automatically assigned to a frequency that is selected by the tuning knobs and
is not paired to any of the 20 programmable channel numbers. Channel programming is described
below.
The third and fourth lines show a paired channel and frequency. Use these lines to display or change
the channel/frequency programming. Channels 1 through 20 are available for user programming.
Push the third line key to move the selector star to the CH line (if not already there). Then rotate the
tuning knobs to sequentially display each of the 20 channels on the CH line; the frequency that has
been paired to that channel automatically displays on the FR line.
Program a new frequency pairing as follows. Rotate the tuning knobs to display the desired channel
number on the CH line. Then push the fourth line key to move the selector star to the FR line. Rotate
the tuning knobs to display the new paired frequency on the FR line. Then move the selector star
back to the CH line to store the new pairing.
UHF annunciates on the bottom line to label this page as a UHF COM display.


This page is available for display only when the RTU main menu page shows UHF COM active and
preset frequencies (not channels).
UHF COM mode page Push the UHF line key twice to select the UHF COM (frequency) mode page. The RTU automatically
UHF COM active This display shows the UHF COM radio active frequency.
frequency display
Selector star The selector star displays by the active frequency to show that this value can be changed by the tun-
ing knobs. Rotate the tuning knobs to change the frequency display and directly retune the radio.
Tone key Push the TN key to alternately enable (ON TN) or disable (OFF TN) tone mode. This mode enables a
1020 Hz transmit tone.
Guard key Push the GD key to alternately enable (ON GD) or disable (OFF GD) the UHF guard receiver.
Return to main menu Push the RTN key to redisplay the RTU main menu select keypage.
Chan/freq pair set key Push the SET key to select a page that is used to display or change the UHF COM channel program-
ming. This page also selects either the UHF COM channel or the UHF COM frequency display format
on the main menu page. The RTU automatically redisplays the main menu page after approximately
15 seconds of inactivity.
The top two lines show the active frequency and channel. Push the first or second RTN line key to
move the selector star to one of these lines. Then rotate the tuning knobs to change the active fre-
quency or channel and directly retune the radio. Push the RTN line key a second time (after star is
moved to the line) to redisplay the RTU main menu page. If the star is at the frequency RTN line, the
RTU main menu page shows the UHF COM active and preset frequencies. If the star is at the chan-
nel RTN line, the main menu page shows the UHF COM active and preset channels (unless both
would display as zeros; then frequencies display).
Note that the RTU automatically assigns channel number 0 to any frequency selected by the tuning
knobs that is not already paired to one of the 20 programmable channel numbers.
The third and fourth lines show a paired channel and frequency. Use these lines to display or change
the channel/frequency programming. Channels 1 through 20 are available for user programming.
Channel programming is described on sheet 2.
UHF annunciates on the bottom line to label this page as a UHF COM display.


VHF COM mode page Push the VHF line key twice to select the VHF COM mode page. The RTU automatically redisplays
the main menu page after approximately 15 seconds of inactivity.
VHF COM active This display shows the active VHF COM radio frequency display frequency.
VHF COM preset This display shows a preset VHF COM frequency display that is available to immediately retune the
radio.
VHF COM source The VHF source annunciation means the RTU is controlling a number 1 (left side) or number 2 (right
annunciator side) radio.
Selector star The selector star shows which VHF COM frequency can be changed by the tuning knobs. Line keys
move the star to either the active (RTN) or the preset (PRE) frequency display line.
Return to main menu Push the RTN key to move the selector star to the active frequency display line (if not already there).
Rotate the tuning knobs to change the displayed frequency and directly retune the radio. Push the
RTN key again to redisplay the RTU main menu page.
VHF COM preset key Push the PRE key to move the selector star to the preset frequency display line. An upward pointing
arrow appears to the right of the PRE legend when this line is starred. Rotate the tuning knobs to
change the displayed preset frequency.
Push the PRE key again to interchange the preset and active VHF COM frequencies. The radio re-
tunes to the new frequency (top line); the previous active frequency becomes the new preset (second
line). The old frequency is available for instant recall by pushing the PRE key again.
VHF COM test key Push the TST key to initiate the VHF COM radio self-test routine (ON TST). When the key is re-
leased, test mode turns off (TST).


COM mode page Push the COM line key twice to select the COM mode page. The RTU automatically redisplays the
COM active frequency This display shows the active VHF COM radio frequency that can be directly changed by the tuning
display knobs.
COM preset frequency This display indicates the preset COM frequency that is available to immediately tune the VHF radio.
COM source annunciator The COM source annunciator indicates which radio (COM 1 or COM 2) is being tuned by the RTU.
Selector star The selector star indicates which COM frequency can be changed by the frequency display line (if not
already there).
Return to main menu Push the RTN key to move the selector star to the active frequency display line (if not already there).
Rotate the frequency select knobs to change the displayed COM frequency and directly tune the radio.
Push the RTN key again to return to the RTU main menu page.
COM preset key Push the PRE key to move the selector star to the preset frequency display. An upward pointing ar-
row appears to the right of the PRE legend. Rotate the frequency select knob to change the displayed
preset frequency.
Push the PRE key again to interchange the preset and active COM frequencies. The radio tunes the
new COM frequency (top line); the previous COM frequency becomes the new preset frequency
(second line). The old frequency is available for instant recall by pushing the PRE key again.
Squelch key Push the SQ key to alternately enable (SQ ON) or disable (OFF SQ) the receiver squelch circuits.
COM test key Push the TST key to start the VHF radio self-test routine routine (ON TST). When the key is re-


NAV mode page Push the NAV (VOR or ILS) line key twice to select the NAV mode page. The RTU automatically re-
displays the main menu page after approximately 15 seconds of inactivity.
NAV frequency display This display shows the active VHF NAV display frequency that can be directly changed by the tuning
knobs.
NAV source annunciator The NAV source annunciator shows which navigation receiver (VOR1, ILS1, VOR2, or ILS2) is being
tuned by the RTU. “VOR” or “ILS” annunciates, depending on the selected NAV frequency; “AUT”
annunciates when the radio is being tuned by the FMS.
Return to main menu Push the RTN key to redisplay the RTU main select key menu page.
NAV test key Push the TST key to initiate the VIR radio self-test routine (ON TST). When the key is released, test
mode turns off (TST).
DME hold display This display shows the frequency that the DME is held to. This display is presented only if the DME
is in hold mode (DME HLD button pushed).
MLS ON/OFF When MLS is installed in the aircraft, use this line key to turn MLS on or off. With MLS on, PRE
(preset) on the main menu page is replaced with MLS1 or MLS2.


ADF mode page ADF Push the ADF line key twice to select the ADF mode page. The RTU automatically redisplays the
frequency main menu page after approximately 15 seconds of inactivity. This display shows the active ADF fre-
quency display that can be directly changed by the tuning knobs.
ADF source annunciator The ADF 1 source annunciation means the RTU is controlling a number 1 (left side) radio. ADF2
means the RTU is controlling a number 2 (right side) radio.
ADF line key Push the ADF line key to select the ADF mode. A selector star on this line annunciates ADF mode
selection. The ADF radio provides bearing-to-the-station and aural outputs in ADF mode.
ANT line key Push the ANT line key to select the ANT mode. A selector star on this line annunciates ANT mode
selection. The ADF radio provides only an aural output in ANT mode.
BFO line key Push the BFO key to select (ON BFO) or deselect (OFF BFO) the BFO mode. The ADF radio provides
a 1000-Hz aural output tone in BFO mode when a keyed cw signal is received.
Return to main menu Push the RTN key to redisplay the RTU main menu select keypage. Note that “TEST” annunciates
instead of “RTN” while the ADF TEST button is pushed.


TCN mode page Push the TCN line key twice to select the TCN mode page. The RTU automatically redisplays the
TACAN channel This display shows the selected TACAN channel display that can be directly changed by the tuning
knobs.
Available TACAN channels are from 1X to 126X and from 1Y to 126Y. Change the X or Y label by ro-
tating the RTU inner tune knob to rollover the least significant digit of the display.
Transmit/receive mode Push the top line key to select transmit/receive or receive (only) mode. The selected mode (“T/R” or
key “REC”) annunciates by the line key.
In REC mode, the TACAN computes bearing to the tuned station or cooperating aircraft (in AA
mode). In T/R mode, the TACAN also computes distance information.
Air-to-air mode key Push the AA line key to alternately select (ON AA) or deselect (OFF AA) air-to-air mode. Use this
mode to compute bearing/distance to a cooperating aircraft (not to a ground station).
In AA mode, the TACAN transmits distance replies to interrogating aircraft. The TACAN computes
bearing to cooperating aircraft and distance to the closest aircraft (in T/R mode).
Inverse mode key Push the INV line key to alternately select key (ON INV) or deselect (OFF INV) inverse mode.
The INV mode is used with DME-only ground stations or with cooperating aircraft that transmit un-
modulated squitter pulses.
Test key Push the TST key to initiate the TACAN self-test routine. “ON TST” annunciates while the test is in
progress.
Return to main menu Push the RTN key to redisplay the RTU main menu select key page.


ATC mode page Push the ATC line key twice to select the ATC mode page. The RTU automatically redisplays the
(TDR/TCAS) main menu page after approximately 15 seconds of inactivity.
ATC code display This display shows the selected transponder reply code that can be directly changed by the tuning
knobs.
ATC ALT key Push the ALT line key to alternately select altitude reporting (ON ALT) or altitude off (OFF ALT)
mode. Select ON ALT mode for TCAS operation.
Altitude reporting (ON ALT) mode is the normal operating mode. The transponder replies to interro-
gation pulses, and transmits uncorrected barometric altitude (mode C).
Reply (OFF ALT) mode is normally used only when requested by ATC. The transponder replies to in-
terrogation pulses (mode A), but does not transmit altitude data.
Note
The TDR-94D automatically replies to ATCRBS/TCAS interrogations (mode S). No operator

action is required.
ALT display This display shows the uncorrected barometric altitude that is transmitted in the ON ALT mode.
TCAS mode key Push the third line key to select the TCAS operating mode (STBY, TA/RA, or TA). The selected mode
annunciates by the line key.
In STBY mode the TCAS does not transmit. In TA/RA mode, both traffic alert (TA) and resolution ad-
visories (RA) may display on the MFD/IVSIs. In TA mode no RA traffic is shown and the TCAS sys-
tem does not issue resolution advisories.
TDR/TCAS test key Push the TST key to initiate the TCAS and TDR self-test routines (ON TST). When the key is re-
Return to main menu Push the RTN key to redisplay the RTU main menu select key page. Note that “STBY” displays in-
stead of “RTN” when the ATC STBY button is pushed on. “ID” displays instead of “RTN” (for about 20
seconds) when the ATC ID button is pushed.


MLS mode page Push the ATC line key twice to select the MLS mode page. The RTU automatically redisplays the
Glidepath angle display This display indicates the aircraft glidepath angle. An A or M appears next to the line key. This letter
indicates automatic (A) or manual (M) control of the glidepath angle.
Manual/automatic Push the GP line key to toggle the glidepath angle selection to and from automatic (A) and manual
glidepath selection line (M) angle selection by the MLS system. Changing from manual to automatic or automatic to manual
key on this line also changes the azimuth display to show manual or automatic. If the ARINC-429 maxi-
mum glidepath angle word or azimuth word is not valid for any reason, then the glideslope and azi-
muth displays switch to automatic and manual can not be selected.
Selected channel The display indicates the selected MLS channel and can be directly changed by the code knobs.
Return to main menu Push the RTN key to redisplay the RTU main menu page.
Manual/automatic Push the AZ line key to toggle the azimuth angle selection to and from automatic (A) and manual (M)
azimuth selection line angle selection by the MLS system. Changing from manual to automatic or automatic to manual on
key this line also changes the azimuth display to show manual or automatic. If the ARINC-429 maximum
azimuth word or glidepath word is not valid for any reason then the azimuth and glideslope display
switch to automatic and manual can not be selected.
MLS test key Push the TST key to initiate the MLS self-test routine (ON TST). When the key is released, test
modes turns off (TST).
MLS source annunciator The MLS source annunciator indicates which MLS system (MLS1 or MLS2) is being controlled by the
RTU. If a single MLS is installed, the MLS functions are not available.
3.12 RTU-42X0 RADIO TUNING UNIT AND The TDR-90 is interrogated by radar pulses from a
AIU-4000 AUDIO INTERFACE UNIT, ground station and replies automatically with a se-
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ries of pulses. Reply pulses are coded to supply
identification and, when equipped with an altitude
Refer to the RTU-42X0 installation section of this digitizer, automatic altitude reporting.
manual.
The TDR-90 is used with a CTL-92 ATC Control
3.13 TDR-90 TRANSPONDER WITH CTL-92
and CAD-62 Control Adapter, or an ARINC 429
ATC CONTROL, OPERATING
Control and a CAD-870( ) Transponder Tuning
INSTRUCTIONS
Adapter. The CAD-62 converts CSDB serial data
3.13.1 Introduction from the CTL-92 into the gray-code format used by
the TDR-90, and the CAD-870( ) converts ARINC
The original Pro Line TDR-90 is an integral part of 429 serial data from the control into the gray-code
the Air Traffic Control Radar Beacon System. The format used by the TDR-90.
TDR-90 provides identification of the transponder-
equipped aircraft on the ATC ground controller’s All operating controls and displays for the TDR-90
plan position indicators. The TDR-90, when used Transponder are located on the CTL-92 ATC Con-
with an altitude digitizer, provides the ATC ground trol. These controls and displays are shown in
controller with aircraft pressure altitude. Figure 3-30 and described in Table 3-12.

Figure 3-30. CTL-92 ATC Control, Controls and Indicators

Table 3-12. CTL-92 ATC Control, Controls and Indicators.
Upper display window The ATC code (code with which the active transponder replies) and diagnostic messages are dis-
played in the upper display window. During normal operation, the CTL-92 has only a single display,
the transponder code, shown in the upper window. (See self-test display.)
Lower display window The lower display window is normally blank. It is active only during self-test. If a fail/warn condition
is detected, “dIAG” will be displayed. Press the TEST button to view the diagnostic code. (See self-
test display.)
Compare annunciator ACT momentarily illuminates when codes are being changed. If ACT flashes, the actual reply code is
not identical to the code shown in the active code display.
Annunciators The ATC control contains an RMT (remote) and a TX (transmit) annunciator. The RMT annunciator
may or may not illuminate depending on the installation. If wired, it will illuminate when an exter-
nal switch (LOCAL/REMOTE or similar) is in the REMOTE position. This indicates that the radio is
being tuned by another control unit (gray-code format for example). Dashes will appear in the lower
window and all of the controls on the CTL-92 are disabled. The code displayed in the upper window
is the current active code being sent by the radio to the CTL-92 control. The RMT annunciator will
not illuminate when the radio is being tuned by an FSM or similar flight management system. An
FMS simply “tunes” the CTL-92 just like the code select knobs do, and the control then tunes the ra-
dio. All controls on the CTL-92 remain operational when an FMS is being used to “tune” the radio.
The TX annunciator illuminates when the transponder replies to an interrogation.
Power and mode switch The ATC control power (optional) and mode switch may contain three or four detented positions
(depending on the control). The available positions are: STBY-ON-ALT and OFF-STBY-ON-SLT.
Controls without the OFF position will normally have their power controlled by an avionics master
switch. Controls with the OFF position switch system power (power is removed in the OFF position
and is applied when any of the other modes is selected).
In the STBY mode, power is applied to the transponder but it is prevented from transmitting replies.
STBY should be used only during taxi or when requested by ATC.
The ALT position is the normal operating position and allows the transponder to reply to the inter-
rogation pulses as well as transmitting uncorrected barometric altitude when the transponder is in-
terrogated in mode C. This position should be used only if the aircraft is equipped with an encoding
altimeter or a central air data system.
The ON position deletes the altitude code and is normally used when requested by ATC.
1/2 switch (dual versions The 1/2 switch selects which of two transponders is active.
only)
Light sensor The built-in light sensor can automatically control the display brightness. There are several installa-
tion options for either manual or automatic brightness control. Consult the aircraft drawings for de-
tails.
Code select knobs Two concentric knobs control the active code display. The larger knob changes the two more signifi-
cant digits, and the smaller knob changes the two less significant digits. The less significant digit is
incremented or decremented for each detent of the smaller knob if the knob is slowly turned. Rapid
rotation of either knob will cause changes proportional to the rate of rotation. Rollover of the less
significant digits will occur at 0 and 7, and will cause the more significant digits to be incremented
or decremented. The left two digits and the right two digits are independent of each other. The vari-
ous codes used for normal operation are listed in the Airman’s Information Manual. Codes 7600 or
7700 are selected for in-flight emergency operation and will be annunciated by the codes flashing in
the active code display for a couple of seconds before transmission begins (flashing of codes 7600 and
7700 will not occur if the transponder is being remotely tuned by an FMS). In dual version units, the
1/2 switch determines which transponder is active.

Table 3-12. CTL-92 ATC Control, Controls and Indicators.
PRE button Push and hold the PRE button while turning the code select knobs to select a preset code for storage.
The preset code will be stored in nonvolatile memory and can be recalled by momentarily pressing
the PRE button again.
IDENT button The IDENT button causes the transponder to transmit a special identification pattern that is dis-
played on the ground controller’s radar scope. This button should be pushed only when you are re-
quested to “squawk ident” by the ground controller. (Some installations may use a remote switch for
IDENT selection.)
TEST button Push the TEST button to initiate the radio self-test routine. In dual version units, the 1/2 switch de-
termines which transponder responds to the test command.
Self-test display
No failure During self-test, the active code display intensity will modulate from minimum to maximum. If the
transponder is functioning properly and an altitude encoder is connected to the CTL-92 and operat-
ing, AL will be displayed in the upper window and the altitude in thousands of feet in 100-foot in-
crements will be displayed in the lower window.
Failure If an out-of-tolerance condition is detected, the upper window shows the word “dIAG” while the
lower window shows a 2-character diagnostic code.

3.13.2 Operating Procedures Note
If the ACT annunciator starts flashing, it

Caution indicates that the transponder is not
transmitting the code displayed in the ac-
The TDR-90 and the CTL-92 have been de-
tive code display.
signed to exhibit a very high degree of func-
tional integrity. Nevertheless, the user
When the TDR-90 is being remotely tuned, the
RMT annunciator may or may not illuminate de-
provide monitoring for all conceivable sys-
pending on the installation. If wired, it will illumi-
tem failures and, however unlikely, it is
nate when an external switch (LOCAL/REMOTE or
possible that erroneous operation could oc-
similar) is in the REMOTE position. This indicates
cur without a fault indication. It is the re-
sponsibility of the pilot to detect such an oc-
unit (gray-code format for example). Dashes will
currence by monitoring air traffic control
appear in the lower window and all of the controls
responses to selected codes.
on the CTL-92 will be inoperative until LOCAL
control is selected. The code displayed in the upper
3.13.2.1 Equipment Turn On
window is the code to which the TDR-90 is tuned
and it is stored in nonvolatile memory. The RMT
The TDR-90 Transponder and the CTL-92 ATC
annunciator will not illuminate when the radio is
Control are turned on either by rotating the power
being tuned by an FMS or similar flight manage-
and mode switch on the ATC control to the STBY,
ment system. An FMS simply “tunes” the CTL-92
ON, or ALT position (on those controls that have
just like the code select knobs do, and the control
the optional OFF position), or by turning on the
then tunes the radio. All controls on the CTL-92
avionics master switch (for those controls that do
remain operational when an FMS is being used to
not have an OFF position).
“tune” the radio.
After power is applied, the CTL-92 displays the
3.13.2.3 Code Storage
same active code that was present when the
equipment was last turned off.
A single preset code can be stored in the nonvolatile
memory in the CTL-92 for future recall. (Most op-
3.13.2.2 Code Selection
erators would probably store the VFR code 1200.)
To program the memory, push and hold the PRE
Code selection is made using either the code select
button while selecting the code using the code se-
knobs or a remote tuning input from another sys-
lect knobs. The preset code can be recalled from
tem (NCS, FMS, etc), or control (such as parallel
memory and made active by momentarily pushing
tuning control). On those controls with a 1/2 select
the PRE button again.
switch, position the switch to select either number
1 or number 2 transponder as the active transpon-
After a code has been stored in memory, it will re-
der. The other transponder remains in standby un-
main there until changed by using the PRE button.
til it is selected with the 1/2 select switch.
Memory is retained even when the unit is turned
off for an extended period of time.
The CTL-92 code select range is from 0000 to 7777.
Rotation of either code select knob increases or de-
3.13.3 Normal Operation
creases the code in the active code display. The
larger, outer knob changes the two left-hand digits.
a. Ensure that all applicable circuit breakers are
The smaller, inner knob changes the two right-
in and the avionics master switch is on. Posi-
hand digits. The ACT annunciator on the control
tion the mode switch to STBY. (STBY should be
momentarily illuminates while the transponder is
used only during taxi or when requested by
responding to the new code.
ATC.)

Note 3.13.4.1 CTL-92 ATC Control (622-6523-001

The TDR-90 Transponder has a built-in 60-
second delay from the time primary power When the CTL-92 is used with the CAD-62 to con-
is applied until the unit is ready to trans- trol the TDR-90 system, certain diagnostic codes
mit. can be displayed in the self-test mode. If an out-of-
tolerance condition is detected during self-test, the
b. If the control has a 1/2 select switch, position it upper window displays the word “dIAG” while the
to select the desired transponder. lower window displays the 2-digit diagnostic code.
c. Turn the code select knobs until the desired (The TEST button must be pushed before any diag-
code is displayed. nostic code can be displayed.) Refer to the mainte-
d. Position the mode switch to the ALT or ON po- nance section of this manual for a list of self-test
sition just before beginning the takeoff roll. The diagnostic codes .
TX annunciator will illuminate each time the
transponder replies to an interrogation. 3.14 TDR-94/94D TRANSPONDER
Note OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
The CTL-92 provides a 4- to 5-second delay 3.14.1 Introduction

after a code change before the new code is
applied to the transponder. This gives the The TDR-94/94D is an integral part of the Air Traf-
pilot time to check the code and prevent an fic Control Radar Beacon System. It provides iden-
inadvertent transmission of a partially tification of the transponder equipped aircraft on
changed or emergency code. In addition, the ATC ground controller’s plan position indicator.
when emergency codes 7600 or 7700 are In installations equipped with an altitude encoder,
first selected on the CTL-92, the codes will the TDR-94/94D provides the controller with air-
flash for a couple of seconds before trans- craft pressure altitude.
mission begins (flashing of codes 7600 and
7700 will not occur if the transponder is The TDR-94/94D can operate in mode S and pro-
being remotely tuned by an FMS). Any se- vide a unique aircraft identification code as well as
lected code is immediately applied to the air-to-air and air-to-ground interrogation replies.
transponder when the IDENT button is The unit also has data link capability which allows
pressed. it to perform additional air traffic control and air-
craft separation assurance functions.
e. If requested to “squawk ident”, press and re-
lease the IDENT button. The letters “id” will The TDR-94/94D is controlled via either CSDB as
appear in the lower window for approximately from a CTL-92 control (Figure 3-30), or ARINC 429
15 seconds. as from a compatible ARINC 429 control unit. This
3.13.4 Self-Test paragraph does not provide operating instruction
for an ARINC 429 control unit.
Position the mode switch to ON and set the 1/2
switch to 1. Set the desired code using the code se- In normal mode A or mode C operation, the TDR-
lect knobs. Push the TEST button on the CTL-92. 94/94D is interrogated by radar pulses from a
The active code display intensity will modulate ground station and replies automatically with a se-
from minimum to maximum. If the TDR-90 is func- ries of pulses. These reply pulse groupings are
tioning properly and an altitude encoder is con- coded to supply identification and altitude data.
nected and operating, AL will be displayed in the
upper window and the altitude in thousands of feet In mode S operation, the unit is interrogated by ra-
in 100-foot increments (ie, 7.4 equals 7400 feet) will dar pulses either from a ground radar or from an-
be displayed in the lower window. In dual- other aircraft. It replies to these interrogations
transponder installations, position the 1/2 select with similar pulse reply codes which give altitude
switch to 2 and repeat the self-test. and aircraft identification.

3.14.2 Operating Instructions The CTL-92 code select range is from 0000 to 7777.
Rotation of either code select knob increases or de-
3.14.2.1 CTL-92 Control, Controls and creases the code in the active code display. The
Indicators larger, outer knob changes the two left-hand digits.
The smaller, inner knob changes the two right-
Refer to Figure 3-30 for a view of the CTL-92 con- hand digits. The ACT annunciator on the control
trols and indicators. Table 3-12 gives a description momentarily illuminates while the transponder is
of each control. responding to the new code.
3.14.2.2 Operating Instructions for Note

Installations Using a CTL-92 Control
indicates that the transponder is not
Caution transmitting the code displayed in the ac-
tive code display.
The TDR-94/94D and the CTL-92 have been
functional integrity. Nevertheless, the user When the TDR-94/94D is being remotely controlled,
must recognize that it is not practical to the RMT annunciator may or may not illuminate
provide monitoring for all conceivable sys- depending on the installation. If wired, it will illu-
tem failures and, however unlikely, it is minate when an external switch (LOCAL/REMOTE
possible that erroneous operation could oc- or similar) is in the REMOTE position. This indi-
cur without a fault indication. It is the re- cates that the transponder is being controlled by
sponsibility of the pilot to detect such an oc- another control unit (discrete ARINC 575, for ex-
currence by monitoring air traffic control ample). Dashes appear in the lower window and all
responses to selected codes. of the controls on the CTL-92 are inoperative until
LOCAL control is reselected. The code displayed in
The operating instructions for systems using a the upper window is the currently selected reply
CTL-92 control are given in the following para- code for the TDR-94/94D and it is stored in non-
graphs. volatile memory. The RMT annunciator will not il-
luminate when the transponder is being controlled
3.14.2.3 Equipment Turn On by an FMS or similar system. An FMS simply con-
trols the CTL-92 in the same way as the code select
The TDR-94/94D transponder and the CTL-92 con- knobs do and the CLT-92 controls the transponder.
trol are turned on either by rotating the power and All controls on the CTL-92 remain operational
mode switch on the front of the control to the when an FMS is controlling the transponder.
STBY, ON, or ALT position (on those controls that
have the optional OFF position), or by turning on
3.14.2.5 Code Storage
the avionics master switch (for those controls that
do not have an OFF position).
A single preset code can be stored in the nonvolatile
memory in the CTL-92. This code can be invoked at
After power is applied, the CTL-92 displays the
a later time. Most operators are likely to store the
same active code that was present when the
VFR code 1200. To store a code in memory, push
equipment was last turned off.
and hold the PRE button when selecting the code
3.14.2.4 Code Selection using the code select knobs. The preset code can be
recalled from memory and made active by momen-
Code selection is made using either the code select
tarily pushing the PRE button again.
knobs or a remote tuning input from another sys-
tem (NCS, FMS, etc). On those controls with a 1/2
After a code has been stored in memory, it will re-
select switch, set the switch to either number 1 or
main there until changed by using the PRE button.
number 2 transponder to select the active
transponder. The other transponder remains in
Memory is retained even when the unit is turned
standby until it is selected with the 1/2 select
off for an extended period of time.
switch.

3.14.2.6 Normal Operation transponder is being controlled by a remote

source such as an FMS. Any selected code is
Normal operation of the transponder involves the immediately applied to the transponder
following procedures: when the IDENT button is pushed.
a. Ensure that all applicable circuit breakers are f. If requested to “squawk ident” press and re-
engaged and the avionics master switch is on. lease the IDENT button. The letters “id” appear
b. Set the mode switch to STBY (STBY should be in the lower window for approximately 15 sec-
used only during ground movement and when onds.
requested by ATC).
c. If the CTL-92 has a 1/2 select switch (dual 3.14.2.7 Self-Test
transponder installations), position it to select
the desired transponder. Position the mode switch to ON. Set the desired
d. Use the code select knobs to select the desired code using the code select knobs. Push the TEST
code. button on the CTL-92/92A. Refer to self-test display
e. Position the mode switch to the ALT or ON po- description in Table 3-12.
sition just before beginning takeoff. The TX an-
nunciator illuminates each time the transpon- 3.14.2.7.1 CTL-92 ATC Control, Diagnostic
der replies to an ATC or TCAS interrogation. Codes
Note Diagnostic codes are displayed during self-test

mode. If a diagnostic condition is detected in the
The CTL-92 provides a 4- to 5-second delay TDR-94/94D during self-test, the upper window
from the time a code is changed until the displays the word “dIAG” while the lower window
new code is sent to the transponder. This displays a 2-digit diagnostic code. Diagnostic codes
gives the operator time to check the code that are associated with a “fail/warn” condition will
and thus prevent transmission of a partially display the “dIAG” message in the lower window
changed or incorrect code. In addition, without having pressed the TEST button. When
when emergency codes 7600 and 7700 are this occurs, press the TEST button to view the asso-
first selected on the CTL-92, the codes flash ciated diagnostic code. Refer to the maintenance
for a few seconds before transmission be- section for a description of the diagnostic codes.
gins. This flashing will not occur if the

3.15 VHF-21( )/22( ) VHF COMMUNICATIONS cations on 760 channels from 118.000 through
TRANSCEIVER WITH CTL-22 COMM 136.975 MHz. The VHF-21B/22B provides 1360
CONTROL, OPERATING channels from 118.000 through 151.975 MHz. The
INSTRUCTIONS VHF-21( )/22( ) is used with the CTL-22 Comm
Control.
3.15.1 Introduction
3.15.2 Operating Controls
The VHF-21A/22A (-00X) VHF Communications
Transceiver provides airborne vhf communications All operating controls for the VHF-21( )/22( ) are lo-
on the 720 channels from 118.000 through 135.975 cated on the CTL-22 Comm Control. The CTL-22 is
MHz. The VHF-21A/22A (-01X) VHF Communica- shown in Figure 3-31 and described in Table 3-13.
tions Transceiver provides airborne vhf communi-
Figure 3-31. CTL-22 Comm Control, Controls and Indicators

Table 3-13. CTL-22 Comm Control, Controls and Indicators.
Active frequency display The active frequency (frequency to which the VHF-21( )/22( ) is tuned) and diagnostic messages are
displayed in the upper window.
Preset frequency display The preset (inactive) frequency and diagnostic messages are displayed in the lower window.
Compare annunciator ACT momentarily illuminates when frequencies are being changed. If ACT continues to flash, the ac-
tual radio frequency is not identical to the frequency shown in the active window .
Annunciators The comm control contains MEM (memory), RMT (remote), and TX (transmit) annunciators. The
MEM annunciator illuminates whenever a frequency is displayed in the lower window. The RMT an-
nunciator may or may not illuminate, depending on the installation. If wired, it will illuminate when
an external switch (LOCAL/REMOTE or similar) is in the REMOTE position. This indicates that the
radio is being tuned by another control unit (2-out-of-5, for example). Dashes will appear in the lower
window and all of the controls on the CTL-22 are disabled. The frequency displayed in the upper win-
dow is the current active frequency being sent by the radio to the CTL-22 control. The RMT annun-
ciator will not illuminate when the radio is being tuned by an FMS or similar flight management sys-
tem. An FMS simply “tunes” the CTL-22 just like the frequency select knobs do, and the control then
tunes the radio. All controls on the CTL-22 remain operational when an FMS is being used to “tune”
the radio. The TX annunciator illuminates whenever the VHF-21( )/22( ) is transmitting.
Volume control The optional volume control, when present, is concentric with the power and mode switch.
Power and mode switch The comm control power (optional) and mode switch may contain two or three detented positions
(depending on the control). The available positions are: NORM/SQ OFF and OFF/ON/SQ OFF.
Controls with the NORM position will normally have their power controlled by an avionics master
switch.
Controls with the OFF/ON positions switch system power.
The SQ OFF position disables the receiver squelch circuits, so you should hear noise. Use this posi-
tion to set the volume control or, if necessary, to try to receive a very weak signal which cannot break
squelch.
Light sensor The built-in light sensor automatically controls the display brightness.
frequency is transferred up to the active display and the VHF-21( )/22( ) retunes. The previously ac-
tive frequency becomes the new preset frequency and is displayed in the lower window. When this
switch is moved to the MEM position, one of the six stacked memory frequencies is loaded into the
preset display. Successive pushes cycle the six memory frequencies through the display
(...2,3,4,5,6,1,2,3....).
Frequency select knobs Two concentric knobs control the preset or active frequency display. The larger knob changes the
three digits to the left of the decimal point in 1-MHz steps. The smaller knob changes the two digits
to the right of the decimal point in 50-kHz steps (or in 25-kHz steps for the first two steps after the
direction of rotation has been reversed). Numbers roll over at the upper and lower frequency limits.
ACT button Push the ACT button for approximately 2 seconds to enable the frequency select knobs to directly re-
tune the VHF-21( )/22( ). The bottom window will display dashes and the upper window will continue
to display the active frequency. Push the ACT button a second time to return the control to the nor-
mal 2-display tune/preset mode of operation. The active tuning feature is not affected by power re-
moval. If active tuning is selected (one push of the ACT button) and power is removed from the con-
trol, active tuning will still be enabled the next time power is reapplied to the control.
STO button The STO button allows up to six preset frequencies to be selected and entered into the control’s non-
volatile memory. To store a frequency, simply toggle the MEM switch until the upper window dis-
plays the desired channel number (CH 1 through CH 6), rotate the frequency select knobs until the
lower window displays the frequency to be stored, and push the STO button twice within 5 seconds.
After approximately 5 seconds, the control will return to the normal 2-display tune/preset mode of op-
eration.
TEST button Push the TEST button to initiate the radio self-test diagnostic routine. The transceiver performs a
complete self-test routine requiring about 5 seconds.

ADDENDUM 29
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

operation section (523-0772721-007118) in Part B of this manual.
This addendum supersedes Addendum 24 and this addendum sheet revises paragraph 3.15.3.1.
The VHF-21( )/22( ) transceiver and the CTL-22 Comm Control are turned on either by rotating the power
and mode switch on the comm control to the ON position (on those controls that have the optional ON
position) or by turning on the avionics master switch (for those controls that have a NORM position). When
the transceiver is first turned on, it sounds a brief tone (all VHF-21/22( ) transceivers are shipped with
this tone set for 6.5 ± 1 V pk-pk) while the microprocessor checks its own memory. If there is a memory
defect, the tone continues, to indicate that the transceiver can neither receive nor transmit.
...
Addendum 29
523-0772719-0V711A (Facing Page 3-101)
3.15.3 Operating Procedures Note
If two short 800-Hz tones are heard, the

Warning transceiver has detected an internal fault.
Push the TEST button on the CTL-22 to ini-
If two communications transceivers in the
tiate self-test and display the diagnostic
same aircraft are tuned to stations carrying
code. If the CTL-22 fails after equipment
the same voice message, attempting to lis-
turn on, the transceiver remains tuned to
ten to the received signals from both simul-
the last active frequency. With a failed
taneously could result in a great reduction
CTL-22, cycling the power will cause the
in the actual audio volume.
transceiver to beep twice and automatically
change frequency to 121.5 MHz.
All users of communications transceivers
should be aware of this possibility and Adjust the volume level and perform a quick
should avoid simultaneously tuning two squelch test by setting the mode switch on the CTL-
transceivers to the same frequency or to 22 to SQ OFF and adjusting the volume level with
two frequencies carrying the same voice background noise. After a comfortable listening
message. level has been established, return the mode switch
to the ON or NORM (depending on the control) po-
sition. All background noise should disappear un-
Caution less a station or aircraft is transmitting on the ac-
tive frequency.
The VHF-21( )/22( ) and the CTL-22 have
been designed to exhibit a very high degree 3.15.3.2 Frequency Selection
of functional integrity. Nevertheless, the
user must recognize that it is possible that Note
erroneous operation could occur without a
The following discussion assumes that di-
fault indication. It is the responsibility of
rect active tuning is not selected. If the con-
the pilot to detect such an occurrence by
trol is in the direct active tuning mode, the
continually assessing the reasonableness of
lower window will be displaying dashes in-
operation as displayed on the associated
stead of a preset frequency, and the fre-
comm control and by the quality of received
quency select knobs will only change the ac-
signals and transmissions.
tive frequency displayed in the upper
window. To cancel direct active tuning and
3.15.3.1 Equipment Turn On return the control to the normal 2-display
tune/preset mode, push the ACT button for
The VHF-21( )/22( ) transceiver and the CTL-22 about 2 seconds, then release it.
Comm Control are turned on either by rotating the
Frequency selection is made using either the fre-
power and mode switch on the comm control to the
quency select knobs, the XFR/MEM (transfer/
ON position (on those controls that have the op-
memory recall switch), or a remote tuning input
tional ON position) or by turning on the avionics
from another system (NCS, FMS, etc) or control
master switch (for those controls that have a
(such as a 2-out-of-5 control).
NORM position). When the transceiver is first
turned on, it sounds a brief tone while the micro- Rotation of either frequency select knob increases
processor checks its own memory. If there is a or decreases the preset frequency shown in the
memory defect, the tone continues, to indicate that lower window. The larger, outer knob changes the
the transceiver can neither receive nor transmit. frequency in 1-MHz increments (number to the left
of decimal point). The smaller, inner knob changes
After the memory check, the CTL-22 displays the the frequency in 50-kHz increments when first ro-
same active and preset frequencies that were pres- tated or in 25-kHz increments for the first two in-
ent when the equipment was last turned off. crements after the direction of rotation is reversed.

Note trol unit (2-out-of-5, for example). Dashes will ap-

pear in the lower window and all of the controls on
The frequencies displayed on the CTL-22 the CTL-22 will be inoperative until LOCAL control
Comm Control show only five of the six is selected. The frequency displayed in the upper
digits. The sixth digit is always a 0 (when window is the current active frequency being sent
the fifth digit is a 0 or 5) or a 5 (when the by the radio to the CTL-22 control and is stored in
fifth digit is a 2 or 7). Therefore, the sixth nonvolatile memory. The RMT annunciator will not
digit does not need to be displayed. illuminate when the radio is being tuned by an
FMS or similar flight management system. An FMS
After the desired preset frequency is set in the simply “tunes” the CTL-22 just like the frequency
lower window, it can be transferred to the upper select knobs do, and the control then tunes the ra-
window (active frequency) by momentarily posi- dio. All controls on the CTL-22 remain operational
tioning the XFM/MEM switch to XFR. At the same when an FMS is being used to “tune” the radio.
time that the preset frequency is transferred to the
active display, the previously active frequency is During normal 2-display tune/preset operation, all
transferred to the preset display. Depending on the frequency selections and revisions are done to the
control being used, a short audio tone should be preset frequency shown in the lower window. How-
heard, indicating that a frequency change is taking ever, the active frequency shown in the upper win-
place (some controls will inhibit this tone). Also, the dow can be selected directly as described in the fol-
ACT annunciator on the control momentarily illu- lowing paragraph.
minates while the transceiver is tuning to the new
frequency. 3.15.3.3 Direct Active Frequency Selection
The active frequency shown in the upper window

Note can be selected directly with the frequency select
knobs by pushing the ACT button for about 2 sec-
If the ACT annunciator starts flashing, it onds. The direct active tuning mode is indicated by
indicates that the transceiver is not tuned dashes appearing in the lower window. Also, the
to the active frequency displayed in the up- ACT annunciator will flash as the frequency select
per window. knobs are turned to indicate that the transceiver is
The CTL-22 has a nonvolatile memory that permits being retuned. Pushing the ACT button for about 2
storing up to six preset frequencies. Once stored, seconds a second time returns the control to the
these frequencies can be recalled to the preset dis- normal 2-display tune/preset mode. The active
play (lower window) by positioning the XFR/MEM tuning feature is not affected by power removal. If
switch to the MEM position. The storage location active tuning is selected (one push of the ACT but-
(CH 1 through CH 6) for the recalled frequency is ton) and power is removed from the control, active
displayed in the upper window while the XFR/MEM tuning will still be enabled the next time power is
switch is in the MEM position. All six stored fre- reapplied to the control.
quencies can be displayed one at a time in the lower
Note
window with their memory locations shown in the
upper window by repeatedly toggling the If the ACT annunciator starts flashing after
XFR/MEM switch to the MEM position. After the the frequency has been selected, it indicates
desired stored frequency has been recalled to the that the transceiver is not tuned to the ac-
preset display, it can be transferred to the active tive frequency displayed in the upper win-
display by momentarily positioning the XFR/MEM dow.
switch to the XFR position.
As a safety feature, the CTL-22 automatically
When the VHF-21( )/22( ) is being remotely tuned, switches to the direct active tuning mode when a
the RMI annunciator may or may not illuminate, frequency select knob is operated while the STO,
depending on the installation. If wired, it will illu- TEST, or XFR/MEM switches are actuated or the
minate when an external switch (LOCAL/REMOTE remote transfer or memory recall input to the con-
or similar) is in the REMOTE position. This indi- trol are grounded. To return to the normal 2-
cates that the radio is being tuned by another con-

ADDENDUM 29
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

After the desired preset frequency is set in the lower window, it can be transferred to the upper window
(active frequency) by momentarily positioning the XFM/MEM switch to XFR. At the same time that the
preset frequency is transferred to the active display, the previously active frequency is transferred to the
preset display. Depending on the control being used, a short audio tone should be heard (all VHF-21/22( )
transceivers are shipped with this tone set for 6.5 ± 1 V pk-pk), indicating that a frequency change is
taking place (some controls will inhibit this tone). Also, the ACT annunciator on the control momentarily
illuminates while the transceiver is tuning to the new frequency.
...
Addendum 29
523-0772719-0V711A (Facing Page 3-102)
display tune/preset mode, simply push the ACT minute timer. (The TX annunciator on the CTL-22
button for about 2 seconds, then release it. is illuminated whenever the transmitter is on.) If
the transmitter is still on at the end of 2 minutes,
3.15.3.4 Remote Transfer and Selection of the microprocessor turns it off. Most intentional
Frequencies transmissions last much less than 1 minute; a 2-
minute transmission is most likely the result of a
Some aircraft may be equipped with a remote stuck ptt button. This timing feature protects the
transfer/memory recall switch, usually mounted on ATC channel from long-term interference.
the yoke or cyclic, to permit remote transfer and
selection of frequencies. Operation of this switch is When it turns the transmitter off, the microproces-
identical to that of the XFR/MEM switch on the sor switches the VHF-21( )/22( ) to receive opera-
CTL-22. tion. With most aircraft audio systems, though, the
stuck ptt button prevents you from hearing re-
3.15.3.5 Frequency Storage ceived signals or even the two warning beeps. The
microprocessor, then, waits until the ptt button
Up to six preset frequencies can be stored in the opens to sound the two beeps.
nonvolatile memory in the CTL-22 for future recall.
The control must be in the 2-display tune/preset If headphones are being used, you will know the
mode in order to store frequencies (frequencies transmitter turned off because you will stop hear-
cannot be stored if the control is in the direct active ing sidetone.
tuning mode). To program the memory:
If you need to transmit for more than 2 minutes,
a. Toggle the MEM switch until the upper window just release the ptt button briefly and then push it
displays the desired channel number (CH 1 again when you pause for breath. The 2-minute
through CH 6). timer resets and starts a new count each time the
b. Rotate the frequency select knobs until the ptt button is pushed.
stored. 3.15.3.7 Overtemperature Protection
c. Push the STO button twice within 5 seconds.
The microprocessor regularly monitors the tem-
perature of the transmitter. If the transmitter gets
Note too hot during a transmission, the microprocessor
stops the transmission. Sidetone ceases at that in-
When storing a frequency, the second ac- stant. When the ptt button is released, you will
tuation of the STO button must be done hear two beeps. (Press the TEST button on the
within 5 seconds after the first actuation of CTL-22 to observe the diagnostic code.)
the STO button. If more than 5 seconds
elapse, the control will revert to the normal The shutdown temperature is +160 °C (+320 °F),
2-display tune/preset mode of operation. If well above normal operating temperature even in
this occurs, pushing the STO button twice very hot conditions.
within 5 seconds will store the frequency in As long as the temperature remains above the
the selected location. limit, the microprocessor will not respond to a nor-
After a frequency has been stored in memory, it will mal push of the ptt button. If you must transmit,
remain there for repeated use until changed by however, you can override the protection by rapidly
using the STO button (recalling a stored frequency keying the ptt button twice, holding it on the sec-
for use does not remove it from memory). Memory ond push.
is retained even when the unit is turned off for an
extended period of time. 3.15.3.8 Self-Test
3.15.3.6 Stuck Mic Protection An extensive self-test diagnostic routine can be ini-
tiated in the transceiver by pushing the TEST but-
Each time the ptt (push-to-talk) button is pushed, ton on the CTL-22 Comm Control. During self-test,
the microprocessor in the transceiver starts a 2- the CTL-22 modulates the intensity of the upper
and lower displays from minimum to maximum to

annunciate that self-test is in progress. Several All users of communications transceivers

audio tones will be heard from the audio system should be aware of this possibility, and
while the self-test routine is being executed. At the should avoid simultaneously tuning two
completion of the self-test program, the CTL-22 transceivers to the same frequency or to
usually displays four dashes (“----”) in the upper two frequencies carrying the same voice
window and “00” in the lower window. This indi- message.
cates normal operation — no trouble found. If any
out-of-limit condition is found, the CTL-22 displays
“dIAG” (diagnostic) in the upper window and a 2- Caution
digit diagnostic code in the lower window. Record
any diagnostic codes displayed to help the service The VHF-422( ) and the CTL-22 have been
technician locate the problem. Refer to the mainte- designed to exhibit a very high degree of
nance section of this manual for a list of the self- functional integrity. Nevertheless, the user
test diagnostic codes that can be displayed on the must recognize that it is possible that erro-
CTL-22. (The TEST button must be pushed before neous operation could occur without a fault
any diagnostic code can be displayed.) indication. It is the responsibility of the pi-
lot to detect such an occurrence by continu-
3.16 VHF-422( ) VHF COMMUNICATIONS ally assessing the reasonableness of opera-
TRANSCEIVER WITH CTL-22 COMM tion as displayed on the associated COM
CONTROL, OPERATING INSTRUC- control and by the quality of received sig-
TIONS nals and transmissions.
3.16.1 Introduction 3.16.3.1 Equipment Turn On
The VHF-422A VHF Communications Transceiver The VHF-422( ) transceiver and the CTL-22 COM
provides airborne vhf communications of the 760 Control are turned on either by rotating the power
channels from 118.000 through 136.975 MHz. The and mode switch on the COM control to the ON po-
VHF-422B provides 1360 channels from 118.000 sition (on those controls that have the optional ON
through 151.975 MHz. The VHF-422( ) is controlled position), or by turning on the avionics master
by a CSDB Comm Control (CTL-22) or an ARINC switch (for those controls that have a NORM posi-
429 Comm Control. The operating controls for the tion). When the transceiver is first turned on, it
CTL-22 are included in the following description. sounds a brief tone while the microprocessor checks
This paragraph does not provide operating instruc- its own memory. If there is a memory defect, the
tion for an ARINC 429 control unit. tone continues, to indicate that the transceiver can
neither receive nor transmit.
3.16.2 Operating Controls
After the memory check, the CTL-22 displays the
All operating controls for the VHF-422( ) are lo- same active and preset frequencies that were pres-
cated on the CTL-22 Comm Control. The CTL-22 is ent when the equipment was last turned off.
shown in Figure 3-31 and described in Table 3-13.
Note
3.16.3 Operating Procedures
If two short 800-Hz tones are heard, the
transceiver has detected an internal fault.
Warning
Push the TEST button on the CTL-22 to ini-
If two communication transceivers in the tiate self-test and display the diagnostic
same aircraft are tuned to stations carrying code. If the CTL-22 fails after equipment
the same voice message, attempting to lis- turn on, the transceiver remains tuned to
ten to the received signals from both simul- the last active frequency. With a failed
taneously could result in a great reduction CTL-22, cycling the power will cause the
in the actual audio volume. transceiver to beep twice and automatically
change frequency to 121.5 MHz.

ADDENDUM 29
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

The VHF-422( ) transceiver and the CTL-22 COM Control are turned on either by rotating the power and
mode switch on the COM control to the ON position (on those controls that have the optional ON position), or
by turning on the avionics master switch (for those controls that have a NORM position). When the
transceiver is first turned on, it sounds a brief tone (refers to -00X VHF-422(A/B) transceivers; VHF-
422(A/B) status –1XX and all status VHF-422(C/D) transceivers are shipped with this tone set for
minimum output) while the microprocessor checks its own memory. If there is a memory defect, the tone
continues, to indicate that the transceiver can neither receive nor transmit.
...
Addendum 29
523-0772719-0V711A (Facing Page 3-104)
ADDENDUM 29
TO

INSTALLATION MANUAL

After the desired preset frequency is set in the lower window, it can be transferred to the upper window
(active frequency) by momentarily positioning the XFR/MEM switch to XFR. At the same time that the
preset frequency is transferred to the active display, the previously active frequency is transferred to the
preset display. Depending on the control being used, a short audio tone should be heard (refers to -00X
VHF-422(A/B) transceivers; VHF-422(A/B) status –1XX and all status VHF-422(C/D) transceivers
are shipped with this tone set for minimum output) indicating a frequency change is taking place
(some controls will inhibit this tone). Also the ACT annunciator on the control momentarily illuminates
while the transceiver is tuning to the new frequency.
...
Addendum 29
523-0772719-0V711A (Facing Page 3-105)
Adjust the volume level and perform a quick window (active frequency) by momentarily posi-
squelch test by setting the mode switch on the CTL- tioning the XFR/MEM switch to XFR. At the same
22 to SQ OFF and adjusting the volume level with time that the preset frequency is transferred to the
background noise. After a comfortable listening active display, the previously active frequency is
level has been established, return the mode switch transferred to the preset display. Depending on the
to the ON or NORM (depending on the control) po- control being used, a short audio tone should be
sition. All background noise should disappear un- heard indicating a frequency change is taking place
less a station or aircraft is transmitting on the ac- (some controls will inhibit this tone). Also the ACT
tive frequency. annunciator on the control momentarily illumi-
nates while the transceiver is tuning to the new
3.16.3.2 Frequency Selection frequency.
Note
Note
indicates that the transceiver is not tuned
to the active frequency displayed in the up-
per window.
The CTL-22 has a nonvolatile memory that permits
storing up to six preset frequencies. Once stored,
these frequencies can be recalled to the preset dis-
play (lower window) by positioning the XFR/MEM
return the control to the normal 2-display
switch to the MEM position. The storage location
tune/preset mode, press the ACT button for
about two seconds, then release it.
displayed in the upper window while the XFR/MEM
switch is in the MEM position. All six stored fre-
window with their memory locations shown in the
upper window by repeatedly toggling the
from another system (NCS, FMS, etc) or control
XFR/MEM switch to the MEM position. After the
(such as an ARINC 429 control).
desired stored frequency has been recalled to the
preset display, it can be transferred to the active
Rotation of either frequency select knob increases
display by momentarily positioning the XFR/MEM
or decreases the preset frequency shown in the
lower window. The larger, outer knob changes the
frequency in 1-MHz increments (number to the left
When the VHF-422( ) is being remotely tuned, the
RMT may or may not illuminate depending on the
the frequency in 50-kHz increments when first ro-
installation. If wired, it will illuminate when an ex-
tated or in 25-kHz increments for the first two in-
ternal switch (LOCAL/REMOTE or similar) is in
crements after the direction of rotation is reversed.
the REMOTE position.This indicates that the radio
is being tuned by another control unit (ARINC 429
Note for example). Dashes will appear in the lower win-
dow and all of the controls on the CTL-22 will be
The frequencies displayed on the CTL-22 inoperative until LOCAL control is selected. The
COM Control show only five of the six dig- frequency displayed in the upper window is the
its. The sixth digit is always a zero (when current active frequency being sent by the radio to
the fifth digit is a 0 or 5) or a 5 (when the the CTL-22 control, and is stored in nonvolatile
fifth digit is a 2 or 7). Therefore, the sixth memory. The RMT annunciator will not illuminate
digit does not need to be displayed. when the radio is being tuned by an FMS or similar
flight management system. An FMS simply “tunes”
After the desired preset frequency is set in the the CTL-22 just like the frequency select knobs do,
lower window, it can be transferred to the upper and the control then tunes the radio. All controls on

the CTL-22 remain operational when an FMS is 3.16.3.5 Frequency Storage

being used to “tune” the radio.
Up to six preset frequencies can be stored in the
During normal 2-display tune/preset operation, all nonvolatile memory in the CTL-22 for future recall.
frequency selections and revisions are done to the The control must be in the 2-display tune/preset
preset frequency shown in the lower window. How- mode in order to store frequencies (frequencies
ever, the active frequency shown in the upper win- cannot be stored if the control is in the direct active
dow can be selected directly as described in the fol- tuning mode). To program the memory:
lowing paragraph.
a. Toggle the MEM switch until the upper window
3.16.3.3 Direct Active Frequency Selection displays the desired channel number (CH 1
through CH 6).
The active frequency shown in the upper window b. Rotate the frequency select knobs until the
can be selected directly with the frequency select lower window displays the frequency to be
knobs by pushing the ACT button for about 2 sec- stored.
onds. The direct active tuning mode is indicated by c. Push the STO button twice within 5 seconds.
dashes appearing in the lower window. Also, the
ACT annunciator will flash as the frequency select Note
knobs are turned to indicate that the transceiver is
being retuned. Pushing the ACT button for about 2 When storing a frequency, the second ac-
seconds a second time returns the control to the tuation of the STO button must be done
normal 2-display tune/preset mode. The active within 5 seconds after the first actuation of
tuning feature is not affected by power removal. If the STO button. If more than 5 seconds
active tuning is selected and power is removed from elapse, the control will revert to the normal
the control, active tuning will still be enabled the 2-display tune/preset mode of operation. If
next time power is reapplied to the control. this occurs, pushing the STO button twice
within 5 seconds will store the frequency in
the selected location.
Note
If the ACT annunciator starts flashing after
remain there for repeated use until changed by
the frequency has been selected, it indicates
using the STO button (recalling a stored frequency
that the transceiver is not tuned to the ac-
for use does not remove it from memory). Memory
tive frequency displayed in the upper win-
dow.
extended period of time.
3.16.3.6 Stuck Mic Button
switches to the direct active tuning mode when a
Each time the ptt (push-to-talk) button is pushed,
TEST, or XFR/MEM switches are actuated, or the
the microprocessor in the transceiver starts a 2-
remote transfer or memory recall inputs to the con-
minute timer. (The TX annunciator on the CTL-22
trol are grounded. To return to the normal 2-
is illuminated whenever the transmitter is on.) If
display tune/preset mode, simply push the ACT
the transmitter is still on at the end of 2 minutes,
button for about 2 seconds, then release it.
the microprocessor turns it off. Most intentional
transmissions last much less than 1 minute; a 2-
3.16.3.4 Remote Transfer and Selection of
minute transmission is most likely the result of a
Frequencies
stuck ptt button. This timing feature protects the
ATC channel from long-term interference.
Some aircraft may be equipped with a remote
transfer/memory recall switch, usually mounted on
When it turns the transmitter off, the microproces-
the yoke or cyclic, to permit remote transfer and
sor switches the VHF-422( ) to receive operation.
selection of frequencies. Operation of this switch is
With most aircraft audio systems, though, the stuck
identical to that of the XFR/MEM switch on the
ptt button prevents you from hearing received sig-
CTL-22.

nals, or even the two warning beeps. The micro- usually displays four dashes (“----”) in the upper
processor, then, waits until the ptt button opens to window, and 00 in the lower window. This indicates
sound the two beeps. normal operation — no trouble found. If any out-of-
limit condition is found, the CTL-22 displays
If headphones are being used, you will know the “dIAG” (diagnostic) in the upper window and a 2-
transmitter turned off because you will stop hear- digit diagnostic code in the lower window. Record
ing sidetone. any diagnostic codes displayed to help the service
technician locate the problem. Refer to the mainte-
If you need to transmit for more than 2 minutes, nance section of this manual for a list of the self-
just release the ptt button briefly and then push it test diagnostic codes that can be displayed on the
again when you pause for a breath. The 2-minute CTL-22. (The TEST button must be pushed before
timer resets and starts a new count each time the any diagnostic code can be displayed.)
ptt button is pressed.
3.17 VIR-32 NAVIGATION RECEIVER WITH
3.16.3.7 Overtemperature Protection CTL-32 NAV CONTROL, OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS
The microprocessor regularly monitors the tem-
perature of the transmitter. If the transmitter gets 3.17.1 Introduction
too hot during a transmission, the microprocessor
stops the transmission. Sidetone ceases at that in- The VIR-32 Navigation Receiver provides 200 50-
stant. When the ptt button is released, you will kHz spaced VOR/LOC channels from 108.00
hear two beeps. (Press the TEST button on the through 117.95 MHz, and 40 GS channels auto-
CTL-22 to observe the diagnostic code.) matically paired with localizer channels. It also
provides a marker beacon receiver. The VIR-32
The shut-down temperature is +160 °C (+320 °F), (and DME-42) are used with the CTL-32 NAV Con-
well above normal operating temperature even in trol. (DME-42 operating instructions are in para-
very hot conditions. graph 3.6.)
As long as the temperature remains above the The VIR-32 provides VOR, LOC, and GS deviation
limit, the microprocessor will not respond to a nor- outputs, high- and low-level flag signals, magnetic
mal push of the ptt button. If you must transmit, bearing to the station, to/from information, marker
however, you can override the protection by rapidly beacon lamp signals, and VOR/LOC and marker
keying the ptt button twice, holding it on the sec- beacon audio outputs. Conventional analog outputs
ond push. as well as serial digital outputs are provided for
compatibility with current aircraft and equipment
3.16.3.8 Self-Test as well as long-term compatibility with EFIS and
other systems now under development.
tiated in the transceiver by pushing the TEST but- 3.17.2 Operating Controls
ton on the CTL-22 COM Control. During the self-
test, the CTL-22 modulates the intensity of the up- Most operating controls for the VIR-32 are located
per and lower displays from minimum to maximum on the CTL-32 NAV Control. (The MKR hi/lo sensi-
to annunciate that self-test is in progress. Several tivity switching function must be provided exter-
audio tones will be heard from the audio system nally if desired.) The CTL-32 is shown in Figure 3-
while the self-test routine is being executed. At the 32 and described in Table 3-14.
completion of the self-test program, the CTL-22

Figure 3-32. CTL-32 NAV/DME Control, Controls and Indicators
Active frequency display The active frequency (frequency to which the VIR-32 is tuned) and diagnostic messages are displayed
(upper window) in the upper window.
Preset frequency display The preset (inactive) frequency and diagnostic messages are displayed in the lower window.
(lower window)
Compare annunciator ACT momentarily illuminates when frequencies are being changed. If ACT continues to flash, the ac-
tual tuned frequency is not identical to the frequency shown in the active display.
Annunciators The NAV control contains MEM (memory), RMT (remote), and HLD (hold) annunciators.
MEM The MEM annunciator illuminates whenever a frequency is displayed in the lower window.
RMT The RMT annunciator may or may not illuminate, depending on the installation. If wired, it will il-
luminate when an external switch (LOCAL/REMOTE or similar) is in the REMOTE position. This in-
dicates that the radio is being tuned by another control unit (2-out-of-5, for example). Dashes will ap-
pear in the lower window and all of the controls on the CTL-32 are disabled. The frequency displayed
in the upper window is the current active frequency being sent by the radio to the CTL-32 control.
The RMT annunciator will not illuminate when the radio is being tuned by an FMS or similar flight
management system. An FMS simply “tunes” the CTL-32 just like the frequency select knobs do, and
the control then tunes the radio. All controls on the CTL-32 remain operational when an FMS is be-
ing used to “tune” the radio.

HLD The HLD annunciator indicates that the DME is held to the active frequency at time of selection. The
upper window displays the NAV frequency and the lower window displays the DME hold frequency.
Tuning of active frequencies can take place during this time.
Volume control The optional volume control, when present, is concentric with the power and mode switch.
Power and mode switch The NAV control power (optional) and mode switch may contain two or three detented positions
(depending on the control). The available positions are: OFF/ON, OFF/ON/HLD, and NORM/HLD.
Controls with the OFF/ON positions switch system power.
Controls with the NORM position will normally have their power controlled by an avionics master
switch.
The optional HLD position allows the NAV frequency to be changed, but holds the DME to the cur-
rent active NAV frequency.
Light sensor The built-in light sensor automatically controls the display brightness.
frequency is transferred up to the active display and the NAV/DME retunes. The previously active
frequency becomes the new preset frequency and is displayed in the lower window. When this switch
is moved to the MEM position, one of the four stacked memory frequencies is loaded into the preset
display. Successive pushes cycle the four memory frequencies through the display (...2,3,4,1,2,3....).
Frequency select knobs Two concentric knobs select the preset or active frequency displays. The larger knob changes the two
digits to the left of the decimal point in 1-MHz steps. The smaller knob changes the two digits to the
right of the decimal point in 0.05-MHz steps. Frequencies roll over at the upper and lower limits. The
two frequency select knobs are independent of each other such that the upper and lower limit rollover
of the 0.1-MHz digit will not cause the 1.0-MHz digit to change.
ACT button Push the ACT button for approximately 2 seconds to enable the frequency select knobs to directly re-
tune the VIR-32 and DME. The bottom window will display dashes and the upper window will con-
tinue to display the active frequency. Push the ACT button a second time to return the control to the
normal 2-display tune/preset mode of operation. The active tuning feature is not affected by power
removal. If active tuning is selected (one push of the ACT button) and power is removed from the con-
trol, active tuning will still be enabled the next time power is reapplied to the control.
STO button The STO button allows up to four preset frequencies to be selected and entered into the control’s non-
volatile memory. To store a frequency, simply toggle the MEM switch until the upper window dis-
plays the desired channel number (CH 1 through CH 4), rotate the frequency select knobs until the
lower window displays the frequency to be stored, and push the STO button twice within 5 seconds.
After approximately 5 seconds, the control will return to the normal 2-display tune/preset mode of op-
eration.
TEST button Push the TEST button to initiate the radio self-test diagnostic routine. (In the case of the VIR-32 NAV
receiver, self-test is active only while the TEST button is pushed or about 15 seconds maximum. In
the case of the DME-42 transceiver, the self-test routine requires about 10 seconds for completion.)

3.17.3 Operating Procedures Rotation of either frequency select knob increases

or decreases the preset frequency shown in the
lower window. The larger, outer knob changes the
Caution frequency in 1-MHz increments (number to the left
The VIR-32 and CTL-32 have been designed the frequency in 0.05-MHz increments.
to exhibit a very high degree of functional
integrity. Nevertheless, the user must rec- After the desired preset frequency is set in the
ognize that it is not practical to provide lower window, it can be transferred to the upper
monitoring for all conceivable system fail- window (active frequency) by momentarily posi-
ures and, however unlikely, it is possible tioning the XFR/MEM switch to XFR. At the same
that erroneous operation could occur with- time that the preset frequency is transferred to the
out a fault indication. It is the responsibility active display, the previously active frequency is
of the pilot to detect such an occurrence by transferred to the preset display. Also, the ACT an-
means of cross-checks with redundant or nunciator on the control momentarily illuminates
correlated information available in the while the receiver is tuning to the new frequency.
cockpit.
Note
indicates that the receiver is not tuned to
The VIR-32 receiver and the CTL-2 NAV Control
the active frequency displayed in the upper
are turned on either by rotating the power and
window.
mode switch on the comm control to the ON posi-
tion (on those controls that have the optional ON The CTL-32 has a nonvolatile memory that permits
position) or by turning on the avionics master storing up to four preset frequencies. Once stored,
switch (for those controls that have a NORM posi- these frequencies can be recalled to the preset dis-
tion). play (lower window) by positioning the XFR/MEM
switch to the MEM position. The storage location
After power is applied, the CTL-32 displays the (CH 1 through CH 4) for the recalled frequency is
same active and preset frequencies that were pres- displayed in the upper window while the XFR/MEM
ent when the equipment was last turned off. switch is in the MEM position. All four stored fre-
3.17.3.2 Frequency Selection window with their memory locations shown in the
Note desired stored frequency has been recalled to the
The following discussion assumes that di- display by momentarily positioning the XFR/MEM
rect active tuning is not selected. If the con- switch to the XFR position.
lower window will be displaying dashes in- When the VIR-32 is being remotely tuned, the RMT
stead of a preset frequency, and the fre- annunciator may or may not illuminate, depending
quency select knobs will only change the ac- on the installation. If wired, it will illuminate when
tive frequency displayed in the upper an external switch (LOCAL/REMOTE or similar) is
window. To cancel direct active tuning and in the REMOTE position. This indicates that the
return the control to the normal 2-display radio is being tuned by another control unit (2-out-
tune/preset mode, press the ACT button for of-5, for example). Dashes will appear in the lower
about 2 seconds, then release it. window and all of the controls on the CTL-32 will
be inoperative until LOCAL control is selected. The
Frequency selection is made using either the fre- frequency displayed in the upper window is the
quency select knobs, the XFR/MEM (transfer/ current active frequency being sent by the radio to
memory recall switch), or a remote tuning input the CTL-32 control and is stored in nonvolatile
from another system (NCS, FMS, etc) or control memory. The RMT annunciator will not illuminate
(such as a 2-out-of-5 control). when the radio is being tuned by an FMS or similar

flight management system. An FMS simply “tunes” Note

the CTL-32 just like the frequency select knobs do,
and the control then tunes the radio. All controls on If the ACT annunciator starts flashing after
the CTL-32 remain operational when an FMS is the frequency has been selected, it indicates
being used to “tune” the radio. that the receiver is not tuned to the active
frequency displayed in the upper window.
The CTL-32 may be installed to permit selection of
frequencies from 133.00 through 135.95 MHz. As a safety feature, the CTL-32 automatically
These are not navigation channels. The VIR-32 re- switches to the direct active tuning mode when a
ceiver is inoperative, with flags in view, when one frequency select knob is operated while the STO,
of these channels is selected. These permit tuning TEST, or XFR/MEM switches are actuated or the
the DME-42 to the military TACAN channels which remote transfer or memory recall inputs to the con-
are not paired with VOR or localizer channels. trol are grounded. To return to the normal 2-
display tune/preset mode, simply push the ACT
When the DME is placed in hold (either by select- button for about 2 seconds, then release it.
ing HLD on the mode switch or by actuating an ex-
ternal DME HOLD switch), the upper window dis- 3.17.3.4 Remote Transfer and Selection of
plays the NAV frequency and the lower window Frequencies
displays the DME hold frequency. (The DME hold
frequency is normally the active NAV frequency Some aircraft may be equipped with a remote
existing at the time DME hold is selected.) The transfer/memory recall switch, usually mounted on
NAV frequency in the upper window can be the yoke or cyclic, to permit remote transfer and
changed during the time DME hold is selected selection of frequencies. Operation of this switch is
without affecting the held DME frequency. During identical to that of the XFR/MEM switch on the
DME hold, the preset frequency that was being dis- CTL-32.
played in the lower window (prior to selecting DME 3.17.3.5 Frequency Storage
hold) is hidden but remains in the preset memory
and can be recalled to the active display by using Up to four preset frequencies can be stored in the
the XFR function. nonvolatile memory in the CTL-32 for future recall.
The control must be in the 2-display tune/preset
During normal 2-display tune/preset operation, all mode in order to store frequencies (frequencies
frequency selections and revisions are done to the cannot be stored if the control is in the direct active
preset frequency shown in the lower window. How- tuning mode). To program the memory:
ever, the active frequency shown in the upper win-
dow can be selected directly as described in the fol- a. Toggle the MEM switch until the upper window
lowing paragraph. displays the desired channel number (CH 1
through CH 4).
3.17.3.3 Direct Active Frequency Selection b. Rotate the frequency select knobs until the
The active frequency shown in the upper window stored.
can be selected directly with the frequency select c. Push the STO button twice within 5 seconds.
onds. The direct active tuning mode is indicated by
dashes appearing in the lower window. Also, the Note
ACT annunciator will flash as the frequency select
knobs are turned to indicate that the receiver is When storing a frequency, the second ac-
being retuned. Pushing the ACT button for about 2 tuation of the STO button must be done
seconds a second time returns the control to the within 5 seconds after the first actuation of
normal 2-display tune/preset mode. The active the STO button. If more than 5 seconds
tuning feature is not affected by power removal. If elapse, the control will revert to the normal
active tuning is selected (one push of the ACT but- 2-display tune/preset mode of operation. If
ton) and power is removed from the control, active this occurs, pushing the STO button twice
tuning will still be enabled the next time power is within 5 seconds will store the frequency in
reapplied to the control. the selected location.

After a frequency has been stored in memory, it will Note

using the STO button (recalling a stored frequency An interconnect strapping option allows an
for use does not remove it from memory). Memory “up-left” indication to be obtained during
is retained even when the unit is turned off for an ILS self-test instead of the “down-right” in-
extended period of time. dication. Some installations may have a
switch installed in place of the strap, thus
3.17.3.6 Self-Test allowing both “up-left” and “down-right” in-
dications to be selected.
During self-test, the VIR-32 provides VOR, ILS,
and marker beacon test outputs. When in self-test, e. Release the TEST button. (The VIR-32 will re-
the CTL-32 modulates the intensity of the upper turn to normal operation after approximately
and lower displays from minimum to maximum to 15 seconds, even if the TEST button is held.)
annunciate that self-test is in progress. 3.17.3.6.3 Marker Beacon Self-Test
The following paragraphs provide the procedures The marker beacon assembly is tested automati-
required and the results to be expected when per- cally when the TEST button on the CTL-32 is
forming the self-test. pushed and either a VOR or localizer frequency is
selected. Proper operation of the marker beacon as-
sembly is indicated by all three marker lamps illu-
3.17.3.6.1 VOR Self-Test minating (they flicker perceptibly, at a 30-Hz rate).
In addition, a tone will also be present in the
a. Select a VOR frequency on the CTL-32 NAV marker beacon audio output.
Control. (108.20 MHz will do. A specific fre- 3.17.3.7 Diagnostic Display
quency is not required for test.) A signal on fre-
quency will not interfere with the self-test. Ro-
Caution
tate the OBS to approximately 0 degree.
b. Push and hold the TEST button on the CTL-32.
c. The NAV flag will come into view.
extension of the self-test capability. The pi-
d. After approximately 2 seconds, the flag will go
lot should first observe the deviation indica-
out of view, the EHSI or HSI lateral deviation
tors and associated flags for the proper self-
bar will approximately center, and a TO indica-
test responses. If an out-of-limit condition
tion will appear. The RMI pointers connected to
exists, then the problem may be verified in
the VIR-32 will indicate approximately 0-
more detail by the diagnostics.
degree magnetic bearing.
e. Release the TEST button. (The VIR-32 will re- An extensive self-test diagnostic routine is also ini-
turn to normal operation after approximately tiated in the VIR-32 when the TEST button on the
15 seconds, even if the TEST button is held.) CTL-32 NAV control is pushed. For the first 2 or 3
seconds immediately after the TEST button on the
CTL-32 is pushed, a 2-digit diagnostic code may be
3.17.3.6.2 ILS (Localizer and Glideslope)
displayed in the lower window based on the condi-
Self-Test
tions existing immediately before the TEST button
was pushed.
a. Select a localizer frequency on the CTL-32 NAV
Control. (108.10 MHz will do. A specific fre- If an out-of-limit condition is detected during self-
quency is not required for test.) test, that 2-digit code will also be displayed on the
b. Push and hold the TEST button on the CTL-32. CTL-32 along with the word “dIAG” (diagnostic),
c. The NAV and GS flags will come into view. “FLAG,” or four dashes (“----”) in the upper window.
d. After approximately 3 seconds, the flags will go The four dashes will be displayed along with the
out of view, the EHSI or HSI lateral deviation code “00,” indicating normal operation — no trouble
bar will deflect right approximately two-thirds found. “FLAG” will be displayed along with a 2-
of full scale, and the glideslope pointer will de- digit code when something is abnormal but a fail-
flect down approximately two-thirds of full ure has not occurred (ie, low signal level, etc).
scale. “dIAG” is displayed along with a 2-digit code to in-

dicate a failure has been detected in the VIR-32. 3.17.4 Indicators and Displays
Completion of self-test is indicated when the NAV
control displays either the normal active and preset The output of the VIR-32 is displayed on indicators
frequencies in the upper and lower windows, re- such as the BDI-36, HSI-84, or the EHSI-74. The
spectively, or a 2-digit code. BDI-36 Bearing/Distance Indicator, HSI-84( ) Hori-
zontal Situation Indicator, and the EHSI-74 Elec-
Refer to the maintenance section of this manual for tronic Horizontal Situation Indicator are shown in
a list of diagnostic codes. (The TEST button must be Figure 3-33, Figure 3-34, and Figure 3-35 respec-
pushed before any diagnostic code can be dis- tively. Refer to Table 3-15 for a description of the
played.) Any of the codes (except “00”) can be either controls and indications of the BDI-36. Refer to
a diagnostic code or a fault code and can be dis- Table 3-16 for a description of the controls and indi-
played with the word “dIAG” or “FLAG.” Record cations of the HSI-84( ). Refer to Table 3-17 for a
any code (except “00”) and whether “dIAG” or description of the controls and indicators of the
“FLAG” was displayed to help the service techni- EHSI-74.
cian locate the problem.

Figure 3-33. BDI-36 Bearing/Distance Indicator, Controls and Indicators

Table 3-15. BDI-36 Bearing/Distance Indicator, Controls and Indicators.

DME displays Displays DME distances from two DME receiver/transmitters.
DME HOLD annunciators Illuminates to indicate DME HOLD in DME-1 or DME-2.

Figure 3-34. HSI-84( ) Horizontal Situation Indicator, Controls and Indicators

Figure 3-35. EHSI-74 Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator,

Controls and Indicators

Table 3-16. HSI-84( ) Horizontal Situation Indicator, Controls and Indicators.
Azimuth card Compass heading is displayed on a rotating azimuth card. Actual heading is indicated on azimuth
card with respect to lubber line.
Course arrow The course arrow indicates the selected course. A desired course is selected by turning CRS knob to
position the course arrow with respect to the azimuth card. The navigation receiver then tracks the
selected course to or from the selected VOR station.
Course display Selected course is numerically displayed by a mechanical counter which is geared to and set simulta-
neously with the course arrow by CRS knob. It provides a convenient way of precisely setting and
quickly cross-checking the selected course.
Course deviation bar The course deviation bar represents the course being tracked. When it aligns with the course arrow,
an on-course condition is indicated. If the bar deflects left, the aircraft must be steered left to bring it
back on course. Similarly, when the bar deflects right, the aircraft must be steered right to bring it
back on course. A scale painted on the mask behind the bar gives indication of the extent of off-course
deviation.
Heading marker The heading marker is located at the outer perimeter of the azimuth card and is used to identify the
selected heading. Displacement of the heading marker from the lubber line represents direction and
magnitude of deviation from the selected heading. The marker can be positioned to any heading by
turning HDG knob.
To/from arrow and Aircraft position to or from the VOR station is indicated by a small arrowhead displayed through one
VOR/LOC flag of two windows in the center of the instrument face. If the to/from arrow points in the direction of the
course arrow, the aircraft selected course is to the station. When the to/from arrow points in the di-
rection opposite the course arrow, the aircraft selected course is away from the station.
When red and white diagonally striped flags (VOR/LOC) are displayed through the windows in the
mask, it is a warning indication that the data coming from the navigation receiver is invalid. The
flags are also in view when system power is removed.
Glideslope pointer This display shows the direction and magnitude of vertical deviation of the aircraft from the
glideslope beam.
Glideslope flag The glideslope warning flag comes into view and partially obscures the glideslope pointer and scale
when the signal is not reliable.
Heading flag The heading flag comes into view at the right side of the instrument face when power is removed or
when the heading signal from the compass system is unreliable.
Digital display Distance, time to go, and ground speed are displayed by selection of the appropriate position on the
DIST/TTG/SPD switch. Distances of up to 399.9 nautical miles, time of up to 255.9 minutes, and
ground speeds in the range of 50 to 1023 knots are computed for display when receiving valid data
from a compatible DME system.
Digital display mode This annunciator identifies the nature of navigation data that is selected for display. When distance
annunciator is selected, NM (nautical miles) is indicated. Selection of time or speed causes MIN (minutes) or KTS
(knots), respectively, to be annunciated.

Table 3-17. EHSI-74 Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator, Controls and Indicators.
HCP-74
HDG The HDG knob controls the selected heading displayed on the EHSI. The HDG knob includes a center
SYNC button which, when pushed, causes the heading bug to rotate to the aircraft heading under the
lubber line on the EHSI.
CRS The CRS knob controls the course arrow displayed on the EHSI. The CRS knob includes a center DI-
RECT button which provides a “direct to” function; when the DIRECT button is pushed, the course
arrow rotates to indicate zero VOR deviation.
DISPLAY The HSI, ARC, and MAP buttons provide control of the display formats. In HSI position, the EHSI
full compass rose format is displayed. The ARC position selects an expanded compass sector
(approximately 80 degrees) across the top of the display with alphanumerics displayed in the corners
of the display. The MAP mode adds a pictorial presentation of the navigation situation to the compass
sector.
BRG (bearing) The NV1, ADF, and NV2 buttons control which bearing pointer is displayed on the EHSI. The bearing
pointer is selected by pushing the desired pushbutton. The bearing pointer is removed from the dis-
play by again pushing its pushbutton or by selecting another bearing pointer. A bearing pointer will
not appear when the navaid is tuned to an ILS frequency.
INT (intensity) The intensity of the EHSI display is controlled by rotation of INT knob. Clockwise rotation increases
the brightness of the display.
EFD-74 HSI DISPLAY MODE
Compass display The compass display is a full 360-degree rose with cardinal points and numbers at the 30-degree
marks. The compass rose and reference marks are white and the lubber line and reference aircraft
symbol are yellow. Airplane heading is read against the triangular lubber line.
Selected course The selected course is shown by the relationship of the green course arrow with respect to the com-
display pass card and is repeated digitally (in green) in the upper right of the display with the letters CRS
superscribed. B/C for back course will be superscribed when a localizer frequency is tuned and the dif-
ference between airplane heading and the course arrow exceeds approximately 105 degrees. The
course is selected with the CRS knob on the HCP-74 HSI Control Panel. The navigation data source is
displayed in green characters in the lower right corner of the display. The center portion of the course
arrow is the course deviation bar and moves laterally with respect to the aircraft symbol and the four
white deviation dots to indicate deviation from the selected course. Deviation is of angular format in
VOR mode. The to/from indication is a green triangle that appears on the head side of the lateral de-
viation bar pointing toward the head of the course arrow to indicate “to” and toward the tail of the
course arrow to indicate “from.” The to/from display disappears when a localizer frequency is selected.
If the navigation data source fails, a white box with the red letters NAV inscribed will appear above
the aircraft symbol and the white deviation dots will disappear. The legend will flash for 10 seconds
before becoming steady.
Selected heading Selected heading is shown by the location of two adjacent magenta squares with respect to the com-
display pass card. This heading bug is controlled by the HDG knob on the HCP-74.
Bearing pointer The three BRG pushbuttons (NV1, ADF, NV2) of the HCP-74 are used to select the bearing pointers.
display The bearing pointers are arrow-shaped pointers which rotate around the inner circumference of the
compass card. Bearing pointer source annunciation is displayed at the lower portion of the arrowhead
section of the pointer and is indicated by a “V” for VOR, “A” for ADF, and “W” for waypoint.

Vertical deviation Either vertical navigation (VNAV) or glideslope is displayed on the EHSI. The scale is white and con-
display sists of a center line with two dots above and below the center line. The deviation source (GLS or
VNV) is annunciated in white at the bottom of the scale. The triangular pointer is green. The vertical
deviation pointer represents the center of the glideslope beam or VNAV track; the center of the scale
represents airplane position relative to beam center or VNAV track. Each of the inner scale dots rep-
resents a 1/4-degree displacement; each of the outer dots represents a 1/2-degree displacement. When
a glideslope receiver is the course of input data, the pointer is in view only when the navigation re-
ceiver is tuned to an ILS (localizer) frequency. The glideslope pointer, scale, flag, and source annun-
ciation are automatically inhibited during back-course operation.
The pointer may also show the direction and magnitude of vertical deviation of a selected VNAV track
from the airplane. VNAV has priority for display and the information source is displayed below the
scale. In the event of a source failure, the scale and source annunciation are removed from the display
and the red letters VNV or GLS appear in place of the scale and flash for 10 seconds before becoming
steady.
Distance display The distance to the selected VOR or waypoint is shown in green digits below the letters DME or WPT
in the upper left of the display. When DME hold has been selected, the letter H appears to the right of
the digits. When the DME is in test mode, the letter T is displayed to the right of the digits. Invalid
distance source data is indicated by removing the data display.
TTG and SPD display Time to go or ground speed to the DME or waypoint may be displayed in the lower left corner of the
display in green digits. The display selection of time to go or ground speed is made by repetitively
pushing the HSI DISPLAY button on the HCP-74. Invalid data is indicated when the digits become
replaced with green dashes. Once TTG or SPD is selected, it remains displayed until changed in ei-
ther the HSI or ARC mode.
ARC DISPLAY MODE
Compass display The ARC mode provides an expanded compass sector display similar to the full compass card display
except that the EHSI displays a ±40-degree compass segment at the top of the display and the aircraft
symbol is placed at the bottom of the display. The compass sector and all pointers rotate around the
intersection of the wings and fuselage of the aircraft symbol. There are no compass reference marks
when the compass sector is being displayed. Other compass card functions and features are the same
as previously described for the HSI mode.
Selected course The course arrow center is located (along with the aircraft symbol) at the lower center of the display
display and enlarged to fit the expanded compass card. The course deviation scale is also located at the lower
center of the display and continues to rotate around the aircraft symbol. The “to/from” display (green
triangle on the head or tail side of the course deviation bar) consists of the letters TO or FR above the
navigation data source annunciation in the lower right corner of the display. The tail of the course ar-
row is displayed when the selected course is opposite the top of the display. Other features of the
course arrow remain the same as in the HSI mode.
Selected heading The heading bug, when in view on the compass sector, operates the same as in the HSI mode. When
display the heading bug is off scale, a short magenta selected heading line appears and is rotated around the
aircraft symbol to indicate the relative position of the selected heading. The heading bug position is
also indicated digitally in magenta at the appropriate end of the compass sector to indicate the se-
lected heading value.
Bearing pointer The bearing pointers operate the same as in the HSI mode with the additional feature of source an-
display nunciation appearing on the tail of the bearing pointer as well as the head. This is because, like the
course arrow, the whole bearing pointer cannot be displayed when the expanded mode is selected.
Digital bearing Bearing is displayed digitally at the left corner of the compass sector when a bearing pointer is in
display view. The digital bearing is always from the VOR and to the waypoint or ADF as indicated by the let-
ters TO or FR to the right of the digital data. The selected navaid is annunciated above the data. The
color of the annunciation and data are the same as the bearing pointer color.
Vertical deviation The vertical deviation display operates the same as in the HSI mode.
display
Distance display The distance display operates the same as in the HSI mode.

TTG and SPD display The time to go or ground speed display operates the same as in the HSI mode with the additional ca-
pability to display both TTG and SPD simultaneously at right center of the compass sector.
MAP DISPLAY MODE
Midscale display The MAP scale is changed by repetitively pressing MAP DISPLAY button. MAP ranges of 10, 25, 50,
100, 200, and 300 nautical miles are provided with a single cyan range mark displayed at midrange.
The midrange distance (5, 12.5, 25, 50, 100, and 150 respectively) is also shown in cyan digits at the
right-hand end of the range mark. The full-scale range is not shown digitally but is located at the bot-
tom of the compass card marks. The user should remember to double the midrange distance to de-
termine what range is selected.
Compass display The compass display functions are the same as in the ARC mode.
Selected course Selected course is shown as a line rotating around the selected VOR/DME (green octagon symbol) or
display waypoint (green 4-pointed star). The “to” course is a long solid green line and the “from” course is a
short dashed green line. The selected course is also shown digitally (in green) in the upper right cor-
ner as in the ARC and HSI modes. When an ILS frequency is tuned, the course arrow functions the
same as in the ARC mode. There is no course deviation or scale when the MAP mode is selected ex-
cept in ILS mode.
Selected heading The selected heading functions are the same as in the ARC mode.
display
3.18 VIR-432 NAVIGATION RECEIVER WITH 3.18.2 Operating Controls

CTL-32 NAV CONTROL, OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS Most operating controls for the VIR-432 are located
on the CTL-32 NAV control. (The MKR hi/lo sensi-
3.18.1 Introduction tivity switching function must be provided exter-
nally if desired.) The CTL-32 is shown in Figure 3-
The VIR-432 Navigation Receiver provides 200 50- 32 and described in Table 3-14 .
kHz spaced VOR/LOC channels from 108.00
through 117.95 MHz and 40 GS channels automati- 3.18.3 Operating Procedures
cally paired with localizer channels. It also provides
a marker beacon receiver. The VIR-432 (and DME-
442) are controlled by either a CSDB (CTL-32) NAV Caution
Control or a ARINC 429 NAV Control. This para-
graph does not provide an operating instruction for The VIR-432 and CTL-32 have been de-
an ARINC 429 control. (DME-442 operating in- signed to exhibit a very high degree of func-
structions are in paragraph 3.7.) tional integrity. Nevertheless, the user
The VIR-432 provides ARINC 429 outputs as well provide monitoring for all conceivable sys-
as serial digital (CSDB) outputs. The outputs con- tem failures and, however unlikely, it is
tain VOR , LOC, and GS deviation, high- and low- possible that erroneous operation could oc-
level flag signals, magnetic bearing to the station, cur without a fault indication. It is the re-
to/from information, and marker beacon lamp sig- sponsibility of the pilot to detect such an oc-
nals. The VIR-432 also provides VOR/LOC and currence by means of cross-checks with
marker beacon audio outputs. The outputs are pro- redundant or correlated information avail-
vided for compatibility with current aircraft and able in the cockpit.
equipment as well as long-term compatibility with
EFIS and other systems now under development.

3.18.3.1 Equipment Turn On Note
The VIR-432 receiver and the CTL-32 NAV Control If the ACT annunciator starts flashing, it
are turned on either by rotating the power and indicates that the receiver is not tuned to
mode switch on the NAV control to the ON position the active frequency displayed in the upper
(on those controls that have the optional ON posi- window.
tion), or by turning on the avionics master switch
(for those controls that have a NORM position). The CTL-32 has a nonvolatile memory that permits
storing up to four preset frequencies. Once stored,
After power is applied, the CTL-32 displays the these frequencies can be recalled to the preset dis-
same active and preset frequencies that were pres- play (lower window) by positioning the XFR/MEM
ent when the equipment was last turned off. switch to the MEM position. The storage location
3.18.3.2 Frequency Selection displayed in the upper window while the XFR/MEM
switch is in the MEM position. All four stored fre-
Note window with their memory locations shown in the
desired stored frequency has been recalled to the
display by momentarily positioning the XFR/MEM
When the VIR-432 is being remotely tuned, the
RMT annunciator may or may not illuminate de-
return the control to the normal 2-display
pending on the installation. If wired, it will illumi-
tune/preset mode, push the ACT button for
nate when an external switch (LOCAL/REMOTE or
about 2 seconds, then release it.
similar) is in the REMOTE position. This indicates
unit (ARINC 429 for example). Dashes will appear
in the lower window and all of the controls on the
CTL-32 will be inoperative until LOCAL control is
from another system (NCS,FMS, etc) or control
selected. The frequency shown in the upper window
(such as an ARINC 429 control).
is the current active frequency being sent by the
Rotation of either frequency select knob increases radio to the CTL-32 control, and is stored in non-
or decreases the frequency in the lower window. volatile memory. The RMT annunciator will not il-
The larger, outer knob changes the frequency in 1- luminate when the radio is being tuned by an FMS
MHz increments (number to the left of decimal or similar flight management system. An FMS sim-
point). The smaller, inner knob changes the fre- ply “tunes” the CTL-32 just like the frequency se-
quency in 0.05-MHz increments. lect knobs do, and the control then tunes the radio.
All controls on the CTL-32 remain operational
After the desired frequency is set in the preset fre-
when an FMS is being used to “tune” the radio.
quency display, it can be transferred to the upper
window (active frequency) display by momentarily
The CTL-32 may be installed to permit selection of
positioning the XFR/MEM switch to XFR. At the
frequencies from 133.00 through 135.95 MHz.
same time that the preset frequency is transferred
These are not navigation channels. The VIR-432 re-
to the active display, the previously active fre-
ceiver is inoperative, with flags in view, when one
quency is transferred to the preset display. The
of these channels is selected. These permit tuning
ACT annunciator on the control momentarily illu-
the DME-42 to the military TACAN channels which
minates while the receiver is tuning to the new fre-
are not paired with VOR or localizer channels.
quency.

When the DME is placed in hold (either by select- display tune/preset mode, simply push the ACT
ing HLD on the mode switch or by actuating an ex- button for about 2 seconds, then release it.
ternal DME HOLD switch), the upper window dis-
3.18.3.4 Remote Transfer and Selection of
plays the NAV frequency and the lower window
Frequencies
displays the DME hold frequency. (The DME hold
frequency is normally the active NAV frequency Some aircraft may be equipped with a remote
existing at the time DME hold is selected.) The transfer/memory recall switch, usually mounted on
NAV frequency in the upper window can be the yoke or cyclic, to permit remote transfer and
changed during the time DME hold is selected selection of frequencies. Operation of this switch is
without affecting the held DME frequency. During identical to that of the XFR/MEM switch on the
DME hold, the preset frequency that was being dis- CTL-32.
played in the lower window (prior to selecting DME
hold) is hidden but remains in the preset memory 3.18.3.5 Frequency Storage
and can be recalled to the active display by using
Up to four preset frequencies can be stored in the
the XFR function.
nonvolatile memory in the CTL-32 for future recall.
During normal 2-display tune/preset operation, all The control must be in the 2-display tune/preset
frequency selections and revisions are done to the mode in order to store frequencies (frequencies
preset frequency shown in the lower window. How- cannot be stored if the control is in the direct active
ever, the active frequency shown in the upper win- tuning mode). To program the memory:
dow can be selected directly as described in the fol-
a. Toggle the MEM switch until the upper window
lowing paragraph.
displays the desired channel number (CH 1
3.18.3.3 Direct Active Frequency Selection through CH 4).
b. Rotate the frequency select knobs until the
The active frequency shown in the upper window
can be selected directly with the frequency select
stored.
c. Push the STO button twice within 5 seconds.
onds. The direct active tuning mode is indicated by
dashes appearing in the lower window. Also, the
ACT annunciator will flash as the frequency select Note
knobs are turned to indicate that the receiver is
being retuned. Pushing the ACT button for about 2 When storing a frequency, the second ac-
seconds a second time returns the control to the tuation of the STO button must be done
normal 2-display tune/preset mode. The active within 5 seconds after the first actuation of
tuning feature is not affected by power removal. If the STO button. If more than 5 seconds
active tuning is selected and power is removed from elapse, the control will revert to the normal
the control, active tuning will still be enabled the 2-display mode of operation. If this occurs,
next time power is reapplied to the control. pushing the STO button twice within 5 sec-
onds will store the frequency in the selected
location.
Note
If the ACT annunciator continues flashing
after the frequency has been selected, it in-
using the STO button (recalling a stored frequency
dicates that the receiver is not tuned to the
for use does not remove it from memory). Memory
active frequency displayed in the upper
window.
extended period of time.
switches to the direct active tuning mode when a 3.18.3.6 Self-Test
TEST, or XFR/MEM switches are actuated or the During self-test, the VIR-432 provides VOR, ILS
remote transfer or memory recall inputs to the con- and marker beacon test outputs. When in self-test,
trol are grounded. To return to the normal 2- the CTL-32 modulates the intensity of the upper

and lower displays from minimum to maximum to 3.18.3.6.3 Marker Beacon Self-Test
annunciate that self-test is in progress.
The marker beacon assembly is tested automati-
The following paragraphs provide the procedures cally when the TEST button on the CTL-32 is
required and the results to be expected when per- pushed and either a VOR or localizer frequency is
forming the self-test. selected. Proper operation of the marker beacon as-
sembly is indicated by all three marker lamps illu-
3.18.3.6.1 VOR Self-Test
minating (they flicker perceptibly at a 30-Hz rate).
a. Select a VOR frequency on the CTL-32 NAV In addition, a tone will also be present in the
control (108.20 MHz will do. A specific fre- marker audio output.
quency is not required for test). A signal on fre-
3.18.3.7 Diagnostic Display
quency will not interfere with self-test. Rotate
the OBS to approximately 0 degree.
b. Push and hold the TEST button on the CTL-32. Caution
c. The NAV flag will come into view.
d. After approximately 2 seconds, the flag will go The diagnostic routines are intended as an
out of view, the EHSI or HSI lateral deviation extension of the self-test capability. The pi-
bar will approximately center, and a TO indica- lot should first observe the deviation indica-
tion will appear. The RMI pointers connected to tors and associated flags for the proper self-
the VIR-432 will indicate approximately 0- test responses. If an out-of-limit condition
degree magnetic bearing. exists, then the problem may be verified in
e. Release the TEST button. (The VIR-432 will re- more detail by the diagnostics.
turn to normal operation after approximately An extensive self-test diagnostic routine is also ini-
15 seconds, even if the TEST button is held.) tiated in the VIR-432 when the TEST button on the
3.18.3.6.2 ILS (Localizer and Glideslope) CTL-32 NAV Control is pushed. For the first 2 or 3
Self-Test seconds immediately after the TEST button the
CTL-32 is pressed, a 2-digit diagnostic code may be
a. Select a localizer frequency on the CTL-32 NAV displayed in the lower window based on the condi-
control (108.10 MHz will do. A specific fre- tions existing immediately before the TEST button
quency is not required for test). was pushed.
b. Push and hold the TEST button on the CTL-32.
c. The NAV and GS flags will come into view. If an out-of-limit condition is detected during self-
d. After approximately 3 seconds, the flags will go test, that 2-digit code will also be displayed on the
out of view, the EHSI or HSI lateral deviation CTL-32 along with the word “dIAG” (diagnostic),
bar will deflect right approximately 2/3 of full “FLAG”, or four dashes (“----”) in the upper window.
scale and the glideslope pointer will deflect The four dashes will be displayed along with the
down approximately 2/3 of full scale. code 00 indicating normal operation — no trouble
found. FLAG will be displayed along with a 2-digit
code when something is abnormal but a failure has
Note not occurred (ie, low signal level, etc). “dIAG” is
displayed along with a 2-digit code to indicate a
An interconnect strapping option allows an
failure has been detected in the VIR-432. Comple-
“up-left” indication to be obtained during
tion of self-test is indicated when the NAV control
ILS self-test instead of the “down-right” in-
displays either the normal active and preset fre-
dication. Some installations may have a
quencies in the upper and lower window, respec-
switch installed in place of the strap thus
tively, or a 2-digit code.
allowing either “up-left” and “down-right”
indications to be selected.
Refer to the maintenance section of this manual for
e. Release the TEST button. (The VIR-432 will re- a list of diagnostic codes. (The TEST button must be
turn to normal operation after approximately pushed before any diagnostic code can be dis-
15 seconds, even if the TEST button is held.) played.) Any of the codes (except 00) can be either a

diagnostic code or a fault code and can be displayed the OFF and STBY modes, the associated COM,
with the word “dIAG” or “FLAG”. Record any code NAV, and DME radios are controlled by the pri-
(except 00) and whether “dIAG” or “FLAG” was dis- mary ARINC 429 control. When the CTL-23 is in
played to help the service technician locate the the ON and SQ OFF modes, the CTL-23 is used to
problem. control the associated COM, NAV, and DME radios.
Refer to Table 3-18 and Figure 3-36 for additional
3.18.4 Indicators and Displays
description on the operation of a CTL-23.
The output of the VIR-432 is displayed on indica-
tors such as the BDI-36, HSI-84, or the EHSI-74. In the STBY mode the CTL-23 displays the echoed
The BDI-36 Bearing/Distance Indicator, HSI-84( ) CSDB COM and NAV frequencies. In the ON and
Horizontal Situation Indicator, and the EHSI-74 SQ OFF modes, the CTL-23 displays the COM and
Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator are shown NAV frequency selected by the frequency controller
in Figure 3-33, Figure 3-34, and Figure 3-35 respec- switch.
tively. Refer to Table 3-15 for a description of the
controls and indications of the BDI-36. Refer to The CTL-23 indicates abnormal conditions in the
Table 3-16 for a description of the controls and indi- ON and SQ OFF modes by 1 Hz flashing of the
cations of the HSI-84( ). Refer to Table 3-17 for a lower half of the 100 MHz digit. These abnormal
description of the controls and indicators of the conditions are:
EHSI-74.
1. The COM or NAV echo frequency differs
3.19 CTL-23 CONTROL
from the displayed frequency.
The CTL-23 Control provides CSDB control data to 2. The frequency valid bit is 0, indicating in-
a COM, NAV, and DME radio. Normally a CTL-23 valid frequency data.
is used as a backup control in conjunction with a 3. Label 11 at port1 or label 21 at port 2 does
primary ARINC 429 control. When the CTL-23 is in not appear for at least 1500 ms.
Table 3-18. CTL-23, Controls and Indicators.
COM frequency display The COM display shows the active VHF radio frequency. Normally this frequency is also displayed
on the primary tuning control.
NAV frequency display The NAV display shows the active VIR radio frequency. Normally this frequency is also displayed on
the primary tuning control.
COM/NAV select switch The COM/NAV toggle switch selects which display will be affected by the frequency controller. In
the Up position, the controller will affect the upper, or COM display. In the down position, the con-
troller will affect the lower, or NAV/DME display.
Mode select knob OFF – The CTL is disabled and all control functions are inhibited.
STBY – The CTL is powered on and displays the active COM/NAV frequencies. In STBY, the CTL
only echos the frequency returned from the COMM/NAV.
ON – The CTL is enabled to control selected COM/NAV radios. In the ON and SQ OFF positions, the
CTL controls the associated COM and NAV radios.
SQ OFF – The CTL is enabled as in the ON position and the VHF COM radio receiver squelch cir-
cuits are disabled.
Frequency select knobs Turn these two concentric knobs to change the selected COM or NAV frequency. The larger knob
changes the most significant (left) digits, and the smaller knob changes the two least significant
(right) digits of the display.
Transmit annunciator The TX annunciator lights while the COM radio is transmitting.
HOLD Button On units with a HOLD Button, pushing the HOLD button once in the ON or SQ OFF mode, HLD is
annunciated on display and the current DME channel is in hold. Pushing the HOLD button again,
the HLD annunication is off and the DME is out of hold.

Figure 3-36. CTL-23 Control, Controls and Indicators

þ 523-0772450-007118

Collins
Pro Line II
Maintenance
Table of Contents
5.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................5-1 5.12.1 Introduction............................................................................................. 5-10

5.12.2 Maintenance Schedule ............................................................................ 5-11
5.2 ADF-60( ) AUTOMATIC DIRECTION FINDING EQUIPMENT, 5.12.3 Diagnostic Information ........................................................................... 5-11
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE..................................................................5-1
5.13 RTU-42X0 RADIO TUNING UNIT AND AIU-4000 AUDIO
5.2.1 Introduction..................................................................................................5-1
INTERFACE UNIT, SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ............................ 5-12
5.2.2 System Power-on and Performance Tests ..................................................5-1
5.2.3 CTL-62 ADF Control (622-6522-001 Through -016) Diagnostic Codes.....5-2 5.14 TDR-90 TRANSPONDER EQUIPMENT, SYSTEM
5.3 ADF-462( ) AUTOMATIC DIRECTION FINDER RECEIVER, MAINTENANCE ............................................................................... 5-12
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE.................................................................5-2 5.14.1 Introduction............................................................................................. 5-12
5.3.1 Introduction..................................................................................................5-2 5.14.2 Self-Test................................................................................................... 5-12
5.3.2 System Power-on and Performance Tests ..................................................5-2 5.14.3 CTL-92 ATC Control (622-6523-001 Through -008) Diagnostic
5.3.3 Diagnostic Display .......................................................................................5-3 Codes......................................................................................................... 5-13
5.14.4 Test Procedures Using the 476X-3 Transponder Ramp Test Set ......... 5-13
5.4 ALT-50/55 RADIO ALTIMETER SYSTEM, SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE..................................................................................5-4 5.15 TDR-94/94D MODE S TRANSPONDER EQUIPMENT,
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ............................................................... 5-14
5.4.1 Introduction..................................................................................................5-4
5.4.2 System Power-on and Performance Tests ..................................................5-4 5.15.1 Introduction............................................................................................. 5-14
5.15.2 Self-Test................................................................................................... 5-14
5.5 CAD-31 CONTROL ADAPTER, SYSTEM MAINTENANCE................5-5 5.15.3 Ramp Tester Selection and Use ............................................................. 5-16
5.5.1 Postinstallation Test....................................................................................5-5 5.15.4 Transponder System Ground Test Enable ............................................ 5-17
5.5.2 Diagnostic Display .......................................................................................5-5 5.15.5 Flightline Test Procedures ..................................................................... 5-17
5.6 CAD-62 CONTROL ADAPTER, SYSTEM MAINTENANCE................5-5 5.16 VHF-21( )/22( ) VHF COMM TRANSCEIVER, SYSTEM
5.6.1 Postinstallation Test....................................................................................5-5 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................... 5-19
5.6.2 Diagnostic Display .......................................................................................5-5 5.16.1 Introduction............................................................................................. 5-19
5.16.2 Transceiver Self-Test .............................................................................. 5-19
5.7 CAD-870 TRANSPONDER CONTROL ADAPTER, SYSTEM 5.16.3 Transceiver Operational Test................................................................. 5-20
MAINTENANCE..................................................................................5-6
5.7.1 Postinstallation Test....................................................................................5-6 5.17 VHF-422( ) VHF COMM TRANSCEIVER, SYSTEM
5.7.2 Diagnostic Display .......................................................................................5-6 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................... 5-20
5.17.1 Introduction............................................................................................. 5-20
5.8 CAD-870G TRANSPONDER CONTROL ADAPTER, SYSTEM 5.17.2 Transceiver Self-Test .............................................................................. 5-20
MAINTENANCE..................................................................................5-7 5.17.3 VHF-422 With CTL-22 Diagnostic Codes .............................................. 5-20
5.8.1 Postinstallation Test....................................................................................5-7 5.17.4 Transmitter Operational Test ................................................................ 5-21
5.8.2 Diagnostic Display .......................................................................................5-7
5.18 VIR-32 NAVIGATION RECEIVER, SYSTEM MAINTENANCE .... 5-21
5.9 DME-42 DISTANCE MEASURING EQUIPMENT, SYSTEM 5.18.1 Introduction............................................................................................. 5-21
MAINTENANCE..................................................................................5-8 5.18.2 Receiver Self-Test.................................................................................... 5-21
5.9.1 Introduction..................................................................................................5-8 5.18.3 VOR Self-Test.......................................................................................... 5-22
5.9.2 System Power-on and Performance Tests ..................................................5-8 5.18.4 ILS (Localizer and Glideslope) ............................................................... 5-22
5.10 DME-442 DISTANCE MEASURING EQUIPMENT, SYSTEM 5.18.5 Marker Beacon ........................................................................................ 5-22
5.18.6 Ground Check.......................................................................................... 5-22
MAINTENANCE..................................................................................5-9
5.10.1 Introduction................................................................................................5-9 5.19 VIR-432 NAVIGATION RECEIVER, SYSTEM MAINTENANCE .. 5-24
5.10.2 System Power-on and Performance Tests ..............................................5-10 5.19.1 Introduction............................................................................................. 5-24
5.19.2 Receiver Self-Test.................................................................................... 5-24
5.11 GPS-4000 GLOBAL POSITIONING SENSOR, SYSTEM
5.19.3 VOR Self-Test.......................................................................................... 5-25
MAINTENANCE................................................................................5-10
5.19.4 ILS (Localizer and Glideslope) ............................................................... 5-25
5.12 MND-640( ) MULTISENSOR NAVIGATION DISPLAY, 5.19.5 Marker Beacon ........................................................................................ 5-26
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE................................................................5-10 5.19.6 Ground Check.......................................................................................... 5-26
NOTICE: This section replaces sixth edition dated 12 May 1994.

Page No Issue
* Title ........................................ 11 April 97

* List of Effective Pages ........... 11 April 97
* 5-1 thru 5-18 .......................... 11 April 97
* 5-19 thru 5-27 Added ............. 11 April 97
* 5-28 Blank Added................... 11 April 97



section V
maintenance
5.1 INTRODUCTION mounted either on the top or the bottom of the

fuselage. For good ADF operation, the antenna
The following paragraphs provide onboard aircraft must have good electrical and mechanical con-
maintenance procedures for the Collins Pro Line II tact with the aircraft skin.
Comm/Nav/Pulse equipment. The paragraphs ap- b. Apply power to the ADF and RMI, BDI, or HSI.
pear according to the alphabetical order of the c. In dual systems, set the 1 / 2 switch to 1. Set
equipment; ADF, ALT, DME, etc. The procedures the CTL-62 control mode switch to ANT. This
are to be used to: applies power to the system.
a. Check out a system to ensure that it is func- d. Tune the CTL-62 Control to any frequency,
tioning. preferably one that is known to give a good
b. Exercise the system through a systematic rou- signal.
tine that should expose a defective LRU. e. Note the correct RMI pointer response accord-
ing to Table 5-1.
Fault isolation of a reported equipment malfunction
or failure, should include a check of the aircraft in- Table 5-1. RMI Pointer Position.
stallation and wiring with special attention to any
problem that can contribute to a failure of the RECEIVER ANTENNA POINTER
equipment. Chapter 11 of AC 43.13-1A, reprinted in TYPE MOUNTING PARK
the Installation Practices Manual (CPN 523- POSITION
0775254), offers guidelines for aircraft inspection TOP BOTTOM
and installation of electrical equipment.
ADF-60A X 90 degrees
Fault isolation to a defective LRU almost always ADF-60A X 270 degrees
presupposes equipment that is at least partially
functional. Therefore, a system that is totally non- ADF-60B X or X 90 degrees
responsive is most often best evaluated on the
bench where detailed analysis is more readily per- f. Set the CTL-62 mode control to ADF.
formed. g. The RMI pointer should indicate the correct
relative bearing to the station. Adjust the audio
5.2 ADF-60( ) AUTOMATIC DIRECTION volume as necessary for a comfortable audio
FINDING EQUIPMENT, SYSTEM level.
MAINTENANCE
Note
5.2.1 Introduction
If the RMI pointer remains parked, the sys-
The ADF-60( ) system provides aural reception of
tem may not be receiving a reliable signal.
transmissions from a selected ground station and
In this case, try two or three other stations
indicates relative bearing to that station. The
if possible.
ground station carrier frequency must be within
the operating range of 190 to 1749.5 kHz.
h. Push and hold the TEST switch. Note the cor-
5.2.2 System Power-on and Performance Tests rect RMI pointer response as follows. For top
mounted antennas, the pointer rotates 90 de-
a. Depending on the nature or tone of the pilot grees clockwise. For bottom mounted antennas,
complaint, it might be wise to make a visual in- the pointer rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise.
spection of the antenna. The antenna is flush Release TEST switch.

maintenance 523-0772450
Note indicates relative bearing to that station. The

ground station carrier frequency must be within
If the signal is weak or of poor quality, the the operating range of 190 to 1799.0 kHz and 2179
bearing pointer can rotate rather slowly. If to 2185 kHz.
this happens with a station that has his-
torically given a good indication, it might be 5.3.2 System Power-on and Performance Tests
well to check for antenna cable and/or con-
nector defects. A degraded receiver sensi- a. Depending on the nature or tone of the pilot
tivity might give the same response. complaint, a visual inspection of the antenna
should aid troubleshooting. The antenna is
i. Tune to any CW station if one is available. Set flush-mounted either to the top or bottom of the
the mode control to TONE and listen to the fuselage. For good ADF operation, the antenna
audio for a 1000-Hz tone identifying the CW must have good electrical and mechanical con-
station. tact with the aircraft skin. Look for physical
damage and corrosion at the mounting contact
5.2.3 CTL-62 ADF Control (622-6522-001 points.
Through -016) Diagnostic Codes b. Apply power to the ADF and RMI, or HSI.
c. In dual systems, set the 1 / 2 switch to 1. Set
When the CTL-62 is used with the CAD-62 to con- the control mode to ANT. This applies power to
trol the ADF-60 system, certain diagnostics codes the system.
can be displayed in the self-test mode. (The TEST d. Tune the control to any frequency, preferably
button must be pushed before any diagnostic code one that is known to give a good signal.
can be displayed.) These should be interpreted as e. Note that the RMI pointer should indicate the
follows: correct relative bearing to the station. Adjust
the audio volume, as necessary, for a comfort-
CODE INTERPRETATION able listening level.
00 No faults
Note
02 RAM test failed (test failed at power-up)
03 No serial sync block received If the RMI pointer remains parked, the sys-
04 No serial data block received for more tem may not be receiving a reliable signal.
than 2 seconds In this case, try two or three other stations
05 *Transponder label received in first block if possible.
06 I/O port 1 failure
07 I/O port 2 failure f. Push and hold the self-test switch. Note the
08 Illegal ADF frequency correct RMI pointer response as follows. For
09 Serial input failed or stuck low top-mounted antennas, the pointer rotates 90°
10 ADF not lock in ADF mode clockwise. For bottom-mounted antennas, the
pointer rotates 90° counterclockwise. Release
*Occurrence of this code is extremely unlikely when self-test switch.
used with a CAD-62. It implies receipt of the incor-
rect code label with correct tuning information. Note
This is more likely to occur when using a tuning
source which is capable of tuning both the ADF and If the signal is weak or of poor quality, the
the transponder. bearing pointer can rotate rather slowly. If
this happens with a station that historically
5.3 ADF-462( ) AUTOMATIC DIRECTION has given good indication, check for an-
FINDER RECEIVER, SYSTEM tenna cable and/or connector defects. A de-
MAINTENANCE graded receiver sensitivity might give the
same response.
5.3.1 Introduction
g. Tune to any CW station, if one is available. Set
The ADF-462( ) system provides aural reception of the mode to TONE and listen to the audio for a
transmissions from a selected ground station and 1000-Hz tone identifying the CW station.

5.3.3 Diagnostic Display 1. If the ADF-462 system detects a parameter

falling outside of its preestablished limits
Caution during self-test, the CTL-62 displays that
diagnostic code along with the word DIAG
The diagnostic routines are intended as an or FLAG in the active display.
extension of the self-test capability. The pi-
lot should first observe the indicators and Note
associated flags for the proper self-test re-
FLAG indicates that the ADF-462 ADF Re-
sponses. If a problem exists, then the prob-
ceiver is operating properly but that an ex-
ternal problem may exist, such as low re-
diagnostics.
ceived signal levels. DIAG indicates that a
parameter in the ADF-462 ADF Receiver is
An extensive self-test diagnostic routine can be
outside of its preestablished limits.
started in the ADF-462 by pushing the TEST but-
ton on the CTL-62 ADF Control or by operating an
optional external ADF test switch. The self-test 2. If all parameters are within their preestab-
routine takes several seconds to complete. lished limits, the CTL-62 displays four
dashes (- - - -) and code 00.
The following describes a typical self-test routine: 3. Self-test is completed when the indicator
has rotated 90° from its previous indication
or a diagnostic code is displayed.
a. Push TEST button.
b. The CTL-62 modulates the active and preset
display intensity from minimum to maximum Table 5-2 is a list of diagnostic codes. The TEST
brightness to annunciate that self-test is in button must be pushed before any diagnostic code
progress. can be displayed.
Table 5-2. ADF-462 Self-Test Diagnostic Codes.
CODE INTERPRETATION
00 No faults found
01 thru 10 Not used in ADF-462 systems
(Used on CAD-62/ADF-60)
11* No received serial bus, ARINC port A
12* No received ADF label, ARINC port A
13* Invalid frequency, ARINC port A
14* No received serial bus, ARINC port B
15* No received ADF label, ARINC port B
16* Invalid frequency, ARINC port B
17* No received serial bus, CSDB
18* No received ADF label, CSDB
19* Invalid frequency, CSDB
20* Bearing update timeout
21 Reserved
22* B+ out of limits (ANT B+, 15 V)
23* B– out of limits (ANT B–, –12 V)
24* RAM check
25* A/D out of limits
26* SIN modulation out of limits

Table 5-2. ADF-462 Self-Test Diagnostic Codes.
CODE INTERPRETATION
27* COS modulation out of limits

28* Synth lock out of limits
29* ANT power out of limits
30 Low signal level
31 Detector out of lock
32 AGC voltage out of limits
33 Hf key line low
34 DC SIN out of limits
35 DC COS out of limits
*These codes cause the ADF-462 fault monitor output to become an open circuit.
5.4 ALT-50/55 RADIO ALTIMETER SYSTEM, b. Complaints indicating signal dropout (off-scale
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE indications below 2000 or 2500 ft) might sug-
gest antenna cable problems. In this case it
5.4.1 Introduction might be wise to make a thorough inspection of
the antenna cables, looking for loose connectors,
The ALT-50/55 Radio Altimeter System provides
physical damage, or signs of deterioration due
the pilot with a precision altitude indication during
to repeated flexing or vibration. If the cables
the approach phase of the flight. The system con-
are exposed in a cargo area, physical damage
sists of an rt, which is usually mounted in the radio
can be suspected. Repeated flexing and vibra-
rack, an indicator mounted on the instrument
tion can cause metal fatigue in the cable shield
panel, and two antennas flush mounted on the belly
and eventually result in strand breakage.
of the aircraft.
Enough of this can affect the vswr and increase
The ALT-50/55 is compatible with ground proximity the signal cable loss resulting in intermittent
warning systems. The ALT-55 system measures operation.
aircraft altitude up to 2500 feet while the ALT-50 c. A constant flag in other than self-test suggests
system is limited to 2000 feet. Both systems supply either no power to the rt or a power supply fail-
four trip outputs each of which is either factory or ure in the rt.
shop adjusted to operate at predetermined alti- d. Take note of the antenna height above the
tudes. These switches are in the form of transistors, ground as the aircraft is parked. If the indicator
switched to ground, at the set altitude. In addition, scale is sufficiently graduated at this altitude
some of the indicators can provide a pilot adjustable range, it should be possible to read this altitude
output which is usually used to operate an external when the system is operating. Remember, the
DH (decision height) annunciator. altimeter system is calibrated to read exactly 0
foot at touchdown (landing gear extended).
5.4.2 System Power-on and Performance Tests Therefore, when parked and loaded the altitude
indication will normally be less than 0 foot, de-
a. Depending on the nature or tone of the pilot pending on the amount of strut compression.
complaint, it might be wise to make a visual in- e. Turn on aircraft power to the altimeter system
spection of the antennas. The antennas are and read the parked altitude indication. On
flush mounted on the bottom of the fuselage. ALI- or 339H- type indicators, an accurate
For good altimeter operation, the antennas reading is usually not possible because of the
must have good electrical and mechanical con- lack of scale graduations below 0 foot. The DRI-
tact with the aircraft skin. Look for physical 55 indicators, however, give a digital readout
damage and corrosion at the mounting contact and as such should be reasonably accurate.
points.

f. Push the TEST button and read the self-test al- Table 5-3. CAD-31 Self-Test Diagnostic Codes.
titude of 50 feet (or 15.2 meters on the ALI-55B
Indicator). The flag should come into view. CODE DESCRIPTION
g. Take note of where the DH is set. If it is set 00 No fault detected
above 50 feet, the DH should be on during self-
01 Not used
test. If it is set below 50 feet, it should be off
during self-test. 61 ROM test failure
h. Check DH switching by holding the TEST but- 62 RAM test failure
ton in and adjusting DH through the self-test
63 No serial sync block received
altitude. It should switch on at 50 feet as the
DH altitude is adjusted in the increasing alti- 64 No serial data block received
tude direction, and off in the opposite. It should 65 Opposite source ident received
be fairly accurate in the first case (increasing 66 I/O port 1 failure
DH altitude direction) and it should show some
hysteresis in the opposite direction. The hys- 67 I/O port 2 failure
teresis is there to keep the light from flashing 68 Invalid frequency
at the DH altitude. Allow a maximum of 5 feet
either way.
5.6 CAD-62 CONTROL ADAPTER, SYSTEM
5.5 CAD-31 CONTROL ADAPTER, SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
5.5.1 Postinstallation Test 5.6.1 Postinstallation Test
Press the test button on the control of the system in Press the test button on the control of the system in
which the CAD-31 is installed (CTL-32 on which the CAD-62 is installed (CTL-62 on ADF sys-
NAV/DME system; CTL-22 on COMM system). tem; CTL-92 on TDR system). Check the diagnostic
Check the diagnostic code on the control. If no fault code on the control. If no fault is detected, code 00
is detected, code 00 will be displayed. If a code will be displayed. If a code other than 00 is dis-
other than 00 is displayed, check the CAD-31, in- played, check the CAD-62, installation wiring, or
stallation wiring, or associated units. The CAD-31 associated units. The CAD-62 installation section of
installation section of this manual has an in- this manual has an input/output diagram of the
put/output diagram of the CAD-31 internal circuits CAD-62 internal circuits which may be useful in
which may be useful in troubleshooting the CAD-31 troubleshooting the CAD-62 installation.
installation.
5.6.2 Diagnostic Display
5.5.2 Diagnostic Display
Caution
Caution
The diagnostic routines are intended as an extension of the self-test capability. The pi-
extension of the self-test capability. The pilot should first observe any associated flag
lot should first observe any associated flag indications for proper self-test response. If
indications for proper self-test response. If an improper response is observed, then the
an improper response is observed, then the cause may be verified in more detail using
cause may be verified in more detail using the diagnostics.
the diagnostics.
Table 5-3 is a list of the diagnostic codes for the Table 5-4 is a list of the diagnostic codes for the
CAD-31. Note that the presence of a diagnostic (or CAD-62. Note that the presence of a diagnostic (or
flag) code does not necessarily indicate a fault. An flag) code does not necessarily indicate a fault. An
out-of-tolerance condition may exist that is caused out-of-tolerance condition may exist that is caused
by an atypical situation. The codes are a tool, de- by an atypical situation. The codes are a tool, de-
signed to display conditions internal to the applica- signed to display conditions internal to the applica-
ble units. ble units.

Table 5-4. CAD-62 Self-Test Diagnostic Codes.
CODE DESCRIPTION
WHEN USING A TDR-90 WHEN USING AN ADF-60
00 No fault detected No fault detected
01* ROM test failure ROM test failure
02 RAM test failure RAM test failure
03 No serial sync block received No serial sync block received
04 No serial data block received No serial data block received
05 ADF label received Transponder label received
06 I/O port 1 failure I/O port 1 failure
07 I/O port 2 failure I/O port 2 failure
08 Transponder source ID changed from last frame Invalid ADF frequency
09 Serial input failed or stuck low Serial input failed or stuck low
10 No reply lamp in self-test ADF not locked in ADF mode
* -002 status unit only
5.7 CAD-870 TRANSPONDER CONTROL 5.7.2 Diagnostic Display

ADAPTER, SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Caution
5.7.1 Postinstallation Test
The postinstallation checkout of the CAD-870 con- extension of the self-test capability. The pi-
sists of using the ARINC 429 ATC control source to lot should first observe any associated flag
tune the TDR-90 transponder. If the aircraft is indications for proper self-test response. If
equipped with dual ATC controls and CAD-870’s, an improper response is observed, then the
set the ATC control DISABLE switch to the no 2 cause may be verified in more detail using
position so that the no 1 CAD-870 can be checked the diagnostics.
first. A transponder ramp tester is required for the
following tests. Table 5-5 is a list of the diagnostic codes for the
CAD-870 and the TDR-90 transponder. Note that
a. If necessary, select no 1 position on ATC 1/2 the presence of a diagnostic (or flag) code does not
select switch. necessarily indicate a fault. An out-of-tolerance
b. Turn on ATC control and set code to 1200. Ver- condition may exist that is caused by an atypical
ify on ramp tester that mode A output code is situation. The codes are a tool designed to display
1200 and reply annunciator is lit. conditions internal to the applicable units. The
c. Press ident button and verify ident on ramp CAD-870 installation section of this manual has an
tester. Ident timeout is approximately 25 sec- input/output circuit diagram for the CAD-870. This
onds. diagram may be useful in troubleshooting intercon-
d. Repeat steps a through c for no 2 transponder. nect problems.

Table 5-5. CAD-870 Self-Test Diagnostic Codes.
CODE INTERPRETATION
00 No faults found
01 No transponder reply
02 CAD-870 RAM failure
03 Not used
04 CAD-870 ROM failure
05-07 Not used
*08 Serial control port B failure
*10 Serial control port A failure
*This code results from loss of serial ATC and altitude data.
5.8 CAD-870G TRANSPONDER CONTROL f. Repeat steps a through e for the no 2 transpon-
ADAPTER, SYSTEM MAINTENANCE der.
5.8.1 Postinstallation Test 5.8.2 Diagnostic Display
The postinstallation checkout of the CAD-870G

Caution
consists of using the ARINC 429 ATC control source
to tune the TDR-90 transponder and, if installed, The diagnostic routines are intended as an
an ARINC-bused barometric altitude source to ver- extension of the self-test capability. The pi-
ify the aircraft altitude at the airport. If the aircraft lot should first observe any associated flag
is equipped with dual ATC controls and CAD- indications for proper self-test response. If
870G’s, set the ATC control DISABLE switch to the an improper response is observed, then the
no 2 position so that the no 1 CAD-870G can be cause may be verified in more detail using
checked first. A transponder ramp tester is re- the diagnostics.
quired for the following tests.
Table 5-6 is a list of the diagnostic codes for the
a. If necessary, select 1 position on ATC 1/2 select CAD-870G (CPN 622-7695-001 without SB 1) and
switch. the TDR-90 transponder. Table 5-7 is a list of the
b. Turn on ATC control and set code to 1200. Ver- diagnostic codes for the CAD-870G (CPN 622-7695-
ify on ramp test that mode A output code is 001 with SB 1 and -002) and the TDR-90. Note that
1200 and reply annunciator is lit. the presence of a diagnostic (or flag) code does not
c. Press ident button and verify ident on ramp necessarily indicate a fault. An out-of-tolerance
tester. Ident timeout is approximately 25 sec- condition may exist that is caused by an atypical
onds. situation. The codes are a tool designed to display
d. On ATC control, set ALT mode to on (mode C). conditions internal to the applicable units.
Verify that altitude readout on ramp tester is
approximately the same as airport altitude. The CAD-870G installation section of this manual
e. If a second altitude source is selectable on has an internal input/output circuit diagram for the
transponder, select second source and verify al- CAD-870G. This diagram may be useful in trouble-
titude readout on ramp tester. shooting interconnect problems.

Table 5-6. CAD-870G (CPN 622-7695-001 Without SB 1) 5.9.2 System Power-on and Performance Tests
Diagnostic Codes.
a. Make a visual inspection of the DME antenna.

CODE INTERPRETATION
Look for physical damage and loose mounting.
00 No faults found Clean off any oil or grease. (DME antennas
*01 No transponder reply should not be painted.)
02 CAD-870G RAM failure b. Turn power on to the DME and NAV systems;
04 CAD-870G ROM failure
**08 Serial data failure both sides if dual.
c. On left side CTL-32, select ON. Use the fre-
*This code will trip the CAD-870G fault monitor (P1-28) only
quency select knobs and select the frequency for
during self-test.
**This code results from loss of serial ATC or altitude data. any DME or VORTAC station that is within
range. For direct tuning, push the ACT button
first, then select the frequency. For indirect
Table 5-7. CAD-870G (CPN 622-7695-001 With SB 1 and
tuning, set the frequency desired into the lower
-002) Diagnostic Codes. (preset) window and then push XFR. This will
transfer the frequency to the upper window and
CODE INTERPRETATION tune the NAV and DME.
d. Read the distance to the station on the IND-
00 No faults found
*01 No transponder reply
42( ) Indicator. Read the station ID in the right
02 CAD-870G RAM failure side of the window.
04 CAD-870G ROM failure
08 ATC port B absent Note
10 ATC port A absent
02 Alt port B absent The DME can require at least 30 seconds,
04 Alt port A absent
08 Not used
and as much as 2 minutes, to properly de-
code the station ident.
*This code will trip the CAD-870G fault monitor (P1-28) only
during self-test. e. If the DME indicator is an IND-42C, skip to
step k.
f. If a second DME or VORTAC station is avail-
5.9 DME-42 DISTANCE MEASURING able and within range, select the frequency for
EQUIPMENT, SYSTEM MAINTENANCE it on the lower window.
g. Push CH on the IND-42A until annunciator 3 is
illuminated (if strap enabled), and read the dis-
5.9.1 Introduction
tance to that station on the left side and the
station ident on the right side.
The DME-42 system consists of the DME-42 trans- h. If the installation includes only a single CTL-32
ceiver, an IND-42A or IND-42C indicator, and the or if two CTL-32’s are installed but they are not
ANT-42 (or equivalent) antenna. In addition, at cross-coupled, skip to step k below.
least one CTL-32 control is needed, which is usually i. If a second (RH) CTL-32 is installed and if the
shared with the VIR-32 NAV receiver. For full 3- controls are cross-coupled, tune the RH upper
channel operation, two controls cross-connected are (active) display to any DME or VORTAC station
needed. frequency.
j. On the LH IND-42A, push CH to annunciate 2,
The DME-42 transceiver is a remote-mounted, select ID, and read the distance to this station.
lightweight unit specifically designed for general Read the station ident on the right side of the
aviation aircraft. It measures the slant range (line- IND-42A display.
of-sight) distance from the aircraft to a ground sta-
tion and displays that distance in nautical miles on Note
the companion IND-42( ) Indicator or HSI. In addi-
tion, the system computes the relative closure rate If, at any point in this procedure, the word
and time-to-station (TTS), and provides a decoded “dIAG” and a diagnostic code are displayed
station identifier. on the IND-42( ), skip to step q.

k. On the CTL-32, push TEST. q. If any one of the diagnostic codes in Table 5-8 is
l. Initially the IND-42( ) display modulates in in- displayed, remove the appropriate system com-
tensity between max and min brightness. ponent or both units for bench analysis.
m. LH display on IND-42( ) shows a test distance
of 100 (nmi). After about 10 seconds, the RH
display shows an “AOK.” Listen to DME audio Note
and note that audio is a Morse code A O K.
n. Push SEL to annunciate KT and read 100 This completes the DME on-aircraft main-
(knots) in RH window. tenance procedures. Most of the results of
o. Push SEL again to annunciate MIN and read these procedures will be observable again
60 (minutes) on right side of the window. as part of the NAV function test below.
p. Push SEL again to annunciate ID again.
Note
If the 10-second self-test expires before

reaching this point, select TST again and
continue with the test.
Table 5-8. DME-42/DME-442/IND-42( ) Diagnostics.
DME-42/442 DIAGNOSTICS IND-42A/C DIAGNOSTICS
DME-42 CODE DME-442 CODE DESCRIPTION CODE DESCRIPTION
01 *01 Power supply 90 Bus failure (no data)

02 *02 Synthesizer 91 TEST mode fail (no response)
03 03 Transmitter 92 Distance word missing
04 04 Video processor 93 VEL, TTS word missing
05 05 Receiver 94 IDENT word missing
06 06 Distance processor 95 Microprocessor RAM
07 *07 Microprocessor ROM 96 Microprocessor ROM
08 *08 Microprocessor RAM
*09 Input Control
**09 Input port B
**10 Input port B
*These codes trip the fault monitor output (J1-10).

**On later production units.
5.10 DME-442 DISTANCE MEASURING The DME-442 transceiver is a remote-mounted,

EQUIPMENT, SYSTEM MAINTENANCE lightweight unit specifically designed for general
aviation aircraft. It measures the slant range (line-
5.10.1 Introduction of-sight) distance from the aircraft to a ground sta-
tion and displays the distance in nautical miles on
The DME-442 system consists of the DME-442 the companion IND-42( ) indicator or HSI. In addi-
transceiver, an IND-42( ) indicator, control(s), and tion, the system computes the relative closure rate
the ANT-42 (or equivalent) antenna. For full 3- and time-to-station (TTS), and provides a decoded
channel operation, two controls cross-connected are station identifier.
needed.

5.10.2 System Power-on and Performance m. LH display on the IND-42( ) shows a test dis-
Tests tance of 100 (nmi). After about 10 seconds, the
RH display shows an “AOK”. Listen to the DME
a. Make a visual inspection of the DME antenna. audio and note that audio is a Morse code A O
Look for physical damage and loose mounting. K.
Clean off any oil or grease. (DME antennas n. Push SEL to annunciate KT and read 100
should not be painted.) (knots) in the RH window.
b. Turn power on to the DME and NAV systems, o. Push SEL again to annunciate MIN and read
both sides if dual. 60 (minutes) in RH window.
c. On left side control select ON. Use the fre- p. Push SEL again to annunciate ID again.
quency select knobs and select an active fre-
quency for any DME or VORTAC station that is Note
within range.
d. Distance to the station should be displayed on If the 10-second self-test expires before
the IND-42( ) indicator LH display, and station reaching this point, select self-test again
IDENT in the RH window. and continue with the test.
Note q. If any one of the diagnostic codes in Table 5-8 is

displayed, remove the appropriate system com-
The DME can require at least 30 seconds, ponent or both units for bench analysis.
and as much as 2 minutes to properly de-
code the station ident. Note
e. If using a CTL-32 control and an IND-42A indi- Not all controls are capable of displaying
cator, then continue with step f; otherwise, ad- diagnostic codes. Therefore, lack of a diag-
vance to step k. nostic code does not necessarily indicate
f. If a second DME or VORTAC station is avail- proper operation.
able and within range, select the frequency for
it on the lower window of the left side CTL-32. Note
g. Push CH on the IND-42A until annunciator 3 is
illuminated (if strap enabled) and read the dis- This completes the DME on-aircraft main-
tance to that station on the LH window and the tenance procedures. Most of the results of
station ident on the RH window. these procedures will be observable again
h. If the installation includes only a single control, as part of the NAV function (paragraph
or two controls that are not cross-coupled, skip 5.19, VIR-32 NAVIGATION RECEIVER,
to step k. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE).
i. If a second (RH) control is installed and if the
controls are cross-coupled, tune the RH upper 5.11 GPS-4000 GLOBAL POSITIONING
(active) display to any DME or VORTAC station SENSOR, SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
frequency.
Refer to GPS-4000 installation section of this man-
j. On the left side IND-42A, push CH to annunci-
ual.
ate 2 and select ID. The distance to this station
should be displayed in the LH window with the
5.12 MND-640( ) MULTISENSOR
station ident in the RH window.
NAVIGATION DISPLAY, SYSTEM
Note MAINTENANCE
If at any point in this procedure, the word 5.12.1 Introduction

“dIAG” and a diagnostic code are displayed
on the IND-42( ), skip to step q. This section provides procedures for testing and
troubleshooting the MND-640( ) Multisensor Navi-
k. Start the self-test. gation Display System. The test procedures provide
l. Initially the IND-42( ) display modulates in inten- fault isolation down to a unit while the system is
sity between maximum and minimum brightness. installed in the aircraft. Faulty units can then be

tested and repaired by using the bench procedures a. Clean dust and light fingerprints from the crt
given in the associated unit instruction books. face as follows. Wipe the crt face with a
nonabrasive, lint-free lens tissue that is avail-
5.12.2 Maintenance Schedule able in most photographic stores.
b. Remove oily fingerprints or any residue from
On condition. No periodic maintenance is required the crt face as follows. Apply glass cleaner to
on MND-640( ) units. Units should not be removed the lens tissue (or to the soft cloth); do not ap-
from the aircraft unless repair is required. ply the liquid directly to the crt. This prevents
the liquid from running between the filter and
5.12.2.1 Routine CRT Cleaning bezel. Use several layers of the tissue as neces-
sary for strength. Rub the wet tissue around
The MND-640( ) system contains panel-mounted the display face to remove any residue or fin-
units which have glass crt displays. These displays gerprints. After the display face is clean, use a
should be routinely cleaned. Use the cleaning mate- clean, dry tissue to remove excess liquid and
rials (or equivalent substitutes) as follows: any streaks.
Window-glass cleaner or warm water with a mild
soap Caution
Lens tissue or a soft, low-lint cloth
Do not store or place the SDU-640( ) on
metal surfaces within the proximity of a
Caution strong magnetic field because the crt dis-
play can be altered.
Do not use solvent to clean the optic filter
(face) of the crt. The glass is coated with an
antireflective coating that may be damaged 5.12.3 Diagnostic Information
by the solvent.
The SDD software includes internal diagnostic
Caution testing to ease troubleshooting of the equipment.
Diagnostic fault information is available in diag-
Use care at all times when cleaning the crt nostic word ARINC label 350. All fault data pro-
to prevent damage to the antireflective vided by the SDD is available only in the diagnostic
coating. Make sure that the cleaning tissue word. All failure and integrity bits latch in the
is flat and not creased when used. Doing failed or bad state. They remain in the failed state
this reduces pressure points that could until reset by a power interrupt. All fault data is
cause streaking or damage to the crt filter lost whenever power is removed from the unit. Re-
coating. fer to Table 5-9 for SDD-640( ) output maintenance
word label 350. Maintenance word label 350 is out-
Make sure that the cleaning cloth (if used) put at 2 Hz. If no failure conditions are detected,
is soft and practically lint free. Some cloth the maintenance words are output zero filled with a
materials could damage the crt filter coat- normal sign/status matrix (SSM). The words can
ing. only be read using a 429 bus reader.
Table 5-9. SDD-640( ) Maintenance Word — Octal 350.
BYTE BIT DEFINITION
0 1 Label = 1 (LSB)
2 Label = 1
3 Label = 1
4 Label = 0
5 Label = 1
6 Label = 0
7 Label = 0
8 Label = 0 (MSB)

Table 5-9. SDD-640( ) Maintenance Word — Octal 350.
BYTE BIT DEFINITION
1 9 *Source destination identifier (SDI) (unit ID)

10 *Source destination identifier (SDI) (unit ID)
11 1 = MSL bus fail
12 1 = VOR bus fail
13 1 = VLF/ATC bus fail
14 1 = IAPS FMS/VHF bus fail
15 1 = DME bus fail
16 1 = ADF bus fail
2 17 1 = ROM fail
18 1 = Processor RAM fail
19 1 = RAM fail (2K × 8)
20 1 = Cross data fail
21 1 = MUS fail
22 1 = AHRS UART fail
23 1 = SDU fail
24 0 = Pad
3 25 1 = BURST TUNE bus fail
26 1 = TACAN bus fail
27 1 = AHRS bus fail
28 1 = FMS (LRN) UART fail
29 1 = FMS (LRN) bus fail
30 **Sign/status matrix (SSM)
31 **Sign/status matrix (SSM)
32 Parity (odd)
*Source/destination identifier (SDI) (unit ID) bits are given below.

BIT 10 BIT 9 UNIT ID
0 0 Not used
0 1 Side 1 (left)
1 0 Side 2 (right)
1 1 Not used
**Sign/status matrix (SSM) bits are given below.
BIT 31 BIT 30 UNIT ID
0 0 Failure detected
0 1 Not used
1 0 Functional test
1 1 Normal
5.13 RTU-42X0 RADIO TUNING UNIT AND Transponder Ramp Test Set. If equivalent equip-
AIU-4000 AUDIO INTERFACE UNIT, ment is being used, the procedures must be adapted
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE accordingly.
Refer to the RTU-42X0 and AIU-4000 installation

5.14.2 Self-Test
section of this manual.
5.14 TDR-90 TRANSPONDER EQUIPMENT, a. Energize the TDR-90 system by turning on the
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE necessary aircraft circuit breakers and selecting
STBY on the CTL-92. In dual control installa-
5.14.1 Introduction tions, set the 1 / 2 select switch to 1.
b. Allow about 60 seconds for transponder warm-
The procedures below require the use of an ATC up.
Transponder Ramp Test Set and are formulated ac- c. Select ON and push TEST on the CTL-92 and
cording to the operation of the Collins 476X-3 observe that the TX annunciator illuminates

and remains on for about 1 second after release b. Disconnect 476X-3 T/R DIRECT connector P504
of the TEST button. from rf connector J503. Connect antenna con-
d. On dual system, select 2 and repeat step c with nector P503 to rf connector J503.
the same result. c. Locate the 476X-3 in relation to the aircraft and
set the T/R ATTEN control as determined in
5.14.3 CTL-92 ATC Control (622-6523-001 the 476X-3 instruction book.
Note
When the CTL-92 is used with the CAD-62 to con-
trol the TDR-90 system, certain diagnostic codes Ensure that the open top cover (containing
can be displayed in the self-test mode. If an out-of- the antenna) is facing the aircraft antenna.
tolerance condition is detected during self-test, the
upper window displays the word “dIAG” while the d. Set the 476X-3 CODE selector switch to any
lower window displays the 2-digit diagnostic code. code other than emergency codes (7777, 7700,
Refer to Table 5-10 for a list of self-test diagnostic 7600, 7500, or any other designated emergency
codes. (The TEST button must be pushed before codes).
any diagnostic code can be displayed.) e. Set the CTL-92 code selector to the same code.
f. The MODE A flag appears on the 476X-3 indi-
cating that the TDR-90 has replied with the
Table 5-10. TDR-90 Diagnostic Codes When Using a CAD-62. correct code.
CODE INTERPRETATION Note
00 No faults If aircraft does not have a source of digit-

02 RAM test failed (test failed at power-up)
ized altitude information, skip steps j
through l and proceed with step m.
03 No serial sync block received
g. Set the CTL-92 to ALT and the 476X-3 CODE
04 No serial data block received for more than 2 selector to the code corresponding to field eleva-
seconds
tion. (Use the calculator supplied with the
05 ADF label received in first block* 476X-3 to convert from altitude to code.)
h. Set the 476X-3 MODE selector to mode C. Ob-
06 I/O port 1 failure serve that the MODE C and CODE flags ap-
07 I/O port 2 failure
pear.
i. Set the CTL-92 to ON. The 476X-3 CODE flag
08 Transponder source ID changed from last frame should disappear.
j. Set the 476X-3 MODE selector to mode A and
09 Serial input failed or stuck low the code selector to the complement of the test
10 No reply lamp in self-test code on the 476X-3.
*Occurrence of this code is extremely unlikely when used Note

with a CAD-62. It implies receipt of the incorrect code label
with correct tuning information. This is more likely to occur
when using a tuning source which is capable of tuning both
To find the complement of the test code,
the ADF and the transponder. subtract the test code from 7777.
k. The 476X-3 CODE flag should appear.

l. Momentarily push the IDENT button on the
5.14.4 Test Procedures Using the 476X-3 CTL-92. Both the CODE and IDENT flags
Transponder Ramp Test Set should blink for about 15 to 30 seconds.
m. If the correct results are obtained in the previ-
a. Perform the preoperational check as described ous steps, the system is operating properly. If
in the 476X-3 ATC Transponder Ramp Test Set incorrect results are obtained, the test set
Instruction Book (Collins part number 523- should be directly connected to the TDR-90 an-
0783700). tenna connector and the test repeated. If the

test is successfully completed with this setup, lecting STBY on the CTL-92. In dual control in-
the fault can be attributed to either a weak stallations, set the 1 / 2 select switch to 1.
transmitter or a defective antenna or antenna b. Select ON and push TEST on the CTL-92.
cable. If the test is not successful with this c. If any of the diagnostic codes in Table 5-11 are
setup, the fault is most likely in the transpon- displayed, remove the appropriate unit for
der and it should be removed for bench analy- bench fault analysis.
sis. d. On dual system, select 2 and repeat step b with
the same result.
5.15 TDR-94/94D MODE S TRANSPONDER
5.15.2.1 Diagnostic Display
EQUIPMENT, SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Caution
5.15.1 Introduction
The procedures below require the use of an ATC extension of the self-test capability. The pi-
Transponder Ramp Test Set and are formulated ac- lot should first observe the indicators and
cording to the operation of the IFR ATC-601 Mode associated units for the proper self-test re-
S Transponder Ramp Test Set. If equivalent sponses. If a problem exists, then the prob-
equipment is being used, the procedures must be lem may be verified in more detail by the
adapted accordingly. diagnostics.
5.15.2 Self-Test An extensive self-test diagnostic routine can be

started in the TDR-94( ) by pushing the TEST but-
a. Energize the TDR-94/94D system by turning on ton on the CTL-92/92A Transponder control. Refer
the necessary aircraft circuit breakers and se- to Table 5-11 for list of diagnostic codes.
Table 5-11. TDR-94/94D CSDB Diagnostic Codes.
DIAGNOSTIC DESCRIPTION STATUS SUSPECT

CODE LRU
STBY F/W (1)
00 No fault found
10 Power supply diagnostics No No TDR

11 +5 V dc Yes Yes TDR
12 +70 V dc No No TDR
13 +35 V dc No No TDR
14 LVPS No No TDR
20 Transmitter/modulator diagnostics No No TDR

21 Final stage, overcurrent Yes Yes TDR
22 Top antenna low power output No No TDR
23 Bottom antenna low power output No No TDR
24 Transmitter overtemperature No No TDR
30 Synthesizer diagnostics No No TDR

31 Synthesizer lock detect No No TDR
32 Synthesizer low power detect No No TDR
40 Receiver/IF diagnostics No No TDR

41 (3) Top receiver channel No No TDR
42 (3) Bottom receiver channel No No TDR
43 Top DPSK demodulator No No TDR
44 Bottom DPSK demodulator No No TDR


CODE LRU
STBY F/W (1)
50 Program memory (ROM) diagnostics Yes Yes TDR

51 High-byte ROM Yes Yes TDR
52 Low-byte ROM Yes Yes TDR
53 Both ROM chips Yes Yes TDR
60 Volatile memory (RAM) diagnostics Yes Yes TDR

61 High-byte RAM Yes Yes TDR
62 Low-byte RAM Yes Yes TDR
63 Both RAM chips Yes Yes TDR
64 Cache RAM Yes Yes TDR
65 Cache RAM and high-byte RAM Yes Yes TDR
66 Cache RAM and low-byte RAM Yes Yes TDR
67 Cache RAM and both RAM chips Yes Yes TDR
68 Dual port RAM Yes Yes TDR
70 Nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) diagnostics No No TDR
80 Serial input control bus diagnostics Yes No CTL/TDR

81 ARINC 429 control UART Yes No TDR
82 ARINC 429 control port A inactive Yes No CTL
83 ARINC 429 control port B inactive Yes No CTL
84 ARINC 429 control port C inactive Yes No CTL
85 CSDB control input port A inactive Yes No CTL
90 Serial altitude input diagnostics No No ALT/TDR

91 ARINC 429/575 Altitude UART No No TDR
92 ARINC 429/575 input port A inactive No No ALT
93 ARINC 429/575 input port B inactive No No ALT
94 CSDB altitude input port A inactive No No ALT
95 CSDB altitude input port B inactive No No ALT
99 No data received from TDR-94/94D (2) (2) CLT/TDR
A0 ADLP communication diagnostics No No ADLP/TDR

A1 ADLP comm A/B UART No No TDR
A2 ADLP comm A/B bus inactive No No ADLP
A3 ADLP comm C/D UART No No TDR
A4 ADLP comm C/D bus inactive No No ADLP
b0 TCAS communication diagnostics No No TCAS/TDR

b1 TCAS UART No No TDR
b2 TCAS system failure No No TCAS
b3 TCAS bus inactive No No TCAS
b4 (3) TCAS protocol error No No TCAS/TDR
C0 Squitter diagnostics No Yes TDR

C1 (TDR-94D only) Top channel squitter No Yes TDR
C2 (TDR-94D only) Bottom channel squitter No Yes TDR
D0 (TDR-94D only) Diversity diagnostic No Yes TDR
E0 Message processor diagnostics No No TDR

E1 (TDR-94D only) Top channel message processor, soft failure No No TDR
E2 Bottom channel message processor, soft failure No No TDR
E3 Top channel hard message processor, hard failure Yes Yes TDR
E4 Bottom channel hard message processor, hard failure Yes Yes TDR


CODE LRU
STBY F/W (1)
F0 Configuration diagnostics No No WIRING

F1 Mode S discrete address changed No No WIRING
F2 TCAS selection changed No No WIRING
F3 Altitude units selection changed No No WIRING
F4 Max airspeed program selects changed No No WIRING
F5 Port selects changed No No WIRING
F6 SDI selects changed No No WIRING
F7 Single antenna selection changed No No WIRING
F8 ADLP selection changed No No WIRING
F9-FE (Not assigned)
FF Unacceptable Mode S address selected Yes Yes WIRING
(all address lines identical)
Notes
(1) F/W (Fail/Warn) refers to:

a. TDR-94/94D fault monitor discrete output, P1-31, set to high level,
b. TDR-94/94D CSDB data word label 1F, byte-1, bit-7 set to logic 0, and
c. TDR-94/94D ARINC 429 SSM and other data bits related to diagnostics set to the appropriate fault level.
(2) Fault code 99 is generated by the CTL-92T and indicates the CTL-92T is not receiving data from the selected
TDR-94/94D.
(3) These diagnostic codes can appear on an intermittent basis and not indicate an actual failure. Consider these
codes to indicate a failure only if reported on a continual basis.
5.15.3 Ramp Tester Selection and Use check the manual to be sure it provides adequate
protection. Be sure that the injected level is not
The IFR ATC-601 was used in the development of greater than -20 dBm.
the procedures in this manual. It is possible that
other instruments, i.e., instruments provided by Most transponder ramp test sets allow operation
other manufacturers, have comparably and accept- inside a hanger. Be aware, however, that the glossy
able features. You should feel free to use your (and often painted) floor surfaces found in most
choice of instruments. However, be sure that it is hangers can result in substantial signal reflection.
capable of testing the transponder operating items This can have an effect on power output and re-
listed at the end of this paragraph. ceiver sensitivity tests. Moving the sense antenna
above or below the transponder antenna usually
Most transponder ramp testers can be used in direct- produces different results and demonstrates the ef-
connect or broadcast operating modes. At times both fect of signal reflection. It is for this reason that you
methods are useful in isolating a transponder mal- should try a few different sense antenna heights,
function between the antenna/antenna cables and distances, and airplane parking locations to gain a
the transponder unit. For example, if in the broad- basis for test result interpretation and evaluation.
cast method the test shows a low power output or Be guided by the antenna placement requirements
low sensitivity. Switching to the direct-connection of the test set manufacturer.
method can effectively isolate the problem to the
transmitter/receiver or the antenna system.
Locate the ramp tester sense antenna at the proper
distance from the airplane transponder antenna.
If you use the direct connection method and you are
The best distance and height may be specified by
using a test set other than the IFR ATC-601, be
the manufacturer.
sure it has the proper attenuation in the RF link to
prevent damage to the transponder receiver. The
IFR ATC-601 has the proper attenuation built into Mode S diversity transponder installations may re-
its rf port. If another type of tester is being used, quire shielding of one antenna for diversity testing.

An RF opaque boot of nearly any design is accept- 14. Mode S, UF16.

able for this purpose. It should fit completely over 15. Mode S, UF20.
the antenna and provide good base grounding. An 16. Mode S, UF21.
adhesive base may be best for easy installation and 17. Diversity isolation (TDR-94D, operating with
removal. dual antennas only).
18. Transponder squitter.
The IFR ATC-601 features a special automatic test 19. Mode S Address.
sequence that significantly reduces the time re-
quired for the test. Using the automatic sequence or Note
an equivalent manual sequence is largely a matter
of personal choice. However, if a particular test fails Passage of tests for UF16, UF20 and UF21
in the automatic sequence, it might be advisable to depend upon the datalink capabilities of the
repeat that test manually to help in isolating the installation. For installations without these
fault. Follow the test set operating procedures as datalink capabilities, failure of these tests
provided. can be ignored.
At least the following transponder operating items 5.15.4 Transponder System Ground Test
should be tested. The order is not critical: Enable
1. Mode A response. Some transponder installations use a weight-on-

2. Mode C response with altitude if available. wheels transponder inhibit mechanism to prevent
3. Mode S all-call response. response to interrogations while the airplane is on
4. ATCRBS-Only All-Call response. the ground. It is necessary to disable this inhibit
5. Transmitter frequency. feature for testing. This is unique to each airplane,
6. Transponder power output. therefore you must consult the airplane manual for
7. Receiver sensitivity. the necessary instructions.
8. SLS (side lobe suppression). This involves
changing the P2 pulse amplitude with respect It may also be necessary to condition the altitude
to the P1/P3 pulses and testing the transpon- data system for test purposes.
der’s response.
9. SPR on/off. 5.15.5 Flightline Test Procedures
10. Mode S, UF0 (uplink format 0).
11. Mode S, UF4. Transponder system testing procedures, for use on
12. Mode S, UF5. the flightline, are shown in Table 5-12. These pro-
13. Mode S, UF11. cedures will verify that the system is functional.
Table 5-12. Transponder System, Flightline Test Procedures.
TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULT TROUBLESHOOTING

INSTRUCTIONS
1.0 Setup: Prepare the airplane and transponder system for testing as required. As a minimum
this will require:
• Set altimeter system(s) for a test altitude (consult airplane manual for necessary
procedures) especially as may be required for TCAS if used.
• Setup IFR ATC-601 Ramp Tester and perform the necessary preliminary tests for
it.
• If the broadcast method of testing will be used with the ATC-601 (or equivalent)
ramp tester and the installation consists of a TDR-94D diversity transponder in-
stall an rf boot over the top antenna. If the direct connection is being used, dis-
connect both antenna cables from the transponder mount, connect the ATC-601
to the lower antenna connector and install an rf load on the upper connector.
Note: If the transponder installation makes the direct connection method quite diffi-
cult, the broadcast method should be seen as preferred unless initial tests suggest an
advantage in favor of direct connection.


INSTRUCTIONS
2.0 Inspection: Before applying power to the transponder system, make a visual inspection of the
transponder antenna(s), ATC control, and the r/t. Be sure the r/t is firmly seated in
its mount and there are no obvious signs of a dysfunctional installation. If it is possi-
ble, check the antenna cable connections on the back of the transponder for tightness
and the wire harness for obvious signs of broken wires or dislodged connector pins.
3.0 Power application: Normal operation: If the broadcast method of testing is

Apply power to the transponder In the case of the IFR ATC-601, the IN- being used with the ATC-601, avoid
system. Enter an appropriate TERR and REPLY indicators should both use of an emergency ident code
code into the control and set for be lit. (consult the airplane manual if you are
normal operation. unsure). If the INTERR lamp does not
If the installation is equipped with a CTL- light, the ramp tester is not function-
92/92A -2XX control, “dIAG” may be dis- ing properly. If the REPLY lamp does
played in the lower window if a diagnostic not light, the transponder is not re-
is detected. It is necessary, then, to press sponding. Check for possible ground
TEST to display the diagnostic code. operation inhibits.
4.0 Self Test: If the installation uses an ATC control See Table 5-11 for an interpretation of
Press the ATC TEST button on head other than the CTL-92/92A or RTU- the diagnostic code.
the ATC control. 870A/T, you may need to consult the air-
Note: The installation may fea- plane manual to determine where the ATC
ture a remote ATC TEST button self test results are displayed and in what
in which case use it instead. format any diagnostics are disclosed.
Test results should not show any diagnos-
tic codes. In the case of the CTL-92/92A,
the diagnostics are displayed on the con-
trol.
A normal indication on the CTL-92/92A is:

• The active code display intensity modulates from minimum to maximum.
• On all CTL-92/92A controls:
• “AL” is displayed in the upper window and the altitude in thousands of feet in
100-foot increments is displayed in the lower window.
• If a diagnostic condition is detected, the upper window shows “dIAG” and
the two-digit diagnostic code is displayed in the lower window. Refer to Table
5-11 for a listing of the codes.
5.0 Auto Test: All AUTO TEST items should indicate Successful completion of tests verifying
Select AUTO TEST on the IFR PASSED. This test takes about 30 seconds these items, and no other indication of
ATC-601 and press RUN. to complete. failure (like pilot or ATC complaints),
Note: It is possible that tests for UF16, indicates a functional transponder.
UF20 and UF21 indicate FAILED. These
items are a function of datalink capabili- Otherwise, a failure of any one or more
ties and may not be implemented in which of the items, may indicate a perform-
case you can ignore this failure indication. ance problem. In this case, consider
removing the transponder for addi-
tional analysis and repair on the
bench.
6.0 Opposite antenna test: The test results should be approximately If there is a substantial difference in
If the direct connection method equivalent between the two antenna tests. receiver sensitivity and/or power out-
is being used, switch the test set put, it may be caused by a faulty an-
cable to the other antenna port. tenna, antenna cable, or connector in-
If the broadcast method is being stallation. In this case, inspection and
used, move the rf boot to the top repair of the antennas, cables, or cable
(or opposite) antenna connector connectors is needed.
and repeat the test.


INSTRUCTIONS
7.0 Equipment removal and restora- Restore all equipment to its normal ground operating configuration. Return the test
tion: set to its normal storage location. Careful handling and storage of all ramp test
equipment prolongs the service life and reduces maintenance costs.
5.16 VHF-21( )/22( ) VHF COMM Table 5-13. VHF-21( )/22( ) Diagnostic Codes.
TRANSCEIVER, SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE CODE INTERPRETATION
00 No fault found
5.16.1 Introduction
01 5 V dc below limit
The VHF-21( ) is delivered from the factory with an 02 5 V dc above limit
internal strap disabling the receiver audio com- 03 12 V dc below limit
pressor for direct interchangeability with the VHF-
20( ). If this is not desired, the strap must be re- 04 12 V dc above limit
moved. A similar option is available on the VHF- 05 Synthesizer not locked
22( ), but in this case it is a strap on the rear con- 07 Noise squelch open without signal
nector; a strap to ground disables the compression.
08 Noise squelch not open with signal
5.16.2 Transceiver Self-Test 12 BCD frequency code invalid

13 2/5 frequency code invalid
a. Apply power to the VHF-21( )/22( ) by turning
14 Serial message invalid
on the aircraft circuit breakers and the remote
on/off switch (if used). 15 Frequency out of range
b. Check the squelch disable circuit by setting the 16 Forward power below limit
CTL-22 mode switch to SQ OFF. Noise should 17 Transmitter temperature excessive
be evident in the aircraft audio system.
c. Select ON and note that the noise level is re- 21 Tuning voltage out of limit at highest receive
frequency
duced.
d. Push the TEST button on the CTL-22 and note 22 Tuning voltage out of limit at 118 MHz
the following test results: 23 Local oscillator output below limit
1. Display modulates between max and min 24 No-signal AGC voltage too high
brightness.
2. Several audio tones are heard in the audio 25 Inadequate AGC voltage increase with rf signal
system. 26 Excessive reflected rf power
3. Dashes are displayed in the upper window 27 Transmitter timed out
and 00 in the lower window, indicating no
out-of-tolerance condition was found. If an
out-of-tolerance condition is detected, the
letter “dIAG” will appear in the upper win-
dow and one of the diagnostic codes from
Table 5-13 will appear in the lower window.

5.16.3 Transceiver Operational Test Table 5-14. VHF-422( ) Self-Test Diagnostic Codes.
a. On the CTL-22, select the operating frequency FAULT INTERPRETATION

for any active station in the immediate area. 00 No fault found
b. Push the PTT button and obtain a comm check
01 5 V dc below limit
with the active station.
02 5 V dc above limit
c. Repeat steps a and b for a number of other sta-
tions if possible. 03 12 V dc below limit
04 12 V dc above limit
5.17 VHF-422( ) VHF COMM TRANSCEIVER, 05 Synthesizer not locked
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE 07 Noise squelch open without signal
08 Noise squelch not open with signal
5.17.1 Introduction
12 BCD frequency code invalid
14 CSDB message invalid
The VHF-422A covers the frequency range from
118.000 through 136.975 MHz (an internal strap 15 Frequency out of range
allows restriction to 135.975 MHz). The frequency 16 Forward power below limit
range for the VHF-442B is 118.000 to 151.975 MHz. 17 Transmitter temperature excessive
The VHF-422( ) can be controlled from a CSDB or 21 Tuning voltage out of limit at highest re-
ARINC 429 control head. ceiver frequency
22 Tuning voltage out of limit at 118 MHz
5.17.2 Transceiver Self-Test 23 Local oscillator output below limit
24 No-signal AGC voltage below limit
a. Apply power to the VHF-422( ) by turning on
25 Inadequate AGC voltage increase with RF
the aircraft circuit breakers and the remote signal
on/off switch (if applicable).
26 Reflected RF power above limit
b. Check the squelch disable circuit (select SQ
27 Transmitter timed out
OFF on the CTL-22). Noise should be evident in
the aircraft audio system. Codes 98 and 99 have been changed depending on the service
c. Enable the squelch circuit (select ON the CTL- bulletin performed on the VHF-422( ).
22). The noise level should be reduced. *98 (-00X) Not used
d. Enable the self-test. Several audio tones should *98 (-10X) No ARINC input data on port B within 3
be heard in the audio system. seconds
**98 (-00X) No ARINC input data on port A within 3
5.17.3 VHF-422 With CTL-22 Diagnostic Codes seconds
**98 (-10X) No ARINC input data on port B within 3
Push the self-test button on the CTL-22 and if no seconds
fault is found, four dashes will appear in the upper ***98 No ARINC input data on port A within 3
display and 00 will appear in the lower display. If a seconds
fault is detected, the letters “dIAG” will appear in *99 (-00X) No ARINC input data within 3 seconds
the upper display and one of the diagnostic codes *99 (-10X) No ARINC input data on port A within 3
from Table 5-14 will appear in the lower display. seconds
There are three codes that represent faults external **99 (-00X) No ARINC input data on port B within 3
to the transceiver. Code 26 indicates “excessive re- seconds
flected power.” Check the antenna, connectors, and **99 (-10X) No ARINC input data on port A within 3
coax. Code 27 indicates “transmitter timed out.” seconds
This means there is a stuck push to talk switch or ***99 No ARINC input data on port B within 3
shorted key line in the system. Code 17 indicates seconds
“transmitter temperature excessive.” If this condi- *On units without SB 4 and 8
tion is the result of heavy transmitter usage, letting **On units with SB 4 and without SB 8
the transmitter cool for a few minutes will clear the ***On units with SB 8
problem. If a fault code other than those just de-
scribed is displayed, replace the VHF-422( ).

5.17.4 Transmitter Operational Test of the procedures will stimulate reaction in the
DME-42. Therefore, familiarity with the results ex-
a. Using the comm control, select the operating pected of the DME can save considerable time.
frequency for any station in the immediate
area.
5.18.2 Receiver Self-Test
b. Push the push to talk (ptt) button and obtain a
comm check with the active station.
c. If no answer or reported garbled, check the mi- a. Apply power to the aircraft. Ensure all circuit
crophone used. If the mic checks ok, then check breakers associated with the VIR-32 are pushed
the VHF-422( ). in.
b. If a flag condition existed prior to actuating
5.18 VIR-32 NAVIGATION RECEIVER, self-test, the CTL-32 will display the diagnostic
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE code associated with the flag for approximately
2 seconds immediately after self-test is selected.
5.18.1 Introduction If an out-of-tolerance condition is detected in
self-test mode, that associated diagnostic code
This procedure is concerned primarily with the will also be displayed by the CTL-32.
VIR-32 NAV Receiver with the results read from c. A partial list of diagnostic codes is provided in
the associated display devices, RMI, BDI, HSI. Be- Table 5-15. The codes are listed according to
cause the DME-42 shares the CTL-32 control, many level of priority (highest priority first).
Table 5-15. VIR-32 Diagnostic Codes.
CODE DESCRIPTION DISPOSITION
ALL MODES
00 No fault found
02 RAM test failed Unit unusable (µP problem)
03 No serial data to unit Unit unusable (CTL problem)
04 No serial freq word Unit unusable (CTL problem)
05 Invalid NAV freq CTL may be tuned to DME channel
06 Microprocessor fault Unit unusable
11 A/D fault Unit unusable
12 A/D failed accuracy test Unit unusable
13 +13-V dc power supply fault Unit unusable
14 -13-V dc power supply fault Unit unusable
15 VOR sin ±/LOC D/A fault VOR/LOC unusable
16 VOR cos ±/GS D/A fault VOR/GS unusable
VOR MODE ONLY
17 VOR smo unlocked VOR receiver inoperative

18 VOR AFC not locked VOR unusable (no rf signal)
19 Low 30-Hz reference signal VOR unusable
20 Low 30-Hz variable signal VOR unusable
21 400-Hz pwr supply unusable VOR OBI and OBS unusable
22 OBI sin out of tolerance VOR OBI and OBS unusable

Table 5-15. VIR-32 Diagnostic Codes.
VOR MODE ONLY (Cont)
23 OBI cos out of tolerance VOR OBI and OBS unusable

24 OBS return out of tolerance VOR OBS unusable
ILS MODE ONLY
25 LOC smo unlocked LOC receiver inoperative

26 LOC signal level low LOC unusable
27 LOC dev out of tolerance LOC dev unreliable
28 GS smo unlocked GS receiver inoperative
29 GS signal too low GS unusable
30 GS dev out of tolerance GS dev unreliable
ALL MODES
32 Marker beacon fault Observe marker lamps for fault.
5.18.3 VOR Self-Test Note
a. Select a VOR frequency on the control unit (a An interconnect strapping option allows an
specific frequency is not required for test). A “up-left” indication to be obtained during
strong station on frequency will not interfere ILS self-test instead of the “down-right” in-
with the self-test. Rotate the OBS to approxi- dication. Some installations may have a
mately 0 degree. switch installed in place of the strap thus
b. Actuate self-test on the control unit. allowing both “up-left” and “down-right” in-
c. The NAV flag will come into view. dications to be selected.
d. After approximately 3 seconds, the flag will go
out of view, the EHSI or HSI lateral deviation e. If after 15 seconds the self-test remains actu-
bar will approximately center, and a TO indica- ated, the NAV and GS flags will reappear and
tion will appear. The RMI pointers connected to after approximately 3 seconds, the VIR-32 will
the VIR-32 will indicate approximately 0- return to normal operation.
degree magnetic bearing.
e. If after approximately 15 seconds the self-test 5.18.5 Marker Beacon
remains actuated, the NAV flag will reappear
and after approximately 3 seconds, the VIR-32 The marker beacon assembly is tested automati-
will return to normal operation. cally when the self-test is actuated and either a
VOR or localizer frequency is selected. Proper op-
5.18.4 ILS (Localizer and Glideslope) eration of the marker beacon assembly is indicated
by all three marker lights flickering at a 30-Hz
a. Select a localizer frequency on the control unit rate. A 30-Hz tone will also be present in the
(a specific frequency is not required for test). marker audio output.
b. Actuate self-test on the control unit (may be a
rotary knob or a TEST button). 5.18.6 Ground Check
c. The NAV and GS flags will come into view.
d. After approximately 3 seconds, the flags will go 5.18.6.1 Procedure Using Ramp Test Set
out of view, the EHSI or HSI lateral deviation
bar will deflect right approximately 2/3 of full- This performance check tests the complete VIR-32
scale and the glideslope pointer will deflect installation from the antennas to the indicators. A
down approximately 2/3 of full-scale. ramp test set such as the Collins 972Q-4 is re-

quired. Operating instructions using the 972Q-4 5.18.6.1.3 Localizer Check

(marker beacon, glideslope, localizer, and VOR
checks) are provided below. a. Select the proper operating frequency by set-
ting the 334.7-108.1/334.55-108.15 switch to the
desired position.
5.18.6.1.1 Marker Beacon Check b. Set LEFT/OC/RIGHT switch to OC position.
c. Set both ATTEN control to 0 (zero).
d. Set PWR switch to ON.
a. Set PWR switch to ON.
e. On-course indications should be given by the
b. Push the blue (400-Hz) switch for an outer
aircraft system.
marker condition.
f. Set ATTEN controls (in 10- and 1-dB steps to
c. Push the yellow (1300-Hz) switch for a middle
attenuate the output rf signal.
marker condition.
g. Set LEFT/OC/RIGHT switch to LEFT position
d. Push the white (3000-Hz) switch for an inner
for a left-needle deflection, RIGHT for a right-
marker condition.
needle deflection, and OC for a centered needle.
e. Set PWR switch to OFF.
h. Push VAR pushbutton switch/lamp and note
that the lamp begins to blink, indicating vari-
5.18.6.1.2 Glideslope Check able mode has been selected.
i. Using the variable control knob (on LEFT/OC/
RIGHT switch), the aircraft glideslope indicator
a. Select the proper operating frequency by set- may be exercised to ensure against full-scale
ting the 334.7-108.1/334.55-108.15 switch to the meter needle hangup. When LOC is in the vari-
desired position. able mode, the LEFT/OC/RIGHT switch is in-
b. Set UP/OC/DOWN switch to OC position. operative and needle deflection is controlled
c. Set both ATTEN controls to 0 (zero). only by VAR control knob.
d. Set PWR switch to ON. j. Push VAR pushbutton switch/lamp and note
e. On-course indications should be given by the that the lamp stops blinking (variable mode
aircraft navigational system. released). The output rf signal is again con-
f. Set ATTEN controls (in 10- and 1-dB steps) to trolled by LEFT/OC/RIGHT switch.
attenuate the output rf signal. k. Push and hold 90 HZ switch for a 90-Hz flag
g. Set UP/OC/DOWN switch to UP position for an condition (loss of signal). Release 90 HZ switch.
up-needle deflection, DOWN for a down-needle l. Push and hold 150 HZ switch for a 150-Hz flag
deflection, and OC for a centered needle. condition (loss of signal). Release 150 HZ
h. Push VAR pushbutton switch/lamp and note switch.
that the lamp begins to blink, indicating vari- m. Set 1020 HZ switch to ON. The aircraft local-
able mode has been selected. izer receiver should provide a 1020-Hz tone
i. Using the variable control knob (on UP/OC/ output. Set 1020 Hz switch to OFF.
DOWN switch), the aircraft glideslope indicator n. Set PWR switch to OFF.
may be exercised to ensure against full-scale
meter needle hangup. When GS is in the vari- 5.18.6.1.4 VOR Check
able mode, the UP/OC/DOWN switch is inop-
erative and needle deflection is controlled only a. Select the proper operating frequency by set-
by VAR control knob. ting the 108.00/108.05 switch to desired posi-
j. Push VAR pushbutton switch/lamp and note tion.
that the lamp stops blinking (variable mode b. Set bearing select switch to 000.
released). The output rf signal is again con- c. Set both ATTEN controls to 0 (zero).
trolled by UP/OC/DOWN switch. d. Set PWR switch to ON.
k. Push and hold 90 HZ switch for a 90-HZ flag e. A 000-degree-bearing indication should be
condition (loss of signal). Release 90 HZ switch. given by the aircraft system. The VOR gener-
l. Push and hold 150 HZ switch for a 150-HZ flag ates the 000° radial of a VOR ground station
condition (loss of signal). Release 150 HZ when set to 000°; therefore, the receiver will in-
switch. dicate 000° from the station. This principle ap-
m. Set PWR switch to OFF. plies to all selected bearings.

f. Set ATTEN controls (in 10- and 1-dB steps) to an individual test signal can be obtained from the
attenuate the output rf signal. local flight service station. Refer to the Airport Fa-
g. Set bearing select switch to each position (045 cility Directory for information on VOT’s.
through 315). Aircraft bearing indications
should be given to correspond to switch set- Airborne and ground checkpoints consist of certi-
tings. fied radials that should be received at specific
h. Push VAR ±10° pushbutton switch/lamp and points on the airport surface or over specific land-
note that the lamp begins to blink, indicating marks while airborne in the immediate vicinity of
variable mode has been selected. the airport. If an error of more than ±4 degrees is
i. Using variable control knob (on bearing select indicated through the use of ground checks, IFR
switch), the aircraft bearing indication may be flight shall not be attempted without first correct-
varied by ±10 degrees for any switch selected ing the source of the error. Refer to the Airport Fa-
bearing. For example, for a switch selected cility Directory for the list of airborne checkpoints
bearing of 045 degrees, the aircraft indicator and ground checkpoints.
may be varied from 035 to 055 degrees. When
VAR control knob is turned clockwise, the gen-
erated radial is increased. If the receiver re- If a dual VIR-32 system is used, tune both receivers
mains set at the corresponding fixed radial to the same VOR ground facility. The indicated
(000°, 045°, etc), the needle will deflect to the bearing to the station shall not vary more than 4
left. Turning VAR control knob counterclock- degrees between the two receivers.
wise will cause the needle to deflect to the
right. 5.19 VIR-432 NAVIGATION RECEIVER,
j. Push VAR ±10° pushbutton switch/lamp and SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
note that the lamp stops blinking (variable
mode released). The output rf signal is again 5.19.1 Introduction
controlled by bearing select switch.
k. Push and hold 30 VAR switch for a 30-Hz vari-
able flag condition (loss of signal). Release 30 This procedure is concerned primarily with the
VAR switch. VIR-432 NAV receiver with the results read from
l. Push and hold 30 REF switch for a 30-Hz refer- the associated display devices, RMI, HSI, etc. Be-
ence flag condition (loss of reference control). cause the DME-442 shares the Nav control, many
Release 30 REF switch. of the procedures will stimulate reaction in the
m. Set 1020 HZ switch to ON. The aircraft VOR DME-442. Therefore, familiarity with the results
receiver should provide a 1020-Hz tone output. expected of the DME can save considerable time.
Set 1020 HZ switch to OFF.
n. Set PWR switch to OFF. 5.19.2 Receiver Self-Test
5.18.6.1.5 Procedure Using VOR Test Facility a. Apply power to the aircraft. Ensure all circuit
(VOT) breakers associated with the VIR-432 are
The radiated VOT test signal can be used to test pushed in.
the VIR-32 installation. b. If a flag condition exists a diagnostic code may
be displayed. A list of diagnostic codes is pro-
a. Orient aircraft at test site to 0-degree heading. vided in the Table 5-16. If a diagnostic code is
b. Tune NAV control to the published VOT fre- displayed, note the diagnostic code, and remove
quency. the appropriate unit, or both units, for bench
c. Verify that the HSI lateral deviation bar is fault analysis.
nearly centered and that the TO/FROM arrow
indicates FROM.
Note
d. Verify that the RMI VOR pointer indicates 170
degrees. Not all controls are capable of displaying
Two means of audio identification are used with the diagnostic codes. Therefore, lack of a diag-
VOT. A continuous series of dots or a continuous nostic code does not necessarily indicate
1020-Hz tone will be heard. Information concerning proper operation.

Table 5-16. VIR-432/433 Diagnostic Codes.
00 No fault found
*02 RAM test failed Unit unusable (µP problem)
*03 No received serial data sync word Unit unusable (CTL problem)
*04 No received serial frequency word Unit unusable (CTL problem)
*05 Invalid NAV frequency CTL may be tuned to DME channel
06 Delayed ILS output in wrong mode Unit unusable
*09 Port 1 I/O bus failure Unit unusable
*10 Port 2 I/O bus failure Unit unusable
*11 A/D fault Unit unusable
*12 A/D failed accuracy test Unit unusable
*13 +13 V dc power supply out of spec Unit unusable
*14 –13 V dc power supply out of spec Unit unusable
*17 VOR SMO not locked VOR receiver inoperative
18 AFC not locked VOR unusable
19 30-Hz reference signal low/missing VOR unusable
20 30-Hz variable signal low/missing VOR unusable
*25 Localizer SMO not locked LOC receiver inoperative
26 Localizer signal level too low LOC unusable
*28 Glideslope SMO not locked GS receiver inoperative
29 Glideslope signal level too low GS unusable
*32 Marker beacon failure Observe marker lamps for fault.
*40 No ARINC port A data received Check data source.
*41 No ARINC port A frequency received Check data source.
*42 No ARINC port B data received Check data source.
*43 No ARINC port B frequency received Check data source.
*44 No CSDB received by I/O microprocessor from instrument microprocessor Check data source.
*These codes trip the fault monitor output (J2-44).
5.19.3 VOR Self-Test to the VIR-432 will indicate approximately 0°

magnetic bearing.
a. Select a VOR frequency on the control unit (a 5.19.4 ILS (Localizer and Glideslope)
specific frequency is not required for test). A
strong station on frequency will not interfere a. Select a localizer frequency on the control unit
with the self-test. Rotate the OBS to approxi- (a specific frequency is not required for test).
mately 0°. b. Actuate self-test on the control unit.
b. Actuate self-test on the control unit. c. The NAV and GS flags will come into view.
c. The NAV flag will come into view. d. After approximately 3 seconds, the flags will go
d. After approximately 3 seconds, the flag will go out of view, the EHSI or HSI lateral deviation
out of view, the EHSI or HSI lateral deviation bar will deflect right approximately 2/3 of full
bar will approximately center, and the TO indi- scale and the glideslope pointer will deflect
cation will appear. The RMI pointers connected down approximately 2/3 of full scale.

Note f. Set ATTEN controls (in 10- and 1-dB steps) to

attenuate the output rf signal.
An interconnect strapping option allows an g. Set UP/OC/DOWN switch to UP for an up-
“up-left” indication to be obtained during needle deflection, DOWN for a down-needle de-
ILS self-test instead of the “down-right” in- flection, and OC for a centered needle.
dication. Some installations may have a h. Push VAR pushbutton switch/lamp and note
switch installed in place of the strap, thus that the lamp begins to blink, indicating vari-
allowing both “up-left” and “down-right” in- able mode has been selected.
dications to be selected. i. Using the variable control knob (on UP/OC/
DOWN switch), the aircraft glideslope indicator
5.19.5 Marker Beacon may be exercised to ensure against full-scale
meter needle hangup. When GS is in variable
mode, the UP/OC/DOWN switch is inoperative
The marker beacon assembly is tested automati-
and needle deflection is controlled only by VAR
cally when the self-test is actuated and either a
control knob.
VOR or localizer frequency is selected. Proper op-
j. Push VAR pushbutton switch/lamp and note
eration of the marker beacon assembly is indicated
that the lamp stops blinking (variable mode
by all three marker lights flickering at a 30-Hz
released). The output rf signal is again con-
rate. A 30-Hz tone will also be present in the
trolled by UP/OC/DOWN switch.
marker audio output.
k. Push and hold 90 HZ switch for a 90-Hz flag
condition (loss of signal). Release 90 HZ switch.
5.19.6 Ground Check l. Push and hold 150 HZ switch for a 150-Hz flag
condition (loss of signal). Release 150 HZ
5.19.6.1 Procedure Using Ramp Test Set switch.
m. Set PWR switch to OFF.
This performance check tests the complete VIR-432
installation from the antennas to the indicators. A
ramp test set such as the Collins 972Q-4 is re- 5.19.6.1.3 Localizer Check
quired. Operating instructions using the 972Q-4
(marker beacon, glideslope, localizer, and VOR
checks) are provided in the following paragraphs. a. Select the proper operating frequency by set-
ting the 334.7-108.1/334.55-108.15 switch to the
5.19.6.1.1 Marker Beacon Check desired position.
b. Set LEFT/OC/RIGHT switch to OC.
a. Set PWR switch to ON. c. Set both ATTEN controls to 0 (zero).
b. Push the blue (400-Hz) switch for an outer d. Set PWR switch to ON.
marker condition. e. On-course indications should be given by the
c. Push the yellow (1300-Hz) switch for a middle aircraft navigational system.
marker condition. f. Set ATTEN controls (in 10- and 1-dB steps) to
d. Push the white (3000-Hz) switch for an inner attenuate the output rf signal.
marker condition. g. Set LEFT/OC/RIGHT switch to LEFT for a left-
e. Set PWR switch to OFF. needle deflection, RIGHT for a right-needle de-
flection, and OC for a centered needle.
5.19.6.1.2 Glideslope Check h. Push VAR pushbutton switch/lamp and note
that the lamp begins to blink, indicating vari-
a. Select the proper operating frequency by set- able mode has been selected.
ting the 334.7-108.1/334.55-108.15 switch to the i. Using the variable control knob (on LEFT/OC/
desired position. RIGHT switch), the aircraft glideslope indicator
b. Set UP/OC/DOWN switch to OC. may be exercised to ensure against full-scale
c. Set both ATTEN controls to 0 (zero). meter needle hangup. When LOC is in variable
d. Set PWR switch to ON. mode, the LEFT/OC/RIGHT switch is inopera-
e. On-course indications should be given by the tive and needle deflection is controlled only by
aircraft navigational system. VAR control knob.

j. Push VAR pushbutton switch/lamp and note j. Push VAR ±10° pushbutton switch/lamp and
that the lamp stops blinking (variable mode note that the lamp stops blinking (variable
released). The output rf signal is again con- mode released). The output rf signal is again
trolled by LEFT/OC/RIGHT switch. controlled by the bearing select switch.
k. Push and hold 90 HZ switch for a 90-Hz flag k. Push and hold 30 VAR switch for a 30-Hz vari-
condition (loss of signal). Release 90 HZ switch. able flag condition (loss of signal). Release 30
l. Push and hold 150 HZ switch for a 150-Hz flag REF switch.
condition (loss of signal). Release 150 HZ l. Set 1020 HZ switch to ON. The aircraft VOR
switch. receiver should provide a 1020-Hz tone output.
m. Set 1020 HZ switch to ON. The aircraft local- Set 1020 HZ switch to OFF.
izer receiver should provide 1020-Hz tone out- m. Set PWR switch to OFF.
put. Set 1020 HZ switch to OFF.
n. Set PWR switch to OFF. 5.19.6.1.5 Procedure Using VOR Test Facility
(VOT)
5.19.6.1.4 VOR Check
The radiated VOT test signal can be used to test
the VIR-432 installation.
a. Select the proper operating frequency by set-
ting the 108.00/108.05 switch to the desired po- a. Orient the aircraft at test site to 0-degree
sition. heading.
b. Set bearing select switch to 000. b. Tune NAV control to the published VOT fre-
c. Set both ATTEN controls to 0 (zero). quency.
d. Set PWR to ON. c. Verify that the HSI lateral deviation bar is
e. A 000-degree-bearing indication should be nearly centered and that the TO/FROM arrow
given by the aircraft system. The VOR gener- indicates FROM.
ates the 000° radial of a VOR ground station d. Verify that the RMI VOR pointer indicates
when set to 000°; therefore, the receiver will in- 170°.
dicate 000° from the station. This principle ap-
plies to all selected bearings. Two means of audio identification are used with the
f. Set ATTEN controls (in 10- and 1-dB steps) to VOT. A continuous series of dots or a continuous
attenuate the output rf signal. 1020-Hz tone will be heard. Information concerning
g. Set bearing select switch to each position (045 an individual test signal can be obtained from the
through 315). Aircraft bearing indications local flight service station. Refer to the Airport Fa-
should be given to correspond to switch set- cility Directory for information on VOT’s.
tings.
h. Push VAR ±10° pushbutton switch/lamp and Airborne and ground checkpoints consist of certi-
note that the lamp begins to blink, indicating fied radials that should be received at specific
variable mode has been selected. points on the airport surface or over specific land-
i. Using the variable control knob (on bearing se- marks while airborne in the immediate vicinity of
lect switch), the aircraft bearing indication may the airport. If an error of more than ±4° is indicated
be varied by ±10° for any switch selected bear- through the use of ground checks, IFR flight shall
ing. For example, a switch selected bearing of not be attempted without first correcting the source
045°, the aircraft indicator may be varied from of the error. Refer to the Airport Facility Directory
035° to 055°. When VAR control knob is turned for the list of airborne checkpoints and ground
clockwise, the generated radial is increased. If checkpoints.
the receiver remains set at the corresponding
fixed radial (000°, 045°, etc), the needle will de- If a dual VIR-432 system is used, tune both receiv-
flect to the left. Turning VAR control knob ers to the same VOR ground facility. The indicated
counterclockwise will cause the needle to de- bearing to the station shall not vary more than 4
flect to the right. degrees between the two receivers.

523-0773276-104118
4th Edition, 12 May 1994
1st Revision, 15 September 1995

Pro Line II
Appendix
Table of Contents
Description Pages
Introduction 8-1
Environmental Qualifications Forms 8-1 through 8-8
Application for Aircraft Radio Station License — Form FCC-404 shown expires 7/31/94; 8-9 through 8-12
contact the FCC for correct form after expiration date.
NOTICE: This section replaces third edition dated 2 December 1991 and revision.
Page No Issue
* Title .......................................... 15 Sep 95

* List of Effective Pages.............. 15 Sep 95
* 8-1 ............................................. 15 Sep 95
8-2 thru 8-7.............................. 12 May 94
* 8-8 ............................................. 15 Sep 95
8-9 thru 8-12 ............................ 12 May 94

REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER IN- REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER IN-
NO DATE DATE/BY CLUDED NO DATE DATE/BY CLUDED
1 29 Sep 92 None
1 15 Sep 95 None
appendix
INTRODUCTION tion/paragraph from the DO-160B specification.

Table 8-6 provides the FAA DO-160C environ-
Table 8-1, Table 8-2, Table 8-3, Table 8-4, and Table mental categories for the RTU-870T and shows the
8-5 provide the FAA DO-160B environmental cate- conditions tested and the section/paragraph from
gories for the ADF-462/ANT-462( ) BIA-32, CTL-23, the DO-160C specification.
MND-640( ), and TDR-94/94D respectively. The ta-
bles show the conditions tested and the sec-
Table 8-1. ADF-462/ANT-462( ) Environmental Qualifications Form.
DO-160B EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATIONS

CONDITIONS
SECTION AND REV CATEGORIES OF CONDUCTED TESTS
1.0 ADF-462 Automatic Direction Finding System
Temperature and altitude 4.0 A2 and E1

Temperature
Low operating temp –55 °C (+67 °F)
High operating temp +70 °C (+158 °F)
Low storage temp –55 °C (–67 °F)
High storage temp +85 °C (+185 °F)
Altitude 21 300 m (70 000 ft)
Temperature variation 5.0 B
Humidity 6.0 B, Level 1
Shocks 7.0
Operational Tested at 6 g peak
Crash safety Tested at 15 g (11 ms duration)
Vibration 8.0 J and Y
Explosion 9.0 E2
Waterproofness 10.0 X
Fluids susceptibility 11.0 X
Sand and dust 12.0 X
Fungus 13.0 X
Salt spray 14.0 X
Magnetic effect 15.0 Z
Power input 16.0 B and Z
Voltage spike conducted 17.0 A

appendix 523-0773276
Table 8-1. ADF-462/ANT-462( ) Environmental Qualifications Form.

CONDITIONS
1.0 ADF-462 Automatic Direction Finding System (Cont)
Audio frequency conducted susceptibility 18.0 Z
Induced signal susceptibility 19.0 A
Radio frequency susceptibility 20.0 A
Radio frequency emission 21.0 Z
2.0 ANT-462A/B ADF Antenna
Temperature
Low operating temp –55 °C (–67 °F)
Altitude 21 300 m (70 000 ft)
Humidity 6.0 C
Shocks 7.0
Explosion 9.0 E2
Fungus 13.0 X
Salt spray 14.0 X
Magnetic effect 15.0 A
Audio frequency conducted susceptibility 18.0 X
Induced signal susceptibility 19.0 X
Radio frequency susceptibility 20.0 X
Radio frequency emission 21.0 X

Table 8-2. BIA-32 Environmental Qualifications Form.

CONDITIONS

Temperature
Altitude 21 300 m (70 000 ft)
Humidity 6.0 A, Level 1
Shocks 7.0
Explosion 9.0 E2
Fungus 13.0 X
Salt spray 14.0 X
Power input 16.0 E
Audio frequency conducted susceptibility 18.0 E
Radio frequency emission 21.0 A

Table 8-3. CTL-23 Control, Environmental Qualifications Form.

CONDITIONS
Temperature and altitude 4.0 A2 and F1

Temperature
Altitude 16 800 m (55 000 ft)
Humidity 6.0 C, Level 1
Shocks 7.0
Vibration 8.0 P, K, and S
Explosion 9.0 E1
Fungus 13.0 X
Salt spray 14.0 X
Induced signal susceptibility 19.0 Z
Radio frequency susceptibility 20.0 Z
Lightning induced transient susceptibility 22.0 K

Table 8-4. MND-640 Environmental Qualifications Form.

CONDITIONS
1.0 SDD-640/640A Sensor Display Driver
Temperature and altitude 4.0 F2

Temperature
Altitude 16 800 m (55 000 ft)
Shocks 7.0
Explosion 9.0 E1
Fungus 13.0 X
Salt spray 14.0 X
Lightning 22.0 X

Table 8-4. MND-640 Environmental Qualifications Form.

CONDITIONS
2.0 SDU-640A/640B Sensor Display Unit
Temperature and altitude 4.0 A2 and D1

Temperature
Altitude 15 200 m (50 000 ft)
Shocks 7.0
Vibration 8.0 P, K, and S
Explosion 9.0 E1
Fungus 13.0 X
Salt spray 14.0 X
Magnetic effect 15.0 A
Spurious emission 21.0 A
Lightning 22.0 X

Table 8-5. TDR-94/94D Transponder, Environmental Qualifications Form.

CONDITIONS

Temperature
Altitude 21 300 m (70 000 ft)
Temperature variation 5.0 B, –55 to +70 degrees C
Shocks 7.0
Explosion 9.0 E1
Fungus 13.0 X
Salt spray 14.0 X
Power input 16.0 Z

Table 8-6. RTU-870T Environmental Qualifications Form.
DO-160C EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATIONS

CONDITIONS
Temperature and altitude 4.0 A2 and F2

Temperature
Low operating temperature –20 °C (–67 °F)
High operating temperature +70 °C (+158 °F)
Low storage temperature –55 °C (–67 °F)
High storage temperature +85 °C (+185 °F)
Altitude 16 800 m (55 000 ft)
In-flight loss of cooling - (Not applicable)
Temperature variation 5.0 B, –20 to +70 °C (–67 to +158 °F)
Humidity 6.0 B
Shocks 7.0
Operational Tested at 6 g peak (11 ms duration)
Crash safety Tested at 15 g peak (11 ms duration)
Vibration 8.0 M and N
Explosion proofness 9.0 E1
Fungus resistance 13.0 X
Salt spray 14.0 X
Voltage spike 17.0 A
- power inputs
Radio frequency susceptibility (radiated and 20.0 V
conducted)
Emission of radio frequency energy 21.0 Z
Lightning induced transient susceptibility 22.0 K
Lightning direct effects 23.0 X
Icing 24.0 X





Proline Radios

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Proline Radios

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

7l_ed_Yi  9ecckd_YWj_edi

installation manual Part A

Collins General Aviation Division

TO: HOLDERS OF PRO LINE II COMM/NAV/PULSE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL

SEVENTH EDITION HIGHLIGHTS

RTU-42X0, CPN 822-0668-XXX, 822-0836-XXX, 822-0730-XXX, 822-0923-XXX

Changes made by this revision also include:

Retain this letter of transmittal for future reference.

installation manual Part A

Collins General Aviation Division

INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS

The material in this publication is subject to change. Before attempting any

SOFTWARE COPYRIGHT NOTICE

© 1997 Rockwell Collins, Inc.

All software resident in this equipment is protected by copyright.

We welcome your comments concerning this publication. Although every effort

RECORD OF ADDENDUMS FOR PART B

Installation 7/0 11 Apr 97 None

RWAvionics & Communications

NOTICE: This section replaces eighth edition dated 15 September 1995.

* Title ...........................................11 Apr 97

RETAIN THIS RECORD IN THE FRONT OF THE MANUAL. ON RECEIPT OF

REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER

1st Ed 16 Nov 83 None

2nd Ed 2 May 84 None

3rd Ed 5 Mar 86 None

4th Ed 21 Jul 89 None

5th Ed 2 Dec 91 None

6th Ed 29 Sep 92 None

7th Ed 12 May 94 None

8th Ed 15 Sep 95 None

9th Ed 11 Apr 97 None

1.1 INTRODUCTION 1.1.2 Pro Line II/4XX Equipment

1.1.1 Pro Line II Equipment

The Pro Line II digital radios are analog and CSDB

Revised 11 April 1997 1-1

Note 1.2.3 ALT-50/55 Radio Altimeter System

Revised 11 April 1997 1-2

COLLINS COMM/NAV/PULSE SYSTEM PRO LINE II

PART NUMBER 523-0772719-00711A, 7TH EDITION, DATED 10 APRIL 1997

Insert this addendum sheet facing page 1-3 of the

1.2.7 CTL-X2/X2A/22C/23 Controls

COLLINS COMM/NAV/PULSE SYSTEM PRO LINE II

PART NUMBER 523-0772719-00711A, 7TH EDITION, DATED 10 APRIL 1997

Insert this addendum sheet facing page 1-3 of the

The DME-42 transceiver is a remote-mounted, 1.2.12 RAC-870 Radio Altimeter Converter

Revised 11 April 1997 1-3

Revised 11 April 1997 1-4

COLLINS COMM/NAV/PULSE SYSTEM PRO LINE II

PART NUMBER 523-0772719-00711A, 7TH EDITION, DATED 10 APRIL 1997

Insert this addendum sheet facing page 1-4 of the

This addendum sheet adds RTU-870C information to paragraph 1.2.14.

COLLINS COMM/NAV/PULSE SYSTEM PRO LINE II

PART NUMBER 523-0772719-00711A, 7TH EDITION, DATED 10 APRIL 1997

Insert this addendum sheet facing page 1-4 of the

1.2.18 VHF-21( )/22( )/422( ) VHF Comm Transceiver

Revised 11 April 1997 1-5

Table 1-1. Equipment Covered.

EQUIPMENT PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION

RADIO ALTIMETER EQUIPMENT

Revised 11 April 1997 1-6

COLLINS COMM/NAV/PULSE SYSTEM PRO LINE II

PART NUMBER 523-0772719-00711A, 7TH EDITION, DATED 10 APRIL 1997

Insert this addendum sheet facing page 1-7 of the

7l_ed_Yi 9ecckd_YWj_edi